,izaj;js cuthf;fk; - biogem.orgbiogem.org/downloads/syllabus/pg syllabus.pdf · appendix-az82...
TRANSCRIPT
Appendix AZ81
kNdhd;kzpak; Re;judhh; gy;fiyf; fofk;> jpUney;Ntyp-12
M.A. Tamil with Computer Application
II Semester
,izaj;js cUthf;fk;
(Web Design)
Nehf;fk;: ,izaj;jsk; tbtikg;gJ> eph;khzpg;gjw;fhd mbg;gilfis mwpjy;. ,izaj;js tbtikg;ggpy; njhopy;El;g mwpT> fiyj;jpwd;> nrhy;td;ikj; jpwd;fis tsh;j;jy;.
myF: 1 ,izaj;js tbtikg;G mwpKfk; - ,izaj;js tbtikg;gpw;fhd Mjhu mk;rq;fs; - ,izaj;jsj;jpd; gf;fq;fs; tbtikg;G - ,izaj;jsj;jpd; Kjy; gf;f tbtikg;G.
myF: 2 ,izaj;js tbtikg;gpy; gf;fq;fis cs;nrYj;Jjy; - jfty; glq;fis cs;efuitj;jy; - tz;zq;fisf; nfhz;L tUjy; - fpuh}/gpf; tiuglq;fis ,izj;jy;.
myF: 3 gpw ,izaj;jsg;gf;fq;fNshL njhlh;G nfhs;s tbtikj;jy; (Hyber Link) - ,izaj;jsg; gf;fj;NjhL <nkapy; ,izj;jy; - jfty;fis ,izaj;jsj;jpy; gpuRhpj;jy; - ntw;W nry;fis cs; Eisj;jy; - nry;fis ,izj;jy;
myF: 4 Form gbtq;fspd; cjtpahy; ntg;jsk; jahhpj;jy; - Form vd;Dk; FwpaPL – gbtj;jpy; NubNah nghj;jhd;fis cgNahfpg;gJ - ,izajsj;jpy; Nfhg;igj; Njh;e;njLf;Fk; ngl;bia mikg;gJ – Gyk;fspd; njhFg;G kw;Wk; Fwpg;G gw;wpa FwpaPLfs;.
myF: 5 nra;jpfisg; ghFgLj;jp ntspapl /gpNuk;fis cgNahfpj;jy; - HTML cgNahfpj;J FRAME fis cUthf;Fjy; - FRAME fis xd;W Nrh;g;gJ – FRAME fis ,izg;gJ – HTML f;Fk; Nkk;gl;l trjpfis mwpjy; - ,izaj;jsj;ij ,izaj;jpy; ,izj;jy;.
ghh;it E}y;:
1. M.rPdpthrd; - ntg;jsq;fis ePq;fNs cUthf;fyhk;> fz;zjhrd; gjpg;gfk;> 23> fz;zjhrd; rhiy jpahfuha efh;> nrd;id – 600 017>njhiyNgrp – 044 2433682.
nra;Kiwg; gapw;rpf;F:
1. E fpwp];Nlhgh; tp[a;> - jkpo;top rhg;l;Nth;fy;tp> LOTUS MULTIMEDIA> No.2/6, 49th STREET, MUTHAMIZH NAGAR, KODUNGAYUR, CHENNAI-118.
APPENDIX-AZ82
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M. Sc. NANOSCIENCE Syllabus-I (for students admitted in 2012-2013 only)
COURSE STRUCTURE AND EXAMINATION UNDER CBCS SYSTEM
Sl.
No Subject Title Hrs/week Credits
Internal
Marks
External
Marks
Total
Marks
FIRST YEAR –THEORY (FIRST SEMESTER)
1 Basics of Mathematics and Quantum
Mechanics
5 4 25 75 100
2 Basics of Materials Science 4 4 25 75 100
3 Basic Biotechnology 4 4 25 75 100
4 Introduction to Nano Science 5 4 25 75 100
5 Microsystems 4 3 25 75 100
SECOND SEMESTER
6 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 5 4 25 75 100
7 Nanocomposites 5 4 25 75 100
8 Biomolecules 4 4 25 75 100
9 Molecular Cell Biology 5 4 25 75 100
10 Principles and Properties of Thin Film 3 3 25 75 100
FIRST YEAR- PRACTICALS (1&2 SEM)
11 Practicals- I Synthesis of Nanomaterials 4 4 40 60 100
12 Practicals- II Nanobiology 4 4 40 60 100
SECOND YEAR –THEORY (THIRD SEMESTER)
13 Characterization of Nano Materials 5 4 25 75 100
14 Semiconducting Nanomaterials 4 4 25 75 100
15 Nanobiotechnology 5 4 25 75 100
16 Carbon Nanomaterials 5 4 25 75 100
17 Nano Lithography 3 3 25 75 100
FOURTH SEMESTER
18 Magnetic Nanomaterials 3 3 25 75 100
19 Nanosensors and Nanodevices 3 3 25 75 100
20 Nanoelectronics 3 3 25 75 100
21 Nanomedicine and Drug Delivery 3 3 25 75 100
22 PROJECT 10 5 100
SECONDYEAR- PRACTICALS (3&4 SEMESTERS)
23 Practicals- III Characterization of
Nanomaterials
4 4 40 60 100
24 Practicals- IV Nanothin films 4 4 40 60 100
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS (THEORY, PRACTICALS & PROJECT): 90
Evaluation:
The evaluation for each course consists of two components that is internal and external
Theory; External: internal = 75:25
Practical; External: internal = 60:40
External
Theory
The external evaluation will be based on the examinations to be conducted at the end of each semester
Practical
Practical examinations will be conducted at the end of second and fourth semesters. Viva-voce examination will also
be conducted during the practical examination
Internal
The internal component consists of the following:
Theory:
The 25 marks for the internal component has been divided as follows;
3 compulsory test, out of which average of the best two tests = 20 Marks
Assignment = 05 Marks
----------------
Total = 25 Marks
----------------
Practical:
External: internal = 60:40
And the internal components of 40 marks is divided as follows:
For the periodical class assessment = 25 Marks
Record = 05 Marks
One test = 10 Marks
------------------
Total = 40 Marks
--------------------
There is no internal passing minimum. There is a passing mininmum of 50% for external and overall
components.
Project and viva- voce
The project report evaluation and the viva voce will be conducted by both the Extrnal examiner and the guide at the
end of the IV semester
The break up for the project work = 80 Marks
Viva voce = 20 Marks
-----------------
Total = 100 Marks
------------------
M. Sc. Nanoscience
Model question paper format for all theory papers
Time: 3Hrs Max Marks: 75
Answer ALL Questions
Part - A
Ten Questions : 10x1=10
Two questions from each unit
Part - B
Five Questions : 5X5= 25
Two questions from each unit (either /or type)
Part – C
Five Questions : 5x8 = 40
Two questions from each unit (either /or type)
FIRST SEMESTER
1. BASICS OF MATHEMATICS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS
Unit I Differentiation of vector functions, Integration – Green‘s theorem, Stokes‘s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem, Curvilinear co-ordinates – Rectangular, Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates – Grad, Div, Curl
and 2 operators. Vector space, Linear transformation - Inverse transformation, Orthogonal and unitary transformation - Schwarz inequality – Gram-Schmidt‘s orthogonalization process - Determination of eigen values and eigen vectors – Cayley Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of Hermitian matrices.
Unit II Beta and Gamma functions, Legender‘s, Hermite and Laguerre polynomials and Bessel functions- Generating function, Rodirgues formula, Orthogonal properties and recurrence relations.
Unit III
Limitation of classical physics – Plank‘s Quantum hypothesis- Einstein‘s Photoelectric effect- wave nature
of particle - The uncertainty principle - Schrödinger‘s Time dependent and independent wave equations -
particle in a box - Harmonic oscillator. Linear operator - Hermitian operator - Postulates of Quantum
mechanics - Simultaneous measurability of observable – Equations in motion - Linear harmonic oscillator
Unit IV
Klein – Gordan equation – particle in a coulomb field – Dirac‘s equation for a free particle – plane wave
solution – Negative energy states
Unit V
The variational principle – variation method for excited states – The ground state of Helium, hydrogen
molecule-Deuteron-First order perturbation- Harmonic perturbation - Transition to continuous states.
REFERENCE: 1. Introduction to Mathematical Physics, Michael T.Vaughn, Wiley Press, 2007. 2. Practical applied mathematics, Sam Howison, Cambridge University Press, 2005. 4. Quantum Mechanics, Aruldhass.G, Printice hall of India Pvt Ltd. New Delhi2004.
5. Mathew.B.M and Venkatesan.K ―A text book of Quantum Mechanics‖,
Tata McGraw Hill publication New Delhi 2007.
6. Ghatak and Lokanathan, ―Quantum Mechanics‖, Springer,2004.
7. Quantum Mechanics, Franz Schwabl, 2005, Springer 8 The functions of Mathematical Physics and Chemistry by Harry Hochstadt, Dover Publications,1987 9. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Dr.Robert J.Lopez,Addison.wesley,2001 10. Mathematical Physics, Butkov, Addition-Wesley, 1973. 11. www.pricegrabber.com /search_attrib_books.php /bkcat2 = 1989.
12. Quantum Mechanics, Jean-Louis Basdevant, Jean Dalibard, Manuel Joffre, 2005, springer 13. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, David J.Tannor, 2007, University science books
2. BASICS OF MATERIALS SCIENCE
UNIT I
The space lattices-Space lattices and crystal structures- Crystal directions and planes-Structure
determination by X-ray diffraction- The Bragg law of X-ray diffraction, The powder method, structure
determination
UNIT II
Inorganic solids-Covalent solids, Metal and alloys, Ionic solids, The structure of silica and silicates.
Polymers-Classification of solids, structure of long chain polymers, Crystallanity of long chain polymers.
UNIT III
The phase rule-single component systems-Binary phase diagrams-Microstructural cooling –The lever rule-
Some typical phase diagram-Other applications of phase diagrams. Time scale for phase changes-
Nucleation and Growth-The nucleation kinetics, The growth and overall kinetics.
UNIT IV
The energy gap in solids-Intrinsic semiconductors-Extrinsic semiconductors-Semiconductor materials-
Fabrication of integrated circuits-Some semiconductors devices -Terminology and classification-Magnetic
moment due to electronic spin-Ferromagnetism and related phenomena-The domain structure-The
hysterisis loop- soft magnetic materials and hard magnetic materials. Polarization- Temperature and
frequency effects-Electric breakdown- Ferroelectric materials.
UNIT V
Oxidation- Mechanisms of oxidation-Oxidation resistant materials. Corrosion-The principles of corrosion-
Protection against corrosion
REFERENCES:
1. Materials science and engineering - V.raghavan,Prentice Hall of India PVT, New Delhi
– 110 001, 2001.
2. Materials Science and Technology: Challenges for the Chemical Sciences, 2003, National Academies Press
3. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, William D. Callister, 2006, John Wiley & Sons 4. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, James F. Shackelford, 2000, Prentice Hall International (UK) 5. Introduction to Materials Science and Engineering, Yip-wah Chung, 2006, CRC Press 5. Crystal Growth for Beginners, Ivan V. Markov, 2003, world scientific crystal growth 6. Crystal growth Technology, K.Byoppe, Springer, 2003.
7. Crystal Growth: From Fundamentals to Technology, Georg Müller, Jean-Jacques, 2004, Elsevier crystal growth 8. Crystal Growth Technology, Hans J. Scheel, Tsuguo Fukuda, 2003, John Wiley and Sons Crystallization 9. New Developments in Crystal Growth Research, George V. Karas, 2005, Nova Publishers crystal growth/ Research 10. Material science for engineering, D.Callester, John Wiley &sons, 2006.
11. Thin films materials Technology, Sputtering Compound materials, Kiyotaka Wasa, makoto kitabatake,
Hideaki adachi, Springer, 2004.
3. BASIC BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I
Scope and Importance - Bio Technology in India - Need for future development – Achievements -
Biodiversity and Its conservation - Gene bank and Plant conservation.
UNIT II
Scope and Milestones in Genetic Engineering -Molecular tools used in Genetic Engineering - Gene
cloning – Ethical issues – Merits and Demerits of cloning – Transgenic organisms. Genomics and
Functional Genomics- Whole genome analysis – Human Genome Project – Proteomics.- Gene regulation
– Gene Therapy.
UNIT III
Cell and Tissue Culture – Basic Techniques in Recombinant DNA Technology – Application of plant
Transformation for Productivity and performance - Green House and Green House Technology.
UNIT IV
Structure and organization of Animal cell – Equipments and materials used for Animal Cell Culture
Technology - Applications of Animal Cell Culture – Stem Cell Culture. Environmental Bio Technology –
Environmental pollution – Treatment - Bio remediation. Microbial Biotechnology: Primary metabolites –
Secondary metabolites – Enzyme Technology – Single cell protein.
UNIT V
Introduction – Biological Databases – Sequence comparison - Bio informatics in Genomics. Scope and
applications of Bio informatics – Gene sequencing and uses of Bio informatics. Bio Mass and Bio Energy
– Bio gas production.
REFERENCES:
1. Genetic Engineering – An introduction to gene analysis and exploitation in Eukaryotes, S.M.Kingsman and A.J.Kingsman, Blackwell Scientific Publications, 1988.
2. Molecular cloning: A Laboratory Manual, J.Sambrook, E.F Fritsch and T.Maniatis, Cold Spring Harbour Laboratory Pres, 2001.
3. The condensed protocols from molecular cloning, Joseph Sambrook, David W.Russell, 2006, Cold spring harbour laboratory press.
4. Gene cloning and DNA analysis: An introduction, Terence. A.Brown, 2006, Blackwell Publisher. 5. DNA Science: A First Course in Recombinant Technology D.A. Mickloss and G.A. Freyer, Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory press, 2003. 6. A Text book of Biotechnology , R.C.Dubey, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2006. 7. Textbook of Biotechnology, G.R.Chhatwal, Anmol public PVt, LTD, 2002 8. Razdanm M.K. 2003. An Introduction to Plant Tissue Culture (2nd Edition) Science Publishers, Enfield,
USA. 9. Chrisatou, P. and Klee,H(Eds) 2004. Handbook of Plant Biotechnology 92 Volumesw). Wiley
Publishing, UK. 10. Chawala, P.K. (Ed).2002 Textbook of Plant Biotechnology. Oxford and IBH, New Delhi. 11. Molecular Biotechnology, 2nd Edition, S.B. Primrose, Blackwell Scientific Publishers 12. Milestones in Biotechnology: Classic Papers on Genetic Engineering, J.A. Davies and W.S. Reznikoff,
Butterworth-Heinemann 13. Chrispeels, M.J.2002. Plant Biotechnology: Genetic Aspects. Jones and Bortleft Publishers
International 14. Chopra,V.L.et al(Eds) 1999. Applied Plant Biotechnology.Science Publishers Inc.
4. INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE
UNIT I
Background to nanotechnology -scientific revolutions -types of nanotechnology and nano machines -atomic
structure -molecules & phases -energy -molecular and atomic size -surfaces and dimensional space -top
down and bottom up. Misnomers and misconception of Nanotechnology.
UNIT II
Basic problems and limitations -opportunities at the nanoscale -time and length scale in structures -energy
landscapes -basic intermolecular forces -interdynamic aspects of intermolecular forces -Evolution of Band
structures and Fermi surface.
UNIT III
Definition of a nano system -dimensionality and size dependent phenomena; Quantum dots, Nanowires
and Nanotubes, 2D films; Nano & mesopores –size dependent variation in Magnetic, electronic transport,
reactivity etc.
UNIT IV
Forces between atoms and molecules, particles and grain boundaries, surfaces -strong intermolecular
forces -Van der Waals and electrostatic forces between surfaces -similarities and differences between
intermolecular and interparticle forces -covalent and coulomb interactions -interactions involving polar
molecules and polarization -weak intermolecular forces and total intermolecular pair potentials
UNIT V
Forces between solvation, hydration; polymers at surfaces; adhesion - thermodynamics of self assembly;
micelles, bilayers, vesicles -bionanomachines - biological membranes.
REFERENCE:
1. Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies -Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff
Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press (2005).
2. Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and Applications, A.lnoue,
K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000)
3. Understanding Nanotechnology, Scientific American, editors at Scientific American, Warner Books
(2002)
4. Introduction to Nanotechnology by Charles P. Poole, Frank J. Owens, Wiley-Interscience (2003).
5. www. nanonet.rice.edu/intronanosci/
6. www.acclab.helsinki.fi/-knordlun/nanotiede/
7. Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Mark A. Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Mark Ratne,
Prentice Hall PTR; 1st edition (2002)
8. Nano : The Essentials' by T.Pradeep
9. Introduction to Nanotechnology' by C.P.Poole,Jr. and F.J.Owens
5. MICROSYSTEMS - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Processing of substrate materials and their crystallography (eg Si, GaAs and SOI), Thin film deposition
methods: Physical Vapour Deposition (Sputtering, evaporation, MBE, PLD etc), Chemical methods (CVD,
MOCVD, CSD, Solgel), Thin film sensors, rapid prototyping and micro ECM and EDM are covered.
UNIT II
Silicon fabrication processes. Silicon micromachining (wet), Dry etching technologies for metals,
semiconductors and insulators, Microsystems fabrication techniques, Manufacturing issues in MST,
Analytical models for MST, Practical classes.
UNIT III
Silicon MEMS fabrication technology, Advanced lithography (e-beam lithography, radiation for imaging
(UV,X-rays, synchrotron, masking issues).
UNIT IV
Polymers in Microsystems, Packaging of MEMS devices by anodic/fusion bonding, Pressure sensors and
packaging, MEMS performance and evaluation, Statistical analysis in an industrial fabrication line.
UNIT V
Introduction to non-silicon MEMS and related fabrication techniques, Si carbide MEMS, Biomedical MEMS
market and techniques. Micro-stereolithography, Integration of microsystems with electronics including RF
MEMS and the exploitation of Microsystems, Applications examples.
REFERENCES:
1. Ceramic Materials for Electronics Relva C. Buchanan, 2004, CRC Press 2. Handbook of Chemical Vapor Deposition: Principles, Technology, Hugh O. Pierson, 1999, William Andrew Inc, Vapor-plating 3. Materials & Process Integration for MEMS, Francis E. H. Tay, 2002, Springer
http://books.google.com/books?q=inpublisher:%22Springer%22&lr=& Two question from each unit
(either or type)source=gbs_summary_r&cad=0
4. Mems Mechanical Sensors, Stephen Beeby, Inc NetLibrary, ebrary , Inc, 2004, Artech House .
5. Fundamentals of Microfabrication, Marc J. Madou, 2002, CRC Press
SECOND SEMESTER
1. SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Nano outline -introduction -various preparation techniques -basic concepts of nanostructured materials -
nucleation: surface nucleation growth -grain size distribution -nano particle transport in low density media -
vapour nano phase thermodynamics -coagulation of nano particles, determination of grain size –aggregate
formation -mass fractal morphologies. Hydro thermal methods
UNIT II
Film deposition methods -introduction -fundamentals of film deposition - thermal evaporation -Spray
Pyrolysis, Flame Pyrolysis -molecular beam epitaxy - pulsed laser deposition -sputter deposition -chemical
vapour deposition -layer by layer growth and ultra thin films -chemical solution deposition -Langmuir
Blodgelt films.
UNIT III
Sol-gel processing -fundamentals of sol-gel process -sol-gel synthesis methods for oxides -other inorganic
and nano composites -the Pecheni method –silica gel -zirconia and Yttrium gel -aluminosilicate gel -
polymer nano composites.
UNIT IV
Types of nanotubes -formation of nanotubes -methods and reactants - arcing in the presence of cobalt -
laser methods -ball milling -chemical vapour deposition methods -Catalytic route -properties of nano tubes -
plasma arcing - electro deposition -pyrolytic synthesis -zeolites and templated powders layered silicates,
soft chemical & combustion methods, Graphene.
UNIT V
Synthesis of special nanomaterials: Introduction -Micro and mesoporous materials- Core-shell structures -
Organic-inorganic hybrids -Intercalation compounds -Nanocomposites and nanograined materials.
Microbial synthesis of Nanomaterials.
REFERENCE:
1. www.eng.uc.edu/-gbeaucag/Classes/NanoPowder.html
2. Nanoelectronics and information technology: Advanced electronic materials and novel devices (2nd
edition), Rainer Waser (Ed.), Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2005).
3. Recent Advances in the Liquid-phase syntheses if inorganic nanoparticles, Brain L.Cushing, Vladimir
L.Kolesnichenko, Charles J. O'Connor, Chem Rev.104 (2004) 3893-3946.
4. Nanocomposite science and technology, Pulickel M.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul V.Braun, Wiley-VCH
Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
5. Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and, Applications, A.lnoue,
K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000). '.
6. Nanostructures and Nanomaterials -Synthesis, Properties and Applications by Guozhong Cao.
2. NANOCOMPOSITES
UNIT I
Introduction of Nanocomposites: Nanocomposites- Definition - Nanocomposites past and present-
Nomenclature -Solids -Atomic and molecular solids -Role of statistics in materials -Primary , secondary and
tertiary structure - Transitions
UNIT II
Properties and features of nanocomposites: Physics of modulus - Continuum measurements -Yield -
Fracture -Rubbery elasticity and viscoelasticity - Composites and nanocomposites -Surface mechanical
properties -Diffusion and permeability -Features of nanocomposites -basics of polymer nano compos1tes
UNIT III
Processing of nanocomposites: Viscosity -Types of flow -Viscosity - Experimental viscosity -Non-newtonian
Flow -Low-viscosity processing –Solvent processing -Particle behavior -In situ polymerization -Post-
Forming -Hazards of solvent Processing -Melt, high -shear, and direct processing
UNIT IV
Characterization of nanocomposites: Introduction to characterization - Experiment design -Sample
preparation -Imaging -Structural characterization - Scales in nanocomposites -Texture -Electromagnetic
energy -Visualization - Physicochemical analysis -Characterization of physical properties -Identification -
\Mechanical -Surface mechanical properties.
UNIT V
Applications of nanocomposites: Nanocomposites -Optical, structural applications -Nanoparticulate
systems with organic matrices -Applications - Biodegradable protein nanocomposites -Applications
Polypropylene nanocomposites - Application as exterior automatic components -Hybrid nanocomposite
materials - Application for corrosion protection
Reference:
1. Thomas E. Twardow ski, Introduction to Nanocomposite Materials -Properties, Processing,
Characterization, DesTech Publications, April 2007
2. Boston New york Washing ton, DC. and Woodhead publishing Itd, England, 2006.
3. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj. Nanocomposites Pentagon Press
4. Nanocomposite Science and Technology Pulickel M. Ajayan , Linda S. Schadler, Paul V. Braun, 2006,
Wiley-VCH
3. BIOMOLECULES
UNIT I
Carbohydrates : Structure, classification, properties and functions; and heterpolysaccharides :
carbohydrate derivatives; Lipids : Classification, structure, properties and functions; Lipids with special
biological functions
UNIT II
Amino acids : Structure, classification, abbreviations, properties and functions; Peptides and polypeptides;
Synthesis of peptides and protein sequencing;;. Proteins : Properties, covalent structure, secondary,
tertiary and quaternary structure
UNIT III
Enzymes : Classification, mechanism of action, allosteric enzymes; multienzyme complex; Enzyme
kinetics : Basic concepts; Water soluble vitamins : Structure, distribution, interaction and biological
functions (mechanism of action not included); Fat soluble vitamins : Structure, distribution and functions
UNIT IV
Nucleotides : Structure of purine and pyrimdine bases, nucleosides, nucleotides; DNA : Structure and
Conformation; DNA : denaturation, degradation, modification, repair, recombination and rearrangement;
RNA : Structure, types and functions
UNIT V
Animal hormones : Structure and biological roles; Plant hormones : Structure and biological functions;
Plant phenolics: Classification and functions
Alkaloids : Classification and functions
Refernce Books
1. Principles of Biochemistry by Nelson, Cox and Lehninger
2. Biochemistry by G.Zubay
3. Biochemistry by Stryer
4. Biochemistry by Garrett and Grisham
5. Biochemical Calculations, Irwin H. Seigel, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
6. Biochemistry, DVoet and JG. Voet , J Wiley and Sons.
7. Biochemistry, D Freifilder, W.H. Freeman & Company.
8. Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and molecular Biology, Work and Work
9. A Biologist‘s guide to Principles and Techniques of Practical Biochemistry,
Wilson & Goulding, ELBS Edition.
Note: All texts are of latest editions.
4. MOLECULAR CELL BIOLOGY
UNIT I CELL ARCHITECTURE: Structure and function of cells – structure of prokaryotic and eukaryotic
cells; Surface appendages – Cilia and Flagella, Capsules, Pili, Fimbriae and slime layers; Cell walls –
Algae, fungi, bacteria ; Membranes of Gram positive, Gram negative bacteria and acid fast bacteria;
protoplast, spheroplast and endospores; Structure and organization of Membrane - Model membranes
(Liposomes), Glyco conjugates and proteins in membrane systems; Response to stress - active and
passive transport, transport channels and pumps;
UNIT II CELLULAR CONSTITUENTS: Cytoskeleton and structural components; Neurotransmission,
neuromuscular junction; Mitochondria – structure, biogenesis; Chloroplast – structure, biogenesis; Structure
of Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, ribosomes, mesosomes, lysosomes, vesicular transport and
import into cell organelles.
UNIT III NUCLEUS: Nucleus structure; Gross structure of chromosome; some specific gene sequences in
chromosomes, chemical composition of chromosomes, chromosome banding. The nucleosome, the
supranucleosomal structures; specialized chromosomes: polytene and lamp brush chromosomes. Nucleic
acid structure: DNA and RNA. .
UNIT IV CELL CYCLE: Mechanism of cell division: Mitosis; meiosis and genetic recombination; regulation
of cell cycle; factors and genes regulating cell cycle. Biochemistry and molecular biology of Cancer –
malignant growth, tumour suppressor genes and oncogenes; chemical carcinogenesis, hormonal
imbalances
UNIT V CELLULAR DEVELOPMENT: Cellular signaling; cell differentiation; gametogenesis and
fertilization; development of Drosophila and Arabidopsis – spatial and temporal regulation of gene
expression. Signaling pathways short circuited in cancer – RB, cyclins, CDK, CDKI, RTK, SMADs, Ras
cascade, NF-, receptors, hypoxia related and angiogenesis related pathways, extracellular matrix
signaling - cell to cell and cell matrix adhesion, gap junctions.
References 1. Molecular Biology of Cell, Alberts, B et al.
2. Molecular cell Biology, Darnell, Lodish, Baltimore, Scientific American Books, Inc., 1994.
3. Molecular and cellular Biology, Stephen L.Wolfe, Wadsworth Publishing company, 1993
4. Reproduction in Eukaryotic cells, DM Prescott, Academic Press.
5. Developmental Biology, SF Gilbert, Sinauer Associates Inc.
6. Cell in Developmental and Inheritance, EB Wilson, MacMilan New York.
7. Fertilization, FT Longo, Chapman and Hall
8. Molecular Biology of Steroid and Nuclear Hormone Receptors, LP Freedman, Birkhuser
9. Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual, J. Sambrook, E.F. Fritsch and T. Maniatis, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, 2000
10. Introduction to Practical Molecular Biology, P.D.Dabre, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., New York, 1998.
11. Molecular Biology LabFax, T.A. Brown (Ed.),Bios Scientific Publishers Ltd., Oxfor,1991
12. Molecular Biology of the Gene (4th Edition, J.D.Watson, N.H.Hopkins, J.W.Roberts, J.A. Steitz and A.M.Weiner, The Benjamin/Cummings Publ. Co., Inc., California,1987
13. Genes VI (6th Edition ) Benjamin Lewin, Oxford University Press, U.K., 1998
14. Molecular biology and Biotechnology. A comprehensive desk reference, R.A. Meyers (Ed) VCH
Publishers, Inc., New York, 1995
5. PRINCIPLES AND PROPERTIES OF THIN FILM - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Electroplating , Electroless Plating , Langmuir-Blodget films, Thermal growth , Chemical Vapor Deposition ,
Sputter Deposition , Molecular Beam Epitaxy . Atomistic Nucleation Processes, Cluster Coalescence and
Depletion, Grain Structure of Films and Coatings, Amorphous Thin Film
UNIT II
Pump Selection and Exhaust Handling, Rotary Oil Pumps, Roots Pump, Diffusion Pumps , Turbo molecular
Pump , Cryo pump , Sputter-Ion Pump , Pressure Measurement
Thermodynamics of Evaporation, Evaporation Rate, Alloys, Compounds, Sources , Transport , Deposition
Monitoring
UNIT III
Adsorption, Surface diffusion, Nucleation ,Surface energy ,Texturing ,Structure Development, Interfaces
,Stress ,Adhesion ,Temperature Control
Epitaxy applications, Semiconductor devices , Growth Monitoring , Composition Control, Lattice Mismatch
.Surface Morphology
UNIT IV
Gas Supply, Safety, Flow control, Contamination, Convection, Reaction, and Diffusion Evaporation
Hardware and Techniques, Sputtering, Sputtering Processes, Hybrid and Modified PVD Processes
UNIT V
Mechanical, Electrical, Magnetic and Optical Properties of Thin Film, Analysis of thin films
REFERENCE:
1. The materials Science of thin films, M. Ohring, Academic Press, Boston, 2002.
2. Electronic thin film science, K.N. Tu, J.W. Mayer and L.C. Feldman, Macmillan,
New York, 1992.
3. Thin Film Technology hand book, Aicha Elshabiri,Aicha Elsabiri-Riad,Fred
D.Barlao 1998 Mc Graw- Hill.
4. Handbook of Thin Film Technology, L.I. Maissel and R. Glang, McGraw-Hill,
New York, 1970.
5. Handbook of Thin-film Deposition Processes and Techniques By Krishna Seshan, Published 2002, William Andrew Inc.
6. Vacuum Science and Technology, P. A. Redhead, American Vacuum Society, Springer, 1994 7. Handbook of Hard Coatings: Deposition Technologies, Properties Rointan Framroze Bunshah, Christian Weissmantel, Published 2001, William Andrew Inc
http://books.google.com/books?q=inpublisher:%22William+Andrew+Inc.%22&lr=&source=gbs_summary_r&cad=0
8. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, William D. Callister, Published 2006, John Wiley and Sons. 9. Material science for enginnering – Van Vlack, Addision Wisley, 2002.
10. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R. Askeland , Pradeep Prabhakar Phulé, Published
2003, Thomson Learning Materials science.
6. PRACTICALS-I SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS
1. Synthesis of ZnS nanoparticles by chemical route
2. Synthesis of CdS nanoparticles by chemical route
3. Synthesis of oxide nanostructures/ nanocomposites by Sol-gel technique
4. Synthesis of BaTiO3 nanostructure by mechanical ball milling
5. Synthesis of Cu/Ag nanopartcle through Micellar route
6. Hydrolysis method of sample preparation
7. Sol-Gel method of sample preparation
8. Preparation of nanoparticles by co-precipitation method
9. ZnO nanopowder preparation by using NaOH as capping agent
10. Synthesis of TiO2 nano particles by sonochemical method
7. PRACTICALS-II NANOBIOLOGY
1. Quantification of proteins and sugars
2. Analysis of oils : iodine number, saponification value, acid number
3. Agarose gel electrophoresis
4. SDS-Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE)
5. Titration of amino acids
6. Colorimetric determination of pKa
7. Model building using space filling/ ball and stuck models
8. Reaction of amino acids, sugars and lipids
9. Nanomicrobial degradation of various xenobiotics (e.g. pesticides, organochlorines, pyretheroids, PAH)
THIRD SEMESTER
1. CHARACTERIZATION OF NANO MATERIALS
UNIT I
Electron microscopes -Scanning Electron Microscopes –Transmission Electron Microscopes -Scanning
Probe Microscopy -Atomic Force Microscopy - Scanning Tunneling Microscope -Scanning Non-linear
Dielectric microscopy - Nanomanipulator -nanotweezers –EDOX--XPS -ICP .
UNIT II
Mechanical characterization -modulus and load carrying capability of nano region/compression -micro
hardness -fatigue -failure stress and strain toughness - glass transition and relaxation behaviour -abrasion
and wear resistance, super plasticity- Nano indentation.
UNIT III
Neutron and X-ray diffraction -Debye-Scherer formula -dislocation density - micro strain -comparison of X-
ray and neutron powder pattern -the Rietveld for powder pattern -macro molecular crystallography using
synchrotron radiation -role for neutron scattering in nanoscience.
UNIT IV
Optics -photonics of nanotechnology -properties of light and nano technology-interaction of light with nano
systems -absorbance, Surface plasma excitation, Size dependent PL -nano holes and photons -imaging -
solar energy absorbents using nano particles -nano technology and day light -photonic crystals -wave
guides and control of light paths.
UNIT V
UV-Vis-NIR spectrometer, band gap measurement -FTIR spectrometer, principle and application -
Photoluminescence spectrometer, principle and application- force spectroscopy – biofunctionalized
nanoparticles for SERS and SPR.
Reference:
1. Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies -Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff
Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press (2005).
2. Nanocomposite science and technology, Pulickel M.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul V.Braun, Wiley-VCH
Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
3. www .eng .uc. edu/-gbeaucag/Classes/XRD/Neutron DiffractionatLN L. pdf
4. Scanning Probe Microscopy: Analytical Methods (Nanoscience and Nanotechnology)' by R.
Wiesendanger
5. Advanced X-ray Techniques in Research and Industries by A.K.Singh(ed.)
6. Transmission Electron Micrscopy of Materials by G. Thomas
7. Physical Principles of Microscopy: An introduction to TEM, SEM and AFM by R.F.Egerton
8. Instrumental Methods of Analysis (7th edn.) by Willard, Merritt, dean and Settle
9. Scanning Electron Microscopy and X-ray Microanalysis by J.Goldstein
10. Principles of Instrumental Analysis (5th edn.) by D.A.Stook, E.J.Holler and T.A.Nieman
2. SEMICONDUCTING NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Growth of nanocrystals -Growth of nanocrystals in glass matrices –Growth of nanocrystals in organic and
related matrices -Structural data -Influence of interfaces- Epitaxial growth.
UNIT II
One-electron -hole -pair states -Two- electron -hole -pair states –Many particle interaction.
UNIT III
Optical properties of composites -Surface polarization and charge separation -Coupling of electron -hole
pairs with phonons -Energy relaxation - Scattering at defects and interfaces- Carrier -carrier scattering.
UNIT IV
Localization, trapping and transfer- Kinetic models -Trap processes and nonlinear optical properties -
Electric field effects -Magnetic field effects –External fields acting as confining potentials.
UNIT V
Nanocrystals of III-V compounds -Spherical quantum dots in polymers and glasses -Quantum dots
obtained by deep-etching and inter diffusion –Quantum dots due to spatially isolated potential fluctuations -
Quantum dots resulting from self-organized epitaxial growth -Stressor -induced quantum dots -
Nanocrystals of indirect -gap materials -Theoretical description -Silicon nanocrystals and quantum
structures in porous silicon -Concepts of applications.
Reference:
1. Optical Properties of Semiconductor Quantum Dots by U.Woggon
2. The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors -An Introduction by J.H.Davis
3. Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies by M.Wilson, M.Simmons and B.Reguse
4. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhusan (ed.)
5. Handbook of Semiconductor Nanostructures and Nanodevices (Vol.1-5) by A.A.Balandin and K.L.Wang
(ed.)
3. NANO BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I
Self-Assembly of nanostructured materials – Nonascience – Nanobiology- Nanotechnology and
nonobiotechnology – cellular nanostructures – Cell surface layers- Molecular motors – Action fibers
UNIT II
Cancer detection/diagnosis via nanotechnologies and nanosensors - Biomimetic amplification of
nanoparticle homing to tumors -Polymer genomics: An insight into pharmacology and toxicology of
nanomedicines.
UNIT III
Introduction to challenges to macromolecular drug delivery -Nanocontaniner - Liposome nanocontainers -
Biopolymer nanocontainers -nanocapsules –Applications in drug and gene target delivery -Lipid-based
nanoparticles for nucleic acid delivery - Nanotechnology approaches for drug and small molecule delivery
across the blood brain barrier- Fluorocarbon nanoparticles as multifunctional drug delivery vehicles.
UNIT IV
Introduction to controlled fabrication of hierarchically branched nanopores, nanotubes and nanowires -
Integration of cell membranes and nanotube transistors - Manufacturing of nanochannels with controlled
dimensions using protease nanolithography- Controlled synthesis of nonspherical microparticles using
microfluidics -Introduction to bioelectronics and biosensing devices -Nano circuitry -Applications in tissue
engineering -Nanoprobes -Protein polymer nanomachines.
UNIT V
Imaging -Animal models: Live and in color- Sentinel lymph node mapping of the pleural space -A
biomagnetic system for in vivo cancer imaging -Quantum dots for live cells -In vivo imaging and diagnostics
-Luminescent nanoparticle probes for bioimaging.
Reference:
1. Nanobiotechnology- Concepts, Applications and Perspectives by C. M. Niemeyer and C. A. Mirkin ,
2. Biotechnology: Lessons from Nature by David S.Goodsell
3. Handbook of Nanostructured Biomaterials and Their Applications in Nanobiotechnology by H.S.Nalwa
4. CARBON NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Well known allotropes of carbon – Diamond and graphite – Their crystal structures – Distinguishing
features – Discovery of fullerenes (0 D Carbon nanomaterials) – Laser ablation and arc-discharge methods
- Structures of C60 & C70 – UV, IR, Raman and 13C NMR spectra of C60 & C70 – Cyclic voltammetric studies
of C60 & C70 – Higher fullerenes – Some chemical reactions of C60 - like reduction, halogenation, Friedel-
Crafts reaction, [2+2], [3+2] and [4+2] cycloaddition reactions.
UNIT II
Chemistry of CNTs – Functionalization of CNTs – Covalent chemistry at the open ends of SWCNTs –
Fluorination of CNTs and fluorine substitution reactions – Cycloadditions – 1,3-dipolar, nitrenes
cycloadditons, nucleophilic and radical additons – Non-covalent bonding – surfactant molecules adsorbed
on nanotube surfaces – Filling the inner cavity of CNTs by C60.
UNIT III
1D Carbon nanomaterials - Carbon nanotubes (CNTs) – Iijima‘s observation – MWCNT and SWCNTs-
Characterization by TEM- Methods of preparation of MWCNTs – Laser ablation & arc-discharge methods,
decomposition of hydrocarbons by catalysts, organometallics as sources, microwave method –Separation
and purification of MWCNTs – Synthesis of SWCNTs – Laser ablation, arc-discharge, HiPco methods –
Metallic and semiconductor SWCNTs – Properties – Electrical, mechanical and vibrational (Raman spetra).
UNIT IV
Novel nano-forms of carbon – Carbon nanohorns, cup-stacked CNTs, carbon nanotori, carbon nano-
onions, carbon nanobuds – Graphene (2 D Carbon nanomaterial) – Preparation – Exfoliation, from the tip
of graphite, reduction of graphite oxide and by the opening of CNTs – Characterization by Raman
spectrum – Mechanical properties, conductivity, Quantum Hall effect. Inorganic fullerene like molecules –
MoS2 & WS2 – Boron nitride nanotubes.
UNIT V
Applications of carbon nanomaterials – Fullerides as superconductors – Fullerene nanocar – CNTs in field
emission, shielding, FETs & logic gates – Hydrogen storage in CNTs and Fuel cells – Mechanical
reinforcement by CNTs – Nanocomposites of CNTs – CNTs in chemical sensors, catalysis – Analytical
applications of CNTs – Adsorption of dioxin, adsorption of substituted phenols from industrial wastes and
determination of their concentration – some commercial products – CNTs in cancer therapy – Hyperthermia
and carrier for direct drug delivery
References
1. C. N. R. Rao (ed.), Special Issue of Fullerenes, Indian J. Chem., A & B, 1992, May. 2. W. Edward Billiups and M.A. Ciufolini (eds.), Buckminsterfullerenes, VCH Publishers, New York, 1999. 3. Y. Gogatsi (ed.), Carbon Nanomaterials, C R C., Taylor & Francis, New York, 2006. 4. K. Tanaka, T. Yamabe and K. Fukui (eds.), The Science and Technology of Carbon Nanotubes, Elsevier,
Amsterdam, 1999. 5. T.W. Ebbesen (ed.), Carbon Nanotubes: Preparation and Properties, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL., 1997. 6. C. P. Poole, Jr., and F. I. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, JohnWiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey, 2003. 7. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials: Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. 8. L. Dai (ed.), Carbon Nanotechnology, Elsevier, 2006; 9. A. K. Geim and K. S. Novoselov, Nature Mat., 2007, 6, 183. 10. C. N. R. Rao et al., J. Mater. Chem., 2009, 19, 2457; A. K. Geim, Science, 2009, 324, 1530. 11. G. Park and R. S. Ruoff, Nat. Nanotechnol., 2009, 6, 183.
12. Y. Gogotsi (ed.), Nanotubes and Nanofibres, CRC, Taylor & Francis, New York, 2006. 13. J. L. Delgado, M. A. Herranz and N. Martin, J. Mater. Chem., 2008, 18, 1417.
5. NANO LITHOGRAPHY -ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Optical lithography: Contact and proximity printing -Projection Printing –Mask alignment, Reflection and
catadioptric projection -Refraction projection –Enhancement –overlay accuracies. Positive and negative
photoresists, UV -photolithography for systems of 100 nm -Nano designs for electronic circuits.
UNIT II
Electron Lithography: Electron optics -Raster scan and Vector scan –Electron proximity / Projection
Printing, Electron resists -Electron Beam Applications X -ray Lithography: Proximity printing -X-ray masks -
X-ray sources –Synchrotron radiation -X ray projection -X-ray resists.
UNIT III
Ion Lithography Focused ion beam -Point sources of Ion -Ion column –Beam writing -Focused Ion Beam
Lithography -Masked Ion Beam Lithography –Ion Projection Lithography. Lithography based on Surface
Instabilities: Wetting, Dewetting, Adhesion Limitations -Resolution and Achievable / line widths of each of
the above techniques.
UNIT IV
Nanolithography techniques High -resolution E-beam Nanolithography - Resist Exposure Metrics -High
resolution resists -Proximity Effects -Direct writing.
UNIT V
Proximal Probe Nanolithography: STM -AFM -Dip pen Nano lithography - Resists & Imaging Layers for
proximal probes -Langmuir -Blodgett Film resists - Patterned synthesis of nanomaterials -Self-Assembled
Monolayers Resists –Anodic Oxidation -Nanoscratching.
References:
1. C.Y. Chang and S.M.Sze, "ULSI Technology", McGraw-Hill Companies Inc., Singapore, 1996.
2. John N. Helbert, "Hand Book of VLSI Microlithography", Noyes Publication, USA, 2001.
3. James R. Sheats and Bruce W. Amith, "Microlithography Sciences and Technology", Marcel Dekker Inc.,
New York, 1998.
FOURTH SEMESTER
1. MAGNETIC NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Introduction -Magnetic fundamentals -Spontaneous Magnetization and Curie Temperature- Magnetic
Parameters -Stoner-Wohlfarth threshold –Antiferromagnetic materials -Memory Fundamentals -Magnetic
Storage Fundamentals.
UNIT II
Electron Transport in Magnetic Multi-layers -Spintronics -Spin Polarized Electron Tunneling -Interlayer
Exchange Coupling -Spin Relaxation in Magnetic Metallic layers and Multi-layers -Non-Equilibrium Spin
Dynamics in Laterally Defined Magnetic Structures
UNIT III
Particulate Nanomagnets – Geometrical Nanomagnets - Fabrication Techniques Scaling – Characterization
using Various Techniques – Imaging Magnetic Microspectroscopy – Study of Ferromagnetic and
Antiferromagnetic interfaces.
UNIT IV
Optical Imaging -Lorentz Microscopy -Electron Holography of Magnetic Nanostructures -Magnetic Force
Microscopy -Magnetic Data Storage -Introduction - Magnetic Media -Properties -Materials Used -Write
Heads -Read Heads
UNIT V
Magnetoresistance -General -in Normal Metals and in Ferromagnetic Materials -Future of Magnetic Data
Storage -Magneto-Optics and Magneto-optic recording -Kerr Effect -Faraday Effect, Magnetic
Semiconductors, Spintronics devices, noise reduction.
Reference:
1. Advanced semiconductor and organic Nano-techniques -VoL I Hadis Morkoc, Academic Press, London
(2003) ISBN 0125070616 -:1--
2. Modern Techniques for Characterizing Magnetic Materials Edited by Yimei Zhu, Springer (2005) ISBN
1402080077
3. Magnetic Microscopy of Nanostructures Hans P.Oepen and H.Hopster, Springer (2004) ISBN
3540401865
4. Ultra thin Magnetic Structures 111- Fundamentals of Nanomagnetism JAC Bland and B. Heinrich,
Springer (2004) ISBN 3540219536
5. Magnetic Materials: Fundamentals and Device Applications Nicola Ann Spaldin, Cambridge University
Press (2003) ISBN 0521016584
2. NANOSENSORS AND NANODEVICES
UNIT I
Micro and nano sensors -Fundamentals of sensors -Biosensor -Micro fluids -MEMS and NEMS -Packaging
and characterization of sensors -Method of packaging at zero level, dye level and first level.
UNIT II
Sensors - Sensors for aerospace and defense -Accelerometer –Pressure - sensor -Night vision systems-
Nano tweezers -Nano cutting tools- Integration of sensors with actuators and electronic circuitry.
UNIT III
Sensor for biomedical applications: Cardiology, Neurology and as diagnostic tool for other civil applications:
metrology, bridges, etc. -Biosensors - Clinical diagnostics -Generation of biosensors -Immobilization
characteristics - Applications -Conducting polymer based sensors -DNA biosensors –Optical sensors-
Biochips.
UNIT IV
Metal -insulator semiconductor devices -Molecular electronics - Information storage -Molecular switching -
Schottky devices -Quantum structures and devices -Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires.
UNIT V
Microscopic devices -Nanoscale transistors -Single electron transistors - MOSFET and nano FET -
Resonant tunneling devices -Carbon nanotube based logic gates -Optical devices -Connection with
quantum dots, quantum wires and quantum wells.
Reference:
1. Sensors: Micro and Nanosensors, Sensor Market Trends (Parts 1 and 2) by H.Meixner
2. Nanoscience and Nanotechnology: Novel Structure and Phenomena by P .Sheng(ed.)
3. Nano Engineering in Science and Technology: An Introduction to the World of Nano Design by M.Rieth
4. Between Technology and Science: Exploring an Emerging Field Knowledge Flows and Networking on
the Nanoscale by M.S.Meyer
5. From Atom to Transistor by S.Datta
3. NANOELECTRONICS
Unit-I
Foundation of molecular electronics: Charge transport in molecular conduction junction- Ac- Drawn
transport through wires- Negative differential resistance.
Unit-II
Electronic structure calculations for nano molecular systems- Ab-initio Non-equilibrium Green‘s function
formalism- Electron transport in molecular devices- DFT for molecular electronics- Single electrons
tunneling in small molecules.
Unit-III
Nano device: Diodes- transistors- rectifiers- sensors- DNA based devices- DNA chips and array devices-
Quantum dot cellular automata (QCA).
Unit-IV
Quantum dots- Quantum wires- Quantum rods- Nano tubes- Quantum transport in Nano tubes- Carbon
Nano tube Electronic and Optoelectronics- Nano processor- Nano computer- Architectures of molecular
electronic computers.
Unit-V
Spintronics- Introduction, overview, history and background- Generation of spin polarization- Theories of
spin injection, spin relaxation and spin dephasing- Spintronic devices and applications- Spin filters-Spin
diodes- Spin transistors.
References
1. Introduction to Molecular Electronics – M.C.Petty, M.R.Bryce, D.Bloor - Oxford University Press (1995).
2. Molecular Nanoelectronics: Analysis, Design and Simulation – J.M.Seminario – Elsevier (2006).
3. Nanowire and Nanobelts: Material, properties and devices (volume 1) - Zhong Lin Wang – Kluwer
Academic Press (2003).
4. Introduction to Molecular Electronics – G.Cuniberti, G.Fagas, K.Richter – Springer (2005).
5. Nanoscience, Engineering, and Technology – William A. Goddard, Donald W. Brenner, Gerald J.
Lafrate – CRC Press (2003).
4. NANOMEDICINE AND DRUG DELIVERY - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Prospect of Nanomedicine: History of the idea -The Biological and Mechanical Traditions -Nano-medicine -
Taxonomy -Bio-Pharmaceuticals - Implantable Materials -Implantable Devices -Surgical Aids -Diagnostic
Tools - Genetic Testing -Imaging -Nanoparticles Probe -Case Analysis -1) Resiprocytes - Mechanical
Artificial Red Cells -2) Using DNA as a construction medium
UNIT II
Nanosensors: Chemical and Molecular Sensors -Displacement and Motion Sensors -Force Nanosensors -
Pressure Sensing -Thermal Nanosensors –Electric and Magnetic Sensing -Cellular Bioscanning -Non-
invasive Neuroelectric Monitoring - Macrosensing -Acoustic Macrosensing -Electric and Magnetic
Macrosensing - Neural Macrosensing
UNIT III
Nanocarriers: Needs and Requirements -Nanoparticle Flow: Implications for Drug Delivery -Polymeric
Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers and Controlled Release Implant Devices -Genetic Vaccines: A Role for
Liposomes -Polymer Micelles as Drug Carriers -Recent Advances in Microemulsions as Drug Delivery
Vehicles - Lipoproteins as Pharmaceutical Carriers -Solid Lipid Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers
UNIT IV
Nanocapsules preparation, Characterization and Therapeutic Applications - Dendrimers as Nanoparticulate
Drug Carriers -Cells and Cell Ghost as Drug Carriers - Cochleates as Nanoparticular Drug Carriers -
Aerosols as Drug Carriers –Magnetic Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers
UNIT V
Nanoparticulate Drug Delivery to the Reticuloendothelial System and to Associated Disorders -Delivery of
Nanoparticles to the Cardiovascular System - Nanocarriers for the Vascular Delivery of Drugs to the Lungs
-Nanoparticulate Carriers for Drug Delivery to the Brain -Nanoparticles for Targeting Lymphatics –
Polymeric Nanoparticles for Delivery in the Gastro-Intestinal Tract -Nanoparticular Carriers for Ocular Drug
Delivery -Nanoparticles and Microparticles as Vaccines Adjuvants -Pharmaceutical Nano Carriers in
Treatment and Imaging of Infection
Reference:
1. Nano Medicines Edited by Dr.Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj, Pentagon Press (2006) ISBN 81-
8274-139-4
2. Nanoparticulates as Drug Carriers, Edited by Vladimir P.Torchilin, Imperial College Press, North Eastern
University, USA (2006) ISBN 1-86094-630-5
5. PRACTICALS-III CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS
1. Determination of band gap through UV-Vis spectroscopy
2. X-ray powder diffraction pattern analysis (Indexing, particle size determination, lattice
parameters determination etc for CdS nanoparticles)
3. Film thickness measurement using weigh method
4. Photoconductivity measurement (Dark and photo currents)
5. DC conductivity measurement at various temperatures with two-probe setup (Activation energy
estimation also)
6. DC conductivity measurement at various temperatures with four -probe setup (Bandgap
estimation also )
7. Dielectric measurement at various temperatures for a fixed frequency ( εr , tan and ac
determination)
8. Studies on thermal properties of nano-oxide materials through DSC & TGA analysis
9. X-ray diffraction pattern of nano-ZnO powder and thin films; determination of particle size
6. PRACTICALS- IV NANOTHIN FILMS
1. Electroless of deposition of Cu/Ni on glass substrate
2. Preparation of Cu/Ni thin film by using electrodeposition
3. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the spray pyrolysis method
4. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the sol-gel process
5. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the chemical bath technique
6. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the spin-coating process
7. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the dip-coating method
PROJECT
The research project should be completed and the Dissertation (Report) should be submitted for
evaluation. The project report is expected to provide clear answers for following questions:
(i) Why this particular investigation was selected?
(ii) How was the investigation carried out?(Describing the methodology used);
(iii) What are the results obtained? (Reporting the results obtained);
(iv) How are the results interpreted? (Discussing the results);
(v) What are the conclusions derived?
APPENDIX – AZ83
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.Sc., PHYSICS (CBCS)
(Effective from the Academic year 2012-2013)
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME & SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
Title of the paper
1. Classical
Mechanics and
Relativity
2. Mathematical
Physics-I
3. Electronic
Devices
Elective I
4.a. Renewable
energy sources
OR
4.b. Optoelectronics
and Lasers
Practical 1 -
Physics-I
5. Mathematical
Physics-II
6. Electromagnetic
Theory
7. Microprocessor
and Microcontroller
Teaching
Hours
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Theory/ Exam Internal External Total
Practical hours Mark Mark Marks
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
P 6 40 60 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
Semester
I
II
Credits
5
5
5
4
3
5
5
5
4
Elective II
8.a. Nonlinear
Dynamics and
Chaos
OR
8.b.Communication
Electronics
Practical 2 -
Electronics
Title of the paper
9. Quantum
Mechanics-I
10. Solid State
Physics
11. Statistical
Mechanics
Elective III –Project
Practical 3 -
Physics -II
12. Quantum
Mechanics-II
13. Molecular
Spectroscopy
14. Nuclear and
Particle Physics
Elective IV
15.a.Material
Science
OR
15.b. Physics of
Nano Materials
Practical 4 -
Computer
Programming C++
and Microprocessor
Total for all
semester
Internal Assessment Mark Components Theory Practical
The average of the best two tests from three 15
compulsory tests, each of one hour duration
Assignment 4
Seminar (15-20 minutes) 6
Experimental work 20
Record 10
Model test 10
Total Mark 25 40
29
Theory/ Exam Internal External Total
Practical hours Mark Mark Marks
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
Project 4 40 60 100
P 6 40 60 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
T 3 25 75 100
P 6 40 60 100
Teaching
Hours
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
120
Semester
III
IV
Credits
5
5
5
4
4
5
5
5
4
4
90
Question Pattern for M.Sc., Physics ( Theory) Duration: 3 hours
Maximum Marks: 75
Part A (10×1=10 Marks)
Two questions from each unit
Part B (5×5=25 Marks)
One question from each unit with internal (either-or) choice.
( The question from one of the units should be a problem (both choices) related
to the syllabus from the prescribed text).
Part C (5x8=40 Marks)
One question from each unit with internal (either-or) choice.
(The question from one of the units should be a problem (both choices) relevent
to the syllabus from the prescribed text).
Note:
The problems in Part B and Part C should be from different units.
Project work Components
Project Report ( Dissertation)
Viva-Voce *
Total
Group Project with maximum of 4 students. The dissertation topics will be based on special
papers or elective papers or topics of current interest. A Departmental committee will distribute
the topics.
* The project report evaluation will be done Centrally and Viva-Voce will be conducted by both
the External Examiner and the Guide at the end of third semester.
30
Marks
60
40
100
SECOND SEMESTER
5. MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS- II
UNIT I
Matrices: Introduction – special types of matrices – transpose – conjugate –transposed
conjugate – symmetric and antisymmetric matrices – Hermitian and skew Hermitian matrices –
Determinant – adjoint – orthogonal and unitary matrices – Inverse of a matrix – diagonalization –
eigenvalues and eigen vectors of the matrix – characteristic equation of a matrix – Cayley
Hamilton theorem (proof and related problems).
UNIT II
Complex variables: Analytical functions – Cauchy –Riemann conditions – line integrals –
Cauchy‟s theorem – Cauchy‟s integral formula – derivatives of analytic functions-power series –
Taylor‟s theorem – Laurent‟s theorem – calculus of residues – evaluation of definite integrals –
definite integrals of trigonometric functions of cosθ and sinθ (0∫2Π
F(cosθ, sinθ)-type only) –
certain improper real integrals (-∞∫+∞
f(x) dx-type only).
UNIT III
Special functions-II: Bessel function of first kind – generating function – recurrence
relations-Jn(x) as solution of Bessel differential equation – expansion of Jn(x) when n is half and
odd integer – integral representation – Laguerre‟s differential equation and Laguerre
polynomials – generating function-Rodrigue‟s formula – recurrence relations – orthogonal
property of Laguerre polynomials – associated Laguerre polynomials (basic ideas only).
UNIT IV
Fourer‟s and Laplace‟s integral transforms: Introduction – Fourier transform –
properties of Fourier‟s transform – Fourier transform of a derivative – Fourier sine and cosine
transforms of derivatives – Laplace transform (LT) – properties of LT – LT of derivative and
integral of a function –LT of periodic function – Inverse LT – properties of inverse LT –
application of LT to electrical circuits.
UNIT V
Numerical analysis: Introduction-numerical integration –trapezoidal rule –Simpson‟s
rule –solution of ordinary differential equations of first order –Euler‟s method –modified Euler‟s
method –Taylor series method –Runge-Kutta method -approximate solution of algebraic and
transcendental equations –Newton-Raphson method –method of iteration –Monte-Carlo
technique (basic ideas only).
BOOK FOR STUDY
1. Mathematical Physics, Satya Prakash, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
31
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists, Louis A. Pipes,
Lawrence R. Harvill, McGraw Hill Ltd, 1970.
2. Mathematical Methods for Physicists , George Arfken and Hans J. Weber,
VI Edition, Academic Press, N. Y.
3. Mathematical Physics, Eugene Butkov, Addison Wesley publishers. 1968.
4. Matrices and Tensors in Physics, A. W. Joshi, III Edition, New Age
International Publishers Ltd and Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi, 1995.
5. Complex variables, Murray Spiegel, Schaum's Outline Series,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1964
6. Complex variables and applications, J.W. Brown and R. V. Churchill-
7th
edition. McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 2004
7. Numerical Methods, E. Balagurusamy, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
company Ltd, New Delhi.
8. Special functions for Scientists and Engineers, W. W Bell. Dover,
New York, 2004
6. ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY
UNIT I
Electrostatics: Coloumb's law– Gauss' law- Poissons's equation and Laplace's equation
– Work done to move a point charge- Energy of a point charge and continuous charge
distribution – Methods of images – Electric field in dielectric materials – Induced dipoles and
polarizability- connection between polarizability and susceptibility – susceptibility, Permittivity
and dielectric constant of linear dielectrics
UNIT II
Magnetostatics: Lorentz force law– Biot-Savart's law and Ampere's law– Magnetic
vector potential Multipole . Expansion of the vector potential – Effects of a magnetic field on
atomic orbits – Bound current and its physical interpretations – Ampere's law in Magnetised
Material – Magnetic energy – Dia, Para, Ferro magnetism – Magnetic Susceptibility and
permeability in linear and non linear media
UNIT III
Electrodynamics: Electromagnetic induction – Faradays Law – Maxwell's Equation
Differential and integral form – Boundary conditions on field vectors D, E, B and H – Scaler
and vector potentials – Gauge transformations – Lorentz and Coulomb Gauge – Poynting
vector and poynting theorem – Maxwell's stress tensor – Conservation of momentum
32
UNIT IV
Electromagnetic waves: The wave equation for E and B – Monochromatic plane waves –
energy and momentum in EM waves in linear media – Reflection and Transmission at Normal
and Oblique incidence – EM waves in conductors wave guides– TE waves in rectangular wave
guides – the coaxial transmission line
UNIT V
Elecromagnetic Radiation: Retarded potential – Lenard - Wiechart potential – Electric
dipole radiation – magnetic dipole radiation – power radiated by a point charge – amour formula
– Abraham Lorentz formula for the radiation reaction – The physical origin of radiation reaction
BOOK FOR STUDY
1. Introduction to Electrodynamics, David J Griffiths. Prentice Hall of India. II Edition,
1989.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Classical Electrodynamics, J.D. Jackson., Wiley Eastern Publication. Second edition,
1975
2. Foundations of electromagnetic theory, J.R. Reitz, E.J. Milford and R.W. Christy.
3. Electromagnetic fields and waves, P. Lorrain and D. Corson. CBS Publishers and
distributors, 1986.
4. Electrodynamics, B.P. Laud, New Age International Pvt. Ltd. 1987.
7. MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLER
UNIT I
Evolution and Architecture of Microprocessors 8085 & 8086 : Evolution of
Microprocessors – Computers and its Classifications– INTEL 8085 microprocessor Pin out
configuration – Pins and their functions - Bus system–control and status signals – externally
initiated signals including interrupts- architecture – ALU – Flags – registers (general purpose &
special purpose registers). INTEL 8086 microprocessor – Pins description, Operating modes,
Pin description for Minimum mode and Maximum mode – Operation of 8086 – registers, flags,
and interrupts of 8086.
UNIT II
Instruction Set of 8085 and Assembly Language Programming: Software –
Assembly Language – Assembler, Assembler directives– Instruction set of 8085 : Data
transfer instructions, Arithmetic instructions, Logical instructions, Branching instructions,
Machine control instructions Processor cycles – Instruction & machine cycle, Timing diagram
33
& instruction format–Timing diagram for memory read machine cycle & executing an
instruction– addressing modes of 8085A – Assembly language programming using 8085A–
Sequence, branching and loop programming – Subroutines and ISR.
UNIT III
Peripheral Interfacing Devices and Techniques: Address space – partitioning,
interfacing – memory and I/O interfacing – I/O ports: non programmable I/O port INTEL 8212,
Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI) INTEL 8255, Programmable Interval (Counter) Timer
(PIT) INTEL 8253. – Data transfers: types of parallel and serial data transfer schemes – Direct
Memory Access (DMA) controller INTEL 8257– 8085A interrupt system: software & hardware
interrupts – interfacing, working and programming of PIC 8259 with 8085.
UNIT IV
Programming of 8086 and Microcontroller 8051 : 8086 Instructions – Data transfer
and arithmetic instructions, addressing modes of Intel 8086. INTEL8051:Architecture –
hardware features, registers, I/O ports, external memory, counter and timers, serial I/O,
interrupts. 8051 Programming: Instruction set, addressing modes, data transfer, logical,
arithmetic operations, jump/call instructions, interrupt handler.
UNIT V
Microprocessor System Design and Applications: Delays – Generation
of square waves of pulses – Interfacing of 7- Segment LED display – Formation of codes for
alphanumeric characters – Sensors and transducers in physical instruments – Temperature
measurements and control – Frequency and resistance measurements – Digital clock – DC
motor speed control – Traffic control system.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085,
Ramesh S. Gaonkar, III Edition, Penram International Publishing,1997
2. Fundamentals of Microprocessor and Microcomputers, B. Ram,V Edition, Dhanpat Rai
publications (P) Ltd. New Delhi, 2003.
3. The 8051 Microcontroller – Architecture, Programming & Applications, Kenneth J.
Ayala, II Edition., Penram International, India, 1996.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Microprocessor and its Applications, Nagoor Kani, RBA Publications I Edition,
Chennai, 2004.
2. Microprocessors and Interfacing- Programming and Hardware,
Douglas.V. Hall, II Edition., McGraw Hill, India, 1999.
3. The 8051 microcontroller and embedded systems, Mohammed Ali Mazidi,
Janice Gillispie Mazidi,Pearson education, India, 2001.
34
8. a. NONLINEAR DYNAMICS AND CHAOS
UNIT I
Nonlinearity, Linear and Nonlinear oscillators: Dynamical systems-linear and nonlinear
forces – mathematical implications of nonlinearity – working definition of nonlinearity – effects
of nonlinearity-linear oscillators and predictability– damped and driven nonlinear oscillators –
dissipative and conservative systems-autonomous and nonautonomous systems.
UNIT II
Equilibrium points, Bifurcations and Chaos: Equilibrium points – general criteria for
stability– classification-some simple bifurcations-saddle node, pitch fork, transcritical and Hopf
bifurcations-discrete dynamical systems – logistic map – equilibrium points and their stability –
period doubling phenomenon – chaos – continuous dynamical systems – Duffing oscillator –
bifurcation scenario – period doubling and intermittency routes to chaos.
UNIT III
Chaos in nonlinear electronic circuits: Linear and nonlinear circuit elements–nonlinear
circuits – Chua‟s diode-autonomous case – bifurcations and chaos – chaotic dynamics of MLC
circuit – analogue circuit simulation – some other useful nonlinear circuits – RL diode circuit-
Hunt‟s nonlinear oscillator– P-N junction diode oscillator–Colpitt‟s oscillator.
UNIT IV
Fractals : Self similarity – Properties and examples of fractals – fractal dimension-
construction and properties of some fractals-middle one third cantor set-Koch curve-Sierpinski
triangle – Julia set –Mandelbrot set – construction – similarity and differences-applications of
fractal.
UNIT V
Solitons: Linear waves-linear nondispersive wave propagation – linear dispersive
wave propagation – nonlinear dispersive systems– Korteweg de Varies equation –
solitary and cnoidal waves – Scott Russel phenomenon and KdV equation – properties
and types of solitons – applications of solitons.
BOOK FOR STUDY
1. Nonlinear dynamics, Integrability, Chaos, Patterns, M. Lakshmanan and S. Rajasekar,
Springer, Berlin, 2003.
35
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Chaos in nonlinear oscillator, controlling and synchronization, M. Lakshmanan
and K. Murali, (World Scientific, Singapore, 1997).
2. Deterministic chaos, H. G. Schuster, (Verlag, Weinheim, 1998).
3. Nonlinear oscillations, dynamical systems and bifurcations of vector fields,
J. Guckenheimer and P. Holmes, Springer, New York, 1983.
4. Nonlinear waves in one dimensional dispersive systems, P. L. Bhatnagar, Oxford
Univ. press, Bombay, 1979.
8.b. COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS
UNIT I
Amplitude modulation: Modulation index for AM – Frequency spectrum for AM –
Average power – AM receiver – AM transmitter- Single side band principles – Frequency
Modulation – Frequency spectrum – Average power – FM transmitter – Phase modulation –
Pulse amplitude modulation – Pulse Code modulation – Pulse Frequency modulation –
Pulse Time modulation
UNIT II
Synchronization: Asynchronous Transmission – Probability of bit Error in baseband
transmission- Matched Filter – Optimum Terminal Filters – Bit time recovery – Digital carrier
systems – Carrier recovery circuits – Differential Phase shift Keying (DPSK) - Hard and soft
decision decoders.
UNIT III
Propagation of waves: Ground waves – Sky wave propagation – the ionosphere – space
wave troposphere scatter propagation – extra terrestrial communications
UNIT IV
Optical Communication : Transmission in fiber – Losses in fibers- Dispersion – Light
sources for Fiber optics – photodetectors - Connectors and splices – Fiber optic communication
link
UNIT V
Keplers' Laws : Keplers' I, II and III law – Orbits – Geostationary orbits – Power
systems – altitude Control – Satellite station Keeping – Antenna look angles – Limits of visibility
– Transponders - Uplink and down link power budget calculation – Digital carrier Transmission
– Multiple access methods.
36
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Electronic Communication, Dennis Roddy and John Coolen, IV Edition, Pearson
Education
2. Electronic Communication, George Kennedy and Bernard Davis, IV Edition Mc Graw
Hill Publishing company Limited
3. Fiber Optic Communications, Joseph C Palais, McGraw Hill Publishing company
Limited
THIRD SEMESTER
9. QUANTUM MECHANICS - I UNIT I
The Schrodinger wave equation: Development of the wave equation- Travelling
harmonic waves - The one dimensional wave equation - Interpretation of the wave function -
normalization-Probability current density- Expectation values- Ehrenfest's theorem Energy
Eigen functions - One dimensional square well potential.
UNIT II
Eigen functions and Eigen values: Interpretative postulates and energy Eigen functions
- motion of a free wave packet in one dimension. Discrete Eigen valves (bound states)- Linear
Harmonic oscillator - Spherically Symmetric potential in three dimension.
UNIT III
Continuous Eigen values: One dimensional square potential barrier - Scattering
coefficients - collisions in three dimensions - scattering cross section - asymmetric behaviour -
scattering by spherically symmetric potentials - scattering by a perfectly rigid sphere -
scattering by a square well potential.
UNIT IV
Matrix formulation of Quantum Mechanics : Transformation theory -
Transformation of Hamiltonian with W - Transformation of Hamiltonian with U,
Transformation of Hamiltonian with V - Dirac's bra and ket notation - Equations of Motion -
matrix theory of the linear Harmonic Oscillator.
UNIT V
Symmetry in Quantum mechanics : Rotation, angular momentum and unitary groups -
Proper rotation group – infinitesimal rotations – spin of vector particle – Commutation relation
for the generators – Choice of representation - Angular momentum matrices - Combination of
angular momentum states and tensor operation – Clebsch Gordan coefficients.
BOOK OF STUDY
1. Quantum Mechanics, L.I. Schiff, III Edition, McGraw Hill, 1968
( Sections: 6, 7, 8, 9,10,12,13,14,17,18,19,23,24,25,27,28 )
37
BOOKS OF REFERENCE
1. Quantum Mechanics, Eugen Merzbacher III Edition, John Wiley, 2004
2. Modern Quantum Mechanics, J.J. Sakurai, Addison-Wesley, 1994
3. Quantum Mechanics, P.J.E.Peebles, Prentice – Hall of India, 2001.
4. Introductory Quantum Mechanics, Richard L.Liboff, IV Edition,
Pearson Education, 2003.
10. SOLID STATE PHYSICS
UNIT I
Reciprocal Lattice and Energy Bands : Diffraction of waves by crystals -Bragg‟s
law– scattered wave amplitude – reciprocal lattice vectors – Brillouin zones– Fourier analysis
of the basis – Quasi crystals – Nearly free electron model –Bloch function – Kronig Penny
model – wave equation of electron in a Periodic potential – Number of orbitals in a band.
UNIT II
Phonons and Crystals Vibrations : Vibration of crystals with mono atomic basis –
Two atoms per primitive basis - Quantisation of elastic waves – Phonon momentum –
inelastic scattering by phonons – Phonon heat capacity – Density of states in one and
three dimensions – Debye model for density of states – Einstein model of the density of
states – Thermal conductivity –Thermal resistivity of phonon gas – Umklapp process.
UNIT III
Free Electron Fermi Gas and Fermi Surfaces : Energy levels in one dimension –
Effect of temperature on the Fermi Dirac distribution – Free electron gas in three
dimension – heat capacity of the electron gas – Electrical conductivity and ohm‟s law –
motion in magnetic fields – Fermi surface – construction – calculation of energy bands –
Wigner Seitz method – De Haas-van Alphen effect – extremal orbits.
UNIT IV
Dia, Para and Ferromagnetism : Langevin‟s diamagnetic equation – Quantum theory
of diamagnetism and paramagnetism – Hund‟s rule – Paramagnetic susceptibility of
conduction electrons –Ferromagnetic order – magnons – Ferrimagnetic order –
Antiferromagnetic order – Ferromagnetic domains.
UNIT V
Surface and Interface Physics: Lattice vacancies – Diffusion -Colour centres – Shear
strength of single crystals – slip – dislocations – Burgers vectors – Low angle grain
boundaries – Dislocation densities – Strength of alloys – surface crystallography – surface
electronic structure – magneto resistance in a two dimensional channel – PN junctions –
rectification – solar cells and photo voltaic detectors – Schottky barrier.
38
BOOK OF STUDY
1. Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel, VII Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1996. (Chapters: 2,4,5,6,7,9,14,15,18,19,20 )
BOOKS OF REFERENCE
1. Elementary Solid State Physics, M. Ali Omar, Pearson Education, 1999.
2. Introductory Solid State Physics, H. P. Myres, II Edition, Taylor and Francis Ltd,
London 1989.
11. STATISTICAL MECHANICS UNIT I
Introduction : Objectives of Statistical Mechanics – macrostates, microstates, phase
space and ensembles – Ergodic hypothesis – postulate of equal a priori probability and equality
of ensemble average and time average - Boltzmann's postulate of entropy – Counting the number
of microstates in phase space – Entropy of ideal gas: Sackur – Tetrode equation and Gibbs'
paradox – Liouville Theorem.
UNIT II
Canonical Ensemble : System in contact with a heat reservoir – expression of entropy,
canonical partition function – Helmholtz free energy, fluctuation of internal energy – Grand
Canonical ensemble – System in contact with a particle reservoir – chemical potential – grand
canonical partition function and grand potential – fluctuation of particle number – Chemical
potential of ideal gas.
UNIT III
Quantum Statistical Mechanics : Mean field theory and Vander Wall's equation of state,
Density matrix – Quantum Liouville theorem – Density matrices f or microcanonical, canonical
and grand canonical systems – Simple examples of density matrices – one electron in a
magnetic field – particle in a box.
UNIT IV
Identical Particles : Bose Einstein and Fermi Dirac distributions – Equation of state –
Bose condensation – Equation of state of ideal Fermi gas – Fermi gas at finite time – Ising
model – Partition function for one dimensional case – Chemical equilibrium and Saha ionisation
formula.
UNIT V
Phase Transitions : first order and continuous – critical components and scaling
relations – Calculation of exponents from mean field theory and Landau's theory – upper critical
dimension.
39
BOOK OF STUDY
1. Statistical Mechanics, Satya Prakash, Kedar Nath Ram Nath Publication, Delhi, 2009
BOOKS OF REFERENCE
1. Fundamentals of Statistical and thermal Physics, F.Reif, McGraw-Hill, International
Edition, 1985
2. Statistical Mechanics, R.K.Pathira, Bufferworgh Heinemann, II Edition
3. Statistical Mechanics, K.Huang, John Willey & Sons, II Edition
4. Statistical and Thermal Physics, Loknathan and Gambhir, Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt.Lt.2007
FOURTH SEMESTER
12. QUANTUM MECHANICS- II UNIT I
Approximation Methods for bound states : Stationary Perturbation theory – Non
degenerate case – degenerate case – Zeeman effect without electron spin – first order Stark
effect in hydrogen – Variation method – Ground state of helium – Vander Waals interaction –
perturbation calculation – variation calculation.
UNIT II
The WKB Approximation : Classical limit – Tunnelling through a barrier – Time
dependent perturbation theory – Transition probability – adiabatic approximation – sudden
approximation – disturbance of an oscillator.
UNIT III
Identical Particles and Spin : Identical particles – Symmetric and anti symmetric wave
functions – Construction from unsymmetrized functions – distinguishability of identical
particles – The exclusion principle – Connection with statistical mechanics – Collisions of
identical particles – Spin angular momentum – electron spin functions.
UNIT IV
Semiclassical Treatment of Radiation : Absorption and induced emission – Maxwell's
equations – Transition probability – Electric dipole transitions – Forbidden transition –
Spontaneous emission – asymptotic form – angular momentum – Planck distribution formula.
UNIT V
Relativistic Wave Equations : Schrodinger's Relativistic Equations – Electromagnetic
potentials – Energy levels in a Coulomb field – Dirac's Relativistic Equation – Free particle
solutions – Charge and current densities – Electromagnetic potentials – Spin and angular
momentum – Negative energy states.
40
BOOK OF STUDY
1. Schiff, Quantum Mechanics, III Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 1968
( Sections: 31,32,34,35,40,41,44,45,51,52,53 )
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Quantum Mechanics, Eugen Merzbacher III edition, John Wiley, 2004
2. Advanced Quantum mechanics – J. Sakurai
3. Quantum Physics III edition S. Gasiorowicz, II edition, John Wiley, 1996
4. J.L. Powell and B. Crasemann, Quantum Mecahanics
5. P.M. Mathews and K.Venkatesan, A text book of Quantum Mechanics
13. MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY UNIT I
Microwave Spectroscopy : Classification of molecules – Rotational spectra of rigid
diatomic molecule – Isotope effect in rotational spectra – intensity of rotational lines – non rigid
rotator – linear poly atomic molecules– symmetric molecules– asymmetric molecules –
Microwave spectrometer – information derived from rotational spectra.
UNIT II
Infrared Spectroscopy : Vibrational energy of a diatomic molecule – selection rules -
vibrating diatomic molecule – diatomic vibrating rotator-asymmetry of vibration– vibration
band– rotational vibrational spectra of polyatomic molecules– linear molecules– symmetric top
molecules– information derived from vibrational spectra.
UNIT III
Raman Spectroscopy : Theory of Raman scattering – classical theory– quantum theory –
rotational Raman spectra – Linear molecules – symmetric top molecules – vibrational Raman
spectra– Raman spectrometer– Hyper Raman effect– classical treatment of hyper Raman effect–
stimulated Raman effect– Inverse Raman scattering– CARS– PARS– multi photon process.
UNIT IV
Electronic Spectroscopy : Vibrational coarse structure – vibrational analysis of band
system - Deslandres table – progression and sequences – Franck Condon principle-rotational fine
structure of electronic vibrational spectra– The Fortrat parabola– dissociation – predissociation –
photoelectron spectroscopy – principle– instrumentation.
UNIT V
NMR, ESR, and NQR: NMR – Magnetic properties of nuclei – resonance condition –
relaxation process – Bloch equations – chemical shift – NMR instrumentation. ESR – Principle–
ESR spectrometer – Hyperfine structure – ESR spectrum of Hydrogen atom – ESR spectra of
free radicals in solution. NQR – The Quadrupole nucleus – principle – transitions for axially
symmetric systems – transitions for non axially symmetric systems – NQR instrumentation.
41
BOOK OF STUDY
1. Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy, G. Aruldhas, II Edition, Prentice-Hall of
India, Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi-110001, 2007.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Colin N. Banwell and Elaine M. McCash, IV Ed.,
Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004
2. Spectroscopy, G. R. Chatwal and S. K. Anand, Himalaya publishing house, New Delhi,
2002.
14. NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS
UNIT I
Nuclear Models : Liquid Drop Model – Weizsacker‟s Mass formula – Mass Parabola –
Nuclear stability –Bohr-Wheeler theory of Nuclear Fission –Magic numbers – Evidence for
magic numbers – Shell model – Spin orbit coupling mode –angular momentum and parity of
nuclear ground states – Magnetic moment and Schmitt lines – Collective model of Bohr.
UNIT II
Nuclear Decay: Gamow‟s theory of alpha decay – Fermi theory of beta decay–Beta
Spectrum – Fermi and Gamow – Teller selection rules – Neutrino hypothesis – Parity
violation – Multipole radiation – Selection rules – Internal conversion – Nuclear isomerism –
Disintegration energy Calculation for alpha, beta and gamma decay.
UNIT III
Nuclear forces: Ground state of Deuteron– Excited state of Deuteron – Magnetic moment
and quadruple moment of Deuteron–Non central Tensor Forces–Meson theory of nuclear forces–
n-p scattering at low energies–scattering length– phase shift analysis – spin dependence – shape
independent effective range theory of n-p scattering – p-p scattering at low energies
UNIT IV
Nuclear Interaction and Nuclear Reactors: Types of nuclear reactions – Nuclear reaction
kinematics – Compound nuclear theory – Reciprocity theorem – Resonance Scattering – Breit-
Wigner one level formula – Classification of Neutrons – Neutron Sources – Neutron Diffusion –
Neutron current density – leakage – Fermi age Equation – Four factor formula – Critical size of a
reactor – reactor buckling – Classification of Nuclear reactor based on fuel and moderator –
thermal, Power, research, breeder and PHWR- Reactors .
42
UNIT V
Elementary Particles : Classification of elementary particles – Particle interactions –
Symmetry and conservation laws – Leptons and Hadrons – C.P.T theorem – Quark Model –
Gellmann-Okubo mass formula – SU (3) multiplet – Meson Octet-Baryon Octet and baryon
decouplet – Bosons.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Nuclear Physics, D. C Tayal, Himalaya Publications.
2. Elements of Nuclear Physics, M. C. Pandia and R. P. S Yadav Kedarnath.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Concepts of Nuclear Physics, Bernard L Cohen, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
2. Nuclear Physics an Introduction, S. B. Patel, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
3. Nuclear Physics, R. R Roy and B. P. Nigam. New Age International Ltd.
15. a. MATERIAL SCIENCE UNIT I
Crystalline Materials: Introduction – Crystal symmetry – simple crystal structures –
Polymorphism and Allotropy – Crystal directions-crystal imperfections – Structure
determination by X-ray diffraction – Bragg‟s law-production of X-rays – determination of
lattice parameters (Bragg‟s X-ray spectrometer method) – The Laue method– The powder
method – The rotating crystal method.
UNIT II
Conducting Materials: Introduction – The classical free electron theory – Wiedemann-
Franz law – The quantum free electron theory – Fermi distribution function – density of
energy states – electrons in a periodic potential – conductors – High resistivity materials –
superconductivity– General features – Effects of magnetic field – The Meissner effect –
Thermal properties – London equation – Penetration depth – BCS theory – Josephson
effect.
UNIT III
Semiconducting Materials : Introduction – Elemental intrinsic semiconductors –
Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductor – Electrical conductivity – Extrinsic
semiconductor – Carrier concentration in N- type and P-type semiconductors – Variation of
carrier concentration with temperature. Direct and indirect band gap semiconductors-
semiconductor materials – Hall effect - applications.
43
UNIT IV
Dielectric Materials : Fundamental definitions - Measurement of relative dielectric
constant - Various polarization process - Electronic polarization - Ionic polarization -
Orientational polarization – Space - charge polarization – frequency effect on polarization –
Dielectric loss - Internal field - Lorentz method - Clausius-Mossoti relation - dielectric break
down – required qualities of good insulating materials - classification – applications.
UNIT V
Optical and Nano Materials : Luminescence – photoluminescence – Cathode-
luminescence - Electroluminescence – injection luminescence – P-N-Junction theory – P-N-
Junction as a light source - Light emitting diode - LED materials - construction – Liquid
crystal display - characteristics - action – photo detectors - photo detective materials –
Nanophase materials- Synthesis- variation of physical properties with geometry.
BOOK FOR STUDY
1. Material Science, P. K. Palanisamy, II Edition, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd,
Chennai, 2007. ( Chapters: 1,2,3,4,5,6 )
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Material Science and Engineering, V. Raghavan, IV Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi – 110001, 2001
2. Material Science, Dr. M. Arumugam, Anuradha agencies, Vidayalkaruppur,
Kumbakonam - 612 605.
15. b. PHYSICS OF NANO MATERIALS
UNIT I
Nanostructures & Structural Characterization : History – background – nanoscale in
one dimension, two dimensions, three dimensions – Synthesis of oxide nanoparticles
(Sol-gel processing), metallic nanoparticles: semiconductor nanoparticles, fabrication of core –
shell nanostructures – aerosol synthesis – gas phase synthesis of nanoparticles – Structural
characterization – X-ray diffraction – STM, Atomic force microscopy, properties of nano
materials.
UNIT II
Carbon Nanotubes : Carbon allotropes – types of carbon nanotubes – graphene sheet to
single walled carbon nanotubes – electronic structure of carbon nanotubes – synthesis of carbon
nanotubes: electric arc discharge method – laser method – electrolysis – pyrolysis of
hydrocarbons – Fluidised bed CVD method – solar production of CNT – purification methods –
properties – filling of CNT – fullerene – purification – properties – application of CNT
44
UNIT III
Quantum Heterostructures: Introduction – heterostructure – growth of heterostructure:
molecular beam epitaxy – metal organic chemical vapour deposition – heterojunction band
alignment – quantum well – superlattice – low dimensional system -– doped heterostructures:
modulation doping – quantum wells in heterostructures – effective mass theory in
heterostructures – application of effective mass theory in quantum wells in heterostructures –
optical confinement – application of heterostructures
UNIT IV
Quantum wires & Quantum dots: Introduction – size effects - preparation of quantum
nanostructures – Fermi gas and density of states – calculation of density of states – infrared
detector – quantum well lasers – quantum cascade laser – nanowires – production, structure and
uses of nanowires – quantum dots: fabrication techniques – electronic properties - application of
quantum dots: information storage – infrared photodetector - laser
UNIT V
Magneto Electronics and Applications of Nano Technology:
Magnetism in nanocrystals – Nanocrystalline soft magnetic materials – Columb blockade –
single electron transistor – quantum cellular automata – fabrication – Spintronics – giant
magnetoresistance – Quantum Hall effect – Quantum spin Hall effect – fractional quantum Hall
effect – application of nanotechnology – medical application of molecular nanotechnology
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. The Physics of low Dimensional Semiconductors - An introduction, John H. Davis,
Cambridge University Press, 2006.
2. Optical Properties of Semiconductor Quantum Dots, U. Woggon Springer Verlog
3. Nanophysics edited by Dr. Sr. Gerardin Jayam
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Transport in Semiconductor nanostructure, D. Ferry and S. Goodnick, Cambridge
University Press, 1997.
2. Nanotechnology in Carbon Materials, M. S. Dresselhaus and R. Salio
3. Advanced Magnetic nanostructures, K. P. Awasthi, Cyber Tech Publications,2008
4. Introduction to Nanotechnology , Charles P. Poole Jr, Frank.J.Owens, Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd, 2008.
45
PRACTICALS
Practical 1 - Physics I
Any 10 Experiments
1. Susceptibility – Quinke's Method
2. Cauchy‟s constant by least square fit (Experimental method)
3. Hyperbolic fringes – Determination of elastic constants
4. Michelson‟s interferometer
5. Anderson Bridge – determination capacitance
6. Ultrasonic interferometer- ratio of compressibility in 2 liquids
7. Force constant calculation from vibration spectrum
8. Young's double slit experiment (1) using standard kit (2) lab made double slit
9. Ultrasonic diffraction – velocity determination in single liquid
10. Solar absorption spectrum
11. Variation of diameter of a very thin thread ( hair, very thin plastic thread, etc) as function
of load using Laser source
12. Mutual inductance – coupling coefficient as a function of distance and angle
13. Identification of X- ray lines using given XRD spectrum
14. Basic Characteristics parameters of optical fibre
Practical 2 - Electronics
Any 10 Experiments
1. Voltage regulator using transistors.
2. Schmidt trigger design using transistors.
3. Triangular Wave, Ramp generators using IC 741.
4. Active filters- low pass, high pass and band pass filters using IC 741.
5. Counters mod 2 to 10.
6. UJT characteristics and relaxation oscillator.
7. Phase shifter using Op- amp IC 741 and phase shift measurement.
8. AD converters and DA converters using IC 741.
9. SCR characteristics and power control .
10. The Constant current source - floating load and grounded load using Op amp and
Transistor.
11. FET characteristics and voltage amplifier.
12. Code converters (Binary to Gray , Gray to Binary , Binary to Excess 3, Excess 3 to
Binary).
13. Solution of simultaneous equations using IC 741
46
Practical 3 - Physics II
Any 10 Experiments
1. Susceptibility- Guoy's Method
2. Elliptical fringe - determination of elastic constants
3. Biprism - determination of wavelength
4. Band gap - thermister
5. Hall effect
6. Resistivity -four probe method
7. Equipotential surface – different shapes
8. Diffraction – ultrasonic compressibility of liquid, ratio of velocities.
9. Temperature variation of forward bias diode voltage for Ge and Si
10. Comparison of illumination – Using photo transistor (two lamps, various distances)
11. Dielectric constant- LCR circuit
12. BH curve tracing and Hysteresis loss
13. Resistivity – two probe method
14. Calibration of Hall probe into Gauss meter using a search coil
BOOK FOR REFERENCE for Practical 1 & 3
Advanced Practical Physics, B.L.Worsnop, H.T.Flint
Practical 4 - Programming
Any twelve Programmes with a minimum of five from each Group I &II
Group I : Writing ALP and testing with trainer kits of Intel 8085/8086/8051 ( Write
Algorithm and Draw flow charts )
1. Block Move, addition, subtraction, multiplication, logical operations (8085/8086).
2. Rearranging the Numbers – ascending, descending , maxima, minima and searching a
character of an array (8085/8086).
3. Counters using seven segment LED Display (8085/8086).
4. Simple Series Generation – Fibonacci, Tribonaccietc (8085/8086).
47
5. Display of any character / rolling display (8085/8086).
6. Analogue to Digital convertor and Digital to Analogue convertor( ADC and DAC)
7. Waveform Generation(Square, Sine, Triangular) (8085/8086).
Group II : C++ Programming exercises with Computers ( Write Algorithm and Draw
flow charts )
8. Curve fitting to straight line and data interpolation (Cauchy‟s constant).
9. Currents in Wheatstone‟s bridge – solution of simultaneous equations – Gauss elimination.
10. Solution of radioactive decay problem (or any Physics problem). Use Runge-Kutta or
Euler‟s methods
11. Evaluation of area under the curve – Simpson‟s rule and Monte–Carlo method.
12. Eigen values and eigenvectors of symmetry matrices.
13. Matrix multiplication (application – rotation matrices).
14. Newton‟s Law of cooling (or any Physics problem) using Numerical differentiation.
15. Solution of transcendental or polynomial equations by the Newton Raphson method
Note : For the Practical Examination the questions will be either from C++ or
Microprocessor
PROJECT
FORMAT FOR PREPARATION OF PROJECT REPORT FOR
M.Sc. Physics
1. ARRANGEMENT OF CONTENTS:
The sequence in which the project report material should be arranged and bound should be as
follows:
Cover Page & Title Page
Bonafide Certificate
Abstract
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Figures
List of Symbols, Abbreviations and Nomenclature
Chapters
Appendices
References
48
2. PAGE DIMENSION AND BINDING SPECIFICATIONS:
The dimension of the project report should be in A4 size. The project report should be
bound using flexible cover of the thick white art paper. The cover should be printed in
black letters and the text for printing should be identical.
Total number of Pages should not exceed 70.
3. PREPARATION FORMAT:
Cover Page & Title Page – A specimen copy of the Cover page & Title page of the
project report are given in Appendix 1.
Bonafide Certificate – The Bonafide Certificate shall be in double line spacing using
Font Style Times New Roman and Font Size 14.
The Certificate shall carry the supervisor‟s signature and shall be followed by the
supervisor‟s name, academic designation (not any other responsibilities of administrative
nature), department and full address of the institution where the supervisor has guided the
student. The term „SUPERVISOR‟ must be typed in capital letters between the
supervisor‟s name and academic designation.
Preface – Preface should be one page synopsis of the project report typed double line
spacing, Font Style Times New Roman and Font Size 14.
Table of Contents – The table of contents should list all material following it as well as
any material which precedes it. The title page and Bonafide Certificate will not find a
place among the items listed in the Table of Contents but the page numbers of which are
in lower case Roman letters. One and a half spacing should be adopted for typing the
matter under this head.
List of Tables – The list should use exactly the same captions as they appear above the
tables in the text. One and a half spacing should be adopted for typing the matter under
this head. The tables shall be introduced in the appropriate places in the text.
List of Figures – The list should use exactly the same captions as they appear below the
figures in the text. One and a half spacing should be adopted for typing the matter under
this head. The figures shall be introduced in the appropriate places in the text.
List of Symbols, Abbreviations and Nomenclature – One and a half spacing should be
adopted or typing the matter under this head. Standard symbols, abbreviations etc. should
be used.
Chapters – The Chapters may be broadly divided into 5 parts
1. Introduction to Project
2. Literature Survey
3. Methods and methodology/Working / Experimental Techniques
4. Result Analysis
5.Conclusion
49
1 . The main text will be divided into several chapters and each chapter may be further
divided into several divisions and sub-divisions.
2. Each chapter should be given an appropriate title.
3. Tables and figures in a chapter should be placed in the immediate vicinity of the
reference where they are cited.
4. Footnotes should be used sparingly. They should be typed single space and placed
directly underneath in the very same page, which refers to the material they annotate.
Appendices – Appendices are provided to give supplementary information, which is
included in the main text may serve as a distraction and cloud the central theme.
1. Appendices should be numbered using numerals, e.g. Appendix 1, Appendix 2, etc.
2. Appendices, Tables and References appearing in appendices should be numbered and
referred to at appropriate places just as in the case of chapters.
3. Appendices shall carry the title of the work reported and the same title shall be made
in the contents page also.
List of References –The listing of references should be typed 4 spaces below the heading
“REFERENCES” in alphabetical order in single spacing left – justified. The reference
material should be listed in the alphabetical order of the first author. The name of the
author/authors should be immediately followed by the year and other details.
A typical illustrative list given below relates to the citation example quoted above.
REFERENCES
1. Ariponnammal, S. and Natarajan, S. (1994) „Transport Phonomena of Sm Sel – X Asx‟,
Pramana – Journal of Physics Vol.42, No.1, pp.421-425.
2. Barnard, R.W. and Kellogg, C. (1980) „Applications of Convolution Operators to Problems
in Univalent Function Theory‟, Michigan Mach, J., Vol.27, pp.81–94.
3. Shin, K.G. and Mckay, N.D. (1984) „Open Loop Minimum Time Control of Mechanical
Manipulations and its Applications‟, Proc.Amer.Contr.Conf., San Diego, CA, pp. 1231-1236.
Table and figures - By the word Table, is meant tabulated numerical data in the body of
the project report as well as in the appendices. All other non-verbal materials used in the
body of the project work and appendices such as charts, graphs, maps, photographs and
diagrams may be designated as figures.
50
4. TYPING INSTRUCTIONS:
The impression on the typed copies should be black in colour.
One and a half spacing should be used for typing the general text. The general text shall
be typed in the Font style „Times New Roman‟ and Font size 14.
APPENDIX 1 (A typical Specimen of Cover Page & Title Page)
<Font Style Times New Roman – Bold>
TITLE OF PROJECT REPORT
<Font Size 18><1.5 line spacing>
A PROJECT REPORT <Font Size 14>
Submitted by <Font Size 14><Italic>
NAME OF THE CANDIDATE(S) <Font Size 16>
in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree
of
<Font Size 14><1.5 line spacing><Italic>
NAME OF THE DEGREE <Font Size 16>
IN
BRANCH OF STUDY <Font Size 14>
51
NAME OF THE COLLEGE <Font Size 14>
MANONMANIAM SUNDARARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI- 627 012
<Font Size 16><1.5 line spacing>
MONTH & YEAR <Font Size 14>
52
APPENDIX – AZ84
Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli-12.
M.Sc., Zoology
Course structure and Examination under CBCS – those who joined from June 2012
onwards
FIRST YEAR
SEMESTER – I
Paper Title Theory/ Practical
Week / Week
(Hrs) (Hrs)
Core 1 – Biological 6 2
Chemistry (C11Z)
Core 2 – Molecular cell 6 2
Biology (C12Z)
Core 3 – Developmental 6 2
Biology (C13Z)
Elective 1 Biosystematics 6 No exam
and biodiversity (E14Z)
(OR) Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology (E15Z)
SEMESTER - II
Paper Title Theory/ Practical
Week / Week
(Hrs) (Hrs)
Core 1 – Microbiology 6 2
(C21Z)
Core 2 – Environmental 6 2
biology (C22Z)
Core 3 – Biostatistics and 6 2
Computer applications
(C23Z)
Elective 1 Population 6 No exam
Ecology and Animal
Behaviour (E24Z) (or)
Entomology (E25Z)
Practical – I First semester
core papers 1,2 and 3 (P26Z)
Practical II Second semester
core papers 1,2 and 3 (P27Z)
Total
Credits
5
5
5
5
Total
Credits
4
4
4
5
4
4
Credits Marks
Internal External Total
5 25 75 100
5 25 75 100
5 25 75 100
5 25 75 100
Credits Marks
Internal External Total
4 25 75 100
4 25 75 100
4 25 75 100
5 25 75 100
40 60 100
40 60 100
53
SECOND YEAR
SEMESTER - III
Paper Title Theory/ Practical Credits Marks
Week / Week Internal External Total Total
(Hrs) (Hrs) Credits
Core 1 – Immunology 6 2 5 25 75 100 5
(C31Z)
Core 2 – Animal Physiology 6 2 5 25 75 100 5
(C32Z)
Core 3 – Genetics (C33Z) 6 2 5 25 75 100 5
Project (Pro 34Z) 6 - 5 40 60 100 5
SEMESTER - IV
Paper Title Theory/ Practical Credits Marks Total
Week / Week Internal External Total Credits
(Hrs) (Hrs)
Core 1 – Biotechnology 6 2 4 25 75 100 4
(C41Z)
Core 2 – Aquaculture (C42Z) 6 2 4 25 75 100 4
Core 3 – Evolution (C43Z) 6 2 4 25 75 100 4
Elective – I Research (E44Z) 6 No 5 25 75 100 5
Methodology (or) Bio- Exam
informatics (E45Z)
Practical. III Third Semester 40 60 100 4
Core Papers 1,2 and 3 (P46Z)
Practical IV Fourth Semester 40 60 100 4
core papers 1,2 and 3 (P47Z)
54
Course pattern for M.Sc., Zoology – those who joined from June 2012
onwards.
Sl.No. Course pattern Courses Hours Credits
1 Core subjects: Theory 12 72 54
Practicals 4 24 16
2 Elective subjects: Theory 3 18 15
3 Project 1 6 5
4 Total 20 120 90
Total number of courses : 20 (15T+1Proj+4 Pract)
Total number of hours : 120
Total number of credits : 90
Downsized Syllabus for I M.Sc., Zoology
Unit IV
'Developmental Zoology' (C13Z)
for those who joined the course from the Academic year 2012-2013 and afterwards
UNIT IV - Early vertebrate development: eg., any mammal. Development of
endodermal organs - neural tube - brain - eye - neuralcrest and its derivatives -
origin of skin. Development of mesodermal oxgan - Development of heart -
Development of endodermal organ - digestive tract and its derivatives.
BIOSTATISTICS AND COMPUTER APPLICATIONS (C23Z)
PRACTICALS LIST FOR IST M.SC., ZOOLOGY (SECOND SEMESTER)
1. Calculation of mean, medium and mode by using leaves.
2. Calculation of standard deviation.
3. Data collection – insect/bird population in the campus.
4. Presentation of data by graphs.
5. Presentation of data by diagrams.
6. Finding correlation coefficient.
7. Implementation of chi-square test in a sample population.
8. Calculation of probability by coin toss.
9. Implementation of Student‟s „t‟ test.
Preparation of graphs with MS excel
55
III & IV Semester Syllabus
3.1. IMMUNUNOLOGY - C31Z
THIRD SEMESTER
Unit I
History and scope of immunology - Components of the immuno system - cells, tissues and
organs of the immuno system - Types of immunity - Immunoglobulins -Complement - T
cell receptors and MHC molecules.
Unit II
Modes of immuno response - Mechanisms of innate immunity - Antigen presentation -
Mononuclear phagocytes in immuno defence - Cell mediated cytotoxicity - Regulation of
the immune response.
Unit III
Defence against infectious agents - Immunity to viruses - Immunity to bacteria and fungi -
Immunity to protozoa and worms - Primary and secondary immuno deficiencies -
Vaccination.
Unit IV
Antigen-antibody reactions - Types of antigen - Precipitin reaction - VDRL test for
syphilis - Immuno diffusion - Immuno electrophoresis - counter immuno electrophoresis
Agglutination reaction and its applications - rocket immuno electrophoresis - Blood -
composition - functions - blood groups -ABO blood typing Blood cells counting.
UnitV
Immunity to cancer - Immediate hypersensitivity Type I, II, III and IV. ELISA -
Technique - Monoclonal antibody production - Immuno fluorescence - direct, indirect
and sandwich tests.
Reference Books
1. David male., Jonathan Brostoff., David B. Roth and Ivan Roitt. 2006. Immunology (International Edition) 7
th edn. Mosby Elsevier Ltd. Canada.
2. Coleman R.M., Lomband MF., and Cord RES. Fundamentals of Immunology (2nd
edn). W.C, Brown publishers, USA. 3. Rao. CV. An introduction to Immunology. Narosa Publishing House, 35, Greames Road, Chennai. 4. Kannan. I 2007. Immunology. MJP publishers, Chennai. 5. Talwar GP. A Hand Book of practical Immunology, Vigas Publishers Ltd New Delhi.
56
PRACTICALS
1. ABO blood grouping by haemagglutination technique.
2. Immunodiffusion technique.
3. Separation of blood cells by centrifugation.
4. Counting of white blood corpuscles.
5. Counting of red blood corpuscles.
6. Primary and secondary lymphoid organs in man (chart)
7. Lymphoid organs in rat (Chart).
8. Cells of the immune system (Slide).
9. Immunoglobulin - G (Chart).
10. Monoclonal antibody prepartation (Chart)
MODEL QUESTION
3.1. Immunology - C31Z
Time: 3Hrs Max: 75 mks
Section - A (10x1 = 10)
1. HLA
2. Central lymphoid organs
3. Priming
4. Idiotypes
5. Acute phase response.
6. LAD
7. Ouchterlony technique.
8. VDRLTest
9. Oncogenic viruses•*,
Section - B (5x5=25)
11. Write a short account on primary lymphoid organs, (or)
What are the peripheral lymphoid organs?
12. Write briefly about innate immunity (or)
Give a short account on acquired immunity.
13. Briefly explain about the role of cell mediated immunity against viral infection,
(or)
Explain the immune responses of human body against parasitic infections.
14. What is Immunoelectrophoresis? (or)
Write an account on counter immunoelectrophoresis.
57
10.ELISA
15. Give short notes on immunological aspects of malignancy, (or)
Write briefly about type - III immune complex mediated hypersensitivity.
Section - C (5x8=40)
16. Write an essay on the structure and functions of immunoglobulins, (or)} Explain the
classical complement pathway and its biological significance.
17. Give a detailed account on cell mediated cytotoxicity, (or)
What are the factors involving in the regulation of the immune respone in higher animals?
18. Write an elaborate account on primary immunodeficiency, (or)
What are the various events associated with secondary immunodeficiency?
19. What are the immunological significances of ABO blood grouping? (or) Write notes
on a) antigen - antibody reactions. B) agglutination reactions and its applications.
20. Write a detailed account on monoclonal antibody production, (or) What is
immunofluorescence? Explain the different types of immunofluorescent techniques and
its immunological significance.
3.2. ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY‐C32Z
I: Nutrition and Thermoregulation
Digestive tract ‐ Structure and functions ‐ Secretory functions of the alimentary tract and the glands ‐ Gastro intestinal hormones ‐ Digestion, Absorption and Metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids ‐ Balanced diet ‐ Malnutrition, energy balance, BMR.
Thermoregulation ‐ Body temperature, acclimation and acclimatization ‐ Regulation of temperature in poikilotherms and homeotherms
Unit II: Blood and Circulation
Blood corpuscles, Haemopoiesis and formed elements, plasma function, blood volume and its regulation, blood groups, immunity, haemostasis. Cardiovascular System : Comparative anatomy of heart structures in vertebrates, myogenic heart, specialized tissue, ECG ‐ its principle and significance, cardiac cycle, heart as a pump, blood pressure, neural and chemical regulation of all above.
58
(THiiz&serviEsmz) Unit
Unit HI: Respiration and Excretion
Respiration in air and water ‐ Comparison of respiration in vertebrates ‐ anatomical considerations ‐ Human : Physiology and anatomy of the respiratory tract ‐ Respiratory pigments Gas transport between the lungs and tissues ‐ Regulation of respiration. Respiratory adjustments in high altitudes.
Excretory products ‐ Comparative physiology of excretion and types of excretory products in vertebrates. Human : Kidney ‐ Nephron ‐ Renal circulation ‐Urine formation and concentration ‐ Renal disorders ‐ Micturition and dialysis ‐Regulation of water and electrolyte balance ‐ Protozoa, Crustacea. Freshwater, marine, and terrestrial animals ‐ Hormonal control of osmo‐iono regulation.
Unit IV : Neuromuscular and Sensory Physiology
Neuron ‐ Structure, classification ‐ Neurotransmitters ‐ Synapse, conduction of nerve impulses ‐ Reflex activity ‐ Structure and function of spinal cord & brain ‐Electro encephalogram (EEG).
Muscles ‐ Classification and properties ‐ Mechanism of muscular contraction ‐ energetics of muscular contraction ‐ neuromuscular junction ‐ Sense organs and receptors ‐ Sense organs of vision, hearing and equilibrium, smell and taste, cutaneous.
Unit V : Endocrinology and reproduction
Endocrine mechanisms in Invertebrates (Insects and Crustaceans) Human : Structure and functions of various endocrine glands ‐ basic mechanism of hormone action ‐ Estrus and endometridial reproductive cycles ‐ Mammary glands ‐ Neuroendocrine regulation.
Reference Books :
1. General and comparative physiology ‐ William S. Hoar
2. Choradate Zoology ‐ E.L. Jordan and P.S. Verma, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 3. Comparative Animal Physiology ‐ CD. Prosser and F.A. Brown, JR 4. Textbook of Animal Physiology ‐ R. Nagabhushanam, M.S. Kodarkar and R.
Sarojini 5. Kunt Schmidt ‐ Nicolsen Animal Physiology ‐ Adaptation and Environment,
Cambridge University Press. 6. A.C. Gayton and J.E. Hall. A text book of Medical Physiology. (9th edition)
Harcourt Braceand Company, Asia Pvt. ltd., W.B. Saunders Company.
59
PRACTICAL ‐ III Animal Physiology
1. Estimation of hemoglobin ‐ any method 2. Determination of erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR) 3. Detection of haemin crystals in blood 4. Estimation of salt loss in fish 5. Estimation of salt gain in fish 6. ECG, EEE, conditioned reflex, Kymograph sphymomanometer ‐ Chart 7. Rate of oxygen consumption and opercular activity in relation to salinity and
temperature 8. Qualitative analysis of excretory products in Ammonotelic, ureotelic and
uricotolic animals.
3.2. ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY‐C32Z
(For those who joined in July 2012 and afterwards)
Time : Three hours Maximum : 75 Marks
PART A ‐ (10 x 1 = 10 marks) Answer
ALL the questions.
1. Urease.
2. Glycogenesis.
3. Coronary circulation.
4. Tricuspid valve.
5. Ammonotelism.
6. Urea.
7. Neurotransmitters.
8. Statocysts.
9. ICSH.
10. Thyrocalcitonin.
PART B ‐ (5 x 5 = 25 marks) Answer ALL the
questions, choosing either (a) or (b).
11. (a) Explain the digestion of carbohydrate.
Or
(b) Write an account on acclimation and acclimatization.
12. (a) State the functions of blood.
Or (b)
Explain the regulation of Cardiac cycle. 60
13. (a) Water as an excretory product. Discuss.
Or
b) Mention the organs of excretion for different animals.
14. (a) Write a short account on equilibrium receptors.
Or
(b) State the functions of synapse.
15. (a) Explain the organs of Corti.
Or
(b) State the functions of ACTH and TSH.
Part C ‐ (5 x 8 = 40 marks) Answer ALL the
questions, choosing either (a) or (b).
16. (a) Write an account on gastro‐intestinal hormones.
Or
(b) Explain the thermoregulation in homeotherms.
17. (a) Elucidate the working of heart.
Or
(b) Explain the comparative anatomy of heart in vertebrates.
18. (a) Describe the mechanism of urine formation.
Or
(b) Explain the osmoregulation in fishes.
19. (a) Narrate the mechanism of muscle contraction.
Or
(b) Explain the Nervous conduction of stimuli.
20. (a) Give an account on adrenal medulla.
Or
(b) Describe the menstrual cycle in human female
61
3.3. GENETICS-C33Z
Mendelian principles: Genetic transmission ‐ concepts and definitions. Mendel's law, Test cross and back cross. Allelic and non‐allelic interactions. Chromosomes: Prokaryotic chromosomes: eukaryotic chromosomes‐diploids and haploids, morphology of the eukaryotic chromosomes, chemical structure of chromosomes, molecular structure of chromosomes, materials of chromosomes, kind of chromosomes, karyotype and ideogram., special types of chromosomes‐polytene chromosomes, lampbrush chromosomes, B‐chromosomes, holokinetic chromosomes; genetical significance of chromosomes;.
UNIT II
Molecular Structure of gene
Molecular Structure of gene ‐ Simple and split genes, overlapping genes ‐ cistron, recon muton, intron ‐ DNA methylation, genetic code ‐ coding and noncoding sequences DNA: types‐replication and repair mechanism: regulation of gene expression ‐ operon concept.
Unit III
Microbial genetics :
Methods of genetic transfers ‐transformation, conjugation, transduction and sexduction. Mapping genes by interrupted mating ; fine structure analysis of genes. Mapping of the bacterial chromosome, Genetic mapping of lambda bacteriophage Oncogenes, transposable elements of prokaiyotes and eukaryotes, inborn errors of metabolism.
UNIT IV
Population genetics
Mendelian population: gene pool and gene :requency;Hardy‐Weinberg law;applications of Hardy‐Weinbergt law in calculating gene frequencies in a population‐calculation of gene frequencies of autosomal genes, calculation of gene frequencies for sex linked genes; factors influencing ailele frequency or deviations from Hardy‐Weinberg equilibrium‐selection mutation, meiotic drive and migration pressure;
62
UNIT V
Human genetics
Pedigree analysis‐aminocentesis human cytogenetics‐ the normal human karyotype banding patterns in human chromosomes, abnormal human karyotypes‐autosomal abnormalities‐Down's syndrome, Klinefelter's syndrome, Turner's syndrome patau's and Edwards's syndrome
Reference books:
1) Emmanuel C, Ignacimuthu S. and Vincent S. Applied genetics: recent trends and techniques. MJP publishers, Chennai. 2006.
2) Elof Axel Carlson. Human genetics. Tata McGraw‐hill publishing Co. New Delhi. 1985.
3) Jain H.K. Genetics: Principles, concepts and Implications. Oxford & Publishing Co. New Delhi 1999.
4) Benjamin Lewin, Genes VI. Oxford University Press Oxford 1997 5) Sandhya Mitra. Genetics ‐ A blueprint of life. Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Co.
New Delhi. 1994 6) Strickberger M. W. Genetics. 3rd edition. Prentice‐Hall of India, New Delhi. 1996. 7) Gardner et al. Principles of genetics 8th edition. John Wiley & sons Inc. New York.
1991. 8) Stansfleld W.D. Schaum's Outline of theory and problems of Genetics. 3rd
edition. Schaum's outline series. McGraw Hill inc. New York. 1991. 9) Stent G.S and calendar R. Molecular Genetics: An introductory narrative. 2nd
edition. CBS publishers & distributors, New Delhi. 1986. 10)Goodenough U. Genetics. 3r edition. Saunders College publishing, New York.
1984.
GENETICS PRACTICAL
1. Analysis of simple mendelian inheritance in a small population 2. Breeding experiments to be demonstrated with the help of colour beads ‐
Monohybrid cross 3. Breeding experiments to be demonstrated with the help of colour beads ‐
Dihybrid cross 4. Estimation of gene and geno type frequencies in the light of Hardy ‐Weinberg
law based on facial traits. 5. Estimation of gene and geno type frequencies in the light of Hardy ‐Weinberg
law based on ABO blood groups 6. Random genetic drift ‐ using colour beads 7. Analysis of dermatoglyphic patterns. 8. Charts, models and flash cards pertaining to theory syllabus
63
• DNA replication • Karyotyping *
• Operon concept
• Transposable elements
3.4 Project work
Components Marks
Project Report ( Dissertation) 60
Viva-Voce * 40
Total 100
(a) The Projects for PG Student Shall be “Group Projects”. Each Group Shall Contain 3 or 4
Students
(b)The project report evaluation will be done Centrally and Viva-Voce will be conducted by both the
External Examiner and the Guide at the end of third semester.
FOURTH SEMESTER
4.1 BIOTECHNOLOGY C41Z
Unit 1: Genetic Engineering
Gene cloning: the basic steps, types of restriction enzymes, ligases- linkers and adaptors, c DNA,
transformation, selection of recombinants. Hybridization techniques, chemical synthesis of
oligonucleotides. RFLP, PCR and DNA sequencing techniques techniques. Unit 2: Gene cloning
Vectors
Plasmid biology: cloning vector based on pBR322 and bacteriophage. Cloning vector for yeast. Cloning
vector for Agrobacterium twnefaciens. Cloning vector for mammalin cells: Simian virus 40 - Gene
transfer technology: Particle bombardment, Micro injection techniques.
Unit 3: Animal Biotechnology
Cell culture: Organ culture, whole embryo culture, Embryo transfer- in-vitro fertilization (IVF)
technology, Dolly-in vitro fertilization and embryo transfer in human. Transgenic animals. Human gene
therapy. Cryobiology. Unit 4: Microbial Biotechnology
Fermentation: bioreactor. Microbial products: Primary and Secondary Metabolites. Protein Engineering.
Bioremediation of hydrocarbons, industrial wastes and heavy metals'. Single cell protein, Biopolymers,
Biopesticides and Biofertilizers.Xenobiotics, bio-leaching, bio-mining and biofuels.
64
Unit 5: Medical biotechnology
Drug Development: production of pharmaceuticals by genetically engineered cells (hormones,
interferons); microbial transformation for production of important pharmaceuticals (steroids
and semi-synthetic antibiotics); drug design and drug targeting. Diagnostic kit development for
microanalysis.
Unit 6: Nanobiotechnology
Nanobiotechnology: a brief history of the super small; introduction to Nanofabrication, Nanolithography
Nanobiotechnology, Nanotubes and Buckyballs; applications of nanobiotechnologies: Drug delivery, drug
discovery; health Risks and concerns of nanobiotechnology
Reference Books
Satyanarayana, U. 2007. Biotechnology. Uppala author-publisher interlinks, Vijayawada,
Andhra Pradesh, India. Old, R.W. and Primrose, S.B. 1993. Principles of Gene manipulation: An
Introduction to
Genetic Engineering. Blackwell Science Publications. Ignacimuthu, S. 2008. Biotechnology: An
Introduction. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
Purohit, S.S. 2008. Biotechnology. Student Edition, Jodhpur. Lee, S. and Savage, L.M.
Biological Molecules in Nanotechnology. Ratner, M. and Ratner, D. Nanotechnology.
LAB IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
1. Extraction of genomic DNA from Bacteria
2. Isolation of DNA from the plasmids.
3. Restriction enzymes digestion of DNA.
4. DNA electrophoresis in Agarose gel
5. Amplification of 16S rRNA (PCR)
6. Estimation of citric acid from Aspergillus culture.
7. Immobilization of yeast cells
8. Preparation of wine
9. Estimation of ethanol production from wine
10. Demonstration of Southern and Western Blotting techniques
65
4.2. AQUACULTURE-C42Z
UNIT I
Introduction
Principle and importance of aquaculture desirable characteristic of species Global and
Indian scenario of aquaculture. Construction of ponds; Site selection - soil and water
types - types of ponds. Preparation and management; Aquatic plants and their control:
control of predatory insects: Fish enemies and their control.
UNIT II
Kinds of aquaculture : Extensive, semi intensive , intensive, super intensive;
monoculture, mono sex culture , polyculture. Integrated fish farming; Animal husbandry
cum aquaculture, pen and cage culture of fish, prawns. Fish pathology Bacterial, viral and
fungal diseases , nutritional deficiency diseases. Ectoparasites, Endoparasites, Principles
of fish health management.
UNIT III
Finfish Culture; Culture of Indian major caps tilapia, murrel, Frog culture, mullets,
milkfish, trout culture, sea weed culture, sewage fed fish culture Shell fish culture;
Culture of fresh water and marine prawns, lobsters, crabs, edible and pearl oysters. Fish
preservation and fishery by products.
UNIT IV
Feed: Nutritional requirements; Natural culture of fish feed organisms phytoplankton
(diatom), Zooplankton (rotifers, cladocerans, chironomous). Artemia, tubifex. Artificial
feed: Feed formulation; Transportation of fish seed and brooders .
UNITV
Role of Genetics in aquaculture, Genetic improvement of stocks, selective breeding,
inbreeding, hybridization, Sex manipulation: Chromosomal manipulation, polyploidy,
production of monosex and sterile fishes. Transgenic fishes. Cryopreservation of
gametes, Role of Biotechnology in conservation in fishes.
66
Reference Books
1. Fish and Fisheries of india. Jhingran, V.G Hindustan publishing Co., New Delhi
(1997)
2. Advances in aquaculture. Pillay, T.V.R and Dill, M.A (Eds). Fishing News Books
Ltd., England.
3. A hand book of fish farming. Agarwal, S.C Narandra Publishing house, Delhi (1994).
4. Fresherwater Aquaculture. Rath, R.K. Scientific Publishers, Jodhpur. 1993.
5. Hypophysation in Indian Major carp Schonder. S.L Satish Book Enterprises, Agra
(1980)
6. Ponds and fish culture. Hall, C.B Agro Botanical Publishers, India (1999)
Reference
1. Parasitology - Chatterjee KD (1980), Calcutta.
2. Parasitology - Chandler C.ASA and Read C.P.
3. Parasitism -Blush et al., (2001), Cambridge University Press.
4. Parasitology - Mathews Cambridge Uni. Press.
AQUACULTURE - PRACTICALS
1. Morphometry of a pond .
2. Estimation of fish population by mark & recapture method
3. Estimation of Primary Productivity of macrophyte
4. Physical Chemical Analysis of dissolved oxygen, Salinity in any two water samples
5. Study of fish pathology
6. Taxonomic description of cultivable fishes, prawn, Oyster
7. Identification of aquatic weeds insects and predators
8. Collection and identification of fish food organism and fresh water Plankton
9. Morphological feature of Paenaid and non paenaid prawn.
10. Visit to an Aquatic eco system.
11. Estimation of Chlorophyll in a plant.
67
4.3. EVOLUTION-C43Z Unit I: Origin of cells and unicellular evolution
Origin of basic biological molecules, abiogenesis, biogenesis, Biochemical origin of life, biological evolution [protenoids, and microspheres coacervates], protein or nucleic and first [biogeny], concept of oparin and Haldane - Experiment of Urey Miller (1953) - The first cell - Evolution of prokaryotes and Eukaryotes, anaerobic metabolism, photosynthesis and aerobic metabolism
Unit II: Evidences and Theories of Evolution
Evidences : From paleontology - Geological time scales and its major events; Types of fossils and process of fossilisation; Origin of unicellular and multicellular organisms; Evidences from biogeography; Evidences from taxonomy, comparative anatomy, embryology, and biochemistry and physiology.
Theories of organic evolution : Lamarkism, Darwinism, Mutation theory, Modern synthetic theory.
Unit III: Mechanism of Evolution
Population genetics - Population, gene pool, gene frequency; Hardy Weinberg law, Gene frequency and its impacts, natural selection, migration and genetic drift, variations, isolating mechanisms and origin of species - Allopatric and sympatric speciation.
Unit IV : Origin of Higher Taxa
Simpson's definition of the higher taxa, Sympson's adative grid, Preadaptations and Post-adaptations, Patterns of evolution : convergent evolution and parallel evolution, Micro evolution, Macro evolution (adaptive radiation), Mega evolution, Connecting link between vertebrate classes, Quantum evolution. Rates of Evolution : Horotely, Bradytely and Tachytely. Graduation versus punctuated equilibrium, Extinction and its causes.
Unit V : Mankind Evolution
Phylogenic tree and stages of primate evolution including Homo sapines. Place and time of origin, characteristics and ancestors of man, Evolutionary trends of man evolution, cultural evolution of man, allometry, altruism and Kin selection.
Reference Books :
1. P.A. Moody 1978. Introduction to evolution (Harper International).
2. C.L. Stebbins 1979 Processes of organic evolution (Prentice - Hall India, New Delhi).
3. E.O. Dodson 1980 Evolution (Reinhold, New York).
4. Veer Bala Rastogi - Evolutionary Biology
5. Sanjib Chattopadhyay - Origin, Evolution and adaptation, Books and Allied (P) Ltd., 8/1,
Chintamoni Das Lane, Kolkata, 700009, India.
6. F.J. Ayala 1978 Molecular evolution (Smaller, Mass, USA).
7. D.S. Sondalled 1983 Evolution form molecules to man. (Cambridge University Press).
8. Th. Dobzhansky 1970 Genetics of the evolutionary proces (Columbia University
Press, New York).
68
9. Dobzhansky, Ayala 1977 Evolution (W.H. Freeman, San Francisco et at).
10. Ernst Mayr 1976 Evolution and the Diversity of Life (Hardward University Press).
11. E.C. Minkoff 1984 Evolutionary Biology (Addition - Wesley, London).
12.G.G. Simpson 1953 The major features of evolution (Columbia University
Press, New York). 13. G.G. Simpson 1969 Meaning of evolution (Oxford IBH New
Delhi).
PRACTICALS
1. Morphological evidences - fore limbs and hind limbs of vertebrates, Mouth parts of
insects, Serial homology in prawn appendages and Homology and analogy - in limbs and
in wings,
2. Fossil evidences - Ammonites, Nautilus, belemnites and Fossil wood
3. Tracing the voyage of the H.M.S. beagle on a world map, with dates and important
discoveries.
4. Adaptive radiation - beaks on various birds
5. Museum specimens for adaptive colouration - cryptic and warning.
6. Mimicry - Monarch and viceroy butterfly.
7. Demonstration of natural selection with coloured beads.
8. Demonstration of genetic drift with coloured beads
9. Variations - Fingerprints of the students of the classes.
Reference :
A Laboratory Manual (1987), J.C.B. Abraham Evolution - (Macmillan, Madras - 600
002).
4.4.RESEARCH METHODOLOGY - Code E44Z
Unit -1
Research - characteristics - types of research - steps in research -objectives of
research - research report formatting and typing - laboratory safety - intellectual
property rights.
Unit - II
Microscopy - principles - types of light microscopes - bright field - dark field -
phase contrast - fluorescence - scanning - micrometry. Electron microscopes and
types - atomic force and magnetic force microscopes.
69
Unit-III
Centrifuge - types - principles and applications. PH meter- types-principles and
applications. Colorimeter - principles and applications. Cryopreservation and its
applications. Freezing and freeze drying microtomes. Cytotechniques.
Unit-IV
Chromatography - paper - thinlayer - column - gas liquid chromatography - affinity
chromatography. Electrophoresis - paper - cellulose acetate - gel - immuno
electrophoresis. Blotting techniques - southern -northern - western. Radioactive
counters - autoradiography - labeling studies.
UnitV
Spectrophotometer spectrofluorimeter ESR NMR spectrophotometer- flame
emission photometry.
4.5. BIOINFORMATICS-E45Z
Unit 1: Bioinformatics - introduction - biological data bases - nucleotide sequence data
bases, protein sequence data bases, specialized sequence data bases. Data retrieval
and analysis, sequence and retrieval system.
Unit 2: Sequence alignment - sequence similarity searches, amino acid substitution
matrices, Data base searches - FASTA, BLAST - PSI BLAST. Mutiple sequence
alignment - Clustered W: Phylogenetic analysis, PHYLODRAW: Phylogenetic tree.
Unit 3: Structural Bioinformatics: protein structure prediction - secondary structure
prediction - Rasmol, microarray, SAGE. Structure databases- Structure file format,
Protein structure database collaboration, PDB, MMDB, SCOP, BRENDA, AMENDA and
FRENDA.
Unit 4: Databases of patterns, motifs and profiles - PROSITE, BLOCKS, PRINTS,
Pfam.-expressed sequence tag databases (dbEST), single nucleotide polymorphisms
databases (dbSNP), metabolic pathway database (KEGG)- Comparative genomics -
databases, genome alignments and tools, comparison of gene order
70
Unit 5: Computer - assisted new lead design: Introduction - Basic concepts: ligand,
receptor, molecular recognition of ligand by receptor. Handling X - ray structures of
protein and Iigands. Docking problem and Docking method: automatic Docking method:
DOCK ADAM- applications of ADAM docking - active conformation, function -
approaches to discover new functions. Scope and limitations.
Text Books:
1. Attwood; T.K. and Parry-Smith. 2001. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Pearson Education, Asia, New Delhi. 2. Baxevanis, A.D. and Qullette, B.F.F. 2001. Bioinformatics - Practical guide to analyse genes and proteins. Willey International Science Publications. New York. 3. Cohen, N.C. 2006. Guide book on molecular modelling in drug design. Elsevier, New Delhi.
71
APPENDIX - AZ85
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.A.History with Computer Applications
(Effective from the Academic year 2012-2013)
Semester II
Core Papers
Papers
(Ext. + Int.)
5. Office Automation (MS-Office) with lab
6. History of Early Medieval India 712 A.D.
to 1526 A.D.
7. History of Tamil Nadu 1336 A.D. to 1969
A.D.
8. Historiography : Theory & Method.
Elective Paper:
9. Ancient World Civilizations (Excluding
India) upto 1453.
OFFICE AUTOMATION (MS - Office) WITH LAB
UNIT I
Introduction to Office 2007 – Exploring common features in Office, Working with
files, Editing in Office 2007, Selecting, Moving and Copying: Fonts and font styles.
Mastering the basics of Word – Creating word documents – Editing document texts –
Applying text enhancements, Aligning and Formatting, Adding lists, Numbers, Symbols,
Date and time, Replacing and checking text, Getting into print.
Credits Hours Marks
5 6 100
5 6 100
5 6 100
5 6 100
5 6 100
25 30
72
UNIT II
Word – Applying advanced formatting techniques: Formatting pages, Working
with columns, Constructing high quality tables, Creating outlines in Word. Working with
complex documents: Managing data with Word, Creating customized merge
documents, Publishing online forms, Adding reference to documents, Working together
on documents.
UNIT III
Excel: Creating Excel Worksheets: Entering and editing cell entries, Working with
numbers, Changing worksheet layout, Other formatting options, Printing in Excel, Using
functions and references, Naming ranges, Creating easy to understand charts, Using
custom and special effects, Using financial and statistical functions, Tracking and
analyzing data with excel, Auditing worksheets.
UNIT IV
PowerPoint: Creating PowerPoint presentations: Creating a basic presentation,
building presentations, modifying visual elements. Formatting and checking text, Adding
objects, Applying transitions, Animation effects and linking, preparing handouts, Taking
the show on the road.
UNIT V
Access: Tracking data with Access: Planning and creating tables, Creating and
using forms, Modifying tables, Working with external data, Creating relational database,
Enhancing form design, Producing reports, Creating queries.
Text Book:
COX, 2007 MICROSOFT OFFICE SYSTEM STEP BY STEP, Second Edition,
PHI Learning Private Limited.
Reference Book:
Michael Price, In Easy Steps OFFICE 2007, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
Limited.
73
PRACTICAL: OFFICE AUTOMATION
MS-WORD
1. Creating and Saving Documents
2. Letter Typing and Editing
3. Design an Invitation
4. Design a Calendar
5. Design a Time Table
6. Prepare a Student Bio-data
7. Usage of Header / Footer / Bookmark / Footnote / Spell Check
8. Mathematical Equations and Symbols
9. Design a Cover Page
10. Mail Merge
MS –EXCEL
1. Mark Sheet Preparation
2. Payroll Preparation
3. Sales Details
4. Graphs and Charts
5. Mathematical / Statistical / Logical Functions
6. Budget Preparation
MS –POWER POINT
1. Creating a Presentation from Scratch
2. Creating a Presentation using Design Template
3. Creating an Animated Presentation with Sound Effect
4. Creating a Presentation about your Personality
MS –ACCESS
1. Mark List Creation
2. Salary List Preparation
3. Electricity Bill Generation
4. Report Generation
5. Creation of Mailing Labels
74
HISTORY OF EARLY MEDIEVAL INDIA: 712 – 1526 A.D.
UNIT I: India and Islam:
Arab Conquest of Sindh – its Effects – History of the Rajputs: Their Origin &
Political History – Prominent Dynasties – Society – Administration – Art & Literature.
UNIT II: Turkish Conquest of India:
India and Eve of Turkish Invasion – Rise of Ghazini – Mahmud of Ghazini and his
Indian Expeditions – Rise of Ghor – Muhammad and his Indian Expeditions – Battle of
Tarain I & II and Effects.
UNIT III: The Establishment of the Delhi Sultanate:
The Ilbaris – Qutb – ud- din Aibek, Iltutmish, Balbon – The Khiljis : Ala – ud – din
Khilji – His Economic Reforms – Market Regulations – Military System - The Tuqhluqs :
Muhammad – Bin – Tuqhluq . His Administrative Changes – Currency Reforms – Firuz
Shah Tuqhluq :His Administration – Mongol Invasions –Chengiz Khan and Timur –
Sayyids – Lodies – Battle of Panipat (1526).
UNIT IV: Sultanate Administration:
Indo – Islamic Architecture – Monumnets of the Sultans – Progress of Language
and Literature – Historical Writings – Society – Economy – Religion – Foreign Visitors –
Decline of the Sultanate – Bhakthi Movement – Ramanuja- Vallabhacharya –
Ramananda and Kabir – Muslim Mysticism.
UNIT V: History of the Deccan:
The Chalukyas of Vatapi, Vengai and Kalyani – Rastra – Kutas of Malkhed –
Yadavas of Devagiri – Kakatiyas of Warangal – Hoysalas of Dwarasamudra –
Vijayanagara Empire – Sangama, Saluva, Tuluva and Aravidu Dynasties – Hazan
Gangu Bahmani – Muhamad Gawan – Disintegration of Bahmini Kingdom into Five
Dynasties – Administration – Social and Religious Life – Progress of Telgu, Sanskrit,
Urdu and Persian Languages.
Books for References:
1. Bongard Levin, et, al. History of India, Vols. I & II.
2. Edwards & Garrett, Muslim Rule in India.
3. NMS Habibullah, The Foundation of Muslim Rule in India.
4. Mohammad Habib, (ed), A Comprehensive History of Delhi Sultanate.
5. RC Majumdar, (ed), History and Culture of the Indian People, Vol.VI.
6. RC Majumdar, et al, An Advanced History of India.
7. Nilakanta Sastri, Advanced History of India.
8. R. Sathianathaiar, Political and Cultural History of India, Vol.II.
9. JN Sarkar, Mughal Administration.
10. JN Sharkar, Decline of the Mughal Empire.
75
HISTORY OF TAMIL NADU: 1336 – 1969 A.D.
UNIT I: Tamil Nadu Under the Nayaks:
a)Sources b) Three Nayak Kingdoms – Madurai, Tanjore and Senji c)
Administration d) Nayankana System e) Society and religion f) Art and Architecture.
UNIT II: Nawabs and Marathas:
a) Nawabs of Arcot b) Chanda Sahib, Mohammad Ali, Maphuz Khan, Khan Sahib
c) Administration of the Nawabs d) Society e) Marathas – Political History f) Society,
religion, culture and education.
UNIT III: Poligars:
a) Poligari System b) Kaval System c) Society d) Kattabomman e) Military
Organization f) Mysorean Invasions g) Haider Ali and Tipu Sultan.
UNIT IV: Tamil Nadu under the British:
a) Early Europeans b) Carnatic Wars c) Poligari Revolt d) South Indian Rebellion,
Vellore Mutiny e) Abolition of Zaminadari System.
UNIT V: Movements and Administration in Tamilnadu:
Missionaries – Tamil and Dravidian Movements a) Congress Party b) V.O.C.
Subramania Siva, Bharati, V.V.S. Ayar, Maniyachi Incident, Non – Co – Operation
Movement, Salt Satyagrah, c) Rise of Justice Party d) E.V.R. e) Rajaji, Kamaraj,
Baktavachalam, Annadurai, and Administration.
Books for Reference:
1. A. Krishnasami, The Tamil Country Under Vijayanagar Rule
2. K. Rajayyan, History of Madurai, 1736 – 1801 A.D.
3. K. Rajayyan, South Indian Rebellion.
4. K. Rajayyan, British Diplomacy in Tanjore.
5. K. Rajayyan, Rise and fall of the Poligars in Tamil Nadu.
6. R. Sathianathaiar, History of the Nayaks of Madura.
7. K. Sadasivan, Devadasi System in Medieval Tamil Nadu.
8. C.C. Srinivasachari, A History of Ginjee and its Rulers.
9. N. Subramanian, History of Tamil Nadu, Pt. II.
10. Vridhagirisan, Nayaks of Tanjore.
76
HISTORIOGRAPHY: THEORY AND METHODS
Unit I: Meaning of History:
Definition - Scope and Purpose - Kinds of History - Other disciplines - Uses and Abuses in History – Lessons of History - Art or Science – Repetition in History.
Unit II: Theories and Concepts:
Causation and Change - Cyclical theory - Historical Materialism – Positivism - Theory of Greatman – Historical Determinism - Historicism and Relativism – Post – Modernism – Structuralism and Post – Structuralism – World System.
Unit III: Traditions of Historical Writings:
Graeco – Roman – Chinese – Indian : Ancient And Medieval – Western – Arabic – Persian – Idealist – Whig – Classical Marxist – New History : Cliomatrics – Annales & Subalterns.
Unit IV: Approaches to History:
Theological: St. Augustine – Orientalist : Sir William Jones and Max Muller – Imperialist : James Mill, VA Smith and Elphinstone – Nationlist: RG. Bhandarkar; Jadunath Sarkar – RC Majumdar – KA Nilakanta Sastri – TV Mahalingam – R.K. Mukherjee – AS Altekar – Marxist: D.D.Kosambi, RS Sharma, Romila Thapar and Irfan Habib – Recent Marxist: Burton Stein- DN Jha – Henneth R. Hall – Noboru Karashima MGS Narayanan – Y Subbarayalu – Post – Nationalist: Elamkulam PN Kunjan Pillai, KK Pillai, Sheik Ali, N. Subramanian & K. Rajayyan.
Unit V: Methods and Tools:
Meaning of Research – Kinds of Research – A Research Scholar : His Requirements - Sources – Collection & Selection of Data - Analysis of Data – Two types of Criticism - Writing of Thesis: Synthesis - Objectivity & Subjectivity - Foot-notes - Documentation – Bibliography – Appendices and Glossary.
Books for Reference:
1. Arthur Marwick, The Nature of History
2. Carl Gustavson, The Mansion of History
3. E.H.Carr - What is History?
4. R.G.Collingwood - The Idea of History
5. ER Elton, The Practice in History
6. K.Rajayyan - The History in Theory and Methods.
7. A.L.Rowse - The Uses of History
8. B. Shiek Ali, History : Its Theory and Method
9. N.Subramanian - Historiography.
10. G. Venkatesan, Historiography.
11. Will Durant, The Lessons of History.
77
ANCIENT WORLD CIVILIZATION UPTO 1453 (EXCLUDING INDIA)
Unit I:
Importance of the study of History of Civilizations - Origin of life – Environment -
Factors that favoured the origin and development of civilization. Early man - Paleolithic -
age - Life of the people of the Paleolithic age. Neolithic age – Life of the people of the
Neolithic age. Bronze age - life of the people of the Bronze age – Iron age - Life of the
people of Iron age. Human races and their movement.
Unit II
Mesopotamia : Sumerian civilization - Babylon and its Empires - the Assyrian
Terrorism - Egyptian Civilization - Polity - Life under the Pharaohs – contribution to
religion, art, architecture - Phoenicians and Israelites - Hittite Conquerors - Minoan
civilization.
Unit III
Greek civilization - Land - city states, Olympic Patrician Age - People -
Government - art - Music - painting - sculpture - Literature - religion – Philosophy -
contribution. Roman civilization - land and people - government - art music -
architecture - paining and sculpture - literature - learning - religion philosophy -
contribution. Chinese civilization - land and people - government - art – music
architecture - paining and sculpture - literature - learning - religion - philosophy -
contribution.
Unit IV
The Byzantine - government - art - philosophy - religion - literature – Justinian
The - Christianity - spread of Christianity in Europe - organization of the Christian
church - monasteries - Role of church in Europe Charlemagne - Constantine Edict of
313 - Papal bull. Feudalism - Meaning - Evolution – features - advantages -
disadvantages - decline.
Unit V
Growth of towns in Europe - factors favourable to the growth towns – medieval
guilds - contribution of towns - genesis of capitalism - Constantinople the bulwark of
Eastern - Europe - Fall of Constantinople - Genesis of Renaissance - Genesis of
Reformation.
Books for Reference
1. Adams. G.B. - Civilization during the Middle Ages.
2. Arnold J. Toynbee - A Study of History. Abridgement by D.C Somervell, Oxford
University Press.
3. Boissonnade .P. - Life and work in Medieval Europe 5th to 15th Centuries.
78
4. Brice .J. - The Holy Roman Empire
5. Burnner, H. - The new Aspect of the Ancient Egypt.
6. Bury. J.B. - History of Greece
7. Burns .E.M. - Western Civilization
8. Cambridge - Medieval History, 8 volumes
9. Cameron . G.G - History of Early Iron.
10. Cary. M.L - A History of Western World
11. Channey.L.J. - A Shorter History of Rome
12. Childe. V.G - Dawa of European Civilization
13. Davies. H.A - An Outline of the History of the world.
14. Davis. H.W.C. - Medieval Europe.
15. Dewulf., Maurice - Philosophy and Civilization in the Middle Age.
16. Diehl.C. - History of the Byzantine Empire
17. Eaton. S.C - The Western Heritage.
18. Harrison. F. - Byzantine History in the Early Middle Age
19. Mcniel N.H. and Sadler.J.W. - The Origin of Civilization
20. Mujeep.M. - World History - Our Heritage
21. Norman F. Cantor - Western Civilization : Its Genesis and Destiny - volumes
I and II
22. Runciman.S. - Byzantine Civilization
23. Stephenson.C. - Medieval History : Europe from the 4th the 16th Century
24. Swine. J.E. - A History of World Civilization
25. Starr . C.G. - A History of the Ancient World.
26. Wildurand - History of Civilization.
********
79
APPENDIX – AZ86
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.A. ENGLISH WITH COMPUTER APPLICATION (CBCS)
(FOR AFFILIATED COLLEGES)
(Effective from the academic year 2013 - 2014)
1. Objectives
The P.G. Course in English Literature and Language with C A aims to
• equip students with an in depth knowledge of a wide spectrum of genres
and writers
• to help them acquire communicative skills and a global perspective of
English Language
• to enable them to understand the multicultural context of English language
and literature
2. Conditions for Admission
• A candidate who has passed B.A. Degree Examination of M.S. University
with Branch XII English as the Main subject of study
• A graduate in B.A or B. Sc with Part II English
• A candidate who has acquired any other Bachelor Degree of this
university or any other university accepted by the Syndicate as equivalent
thereto shall be permitted to appear and qualify for M.A Degree
Examination of this university in English in the affiliated colleges of this
university.
3. Eligibility for the award of the Degree
A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the degree only if he/she has
undergone the prescribed course of study for a period of not less than two academic
years and passed the examinations of all the four semesters prescribed, earning 90
credits.
4. Duration of the Course
The duration of the course is for two academic years consisting of four
semesters each semester consisting of 90 working days.
The course of study shall comprise instruction in the following subjects
according to the syllabus and books prescribed from time to time.
80
Scheme of Examinations
II Semester
Core Subjects:
British Literature - Paper II
Indian Writing in English - Paper II
Critical Theory - Paper I
Desktop Publishing
(Page Maker and Photoshop)
Developing Communication Skills (Elective II)
Total (5 courses)
III Semester
Core Subjects: Hrs Credits
1. Shakespeare 6 4
2. Critical Theory - Paper II 6 4
3. Canadian Literature 6 4
4. Web Design 6 4
5. English Language Teaching (Elective III)
or
Literature in Translation (Elective III) 6 5
Total (5 courses) 30 21
IV Semester
Core Subjects: Hrs Credits
1. The English Language and Linguistics 6 5
2. Research Methodology 6 5
3. Dissertation 6 5
4. C Programming 6 5
5. The Post-Colonial Literature (Elective IV)
Or
Women‘s Writing in English (Elective IV) 6 4
Total (5 courses) 30 24
81
Hrs Credits
6 5
6 5
6 5
(4+2) 5
6 4
30 24
5. Examinations:
The examinations shall be of 3 hours duration for each paper at the end of
each semester. The candidate failing in any subject will be permitted to appear
for each failed subject in the subsequent examinations.
6. Scheme of Examinations:
Each paper contains an internal component. There is a pass minimum of
50% for external and overall components. The External Examination is for 75
marks and the Internal Assessment carries 25 marks. The Examination paper
consists of three sections- the first consisting of 5 questions each of 2 marks
each; the second 5 questions of 5 marks each and the third 5 questions of 8
marks each with a total of 75 marks.
Section A 5 x 2 = 10
Section B 5 x 5 = 25
Section C 5 x 8 = 40
Each question offers an internal choice, set in an ‗either or pattern‘. The
questions will cover all 5 units of each paper.
Recommendations of the Core Committee
1. Internal assessment:
Regarding the Internal assessment, the 25 marks is allocated in the following manner:
PG
The Average of the best two tests from three 15 Marks compulsory Tests
Assignment 04 Marks
Seminar 06 Marks
Total 25 Marks
Note: Each test is of one hour duration.
Project and Viva-Voce
Project Report - 60 Marks Viva-voce - 40 Marks ----------------------------------- Total - 100 Marks -----------------------------------
82
Note:
• The Project for PG students shall be ―Individual Project‖ • Project report evaluation will be done centrally and Viva-Voce will be
conducted by both the External examiner and the guide at the end of Fourth semester.
M. A. English with Computer Application Syllabus
II Semester
British Literature – Paper II
Unit - I Poetry - I
Milton - Paradise Lost Book II- Select lines (1- 389)
Pope - The Rape of the Lock
Unit - II Poetry - II
John Donne - Ecstasie
Herbert - Affliction
Marvell - To His Coy Mistress
William Collins - The Passions
William Blake - The Night
Unit - III Prose
Goldsmith - Beau Tibbs& Mrs. Tibbs (The Citizen of the
WorldLetters XV &XVI)
Swift - A Tale of a Tub
Unit - IV Prose
Joseph Addison - Sir Roger at Home &
A Hunting Scene with Sir Roger
Unit - V Drama
Sheridan - The School for Scandal
Goldsmith - She Stoops to Conquer
83
Indian Writing in English – Paper II
Unit - I Poetry
A K Ramanujan - Small Scale Reflections upon a Great HouseObituary
Nissim Ezekiel - In India & Philosophy
R Parthasarathy - Lines for a Photograph & Homecoming
Unit - II Poetry
Kamala Das - A Hot Noon in Malabar
JayantaMahapathra - Grass
Meena Alexander - House of Mist
Meena Alexander - Muse-2
K N Daruwalla - Death of a Bird
GauriDeshpande - The Female of Species
Unit - III Drama
GirishKarnad - The Fire and the Rain
Vijay Tendulkar - Kanyadhan
Unit - IV Fiction
Anita Desai - In Custody
RohintonMistry - Family Matters
Unit - V Fiction
AmitavGhosh - The Shadow Lines
Gita Hariharan - Thousand Faces of Night
84
Critical Theory – Paper I
Unit - I
a) Plato - Theory of Imitation
b) Horace - ArsPoetica - Poetic Theory
Unit - II
a) Ben Jonson - Discoveries - Classical Theory
b) Dryden - Preface to the Fables
Unit - III
a) Wordsworth - Poetry and Poetic Diction
b) Coleridge - BiographiaLiteraria - Chapter XIV
Unit - IV
a) Matthew Arnold - Wordsworth
b) T.S. Eliot - The Metaphysical Poets
Unit - V
a) I.A. Richards - The Four Kinds of Meaning
b) Allen Tate - Tension in Poetry
DESK TOP PUBLISHING
(PAGE MAKER AND PHOTOSHOP)
UNIT I
Introduction to DTP – Exploring common features in PageMaker, Working with
files and folders, Saving, Moving and Copying, Renaming, Deleting- Editing in
PageMaker: PageMaker window, creating- closing publications, Editing text-Formatting
text.
UNIT II
Master Pages- placing elements on Master Page-placing Guidelines, placing
header and page number, creating Master Page –removing Master Page –editing
Master Page – creating columns
85
UNIT III
Working with Graphics and objects: Tool Bar, Placing graphic on the page,
importing graphic, resizing a graphic, moving a graphics, cropping a graphic, grouping
and ungrouping-Managing and printing- page-orientation-numbering-page size-
dimensions-margins- table of content-Managing books.
UNIT IV
Starting with Photoshop – program window, working with images-rotating,
cropping, revealing the hidden image, freehand; Making Selection-selection tool, lasso
tool, copying, filling, transforming- painting tools- Drawing tools - retouching tools
UNIT V
Creating Layers- Filters- printing and customization- import, export, printing.
TEXT BOOK
COMDEX DTP Course Kit, Vikas Gupta, Dream Tech Press, 2006 Edition.
List of Practicals:
DESK TOP PUBLISHING (PAGE MAKER and PHOTOSHOP)
PAGEMAKER:
1. Design of ID Card (3‖×2‖) / Visiting Card (3.5‖×2‖)
2. Design of an attractive Invitation Card (5.5‖×8‖) / Letter Pad (7.5‖×9‖)
3. Preparation of a small Booklet with six pages (3.5‖×4.5‖)
4. Design of a Handbill (5.5‖×8.5‖) / Advertisement
5. Design of a College Progress Card / a Receipt Bill with counter foil.
PHOTOSHOP:
1. Design of a brochure for an Institution
2. Seasonal Greeting Card
3. Transporting an image from one background to another
4. Design a Web Page Poster (1004×750) / Text Book cover page
5. Crop an image / Rotate an image.
86
Developing Communication Skills – Elective II
Unit - I Functional Grammar
Parts of Speech PP.21 - 56
Concord PP.58 - 61
Determiners PP.64 - 70
Tenses PP.73 - 88
Unit - II
Reported Speech PP.89 - 99
Active and Passive Voice PP.100 - 106
Conditionals PP.107 - 112
Modals PP.113 - 126
Unit - III
Common Errors and their Rectification PP.129 - 145
Vocabulary Enrichment PP.149 - 157
Synonyms and Antonyms PP.158 - 171
Prefixes and Suffixes PP.172 - 178
Unit - IV
Composition PP.215 - 226
Types of Essays PP.215 - 226
Mechanics of Writing PP.229 - 250
Unit - V
Creative Writing PP.339 - 353
Text Book
A Practical Course for Developing Writing Skills in English – J.K. Gangal, PHI
Learning
Private Limited, New Delhi. 2011.
Books for Reference
1. English for Effective Writing –eds.S.Ravindranathan&S.Nagarajan.(Emerald Publishers) 2. Contemporary English Grammar Structures and Composition. David Green, Macmillan Edition. 3. Easy English Grammar for Indian Learners, Dr. P. Iyadurai, Jones Publications, 2011
87
Semester III
SHAKESPEARE - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:4
Unit I Othello
Unit II Richard II
Unit III The Winter‘s Tale
Unit IV The Lover‘s Complaint (A Poem)
Unit V Shakespearean Criticism
Quartos and Folios
Textual Criticism
Great Tragedies
Historical Plays
Dramatic Romances
Reference:
A.C. Bradley- Shakespearean Tragedy
A.W. Pollard- Shakespeare Folios and Quartos
G. Wilson Knight
CRITICAL THEORY – II - Core
Hrs:6 Credits:4
Unit I Paul de Man : The Resistance to Theory
Unit II M.H. Abrams : How to do Things with the Text?
Unit III Edward Said : Culture and Imperialism
Unit IV Michel Foucault : The Order of Discourse
Unit V Richard Kerridge : Environmentalism and Eco
Criticism
88
Reference
Contemporary Criticism - An Anthology Vol.II edited by V.S.Sethuraman. Beginning Theory – An Introduction to Literary and cultural theory –Peter Barry Contemporary Literary Theory: A Students’ Companion. ed. N. Krishnasamy, John Varghese, Sumita Mishra. Modern Literary Theory: A Reader ed. Philip Rice & Patricia Waugh, OUP, IV edition.
CANADIAN LITERATURE - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits: 4
Unit I Poetry
A.M. Klein - Political Meeting
E.J. Pratt - Silences
Al Purdy - Listening to Myself
Wilfred Campbell - The Winter Lakes
P.K.Page - Autumn
Unit II Prose
Stephen Leacock - ―How to Avoid Getting Married‖
(from Literary Lapses)
Margaret Atwood - ―Nature as Monster‖ (from Survival )
Unit III Fiction
Yann Martel - Life of Pi
Alice Munro - Dimensions
Unit IV Fiction
Uma Parameswaran - Mangoes on the Maple Tree
Unit V Drama
George Ryga - The Ecstasy of Rita Joe
89
Reference
An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry (ed) C.D.Narasimhaiah. Chennai, Macmillan.
Too much Happiness by Alice Munro
http://www.library.utoronto.ca/canpoetry/index_poet.htm
http://voices.cla.umn.edu/artistpages/paramerswaranUma.php
http://www.online-literature.com/stephen-leacock/literary-lapses/
WEB DESIGN -Core
Hrs: 6 Credits: 4
UNIT I Internet principles: Introduction to Internet – protocol-IP address-Internet
services –Email-WWW-Internet security-EDI and E-commerce
Introduction to HTML: History-Tags-Images and pictures-List-Tables
UNIT II Frames and forms: Definition-HTML forms-Elements of forms
Elements of JavaScript: Data types-variables-operators-Conditional
statements-Array, Date and String objects
UNIT III Objects and events: Document object model-The document object-Image
object-Forms and Elements –Event Handling-Browser object –Submit event and
data validation
User Input processing: ParseInt() Function-ParseFloat() Function-Recursive
function-Examples
UNIT IV Server side script with JSP: Client –Server Responsibilities –JSP Architecture
–JSP servers-tags-Request and Response object - Business processing with
JSP
JSP with JDBC: Introduction-Simple application
90
UNIT V Java servelet: Protocol support-HTML support-Replacing CGI Scripts-Installing
serve lets-Using Java web server-Servelet API- Life cycle-HTML to servelet
communication
Case studies: Online Railway reservation – Web enabled banking
TEXTBOOK:
WEB Technology and Design, C. Xavier, New Age International publishers,
2003
REFERENCE BOOK:
Java Script, Jeff Frantzen and Sobotka, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999.
PRACTICAL LIST- WEB DESIGN 1. Create a HTML static web page which shows the use of different tags.
2. Design a web page with images.
3. Design a Web page to display your Time table with color effect.
4. Create the Registration form using HTML.
5. Develop a complete web page using frames and framesets, which
give the information about your district.
6. Write a javascript code to change the background color at frequent
intervals.
7. Write a javascript to find the biggest number in a set of stored
numbers.
8. Create a JSP application that validates the login form.
91
ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING - Elective III
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I
English in India – Past, Present and Future
The Nature of Human Language
Linguistics, Psychology and English Teaching
Methods
Approach, Method and Technique
Unit II
Essentials of English Speech
Teaching Spoken English: Some Techniques
Essential Word-Grammar for Teachers
Teaching of Vocabulary
Unit III
Essentials of English Grammar
The Teaching of Grammar
Reading and Teaching of Reading
Writing and Teaching of Writing and Composition
Unit IV
Teaching Prose and Poetry
Use of Blackboard and other Instructional Aids
Study Skills and Reference Skills
Unit V
Tests and Testing
Common Errors and Remedial English
Planning and Lesson Planning
92
Reference:
Methods of Teaching English by N Krishnaswamy and Lalitha Krishnaswamy. Macmillan Publication. Readings in English Language Teaching in India by Shirin Kudchedkar. Orient BlackSwan Publishers. Teaching English as a Second Language by Paul Verghese . Sterling Publishers
OR
LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION - Elective III
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I Poetry
Thirukkural (Translated by G. U. Pope)
Book 1 Chapter – 8 - The Possession of Love
Book 2 Chapter – 40 - Learning
Chapter – 79 - Friendship
Unit II Poetry
Subramaniya Bharathiyar - Indian Republic
Freedom
There is no Fear
(Translated by S Prema)
Bharathidasan - The Awakened Women
Women‘s Education(Translated by
Prema Nandakumar)
The Bane of Widowhood
(Translated by S Raman)
Unit III Fiction
Thakazhi Sivasankara Pillai - Chemmeen
Thoppil Mohammed Meeran - The Story of Sea Side Village
Unit IV Drama
Bertolt Brecht - Mother Courage
Anton Chekhov - Three Sisters
93
Unit V Drama
R K Narayan - The Ramayana
Reference
Selected Poems of Bharathidasan- Bharathidasan University, Trichy.
Thirukkural Translated by G U Pope, Shree Shenbhaga Pathippagam
Semester IV
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I English Language
Place of English in the Indo – European Family of Languages
Old English, Middle English, Modern English
Grimm‘s Law, Verner‘s Law
Unit II
Influences: Latin, French, Greek, and Scandinavian
Unit III Linguistics
Language
What is Linguistics?
Modern Linguistics: A Historical Survey
Unit IV
Morphology and Word Formation
What is Semantics?
Theories of Semantics
Unit V Phonetics
Phonetics: Classification of English Vowels and Consonants
Stress and Intonation
Transcription
94
Reference:
F T Wood- An Outline History of English Language An Introduction to Linguistics: Language, Grammar and Semantics By Syal Pushpinder, D V Jindal 2nd edition PHI Learning Publisher(Pages: 1-27, 39-50,77-96, 141-156) Dr P Iyyadurai- English Phonetics for Beginners, Jones Publications. Lalitha Ramamurthi- A History of English Language and Elements of
Phonetics, Macmillan Publication
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY- Core
Hrs:6 Credits:5
Unit I
Selecting a topic Conducting Research Compiling a Working Bibliography
Unit II
Taking Notes Plagiarism
Unit III
The Mechanics of Writing
Unit IV
The Format of a Research Paper
Unit V
Documentation (I): Preparing the list of Works Cited
• Citing Periodical Print Publications
• Citing Nonperiodical Print Publications
• Citing Web Publications Documentation (II): Citing Sources in the Text
Reference:
Joseph Gibaldi – M L A Handbook for Writers of Research Papers, 7th Edition Holt Guide
95
DISSERTATION WRITING AND VIVA-VOCE- Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
The students are expected to submit a Dissertation of about 50 pages on
preferably a recent writer not included in the current syllabi.
The dissertation will be evaluated on the basis of the students‘
understanding of the topic, their knowledge of the fundamental aspects of
research and their ability to document and present their work in accordance with
the concepts of research methodology.
C PROGRAMMING - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I
Introduction to C: The C Character set – Identifiers and keywords – Data types –
Constants – Variables and Arrays – Declarations – Expressions – Statements –
Symbolic constants.
Operators and Expressions: Arithmetic Operators – Unary Operators – Relational and
Logical Operators – Assignment Operators – The Conditional Operator – Library
Functions.
Data Input and Output: Single character Input and Output – Entering Input and Writing
Output Data – The Gets and Puts Functions.
Unit II
Control Statements: The if-else Statement – The While Statement – The Do-While
Statement – The For Statement – Nested Control Structures –The Switch Statement –
The Break Statement – The Continue Statement – The Comma Operator – The Goto
Statement.
Unit III
Functions: Defining a Function – Accessing a Function – Function Prototypes –
Passing Arguments to a Function – Recursion.
Program Structure: Storage classes – Automatic Variables – External Variables –
Static Variables.
96
Unit IV
Arrays: Defining an Array – Processing an Array – Passing Arrays to a Function –
Multidimensional Arrays.
Strings: Defining a string – NULL Character – Initialization of Strings – Reading and
Writing a String – Processing the Strings – Character Arithmetic – Searching and
Sorting of Strings.
Pointers: Pointer Declarations – Passing Pointers to a Function - Pointers and One
Dimensional Arrays.
Unit V
Structures and Unions: Defining a Structure – Processing a Structure – User Defined
Data types (typedef) – Structures and pointers – Passing Structures to a Functions -
Unions.
File Handling: Opening and Closing a Data File – Reading and Writing a Data File –
Processing a Data File.
Text Books
Programming with C, Third Edition, Byron S Gottfried, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited (Unit II, Unit III, Unit IV and Unit V)
Reference Books
1. Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C, Reema Thareja, Oxford
University Press
2. How to Program C, Sixth Edition, Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, PHI Learning
Private Limited
PRACTICAL: C PROGRAMMING
1. Write a C program to find all the possible roots of a quadratic equation using
switch statement.
2. Write a C program to evaluate the power series for a required accuracy
ex = 1 + x + x2/2! + x3/3! + ….. + xn/n!, 0 < x < 1
3. Write a C program to sort a list of numbers in descending order.
4. Write a C program to search an element in an array.
97
5. Write a C program to find nCr using Recursion.
6. Write a C program to find GCD value using Recursion.
7. Write a C program to multiply two matrices, if they are compatible.
8. Write a C program to transpose any given Matrix.
9. Write a C program to check whether the given string is palindrome or not.
10. Write a C program to sort a list of names in alphabetical order.
11. Write a C program to calculate the standard deviation for a set of numbers using
function.
12. Write a C program to exchange the values stored in the memory using call by
address (using pointers and function).
13. Write a C program using structure to print the inventory report of a shop.
14. Write a C program to prepare the mark sheet using structure.
15. Write a C program to prepare the pay bill using file.
THE POSTCOLONIAL LITERATURE- Elective IV
Hrs: 6 Credits: 4
Unit I Poetry
Derek Walcott - A Far Cry from Africa
Gabriel Okara - You Laughed and Laughed and Laughed
Margaret Atwood - Journey to the Interior
Unit II Poetry
Muhammed Haji Salleh - Blood
Jean Arasanayagam - In the Month of July
- ―Wild Colonial Boy‖ (Anonymous
Australian Poem)
98
Unit III Drama
Wole Soyinka - Death and the King‘s Horseman
Manjula Padmanaban - Harvest
Unit IV Prose
Chinua Achebe - Novelist as a Teacher
Frantz Fanon - National Culture
Unit V Fiction
Michael Ondaatje - The English Patient
Bapsi Sidwa - Ice-candy Man
Reference:
Poetry-An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry by C.D.Narasimhaiah
Prose-The Post-colonial Studies Reader By Bill Ashcroft et.al
OR
WOMEN‘S WRITING IN ENGLISH- Elective IV
Hrs: 6 Credits: 4
Unit I Poetry
Sylvia Plath - The Colossus
Maya Angelou - Caged Bird
Imitiaz Dharker - Choice
Judith Wright - Clock and Heart
Unit II Prose
Virginia Woolf - To Cambridge Women
Arundhathi Roy - The Loneliness of Noam Chomsky
Unit III Fiction
Jhumpha Lahiri - The Namesake
Alice Walker - The Colour Purple
99
Unit IV Drama
Maha Swetadevi - Mother of 1084
Caryl Churchill - Top Girls
Unit V Feminist Theory
Simone de Beauvoir - Woman and the Other
Elaine Showalter - Towards a Feminist Poetics
Reference:
www.poetryfoundation.org /Bio/maya -angelou
www. Imitiazdharker.com/poems/show
An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry (ed) .D.Narasimhaiah. Chennai, Macmillan
For Arundhathi Roy‘s The Loneliness of Noam Chomsky-
www.countercurrents.org/us-roy/240803.htm
Literature in the Modern World: Critical Essays and Documents(ed.)
Dennis Walder . Oxford University Press
100
APPENDIX – AZ87
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY TIRUNELVELI – 627 012
M.Sc., GEOLOGY
I. Course Objectives:
i) To enable the students to have a thorough exposure to the different branches
of the Science of Geology so as to grasp a comprehensive knowledge of Geology.
ii) To facilitate the Students of M.Sc. Geology to join further studies which in
turn offer them both job opportunities and research pursuits.
iii) To cultivate logical thinking and analytical skills this entitles and sharpens
faculties such as concentration and patience to grapple with life outside the campus.
iv) To help the students of Geology apply the skills and knowledge gained
through Geology to real life situation and face competitive, the study of examination with confidence.
v) Upon successful completion of this course, students will have acquired a
familiarity with the fundamentals of the scientific method, geology, geophysics and environmental earth science.
II. Eligibility Norms for Admission to M.Sc., Geology:
Candidates for admission to the M.Sc., Degree (Geology) Course shall be
required to Pass the final examination of B.Sc., Geology and equivalent thereto with a minimum marks under academic stream or a course of studies recognized and approved by the Syndicate of the Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli.
III. Transitory Provision
Candidates admitted to this course of studies which come into effect from June,
2012 should complete the course before June, 2020. Those who fail to complete the course the afore-said stipulated time have to pass equivalent papers to be dedicated by the prospective P.G. Chairman of Board of Studies, Manonmaniam Sundaranar University.
101
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY TIRUNELVELI – 627 012
M.Sc., GEOLOGY UNDER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
REVISED SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
(For those who joined the course from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards)
Name of the Paper
FIRST SEMESTER
Core Subjects = 3 courses
Dynamic Geology and Environmental Geology
Palaeontology
Indian Stratigraphy
Elective Subjects = 1 course
Fuel Geology OR Research methodology OR Marine Geology
Practical I – 1 Course (No exam in I semester) [Based on Core Subjects Palaeontology, Dynamic Geology and Environmental Geology and Elective Subjects]
Total - 4 courses
Second semester Core Subjects = 3 courses
Crystallography and Mineralogy
Hydrogeology
Photogeology and Remote Sensing
Elective Subjects = 1 course
GIS and Computational Geology OR Isotope Geology OR Geoexploration
Practical II – 1 Course [Based on Core Subjects (Crystallography- Projections, Mineralogy-Mega, Microscopic studies, Mineral calculations,Hydrogeology calculations photogeology and remote sensing) and Elective Subject]
Total - 6 courses (4T and 2P)
102
Hours/ Week
5
5
5
5
10
30
Credit s
4
4
4
4
4
20
4
4
4
5
8
25
S.No
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
5
5
5
5
10
30
S.No Name of the Paper Hours/ Credit Week s
Third Semester
Core Subjects = 3 courses
3.1 Igneous Petrology 5 4
3.2 Sedimentary Petrology 5 4
3.3 Metamorphic petrology 5 3
Elective subjects = 1 course
3.4 Applied Geology (Engineering Geology, Mining 5 5 Geology and Ore Dressing) OR Social Geology OR Nano Geoscience
3.5 Practical III – Based on Core Subjects and 10 4
Elective Subjects [Igneous Petrology , Sedimentary Petrology, Metamorphic petrology and Electvie subjects]
Total (4 courses) 30 20 Fourth Semester
Core Subjects = 3 courses
4.1 Structural Geology 5 4
4.2 Economic Geology and Mineral economics 5 4
4.3 Applied Geophysics and Geochemistry 5 4
4.4 Project = 1 course 6 5
Practicals = 2 courses
4.5 Practical – IV 9 4 Based on Core subjects[Structural Geology- Map and structural geology problems, Economic Geology, Applied Geophysics and Geochemistry]
4.6 Practical – V Geological Mapping and field studies 4 Mapping = 1 Credit Short field trips and Professional training = 1 Credit Field Training and Specimen Collection = 1 Credit Viva voce on mapping, field training, industrial training and short field trips = 1 Credit.
Total - 6 courses 30 25
Total number of courses : 20(16T + 4P) Total number of hours : 120 Total number of credits : 90
103
Notes:
1. Each paper carries an internal component. 2. There is a pass minimum of 50% for external and overall components. 3. Theory : Internal Assessment – 75:25 4. Practical, External : Internal Assessment =60:40 5. Internal marks for practicals should be allotted in the following manner
Experiments = 20 Record = 10 Model Test = 10 Total = 40 Marks
6. For three year P.G courses like M.Sc., the total credits will be 90. 7. The respective Board of Studies shall decide the Course Structure without
affecting the Common Course Structure. 8. Hours For non-practical subjects, practical‘s shall be replaced by
Core/Elective Courses without affecting the Common Course Structure.
Other Recommendations of the Core Committee
1.Internal assessment:
Regarding the Internal assessment, the 25 marks is allocated in the following manner.
Components Marks
The average of the best two tests from 15 three compulsory Tests.
Assignment 04
Seminar 06
Total 25
Note :
Each test is of one hour duration.
2. Project Work: (PG only)
Components Marks
Project Report 60
Viva-Voce 40
Total 100
Note: (a) The projects for PG students shall be ―Group projects‖ Each group shall contain 3 or 4 students. (b) Project report evaluation will be done at the end of second year during practical examination and Viva-voce will be conducted by both the External examiner and the guide at end of second year during practical examination.
3. The Aided courses and Unaided courses shall not be clubbed. 4. The Board of Studies shall suggest the Infrastructure requirements for each course
104
5. A three-tier grievance redressal mechanism should evolved involving the Department, the College and the University. Revolution provision shall be give to all students. 6. A common Academic calendar informing the reopening day, the closing day and the Examination Time table etc. has to be provided on the reopening day itself. 7. The College shall make available to each student a Bulletin, listing all the courses offered in that semester well in advance. 8. The Performance of the Students is indicated by the seven point scale grading system as per the UGC norms given below: For PG course
Grade Grade Point Percentage of Marks Performance
O 9.5 and Above 95-100 Outstanding
E 8.5 and Above 85-94 Excellent
D 7.5 and Above 75-84 Distinction
A 6.0 and Above 70-74 Very good
B 5.0 and Above 60-69 Good
C 4.0 and Above 50-59 Average
RA 0 Upto 49 Re-Appear
9. The overall performance level of the candidates will be assessed by the following formulae:
∑ (Marks x Credits)
Cumulative Weighted Average of Marks =————————— ∑ Credits
∑ (Grade point x Credits)
Cumulative Weighted Average Grade Points =———————————— ∑ Credits
10. There is a separate passing minimum for the external and the overall components. 11. The question pattern for all theory paper as follows
Section Type of question Marks
Part A Multiple Choice Questions (Two 1 x 10 = 10 marks questions from each Unit) 5x2
Part B Internal Choice Questions (One 5 x 5 = 25 marks Question from each Unit) 5x1
Part C Internal Choice Questions (One 5 x 8 = 40 marks Question from each Unit) 5x1
Total 75 Marks
105
MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS OF THE COURSE
Geological Mapping of an area as determined by the Professor-in-charge shall be held
for a duration of about 10 days time during the First/ third semester for I M.Sc., and II M.Sc., Geology students in the form of group study. Each student will submit a geological mapping report at the end of Second Year course during the Practical examination. There will be a viva voce on it.
Students shall have to complete at least one short field trip as determined by the Professor-in-charge during First year. A report on the short field trip is to be submitted by the individuals at the end of Second Year course during the Practical examination. There will be a viva voce on it.
Students shall have to undergo a professional training in any of the industries, mining or institutes related to geosciences and as determined by the Professor-in- charge during the vacation following First year examinations in the form of group study. A report on the professional training is to be submitted at the end of Second Year course during the Practical examination. There will be a viva voce on it.
I M.Sc., and II M.Sc., Geology Students shall undertake long field visit (Geology Tour) of duration of about three weeks to places of geological interest as determined by the Professor-in-charge during First / Third semester. Each student shall submit a field report along with the collected specimens at the end of Second Year course during the Practical examination. There will be a viva voce on it.
Students shall carry out a research project on a geological theme,area and topic as determined by the Professor-in-charge during the course of study. Each student shall submit a dissertation (Four copies) at the end of Second Year course during the Practical examination. There will be a viva voce on it.
All these above activities carry both marks and credits.
106
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI – 627 012
M.Sc., GEOLOGY UNDER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
III SEMESTER 3.1 IGNEOUS PETROLOGY
UNIT I Forms, structures and textures of igneous rocks and their significance-
classification of igneous rocks - mineralogical and chemical- C.I.P.W, Niggli, Tyrrel,
IUGS and Rosenbusch.
UNIT II
Application of physical chemistry in petrogenesis-phase rule and equillibrium
in silicate system-crystallization of two component systems diopside –anorthite
system,alibite-anorthite system,leucite-silica system, and three component systems.
Alibite-anorthite – diopside system, Anorthite–forsterite - silica system,diopside -
forsterite-silica system and albite - anorthite - Kalsilite system.
UNIT III Crystallization Of Magma With Particular Reference To Basaltic Magma-
Reaction Principle-Diversity Of Igneous Rocks-Petrographic Provinces-variation
diagrams.
UNIT IV Petrology – Granite- Syenite, Gabbro, Peridotite, Dunite, Lamprophyre,
Carbonatite, Basalt, Spillit and Keratophyre.
UNIT V Petrogenesis of Granite, Pegmatites, alkaline rocks, anorthosites, carnbonatites,
Charnockite, ultrabasic rocks and lamprophyres.
References:
1.Tyrrel,G.W,1963 Principle of petrology. Methunn&co 2.Turner,F.J,Verhoogen,J.1960-Igneous and Metamorphic petrology, McGraw Hill Co,Newyork. 3.Bowen,n.l.,1968 -Evolution of igneous rocks dover publication. 4.Huang,T,1962-Petrology McGraw hill book.Co ., 5. Hatch, F.E, Wells, A.K and Wells, M.K, 1949- Petrology of igneous rocks, Thomas Mury and co. 6. Hyndman, Donald, 1972- Petrology of Igneous and Metamorphic rocks,mcgraw hill book co… 7. Raymond,L.A ,2002 - Petrology, McGraw Hill book co., New York.
107
III SEMESTER
3.2 SEDIMENTARY PETROLOGY (CORE SUBJECT)
UNIT I
The texture of sediments-size, shape and roundness, porosity and permeability.
textures of non - clastic sediments – the mechanical and chemical structures of
sedimentary rocks-classification of sedimentary rocks - graban, krynine, pettijohn and
Goldschmidt.
UNIT II
Study of important clastic and non-clastic rocks, sandstones,
classification.terminology, chemical composition, origin of chemical cements. Mud rocks
- mineral and chemical composition, sedimentary structure, compaction of mud rocks
and porosity.
UNIT III
Mineralogy, carbonate frame work, Organic matter, Limestone, sedmentary
structures. Diagenetic process. Sedmentary classification of limestone. Dolomite –
primary and secondary mechanism of dolomitisation, dedolomitisation. Evaporites and
native sulpur. Chert-texture, genesis and origin. Phosphates-mineralogy and genesis.
UNIT IV
Concept of sediment size and grade scale - principles of mechanical analysis,
parameters of the frequency distribution of sediments-median, mode,mean,sorting
velocities of small particles-stoke‘s law. Porosity and permeability and their
determination in sediments. Measurement of roundness and sphericity and their
significance.
UNIT V Methods of heavy minerals seperation and their sigificance in sediments-
sedimentary environments and facies-diagenesis and lithification-physical and chemical
factors in sedimentation.
108
References:
1. Blatt H, Middletion, Grand Murray.R, 1972.Origin of sedimentary rocks, Prentice Hall.
2. Carver,R.E.197. Procedures in sedimentary petrology, Inter Science.
3. Folk.F.L., 1968.Petrology of sedimentary rocks Hempill‘s University station Texas,.
4. Krumbein W.C.and Pettijohn F.J. 1938, Manual of sedimentary petrology, Appleton
Century co.
5. Pettijohn F.J.,Potter,p.e. 1972.Silver.r.sand and stones. Springer-Verlag.
6. Pettijohn F.J. 1857. Sedimentary rocks.harper&row,.
7. Selley R.C. 1972. Ancient sedimentary environments Corwell University press.
III SEMESTER
PAPER 3.3 .METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY (CORE SUBJECT)
UNIT I
Agents and kinds of metamorphism, the Gibbs Phase Rule and Goldschmidt‘s
mineralogical phase rule.
UNIT II Classification of metamorphic rocks. Metamorphic textures and structures.
Metamorphic grades and zones concepts-depth zones, contact metamorphic
zones,barrovian zones, buchan zones, sanbagawa zones, franciscan zones,
dharwarian zones. Paired metamorphic belts.
UNIT III Concept of metamorphic facies.facies classification of metamorphic rocks.Views
of eskola, Winkler, Turner and Verhoogen. Graphical representation of facies diagrams.
ACF and AKF diagrams. Metamorphic differentiation.
UNIT IV Thermal, cataclastic ,and regional metamorphism and thier effects on
carbonates,argillaceous,arenaceous and acid ,basic and ultrabasic igneous rocks.
Retrograde metamorphism.
UNIT V Metasomatism, Granitisation, Migmatisation,Charnockitisation, Palingenesis, Origin of Eclogites, origin of Amphibolites metamorphism In relation to plate tectonics, Magmatic emplacements and orogenies.
109
REFERENCES
1. Tyrrell, G.W. 1963. Principles of Petrology, Methunn, Co.,. 2. Winkler H.G.F. 1974. Petrogenesis of Metamorphic rocks, Third Edn. Springer
Verlag. 3. Turner F.J. 1968. Metamorphic Petrology, McGraw Hill. 4. Miyashiro, A. 1973. Metamorphism and metamorphic belts Allan and Unwin. 5. Hyndman, F.D. 1972. Petrology of Igneous & Metamorphic rocks McGraw Hill. 6. Bhaskar Rao,1986, Metamorphic petrology, International Book house, Second ED,m
12. Bangalow Road, Delhi- 110 007.Williams, H ,F.J Turner and C.M., Ghilbert,
1954, Petrography. W.H. Freeman and Co.,
7. Winkler, H.G.S. 1979. Pertogenesis of Metamorphic rocks, Springer Verlag Vth ed.
III SEMESTER
3.4. APPLIED GEOLOGY ( ENGINEERING GEOLOGY, MINING GEOLOGY AND ORE DRESSING) (ELECTIVE SUBJECT)
UNIT I
Engineering Geology
Role of engineering geology in civil costruction and mining industry various
stages of engineering geological investigation for civil engineering projects. Engineering
properties of rocks, properties of building stones – Granite industries.
UNIT II
Geological consideration for evaluation of Dams and Reservoir sites Dam
foundation,rock problems. Geochemical evaluation of tunnel alignments and
transportation routes. Method of tunneling, soft and hard rock tunneling. Earthquake
and seismicity,seismic zones of India. A seismic design of building. Influence of
geological conditions on foundation and design of buildings.
UNIT III
Mass movement- Landslides-and their causes. Land subsidence and their
causes and prevention measures. Geological investigation pertaining to foundation of
Bridges and Highways.Types of engineering structures to prevent coastal erosion.
110
UNIT-IV
Mining Geology
Prospecting, Sampling and evaluation of ore resources. Definition of terms –
Open cast and underground mining. Alluvial mining, Underground mining methods,Coal
mining methods, Room and Pillar method, Longwall advancing Long wall retreating,
Horizon mining , Underground hydraulic mining and strip mining.
UNIT – V
Ore Dressing
General Principles- Size reduction, Rod mills, Ball mills and Tube Mills.
Screening. Principles of Magnetic separation and electrostatic separation. Floatation -
Beneficiation of some important metals: Copper – Aluminium – Iron – Gold –
Manganese – Titanium – Zinc – Lead.
References:
1. Richards R.H.and C.E. Lecke, 1927. Hand book of ore dressing , Mc.Graw Hill Book
co.
2. Gaudin A.M., 1939. Principles of mineral dressing , Mc – Graw Hill Book co.
3. Truscott S.J. 1923– Text book of ore dressing , Macmillan co.
4. Gohahle and Rao, T.C. 1972. ore deposits of India – Thosman Press India ltd.
5. Krynine and Judd – Principle of Engineering Geology and Geotechniques.
6. Valdiya, K.S. 1987.Environmental Geology - Indian Context, Tata – McGrawhill New
Delhi.1977.
7. Arogyaswamy , R.N.P. 1996. Courses in mining geology , Oxford & IBH – Publishers.
III SEMESTER
3.5. SOCIAL GEOLOGY (ELECTIVE SUBJECT)
UNIT I GEOLOGICAL HERITAGE
Needs to protect-measures of conservation-brief description of any five
geological heritage locatites of India-Geologial organizations of India - Role of geologist
in Nation building - Case histories of people‘s movement to protect land and water.
111
UNIT II
WATER RESOURCES
Interlinking of Rivers-Surface water and Groundwater Budget-Groundwater
Borewell Strategies for Optimal Use-Groundwater borne diseases and mitigation
measures- quality standards for potable water – Ground water exploitation by industries
and its social implications: conservation and conjunctive use – Rainwater harvesting.
UNIT III
DISASTER PREPAREDNESS
Personal, private and public precautions and safety measures to be observed
before, during and after geological events such as earthquakes – tsunamis – landslides
- caving and fire in petroleum and coal fields.
UNIT IV
SOCIAL IMPLICATION OF MINING
Environmental issues concerning mineral mining - geological and social effects of
river sand abstraction-Rehabilitation of local populace of mine area-Land reclamation-
mining waste disposal.
UNIT V
MINERAL ECONOMICS
National Mineral Policy-Mineral wealth of India-Mining laws-minor and major
minerals-mineral royalties - Geological modification due to developmental activities-
coastal regulation.
References 1. Knell, S.J., 2000.Thed Culture of English Geology, 1815-1851:A Science Revealed Through its Collecting.UK:Ashgate,400pp. 2. Prasad, K.N., 2006.An Introduction to Earth Science: Heritage Site. A.P.H.Publishing Corporation. 3. Bell. F.G. 1998. Environmental Geology Principles and Practice. Blackwell science. Oxford.597. 4. Rowe. R.K. Geotechnical and geoenvironmental engineering handbook . Ed. R.K. Edition. U.S.A.
112
III SEMESTER NANOGEOSCIENCES (ELECTIVE SUBJECT)
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION TO NANOGEOSCIENCE:
Introduction – Definition – Applicable fields of study – Types and environment of
nanoparticles – Natural and anthropogenic inputs – Size – dependent stability and
reactivity of nanoparticle – Benefits – Risks – Remediaation.
UNIT – II
NANOMINERALOGY:
Nanocrystal – Transformation of nanoparticle structure – Nanoparticle growth –
surface impurities – Biomineralization: microbial biomineralization – Nanostandard
materials.
UNIT – III
NANOSYSTEMS:
Mineral-water-bacteria – Biomimetic Soils and sediments – Atmospheric
particulates- Carbon cycle – Organic-Inorganic Nanoparticle Interactions in sedimentary
systems – Magnetic nanomaterials – Biogenic magnetite – Zeolites,Clays, Fe-Ti oxides,
and phosphate minerals.
UNIT – IV
NANOTECHNOLOGY:
Brief principles and description of :calorimetry, UV visible Infra-Red, Raman and
NMR spectroscopy,Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) Atomic Force Microscopy,
Electron Microprobe and High-Resolution Transmission Electron Microscopy –
Definition and applications of nano-satellites and micro-satellites.
113
UNIT-V
NANOMATERIALS:
Properties at the nanoscale – Categories: Metal and Ceramic
Nanopowders,Carbon Nanotubes and Nanospheres, Nanowires, Quantum Dots,
Dendrimers, Protein and Structured Polymer Strands – Nanometrology – Dispersions –
Top-down and Bottom-up methods.
References:
1. Andersen, M.M. and Rasmussen, B., 2006. Nanotechnology development in Denmark-
environment opportunities and risk. Riso National Laboratory, Denmark. 2. Chemical Industry R&D Roadmap for Nanomaterials By Design: From Fundamentals to Function,2003. www.ChemicalVision2020.org . 3. Cientifica,2003.‖The Nanotechnology Oppurtunity Report‖,2nd Edition, Executive Summary. CMP Cientifica,2002.‖Nanotechnology‖The Tiny Revolution. 4. Nartikar.Y.Y. Fu. 2010.Hand book. Nanoscience and Technology. 5. Muralidharan. V.S. M 1998. Nanoscience. Alagappa Chettiar College of
Engineering technology.
IV SEMESTER
MSc Geology 2012 Onwards STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY
UNIT- I
Introdcution to structural geology- GPS and their uses in Geological Mapping –
Bedsand their attitudes – Dip and Strike – Trends of outcrops – Rotation between
trueand apparent dips, width of outcrops, True thickness and vertical thickness and their
mutual relations.
Unit - II
Mechanical properties of rock – Stress and strain and Types. Stress and strain
ellipsoids – Mohr Circle. Physical properties of rocks-deformation - brittleness, plastic
and elastic properties. Rock deformation and stage. Foliation, Types of cleavage,
foliation, schistosity, crenulation- orientation of foliation within strain ellipsoid. Lineation-
Types and relation to tectonic histroy.
114
Unit III
Geomertry and mechanics of folding, mino fold-origin and relation to major structure.
Classificaion and types of folds and mechanics of similar folding. Recognitions of folds
in the field. Salt intrusion and salt domes- Unconformities and types – Determination of
top and bottom of beds.
Unit IV
Study of joints- their classification and significances, Faults – Classification –types-
Normal, thrust and slip faults. Mechanics of faulting with reference to stress and stress
ellipsoids. Recognition of faults in the field classification and geometry of different types
of shear zones. Strain variaitons within shear zone. Origin and significance of different
types of minor structures within shear zone. Sense of movement and its determination
in shear zones.
Unit V
Principles and phase of structural analysis. Petro fabrics –field and laboratory
technique- tectonites and their symmetry – Application of streographic projection in the
solving of structural problem. Structural analysis of areas of 1,2, and 3 Phase of
deformation. Interface structures of different scales and their origin.
References
1. Billing, M.P., 1974. Structural Geology, Prentice Hall. 2. Hobbs, R.F. et.al .1976. An outline of structural geology, Wiley. 3. Hills, E.L., 1965. Elements of Structural Geology, Asia Publication House. 4. Beloussov, V.V., 1954. Basic problems in Geotectonics, McGraw Hill. 5. De Sitter, U., 1956. Structural Geology, McGraw Hill. 6. Navin, C.M., 1953. Principle of Structural Geology, Wiley. 7. Lahee, H., 1959. Field Geology, McGraw Hill. 8. Ragan, D.M. – 1973 – Structural Geology, Wiley. 9. Ramsay, J.G. 1967 – folding and fracturing of rocks, McGraw Hill. 10. Philips, F.C. 1954 – The use of Streographic projection in Structural Geology,
Arnold Publishers.
115
IV SEMESTER ECONOMIC GEOLOGY AND MINERAL ECONOMICS
Unit I
Minerals used in the manufacture of cement, Abrasives, Precious and semi-precious
minerals, Refractories, Metallurgical, Fertilizer, Building Industries, Ceramics, Glass,
Chemicals, Paints and Pigments and Insulators – Mineral water and Ground water.
Unit II
Ore microscopy – The ore microscope, Preparation of polished surface of ores,
Physical and optical properties of ore mineral, microchemical techniques and
applications of ore microscopy. Techniques of investigations in ore mineragraphic
studies.
Unit III Controls of ore localisation – Geothermometry, geobarometry, paragenetic
sequence, zoning and dating of ore deposits. Features structures of ore and gangue
minerals. Fluid inclusions wall rock alteration. Metallogenic Epochs and Provinces –
Geologic setting and genesis of the following Indian mineral deposits. Iron, Manganese,
Chromium, Nickel, Cobalt, Vanadium, Molybdenum, Tungsten, Copper, Lead, Zinc, Tin,
Gold, Silver, Aluminium, Magnesium, Titanium, Uranium, Thorium.
UNIT-IV Concept - Scope of study- Peculiarities In mineral industry - A brief outline of
World‘s mineral resources including Marine Origin.Mining laws - major and minor
minerals - royalty on minerals- an overview of the mines and minerals (regulation and
development)act. Tenor - grade and specification of ores.
Unit IV Strategic,critical and essential minerals - classification of minerals from military
point of view - Mineral conservation and substitution - Outline Of National Mineral policy.
Process of formation of mineral deposits; Magmatic concentration – Contact
metasomatism-Hydrothermal processes-Metasomatic replacement –Sedimentation-
Evaporation – Residual and mechanical concentration – Oxidation and supergene
enrichment – Metamorphism.
116
References:
1. Bateman. A.M. Economic mineral deposits, John Wiley & Sons 2. Krishnaswamy. S . 1972.India‘s Mineral Resources, Oxford and IBH Publishers
New Delhi . 3. Gokhale and Rao Oredeposits of India, Thompson press, New Delhi. 4. Sinha,R.K.,sharma,N.L.,1976-Mineraleconomics.second edition ,oxford&ibh
publicating co.New Delhi,368pp. 5. Krishnaswamy,S.,- 1971 – Indian Mineral Resources, oxford&ibh publishing co.,
New Delhi. 6. Arogyaswamy,R.N.P.,1973 - Courses in Mining Geology ,oxford and ibh
publishing co., New Delhi.
IV SEMESTER
APPLIED GEOPHYSICS AND GEOCHEMISTRY. (CORE SUBJECT)
Unit I
Geophysics – Definition – Subsurface exploration – Interrelationship between geology
and geophysics - Geophysical methods – Types of measurements – exploration based
on electrical resistivity method – Instrumentation and field Procedure – electrode
arrangement of different configuration – VES, 2D ERI, 3D ERI (ERI – Electrical
Resistivity Imaging – Square array method – Fundamentals of seismic prospecting -
Seismic studies– field procedure – Data interpretation. Principles of gravity method-
gravimeter- field surveys and interpretation.
Unit II Magnetic studies – Instrument for magnetic survey – field procedure – data
interpretation. Radioactivity and its detection- Scintillation Counter. Field procedure and
interpretation, principle of air – borne and well logging methods.
UNIT-III Definition,aims and scope, geochemical structure and compostion of the earth.
Different hypothesis about core, mantle and crust. Distribution of elements in the
geospheres. Geochemical affinity. Geochemical classification of elements. Geochemisty
of geospheres, lithosphere, hydrosphers, biosphere and atmosphere.
UNIT-IV Geochemical differentiation of elements, geochemistry of lithosphere, magmatic
cycle with reference to behaviour of elements during crystallization, differentiation,early
magmatic, middle magmatic and late post magmatic stages magmatic cycle. The
chemical principles of crystal.
117
UNIT-V
Exogenic Cycle – Sedimentation – Principles – Process – Products of
Weathering. Geochemical Classification of Sediments.
References: 1. Dobrin M.B., and Savit C.H.,1988. Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting (4th
ed.,) McGraw – Hill, New York. 2. Parasnis D. S .1997, Principles of applied geophysics, Chapman & Hall, 2-6
Boundary Row, London SE1 8HN, UK. 3. Ramachandra Rao, M.B., Prasaranga, 1975. Outlines of Geophysical Prospecting -
A manual for geologists by University of Mysore, Mysore,. 4. Telford, W.M. Geldart, L.P. and Sherriff, R.E., 1990. Applied Geophysics, 2nd Ed,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 770 pp. 5. Kruskopf.E.B. 1967. Introduction to geochemistry, mcgraw, hill. 6. Brian mason, 1966.principles of geochemistry,willey 7. Brounlow,A.N. 1979.Geochemistry,prentice hall. 8.
PRACTICALS
IV SEMESTER
4.4. PROJECT EVALUATION AND VIVA VOCE
Practical exam IV Semester / End of second year
PRACTICAL III: PETROLOGY AND ELECTIVE SUBJECT
Preparation of thin section of rocks, Megascopic and mircoscopic study of igneous,
sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Micrometric analysis. Modal composition of rocks.
Petrochemical calculations CIPW Norm, Variation diagram of Harker, Niggli and Larsen,
ACF, AKF, AFM diagrams, determination of various parameters of sedimentary rocks
and their interpretations, Mechanical analysis of sediments - Graphic representation and
statistical analysis of data. Mineral seperation in sediments. Microscopic identificaiton of
clastic grains.
Problems related to engineering geology, Mining geology, ore dressing, / Social
geology/ Nano geoscience. Ore reserve estimation.
Semester IV
Practical – IV :STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY- ECONOMIC GEOLOGY, APPLIED
GEOLOGY AND GEOCHEMISTRY.
Structural Geological map, structural geology problems, classification of groundwater
and rock types based on geological and geophysical data and field maps. Visual
interpretation of aerial photos and satellite imageries of structural interest.
PRACTICAL V : Geological Mapping and Field studies
Mapping, Short field trips, Professional training, Field training, Industrial training and
Specimen collection.
Viva Voce on Mapping, Field training, Industrial training and Short field trips.
118
MODEL QUESTIONS
M.Sc. Geology (2012-2013 onwards) Core Course:
Sub. Code:
M.Sc., (CBCS) DEGREE EXAMINATIONS NOVEMBER 2012 GEOLOGY I Semester DYNAMIC GEOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY (For those who joined in July 2012 onward) Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks: 75
SECTION – A
Answer ALL the Questions. All questions carry equal marks
Answer all questions. All questions carry equal marks. 10X1=10 Marks
1. Out of all tectonics regions of the globe, maximum heat flow found in the
(a) Subduciton zone (b) Flank province ( c) Mid oceanic ride (d) Island arc
2. A plate comprises
(a) Crust only (b) Crust and whole of the mantle (c) Crust and some part of mantle (d)
crust, mantle and some part of core.
3. The mildest type of volcanic eruption in which lavas are discharged quietly
(a) Hawaiian type (b) Volcanoes type (c) Pilinian type (d) Pelean type
4. The general trend of Alpine mountain is
(a) East-West (b) North –South west (c) North – East _ South West (d) South South
East -North North West
5. The name of deposits formed by the sea
(a) Alluvial deposits (b) Lacustrine deposits
(c) Marine deposits (d) Aeoline deposits
6. A flat topped hillock in the sea floor is called as
(a) Butte (b) Cirque (c) Hogback (d) Guyot
7. The most abundant gaseous product of volcanic eruption is
(a) Stream (b) Sulphur (c) CO2 (d) H2O
8. Formation of Travertine terraces are due to
(a) Wind erosion (b) Flurio glacial action (c) Groundwater action (d) Glacial action
9. Volcanic eruption produces the
(a) Gaseous products (b) Liquid products (c) Solid products (d) All of the above
10. Rise of magma resulted in
( a) sea floor spreading (b)volcanic eruption (c) upwelling of magma (d) all of the above
119
Section - B
Answer all questions. All questions carry equal marks (5 X 5=25Marks)
11. a. Explain theories of plate tectonics.
(or)
b. Explain polar wandering.
12. a. Explain Island Arc systems.
(or)
b. Explain causes of evaluation of arc trench gap.
13. a. Explain methods of recognitions of past sea level changes.
(or)
b. Explain Eustatic effect on coast.
14. a. Explain basic concept of Environmental Geology?
(or)
b. explain mass wasting.
15. a. Explain hazards due to earthquake.
(or)
b. explain the causes of volcanism
Section – C
Answer all questions. All questions carry equal marks ( 5 x 8 = 40 Marks)
16. a. Describe types of plate boundaries and their relation to mineral deposits.
(or)
b . Origin and evolution of submarine canyons.
17. a. Explain origin and evolution of Island arc system?
(or)
b. Give an account of geosynclines.
18. a. Explain theories of Isostacy
(or)
b. Give a geological forms of energy and energy balance.
19. a. Explain various forms of energy and energy balance.
(or)
b. Explain causes of hazards due to surface geological process.
20. a. Explain environmental impact of mining.
(or)
b. Explain deep – rooted geological processes and its impact on environments.
120
M.Sc., (CBCS) DEGREE EXAMINATIONS NOVEMBER 2012
GEOLOGY I Semester
1.3. PALAEONTOLOGY (For those who joined in July 2012 onward)
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks: 75 SECTION – A
Answer ALL the Questions.All questions carry equal marks(10 x 1 = 10 Marks)
1. Ontogeny recapitulate phylogeny is called as
(a) Palingenesis (b) Coenogenesis (c) Bradygenesis (d) Tachygenesis
2. The Sutural pattern in ammonites having
(a) Monophyllic (b) Triphyllic (c) Diphyllic (d) Tetraphyllic
3. The first erected man appeared in man evolution is
(a) Homosapier (b) Neanderthah man (c) Cromagnanman (d) None of these
4. The Moeritherium belongs to the epoch
(a) Eocene (b) Oligocene (c) Miocene (d) Pliocene
5. Lower Gondawana index plant fossil is
(a) Glossopteris (b) Ptilophyllum (c) Lepidodentron (d) None of these
6. The Biserial foraminifera is
(a) Textularia (b) Nodosaria (c) Lagena (d) Geobigerina
7. Bottom dwelling organisms is called as
(a) Benthos (b) Nektons (c) Planktons (d) None of these
8. Diatom encountered more in the environment of
(a) Ciliata (b) Sarcodina (c) Heliozoa (d) None of these
9. The fossil planisporites belongs to the age
(a) Upper Devonian - Permian (b) Upper- Carboniferrous (c) Triassic (d) Jurassic
10. The foraminiferal groups Allogromia indicates the environment of
(a) Freshwater ( b) Marine (c) Brackish (d) None of these
PART-B
Answer ALLquestions. All questions carry equal marks. (5x 5 =25 Marks)
11. (a) Give brief account of Darwin principles of evolution.
(or)
(b) Describe briefly the suture patterns in Cephalopods.
12. (a) Give brief account of evolutionary trends in Horses.
(or) (b) Describe Moeritherium and Dinotherium.
121
13. (a) Describe the Dimorphism characters of Foraminifera?
(or) (b) Describe the dentitions in Ostracoda.
14. (a) Give an brief the Radiolarian morphology? (or)
(b) Describe briefly the diatom morphology. 15. (a) Describe the classification of Spores .
(or) (b) Describe the classification of Pollens.
PART-C Answer all questions. All questions carry equal marks . (5x8=40 Marks)
16. (a) Graptolites are true index fossil Discuss?
(or) (b) Trace the evolutionary trends noticed in trilobite. Add a note on their Bio-
Stratigraphy? 17. (a) Give an account of evolution of Man.
(or) (b) Describe the Gondawana and Tertiary flora of India .
18. (a) Describe the micro palaeontological technique applied in separation and identification of microfossil?
(or) (b) Describe Ostracod morphology. Add note on their classification and geological
history. 19. (a) Describe the Diatom ecology and Palaeontology.
(or) (b) Describe the morphology of Conodont, Stromotolite and Pteropods.
20. (a) Describe the Maceration techniques in separation of spores and pollens. (or)
(b) Describe the environmental significance of microfossil.
***
122
APPENDIX – AZ88
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI
M.C.A Degree Course under CBCS
3 years - 6 Semesters - Course
Rules & Regulations are framed By M.C.A Board of Studies with effect from-2012 June
1. Eligibility criteria for M.C.A Admission:
As insisted by A.I.C.T.E Norms
2. Practical examinations must be conducted Semester-wise
3. Each theory paper shall carry an Internal Assessment Components
External Marks: Internal Marks = 75 : 25
Distribution Of Internal Marks:
Internal assessment Marks
component
The Average of the best two tests 15
from three compulsory Tests
Assignment 04
Seminar 06
Total 25
Note: The time duration of the each test is one hour.
123
4. Each Practical paper shall carry an Internal Assessment Components
External Marks : Internal Marks = 60 : 40
Distribution of Internal marks:
Internal assessment component Marks
Experimental works 20
Model test 10
Record 10
Total 40
5. Mini project must be carried out during the V
th Semester of the
Programme
Mini Project shall carry an Internal Assessment Components
External Marks : Internal Marks = 60 : 40
Distribution of Internal marks:
Internal assessment components Marks
Project work first review 10
on 50% Completion
Project work second review 20
on 100% Completion
Project Report 10
Total 40
124
6. Main project must be carried out during the VI
th Semester of the
Programme
Main Project shall carry an Internal Assessment Components
External Marks : Internal Marks = 150 : 50
Distribution of Internal marks:
Marks
Internal assessment components
Project work first review 20
on 50% Completion
Project work second review 20
on 100% Completion
Project Report 10
Total 50
7. Elective Papers are introduced in the IV &V semesters
Semester No of elective papers
IV 2
V 2
125
8. Guidelines for the improvement of the present system
a) Lesson planning & Time Schedule may be prepared for each theory papers
at the beginning of the each semester
b) Unit-wise test may be conducted periodically to the each theory paper.
c) Subject-wise Model exam may be conducted at the end of every Semester
covering 100% Syllabus.
d) Subject-wise students‘ seminar topic should be given from the relevant area
outside the syllabus.
d) Final year students may be permitted for Industrial visit during the V
th
semester
e) Final year Students may be motivated to participate in the National and
International Seminar and to workshops/Mock-up interviews inside the
Campus.
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
(EFFECT FROM 2012 – 2013 ONWARDS)
I SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Core Mathematical Foundations of 4 4
Computer Science - I
2 Core Object Oriented programming 4 4
Using C++
3 Core Internet Programming-I 4 4
4 Core Computer Organisation 4 4
5 Core System Software 4 4
6 Lab OOP - Lab 5 3
7 Lab MS Office & Internet 5 3
Programming
Total (5 Theory +2 practical = 7 Courses) 30 26
126
Note: MS Office & Internet Programming LAB weightage should be given
as Basic Concept of MS Office 25% + Internet Programming 75%
II SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Core Mathematical Foundations of 4 4
Computer Science - II
2 Core Data structure & algorithm 4 4
3 Core Java Programming 4 4
4 Core Operating System 4 4
5 Core Software Engineering 4 4
6 Lab Data structure – Lab 5 3
7 Lab Java – Lab 5 3
Total (5 Theory+2 practical = 7 Courses) 30 26
III SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Core Financial Management and 4 4
Accounting
2 Core Computer Graphics 4 4
3 Core Visual Programming-(VC++) 4 4
4 Core Microprocessor and its 4 4
Applications
5 Core Database Management System 4 4
6 Lab Computer Graphics - Lab 5 3
7 Lab Visual Programming-(VC++)-lab 5 3
Total (5 Theory +2 practical = 7 Courses) 30 26
127
IV SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Core Multimedia and its Applications 4 4
2 Core Principle of Compiler Design 4 4
3 Core Oracle 4 4
4 Elective Elective-I 4 4
5 Elective Elective-II 4 4
6 Lab Multimedia-Lab 5 3
(Flash,Photoshop,Dreamwaver)
7 Lab Oracle – Lab 5 3
Total (5 Theory+2 practical = 7 Courses) 30 26
LIST OF ELECTIVE PAPERS
CATEGORY – A
(CHOOSE ANY TWO)
1. Mobile and Pervasive Computing.
2. Software Testing.
3. E-Commerce.
4. Network Security Cryptography.
5. Object Oriented Analysis and Design.
128
V SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Core .NET Programming 4 4
2 Core Data Mining & Warehousing 4 4
3 Core Computer Networks and Network 4 4
Management
4 Elective Elective-III 4 4
5 Elective Elective-IV 4 4
6 Lab .NET Programming – Lab 5 3
7 Lab Mini Project 5 6
Total (5 Theory+2 practical = 7 Courses) 30 29
LIST OF ELECTIVE PAPERS
CATEGORY – B
(CHOOSE ANY TWO)
1. Software Agent.
2. Digital Image Processing.
3. Cloud Computing.
4. Web Services.
5. Soft Computing.
VI SEMESTER
S.I.NO Components Subjects Hours Credits
1 Lab Project Work 12
129
SEMESTER III
CORE SUBJECT-1
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT AND ACCOUNTING
Unit I
Financial Accounting - Need or accounting - Definition -
Objectives and Advantages - Branches of Accounting - Types of Accounts -
Accounting rules - Accounting cycle - Journal - Ledger - Trial Balance -
Trading & Profit and loss account and Balance sheet.
Unit II
Financial Management - nature, Scope and objectives - Finance
functions - Profit maximization vs Wealth maximization - Role and
Responsibilities or a financial manager in the changing scenario - Methods
of Financial management - Importance of Financial Management.
Unit III
Financial Statement Analysis and interpretation - Meaning and
types of financial statement - Types of financial analysis - Steps in
Financial statement analysis - Methodical Classification - Techniques of
financial analysis - Limitations of financial analysis - Practical problems.
Unit IV
Ratio Analysis - meaning - Classification - Liquidity, Solvency,
Profitability and turnover ratios - Advantages and limitations - Practical
problems. Funds Flow analysis - meaning uses - Preparation of funds flow
statement. Cash flow analysis - Meaning - Preparation - Diffe3rence
between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Utility and limitations of cash
flow analysis - Practical problems.
130
Unit V
Mechanized Accounting - Electronic Data Processing -
Computer Applications in Accounting - MIS - Computer - Information
technology & MIS.
Reference Books
1. S.P.Jain and K.L.Narang - Advanced Accounting, Kalyani Publishers,
New Delhi
2. S.P. Iyengar - Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand and Sons, New
Delhi
3. R.L.Rupta and M.Radhaswamy - Advanced Accounting, Sultan
Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
4. S.N.Maheswari and C.B.Gupta, Financial Management Sultan Chand
and Sons, New Delhi.
5. S.N.Maheswari, Management Accounting, Sultan Clinand and Sons,
New Delhi.
CORE SUBJECT-2
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
Objectives
1. To know the fundamental and practical concepts in computer
graphics including interactive graphics, visual realism, graphics
hardware, scene rendering, graphics primitives, geometric
transformations.
2. To understand 2D and 3D graphics systems.
3. To understand the rendering and viewing techniques of 3D objects
4. To b12 capable of modeling and animating 3D objects
5. To be capable of using graphics libraries in programming
131
Unit I
A Survey, of Computers Graphics - Overview of Graphics
Systems - Output Primitives: Points and Lines, DDA, Bresenham's
Algorithm, Properties of Circles & Ellipse, Pixel Addressing.
Unit II
Two Dimensional Geomentric Transformations Basic
Transformations: Matrix Representation, Composite Transformations- Line
Clipping - Two Dimensional viewing - Graphical User Interfaces and
Interactive Import Methods.
Unit III
Three Dimensional Concepts - Three Dimensional Object
Representations Polygon Surfaces - Curved Lines and Surfaces - Quadric
Surfaces - Super Quadrics Blobby objects - Spline Representations - Cubic
Spline Interpolation.
Unit IV
Three Dimensional Geometric and Modeling Transformations:
Three Dimensional viewing - Viewing Pipeline, Viewing Co-Ordinates,
Projections Clipping.
Unit V
Visible - Surface Detection Methods: Classification of Visible -
Surface Detection Algorithms, Back face Detection, Depth - Buffer Method,
A-Buffer Method, Set-inline Method, BSP - Tree Method.
Niomination Models and Surface - Rendering methods: Basic
fllumination Models - Polygon Rendering methods - Color Models and
Color Applications - Computer Animation.
132
Text Book
Donald Hearn, M. Pauline Baker, "Compute Graphics C
Version" Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2000 (Unit I-V)
Reference Book
1. Zlugangxianfc, Roy Phastock, "Computer Graphics", 2
nd Edition,
TMCH
CORE SUBJECT-3
VISUAL PROGRAMMING – VC++
Unit I
Introduction, Creating Visual C++ applications - Designing and
creating a visual C++ program - understanding the development
environment. Creating and designing dialog boxes.
Unit II
Using Button controls Using Text controls. Using dialog boxes.
Unit III
Using progress, Scrollbar, Slider and Date time controls.
Responding to Mouse event .Using Active X controls.
Unit IV
Working with Images, Bit maps and Icons, Using Documents,
Views and Frames Working with Menus.
133
Unit V
Sizing and Scrolling views. Saving, Loading and transferring
Data. Using Databases and record views. Understanding OLE and Com
Programming.
Text Books
1. Practical Visual C-H Jon Bales and Tim Tompkins - Prentice Hall Of
India, 2000
2. Gary 1 Bronson - A first book of Visual C++ Vikas Publishing House
2001
CORE SUBJECT-4
MICROPROCESSORS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Unit I: THE 8086 PROCESSOR - SOFTWARE ASPECTS
Evolution of Microprocessors - 8086 architecture – Addressing
modes- Instruction set and assembler directives – Assembly language
programming – Interrupts and interrupt service routines.
Unit II: 8086 SYSTEM DESIGN
8086 signals description – Basic configurations - System bus
timing –System design using 8086 – Minimum mode /Maximum modes
8086 system and timings.
Unit III: INTERFACING CONCEPTS
Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication
interface – Serial communication interface – Timer – Keyboard /display
controller – Interrupt controller – DMA controller – Programming and
applications.
134
Unit IV: ADVANCED PROCESSORS
Intel 80286 – Internal Architectural – Register Organization –
Internal Block Diagram – Modes of operation – Real Address Mode –
Protected Virtual Address mode – Privilege – Protection - Architectural
features and Register Organization of i386, i486 and Pentium processors.
Unit V: BUILDING SYSTEMS
Bus Concepts – Bus Standards –The Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) Bus – Universal Serial Bus (USB) – Platform
Architectures.
References:
1. K. Ray & K. M. Bhurchandi, ―Advanced Microprocessors and
peripherals- Architectures, Programming and Interfacing‖, TMH, 2002
reprint.
2. Barry B. Brey, ―The Intel Microprocessors, 8086/8088, 80186/80188,
80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, PentiumPro Processor, PentiumII,
PentiumIII, PentiumIV, Architecture, Programming & Interfacing‖, 6th
Edition, Pearson Education/PHI, 2002.
3. Yu-cheng Liu, Glenn A. Gibson, ―Microcomputer systems: The
8086/8088 Family architecture, Programming and Design‖, PHI 2003.
4. Peter Abel, ―IBM PC Assembly language and programming‖, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
5. Websites of latest processors
6. Microprocessors and Interfacing, N.Senthil Kumkar, M.Saravanan,
S.Jeevananthan and S.K. Shah. Oxford University Press.
135
CORE SUBJECT-5
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
UNIT I
Introduction – purpose of database system- data models –
database languages-Transaction management – Storage management -
DBA – database users-system structure. E-R model.
UNIT II
Relational Database Design: Anomalies in a Database –
Functional Dependency – Lossless Join and Dependency-Preserving
Decomposition – Third Normal Form – Boyce Codd Normal Form –
Multivalued Dependency – Fourth Normal Form – Join Dependency –
Project Join Normal Form – Domain Key Normal Form.
SQL: Data Definition – Data Manipulation – Integrity
Constraints – Views – PL/SQL.
UNIT III
Indexing and Hashing – Query Processing – Transaction
Processing - Concurrency Control and Recovery.
UNIT IV
Advanced Database Concepts and Emerging Applications:
Distributed Databases-Object Oriented Databases-Object Relational
Databases- Data mining and Data Warehousing.
UNIT V
DBMS Case Studies : Application of DB concepts in Hospitals
or any small and medium scale Industry – DBMS in Hospital management
System, Small and Medium Scale Enterprises – Application of DBMS in
Marketing (For Unit V, students are expected to do a survey and study and
submit a report)
136
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Abraham Silberchatz, Henry K.Forth, Sudharshan, ―Database system
Concepts‖ – (5th edition), McGraw Hill.
2. Elisa Bertino, ―Object Oriented Databases‖, Addison Wesley.
3. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B.Navathe, " Fundamentals of Database
Systems ", 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley-2000.
SEMESTER IV
CORE SUBJECT-1
MULTIMEDIA AND ITS APPLICATION
Unit - 1
Fundamental concepts in Text and Image: Multimedia and
hypermedia, world wide web, overview of multimedia software tools,
Graphics and image data representation graphics / image data types, file
formals, Color in image and video; color science, color models in images,
color models in video.
Fundamental concepts in video and digital audio: Types of
video signals, analog video digital video, digitization of sound, MIDI,
quantization and transmission of audio.
Unit - II
Action Script I: Action script features, Object - Oriented Action
Script, Data types and Type Checking, Classes, Authoring and Action
Script Class.
Action Script II: Inheritance, Authoring and Action Script 2.0
Subclass, Interfaces, Packages, Exceptions.
137
Unit - III
Application Development: An OOP Application Frame work, Using
Components with Action Script Movie clip Subclasses.
Multimedia data compression: Lossless compression algorithm;
Run - Length Coding, Variable Length Coding, Dictionary Based Coding,
Arithmetic Coding, Lossless Image Compression, Lossy compression
algorithm: Quantization, Transform Coding, Wavelet - Based Coding,
Embedded Zerotree of Wavelet Coefficients Set Partitioning in Hierarchical
Trees (SPIHT).
Unit - IV
Basic Video Compression Techniques: Introduction in video
compression, video compression based on motion compensation, search
for motion vectors, MPEG, Basic Audio Compression Techniques.
Unit - V
Multimedia Networks: Basics of Multimedia networks,
Multimedia Network Communications and Applications: Quality of
Multimedia Data Transmission, Multimedia over IP, Multimedia over ATM
Networks, Transport of MPEG-4, Media-on-Demand (MOD).
Text Books
1. Fundamentals of Multimedia by Ze-Nian Li and mark S.Drew
PHI/Pearson Education.
2. Essentials Action Script 2.0, Colin Moock, SPD O, REILLY
Reference Books
1. Digital Multimedia, Nigel Chapman and jenny chapman, Wiley-
Dreamtech
2. Macromedia Flash MX professional 2004 Unleashed, Pearson
3. Multimedia and communications Technology, Steve Heath, Elsevier
(Focal Press).
4. Multimedia Applications, Steinmetz, Nahrstedt, Springer.
5. Multimedia Basics by Weixel Thomson
6. Multimedia Technology and Applications, David Hilman, Galgotia.
138
CORE SUBJECT-2
PRINCIPLES OF COMPILER DESIGN
Unit -1: INDRODUCTION
Introduction to Complier: Language Processors- The Structure
of a Compiler – The Evolution of Programming Languages – The Science
of Building a Compiler – Application of Compiler Technology –
Programming Language Basics.
A Simple Syntax-Directed Translator: Syntax Definition –
Syntax-Directed Translation – Parsing – A Translator of Simple Expression
– Lexical Analysis - Symbol Table – Intermediate Code Generation.
Unit -2 : LEXICAL ANALYZER
Lexical Analysis: The Role of the Lexical Analyzer - Input
Buffering – Specification of Tokens - Recognition of Tokens – The Lexical-
Analyzer Generator Lex – Finite Automata – From Regular Expression to
Automata – Design of a Lexical-Analyzer Generator – Optimization of DFA-
Based Pattern Matchers.
Unit – 3: SYNTAX ANALYZER
Syntax Analysis: Introduction – Context-Free Grammars –
Writing a Grammar – Top-Down Parsing – Bottom-Up Parsing –
Introduction to LR Parsing: Simple LR – More Powerful LR Parsers – Using
Ambiguous Grammars.
Unit – 4: INTERMEDIATE-CODE GENERATION AND RUN-TIME
ENVIRONMENT
Intermediate-Code Generation: Variants of Syntax Trees –
Three-Address Code – Types and Declarations – Translations of
Expressions – Type Checking – Control Flow – Back patching – Switch
139
Statements – Intermediate Code for Procedures. Run-Time Environments:
Storage Organization – Stack Allocation of Space – Access to Nonlocal
Data on the Stack.
Unit – 5: CODE GENERATION
Code Generation: Issues in the Design of a Code Generator –
The Target Language – Address in the Target Code – Basic Blocks and
Flow Graph – Optimization of Basic Blocks – A Simple Code Generator –
Peephole Optimization – Register Allocation and Assignments – Instruction
Selection by Tree Rewriting - Optimal Code Generation for Expression –
Dynamic Programming Code-Generation. Machine-Independent
optimization: The Principal Source of Optimization.
Text book:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman,
―Compilers- Principles, Techniques and Tools‖, Pearson Education
Asia, 2011.
2. Compiler Design,K.Muneeswaran, Oxford Universitry Press.
Reference books:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Compilers- Principles,
Techniques and Tools‖, Pearson Education Asia, 2007
2. A.V. Aho, Ravi Sethi, J. D. Ullman, ―Compilers- Principles,
Techniques and Tools‖, Addison- Wesley, 2003.
3. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C, Prentice Hall of India, 2001
4. Fischer Leblanc, Crafting Compiler, Benjamin Cummings, Menlo
Park, 1988.
140
CORE SUBJECT-3
ORACLE
Unit I
Basic SQL operations - Creating a table: Constraints in create
table - Insert. Insert with select Insert using APPEND hint - Rollback -
Commit - Auto commit - Save points Multi table inserts - Delete - Update:
Update with embedded select - Update with null - Merge command -
Select, From, Where and Order by - Logic & Value: Single value tests -
LIKE - Simple tests against a list of values - Combining logic - Combining
tables - Dropping tables - Altering table: Adding or Modifying a column -
Dropping a column - Creating a table from a table - Normalization - Data
types - String functions - Single value functions - Group value functions -
List functions - Finding Rows with MAX & MJN - Data functions -
Conversion functions. Transformation functions: Translate - Decode.
Unit II
Creating a view: Stability of a view - Order by in views -
Creating a read only view Using partitioned table - Use of group by &
Having - when one query depends upon another: Advanced sub queries -
Outer joins - Natural & Inner joins - Union, Intersect & Minus - Synonyms -
Indexes - Table spaces - Clusters - Sequences.
Unit III
Basics of object - Relational databases: objects - Abstract Data types
- Nested tables - Varying arrays - Large objects - References - Object
views - naming conventions for objects - Structure of an object.
Users, Roles and Privileges: Creating a user - Password
management - Three standard roles - Format for grant command -
141
Revoking privileges - What users can Grant: Moving to another user
– Create synonym – Create a role – Granting privileges to a role – Granting
a role to another role – Adding password to a role – Removing password
from a role – Enabling & Disabling roles – Revoking privileges from a role –
Drop a role.
Unit IV
Using SQL* loader to load data control file – syntax – starting the load
– Managing data loads – Tuning data loads – Accessing Remote data –
Database links – Syntax – Database link for remote queries, synonyms &
views, Remote updates – Dynamic links : Use SQLPLUS copy command –
Connect 10 remote database. Using Materialized Views: Syntax –
Refreshing materialized views – Create Materialized view log syntax –
Materialized views & logs : Alter & drop – Using external Tables : Access
an external data – External table : Creation – Limitations – Benefits.
Unit V
An introduction to PL / SQL: PL / SQL overview – Declarations
section – Executable commands section – Exception handling section –
Triggers : Syntax – Types of Triggers: Row – level – Statement level –
before & after – Instead of – Schema – Database – level triggers –
Enabling & disabling triggers – Replacing & JSroppiqg triggers –
Procedures, functions & Packages syntax – compile – replace – Drop Pr &
fadures, functions & packages – cursor management.
Text Book
Oracle Database 10g – The complete reference – Kevin Loney,
Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing company ltd – 2004.
Reference Book
Oracle 9i – A beginners guide – Michael Abhey, Mike corey and
lan Abramson, Tata McGraw – Hill publishing Company ltd., - 2002.
142
ELECTIVE SUBJECT-1
SOFTWARE TESTING
Unit I:
Principles of Testing – Software life cycle development models
– Phases of Software Project – Quality, QA, QC – Testing, Verification,
Validation – Process Model - Life cycle Models
Unit II:
White box testing: Static and Structural testing – Challenges – Black
box testing – Integration testing
Unit III:
System and acceptance testing – Performance testing –
Regression testing
Unit IV:
Internationalization testing – Ad hoc testing-Testing of object
oriented systems
Unit V:
Test planning, Management, Execution and reporting –
Software test automation – test metrics and measurements
Books for reference:
1. Software Testing Principles and practices – Srinivasan Desikan,
Gopalaswamy Ramesh – Pearson -2012
2. Software Testing Principles and practices – Naresh Chauhan –
Oxford University Press 2010
3. Introduction to Software testing – Paul Ammann – Cambridge
University Press – 2009
4. Foundations of Software Testing – Aditya P Mathur – Pearson – 2011
143
ELECTIVE SUBJECT-2
MOBILE & PERVASIVE COMPUTING
Unit I: Technologies
Past, Present, Future: The Vine and fig tree dream – Pervasive
Computing – The pervasive computing market – m-Business.
Application Examples: Retail – Airline check-in and booking –
Sales force automation – Healthcare – Tracking – Car Information systems
– Email access via WAP and Voice.
Unit II: Device Technology
Hardware – Human-machine interfaces – Biometrics –
Operating systems – Java for Pervasive devices – Outlook.
Unit III: Device Connectivity
Protocols – Security – Device management. Web Application
concepts: History of the World Wide Web – World Wide Web architecture –
Protocols – Transcoding – Client authentication via the internet.
Unit IV: WAP and beyond:
Introduction – Components of the WAP architecture – WAP
infrastructure – WAP security issues – Wireless Markup Language – WAP
push – Products – i-mode – Outlook.
Voice Technology: Basics of speech recognition – Voice
standards – Speech applications – Speech and pervasive computing –
Security.
144
Unit V: Pervasive Web application architecture
Background – Scalability and availability – Development of
pervasive computing Web applications – Pervasive application architecture.
Book for Study:
1. Pervasive Computing, Technology & Architecture of Mobile
Internet Applications – Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn et. al –
Pearsan – 11th Edition 2012.
2. Mobile Computing – Raj Kamal – Oxford University Press –
Second Edition 2012.
3. Mobile Computing – Asoke K Taluhdar, Roopa R Yavagal – Tata
McGrawHill Publication – 2011
ELECTIVE SUBJECT-3
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Unit I:
Introduction: The System Development Life Cycle - System
Development Methodologies – Project Team Roles and Skills. Unified
Modeling Language: Basic Characteristics - Unified Modeling Language –
Object Oriented Analysis and Design - A Sample approach.
Unit II:
Planning: Project Initiation- Project Identification- Feasibility
Analysis- Project Selection. Project Management: Project Size
Identification-Creating and Managing –Staffing the Project- Coordinating
Project Activities
145
Unit III:
Analysis: Requirements Determination-Requirement Analysis
Techniques-Requirements Gathering Techniques-Applying the Concepts.
Functional Modeling: Activity Diagrams- Use Case Descriptions-Use Case
Diagrams – Creation of use Case Diagrams & Descriptions – Refining the
Project Size. Structural Modeling: Structural Models – CRC Cards - Class
Diagrams - Creation of Class Diagrams.
Unit IV:
Object Design: Evolving the analysis model to Design Models-
Packages and Package Diagrams-Design Strategies- Design Strategies-
Development of Actual Design. Class and Method Design: Basic
Characteristics- Design Criteria – Object Design Activities-Constraints and
Contracts-Method Specifications. Data Management Layer Design: Object-
Persistence Formats-Mapping Problem Domain Objects to Object-
Persistence Formats – Optimizing RDBMS Based Object Storage-
Designing Data Access.
Unit V:
Human Computer Interaction Layer Design: Principles- User Interface
Design Process –Navigation Design –Input Design-Output Design. Physical
Architecture Layer Design : Elements- Infrastructure Design- Non
Functional Requirements- Hardware and Software Specification.
Implementation Phase : Managing Programming – Designing Tests
Developing Documentation.
Books:
1. Systems Analysis & Design with UML Version 2.0 An Object Oriented
Approach– Alan Dennis,Barbara Haley Wixom,David Tegarden,
Wiley India , Second Edition,2006.
146
2. Object Oriented Analysis & Design with the unified process –
Satzinger, Jackson, Burd Course Technology Cengage learning 2005
3. Object-Oriented Modeling and Design – James Rumbaugh, Michael
Blaha, William Premerlani, Frederick Eddy, William Lorensen –
Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, 2002.
4. Object Oriented Analysis & Design with Applications Grady Booch
Second Edition – 2004.
ELECTIVE SUBJECT-4
NETWORK SECURITY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY
Unit I:
Introduction – Security Goals – Attacks – Services and Mechanism –
Techniques Traditional Symmetric-key Ciphers: Introduction – Substitution
Ciphers – Transposition Ciphers – Stream and Block Ciphers
Unit II:
DES: Introduction – DES Structure – DES Analysis – Multiple DES.
AES: Introduction – Transformations – Key Expansion – Ciphers - Use of
Modern Block Ciphers – use of Stream Ciphers
Unit III:
Asymmetric-key Cryptography: Introduction – RSA
cryptosystem – RABIN Cryptosystem Message Integrity & Authentication:
Message Integrity – Message Authentication
Unit IV:
Digital Signature : Comparison – process – services – attacks
on digital signature – digital signature schemes - variations and
applications
147
Entity authentication : Introduction – passwords – challenge – response –
zero knowledge – biometrics
Unit V:
Key Management : Symmetric key distribution – Kerberos –
Symmetric key agreement– Public key distribution Security at the Transport
layer : SSL Architecture – four protocols – SSL message formats –
transport layer security
Reference Books:
1. Behrouz A Forouzan ,‖Cryptography & Network Security‖, TMH
2. William Stalings,‖Cryptography & Network Security‖ ,PHI
3. Atul Kahate ,‖Cryptography & Network Security‖, TMH
ELECTIVE SUBJECT-5
E-COMMERCE
Unit I
History of E-Commerce – Advantages of E-Commerce –
Disadvantages of E-Commerce – Transition to E-Commerce in India –
Some pioneering Indian case studies. Business models for E-Commerce E-
Business model based on relationship of transaction parties – E-business
model based on the relationship of Transaction types.
Unit II
E-marketing , Traditional marketing – identifying web presence
goals – The browsing behavior model – Online marketing – E-Advertising –
Internet marketing trends – Target Markets – Marketing Strategies.
Unit III
E-payment systems digital payment requirements – Digital toke
based E-Payment systems – classification of new payment systems –
148
properties of electronic cash – cheque payment systems on the internet –
Risk and E-payment systems – Designing E-payment systems – Digital
Signature.
Unit IV
E-customer relationship management. Customer relationship
management E-Supply chain management E-supply chain (Benefits, E-
supply chain components, E-supply chain architecture, Major Trends in E-
SCM).
Unit V
Mobile commerce growth of mobile commerce – Technologies
for mobile commerce – wireless technologies – mobile commerce.
Intelligent web design. Requirements of intelligent web sites
–
setting web sites goals and objectives – Anand online and offline business
models.
Text & Reference Books
1. E-Commerce – A Managerial perspective – P.T. Joseph, Prentice
Hall of India (P) Ltd., 2002.
2. E-Commerce – David Whitlely, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2005.
3. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce – Kalkota & Whinston, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Electronic Commerce – Gray P. Schneider, Thomson Course
Technology, 2004.
5. E-Business , Parag Kulkarni,,Sunita Jahirabadkar,,Pradip Chande,
Oxford University Press.
149
APPENDIX - AZ90
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.A. ENGLISH (CBCS) (FOR AFFILIATED COLLEGES)
SECOND YEAR SYLLABUS
(Effective from the academic year 2013 - 2014)
1. Objectives
The P.G. Course in English Literature and Language aims to
• equip students with an indepth knowledge of a wide spectrum of genres
and writers
• to help them acquire communicative skills and a global perspective of
English Language
• to enable them to understand the multicultural context of English language
and literature
2. Conditions for Admission
• A candidate who has passed B.A. Degree Examination of M.S. University
with Branch XII English as the Main subject of study
• A graduate in B.A or B.Sc with Part II English
• A candidate who has acquired any other Bachelor Degree of this
university or any other university accepted by the Syndicate as equivalent
thereto shall be permitted to appear and qualify for M.A Degree
Examination of this university in English in the affliated colleges of this
university.
3. Eligibility for the award of the Degree
A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the degree only if he/she has
undergone the prescribed course of study for a period of not less than two academic
years and passed the examinations of all the four semesters prescribed, earning 90
credits.
4. Duration of the Course
The duration of the course is for two academic years consisting of four
semesters each semester consisting of 90 working days.
155
The course of study shall comprise instruction in the following subjects
according to the syllabus and books prescribed from time to time.
III Semester
Core Subjects: Hrs Credits
1. Shakespeare 6 4
2. Critical Theory - Paper II 6 4
3. Canadian Literature 6 4
4. Literature in Translation 6 4
5. English Language Teaching (Elective III)
or
Creative Writing (Elective III) 6 5
Total (5 courses) 30 21
IV Semester
Core Subjects: Hrs Credits
1. Women‘s Writing in English 6 5
2. The English Language and Linguistics 6 5
3. Research Methodology 6 5
4. Dissertation 6 5
5. The Post-Colonial Literature (Elective IV)
Or
Literature for Social Transformation (Elective IV) 6 4
Total (5 courses) 30 24
5. Examinations:
The examinations shall be of 3 hours duration for each paper at the end of
each semester. The candidate failing in any subject will be permitted to appear
for each failed subject in the subsequent examinations.
156
6. Scheme of Examinations:
Each paper contains an internal component. There is a pass minimum of
50% for external and overall components. The External Examination is for 75
marks and the Internal Assessment carries 25 marks. The Examination paper
consists of three sections- the first consisting of 5 questions each of 2 marks
each; the second 5 questions of 5 marks each and the third 5 questions of 8
marks each with a total of 75 marks.
Section A 5 x 2 = 10
Section B 5 x 5 = 25
Section C 5 x 8 = 40
Each question offers an internal choice, set in an ‗either or pattern‘. The
questions will cover all 5 units of each paper.
Recommendations of the Core Committee
1. Internal assessment:
Regarding the Internal assessment, the 25 marks is allocated in the following manner:
PG
The Average of the best two tests from three 15 Marks compulsory Tests
Assignment 04 Marks
Seminar 06 Marks
Total 25 Marks
Note: Each test is of one hour duration.
Project and Viva-Voce
Project Report - 60 Marks
Viva-voce - 40 Marks
-----------------------------------
Total - 100 Marks
----------------------------------
Note:
The Project for PG students shall be ―Individual Project‖
Project report evaluation will be done centrally and Viva-Voce will be conducted by both the External examiner and the guide at the end of Fourth semester.
157
M.A. ENGLISH SYLLABUS
Semester III
SHAKESPEARE - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I Othello
Unit II Richard II
Unit III The Winter‘s Tale
Unit IV The Lover‘s Complaint (A Poem)
Unit V Shakespearean Criticism
Quartos and Folios
Textual Criticism
Great Tragedies
Historical Plays
Dramatic Romances
Reference:
A.C. Bradley- Shakespearean Tragedy
A.W. Pollard- Shakespeare Folios and Quartos
G. Wilson Knight
CRITICAL THEORY – II - Core
Hrs:6 Credits:5
Unit I Paul de Man : The Resistance to Theory
Unit II M.H. Abrams : How to do Things with the Text?
Unit III Edward Said : ―Introduction‖ in Culture and Imperialism
Unit IV Michel Foucault : The Order of Discourse
Unit V Richard Kerridge : Environmentalism and Eco
Criticism
158
Reference
Contemporary Criticism - An AnthologyVol.II edited by V.S. Sethuraman. Beginning Theory – An Introduction to Literary and cultural theory –Peter Barry Contemporary Literary Theory: A Students’ Companion. ed. N. Krishnasamy, John Varghese, Sumita Mishra. Modern Literary Theory: A Reader ed. Philip Rice & Patricia Waugh, OUP, IV edition.
CANADIAN LITERATURE - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits: 5
Unit I Poetry
A.M. Klein - Political Meeting
E.J. Pratt - Silences
Al Purdy - Listening to Myself
Wilfred Campbell - The Winter Lakes
P.K.Page - Autumn Unit II Prose
Stephen Leacock - ―How to Avoid Getting Married‖
(from Literary Lapses)
Margaret Atwood - ―Nature as Monster‖ (from Survival )
Unit III Fiction
Yann Martel - Life of Pi
Alice Munro - Dimensions Unit IV Fiction
Uma Parameswaran - Mangoes on the Maple Tree Unit V Drama
George Ryga - The Ecstasy of Rita Joe
159
Reference
An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry (ed) C.D.Narasimhaiah. Chennai, Macmillan.
Too much Happiness by Alice Munro
http://www.library.utoronto.ca/canpoetry/index_poet.htm
http://voices.cla.umn.edu/artistpages/paramerswaranUma.php
http://www.online-literature.com/stephen-leacock/literary-lapses/
LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION - Core
Hrs: 6 Credits: 5
Unit I Poetry
Thirukkural (Translated by G. U. Pope)
Book 1 Chapter – 8 - The Possession of Love
Book 2 Chapter – 40 - Learning
Chapter – 79 - Friendship
Unit II Poetry
SubramaniyaBharathiyar - Indian Republic
Freedom
There is no Fear
(Translated by S Prema)
Bharathidasan - The Awakened Women
Women‘s Education(Translated by
PremaNandakumar)
The Bane of Widowhood
(Translated by S Raman)
Unit III Fiction
ThakazhiSivasankaraPillai - Chemmeen
Thoppil Mohammed Meeran - The Story of Sea Side Village
Unit IV Drama
Bertolt Brecht - Mother Courage
Anton Chekhov - Three Sisters
160
Unit V Drama
R K Narayan - The Ramayana Reference
Selected Poems of Bharathidasan- Bharathidasan University, Trichy.
ThirukkuralTranslated by G U Pope, Shree ShenbhagaPathippagam
ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING - Elective III
Hrs: 6 Credits:4
Unit I
English in India – Past, Present and Future
The Nature of Human Language
Linguistics, Psychology and English Teaching
Methods
Approach, Method and Technique
Unit II
Essentials of English Speech
Teaching Spoken English: Some Techniques
Essential Word-Grammar for Teachers
Teaching of Vocabulary
Unit III
Essentials of English Grammar
The Teaching of Grammar
Reading and Teaching of Reading
Writing and Teaching of Writing and Composition
Unit IV
Teaching Prose and Poetry
Use of Blackboard and other Instructional Aids
Study Skills and Reference Skills
Unit V
Tests and Testing
Common Errors and Remedial English
Planning and Lesson Planning
161
Reference:
Methods of Teaching English by N Krishnaswamy and Lalitha Krishnaswamy.Macmillan Publication.
Readings in English Language Teaching in India by ShirinKudchedkar. Orient BlackSwan Publishers.
Teaching English as a Second Language by Paul Verghese . Sterling Publishers
OR
CREATIVE WRITING - Elective III
Hrs:6 Credits:4
Unit I Writing and Thinking
Creative Thinking
Thinking about purpose, audience and tone
Writing a First Draft
Evaluating and Revising
Proof Reading and Publishing
Unit II Writing a poem
Literary Devices
Poetic Analysis
Exercises
Unit III Non-Fictional Writing
Paragraph Structure
Writing an Introduction
Writing a conclusion
Exercises
Unit IV Writing a Short Story
Pre-Writing
Basic Elements
Basic Framework
Exercises
162
Unit V Screenplay Writing/Writing a Play
Literary Techniques
Production
References:
Elements of Writing (CompleteCourse ).James L.Kinneavy ,John E.
Warriner.Austin:HBJ,1993.
Elements of Writing (FourthCourse ).James L.Kinneavy ,John E.
Warriner.Austin:HBJ,1993.
Semester IV
WOMEN‘S WRITING IN ENGLISH- Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
Unit I Poetry
Sylvia Plath - The Colossus
Maya Angelou - Caged Bird
ImitiazDharker - Choice
Judith Wright - Clock and Heart
Unit II Prose
Virginia Woolf - To Cambridge Women
Arundhathi Roy - The Loneliness of Noam Chomsky
Unit III Fiction
JhumphaLahiri - The Namesake
Alice Walker - The Colour Purple
Unit IV Drama
MahaSwetadevi - Mother of 1084
Caryl Churchill - Top Girls
Unit V Feminist Theory
Simonede Beauvoir - Woman and theOther
Elaine Showalter - Towards a Feminist Poetics
163
Reference:
www.poetryfoundation.org /Bio/maya -angelou
www. Imitiazdharker.com/poems/show
An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry (ed) .D.Narasimhaiah. Chennai, Macmillan
For Arundhathi Roy‘s The Loneliness of Noam Chomsky-
www.countercurrents.org/us-roy/240803.htm
Literature in the Modern World: Critical Essays and Documents(ed.) Dennis Walder . Oxford University Press
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS- Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:4
Unit I English Language
Place of English in the Indo – European Family of Languages
Old English, Middle English, Modern English
Grimm‘s Law, Verner‘s Law
Unit II
Influences: Latin, French, Greek, and Scandinavian
Unit III Linguistics
Language
What is Linguistics?
Modern Linguistics: A Historical Survey
Unit IV
Morphology and Word Formation
What is Semantics?
Theories of Semantics
164
Unit V Phonetics
Phonetics: Classification of English Vowels and Consonants
Stress and Intonation
Transcription
Reference:
F T Wood- An Outline History of English Language An Introduction to Linguistics: Language, Grammar and Semantics By SyalPushpinder, D V Jindal 2nd edition PHI Learning Publisher(Pages: 1-27, 39-50,77-96, 141-156) Dr P Iyyadurai- English Phonetics for Beginners, Jones Publications. LalithaRamamurthi- A History of English Language and Elements of Phonetics, Macmillan Publication
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY- Core
Hrs:6 Credits:5
Unit I
Selecting a topic Conducting Research Compiling a Working Bibliography
Unit II
Taking Notes Plagiarism
Unit III
The Mechanics of Writing Unit IV
The Format of a Research Paper Unit V
Documentation (I): Preparing the list of Works Cited
• Citing Periodical Print Publications
• Citing Nonperiodical Print Publications
• Citing Web Publications Documentation (II): Citing Sources in the Text
Reference:
Joseph Gibaldi – M L A Handbook for Writers of Research Papers, 7th Edition Holt Guide
165
DISSERTATION WRITING AND VIVA-VOCE- Core
Hrs: 6 Credits:5
The students are expected to submit a Dissertation of about 50 pages on
preferably a recent writer not included in the current syllabi.
The dissertation will be evaluated on the basis of the students‘
understanding of the topic, their knowledge of the fundamental aspects of
research and their ability to document and present their work in accordance with
the concepts of research methodology.
THE POSTCOLONIAL LITERATURE- Elective IV
Hrs:6 Credits:4
Unit I Poetry
Derek Walcott - A Far Cry from Africa
Gabriel Okara - You Laughed and Laughed and Laughed
Margaret Atwood - Journey to the Interior
Unit II Poetry
Muhammed Haji Salleh - Blood
Jean Arasanayagam - In the Month of July
- ―Wild Colonial Boy‖ (Anonymous
Australian Poem)
Unit III Drama
Wole Soyinka - Death and the King‘s Horseman
ManjulaPadmanaban - Harvest
Unit IV Prose
Chinua Achebe - Novelist as a Teacher
Frantz Fanon - National Culture
Unit V Fiction
Michael Ondaatje - The English Patient
BapsiSidwa - Ice-candy Man
166
Reference
Poetry-An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry by C.D.Narasimhaiah
Prose-The Post-colonial Studies Reader By Bill Ashcroft et.al
OR
LITERATURE FOR SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION- Elective IV
Hrs: 6 Credits:4
Unit I Poetry
William Blake - From Auguries of Innocence
(First 26 lines)
P B Shelley - Prometheus Unbound
Unit II Poetry
Oliver Goldsmith - The Deserted Village
Ogden Nash - Bankers are just like anybody
else except Richer
Unit III Prose
Ruskin - Unto This Last
Newman - The Idea of a University
Unit IV Fiction
Roman Basu - Outcast
R K Narayan - The Barbers‘ Trade Union
Unit V Drama
Wole Soyinka - The Trials of BrotherJero
Reference:
Rene Wellek :Literature and Society
167
APPENDIX - AZ91
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.COM REGULAR SYLLABUS
CBCS-FOR AFFILIATED COLLEGES
(For those who joined the course from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards)
SEMESTER I CREDITS HOURS INTERNAL EXTERNAL
PASSING
MINIMUM 50%
Core paper
Management 5 8 25 75
Accounting
Quantitative 5 8 25 75
Techniques
Strategic 5 7 25 75
management
Elective 25 75
Retail 5 7 25 75
management
SEMESTER II
Core paper
Corporate Legal 5 6 25 75
framework
Financial 5 6 25 75
Management
Operation 5 6 25 75
Research
Business 5 6 25 75
environment
Elective 25
Office automation 5 6 25 75
168
SEMESTER III
Core paper
Advanced 5 6 25 75
corporate
accounting
Research 5 6 25 75
Methodology
Taxation and Tax 5 6 25 75
planning
E commerce 5 6 25 75
Project 5 6 Viva voice 40 60
SEMESTER IV
Core paper
Advanced Cost 5 8 25 75
accounting
Computerized 5 7 25 75
accounting
packages -Theory
Computerised 5 7 40 60
accounting
packages practical
Elective 25 75
Human resource 5 8 25 75
management
Total 90 120 1800
TOTAL CREDITS
Ist semester 20 credits
2nd semester 25 credits
3rd semester 25 credit
169
4th semester 20 credits
total number of papers courses 18
Total number of credits 90
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT:
Regarding internal assessment the 25 marks is allocated in the following manner
The average of the best two tests from 3 compulsory test -- 15 marks
Assignment 4 marks
Seminars 6 marks
Each test shall be an hour test
PROJECT WORK
Components marks
Project report 60 marks
viva voce 40 marks
The project shall be done by the students individually in English
Project report evaluation will be done centrally by the university and viva-voce will be
conducted by both the external examiner and guide at the end of third semester in the
respective colleges.
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT COMPONENT FOR OFFICE AUTOMATION
‐ Elective paper
‐ Regarding the paper office automation in the second semester, the internal The
internal assessment mark will be allocated in the following manner. For internal
test 20 marks Practical with record note 5 marks
Out of 6 hours allotted for office automation 4 hours will be allocated for theory and 2
hours for practical per week.
The board also recommend to provide necessary infrastructure facilities for conducting
practical for office automation and computer accounting packages
INDUSTRIAL VISIT
Make the industrial visit compulsory for students of PG. On duty leave ( Non
remunerative ) shall be sanctioned do to the staff who are accompanying the students
170
ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION : A candidate who has passed the B.Com., B.A.
corporate secretaryship., B.B.A., B.com ( Bank management)., B.A. Co-op)., B.A. (
industrial organization., B.Com C.A., B.com corporate secretaryship are eligible for
admission into M.com course.
ADMISSION TO M.COM B.COM (C.A) : B.com C.a. students are eligible for
admission. However. B.Com students appear for 25 theory papers and 6 practical
papers. There for to treat all the students equally for admission, 6 practical papers
should not be taken into account for preparation of rank list.
PASSING MINIMUM
There is a pass minimum of 50 for external and overall components.
For all the problem involving papers 60% for problem and 40%for theory questions shall
be asked.
FOR M.COM C.A OFFICE AUTOMATION AND OTHER COMPUTER PAPERS out of
the total hours allotted for the paper, 2 hours shall be allotted for practical hours. For
these papers among 25 internal assessment marks, 20 marks shall be for practical
examinations and 5 marks for record work.
**********
II Semester
2.1 Corporate legal frame work
Unit I
Legal environment for security markets SEBI Act 1992, organisation and objectives
of SEBI, powers under securities contract Regulation Act 1956, transferred to SEBI,
Role of SEBI in controlling security market
unit II
The consumer Protection Act, 1986, Salient features, definition of
consumer, consumerism - rights of consumer, grievance redresses machinery.
Unit III
Regulatory environment for international business FEMA Act 1999, WYO- regulatory
frame work of WTO, Basic principles and its character, WTO - provisions relating to
preferential treatments to developing countries 171
Unit IV
Payment of bonus Act 1965. Scope and application of Act - Non - applicability -
definition available surplus- allocable surplus - persons eligible to receive bonus,
calculation of bonus minimum bonus - maximum bonus - -proportionate reduction in
bonus - set on and set off allocable surplus - time limit for payment of bonus -
reference of dispute 290
UnitV
Payment of gratuity act 1973 Application of the Act - determining amount of gratuity -
gratuity payable in termination of employment - rate of gratuity- maximum gratuity -
mode of payment of gratitude - forfeiture of gratuity- recovery of gratuity - penalty
Syllabus for M. Com IV semester
COMPUTERISED ACCOUNTING PACKAGES PRACTICAL
1. Accounting ledgers and vouchers creation
2. Inventory ledgers and vouchers creation
3. Ledgers and vouchers creations of VAT
4. VAT composite dealers
5. Ledgers and vouchers creation of TDS
6. Ledgers and vouchers creation of TCS
7. Ledgers and vouchers creation of Service tax
8. Ledger and vouchers creation of FBT(Fringe benefit tax)
9. Ledgers and vouchers creation of Excise dealer
10. Ledger creation of Point of sale
11. Ledger and vouchers creation of payroll
12. Final accounts and its adjustment
13. Trial balance
172
APPENDIX – AZ92
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
M.A. HISTORY (CBCS)
III & IV Semester
(For Colleges 2012-2013)
Total Courses: 18
Total Hours : 120 hrs
Total Credits : 90
THIRD SEMESTER
Credits
15
5
5
25
Credits
15
5
20
Hours
18
6
6
30
Components
Core Subject – 3
Elective – 1
Project – 1
(Group Project)
Total 5 Courses
FOURTH SEMESTER
Components Hours
Core Subject – 3 24
Elective – 1 6
Total 4 Courses 30
173
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR - THIRD SEMESTER
Core Paper - 1
HISTORY OF LATER MEDIEVAL INDIA 1526 A.D – 1757A.D.
UNIT I: Source of Mughal History – Archaeological – Literary Source- Foreigner
Travellers Accounts – Conceptual Explanation Jagir, Pargana – Mansab – Desh muka,
Jizyah Shana-i-mandi and Mercantillism – Petty Kingdoms in North India – Foundation
of Mughal Empire – Babur, Humagan and the Suris.
UNIT II : POLITICAL DEVELOPMENTS:
Mughal Expansion from Akbar to Aurangazeb: The period of Stability and Expansion
1611-1621- The period of crisis 1622-1627- The Nurjahan Junta-Later Mughal Empire-
Decline and disintegration of Mughal Empire- Political, administrative and Economic
causes. The Maratha Movements- Expansion under Peshwas- Marathas confederacy
cause and decline. European penetration and the British Conquest of India. British
occupation of Bengal –battle of Plassey Buxax - Dupleix - Robert Clive.
UNIT III: ADMINISTRATION:
Shershah‘s Administrative Reforms-Mughal Administration – Land Revenue and
other sources of Income – Mansabdari and Jagirdari – Administrative system in the
Deccan – The Vijaya Nagara – Bahmanis – and the Marattas. Britisher‘s Dual system of
Administration of Bengal.
UNIT IV: AGRICULTURAL PRODUCTION
Village Economy, Peasantry, Urban centres and Population. Industries cotton
Textile, handicrafts, agro-based Industries. Organisation, Factories Technology. Trade
and commerce - state Politices, Internal and external trade, European Trade, trade
centres and Ports, tansport and communication. Financing trade, commerce and
industries, Hundi- (bills of Exchange) and Insurance currency.
174
SOCIO-RELIGIOUS MOVEMENTS: The saints of the Medieval Period North and South
– There impacton Socio- Political and religious life. Sikh Movement: Guru Narnak Dev,
and his teachings and practices Adi Granth.
UNIT V:
Society-Classification- Ruling Class-Major Religious Groups- The mercantile and
Professional classes - Rural Society. Petty Chieftains- Village official. Cultivators- and
Non cultivating classes - artisan, position of women. British Officer- Anglo – Indian
classes- System of Education and its Motivation – Literature Persian Sanskrit and
regional Languages - Fine Arts- Major school of Painting, Music- Architectural
Development of North and South India – Indo – Islamic Architecture-English
architecture.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Arasaratham, S., Maritime India in the Seventeenth Century.
2. Banerji, A.K., Aspects of Indo-British Economic relations.
3. Bayly, C.A., Indian Society and the making of the British Empire
4. Brown Percy, Indian Architecture Islamic Period.
5. Chaudhuri, K.N., (a) The trading world of Asia and the East India Company.
6. Dutt, R.C., - Economic History of India in Early British Rule.
7. Irfan Hala, Agrarian System of Mughtal India
8. Irwin, W., The Army of the Indian Mughal
9. Mureland, Agrarian System of Moslem India
10. Moreland, Akbar to Aurangazeb
11. Ranade, M.G., Rise of the Maratha Power
12. Sarkar, J.N., History of Aurangazeb Vol I-V
13. Satish Chandra, parties and politics at the Mughal Court 1707-40
14. Sen, S.N., Military System of the Marattas.
15. Tripathi, R., Rise and fall of the Mughal Empire.
175
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR - THIRD SEMESTER
Core Paper: 2
TWENTIETH CENTURY WORLD
UNIT I
Legacy of the Nineteenth Century – Modern State and its evolution - Growth of
Capitalism and Imperialism – Liberalism - Socialism - Nationalism.
UNIT II
World order upto 1919, First World War - its Nature, Peace Settlements and
Consequences – Reparation and war debts; Daws plan – young Plan, Disarmament
and concern for security – Washington Naval conference, Locarno pact – Kellogg
Briand Pact - Russian Revolution — Establishment of Socialist State Economic and
Political Policies - Lenin
UNIT III
League of Nations : Collective Security - Great Depression –Rise of Totalitarian
powers - Stalinism - Nazism and Fascism – Japan - Second World War –
Surrender of Japan and Germany – New Political Order - Sunyatson and Chinese
Revolution – Communist Revolution in China.
UNIT IV
Cold War Era: Ideological and Political Basis - Pacts and Treaties - UNO and World
Peace - Regional issues: Cuba, Korea, Palestine; Berlin wall demolition –end of cold
war.
UNIT V
Civil Rights Movement in USA - Ending the, Ea of Apartheid - Nelson Mandela, Rise
- Disintegration of Socialist Bloc - Change in the Political Order- Bi -Polar to Uni –
98, 920 Polar world – BRICS, G8, G20, WTO
176
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Palmer and Perkins - International Relations
2. William Schuman - International Politics
3. Margantha, Hans J., - Politics Among Nations
4. E.H. Carr - The World between Two World Wars
5. - do- - The Twenty Years Crisis, 1919-1939.
6. Charles P. Schleicher - Introduction to International Relations.
7. M.S. Rajan - United Nations and Domestic
Jurisdiction
8. Hartman - World in Crisis
9. Eric Hobsbawm - Twentieth Century World
10. William R. Keyler - The Twentienth Century world.
177
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR - THIRD SEMESTER
Core Paper: 3
CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY OF ENGLAND FROM 1603 – 1958A.D.
UNIT I
The Stuart Period - James 1 and his four Parliaments - Charles I and his first three
Parliaments - Petition of Rights - Personal Rule Long Parliament - Execution of
Charles I- the Common Wealth - the Constitutional Experiments of Cromwell.
UNIT II
Restoration - Charles II - Convention Parliament - Cavalier Parliament - Clarendon
Code - Glorious Revolution of 1688 - Bill of Rights and Act of Settlement, 1701.
UNIT III
Parliamentary growth under George I and George II - Growth of Cabinet System -
Evolution of the position of Prime Minister - George III and his Personal Rule -
Evolution of Party System.
UNIT IV
The Age of Reforms - Act of 1832, 1867, 1882, 1884, 1885. Parliamentary Act of
1911, Act of 1918, Act of 1928, Balfour Report and the Statute of Westminster.
UNIT V
Reorganization of Judiciary during 19th & 20th Centuries - Party System – House of
Commons - House of Lords - Commonwealth of Nations.
178
Books for Reference:
1. Keir, D.L., - Constitutional History of Modern Britain
2. Adams, G., - Constitutional History of England
3. Hall, - A Brief Survey of English Constitutional History
4. Jennings, I., - The British Cabinet System
5. -do- - Law and Constitution
6. -do- - The British Constitution
7. -do- - Rule of Law
8. Maitland, T, - English Constitutional History with Documents
9. Stubbs - Constitutional History of England
10. Mariot - Constitutional History of England
179
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR - THIRD SEMESTER
Elective Paper - 1
DRAVIDIAN MOVEMENT: 1885-1987
UNIT 1: Genesis of the Movement: Western Liberal Ideas – missionaries and
Educational Services – Contribution of Bishop Dr.Robert Cladwell and Prof.P.Sundaram
Pillai to Dravidian identity – St.Ramalingar – swami Vaigundar Role of the Pure –
Tamil Movement – Depressed Class Movement.
UNIT II: The Justice Party: Formative Period - Dravidian Home – South Indian Liberal
Federation – The Justice Manifesto and Justice Party – Pitti Theagaraya Chettyar and
Dr.T.M. Nair, Dyarchy and General Elections – The Party in Power: Socio – Religious
and Educational Measures – Relation with the British – Congress Party – Failure of the
Justice Party.
UNIT III: E.V.R. and Self-Respect Movement: EVR and His Philosophy
Cheranmahadevi Gurukulam Episode – Temple – Entry Movement – Vaikom
Satyagraha – Dravida Kazhaham- Self- Respect Marriages- Anti-Hindi Agitations – Split
in the Dravida kazhaham.
UNIT IV: Rise of DMK : Annadurai – Formation of DMK – General Election of 1967-
DMK in Power – Social Welfare Schemes – World Tamil Conferences – Centre- State
Relations.
UNIT V: Rise of AIADMK: Split in the DMK – Emergence of MGR and DMK – AIADMK
in Power: Educational Policies and Social Welfare Measures – Creation of New Districts
– Demise of MGR 1987.
180
Book for Reference:
1. Anil Bhatt, Caste, Class and Politics.
2. Baker, C.J., The Politics of South India, 1920-1937.
3. Baker, C.J., & Washbook, D.A., Political Institutions and Political Changes.
4. Dravid Arnold, The Congress in Tamil Nadu.
5. Murasoli Maran, Dravidian Movement
6. Nair, T.M., The Now-Brahmin Manifesto
7. Nedunchelian, Dravida Iyakka Varalaru.
8. Spratt, DMK in Power.
9. Thirunavukkarasu, K., Dravida Iyakka Verkal.
10. Viswanathan, E.S., ‗Periyar‘ Political Biography
181
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR - THIRD SEMESTER
Course – 5 Project
A group project study is introduced in order to develop research skill among the
students. Each group should have minimum 4 candidates. The students are required to
choose a fresh topic and to refer original primary sources as well as secondary data for
the completion of the dissertation / project work. The work should include ―Bibliography‖
citing the original and other sources that are consulted in the preparation of the project.
EVALUATION
Project 60 Marks
Viva 40 Marks
Total 100 Marks
182
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR – 4th
SEMESTER
Core Paper - 1
MODERN INDIA WITH REFERENCE TO FREEDOM STRUGGLE
(1757 A.D - 1947 A.D.)
UNIT I
Stages of Colonialism, Imperialism, Capitalism -. Nascent Nationalism - Resistance of
Indian rulers and chieftains - Various peasant and Tribal uprisings and military Revolts.
UNIT II
Introduction of Western Education - Socio - Religious Reform Movements - Role of the
Press and Indian Awakening - Pre-Congress Associations - Formation of the Indian
National Congress, 1885.
UNIT III:
Constitutional Methods of Agitation: Aspiration and Demands of the Congress Struggle
and Strategy – Moderation and Extremism – Drain of wealth- Appeals, Resolutions
and Petitions - Role of Congress Leaders - Popular Methods of Agitation - Partition of
Bengal 1905, - Swadeshi and Boycott Movernents- Split in the Congress – Rise of
militant nationalism.
UNIT IV
Rise and Growth of Home Rule movement – Revolutionary Movement: Maharastra,
Bengal and Madras - Press and Literature in Bengal - Role of Shyamji Krishna Verma,
V.D. Savarkar, Madam Cama, MN Roy, MPT Acharya - Alipur Conspiracy - Maniyatchi
Incident - The Gaddar Party - Udham Singh and Bhagat Singh.
183
UNIT V
Gandhian Era: Gandhi‘s Entry into Politics .- Non-Cooperation Movement, Chauri -
Chaura Incident - Swarajist Party -Motilal Nehru - Simon Commission, Nehru Report -
Jinnah‘s 14 Points (1929) - Civil Disoobedience Movement (193034) - Gandhi-Irwin
Pact (1931) - Communal Award - Poona Pact - Cripps Proposals - Quit India Movement
(1942) - Muslim League and Demand for Pakistan - CR Formula - Rash Behari Bose -
Subash Chandra Bose & Indian National Army – Towards Freedom.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Agarwal, R.C., National Movement and Constitutional Development in India.
2. Ahluvalia, H.M., Freedom Stuggle in India 1857-1909.
3. Bipin Charidra, India‘s Struggle for Independence 18574947.
4. Bipin Chandra, Communalism in India.
5. Ghose, K.K., The Indian NationaiArmy.
6. Gopal, S., The British Policy in India 1858-1905.
7. Gupta, D.C., Indian National Movement.
8. Majumdar, R.C., History of Freedom Movement/n Bengal, Vols. I to II.
9. Pattabhi Sitaramayya, History of Indian National Congress; Vol.1 & II.
10. Rajayyan, K., South Indian Rebellion 18004801.
11. __________, Freedom Struggle in India.
184
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR – 4th
SEMESTER
Core Paper - 2
CONTEMPORARY INDIA SINCE 1947 A.D
UNIT I
Partition of British India: Demand for Pakistan – Post Independent India –
Resettlement & Repatriation Problem-Integration of Princely States: Kashmir,
Hyderabad & Junagarh - RoIe of Vallabhai Patel – Framing of adoption of the
Constitution - Features of the Constitution-Republic of India-General Elections-
Congress in Power-Cabinet Government & Party System-Bureaucracy-Judiciary
UNIT II
India‘ Foreign Policy: It‘s Basic Concepts - Panchaseela & Non-Alignment - India and
its Neighbours – Indo - Pak Relations – Indo - Sri Lankan Relations – Indo - Bangladesh
Relations & lndo - China Relations-India & The UN- Commonwealth, SAARC, NAM-
Indo-US & Indo-Russian Relations-India and Disarmament,NBT and CTBT
UNIT III
Economic Development: Planning in lnaia Five Year Plans & Annual Plans -National
Development Council and its Role-Welfare Programmes of the Government-IRDP,
Jawahar Rozgar Yojana, etc, Growth of Education Radhakrishnan Commission-AL
Mudaliar Commission Kothari Commission, etc., - National Literacy Mission-Acharya
Commission- New Educational Policy (1986) - Navodaya Schools
UNIT IV
Development of Science and Technology Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) and its
Programmes-Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO) and its Programmes-
Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO) and its Programmes-Missile
185
Technology and its Development-Bio Technology-Green, White and Blue Revolutions-
Development of Communication - Railways, Roadways, Airways
UNIT V:
Makers of Contemporary India: Nehru, Patel, Indra Gandhi, CV Raman,
Radhakrishnan, Visveswarayya, HJ Bhaba, Vikram Sarabhai, HN SethnaShanti Swarup
Bhatnagar, BC Roy, M.S Swarninathan, Vargheese Kurian and APJ AbdulKaIam.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Basu, D.D., Introduction to Indian Constitution, Culcutta, 2002.
2. Bipan Chandra, India After Independencel947- 2000, New Delhi,
3. John. Gilbert; G., Contemporary History of India, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Pylee, M.V., Indian Constitution, 2000.
5. Paul R. Brass, The Politics of India Since Independence, New York,2001.
6: RajaniKothari, Politics in India, New Delhi, 2003.
7. Sumit Sarkar, Modem India, New Delhi, 2004.
8. Dr. Sobitha Bai, Contemporary History of India 1947 – 2009 A.D., Marthandam.
186
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR – 4th
SEMESTER
Core Paper – 3
CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY OF INDIA 1773 to 1947 A.D.
UNIT I
Formation of English East India Company – Orgainsation – Structure – Trade Relation –
Presidencies – British Parliament‘s intervention in Company Affairs – Regulatingll Act of
1773 – Its Significance – Pitt‘s India Act of 1784, Act of 1793.
UNIT II
Salient features of Charter Acts of 1793, 1813, 1833, 1853 – Crown‘s take over of the
Indian Government – The Act of 1858 – Queen‘s Proclamation – The Indian Councils
Act of 1861.
UNIT III
Indian Councils Act of 1892 – Minto – Morley Reforms of 1909 – Communal Electorate
– Montague – Chelmsford Act of 1919 – Governor General and his Executive – Central
Legislature – Dyarchy in Provinces – Critical Analysis.
UNIT IV
Muddiman Commission – Simon Commission, Nehru Report – Jinnah‘s Fourteen Points
– Round Table – Gandhi Irwin pact – Communal Award – Poona pact – white paper -
Ggovernment of India Act of 1935 – Provincial Autonomy – All India Federation –
Dyarchy in the centre.
UNIT V
Impact of Second world war on constitutional Development – Cripps mission – C.R.
Formula – Wavell Plan - Cabinet mission – constituent Assembly – Mount batten plan –
Attlee Declaration – Indian Independence Act.
187
Books for Reference:
Mahajan V.D - History of Freedom Struggle and Constitutional Development
Agarwal A.C. - Constitutional History of India.
Keith A.B. - Constitutional History of India
Appadurai - Dyarchy in Practice
188
M.A. HISTORY
SECOND YEAR – 4th
SEMESTER
Elective Paper - 1
EVOLUTION OF POLITICAL THOUGHT
UNIT I
State: Origin of the idea of State - Polis - Civitas. Definition of State. Elements of State.
Theories of origin of the State - The theory of Divine Origin of the State, The theory of
Force, The theory of Social Contract, Kinship theory and the Evolutionary theory- Early
exponents: Socrates – Plato- Aristotle – St. Augustine.
UNIT II
Founders of Modern. Political Thought: Thomas Hobbes - His writings- Human nature -
Individual and State Natural Rights and Law - Sovereign Leviathan. John Locke - his
writings - Human nature - State of nature - Social Contract - Sovereignty - Separation
of powers - Limitations on Government. Rousseau - his writings – Sate of nature -
Social contract - General will – Sovereignty - Voltaire - His writings - change in human
institutions - Origin of civil society - Natural religion.
UNIT III
Utilitarian Thinkers: Jermy Bentham- His works – Principle of Utility – Felicific Calculus –
His idea of State – law and Rights – John Stuart Mill – His works – on Liberty –
Representative Government – Proportional Representation. Modified Utilitarianism.
Immanuel Kant- His works – idealist school – Frederic Hegal – Philosophy of Right –
Views on freedom- Spirit and Dialects.
UNIT IV
Socialist and Democratic Thinkers: St. Simon – His ideas of State – Positive morality –
Regulation on production – views on property. Thomas Jefferson – views on inalienable
Human Rights – Features of Jeffersonian Democracy. Herold J.Laski – His writings –
Pluralism – Individual Rights – Capitalism. Marxism – Maoism.
189
UNIT V
Indian Political Thought: State and Sovereignty in Ancient India – State and
Sovereignty in medieval India – Arrival of Nationalism – Thoughts of Ram Mohan Roy-
Economic Nationalist Dadabhai Naoroji – Hinduism, swami Vivekananda – Muslim
thought Sir Syed Ahmed khan – Communist Thought – M.N.Roy, Socialist Thought
Lohia.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
Archibald William Bunning - Political Thought
Bandyopadhyaya - Ma-Tse-Tung and Gandhi
Bhandari. B.R. - History of European Political Philosophy
David M.Lieuman - Marxism After Marx
Ebenstin - Great political Thinkers
Emile Burns - What is Marxism
Herbert. A. Deane - The Political Ideas of Laski
John. H. Hallowel - Main currents of Modern Political Thought
Lancaster - masters of Political Thought
Dr.C. Selva Raj - Historiography,C.S.R. Publication, Udayamarthandam
190
APPENDIX – AZ93
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.A., ECONOMICS Second year syllabus
(CBCS-For colleges)
(For those who joined the course from the Academic year 2012-2013 onwards
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
III SEMESTER
Hrs. Credits 1. Development Economics - 6 5 2. Public Economics - 6 5 3. Rural Development - 6 5 4. Human Resource Development - 6 5 5. Project (Individual Project) - 6 4
IV SEMESTER
1. Indian Economy - 6 4 2. Environmental Economics - 6 4 3. Industrial Economics - 6 4 4. Demography - 6 5 5. Indian Banking System - 6 4
Total Number of Courses : 20
Total Number of Hours : 120
Total Number of Credits : 90
191
Project Work:
Components Marks
Project Report 60
Viva-voce 40
Total 100
Question Pattern
Part A 2 x 1 = 20 objective type
Part B Either or choice 2.5 x 2.5 = 5 Marks
Part C Either or Choice 1 x 8 = 8 Marks
SEMESTER – III
DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS
Objectives:
1. To study the various growth models.
2. To analyse the impact of Growth Models on output, income and employment both in developed and developing countries.
3. To understand the land, physical capital, labour and human capital in India.
Unit-I Meaning and measurement of economic development and human
development – Structural features and process of change - empirical studies of Kuznets, Denison and Chenery – Ingredients of development.
Unit-II
Land, Physical capital, labour and human capital, technological change scale – organization – Growth models: Ricardo, Marx (Classical), Harrod-Domar, Solow (Neoclassical) – Lewis model and the Renis-Fei Extension. Development Planning: Balanced and unbalance strategies – Choice of techniques – Capital- output ratio – investment Criteria – NPV, IRR, Social Cost Benefit Analysis.
192
Unit-III
Factors in economy development – natural resources, population, capital, Human Resource Development and infrastructure - Trade and development – trade as engine of growth, two-gap analysis, Prebisch, Singer and Myrdal views – gains from trade and LDCs.
Unit-IV Accounting prices – Applications of Input-output analysis in planning –
programming – programming approach of planning - Objectives and role of monetary and fiscal policies in economic development –planning in a market- oriented economy.
Unit-V Financing of economic development – Domestic and external resources –
International trade and development – Two-gap models – plan models of India – past performance and current issues of Indian Planning.
Books for Reference :
1. G.M.Meier. Leading Issues in Economic Development (Latest ed.) 2. P.A.Yotopoulous and J.B.Nargent, Economics of Development. 3. A.P.Thirlwal, Growth and Development with special reference to
Developing Economies (Latest Ed.) 4. Michael P. Todaro, Economic Development in the Third World (Latest Ed.) 5. Bruce Herrick and Charles P. Kindleberger, Economic Development
(Latest Ed.) 6. S.K.Mishra and V.K.Puri, Vikas Ka Arthshastra (Hindi), Economics of
Growth and Developemnt (Eng.) 7. M.L.Jhingan, Vikas Ka Aethshastra.
PUBLIC ECONOMICS
Objectives:
1. To understand the charging role and functions of the Government in
different economics.
2. To study the implications of the budgetary policy on allocation of
resources and distribution of income.
3. To examine the economic theory of democracy and political process.
4. To analyse the theoretical and empirical aspects of public expenditure.
193
Unit-I
Introduction: Nature, scope and subject matter of public economics. Role of Government in organized society - government in a mixed economy: public and private sector, cooperation or competition - Government as an agent for economic planning and development - private goods, public goods, and merit goods.
Unit-II
Rationale for Public Policy: Allocation of resources –impossibility of decentralized provision of public goods (contribution of Samuelson and Musgrave) – Stabilization Policy – Keynesian case for stabilization policy –Social goals – Poverty alleviation – Provision of infrastructure facilities – removing distributional inequalities and regional imbalances.
Unit-III
Public Expenditure: Wagner‘s law of increasing state activities - Wiesman- Peacock hypothesis; Pure theory of public expenditure - Structure and growth of public expenditure - Reforms in expenditure budgeting - Programme budgeting and zero base budgeting – Expenditure Reforms Commission.
Unit-IV
Fiscal Federalism: Principles of multi-unit finance - Fiscal federalism in India - Vertical and horizontal imbalance - Assignment of function and sources of revenue; Constitutional provisions - Finance Commission and Planning Commission- Devolution of resources and grants - Resource transfer from Union to States and states to local bodies - Criteria for transfer of resources - Centre- State financial relations in India - Problems of states‘ resources and indebtedness.
Unit-V
Indian Tax System: Revenue of the union, states and local bodies – Major taxes in India; direct and indirect taxes, taxation of agriculture, expenditure tax – Reforms in direct and indirect taxes, taxes on service - non-tax revenue of centre, state and local bodies – Analysis of Central and State government budgets- Fiscal crises and fiscal sector reforms in India – Fiscal responsibility and budgetary management Act – Recent Taxation Committee Reports – Reports of Finance Commission in India.
194
Books for Reference :
1. Goode, R. (1986), Government Finance in Developing Countries, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Duff, L. (1997), Government and Market, Orient Longman, New Delhi.
3. Sahni, B.S. (Ed.) (1972), Public Expenditure Analysis: Selected Readings, Rotherdam University Press.
4. Barman, K. (1986), Public Debt Management in India, Uppal Publishing House, New Delhi.
5. Government of India (1985), Long Term Fiscal Policy, New Delhi. 6. Chelliah, Raja J. et. al (1981), Trends and Issues in India‘s Federal
Finance, National Institute of Public Finance and Policy, New Delhi. 7. Srivastava, D.K. (Ed.) (2000), Fiscal Federalism in India, Har-Anand
Publications Ltd., New Delhi. 8. K.K.Andly and K.P.M.Sundaram – Public Economics and Public
finance, New Delhi. 9. B.P.Tyagi, Public Finance, New Delhi. 10. K.P.M.Sundaram and E.N. Sundaram, Public Economics, New
Delhi.. 11. Musgrave R.A., and Musgrave, P.B., Public Finance Theory and
Finance, New Delhi.
RURAL DEVELOPMENT
Objectives:
1. To enable the students to understand thoroughly the development in the rural area.
2. To familiarize the students about the rural marketing system.
3. To understand the rural poverty, indebtedness and special programme
for rural development.
Unit-I Introduction: Nature of rural economy - concept of rural development –
scope and importance of rural development – V.M.Dandekar‘s approach to rural development. Dimensions of rural Development: Agricultural growth in India – Irrigation – Agrarian reforms – rural electrification – rural transport.
195
Unit-II
Rural Non-Farm Economy: Concepts and definitions of rural industries- needs and economic significance of rural industries- Current trends of KVI-rural industries and employment generation- rural industries and poverty alleviation- role of KVIC in the development of rural industries- rural industries in the liberalization period- present problems of rural industries in India – remedies.
Unit-III Poverty and Unemployment: Rural poverty: nature, causes and remedies –
rural employment: nature, causes and remedies – Rural indebtedness: magnitude, causes- Relief measures - Role of SHGs and Micro Finance in this context – Rural industrialization.
Unit-IV Programmes of Rural Development: Objectives and Assessment of
programmes / schemes – Food for Works Programme – Employment Guarantee Scheme – Small Farmers Development Agency – Marginal farmers and agricultural labour – NREGP – TRYSEM – Special Component Plan for SCs – Tribal Development Programme – Employment Assurance Scheme – Swarn Jayanti Gram Swarozgar Yojana - Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme.
Unit-V Rural Marketing: Introduction of rural products and marketing- nature of
rural marketing- importance and significance of rural marketing- Scientific marketing system – recent trends in rural marketing- current problems of rural marketing- suggestion for improving rural marketing- introduction of regulated market- objectives-features-benefits-problems and remedies of regulated marketing in India.
Books for Reference : 1. Dandekar V.M. and Rath N., Poverty in India. 2. Desai and Casant, Study of Rural Economics, Himalaya Publishing
Company, New Delhi. 3. Krishnamurthy V.T., Community Development in India. 4. Government of India – Evolution of community Development Programme
in India. 5. Jain S.P., Indian Rural Economics, Vikas, New Delhi. 6. Shakuntala Devi, Rural Credit and Agricultural Development. Scrap &
Sons, New Delhi, 1996. 7. Government of India, Ministry of Finance, Economic Division Economic
Survey – Various Issues. 8. Gagam Kumar Singh, Administration for rural Development Programme in
India, Abhijeet Publications, New Delhi.
196
9. Singh, Katar, Rural Development- Principles, Policies and Management, Sage Publication, 1999, New Delhi.
10. Lalitha, Rural Development in India: Emerging Issues and Trends, Vedams Publication, Vol: 2, 2004, New Delhi.
11. Behera, M.C, Globalization and Rural Development: Understanding New Development, Vedams Publication, 2004, New Delhi.
12. Soundarapandian, Rural Industries in India, Mohit Publication, 2004, New Delhi.
13. Ministry of Rural Development, India. 14. WWW. kvic
HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT (Elective)
Objectives: 1. To enable the students to understand thoroughly the theories of HRD. 2. To familiarize the students about the vital aspects of HRD. 3. To understand the role of government and trade union and worker's
participation in management.
Unit-I Human Resources Development - nature and scope – functions –
objectives – evolution – HRM in changing environment.
Unit-II Human Resources Planning – importance – factors affecting HRP –
Planning Process – Barriers to HRP – Job Analysis and Design – source of manpower supply – Forecasting of human resource supply – Identification of human resource gap.
Unit-III Selection and Requirement – purpose and importance – factors governing
recruitment – process – Philosophy of Recruitment – selection – process – orientation and placement - Barriers to effective selection.
Unit-IV
Training and Development – Nature – methods of training – career planning – Evaluation of training schemes – career planning – performance appraisal – employee counseling.
Unit-V
Industrial relation- Role of government, employees and trade unions in industrial relations – Industrial disputes – handling and setting disputes – principles and forms of collective bargaining - worker's participation in management – Role and methods of worker's participation.
197
Books for Reference :
1. Gray Desler, Managing Human Resource, Printice Hall. 2. Ashwathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 2005. 3. Bishwajith Pattnayak, Human Resource Development, Sultan Chand,
2005. 4. Udhai Pareek and T.V.Rao, Hand Book on Training and Development,
Kanishka Publication, 1965. 5. Human Resource Development, IIB Publication, New Delhi. 6. Mirza S. Ssiyadin, Human Resource Management, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
M.A. Economics
SEMESTER - IV
INDIAN ECONOMY
Objectives:
1. To analyse the structure of the Indian economy.
2. To examine the factors responsible for the introduction of economic
reforms in India.
3. To assess the impact of reform measures on the economy.
4. To evaluate the new policy initiatives undertaken by the Government of
India to overcome present economic ailments in the economy.
Unit - I Structure of the Indian Economy: Characteristics – Major issues of
development - structure and organization of villages town- Industries and handicrafts- colonialism to modernization.
Unit - II
Natural Resources and Demographic Features: Land – water - forest – fisheries and marine resources – Population size, growth rates, sex composition- Rural- urban migration- problems of over population policy. Human Resource Development – its indicators measures and importance – unemployment and poverty in India – Infrastructure of Indian economy.
198
Unit - III
Trends in agricultural production and productivity: Trends in agricultural production and productivity – Land reforms – New agricultural strategy – Green Revolution, concept, need, objectives and methods adopted - agricultural marketing – problems of marketing – steps to solve the marketing problems – regulated markets. Rural credit, Agricultural price policy – need – food security.
Unit – IV
Industrial pattern in India: Industrial policy of 1948, 1956 and 1991 - Large scale industries- Iron and Steel- Cotton textile- Jute – Sugar – Cement- Paper and Petro chemical industries. Small scale industries – Cottage- Village and Small industries – need- importance – problem – Measures to solve the problems. Public sector Vs private sector – Role of tertiary sector in the present context – SEZ.
Unit -V
Economic Planning in India: Objectives – Targets – Strategies – Achievement and Failures – New Economy Reforms – Liberalization – Privatisation- Globalizations. Plan models: Nehru, Gandhi, Rao and Manmohan, Mahalnobis.
Books for Reference : 1. Mishra & Puri – Economics of development and planning 7th edition
Himalaya publishing house,, New Delhi. 2. Dhingra, I.C. The Indian Economy: Environment and policy, 16th revised
edition Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi. 3. Ruddar Datt, KPM, Sundaram Indian Economy 37th revised edition Sultan
Chand & company Ltd, Ram Nagar, New Delhi 1997. 4. Jhingan, M.L., The Economics of Development and Planning, Ed, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 5. Dhar, P.K. Indian Economy – it‘s growing dimensions, Kalyani Publishers,
New Delhi.
ENVIRONMENT ECONOMICS
Objectives:
Environmental issues are becoming important in policy making and assessing the welfare of the societies. The application of economic tools and principles to environmental issues have gained lot of significance. Against this background, the paper aims at equipping the learner with suitable tools and techniques to analyze environmental problems, dissect their cause, evaluate the monetary consequence of policy intervention and suggest a suitable corrective action for the maximization of the outcome, and ultimately leading to the attainment of sustainable development.
199
Unit- I
Nexus Between Ecology and Economics – The Principle of Material Balance –Private versus Social Cost – Resilience – Entropy – Trade- Off Between Economic Growth and Ecological Balance- Renewable and Non- Renewable Resources- Sustainable Development.
Unit - II
Economic Theory for Resource Allocation Policy- Externalities- Economic Coordination and the Price System – Market Equilibrium Analysis in Natural Resource Economics- Pareto Efficiency and the Market – Property Rights and Economic Efficiency – Limits to Growth – Technology versus Environment – Coase‘s Theorem- Simon Kuznet‘s Inverted ‗U‘ Shaped Curve.
Unit - III
Two Kinds of Environmentalism – Rich and Poor – Poverty and the Environment – Cross Cultural Environmental Ethics – The Merchandising of Biodiversity – Genetic Erosion – Peasant Struggle to Control Seeds – Farmers‘ Rights.
Unit- IV
Economics of Pollution Control- Environmental Impact Assessment – Evaluation of Project and Programme- Benefit/ Cost Analysis – Contingent Valuation Method- Measurement of Environmental Damages- Valuing Environmental Benefits: Hedonic Price Approach- Ecological Footprint Approach.
Unit- V
Renewable resources- Growth curves – the rate of exploitation- open access and Common Property solutions – Exhaustible resources – Monopoly and the rate of extraction- Ecosystem services – Ecosystem approach – Management within natural limits – Account for true value.
Books for Reference : 1. Adiseshiah Malcolm. S, edited, 1987, Economics of environment, Lancer
International, India International Center, New Delhi. 2. David W. Pearce and R. Kerry Turner, Economics of Natural Resources
and the Environmental, Harvester wheatsheaf, New York, 1990. 3. Joseph J. Seneca and Michael K. Taussig, Environmental Economics,
prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1974.
200
4. Kerr John M, Marothia Dinesh K, Katar Singh, Ramasamy C and Bentley William R, edited, 1997, National Resource Economics- Theory and application in India, Oxford & IBH publishing Co. pri. Ltd. New Delhi.
5. Ramachandra Guha and Martinez Alier J (2000), Varieties of Environmentalism, Oxford University Press, Delhi.
6. Charles D. Kolstad, Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, New York, 2000.
INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
• To understand the various problems confronting the entrepreneurs in the process of industrialization.
• To study the significance of industrialization for a developing country for its survival in the highly challenging, complicated and dynamic competitive economic systems and to examine the impact of rationalization in the process of development and expansion of major and small-scale industries.
Unit- I
Concept of plant, firm, business house, industry and market. Business Organization in private and public corporate sectors – Strength and structure of Indian corporate sector – Public sector in India: rationale and performance. Industrialization and development - Backward and forward linkages – Independence of industrial sectors.
Unit - II
Industrial Finance: Meaning, scope, importance of industrial finance – sources of industrial finance: Private, public and co-operative sector – shares, debentures, bonds, deposits, loan etc. Foreign capital: Need for foreign capital, Government's policy towards foreign capital. Direct Investment, Foreign Institutional Investment, Euro Issues, GDR, ADR, External Commercial Borrowings.
Unit - III
Industrial structure and growth – pattern of industrialization – public and private , large and small industries – Industrial productivity – measurement, partial and total trends – Industrial labour – problems, policies and reforms in India – Economic reforms and industrial growth.
201
Unit- IV
Location of Industries - Theories and measures of location - Location of industries in India - Industrial project, selection criterion – Industrial fiancé - Money and Capital markets – Development banks – Industrial finance in India.
Unit- V
Industrial Growth in India: Inter-regional variations in industrial development – Industrial policy in India – Small scale industries – Industrial concentration and MRTP Act. Foreign collaboration in technology imports. Industrial sickness - Policy making for Industrial growth – effective study of the steel, cement, electronics and textiles industries – Industrial development in Rajasthan.
Books for Reference : 1. R.R.Barthwal, Industrial Economics: An Introductory Textbook. 2. S.C.Kuchchhal. Financial Management. 3. Hat and Morris, Industrial Economics: Theory and Evidence. 4. Ishar J. Ahluwalia, Industrial Growth in India: Stagnation since the mid-
sixties. 5. K.V.Sivayya and V.B.K.Das, India Industrial Economy.
INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM
Objectives:
1. To provide theoretical knowledge in Indian banking system.
2. To equip the students to understand the behaviour of India's capital and
money market.
3. To understand the various development banking and its role and
functions of India.
Unit: I
Indian banking System. Banking Regulation Act 1949 - Banking Amendment Act 1994 – Nationalisation of Commercial Banks, objectives and Appraisal. Priority sector advances to weaker sections and their problems of recovery. Non-performing Assets of commercial banks. New innovations related to banking business.
202
Unit: II
Internationalisation of banking service in India - De-regulation, liberalization and competition among banks (New challenges for Indian Commercial Banks). Mutual Funds credit Ratings and the agencies – Merchant banking – Venture capital. Exchange Rate Banks – Recent changes in banking activity – Exchange Rate Management – The FEMA 2000.
Unit: III
Rural banking – Regional Rural Banks (RRBs), – National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD) - Primary Agricultural Credit Societies (PACS's) - Central Co-operative Banks (CCB's) – State Co-operative Banks (SCB's) – Land Development Banks (LDB's) – Strengthen the co- operative banking system.
Unit: IV
Meaning, Functions of Development banks. Development Banks in India – Industrial Finance Corporation of India (IFCI), Industrial Development Bank of India (IDBI), Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India (ICICI), Industrial Reconstruction Bank of India (IRBI), Export and Import Bank of India (Exim Bank), State Financial Corporation (SFC) State Industrial Development Corporation (SIDC) – Appraisal of the Development Banking in India.
Unit: V
Money and capital markets in India – Functions of Indian Money Market – Constitution of Indian Money Market – Defects of Indian Money Market – Features of Indian Capital Market – Banking sector reforms, Money market reforms – Capital market reforms – Social Banking, Innovative Banking – Defects of Indian Banking System – Suggestion to improve working – Narasimham Committee Report - Recent Banking Reforms.
Books Recommended
1. S.B.Gupta: Monetary Planning for India (Latest Ed.) 2. K.Rao: Management of Commercial Banks. 3. L.M.Bhole: Impacts of Monetary Policy. 4. Harendra Badhav (Rd.) Challenges to Indian Banking Competition,
globalization and Financial Markets McMillan, 1996. 5. N.S.Yher: Non-Performing Advances in Banks, Skylark, New Delhi.
203
Reference Books:
1. Report of the Committee (Narsimham) on the Financial System, Nov., 1991.
2. N.B.A.Bulletin: Annual Special Issues, 1994, 1995 & 1996, RBI Report on trend and Progress of Banking in India (Latest Ed.)
3. Hanson and Kathuria (ed.) A Financial Sector for the 21st Centaury, Oxford University Press.
4. Y.V.Reddy, Monetary and Financial Sector Reforms in India, UBSPD, New Delhi.
DEMOGRAPHY (Elective)
Objectives:
1. To enable the students understand various demographic theories.
2. To know the composition and dynamic of population across the world.
3. To study the various rural banks and their role in rural economy.
Unit: I Morality Measures – Grade and specific rates. Life tables – Factors
effecting morality. Morality change and population growth. Fertility measures – crude and specific rates, gross and non-reproductive rates. Factors affecting fertility – study of fertility attitude by special survey, Mortality rate, fertility rate, reproductive rate and population growth in India. Unit: II
Composition of population – social economic composition. Relationship of age, sex and other compositional traits to economic and special organization. Composition of population in India. Effects of birth death rate and migration rates upon population.
Unit: III
Basic principles of measurement of population growth – Estimates, census, vital registers and records of migration. Continuous population registration. Methods of population presentation. Projection of population in India.
Unit: IV
Economically active population – Basic concepts and definitions – impact of demographic process on the composition and size of the labour force, occupational and industrial composition of work force in relation to regional and International differences in economic development. Female participation in work
204
force. A study of occupation, composition and female participation in India. Concept of Human Development.
Unit: V
Theories of demographic transition. Employment and manpower planning – Its significance and problems. Measurement, incidence and implications of unemployment and underemployment with special reference to India. Implication of population changes for capital formation and employment in developing countries. Indian Census, Family Planning, NFH surveys (objectives and findings).
Books Recommended: 1. G.W.Barelay: Techniques of Population Analysis. 2. D.K.Bogue: Principles of Demography. 3. Coale and Hoover: Population Growth and Economic Development in Law
Income countries. 4. O.S.Srivastava: Arthik Evam Samajik Janananki Shastra (Hindi) 5. Jeevan Chandra pant: Janaki (Hindi) 6. Mahboob-Ui-Haq: Reflections in Human Development. 7. Human Development Report (Latest) 8. National Family Health Survey, 1 and 2.
205
APPENDIX – AZ94
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12.
M.Sc. Mathematics (CBCS)
II year syllabus for affiliated colleges
(Effective from the Academic year 2012 – 2013)
1. Objetives:
The objectives of the M.Sc. Mathematics course are:
To impart indepth knowledge in the classical and applied
mathematical concepts.
To develop and boost the ability of solving mathematical problems.
To inculcate the skill of application of mathematical theories.
To motivate the students to face the NET/SET Examinations and TRB Examinations confidently.
2. Eligibility:
As per the state government norms
3. Scheme of the course:
I Semester Hours/Week Credits
1.1. Algebra-I 8 5
1.2. Analysis-I 8 5
1.3. Probability and Statistics 7 5
1.4 Elective (any one of the following)
• Programming with C++
• Projective Geometry 7 5
• Discrete Mathematics
30 20
206
II Semester
2.1. Algebra-II 6 5
2.2. Analysis-II 6 5
2.3. Classical Mechanics 6 5
2.4. Ordinary Differential Equations 6 5
2.5 Elective (any one of the following)
• Programming with C++
and MS-Office- Practical 6 5
• Combinatorial Mathematics
• Stochastic Process
30 25
III Semester
3.1. Complex Analysis 6 5
3.2. Topology 6 5
3.3. Differential Geometry 6 5
3.4. Operations Research 6 5
3.5. Project (Individual Project) 6 5
30 25
IV Semester
4.1. Functional Analysis 8 5
4.2. Measure and Integration 8 5
4.3. Analytic Number Theory 8 5
207
4.4. Elective (any one of the following)
• Graph Theory
• Partial Differential Equations 6 5
• Advanced Topology
30 20
Total number of courses : 18
Total number of hours : 30 × 15 × 4 = 1800
Total number of credits : 90
Notes:
1. Each paper carries an internal component.
2. Theory-External: Internal Assessment = 75:25
Practical-External: Internal Assessment = 60:40
3. a) Internal marks for theory paper:
i) The average of the best two tests from
three compulsory tests 15
ii) Assignment 4
iii) Seminar 6
Total 25
b) Internal marks for practical paper:
Practical Work 20
The average of the best two tests
from three periodical tests 20
Total 40
208
4. Project:
Project Report (Central Evaluation) 60
Viva – Voce 40
Total 100
a) The project should be an ―individual project‖.
b) Project report evaluation will be done centrally and viva-voce will be
conducted
by both the External examiner and the guide at the end of the third semester.
4. Question Pattern:
Duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks: 75
Part A: (10×1=10)
All the questions should be multiple choice questions and two
questions from each unit.
Part B: (5×5=25)
One question from each unit with internal (either-or) choice.
The question from one of the units should contain problems (both
choices) from the exercise specified in the syllabus from the prescribed text.
Note: The problems in the exercise seeking the proof of theorems
/corollaries/ lemmas/propositions should be treated as theory questions.
Part C: (5×8=40)
One question from each unit with internal (either-or) choice.
209
The question from one of the units should contain problems (both
choices) from the exercise specified in the syllabus from the prescribed
text.
The question containing problems in part-B and Part-C SHOULD BE
from DIFFERENT UNITS.
Note:
In theory-oriented subjects like Algebra, Analysis, Topology,
Projective Geometry, Mechanics, Graph Theory etc., in part-B and part- C
the other four questions should be theory questions in both choices. In
problem oriented subjects like Statistics, Differential Equations, Discrete
Mathematics, Number theory, Combinatorics, OR, Differential Geometry
etc., the restriction on problems is not applicable.
M.Sc. Mathematics (CBCS)
(Effective from the Academic year 2012 – 2013)
Semester III
3.1. Paper-10-Complex Analysis
Text: Complex Analysis-Lars V. Ahlfors-Tata McGraw Hill(Third Edition)
Unit 1: Analytic functions-Polynomials-Power series.
(Chapter 2: Section 1.1 to 2.5)
Problems: Section 1.2(1 to7), Section 1.4(1 to 6), Section 2.2(1 to 5) and
Section 2.4(1 to 4)
Unit 2: Exponential and Trigonometric functions-Arcs and closed curves-
Analytic functions in regions-Conformal mapping-Linear transformations-
Symmetry.
(Chapter 2: Section 3.1 to 3.4 and Chapter 3: Section 2.1 to 3.3)
Problems: Chapter 2- Section 3.2(1 to 4) and Chapter 3- Section 3.1(1 to
4), Section 3.2(1 to3), Section 3.3(1 to 7)
210
Unit 3: Oriented circles-Families of circles-Line integrals, Rectifiable arc-
Line integrals as functions of arcs-Cauchy‘s theorem for a rectangle-
Cauchy‘s theorem in a disc.
(Chapter 3: Section 3.4, 3.5 and Chapter 4: Section 1.1 to 1.5)
Problems: Chapter 3- Section 3.5(1 to 6) and Chapter 4- Section 1.3(1 to 7)
Unit 4: Cauchy‘s integral formula: Index of a point-the integral formula-
Higher derivatives-Taylor‘s theorem-Zeroes and Poles-the local mapping
(Chapter 4: Section 2.1 to 3.3)
Problems: Chapter 4- Section 2.2(1 to3), Section 2.3(1) and Section 3.2(1
to 4)
Unit 5: The maximum principle-Calculus of Residues-The argument
principle-Evaluation of definite integrals.
(Chapter 4: Section 3.4 and 5.1 to 5.3)
Problems: Chapter 4- Section 3.4(1 and 2), Section 5.2(1 to 3) and Section
5.3
(1 to 3)
3.2. Paper-11-Topology
Text: Topology (Second Edition) James R. Munkres, Printice-Hall of India
Private Limited.
Unit 1: Topological spaces-closed sets and limit points.
(Chapter 2: Section 12 to 17)
Problems: Section 13(all exercise problems), Section 16(1 to 6) and
Section 17
(1 to 15)
211
Unit 2: Continuous functions-Product topology-Quotient topology.
(Chapter 2: Section 18, 19 and 22)
Problems: Section 18(1 to 8), Section 19(1 to 9) and Section 22(1 to 5)
Unit 3: Connected spaces-Compact spaces.
(Chapter 3: Section 23 and 26)
Problems: Section 23(1 to 6) and Section 26(1 to 9)
Unit 4: The Countability Axioms –The separation Axioms-Normal spaces.
(Chapter 4: Section 30 to 32)
Problems: Section 30(1 to 5), Section 31(1 to 7) and Section 32(1 to 7)
Unit 5: The Urysohn Lemma-The Urysohn Metrization Theorem-The Tietze
Extension Theorem.
(Chapter 4: Section 33 to 35)
Problems: Section 33(1to 5) and Section 35(1 to 4)
3.3. Paper-12-Differential Geometry
Text: An Introduction to Differential Geometry, Willmore (Oxford).
Unit 1: Space curve, arc length, tangent, normal, binormal, curvature and
torsion of a curve.
(Chapter 1: Section 1 to5)
Problems: Miscellaneous Exercises I( 1 to 13)
Unit 2: Contact between curves and surface, tangent surface, involute,
evolute, intrinsic equations-fundamental theorem of space curves-Helices.
(Chapter 1: Section 6 to 9)
Problems: Miscellaneous Exercises I (14 to 24)
212
Unit 3: Definition of a surface-curves on a surface-surfaces of revolution-
Helicoids Metric-Direction coefficients.
(Chapter 2: Section 1 to 6)
Problems: Miscellaneous Exercises II (1 to 4)
Unit 4: Families of curves-geodesics-Canonical geodesic equations-
Normal property of geodesics.
(Chapter 2: Section 7, 10 to 12)
Problems: Miscellaneous Exercises II ( 6,7 and 8)
Unit 5: Geodesic parallels-Geodesic curvature-The second fundamental
form-Principal curvatures-Line of curvature.
(Chapter 2: Section 14, 15 and Chapter 3: Section 1 to 3)
Problems: Miscellaneous Exercises III( 1 to 5)
3.4. Paper-13-Operations Research
Text: Operations Research Principles and Applications-G.Srinivasan-PHI
learning private limited-New Delhi-EEE edition.
Unit 1: Integer Programming.
(Chapter 7 and all exercise problems)
Unit 2: Network Problems-Minimum spanning tree problem-The shortest
path problem-The maximum flow problem-The minimum cost problem.
(Chapter 8: Section 8.5 to 8.9 and all exercise problems)
Unit 3: Travelling salesman and distribution problem.
(Chapter 9 and all exercise problems)
Unit 4: Basic Queueing models.
(Chapter 11 and all exercise problems)
213
Unit 5: Deterministic inventory models.
(Chapter 13 and all exercise problems)
3.5. Paper-14-Project
Semester IV
4.1. Paper-15-Functional Analysis
Text: Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis-G.F.Simmons-
McGraw-Hill International Editions.
Unit 1: Banach Spaces-The Definition and some examples-Continuous
linear transformations-The Hahn-Banach Theorem-The Natural imbedding
of N in N**.
(Chapter 9: Section 46 to 49)
Problems: Section 46(1to 4), Section 47(1 to 7), Section 48(1 to 4) and
Section 49(1 to 3)
Unit 2: The open mapping theorem-The conjugate of an operator, Hilbert
Spaces-The Definition and some simple properties-Orthogonal
Complements.
(Chapter 9: Sections 50, 51 and Chapter 10: Sections 52, 53)
Problems: Section 50(1to 3), Section 51(1 to 3), Section 52(1,3,4 and 6)
and Section 53(1 to 4)
Unit 3: Orthonormal Sets-The Conjugate Space H*-The Adjoint of an
Operator-Self-Adjoint Opertators.
(Chapter 10: Sections 54 to 57)
Problems: Section 54(1to 5), Section 55(1 to 3), Section 56(1 to 4) and
Section 57
(1and 2).
214
Unit 4: Normal and Unitary Operators-Projections, Finite Dimensional
Spectral Theory-Determinants and the Spectrum of an Operator-The
Spectral Theorem.
(Chapter 10: Sections 58, 59 and Chapter 11: Sections 61 and 62)
Problems: Section 58(1to 4), Section 59(1 to 4), Section 61(1and 2) and
Section 62(1 to 5)
Unit 5: General Preliminaries on Banach Algebras- The Definition and
Some examples-Regular and singular elements-Topological divisors of
zero-The Spectrum-The formula for the Spectral radius-The Radical and
Semi-simplicity
(Chapter 12: Sections 64 to 69)(No Problems)
4.2. Paper-16-Measure and Integration
Text: Real Analysis, Fourth Edition, H.L.Royden, P.M.Fitzpatrick, PHI
Learning Private Limited.
Unit 1: Lebesgue Measure- Lebesgue outer measure-The σ-Algebra of
Lebesgue Measurable sets-Outer and Inner Approximation of Lebesgue
Measurable sets-Countable Additivity, Continuity and the Borel-Cantelli
Lemma-Lebesgue Measurable finctions-Sums, Products and Compositions
(Sections 2.1 to 2.5 and 3.1)
(Problems: Chapter 2: 1 to 12, 16 to 18 and Chapter 3: 1 to 6)
Unit 2: Sequential Pointwise Limits and Simple Approximation-Littlewood‘s
Three Principles, Egoroff‘s Theorem and Lusins Theorem.
Lebesgue Integration-The Riemann Integral-The Lebesgue Integral of a
bounded measurable function over a set of finite measure-The Lebesgue
integral of a measurable nonnegative function- the general Lebesgue
integral-Countable Additivity and continuity of Integration.
(Sections 3.2, 3,3 and 4.1 to 4.5)
(Chapter 4: Problems 9 to 12, 16 to 20, 28 and 30)
215
Unit 3: Differentiation and Integration-Continuity of monotone functions-
Differentiability of monotone function: Lebesgue Theorem-Functions of
bounded variations: Jordan‘s Theorem-Absolutely continuous functions-
Integrating Derivatives: Differentiating Indefinite Integrals-Convex functions.
(Sections 6.1 to 6.6)(No Problems)
Unit 4: Measure and Integration- Measures and Measurable sets-Signed
Measures: The Hahn and Jordan Decompositions-The Carathéodory
Measure induced by an outer Measure- The construction of outer Measure-
The Carathéodory-Hahn Theorem: The extension of a Premeasure to a
Measure.
(Sections 17.1 to 17.5)
(Chapter 17: Problems 1, 2, 5, 13, 14, 18 and 19)
Unit 5: Integration over general Measure spaces: Measurable Functions-
Integration of Nonnegative Measurable Functions-Integration of general
Measurable functions-The Radon-Nikodym Theorem.
(Sections 18.1 to 18.4)
(Chapter 18: Problems 1, 2, 4,5, 6, 18,19, 21, 28, 29, 31, 32, 33, 49 and
50)
4.3. Paper-17-Analytic Number Theory
Text: Introduction to Analytic Number Theory-Tom M.Apostol-Springer
International Student Edition.
Unit 1: The fundamental theorem of Arithmetic
(Chapter 1 and Exercise problems 1 to 30)
Unit 2: Arithmetic functions.
(Sections 2.1 to 2.9 and Exercise problems: Chapter 2(1 to 20))
216
Unit 3: Multiplicative functions and Dirichlet Multiplication.
(Sections 2.10 to 2.15 and Exercise problems : Chapter 2 (21 to 35))
Unit 4: Averages of Arithmetical functions.
(Chapter 3 and Exercise problems: Chapter 3 (1 to 12))
Unit 5: Chebyshev‘s functions-equivalent forms of prime number theorem-
Shapiro‘s theorem and its applications.
(Sections 4.1 to 4.7 and Exercise problems: Chapter 4(1 to 11))
4.4. Paper-18
4.4.1-Elective III-Graph Theory
Text: Graph Theory with applications, H.J.A . Bondy and Murthy, The
Macmillan Press Limited.
Unit 1: Graphs-Trees.
(Chapter 1: Section 1.1 to 1.7 and Chapter 2)
Exercise Problems: 1.1.3, 1.2.1 to 1.2.7, 1.5.1 to 1.5.6, 1.6.1 to 1.6.9,
1.7.1 to 1.7.4, 2.1.1 to 2.1.10, 2.2.1 to 2.2.4, 2.3.1 and 2.3.2.
Unit 2: Connectivity-Blocks-Euler tour-Hamilton cycle-Applications.
(Section 3.1 to 3.3 and 4.1 to 4.4)
Exercise Problems: 3.1.1 to 3.1.6, 3.2.1 to 3.2.4, 4.2.1 to 4.2.3.
Unit 3: Matching-Perfect Matching-edge colouring.
(Section 5.1 to 5.3, 6.1 and 6.2)
Exercise Problems: 5.1.1 to 5.1.4, 5.2.1 to 5.2.3, 5.3.1 to 5.3.5, 6.1.1, 6.1.2,
6.2.2 to 6.2.5.
217
Unit 4: Independent sets-Cliques.
(Section 7.1 to 7.3)
Exercise Problems: 7.1.1 to 7.1.3, 7.2.1 to 7.2.4 and 7.3.1 to 7.3.3.
Unit 5: Vertex Colouring-Applications.
(Section 8.1 to 8.5)
Exercise Problems: 8.1.1 to 8.1.5, 8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 8.3.2 and 8.4.1 to
8.4.7.
4.4.2-Elective III-Advanced Topology
Text: Topology (Second Edition) James R. Munkres, Printice-Hall of India
Private Limited.
Unit 1: Local compaceness-The Tychonoff Theorem-The Stone-Čech
Compactification.
(Sections 29, 37 and 38)
Problems: Section 29(1 to 6), Section 37(1 to 3) and Section 38(1 to 6)
Unit 2: Local Finiteness-The Nagata-Smirnov Metrization Theorem.
(Sections 39 and 40)
Problems: Section 39(1 to 4) and Section 40(1 to 3 and 5)
Unit 3: Pointwise and Compact Convergence-Ascoli‘s Theorem.
(Sections 46 and 47)
Problems: Section 46(1 to 7) and Section 47(1,2)
Unit 4: Baire Spaces-Homotopy of Paths.
(Sections 48 and 51)
218
Problems: Section 48(1, 3 to 7) and Section 51(1 to 3)
Unit 5: The Fundamental Group-The Fundamental Group of the Circle.
(Sections 52 and 54)
Problems: Section 52(1 to 5) and Section 40(3,4)
4.4.3-Elective III-Partial Differential Equations
Text: Elements of partial Differential equations- IAN Sneddon-International
student edition.
Unit 1: ODE in more than two variables.
(Section 2: Theorem 1-statement only)
Problems: Chapter 1: Section 3(1 to 4), Section 4(1 to 5),Section 5(1 to 5)
and Section 6(1 to 8)
Unit 2: PDE-First order-Non-linear PDE of first order.
Problems: Chapter 2: Section 2 (1and 2), Section 4(1 to 6), Section 5 (1 to
5), Section 6(1and 28) and Section 7(1 and 2)
Unit 3: Cauchy‘s method of characteristics-Charpits‘s method-Special type
of first order equations-Solutions satisfying given conditions.
Problems: Chapter 2: Section 8 (1to 4), Section 9(1 to 4), Section 10 (1 to
7), Section 611(1and 6) and Section 12(1 and 3)
Unit 4: Second order PDE in Physics-Linear PDE.
(Chapter 3: Section 1 to 5[ In problem 1, the equation should be
∂2z ∂2z 2z
∂x2 ∂y2 x2
Problems: Section 2(4 and 5), section 4(1 and 2) and Section 5( 4 and
5)[Canonical form only]
219
- = ]
Unit 5: Characteristics curves of second order equations – Characteristics
equations in three variables – the solution of Linear Hyperbolic equations –
separation of variables.
Problems: Sections 7(1), Section 8(1 to 3) and Section 9(1 to 3)
******
220
APPENDIX - AZ95
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY,TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc. CHEMISTRY
Second Year Syllabus (CBCS-For affiliated Colleges)
For those who joined the Course from the academic year 2012-2013
onwards
COURSE STRUCTURE AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
SEMESTER I
Credits Internal External Total
Components
Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
Organic Chemistry I 5 5 25 75 100
Inorganic Chemistry I 5 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Physical Chemistry I 5 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
3 3 25 75 100
SEMESTER II
Credits Internal External Total
Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
Organic Chemistry II 6 5 25 75 100
Inorganic Chemistry II 6 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Physical Chemistry II 6 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Exam;
Duration
3 hrs
3 hrs
Exam;
Duration
3 hrs
Elective – Research
Methodolgy
Components
221
FIRST YEAR – PRACTICAL
SEMESTER I & II
Credits Internal External Total
Components
Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
Organic Chemistry I 4 4 40 60 100
Inorganic Chemistry I 4 4 40 60 100 6 hrs
Physical Chemistry I 4 4 40 60 100 6 hrs
SECOND YEAR THEORY
SEMESTER III
Credits Internal External Total
Components
Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
Organic Chemistry III 5 5 25 75 100
Inorganic Chemistry III 5 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Physical Chemistry III 5 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Project 3 3 25 75 100
SEMESTER IV
Credits Internal External Total
Components Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
Organic Chemistry IV 6 5 25 75 100
Inorganic Chemistry IV 6 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Physical Chemistry IV 6 5 25 75 100 3 hrs
Exam;
Duration
6 hrs
Exam;
Duration
3 hrs
3 hrs
Exam;
Duration
3 hrs
222
SECOND YEAR – PRACTICAL
SEMESTER III & IV
Credits Internal External Total Exam;
Duration
Hours Credits Marks Marks Marks
4 4 40 60 100 6 hrs
Inorganic Chemistry II 4 4 40 60 100 6 hrs
Physical Chemistry II 4 4 40 60 100 6 hrs
Total No of Courses - 20
Total No of Hours - 120
Total No of Credits - 90
The board has recommended the following items on internal Assessment marks (25 marks) in the following manner.
Internal Assessment:
1. Average of the best two test among the three test -15 Marks
2. Assignment - 4 Marks
3. Seminar - 6 Marks
_____
Total - 25 Marks
____
Project Work (PG):
Components Marks
Project Report - 60
Viva-Voce - 40
Total - 100
Note:
The Project for PG students shall be ‗Group Projects‘. Each group shall contain
3(Three) or 4 (Four) students.
The students are asked to submit their project report on or before the last
working day of the third semester end.
Project report evaluation will be done centrally and Viva-voce will be conducted
only after the results of project report evaluation. (Conducting the viva-voce by
both external examiners and the guide).
Components
Organic Chemistry II
223
M.Sc (CHEMISTRY)
SYLLABUS - SECOND YEAR
Third Semester
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY - III
(Those who are joined in 2012-2013 academic year onwards)
Unit-I
Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution and Elimination Reactions:
Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution : Mechanism of SN1, SN2, SNi, SN1‘, SN2‘ and
SNi reactions- Effect of substrate, nucleophile, leaving group and solvent on the
rate of substitution- Ambient nucleophile- NGP- Mechanism of esterifications and
ester hydrolysis (BAC2 and AAC2 mechanisms only)
Elimination reaction: E1, E2 and E1CB mechanisms- Factors influencing
elimination reactions- Hofmann and Satyzeff rules- Pyrolytic elimination-
Chugaev and cope reactions.
Unit-II
Aromatic nucleophilic substitution Reaction and Addition to carbon-carbon
multiple bonds
Aromatic nucleophilic substitution reaction: Unimolecular, Bimolecular and
Benzyne mechanisms.
Catalytic hydrogenation- Birch reduction-Dieckmann condensation-Mannich
reaction- Wittig reaction- Sharpless asymmetric epoxidation-addition of hydrogen
and hydrogen halides to carbon-carbon double bonds-Michael addition (1,2 and
1,4).
Unit-III
Reactive intermediates and rearrangements
Carbenes: Generation, stability, structure, reactions and stereochemistry of
carbenes-Wolff rearrangement of acyl carbenes and its synthetic applications.
Nitrenes: Generation, stability, reaction of nitrenes- Mechanism of
rearranegements through Nitrene intermediate: Schmidt, Hoffmann, Beckmann
rearrangements.
Carbanion: Mechanism of rearrangements involving carbanion as intermediate:
Steven, Sommelet Hauser and Favorski rearrangements.
Arynes : Generation, Structure, Stability, reactions and trapping of arynes- cine
substitution.
224
Unit-IV
Organic photochemistry and pericyclic reactions
Photosensitization- cis-trans isomerisation- photo oxidation and reductions-
Norris type-I and II reactions- Paterno-Buchi reaction- Barton reaction- Di-π
methane rearrangement.
Atomic and molecular orbitals-Woodward-Hoffmann rules, FMO and
correlation diagram approaches: Electrocyclic reaction- con and dis rotatory
motions for 4n and 4n+2system (butadiene and 1,3,5-hexatriene)-
Stereochemical course of electro cyclic reaction in terms of conservation of
orbital symmetry.
Cycloaddiation- suprafacial and antarafacial additions, [2+2] and [4+2] reactions
(ethylene and butadiene)- Sigmatropic rearrangements - [i,j] shift of C-H and C-C
bonds (1+3 and 1+5system)
Unit-V
Heterocyclic and biomolecules
Synthesis and reactions of oxazole, imidazole, thiazole, coumarins
benzopyrones and anthocyanins-synthesis of flavones, flavonol and quercetin-
Biosynthesis of flavonoids.
Pyranose and furanose forms of aldohexose and ketohexose-methods used
for the determination of ring size-A Detailed study on the structure of maltose,
sucrose and lactose- A brief study on starch and cellulose.
Nucleoproteins and nucleic acid-chemistry and Heredity- genetic code.
REFERENCES
1.J.March, ‗ Advanced organic chemistry‘, Fourth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork, 2006.
2. Depuy, E.C.H. and Chapman, O.S., ―Molecular reactions and photochemistry‖ Prentice Hall, New York, 1988.
3.I.L. Finar, ‗Organic Chemistry‘, volume 2, sixth Edition, Pearson Education
Inc., Singapore, 2006.
4.Raj K. Bansal, ‗Organic Reaction mechanisms‖, Tata Mc Graw Hill, Third Editon, 2007
5.Singh, J., and Singh, J., ―Photochemistry and Pericyclic reaction‖, New Age International, New Delhi, 2004
6.H.O. House, ‗Modern synthetic Reaction,‘Second Edition , W.A. Benjamin, Inc., London, 1972
225
7.R.K. Mackie, M.M. Smith and R.A. Aitken,‘Guide Book to Organic Synthesis‘ Second Edition, Longman Seientific and Technical, Singapore, 1990.
8.Carrutherus , W., ― Some Modern Methods in Organic Syntheis‖, Third edition, Cambridge University Press, New York, 1997.
9.F.A. Carey and J.Sundberg,‘Advanced Organic chemistry ‗ part A and B, Plenum Press, 2005.
10.Michael B. Smith, ‗Organic Synthesis,‘ Mc Graw Hill international Edition ,
1994
11.P. Sykes, ‗A Guide book to mechanism in organic chemistry‘, Orient Longman, 1989.
12.Gurdeep R. Chatwal, ‗Reaction mechanism and Reagents in organic chemistry‘, Himalaya publishing House, Bombay 1992.
13. R.T. Morrison and R.N. Boyd,‘Organic Chemistry‘ sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1994
14.R.O.C .Norman, Principles of organic synthesis- Chapman and hall, London.
15.De Mayo, Molecular rearrangements
16. E.S. Gould, ‗Mechanism and structure in organic chemistry‘ Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc., 1959
17. F.A. Carey, Organic chemistry – Tata Mc Graw Hill, Delhi, 5th edition 2005.
18. Stryer, L., ―Biochemistry‖, Fifth edition, W.H.Freeman and company, San Francisco, 2002.
19. Jain, J.L., ―Fundamentals of Biochemistry‖,Fourth edition, S.Chand & Company Limited, New Delhi.2007
20. Bansal, K., ―Heterocyclic Chemistry‖, Fourth edition, New Age International, New Delhi, 2005
226
M.Sc (CHEMISTRY)
SYLLABUS - SECOND YEAR
Fourth Semester
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY - IV
(Those who are joined in 2012-2013 academic year onwards)
Unit-I
Reaction under Intermediate chemistry
Reaction Under Carbanion Intermediate : Clasien, Knoevenegal, Stobbe, Darzen, acyloic condensation Shapiro reaction and Julia olifination.
Reaction through carbene intermediate : Bamford – Stevens and simmons-smith reactions
Carbocation intermediate : Oxymercuration, halolactonisation.
Reaction following Radical intermediate: Mc Murray coupling, Gomberg- Pechmann and Pschorr reactions.
Reaction involving Ylide intermediate: Wittig reaction and Peterson olifination.
Unit-II
Conformational analysis
Conformations of mono and disubstituted cyclohexanes-effect of hydrogen
bonding, dipole and steric effects on the disubstituted cyclohexanes-
conformation and reactivity of acyclic and cyclic compounds (6members)-
conformation of decalin and perhydrophenanthrene-curtin-Hammett principle.
Unit-III
Reterosynthetic analysis
Synthon-synthetic equivalent-Functional group interconversions-use of protecting
groups for alcohols, amines, acids, carbonyl compounds- use of activating and
blocking groups-Robinson annulations reaction-carbon skeletal complexity-Role
of key intermediates in organic synthesis. Reterosynthetic analysis of the
following compounds: Twistane, cis-Jasmine, Baclofan, Brufen, Trihexyl
phenydyl, Bisabolene, α-onocerin, Isonootkatone, cascarillic acid, camphor and
2,4-dihydroxy pentanoic acid.
227
Unit-IV
Reagents in organic synthesis
2,3-Dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone (DDQ), DMSO, Super hydrides- K
and L selectrides -Dess-martin-periodinane- Baker‘s yeast –Quaternary
ammonium salt and crown ethers.
Introductory treatment of the application of silicon, boron (organoboranes),
phosphorus, palladium, samarium, ruthenium and indium reagents in organic
synthesis.
Unit-V
Steroids
Classification- structural elucidation of cholesterol and ergosterol-irradiated
products of ergosterol- structural elucidation of androsterone, testosterone,
progesterone, Oestrone.
Conversion of cholesterol into androsterone, progesterone, testosterone,
5α- and 5 β-cholanic acid. Conversion of Oestrone to Oestriol, Oestradiol and
vice-versa. structural elucidation of equilenin (synthesis not expected)- Bile acids
(general study) Conformational structure of cholestane and Coprostane.
References
1.J.March, ‗ Advanced organic chemistry‘, Fourth Edition, John Wiley and Sons,
Newyork, 2006.
2. R.T. Morrison and R.N. Boyd,‘Organic Chemistry‘ sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
1994
3. Michael B. Smith, ‗Organic Synthesis,‘ Mc Graw Hill international Edition ,
1994
4. R.O.C. Norman, Principles of organic synthesis- Chapman and hall, London.
5. Carrutherus , W., ― Some Modern Methods in Organic Synthesis‖, Third edition,
Cambridge University Press, New York, 1997
6. P. Sykes, ‗A Guide book to mechanism in organic chemistry‘, Orient Longman,
1989.
7. J.M.Swan and D.St.C.Black, Organometallics in Organic synthesis
228
8. Gurdeep R. Chatwal, ‗Reaction mechanism and Reagents in organic
chemistry‘, Himalaya publishing House, Bombay 1992
9. E.L. Eliel, stereochemistry of carbon compounds – Mc Craw Hill, 1999
10. Gurdeep R. Chatwal, ‗Reaction mechanism and Reagents in organic
chemistry‘, Himalaya publishing House, Bombay 1992.
11.R.C.Mehrota and A.Singh, Organometallic chemistry-a unified approach-Wiley
Eastern
12. F.A. Carey and R.A Sundberg, ‗Advanced Organic Chemistry‘ (part A and B)
plenum publishers, 2000.
13. B.M.Trost & I Fleming. Comprehensive Organic Synthesis. Vols 1-9,
Pergamon (1991)
14. I.L. Finar, Organic Chemistry , Vol. II. ELBS
15. L.Fieser and Mary Fieser, Steroids-Reinhold
16.A.L. Lehninger, D.L.Nelson and M.M.Cox-Principles of Biochemistry-Worth
Publishers Inc. USA,1993
17. F.A Carey,‘Organic Chemistry, Tata Mc Graw Hill, fifth reprint, 2005.
18. A.Burger, Medicinal chemistry-Acdemic press.
19.R.E. Ireland,Organic Synthesis-Prentice Hall of India (P)Ltd.
20.S.Warren,A Programmed Synthon approach-John Wiley & Sons.
21.R.K.Mackie & D.M.Smith, Guide book t organic syntheisi-ELBS.
22.Progress in chemistry of Natural products, Vol.19,1961, JCSC Lon., 869,
1952
23.Michael B.Smith, Organic Synthesis-McGraw Hill International Edition.
24.Paula Yurkanis Bruice, Organic Chemistry-Third Edition-Pearson Education
Asia
25.Seyhan Ege, Irganic chemistry-A.I.T.B.S.Publishers & Distributors (Regd.)
Delhi-51
229
LABORATORY COURSE
Second year (Semester III & IV)
Organic Chemistry Practical – II
(Those who are joined 2012-2013 academic year onwards)
Estimations, two stage preparations and chromatographic techniques have
been included as the practical components.
Microscale preparations are recommended for the simple reason,
they are both economic-friendly and eco-friendly
A.List of Estimations
1.Ethylmethylketone
2.Glucose-Lane Eynon and method
3.Glucose-Bertrand‘s method
4.Saponification value of an oil
5.Iodine value of an oil
6.Number of hydroxyl groups in a given compound
7. Purity of Glucose
B. List of preparations
1.Asprin from Methylsalicylate
2.p-Bromoaniline from Acetanilide
3.m-Nitrobenzene from Acetanilide
4.p- Nitroaniline from Acetanilide
5.Benzpinacolone from Benzophenone
6.Benzanilide from Benzophenone
7.s-Benzylisothiuroniumbenzoate from Thiourea
8.9,10-Dihydroanthracene-9,10-α,β-succinic anhydride from Succinic
anhydride
9.Phthalimide from Phthalic acid
10.s-Tribromobenzene from Aniline
Students are expected to submit at the time of practical examination
at least eight recrystallised samples of the final products, for evaluation by
the examiners
230
C.Chromatographic techniques
1. TLC of Nitroaniline
2.TLC of Analgesic Drug
3. Column Chromatography-Separation of leaf pigments
4.Paper Chromatography-Analysis of Inks and Dyes
N.B:- 1.Section C is course work only
2.It is the purpose of internal assessment only
REFERENCES
1.F.C.Mann and B.C.Saunders, Practical organic chemistry, Fourth edition,
ELBS,1970
2.A.I. Vogel, A Text book of Practical organic chemistry.
3. A.I. Vogel, A Text book of Quantitative Organic Analysis,1989.
4. Raj K. Bansal,Laboratory Manual of Organic Chemistry,Second Edition,Wiley
Eastern Ltd., 1990
5.Moore, Dalrympk and Rodig, Experimental methods in organic chemistry, 3rd
edition, Saunders College publishing, The Oxford Press,1982
6.Bassett et.al., A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis,ELBS, 1986
7.Roberts, Gilbert, Reidwald-Wingrove An Introduction to Experimental Organic
Chemistry, 1969.
8.V.K.Srivastava and K.K.Srivastava, Introduction to Chromatography-Theory
and Practice, S.Chand & Co., 1987.
231
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
M.Sc - Degree examination - Nov. 2013
Third Semester
Organic Chemistry – III
(For those who are joined in july 2012 – 2013 onwards)
Time : Three Hours Max Marks : 75
PART – A (10 x 1 = 10 Marks)
Answer All Questions (Choosing the Correct answer)
1. The Product obtained in SNi reaction is _______________ of configuration
a) 100 % inversion b) 50% d+50% l c) Retention d) non of these
2. The stereo chemical product formed in SN1 reaction
a) 50%d + 50% l b) 100% inversion c) one isomer is greater d) None of
these
3. Benzene diazonium chloride under nucleophilic substitution via
___________mechanism
a) SN1 Ar b) SN2 Ar c) Benzyne d) Both (a) and (b)
4. The following nucleophilic substitution follows _____________mechanism.
C6H5cl dil H2So4 C6H5OH.
a) SN1 b) SN2 c) Benzyne d) SNi
5. Favorski rearrangement proceeds through ___________intermediate.
a)Carbene b) Nitrene c) cyclopropanone d) carbocation
6. The hybridisation of single carbene is
a) SP b) SP2 c) SP3 d) none of these
7. Under what condition the following reaction will take place ?
a) ∆ b) hν c) Both ∆ and hν d) None of these
232
8. By photo chemical condition in 4n-system will undergo cyclisation
by______________rotation
a) Dis-rotation b) Con-rotation c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these
9. The imidazole ring is extremely stable towards oxidising and reducing agents,
however it is readily open the ring to form oxamide in the presence of
a) KMnO4 b) H2O2 C) HNO3 D) Cr2O7
10. Lactose is ----
a) 6 – O – α – D galactopyranosyl – D slucopyranose
b) 4-O-β-D galactopyranosyl – D-sulcopyranose
c) 6-O-β-D glncopyranosyl – D slucopyranose
d) 4-O-β-D-glucopyranosyl – D slucopyranose
PART – B (5 x 5 = 25 Marks)
Answer all the questions (choosing either (a) or (b))
11. a) State and explain Hoffmann and Satytzeff rules
(or)
b) Illustrate SNi mechanism with an example.
12. a) Write a note on aromatic nucleophilic substitution reactions
(or)
b) Discuss benzyne mechanism in details.
13. a) Give the mechanism on Sommelet – Hauser rearrangement
(or)
b) Write a brief not on cine substitution
14. a) Illustrate the process of photosensitization
(or)
b) With the help of an oribital diagram illustrate [1,5]- sigmatropic migration of
hydrogen. What is the mode of symmetry allowed migration ?.
233
15. a) How will you determine the size of rings in aldohexoses and
ketohexoses ?
(or)
b)Give a method of symthesis of the following :
i) Flavonol ii) Quercetin
PART – C (5 x 8 = 40 Marks)
Answer all the questions (choosing either (a) or (b))
16. a) Discuss the mechanism of SN1 and SN2 reactions with energy profile
diagram.
(or)
b) Discuss the effect of leaving group and solvent on the rate of nucleophilic
substitution reaction.
17. a) Comment on the mechanism of the following reactions :
i) Sharpless asymmetric epoxidation
ii) Rabinson annulation reaction
iii) Dieckmann condensation
(or)
b) Write a brief note on :
i) Witting reaction
ii) Michael addition
iii) Mannich reaction
18. a) Discuss in details about 'cyclopropanone' intermediate in Favorki
rearrangement with evidences.
(Or)
234
b) What are singlet and triplet carbenes and how are they generated ?
Discuss their Structure reactivity.
19. a) Construct an orbital correlation diagram for con- and dis – rotatory
interconversion of 1,3,5- hexatriene and mention your conclusion.
(or)
b) i) Discuss Norrish type I and II reactions.
ii) Di-Π methane rearrangement.
20. a) How was the structure of Maltose established ? Give its conformational
structure and also its synthesis.
(or)
b) i) How will you establish the structure of Lactose. Outline a method
of its synthesis
ii) Write a brief note on genetic code.
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
M.Sc - Degree examination - APR. 2014
Fourth Semester
Organic Chemistry – IV
(For those who are joined in july 2012 – 2013 onwards)
Time : Three Hours Max Marks : 75
PART – A (10 x 1 = 10 Marks)
Answer All Questions
(Choosing the Correct answer)
1. Which one of the following reaction involved ylide as intermediate.
a) Wittig b) Pschorr c) Julia d) Darzon
2. The product obtained in Knoevenegal reaction is _______________
a) α,β – unsaturated aid b) α,β –unsaturated aldehyde
c) saturated acid d) saturated aldehyde
235
3. The boat conformation experiences __________________interactions
a) Flag – pole b) Vander walls c) axial – axial d) all of these
4. Trans 1,3-di-t-butyl cyclohexone exists in which one of the following form
a) chair b) boat c) twist boat 4) half chair
5. The protective group used for carbonyl group is
a) Benzoyl group b) ethylene glycol c) acetyl chloride d) none of these
6. The synthetic equivalent for + C- CH3 is
a) acetyl chloride b)acetaldehyde c) acetic acid d) Both (a) and (c)
7. Identify the correct reagent in the following transformation
a) DMSO b) DDQ c) LDA d) DCC
8. Identify the correct Product of the following reaction
9. Cholesterol under go catelytic hydrogen with H2 – pt gives
a) Cholestanolb) Cholestanone c) Cholestane d) Sigma Sterol
10. The structure of steroids are based which one of the following skeleton.
a) 1,2 – cyclopenteneo phenanthrene b) 2,5- dimethyl
cyclopentanone
c) 3-methl -1, 2 -cyclopenteneo phenanthrene d) none of these
PART – B (5 x 5 = 25 Marks)
Answer all the questions (choosing either (a) or (b))
11. a) What are radical intermediate? Write down the formation and stability of
this intermediate?
(or)
b) Write down the reaction involving ylide as intermediate by Peterson
olifination.
12. a) Define and differentiate configuration and conformation with illustrations.
(or)
236
b) State and explain Curtin – Hamett principle.
13. a) Write down the retro synthetic analysis of Bisabolene and cis – jasmine
(or)
b) Draw the synthon approach to Baclofen and Brufen
14. a) Give the synthetic utility of Baker‘s yeast.
(or)
b)Write a brief note on super hydrides.
15. a) Prove that the secondary hydroxyl group of cholesterol is attached to
the terminal six membered ring
(or)
b) Adduce evidence for the nature and position of side chain of cholesterol
molecule.
PART – C (5 x 8 = 40 Marks)
Answer all the questions (choosing either (a) or (b))
16. a) Discuss about Clasion and acyloic condensation reactions with
mechanism.
(or)
b) Give the mechanism of the following
i) Pschorr reaction
ii)Julia olifination
iii) Gomberg – Bachmann reaction
17. a) Discuss the conformational analysis of substituted cyclohexanes
(or)
b) Describe the conformations of cis and trans – decalines.
237
18. a) Write a brief note on
i) Blocking groups
ii) Carbon – skeletal complexity
iii) Role of key intermediate
(or)
b) Write a reterosynthetic analysis of
i) trihexylphenydyl
ii) α – Onocerin
iii) Cascarillic acid
19. a) Write the impartant synthetic applications of DDQ and quaternary
ammonium salt
(or)
b) Discuss the introductory treatment of the application of Palladium and
Indium
20. a) How will you bring about the following transformation?
i) Cholesterol → 5β – cholestane
ii) Estrone → estriol
(or)
b) Discuss the structural determination of estrane. Outline its synthesis from 6
methoxy tetralone.
SEMESTER – III
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - III
UNIT – I : NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY- I
Atomic nuclei : classification , composition and stability – nuclear shell
structure – nuclear reactions : types , Q-value , threshold energy , cross
sections and excitation functions – nuclear reaction models : optical and
compound nucleus models . Direct nuclear reactions – transfer reactions :
stripping and pick-up –high energy reactions : neutron evaporation and
spallation – heavy ion reactions – photonuclear reactions. Nuclear fusion and
stellar energy – nuclear fission : mass and charge distribution of fission products
– fission energy – fission neutrons – theory of nuclear fission – spontaneous
fission .
238
UNIT – II : NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY - II
Nuclear reactors : classification , components , reproduction factor and
design parameter – fuel materials and their production. Breeder reactor : fast
breeder test reactor – reprocessing of spent fuels : aqueous and non-aqueous
processes – disposal of gaseous , liquids and solid radioactive wastes –radiation
hazards and protection – India‘s nuclear reactors . Radio isotopes : preparation,
application of radio isotopes in elucidating reaction mechanisms and structural
determinations . Analytical applications : radio chromatography , neutron
activation analysis , neutron absorptiometry and radiometric titrations – hot atom
chemistry – synthesis of transuraniens .
UNIT – III : INORGANIC CHAINS , RINGS , CAGES AND CLUSTERS
Hetero catenation - silicates - classification and structure-property
correlation . Polyacids – structures of isopoly and heteropoly anions - polymeric
sulphur nitride - borazines – phosphazenes - phosphazene polymers - boranes
and carboranes – structure and bonding in boranes. Metal-metal bonds and
metal atom clusters - carbonyl type - anionic and hydrido clusters- non-
carbonyl type – octahedral clusters and triangular clusters .
UNIT-IV : APPLICATION OF SPECTROSCOPY TO THE STUDY OF
INORGANIC COMPOUNDS – II
Application of IR and Raman spectra in the study of coordination
compounds : Application to metal carbonyls and nitrosyls – geometrical and
linkage isomerism – detection of inter and intramolecular hydrogen bonding –
stretching mode analysis of metal carbonyls.
Mossbauer spectroscopy : Principle – application of isomer shift , quadrupole
interactions and magnetic hyperfine splitting in the study of iron and tin
compounds .
UNIT-V : BIOINORGANIC CHEMISTRY –I
Essential and trace elements in biological system – biological
importance and toxicity of elements such as Fe , Cu , Zn , Co , Mo , W , V , Mn ,
and Cr in biological system. Metallo porphyrins – chlorophyll – photosynthetic
electron transport sequence – biological electron carriers : iron-sulphur proteins ,
cytochromes and blue copper proteins – oxygen carriers: haemoglobin and
myoglobin - Haemoglobin modelling : synthetic oxygen carriers . Corrin ring
system - vitamin B12 , Fixation of nitrogen – in vitro and in vivo.
239
REFERENCES
Samuel Glasstone , Source Book of Atomic Energy , East West Pvt.Ltd., 1969.
H.J.Arnikar , Essentials of Nuclear Chemistry , Wiley Eastern Ltd., 4th Edition
,2000 .
G.Friedlander , J.W.Kennedy , E.S.Macies and Julian Malcolm , Nuclear and
Radiation Chemistry , A . Wiley Interscience publication ,1981.
James .E.Huheey , Ellen .A. Keiter and Richard .L. Keiter , Inorganic Chemistry :
Principles of Structure and Reactivity , 4th Edition , Harper Collins College
Publishers , 1993 .
F.Albert Cotton , Geoffrey Wilkinson , Carlos .A.Manic and Manfred Bochman ,
Advanced Inorganic Chemistry ,Wiley Interscience Publication , 6th edition , 1999
.
G.S.Manku , Theoretical Principles of Inorganic Chemistry , Tata McGraw Hill ,
12 reprint 2004.
K.F.Purcell and J.C.Kotz ,Advanced Inorganic Chemistry , Saunders Golden
Publishers .
B.E.Douglas , D.H.McDaniel and J.J.Alexander , Concepts and Models of
Inorganic Chemistry , John Wiley and Sons Ltd . 2nd Edition , 1983.
J.D.Lee , Concise Inorganic Chemistry , Blackwell Science Ltd., 5th Edition,
Reprint 2003.
M.C.Day Jr. And J.Selbin.,Theoretical Inorganic Chemistry , 2nd Edition , East
West Press , 2000.
R.S.Drago , Physical Methods in Inorganic Chemistry ,W.B.Saunders ,1977.
E.A.V.Ebsworth David ,W.H.Rankin Stephen Credock ,Structural Methods in
Inorganic Chemistry ,ELBS , IV 1988.
D.E.Fenton ,BioCoordination Chemistry , Oxford Science Publications ,1995.
I.Bertini, H.B.Gray ,S.J.Lippard and J.S.Valantine , Bioinorganic Chemistry , Viva
Books Pvt. Ltd., 1998.
240
SEMESTER – IV
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY- IV
UNIT – I : APPLICATION OF SPECTROSCOPY TO THE STUDY OF
INORGANIC COMPOUNDS –III
Electronic spectroscopy : L-S coupling and j-j coupling schemes ,
micro states , Hund‘s rule and term symbols . Selection rules for electronic
transition and hole formalism – splitting of terms – Orgel and Tanabe Sugano
diagrams – Evaluation of 10 Dq and B for octahedral d 2 and d8 systems. Charge
transfer spectra. Electronic spectra of lanthanide and actinide complexes .
Photo electron spectroscopy : Koopman‘s theorem , PES – XPES(ESCA)
– chemical shifts in XPES – application of ESCA to inorganic systems – Auger
electron spectroscopy.
UNIT – II : THERMOANALYTICAL AND SPECTROANALYTICAL METHODS
Theory and principles of thermogravimetric analysis , differential
thermal analysis and differential scanning colorimetry–characteristic features of
TGA and DTA curves-factors affecting TGA and DTA curves- complementary
nature of TGA and DTA – applications of thermal methods in analytical
chemistry- thermometric titrations- the study of minerals and polymers.
Principle and applications of colorimetry,spectrophotometry,
nephelometry, turbidimetry , fluorimetry and atomic absorption spectroscopy.
UNIT – III : CHEMISTRY OF INORGANIC MATERIALS
Synthesis of inorganic materials – high temperature reactions and
experimental methods – precipitation, gel, solution and hydrothermal methods ,
synthesis in sealed tubes and special atmospheres . Low temperature methods .
Insertion compounds of metal oxides – Intercalation compounds of graphite and
transition metal disulphides . Zeolites : structures and properties – pillared clays
– fullerenes and fullerides.
UNIT -IV : INORGANIC PHOTOCHEMISTRY
Properties of excited states of metal complexes – charge transfer
excitation – bimolecular deactivation(quenching) and energy transfer –
photochemical path ways : oxidation-reduction, isomerisation and substitutional
processes – photochemistry of Cr(III), Co(III), Rh(III) and Pt(II) complexes –
241
photophysical and photochemical properties of ruthenium polypyridyls –
applications of inorganic photochemistry : photochemical conversion and storage
of solar energy – inorganic photochemistry at semi-conductor electrodes.
UNIT – V : BIOINORGANIC CHEMISTRY – II
Metalloenzymes – enzymes in dioxygen management – superoxide
dismutase , peroxidases, catalases, oxidases and monooxygeneases – zinc
enzymes: carbonic anhydrase , carboxypeptidase and alcohol dehydrogenase –
the structural role of zinc – trinuclear zinc constellations .
Chelate therapy - therapeutic chelating agents and their uses – anti -
cancer platinum complexes and their interaction with nucleic acids , gold
compounds and anti-arthritic agents – metal complexes as probes of nucleic
acids.
REFERENCES
R.S. Drago , Physical Methods in Inorganic Chemistry , Saunders College
Publishers .
E.A.V.Ebsworth , D.W.H.Rankin and S.Cradock , Structural Methods in
Inorganic Chemistry ,ELBS ,1988 .
D.A.Skoog , F.J. Holler & T.A.Nieman , Principles of Instrumental Analysis ,
Saunders 1992 .
D.A.Skoog , D. M.West , F.J.Holler , S.R.Grouch , Fundamentals of Analytical
Chemistry, Thomson Asia Pvt.Ltd.,Eighth Edition , Third Reprint , 2005 .
H.H.Willard , L.L.Merritt and J.A.Dean , Instrumental Methods of Analysis , CBS
Publishers , 6th edition , 1986 .
Mark.T.Weller, Inorganic Materials Chemistry , Oxford Chemistry Primers ,
Oxford Science Publications , Reprint 1996.
A.R.West ,Solid State Chemistry and its Application .John Wiley & Sons ,(Asia ) ,
1998.
D.M.Adam ,Inorganic Solids , John Wiley & Sons Ltd. London 1974.
A.F.Wells ,Oxford University Press , Structural Inorganic Chemistry , 1984.
242
G.H.Jeffery et.al ,Vogel‘s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis , Revised
5th edition ,ELBS , 1989 .
James.E.Huheey , Ellen .A.Keiter and Richard .L.Keiter, Inorganic Chemistry :
Priciples of Structure and Reactivity , 4th Edition., Harper Collins College
Publishers ,1993 .
F.Albert Cotton , Geoffrey Wilkinson , Carlos A.marilo and Manfred Bochman ,
Advanced Inorganic Chemistry , Wiley Interscience Publication ,6th Edition .,
1999 .
K.F.Purcell and J.C.Kotz , Advanced Inorganic Chemistry , Saunders Golden
Publishers .
Journal Chemical Education, Vol. 60, October 1983 issue.
A.W.Adamson and P.D. Fleischauer, Concepts of inorganic photochemistry,
John wiley and sons, New York, 1975.
D.E.Fenton , Bio-coordination Chemistry , Oxford Science Publications , 1995 .
I.Bertini ,H.B.Gray , S.J.Lippard and J.S.Valantine , Bioinorganic Chemistry ,Viva
Books Pvt.Ltd., 1998 .
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL – II
I . Quantitative estimation of a mixture containing two metal ions (Volumetric and
Gravimetric Estimations ).
1.Estimation of Cu2+ and Ni2+ ions.
2 . Estimation of Cu2+ and Zn2+ ions.
3 . Estimation of Fe2+ and Cu2+ ions .
4 . Estimation of Fe2+ and Ni2+ ions .
5. Estimation of Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions.
6. Estimation of Ca2+ and Ba2+ ions .
7. Analysis of ores and alloys (course work only )
Note: For examination , a mixture may be given from which one cation is to be
estimated volumetrically and the other gravimetrically .
243
II . Preparation of single stage inorganic complexes (a minimum of 10
complexes).
Note : Characterisation of any one metal complex by UV or IR spectral
techniques (course work only )
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
SEMESTER – III
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - III
PART A – (10 X 1 = 10 MARKS )
Choose the correct answer 1 . Cosmic rays are the source of
(a) Proton (b) Electron (c) Neutron (d) All the above
2 . In terms of energy, 1 a.m.u is equal to
(a) 100 J (b) 931.1 kcal (c) 931.478 Mev (d) 107 erg
3 . The most widely used gaseous coolant is
(a) He (b) H2 (c) CO2 (d) O2
4. Which of the following is a fertile nuclide?
(a) U-233 (b) Pu-239 (c) U-235 (d) U-238
5. An example of sheet silicate is
(a) pyroxenes (b) Emerald (c) White asbestos (d) Zeolite
6. Closo carborane has the general formula
(a) C2Bn-2Hn (b) C2Bn-1Hn (c) C2Bn-2Hn-1 (d) C2Bn+2Hn
7 . Which among the following molecule exhibits IR spectra
(a) CH4 (b) NH3 (c) SO3 (d) CO2
8 . In the vibrational spectrum of CO2 , the number of fundamental vibrational modes common in both IR and Raman are
(a) three (b) two (c) one (d) zero
9. The building up of excessive quantities of copper in body causes
(a) Thomson‘s disease (b) Nerve disorder (c) Bronchitis
(d) Wilson‘s disease
244
10 . Oxidation states of iron in haemoglobin and myoglobin are
(a) 2 , 3 (b) 3 , 2 (c) 2 , 2 (d) 3 , 3
PART B – (5 X 5 = 25 MARKS )
Answer ALL questions , by choosing either (a) or (b)
11 (a) Give an account of nuclear fusion reactions .
(or)
(b) Describe the mass distribution of fission products in nuclear fission reaction.
12 (a) Write a note on neutron activation analysis.
(or)
(b) Describe the working principle of a breeder reactor .
13 (a) Write briefly on the redox chemistry of heteropolyanions.
(or)
(b) Discuss the preparation and properties of silicones.
14 (a) Describe the Moss Bauer spectral characteristics of tin (IV) halides .
(or)
(b) With suitable examples, show how IR spectroscopy can be used to study inter and intra molecular hydrogen bonding .
15 (a) Give an account of ferridoxin and rubredoxin .
(or)
(c) Write a note on photosynthetic property of chlorophyll .
PART C – (5 X 8 =40 MARKS )
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
16 (a) Write briefly on (i) Q-value of nuclear reaction.
(ii) Nuclear cross section.
(or)
245
(b) (i) Discuss briefly the theory of nuclear fission.
(ii) Write a short note on spallation.
17 (a) Explain briefly about the reprocessing of nuclear spent fuel.
(or)
(b) Write briefly on (i) Nuclear waste disposal.
(ii) Radiation hazards and protection.
18 (a) Draw representative structures of phosphazenes . How are they obtained
? Comment on their structure and d-orbital participation in bonding in these
compounds .
(or)
(b) What are the different types of carboranes ? Comment on their structure
.
19 (a) (i) Explain how quadrupole splitting in Fe(CO)5 occurs in its Mossbauer
spectrum .
(ii) Discuss the Mossbauer spectrum of nitroprusside.
(or)
19 (b) (i) How IR spectroscopy is used to detect the bridging carbonyls?
(ii) Show how IR spectroscopy could be useful to distinguish between the
Cis and trans isomers of a compound ML2(CO)4 Where L is triphenyl phosphine,
Sketch the possible vibrational modes.
20 (a) Give a concise note on Invivo and Invitro nitrogen fixations .
(or)
(b) Discuss the structure and functions of vitamin B12.
246
SEMESTER – IV
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY –IV
PART A – (10 X I = 10 MARKS )
Choose the correct answer
1 . The light pink color of [Co (H2O )6 ]2+ and the deep blue color of [CoCl4 ]
2-
are due to
(a) MLCT transition in the first and d-d trasition in the second.
(b) LMCT trasitions in both.
(c) d-d transitions in both.
(d) d-d transition in the first and MLCT transition in the second
2 . The term symbol for the ground state of nitrogen is
P0 (b) P 3/2 (c)
3 . Electro negative substituents like –NH2 and -OH
(a) Enhance fluorescence (b) destroy fluorescence
(c) enhance phosphorescence (d) enhance phosrhorescence but
decrease fluorescence
4. Which of the following is a light scattering technique?
(a) Spectrophotometry (b)fluorimetry
(c)Nephlometry (d) AAS
5 . Graphite forms intercalation compounds with
(a) Electron donars (b) Electron acceptors (c) Both (d) None
6 . A sodalite cage in zeolites is
(a) a truncated tetrahedron (b) an icosahedron (c) a
dodecahedron
(d) a truncated octahedron
7. Which of the following is a photophysical pathway?
(a)photosubstitution (b)photo isomerisation
(c)photo reduction (d)photosensitization
247
1 4 3 P1 (d) S 3/2 4 (a)
8. Photolytic cleavage of water into O2 and H2 is an example of
(a)photo oxidation (b) photo reduction
(c)photosubstitution process (d) photoredox process
9 . Superoxide dismutase contains the metal ions
(a) Zn (II) and Ni (II) (b) Cu (II) and Zn(II)
(c) Ni (II) and Co(II) (d)Cu (II) and Fe (II)
10. In DNA binding, proteins the structural motif of zinc is
(a) zinc finger (b) zinc twist (c) zinc cluster (d) all the above
Answer ALL questions
PART B – (5 X 5 = 25 MARKS )
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
11 (a) Write a note on Tanabe – Sugano diagram .
(or)
(b) Discuss the steps involved in the evaluation of Dq and B .
12 (a) Describe the principle and applications of nephelometry .
(or)
(b) Explain the TGA behaviour of CuSO4.5 H2O .
13 (a) The reaction MgO + Al2O3 only occurs at a reasonable rate at
temperatures above 14000c . How could MgAl2O4 be prepared at lower
temperatures ?
(or)
(b) Give a brief note on fullerides of alkali metals .
14 (a) Write the photochemical reactions involved in solar energy conversion .
(or)
248
(b) Write a note on photochemistry of ruthenium polypyridyls .
15 (a) Explain briefly about anticancer platinum complexes .
(or)
(b) Explain the structure and function of peroxidases and catalases .
PART C – (5 X 8 = 40 MARKS )
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
16 a) Discuss the Jahn – Teller distortion and spin – orbit coupling with an
example
(or)
(b) Discuss the electronic spectra of Ni2+ ion in octahedral and tetrahedral
field. How do you characterize the bands?
17 (a) Give an account of the principles involved in AAS and its applications .
(or)
(b) Discuss the principle and application of DTA and TGA .
18 (a) Discuss the intercalation compounds of alkali metals.
(or)
(c) Explain any two high temperature methods employed in the synthesis of
inorganic materials .
19 (a) Explain the following :
(i) Photoisomerisaiton reaction .
(ii) Photoredox reactions .
(or)
(b) Discuss the application of inorganic photochemistry at semiconductor
electrodes .
249
20 (a) Explain the structure and function of carboxypeptidase A .
(or)
(b) Explain the role of metal complexes as probes of nucleic acid .
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
SEMESTER-III
GROUP THEORY I :
Unit - I: Symmetry properties of molecules and group theory:
Symmetry elements, symmetry operations and point groups, properties of
group, symmetry and dipole moment, symmetry and optical activity, symmetry
operations as a group, multiplication table. Classes of symmetry operations and
matrix representations of operations. Reducible and irreducible representations,
orthogonality theorem. Properties of irreducible representations. Constructions of
character table for point groups (C2v, C3v, C2h, C4v and D2). Explanations for the
complete character table for a point group.
GROUP THEORY II : Application of group theory:
Symmetry selection rules for infrared, Raman and electronic Spectra.
Standard reduction formula. Determination of representations of vibrational
modes in non-linear molecules (H20, NH3 and Trans N2F2). Infrared and Raman
activities of normal modes of vibrations. Rule of mutual exclusion.
Electronic Spectra of Ethylene and formaldehyde molecules. Hybrid orbital
in non-linear molecules (CH4, XeF4, BF3,and PF5). Projection operators and
symmetry adapted linear combinations(SALC). Simplification of HMO
calculations using group theory. Calculation of delocalization of energy in 1,3-
butadiene and cyclopropenyl systems.
Unit - III : Electrochemistry :-Electrolytic conductance:
Debye - Huckel theory of inter-ionic attraction , Debye-Huckel-Onsagar
equation and its validity. Debye-Falkenhagen and Wein effects. Debye-Huckel
limiting law, its applications to concentrated solutions. Debye-Huckel Bronsted
equation. Quantitative and qualitative verification of DebyeHuckel limiting law.
250
Electrode-electrolyte interface, adsorption at electrified interface,
electrical double layer, electrocapillary phenomenon-Lipmann equation
Unit - IV:- Polarization and over potential, Butler-Volmer equation for one step
and multistep electron transfer reactions, Tafel equation, significance of I0 and
transfer coefficient, polarizable and non polarizable electrodes, mechanism of
hydrogen and oxygen evolution reactions. Corrosion and polarization of metals -
Pourbaix diagrams, Evan‘s diagram, Fuel cells, electrode deposition-principle
and applications.
Unit V:- Adsorption and surface phenomenon:
Physisorption and chemisorption, adsorption and desorption, adsorption
isotherms-Langmuir and B. E. T. equation and significance in surface area
determination, surface films, adsorption from solution, Gibb's adsorption
equation: derivation, significance. Kinetics of unimolecular and bimolecular
surface reactions. Application of photoelectron spectroscopy, ESCA and Auger
spectroscopy to the study of surfaces,
Surface activity, surface active agents and their classification,
micellisation, critical micelle concentration ( cmc), thermodynamics of
micellisation , factors affecting cmc, methods of determination of cmc , use of
surfactants in oil recovery.
REFFERENCE BOOKS
1. Symmetry, Orbitals and spectra by M. Orchin & H. Jaffe, Willey.
2. Chemical applications of group theory by F. A. Cotton Willey .
3. Symmetry in chemistry by H. Jaffe and M . Orchin , Jhon willey.
4. Group theory and its applications to chemistry by K. V. Raman.
5. Group theory and spectroscopy by K. Veera Reddy.
6. Group Theory and Its Chemical Applications. Author, P. K. Bhattacharya.
7. Group theory by Gobinathan and Ramakrishnan.
8. Vibrational spectroscopy by D.N.Satyanarayana.
9. Physical chemistry. by F. Daniels and A. Alberty.
10. An Introduction to Electrochemistry by S. Glasstone.
251
11. Modern Electrochemistry Vol. I & II by J. O. M. Bockris and A.K.N. Reddy .
12. Physical Chemistry by P. W. Atkins. ELBS.
13. Physical chemistry of surfaces: A. W. Adamson.
14. Theories of chemical reaction rates by A. J. K. laidler.
15. Text book of physical Chemistry by H.K. Moudgil.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
SEMESTER-IV
Spectroscopy
Unit-I: Introduction of spectroscopy and Rotational Spectra :-
Characterization of electromagnetic radiation. Regions of Spectrum,
transition probability, the width and intensity of spectral transitions.
Classification of molecules according to their moment of inertia. Rotational
spectra of rigid and nonrigid diatomic molecules. The intensities of spectral lines.
The effect of isotopic substitution. Polyatomic and symmetric top molecules. The
stark effect.
Unit- II: Infrared spectroscopy and Raman Spectroscopy:
Diatomic molecules : Molecules as harmonic oscillator, Force constant,
zero point energy, isotope effect. The Anharmonic oscillator, the diatomic
vibrating rotator. Polyatomic molecules-Fundamental vibrations and their
symmetry, overtone and combination frequencies, concept of group frequencies,
Fermi resonance and FTIR.
Raman Spectroscopy :
Rayleigh scattering . Raman Scattering, classical and quantum theories of
Raman effect. Rotational Raman Spectra for linear and symmetric top molecules.
Vibrational Raman Spectra , rotational fine structure. Polarization of light and the
Raman effect. Technique and instrumentation- Laser Raman spectrometer.
Structure determination from Raman and Infra-red spectroscopy.
Unit – III: Electronic Spectroscopy :
Electronic spectroscopy of diatomic molecules. Born – oppenheimer
approximation. Sequences and progressions, the vibrational course structure and
rotational fine structure of electronic band. The Franck-Condon principle,
252
dissociation energy and dissociation products. Birje-Sponer extrapolation. The
fortrat diagram. Predissociation,
Photoelectron spectroscopy: principle, instrumentation,X-ray and UV-PES.
ESCA applications, Auger electron spectroscopy
Unit - IV: NMR and ESR
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy: -
The theory of PMR spectra, Chemical shift, factors affecting chemical
shift, relaxation times and spin- spin interactions. NMR of simple AX and AMX
type molecules. Calculation of coupling constants, Techniques and
instrumentation of continuous wave and FT-NMR spectroscopy. C, F and
P NMR spectra-principle and applications
Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy
Basic principles , factors affecting ―g‖ value, hyperfine splitting . Deuterium,
Methyl, benzene, naphthalene, anthrazene, xylene(o, m, p-), p-
benzosemiquinone radicals, calculation of electron density- McConnel equation,
Fine structure in ESR- Zero field shifting and Kramer‘s degeneracy. Double
resonance-ELDOR and ENDOR, study of unstable paramagnetic species, spin
labeling studies of bio-molecules.
Unit – V: Quadrupole resonance and Mössbauer Spectroscopy:
(a)Nuclear quadrupole resonance: Basic principle, comparison with NMR,
splitting of quadrupole energy levels, asymmetry parameter, Applications-
hydrogen bonding, phase transition, substituent effect and Pi- bond character.
(b) Mössbauer parameters:– Isomer shifts, quadrupole splitting, Magnetic
hyperfine interaction, Doppler effect/shift. Application of Mössbauer
Spectroscopy:- (i) covalently bonded compounds, (ii) oxidation states of
metal ion in compounds, (iii) Structural detetrmination, (iv) magnetically ordered
compounds (i.e Ferromagnetic & antiferromagnetic compounds).
13 19
31
253
REFFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamental of molecular spectroscopy by C. N. Banwell Tata McGrew
Hill.
2. Molecular structure and spectroscopy, IInd edition – 2011 by G. Aruldhas.
3. Molecular spectroscopy by K.V.Raman, R.Gopalan and P.S.Raghavan.
4. Spectroscopy, Vol. 1,2 and 3 by B.P. Straughan and S.Walker.
5. Molecular spectroscopy by Sindhu.
6. Basic principles of spectroscopy by R.Chang.
7. Molecular Spectroscopy by I. N. Levine , Willey interscience.
8. Molecular Spectroscopy by G. M. Barrow.
9. Physical Methods for Chemists,. 2nd ed.‖, by R.S.Drago.
10. Vibrational spectroscopy by D.N.Satyanarayana.
11. Graebeal, Molecular Spectroscopy Prientice Hall, 1968.
12. A. Carrington and Machlachlon, Magnetic Resonance, Harper &
Row. 1967.
13. A. Rahman, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance- Basic Principles,
Springer-Verlag, Newyork, 1986.
14. J.A. Weil, J.R. Bolton and J.E. Wertz, Electron Paramagnetic
Resonance; Wiley Interscience: 1994.
*********************************************************************
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL – II
I. ABSORPTION :
1. Adsorption of acetic acid/oxalic acid on activated charcoal – verification of
Freundlich isotherm – determination of unknown concentration.
II. POTENTIOMETRY :
2. Determination of formation constant of [Ag(NH3)2]+ complex.
3. Determination of pH of buffer solutions using quinhydrone electrode.
254
4. Determination of dissociation constant of a weak acid.
5. Determination of solubility product of springly soluble salts by concentration
cell method and chemical cell method.
POTENTIOMETRIC TITRATION :
i) Redox
6. FAS – Ce4+
7. Fe2+ - KMnO4
8. KI - KMnO4
ii) Precipitation
9. Kcl – AgNO3
10. Kcl + KI - AgNO3
III. CHEMICAL KINETICS :
11. Kinetics of reaction between potassium perdisulphate and potassium iodide.
12. Kinetics of saponification of ethylacetate using NaOH by conductivity method.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
QUESTION PATTERN
Section A : Multiple Choice Questions ( 10X1=10 )
Section B : Either or Type Questions ( 5X5=25 )
Section C : Either or Type Questions ( 5X8=40 )
*********************************************************************************
255
APPENDIX – AZ96
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc., Botany
Curriculum and Syllabi Design for M.Sc. Botany Degree
Course under Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
(For those who joined the course in June, 2012 and afterwards)
1. Objectives
• To enable the students to have a thorough understanding of the different branches of the Science of Botany and to grasp a comprehensive knowledge of Botany.
• To develop the ability of students to reason, think analytically and solve biological problems.
• To help the students of Botany apply the skills and knowledge gained through the subject to face competitive examinations with confidence.
• To acquire a familiarity with the fundamentals of Plant Biology, Biotechnology, Environmental Science and related aspects.
• To impart research and entrepreneurial skills to students.
2. Eligibility for Admission
Candidates with B.Sc. Degree in Botany / Plant Biology and Plant Biotechnology with 50% marks or above obtained from Manonmaniam Sundaranar University or equivalent to B.Sc. as recognized by Manonmaniam Sundaranar University in Botany / Plant Biology and Plant Biotechnology with 50% marks or above are eligible to be admitted into this Course. However, the relaxation to 50% for SC, ST and MBC candidates is allowed as per the State Government norms.
3. Transitory Provision
Any candidate admitted to this course has to complete his/her degree within four years from the date of joining. Otherwise the candidate has to appear for equivalent papers in the syllabus to be implemented later. The equivalent paper will be decided by the Chairman/ BOS.
256
Scheme of the Course
Intern al
Core 1. Plant Diversity I- Algae, Fungi, Lichens and Bryophytes.
Core 2. Anatomy and Embryology of
Angiosperms
Core 3. Microbiology and Plant Pathology
Elective 1. (Major/Non- major) Medicinal Botany and Pharmacognosy
Core 4. Plant Diversity II- Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms and Paleobotany
Core 5. Taxonomy of Angiosperms
Core 6. Genetics and Molecular Biology
Elective 2. (Major/Non- Major) Computer Applications and Bioinformatics
Practical Examination
1. Theory Papers 1,2&3 3 40 60 100 4
2. Theory Papers 4,5&6 3 40 60 100 4
257
4.
I
Extern Tota al l
75 100 5
75 100 5
75 100 5
75 100 5
75 100 4
75 100 4
75 100 4
75 100 5
I
II
6 2 3 25
6 2 3 25
6 2 3 25
6 - 3 25
6 2 3 25
6 2 3 25
6 2 3 25
6 - 3 25
Core 7. Biochemistry and Biophysics
Core 8. Research Methodology
Core 9. Plant Biotechnology
PROJECT
Core 10. Plant Physiology
Core 11. Environmental Biology
Core 12. Applied Biotechnology
Elective 3. Mushroom Cultivation
Practical Examination
3. Theory Papers 7&8
4. Theory Papers 9,10,11& 12
5. Course Pattern
Courses
12
4
3
1
20 (15T + 4Pract. +1 Proj.)
6. Project and Education Tour
For M.Sc. Botany students, the project is Compulsory. GROUP PROJECT with a minimum of three candidates and a maximum of four candidates is permissible.
Study tour in the form of of Field visit / Visit to Laboratories / Libraries, Algal Collection Trips etc. are compulsory.
7. Infrastructure
a) The Library may be updated with the text books, the reference books and the suggested books given in the contents of the syllabi.
b) The internet facility may be provided either in the department or in the Library.
258
2 3 25 75 100 5
2 3 25 75 100 5
6
6 6
6
6 6
6
6
II III
IV
2 3
-
2 3 2 3
2 3
- 3
3
3
25 75 100 5
40 60 100 5
25 75 100 4
75 100 4
75 100 4
75 100 5
60 100 4
60 100 4
Hours Credits
72 54
24 16
18 15
6 5
120 90
25
25
25
40 40
Course Pattern
Core Courses
S.No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Theory
Practicals
Electives
Project
Total
8. Internal assessment
Regarding the Internal assessment, each paper carries an internal component. There is a separate passing minimum for the external and the overall components. The pass minimum for PG is 50% external.
Theory – External: Internal Assessment = 75 : 25
Practical – External: Internal Assessment = 60 : 40
Components Theory Practical (Marks) (Marks)
The average of the best two tests from three 15 compulsory tests, each of one hour duration
Assignment 4
Seminar 6
Experimental work 20
Record 10
Model test 10
Total 25 40
9. Project work
Components Marks
Project Report 60
Viva-voce 40
Total 100
*The project report evaluation will be done centrally and Viva-voce will be conducted by both the External examiner and the guide at the end of third semester.
10. Question Pattern
Section Type of questions No. of questions Marks
Part A Objective type questions (Two 2×5=10 10×1=10 questions from each unit)
Part B Internal Choice Questions (One 1×5=5 5×5=25 question from each unit)
Part C Internal Choice Questions (One 1×5=5 5×8=40 question from each unit)
Total 75 marks
259
Core Paper 1
PLANT DIVERSITY I - ALGAE, FUNGI, LICHENS AND BRYOPHYTES
UNIT –I
General characters of algae including similarities and diversities. Classification of algae proposed by F.G. Fritsch, V.J. Chapman and Parker - Basis of algal classification. Distribution- range of thallus structure - Reproduction and life cycle patterns of algae - Cyanophyceae, Chlorophyceae, Xanthophyceae, Chrysophyceae, Bacillariophyceae, Cryptophyceae, Dinophyceae, Euglenophyceae, Phaeophyceae and Rhodophyceae.
UNIT- II
Physiology and Ecology of algae . Origin and evolution of sex in algae.Fossil algae - economic importance of algae - laboratory culture and commercial cultivation of algae. Algae as indicators of water pollution.
UNIT –III
General characters of Fungi. Classification of fungi proposed by Alexopoulous and Mims. Homothallism and Heterothallism in fungi - Parasexuality in fungi - Origin of fungi - Mycorrhiza. Economic importance of fungi. An over view of zygomycetes, Ascomycetes ,Basidiomycetes and Deuteromycetes including life history.
UNIT –IV
A general account of lichens - Classification - structure - nutrition and reproduction of lichens- Microchemical tests for lichens - Synthesis of lichens. Economic importance of lichens - Ecological significance of lichens.
UNIT –V
General characters of Bryophytes including similarities and diversities. Classification of Bryophytes proposed by G.M. Smith and Rothmaller. Reproduction in Bryophytes. General life cycle pattern and alternation of generations in bryophytes. An over view of Hepaticopsida, Anthocerotopsida and Bryopsida including life history - Origin of bryophytes. Evolution of gametophytes and sporophytes in bryophytes - Economic importance of bryophytes.
Practicals
Algae
Anabaena. Oscillatoria, Oedogonium, Enteromorpha, Padina, Turbinaria, Gracilaria.
Fungi
Penicillium, ,Mucor, Xylaria, Polyporus,Agaricus
Lichens
Any one foliose lichen,Usnea.
Bryophytes
Plagiochasma, Anthoceros, Polytrichum.
260
Record
Algal collection trip and submission of 5 Herbaria.
Reference Books
Algae
1. Bilgrami, K.S and Saha L.B. 2004. A text book of Algae. CBS Publishers and Distributors.
2. Bold H.C and Wyne M.J 1978. Introduction to Algae. Prentice –Hall India, New Delhi.
3. Fritsch F.E 1972. Vol I and II; The structure and reproduction of Algae, Cambridge Univ. Press.
4. Kamat N.D 1982. Topics in Algae. Saikripa Prakasam, Aurangabad.
5. Round F. E. 1973. The Biology of Algae. 2nd Edward Arnold Ltd. London.
6. South G. R and Whittick A. 1987. Introduction to Phycology. Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
7. Trainer F. R. 1978. Introductory Phycology. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
Fungi
1. Alexopolus C.J. and Mims C.W. 1983. Introductory Mycology. Wiley Eastern Ltd. New York.
2. Burnett, J.H. 1971. Fundamentals of Mycology. ELBS London.
3. Smith G.M (1988 ); Crytogamic Botany. Mc Graw Hill Company , New York.
Lichens
1. Ahmedjan and Hale M.E; The Lichens. Kluwer Academic Publishers
2. Chopra G.L., 1981 Lichens of Himalayas. Place of Publication – Dehrodun.
3. Smith A.L., 1854 Lichens. Cambridge University Press, UK.
Bryophytes
1. Cavers F. 1984; The Interrelationship of the Bryophytes. Cambridge University Press, UK
2. Rashid A; 1998; An introduction to Bryophyta. Vikas Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
3. Vashishta, A.K. Sinha and A. Kumar. 2003. Bryophyta. Chand & Co.Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Watson E.V. 1964. The Structure and life of bryophytes . Hutchinson University Library, London.
5. Prem Puri. 1981, Bryophytes: Morphology, Growth and Differentiation. Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi.
261
Core Paper 2
ANATOMY AND EMBRYOLOGY OF ANGIOSPERMS
UNIT – I
Introduction to Developmental Biology - Nuclear - cytoplasmic interaction – Division- Differentiation- Polarity and Symmetry , organization of Shoot Apical Meristem (SAM) and Root Apical Meristem (RAM); vascular cambium –origin , structure and seasonal activity.
UNIT – II
Xylem, Phloem and their elements –primary and secondary structures, phylogenetic trends and specialization of xylem and phloem. Secondary growth - Periderm – structure - development of lenticels, Anomalous secondary growth – Bougainvillea, Bignonia, Achyranthes and Dracaena.
UNIT - III
Nodal anatomy - types and phylogenetic trends. Wood anatomy - physical, chemical and mechanical properties. Defects in wood –natural defects, knots and defects due to diseases. Reaction wood - Tension and Compression wood - Durability of wood. Ontogeny of dicot and monocot leaves. Differentiation of epidermis with special reference to stomata and trichomes.
UNIT –IV
Microsporogenesis - Pollen morphology –pollen wall - pollen development - pollen dimorphism- pollen storage, pollen allergy. Microsporogenesis - Pollen - Pistil interaction - structure of style - stigma and significance . Megasporogenesis .Different types of embryo sac development .Fertilization –barriers of fertilization – Self- incompatibility –types, physiology and biochemistry, methods to overcome self- incompatibility.
UNIT –V
Fertilization - changes, physiological and biochemical changes during maturation. Seed – seed coat development and specialization. Endosperm-types - haustoria. Embryogenesis and organogenesis of dicot and monocot embryos - Apomixis – Polyembryony - Parthenocarpy.
Practicals
1. Study of living shoot apices –Vinca, Hydrilla
2. Anomalous activity of cambium in Bougainvillea, Bignonia, Achyranthes and Dracaena.
3. Wood anatomy – any four common timbers (T.S, T.L.S, R.L.S)
4. Study of xylem and phloem elements by maceration.
5. Leaf anatomy –C3 & C4 leaves.
6. Microscopic examination of leaves (epidermal peel and section) - stomato and trichomes.
262
7. Pollen collection and study of pollen viability using stains.
8. Study of invitro germination of pollen - Study of pollen tube in style.
9. Study of nuclear and cellular endosperm through dissection.
10. Dissection of globular, heart shaped, torpedo stage and mature embryos from suitable seeds.
Reference Books
1. Bhojwani S.S & S.P.Bhatnagar, 2005. The Embrology of Angiosperms, Vikas Publishing House, Ghaziabad.
2. Brown H.P. 1981. Text book of Wood Technology .McGraw Hill Book, New York.
3. Cutter E. G. 1971 Plant Anatomy –Vol –I & II. Addison – Wesley, Reading, Mass
4. Eames A.J 1961.Morphology of Angiosperms . McGraw Hill Book, New York.
5. Esau K. 1979.Anatomy of Seed Plants. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
6. Easu K. 1965. Plant Anatomy .John Wiley & Sons, New York.
7. Fahn A. 1989. Plant Anatomy –Maxwell house ,New York.
8. Gupta M.N.1971. The Angiosperms ,Shivalal Agarwala & Co, Agra.
9. Maheswari P. 1971. Introduction to Embryology of Angiodperms. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications & Co, Delhi.
10. Metcalfe C.R &Chalk.1979.Anatomy of Dicotyledons Vol I Clarendon Press, Oxford.
11. Ramesh Rao &K. B. S Junya 1971. A Hand book on timbers of India. Manga Publication, New Delhi.
12. Solidwood ,1988. Hand book on Indian wood Plants. Oxford University Press Madras.
13. Swamy B. G. L.&K. V Krishnamurthy. 1980. From flower to fruit. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Ltd., New Delhi.
14. Wardlaw C.W. Plant Morphogenesis. 1952. Wadscoorth Publishing Co.
Core Paper 3
MICROBIOLOGY AND PLANT PATHOLOGY
UNIT-I
General properties of bacteria - Morphology and fine structure of bacteria - Bacterial nutrition - growth and reproduction in bacteria.Sterilization and disinfection - Culture methods. Methods of isolation - Pure culture. Identification of bacteria. Classification of bacteria as per Berjgey‘s Manual of Systematic Bacteriology - Economic importance of bacteria.
263
UNIT-II
General Properties of Viruses - Classification and nomenclature - Structure and morphology - Cultivation - Transmission of viruses. Morphology and life cycle of bacteriophages. General properties of Actinomycetes, Mycoplasma and Rickettsiales - Antibiotics and their mode of action.
UNIT-III
Microbial flora of soil - Significance of soil microorganisms. Microbial flora of water. - Purification of municipal water - waste water treatment. Bacteriological examination of drinking water. Microbial flora - Types of bacteria in milk – Pasteurization of milk – Phosphatase Tests for grading milk sample. Food spoilage by microorganisms - food borne pathogens. Bacteriological food poisoning - Food preservation methods.
UNIT-IV
Overview of immunity - Humoral and cell mediated immunity – Immunoglobulins –Antigens - Antibodies. Antigen-Antibody interactions – cytokines - T-cell biology - B- cell biology - Vaccination - Immunodeficiency.
UNIT-V
Classification of plant diseases-Symptoms - Infection process-Host parasite interaction-Defence mechanisms in plants. Disease control methods - Physical, Chemical, Cultural and Biological - Integrated disease management. Detailed study of the plant diseases-Citrus canker, White rust disease, Blast of rice, Red rot of Sugarcane, Mosaic and Little leaf of Brinjal.
Practicals
1. Enumeration of bacteria in soil / milk / beverage samples by serial dilution agar plate technique.
2. Simple stain.
3. Gram‘s stain.
4. Negative stain.
5. Hanging drop technique for demonstrating motility of bacteria.
6. Antibiotic assay.
7. Study of any three plant diseases from the list given in the theory syllabus .
Reference Books
1. Abbas A.K.& Lictmann A.H.(2003). Cel l& Molecular Immunology. Saunderss, Philadelphia.
2. Dasgupta M.R. 1988. Principle of Pathology. Oxford and IBH publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Mehrotra R.S. 1980. Plant Pathology. Tata McGraw Hill Publications & Co., Delhi.
264
4. Michael.J Pelczar, E.C.S.Chan and Noel R. Kreig 1993 Microbiology. Tata McGraw Hill Publications & Co., Delhi.
5. Nester ,Roberts, Lindstrom, Pearsall and Nester. 1983. Microbiology. Trans at Abe Books. Co., UK.
6. Prescot L.,Harley J. Pand klein D.A.(2002) Microbiology, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
7. Sullia S.B. and Santhanam S.(2005). General Microbiology ,Oxford &IBH Publishing Company, Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi.
8. Rangaswamy G. 1988. Plant Pathology. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
Elective Paper 1
MEDICINAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY
UNIT –I
Medicinal Botany - Definition - Aim and Scope - History - Importance - Present status and future prospects of medicinal crops. Ethanobotany - Traditional systems of Medicine – Siddha, Ayurveda and Unani. Conservation of Medicinal plants - in-situ and ex-situ – herbal gardens, Medicinal Plants Wealth in India – IPR.
UNIT - II
Study of the following plants with reference to their habitat, habit, systematic position, morphology of the useful parts, cultivation and utilization of Tylophora, Digitalis, Ocimum, Zingiber, Catharanthus roseus , Phyllanthus amarus,Aloe, Emblica and Azadirachta.
UNIT –III
Methods of extraction of oil in the following plants –Eucalyptus, Cymbopogan, Rosa and Santalum. Extraction procedures for active principles – Withaonalides, Hyocyamine,Vinblastine.
UNIT –IV
Pharmacognosy – Definition - Scope – Classification of drugs –Morphological – Taxonomical, Pharmacological and Chemical. Collection and Processing of crude drugs –Antichemical, Phytochemical, Antimicrobial and Chemical.
UNIT –V
Screening and WHO Standardization of crude drugs (WHO guidelines) – Physicochemical (Ash and Extraction values), Fluorescence analysis - Qualitative and Quantitative analysis - Basic chromatographic and Spectroscopic analysis of crude drugs.
Reference Books
1. Anonymous, 1948 -1976. The Wealth of India 11 Vols.
2. Bhattacharjee, S. K. 2004.Handbook on medicinal Plants, Pointer Publishers. Jaipur.
265
3. Farooqi A. A & Sreeramu B.S. 2001. Cultivation of Medicinal and Aromatic Crops, Universities Press.
4. Horticulture College, TNAU, 2002, Handbook on Cultivation of Medicinal Plants. TNAU Publishers.
5. Joshi S. G 2000.Medicinal Plants, Oxford and IBH Company Private Ltd. New Delhi.
6. Kokate K. Purohit & Gokhale 1999; Pharmacognosy. Nirali Publications.
7. Sharma P. and C. Etal 2000, Database on Medicinal Plants Used in Ayurveda, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare.
8. Srivastava A. K.2006. Medicinal Plants, International Book Distributors, Dehradun.
9. Yogaarasimhan S.N.2000. Medicinal Plants of India, Vol 2.Tamil Nadu., Inderline Publishing Private Ltd. Bangalore, Dehra Dun and Michigan.
10. Evans W.C. 1997. Pharmacognosy. Harcourt Brace & Company Asios Pvt., Ltd.
11. Wallis T.E. 1985.Text Book of Pharmacognosy. CSB. Publishers, New Delhi.
Core Paper 4
PLANT DIVERSITY II - PTERIDOPHYTES, GYMNOSPERMS AND PALEOBOTANY
UNIT - I
General characteristics - Classification of Pteridophytes by Smith and K.R. Sporne - Stelar evolution - Telome theory- concept and significance - Life cycle patterns - Apomictic life cycle.
UNIT - II
Eusporangiate and leptosporangiate development - Spore forming structures, soral evolution in ferns - Heterospory and origin of seed habit. General account of fossil Pteridophytes - Geological era and study of the following fossil forms- Rhynia, Lepidodendron, Sphenophyllum and Calamites.
UNIT - III
Range of structure, reproduction and evolution of Gametophytes and sporophytes of the orders Psilotales, Lycopodiales, Selaginellales, Isoetales, Equisetales, Ophioglossales, Osmundales, Filicales and Salviniales Economic importance of Pteridophytes.
UNIT - IV
General characters, Affinities and evolution of Gymnosperms. Classification by Chamberlain and Sporne. Distribution of living and fossil gymnosperms in India - Economic importance.
266
UNIT - V
Morphology, anatomy, reproduction, phylogeny and inter- relationships of the orders- cycadales, Ginkgoales, Coniferales and Gnetales. Study of the following fossil forms – Lyginopteris, Heterangium, Medullosa, Cycadeoidea, Pentaxylon, Cordaites.
Practicals
Pteridophtes
Rhynia, Lepidodendron, Sphenophyllum, Calamites.
Isoetes, Equisetum, Ophioglossum, Angiopteris, Lygodium, Gleichenia,
Pteris, Adiantum, Salvinia/Azolla.
Gymnosperms
Lyginopteris, Heterangium, Cordaites, Medullosa, Cupressus,Podocarpus,Araucaria, Ephedra / Gnetum.
Reference Books
1. Arnold, C.A.1947. An Introduction to Paleobotany. McGraw Hill Book Co.
2. John, M. Coulter and C. Chamberlain. 1917. Morphology of Gymnosperms. University of Chicago Press.
3. Foster, A.S. and Gifford, E.M. 1959. Morphology and Evolution of Vascular Plants. W.H. Freeman.
4. Parihar, N.S. 1967. An introduction to Embryophyta- Pteridophyta. Central Book Depot., Allahabad.
5. Rashid, A. 1985, An Introduction to Pteridophyta. Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
6. Scott, D.H. 1962. Studies in Fossil Botany. Hafner Publishing Company, New York.
7. Sporne, K.R.1965. The Morphology of Gymnosperms. BI Publications, New Delhi.
8. Sporne, K.R. 1968. Morphology of Pteridophytes. BI Publications, New Delhi.
Core Paper 5
TAXONOMY OF ANGIOSPERMS
UNIT-I
Aim and Scope of Taxonomy. The concept of genus - Species concept – Taxonomic hierarchy. Taxonomic literature – Check list, Manuals, Monographs, Periodicals, Data Banks, Revisions.
267
UNIT-II
Botanical Nomenclature - ICBN - Principles and role of ICBN - Typification, Principles of Priority and their limitations - Citation, Effective and Valid Publications - Rules of naming taxa (family, genus, species).
UNIT-III
Identification and preparation of intended and bracketed keys - Systems of classification-Artificial-Linneaus - Natural system –Bentham & Hooker - Phylogenetic – Engler & Prantle and Takhtajan. Herbarium Preparation-Methods-Regional, National and International Herbaria and their potential role.
UNIT IV
Taxonomy in relation to Cytology, Anatomy, Embryology and Phytochemistry. Role of Botanical Survey of India (BSI). Contributions of Linnaeus, De Candolle, J.D. Hooker and M.P. Nayar.
UNIT V
A detailed study with special reference to the following families
Cleomaceae, Menispermaceae, Tiliaceae, Zygophyllaceae, Vitaceae, Sapindaceae, Mimosaceae, Onagraceae, Passifloraceae, Molluginaceae, Apiaceae, Asteraceae, Asclepiadaceae, Convolvulaceae, Bignoniaceae, Acanthaceae, Verbenaceae, Nyctaginaceae, Amaranthaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Liliaceae, Commelinaceae and Poaceae.
Practicals
1. Identification of plants mentioned in the syllabus (Family level) 2. Preparation of Dichotomous key. 3. Identification of Binomial using flora (J.S. Gamble). 4. Technical description of plants from locally available families. 5. Dissection of floral parts. 6. Study tour of Taxonomic interest (any area) collection of specimen and
submission of 20 herbaria and field note book.
Reference Books
1. Davis & Heywood, V.M. 1963. Principles of Angiosperm Taxonomy. Oliver & Boyd.
2. Jeffrey, C. 1982. Introduction of Plant Taxonomy, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
3. Lawrence, G.H.M.1962. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. Mac Millan Company, New York.
4. Rendle, A.B. 1979. The Classification of Flowering Plants. Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Ghaziabad.
5. Sharma, O.P. 1996. Plant Taxonomy. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Sivarajan , V.V. 1996. Introduction to the Principles of Plant Taxonomy. Oxford & IBH Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
268
7. Gamble, J.S. 1915 – 1936. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. 3 vols. (Rep. 2004). Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Sigh, Dehra Dun.
8. Hooker, J. D. 1872 – 1897. The Flora of British India. 7 vols. (Rep. 2004) Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Sigh, Dehra Dun.
Core Paper 6
GENETICS AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
UNIT - I
Mendelian Genetics- Interaction of genes and their types - multiple alleles - quantitative inheritance - Sex linkage, Chromosome theory of heredity - linkage and crossing over - chromosome mapping. Extrachromosomal DNA-Chloroplast DNA, Mitochondrial DNA - Extra chromosomal inheritance. Molecular basis of mutation. Point mutation - Frame shift -Suppressor mutation - Transposons – Types, inheritance.
UNIT – II
Eukaryotic genome organization, Structure of chromatin, nucleosome concept. C Value Paradox - bacterial genome. Fine structure of prokaryotic genes - cis –trans effect - Complementation test - DNA replication in prokaryotes and eukaryotes - Enzymes involved in replication in molecular level
UNIT –III
DNA repair mechanism - photoreactivation – excision repair - mismatch repair. Genetic recombination-generalised - site specific. Molecular mechanism-Holliday model. Lysogenic and lytic cycle - Bacterial Transformation - Transduction and Conjugation.
UNIT –IV
Gene - enzyme relationships-Biosynthetic pathways –Alkaptonuria, Phenylketonuria. One gene one enzyme hyphothesis - Genetic code - Protein synthesis - Transcription in E.Coli - Transcription in eukaryotes, mRNA Processing - Capping, Polyadenylation - Splicing Spliceosome - Mechanism of translation.
UNIT-V
Gene regulation in Prokaryotes - Operon concept - The lac operon - Negative and Positive control - Catabolite repression- Trp – operon. Gene regulation in Eukaryotes - Britten and Davidson‘s Model - DNA Sequencing - Maxam and Gilbert method – Dideoxy Nucleotide Method - Messing‘s short gun method.
Practicals
1. Genetics problems in gene interaction, Chromosome mapping, linkage, genetic maps.
(Demonstration only)
2. Isolation of high molecular weight genomic DNA from rice. 3. Separation of Genomic DNA by Electrophoresis.
269
4. Isolation of Plasmid DNA from Pseudomonas. 5. Southern blotting demonstration. 6. Separation of Proteins by Electrophoresis. 7. Western Blot detection of protein.
Reference Books
1. Benjamin Lewin, 2004. Genes VIII. Pearson Prentice Hall. 2. Channarayappa, 2006. Molecular Biology. Principles and Practices. Universities
Press (India), Pvt.Ltd., Hyderabad. 3. David Freifelder, 2006. Molecular Biology. Narosa Publishing House, Madras,
New Delhi. 4. Gupta R.K.2006.Genetics. Rastogi Publications. 5. Nicholl DST, 2001. An Introduction to Genetic Engineering. Cambridge University
Press. 6. Old R.N. and Primrose, S.B. 2004. Principle of Gene Manipulation. Blackwell
Scientific Publication, USA. 7. Power C.B. 2007. Genetics Vols I. and II. Himalaya Publishing House. Kundanlal
Chandak. Industrial Estate. Ghat Road. Nagpur. 8. Satyanarayanan, U.2006. Biotechnology. Books and Allied (P). Ltd. Kolkatta.
Elective 2
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS AND BIOINFORMATICS
UNIT - I
Computer – Definition – Parts – categories of Computer Science – Languages – Types of software – operating system – classification of computer – need for computers - characteristics of computers – applications of computers.
UNIT - II
Information Technology – Internet – LAN –WAN- MAN – e-mail – World Wide Web – Internet protocols – FTP – TCP – IP - POP – SMTP –NNTP – WAP – Internet Relay Chat – Internet Telephony – Video Conferencing – Search Engines – Internet Browsers – Internet Service providers – HTML – applications of internet.
UNIT - III
Basics of Microsoft Word – Excel – Power Point – menus and options in MS Word – Excel and Power Point – usage of MS Word - solving simple statistical problems using MS Excel – construction of graphs – preparation of power point slides – animation.
UNIT - IV
Bioinformatics – definition – scope – importance – major areas of Bioinformatics – Data Bases in Bioinformatics – types – Literature Data Base – Taxonomic Data Base – Genome Data Base – Protein Data Base – Structure Data Base – Specialized Data Base – Data mining – applications.
270
UNIT - V
Genomics and Proteomics – types - Softwares in Bioinformatics – Sequence analysis softwares – Molecular Visualization softwares – Prediction softwares – Docking softwares – BLAST – RasMol – PASS – Drug Designing - Chemoinformatics – Pharmacoinformatics.
Reference Books
1. Saxena Sanjay 2002. MS Office for everyone, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. S.Ravishankar and P.V.Raphael. 2004. Computer Awareness and Applications. Himalaya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi.
3. P.Mohan. 2009. Fundamentals of Computers. Himalaya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Neeru Mundra and Renu Vashisth. 2011. Introduction to Information Technology. Himalya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi.
5. N.J. Chikhale and V.S. Gomase. 2007. Bioinformatics. Theory and Practice. 2007. Himalaya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. Hyderabad.
6. C.S.V.Murthy. 2008. Bioinformatics. Himalaya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi.
7. Sundara Rajan and Balaji. 2007. Introdution to Bioinformatics. Himalaya Publishing House, Pvt.Ltd. Mumbai
8. Ramesh Bangia. 2008. Computer Fundamentals and Information Technology. Fire Wall Media, New Delhi.
9. Introduction to Information Technology. 2011. ITL Education Solutions Ltd. Pearson Education India.
10. M.N.Doja. 2005. Fundamentals of Computers and Information Technology. Deep and Deep Publications. New Delhi.
11. Attwood T.K. and Parry Smith D. J., 2006. Introduction to Bioinformatics, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., South Asia.
12. Murthy C.S.V., 2004. Bioinformatics. Himalaya Publishing House, Hyderabad.
13. Rastogi S. C., Namitta Mendirala and Parag Rastogi, 2003. Bioinformatics – Concepts, Skill and Applications. CBS Publications.
14. S. Sundara Rajan and R. Balaji., 2003. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.
271
Practical Examination
Model Question Paper
(2012-2013)
Semester II
Practical Paper I. Algae, Fungi, Lichens, Bryophytes, Anatomy, Embryology of Angiosperms, Microbiology and Plant Pathology
Time: 3 hrs Max. Marks : 60
1. Make suitable micropreparations of A and B. Identify giving reasons, draw diagrams and leave the preparations for valuation.
2×6=12
2. Make suitable micropreparations of the material C. Identify, draw labeled diagrams and write notes of interest. Submit the slides for valuation.
1×7=7
3. Take T.S., T.L.S. and R.L.S. of material D. Draw labeled sketches. Identify the type of wood and comment. Submit the slides for valuation.
1×8=8
4. Dissect out the globular or cordate embryo / endosperm with haustorium of specimen E. 1×5=5
5. Stain the given bacterium F by Gram‘s staining. Show it to the examiner for valuation. 1×7=7
6. Prepare a hanging drop of culture G. Show it to the examiner for valuation immediately after preparation. 1×6=6
7. Identify the given material H and comment on its etiology. 1×5=5
8. Submission
Record 5
Algal herbarium-5 sheets. 5
Key
1. A - Vegetative or Reproductive part of Algae.
B - Vegetative or Reproductive part of Fungi / Lichens / Bryophytes.
2. C – Anomalous secondary growth in stem / Leaf anatomy.
Stem of Bougainvillea, Bignonia, Achyranthes, Dracaena
Any C3 / C4 leaf.
3. D. Wood
4. E. Tridax / Cleome / Cucumber / Any suitable material.
5. F. Bacterial Culture.
6. G. Bacterial Culture
7. H. Any Pathology material prescribed in the syllabus.
272
Scheme of Valuation
1. A,B Slide 2
Identification 1 (with systematic position)
Sketch 1
Notes 2
2. C Slide 2
Identification 1
Sketch 2
Notes 2
3. D Slides 3 (1+1+1)
Identification 1
Sketch 2
Notes 2
4. E As a whole 5
5. F As a whole 7
6. G As a whole 6
7. H Identification 1
Sketch 1
Notes 3
Submission 8. Record 5
9. Algal herbarium - 5 5
Practical Paper II- Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms, Paleobotany, Taxonomy of
Angiosperms, Genetics and Molecular Biology
Time: 3 hrs Max. Marks: 60
1. Make suitable micropreparations of A and B. Draw diagrams. Identify giving reasons and leave the preparations for valuation.
2×6=12
2. Identify, draw diagrams and write critical notes on C. 1×4=4
3. Refer specimens D and E to their respective families giving reasons. 2×7=14
4. Prepare a dichotomous key with the specimens supplied in F, G, H, I and J. 1×5=5
5. Solve the genetics problems K and L. 2×8=16
6. Submission
Record 5
Permanent slides 2
(Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms one each) 4 273
Key
1. A - Vegetative or Reproductive part of Pteridophytes.
B - Vegetative or Reproductive part of Gymnosperms.
2. C. Fossil slide from Pteridophyte / Gymnosperm.
3. D. Polypetalae or Gamopetalae
E. Monochlamydeae or Monocot.
4. F, G, H, I, J –Any local plant from families included in the syllabus.
5. K - Genetic problem from Interaction of factors.
L - Linkage / Genetic maps / Chromosome mapping.
Scheme of Valuation
1. A,B Slide 2
Identification 1 (with systematic position)
Sketch 1
Notes 2
2. C Identification 1
Sketch 1
Notes 2
3. D,E Family 1
Systematic Position 1
Diagnostic features 3
Elimination 2
4. F,G,H, Key Preparation (As a 5 I,J whole)
5. K Genetics Problem 8
L Genetics Problem 8
6. Submission Record 5
Permanent slides 2 4
274
Core Paper 7
BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS
UNIT – I
Introduction - Biological processes - Carbohydrates - structure and properties of Monosaccharides – ring structure - Oligosaccharides - sucrose and maltose, Polysaccharides - starch, cellulose, pection and agar - Glycosidic linkage formation.
UNIT – II
Structure and properties of amino acids and proteins - classification - Peptide bond formation - Biologically important peptides - oxytoxin and glutathione - Denaturation and renaturation of proteins - purification of proteins.
UNIT – III
Lipids – classification - structure and properties - Triglycerides, compound lipids - phospholipids - cholesterol. Structure - Biosynthesis of DNA and RNA. Secondary metabolites - Alkaloids, Glycosides, Steroids and Terpenoids.
UNIT – IV
Enzyme - Nomenclature and classification - IUB system – Properties - Active site - Mechanism of enzyme action (Fischer's Lock and Key model and Koshland‘s Induced fit model) - Activation energy. Enzyme regulation - activators and inhibitors - coenzymes.
UNIT – V
Properties of light - Different components of Electromagnetic radiation. Emission - Excitation - Fluorescence and Phosphorescence - Bioluminescence. Laws of Thermodynamics, Redox potential. High energy compounds in biology - significance.
Practicals
1. Determination of pka value of acetic acid.
2. Preparation of buffer using acetic acid and sodium acetate.
3. Quantitative estimation of soluble sugars in fruits and sugarcane.
4. Quantitative estimation of amino acids in seeds/any plant materials.
5. Quantitative estimation of protein in seeds / any plant materials.
6. Separation and identification of any four amino acids from a mixture by ascending paper chromatography (Refer standared Rf values).
7. Separation of photosynthetic pigments by column chromatography.
8. Determination of saponification value of any two vegetable oils.
9. Determination of Km value of Nitrate reductase enzyme.
10. Qualitative tests for sugars, lipids amino acids and protein.
275
Reference Books
1. Adams, R.L.P, Burdon, R.H., Campbell, A.M., Leader, D.P. and Smile, R.M.S. 1981. The Biochemistry of the Nucleic acids. Chapman and Hall Ltd. New York.
2. Agarwal O.P. 1989. Chemistry of organic natural products. Goel Publishing House, Delhi.
3. Ahluwalia. V.K., Lalitha S. Kumar and Sanjiv Kumar. 2009. Chemistry of Natural Products, Ane Books, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Bonner and Varner. 1976. Plant Biochemistry. Academic Press, New York.
5. Conn and Stumpf. 1987. Outlines of Biochemistry. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
6. Deb, A.C. 2011. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd, Kolkatta.
7. J.H. Weil. 1997. General Biochemistry. New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, New Delhi.
8. Jain J.L. 2005. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. S. Chand and Company, New Delhi.
9. Jayaraman, J. 1985. Laboratory Manuel in Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi.
10. Lehninger A.L. 1987. Principles of Biochemistry. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.
11. Nagin, S. 2010. Instant Biochemistry. Ane Books, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
12. Plummer, D.T. 1990. An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi.
13. Satyanarayanan, U. 2005. Biochemistry. Books and Allied (P) Ltd, Kolkatta.
14. Stryer, 1986. Biochemistry. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.
15. Palanichamy, S. and Shunmugavelu, M. 1996. Principles of Biophysics. Palani Paramount Publications, Palani.
16. Narayanan, P. 2008. Essentials of Biophysics. New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.
Core Paper 8
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT - I
Research- Meaning, objectives, Motivation, Types, Approaches, Significance, Literature collection-Index card, Reference card and Abstract card - Literature citation- Different systems of citing references- Name year system, Citation sequence system and Alphabet number system.
276
UNIT - II
Research report, Components of a Project report, tables, figures, foot note, thesis format, journal format - appendices, e-journal and e-book. Role of Supervisors/Guides in research.
UNIT - III
Biostatistics- collection of data - analysis of data, mean, medium, mode, Standard deviation, Standard error, Student ‗t‘ test, Chi- square test, correlation coefficient and regression analysis – ANOVA – One way and Two way – Experimental Design – SPSS.
UNIT - IV
Principles and applications of Chromatography- thin layer chromatography, ion exchange chromatography and affinity chromatography. Principles and applications of Electrophoresis- Agarose and PAGE. Principles and applications of Centrifuge- High speed refrigerated centrifuge – UV Spectrophotometer, Absorption Atomic Spectrophotometer - Flame Photometer.
UNIT - V
Radioisotope technique - emission of particles and half life - Scintillation counter. Microscopy - Principles and uses of Phase contrast, Fluorescent and Electron microscope (TEM and SEM), Micrometry and Microphotography.
Practicals
1. Calculation of the Mean, Standard Deviation and Standard Error of the samples given (50 leaves/ pods)
2. Work out problems pertaining to Standard error, Student‘s ‗t‘ test and Chi- square test.
3. Demonstration related to TLC, Agarose, PAGE, Micrometry and Microphotography
Reference Books
1. J. Jeyaraman. 1972. Techniques in Biology, Higginbotham Publishers. 2. K. Shyamasundari and K. Hanmantha Rao. 2007. Histochemistry in Focus, M. J.
P Publishers. 3. C. R. Kothari, 2009. Research Methodology- Methods and Techniques, New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi. 4. R. Marimuthu, 2008. Microscopy and Microtechnique, MJP Publishers. 5. Keith Wilson and John Walker. 2000. Practical Biochemistry, Cambridge
Publishers. 6. N. Gurumani, 2006; Research methodology for biological sciences, M.J.P.
Publishers. 7. N. T. J. Bailey, 1965; Statistical Methods in Biology. Kluwer Academic
Publishers. 8. P. Palanivelu. 2001. Analytical Biochemistry and Seperation Techniques, Tulsi
Book Centre, Gung Complex, 1st floor, 71, Town Hall Road, Madurai - 625001.
277
9. Rodney Boyer. 2000. Modern Experimental Biochemistry, Published by Addition Wesley Congman, Delhi - 1100092.
10. S.P. Gupta. 1998. Statistical methods, Sultan Chand & Sons Publishers. 23, Daryaganj, New Delhi -110092.
11. S. V. S. Rana, 2005. Biotechniques Theory and Practice. Rastogi Publications, Meerut.
Core Paper 9
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT - I
Biotechnology – Scope, potentialities and constraints. Genetic engineering– Enzymes used in genetic engineering – exonucleases, endonucleases, restriction endonucleases, S1 nucleases, DNA ligases, reverse transcriptase and alkaline phosphatase. Host cells – the factories of cloning. Gene cloning vectors – plasmids, phages and cosmids. Gene cloning principles and strategies.
UNIT - II
Gene transfer methods – Direct DNA transfer – electroporation, microinjection, microprojectile bombardment - Agrobacterium mediated gene transfer, genetic organization and features of Ti plasmid, role of virulence genes, T.DNA transfer and integration and Ri plasmids.
UNIT - III
Selection of recombinants – Direct method (DNA Probe method) - Marker genes for plant transformation. Promoters and terminators – Agrobacterium derived promoters - 35S promoters of CaMV, inducible and tissue specific promoters. Selection for correct promoter sequence, the CAT system. Importance of promoters - programmed expression of alien genes.
UNIT - IV
Plant tissue culture – Laboratory organization and requirement - Methods of tissue culture, subculture of callus, somatic embryogenesis, synthetic seed production, somaclonal variation, production of haploid plants – Androgenesis and gynogenesis – Applications and limitations of haploids. Cryopreservation – Gene bank.
UNIT - V
Micropropagation – Types, methods and factors affecting micropropagation, Problems in micropropagation, Applications. Protoplast technology – protoplast isolation, culture, maintenance and regeneration, somatic hybridization, cybrids and applications. Regulations in Biotechnology – Bioethics and Biosafety, guidelines, containments and implementation. Intellectual Property Rights and Protection. (IPR & IPP).
278
Practicals
1. Preparation of Plant Tissue Culture medium. 2. Sterilization of plant materials. 3. Induction of callus and regeneration. 4. Culture of anther and embryo. 5. Micropropagation – Nodal culture. 6. Isolation of protoplast from leaves. 7. Production of Synthetic seeds. 8. Production of Somatic embryos. 9. Spotters from genetic engineering – plasmids, phages and cosmids.
Reference Books
1. Kalyankumar De. 1992. Plant Tissue Culture. New Central Book Agencies, Kolkatta.
2. Chawla‘ H.S. 2002. Introduction to Biotechnology. Oxford and IBH Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Razdan M.K. 2003. An Introduction to Plant Tissue Culture. Oxford and IBH Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Dubey R.C. 2006. Text Book of Biotechnoogy. S. Chand and Company Ltd. 5. Satyanarayanan U. 2008. Biotechnology. Books and Allied (P) Ltd, Kolkata. 6. Das H.K. 2005. Text book of Biotechnology. Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd.,
Delhi.
Core Paper 10
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
UNIT – I
Plants water relations - water potential, solute potential, matric potential. Concept of Apoplast and symplast. Absorption and transport of solute (Passive and Active) - Translocation of organic solutes. Importance of macro and micro nutrients – Transpiration – mechanism of stomatal movement.
UNIT – II
General concepts on photosynthesis - Photosynthetic pigments - Light harvesting complexes – PS I, PS II- Photooxidation of water, Mechanisms of electron and proton flow through photosynthetic transport chain - "Z" scheme - Photophosphorylation and mechanism of ATP synthesis. C3, C4 and CAM pathways.
UNIT – III
Plant respiration – Glycolysis - TCA cycle. Mitochondrial electron transport chain
- Oxidative phosphorylation and terminal oxidation – Altennate pathway - β-oxidation. Glyoxylate cycle - photorespiration. Nitrogen metabolism - Biological nitrogen fixation and Nod factors - Nitrate reduction.
279
UNIT – IV
Growth Hormones - Physiological role and mechanism of action of Auxins Gibberellins and Cytokinins. Growth retarding chemicals / hormones – Morphactins, Phosphons and Branssinosteroids.
Photoperiodism and Vernalisation, Floral induction and development. Phytochrome - structure, properties, physiological role and mechanism of action. Senescence and Abscission - Physiological and Biochemical changes.
UNIT – V
Stress - Types – Biotic and abiotic – Effects - Morphological, Biochemical and Physiological changes associated with stress due to salinity, water, radiation, heavy metals and Temperature – Heat shock proteins – stress resistance mechanism.
Practicals
1. Determination of water potential by gravimetric method.
2. Effect of pH, temperature and detergents on membrane permeability.
3. Measurement of photosynthesis - Hill Activity (Time course and different colour filters).
4. Estimation of photosynthetic pigments with reference to age and different light conditions (two stages each).
5. To determine the chl.a/chl.b ratio in C3 and C4 plants.
6. Ion accumulation by potato discs.
7. Estimation of proline in normal and stressed leaves.
Reference Books
1. Bidwell. R.G.S. 1980. Plant Physiology. Academic Press, New York.
2. Devlin. R.M. 1990. Plant Physiology. Reinhold Publishers Corp, New York.
3. David T.D. and David H.T. (Eds.) 1993. Plant Physiology, Biochemistry and Molecular Biology. Longmann Scientific and Technical, Singapore.
4. Hess. D. 1975. Plant Physiology. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
5. Salisbury, F.B. and Ross. C. 2000. Plant Physiology. John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi.
6. Wilkins, M.B. 1984. Advanced Plant Physiology. Pitman Publishing Co. New York.
7. William G. Hopkins, 1999. Introduction to Plant Physiology. John Wiley & Sons. Inc. New York.
280
8. Sinha, R.K. 2004. Modern Plant Physiology. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
9. Verma, V. 2007. A text book of Plant Physiology. Ane Books, India, New Delhi.
10. Noggle, G.R. and Fritz, G.J. 2010. Introductory Plant Physiology. PHI learning, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Core Paper 11
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY
UNIT - I
Ecosystems – terrestrial ecosystems – forest, aquatic ecosystems – fresh water, marine, estuaries and mangroves with reference to trophic structures – energy flow. A brief account of major ecosystems of India. Habitat and niches – Types. Succession – causes, patterns of succession -Xeroseres and Hydroseres.
UNIT - II
Environmental resources – Natural resources - Forest resources with special reference to India and Tamil Nadu. Land Resources – Water and Wild life, Major biomes of the world.
Energy resources – renewable and non-renewable energy sources. Biofuel Plants- cultivation and utilization. Resource management – perspective planning, sustainable development of bioresources.
UNIT - III
Environmental issues – Pollution- land, water and air- causes- potential hazards – remedial measures. Recycling of solid and liquid wastes – waste reuse. Bioremediation – Waste land reclamation –Ecological impact of pollution – Land degradation, soil erosion, deforestation, causes and effects of urbanization – Value assessment.
Environmental management – Systems approach and modelling - Remote sensing techniques in assessment and management of environment, Environmental Education.
UNIT - IV
Biodiversity Concepts - Levels of Biodiversity (genetic, species and ecosystem biodiversity), Concept of species richness, abundance, species turn over, species area relationship - Methods of determination of species diversity. Endemic diversity- Concepts of hotspots, Distribution of hotspots in India. Threatening and extinction of Biodiversity- Fundamental causes – Habitat loss, overexploitation, introduction of exotics, diseases, fragmentation, pollution, industrialization, urbanization, deforestation and climate change. Common threatened taxa of India- Red data book.
281
UNIT - V
Conservation of Biodiversity – In-situ conservation – Protected areas, National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves - Ex- situ conservation – Botanical garden, Cryopreservation, Field gene bank, Seed bank, Pollen bank, Tissue culture and In-vitro repositories. Social approaches of conservation - Sacred groves.
Role of organizations in Biodiversity management - IUCN, NBPGR, BSI, ICAR, DBT, WWF and FAO. Biodiversity Awareness Programmes
Practicals
1. Determination of species diversity index, frequency ( Raunkaier‘s frequency diagram), dominance and density in a given area- Quadrat, Transect Methods.
2. Estimation of hardness of water 3. Estimation of carbonate and bicarbonate content of water and effluent 4. Analysis of COD and turbidity of water samples 5. Estimation of organic matter content of soil samples.
Study of the following
I. Interpretations 1. World map showing hotspots 2. India map showing hotspots 3. India map showing Biosphere Reserves
II. Endangered plants (photos) III. Scientific visits
1. Visit to any nearby place to observe in- situ conservation of Biodiversity – Biosphere Reserves, National parks, Sanctuaries, Wet lands, Corals and Mangroves.
2. BSI Head quarters or one of its regional circles. 3. CSIR Laboratory/ ICAR Research Institute. 4. A recognized Botanical Garden.
Reference Books
1. V.K.Prabhakar.1999.Encylopaedia of Biodiversity. Vol 1, 2 and 3. Ammol Publications Pvt.Ltd., 4374/4B Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi – 110 002.
2. Agarwal, K. C. 2001. Fundamentals of Environmental Biology. S.Chand & Co., New Delhi.
3. Dash, M. C. 2001. Fundamentals of Ecology (2nd Edition). TATA McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi.
4. Dr.D.Clarson.2002. Soil and Water. Agriclinics & Research Centre, Poovanthuruthu, Kottayam, India.
5. Dash, M. C. 2004. Fundamentals of Ecology, TATA McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 6. Groombridge, B. 1991. Global Biodiversity, Chapman and Hall, London. 7. Joshi, P. C. and Namita Joshi. 2004. Biodiversity and conservation, APH Publishing
Company, New Delhi.
282
8. Krishnamoorthy, K. V. 2004. An Advanced Text Book of Biodiversity. Oxford & IBH,
New Delhi. 9. Odum, E. P. and Gay W. Barrelt. 2004. Fundamentals of Ecology - 15th Editions,
Thomsons Asia Pvt. Ltd. 10. J. L. Chapman and M. J. Reiss. 1995/2005, Ecology, Principles and Applications,
Cambridge University Press, UK. 11. Vijay Kulkarni and T. V. Ramachandra.2006. Environmental Management. Capital
Publishing Company, New Delhi. 12. R. Nagarajan, 2006. Water- Conservation, Use and Management for Semi-Arid
Region, Capital Publishing Company, New Delhi. 13. T.V. Ramachandra, 2008. Environmental Education for Ecosystem Conservation.
Capital Publishing Company, New Delhi. 14. Stanley E. Manahan, 2011. Environmental Science and Technology. CRC Press,
Taylor and Francis Group London, New York.
Core Paper 12
APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT - I
Algal biotechnology - Algal cultures and their utility - sources of algal culture, algal culture technique - culture collections. Mass cultivation of microalgae - as source of biofertilizer, protein and feed. Role of algae in environmental health - sewage treatment - treating industrial effluents - soil reclamation. Algae as indicators of pollution - water quality and pollution assessment.
UNIT - II
Fermentation technology – Fermentor – Types, substrates for fermentation, methods of fermentation, product recovery with special reference to Glutamic acid, Citric acid and Penicillin. Enzyme technology – large scale production of fungal enzymes – extraction and purification methods involved – application of fungal enzymes in different industries. Biofuels – ethanol, biogas and hydrogen – production and uses. Biofuels from algae.
UNIT - III
Environmental biotechnology - Biomonitoring – criteria, bioassays, role of cell biology and molecular biology in environmental monitoring, Biosensors and Biochips. Biological waste treatment and reuses of wastes. Biomining - methodology and advantages. Bioremediation of Xenobiotic pollutants, contaminated soils and waste lands, removal of metals from water. Biodegradable plastics.
UNIT - IV
Genetic engineering - increased crop productivity by manipulation of photosynthesis and nitrogen fixation. Genetic engineering for biotic stress tolerance - Transgenic plants – resistance for insects, fungi, bacteria, virus and herbicides –
283
Molecular farming. Genetic engineering for abiotic stress – drought, flood, salt and temperature. Molecular markers and their applications - marker assisted selection of qualitative and quantitative traits.
UNIT - V
Biotechnology and healthcare - Gene therapy - types, methods and applications. Production of antibodies, vaccines, edible vaccines, monoclonal antibodies – applications.
Nanobiotechnology – scope and applications – Nanomaterials - nanoparticles – nanotubes. Synthesis of nanoparticles - RF plasma, Chemical methods, Thermolysis, and Pulsed laser methods. Nanobiosensors - nanocrystals in biological detection. Nanomedicines - Applications.
Practicals
1. SCP production – Spirulina. 2. Isolation of Cyanobacteria from soil. 3. Mass cultivation of algae. 4. Isolation of industrially important microorganisms. 5. Production of glutamic acid and citric acid. 6. Production of biofuels from algae.
Reference Books 1. Colin Ratledge and Bjorn Kristiansen. 2001. Basic Biotechnology, Cambridge
University Press. 2. H.K. Das. 2005. Text book of Biotechnology. Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd.,
Delhi. 3. John E. Smith. 2000. Biotechnology II Ed., Cambridge University Press. 4. Creuger, W. and Creuger, A. 2000. Biotechnology – Text book of Industrial
Microbiology. Panima Publishing Corporation, New Delhi. 5. Stanbury, P.F. and Whitaker, A. 1997. Principles of Fermentation technology.
Pergamon, Press. 6. R.C. Dubey, 2004. A text book of Biotechnology. S. Chand and Comp. Ram
Nagar, New Delhi.
284
Elective 3
MUSHROOM CULTIVATION
UNIT - I
Introduction- history – Mushrooms - morphology, distribution and types. Identification of edible and poisonous mushrooms - Nutritive values and Medicinal values.
UNIT - II
Life cycle study of the species – Pleurotus, Agaricus, Volvariella, Calocybe and Lentinus- breeding and genetic improvements of mushroom strains.
UNIT - III
Cultivation- Conditions for tropical countries, isolation, spawn production, growth media, spawn running and harvesting. Factors affecting cultivation of mushrooms.
UNIT - IV
Diseases and post-harvest technology - Insect pests, nematodes, mites, viruses, fungal competitors and other important diseases, Post-harvest technology-harvesting, freeze drying, blanching, steeping, canning, pickling and packaging.
UNIT - V
Short term and long term storage, marketing - recipes from mushrooms. Common Indian mushrooms- distribution, production level, economic return, foreign exchange from mushroom cultivation countries and International trade. Prospects and scope of mushroom cultivation in small scale Industries.
NOTE
Training in Mushroom cultivation can be given. Nutritional value can be determined. Visit to places of mushroom cultivation can be arranged.
285
Reference Books
1. Dey, S. C. 2000. Mushroom growing, Agrobios Jodhpur. 2. Handbook of Mushroom cultivation, 1999. TNAU publication 3. Nita Bahl. 2002. Handbook on Mushroom. Vijay Primlani for Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 4. Pathak, V. N, N. Yadav and M. Gaur. 2000. Mushroom Production and
Processing Technology, Agrobios (India), Jodhpur. 5. Sharma, O. P. 1989. Text Book of Fungi. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi. 6. Sharma, V. P. 2006. Diseases and Pests of Mushrooms. IBH Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi. 7. Singh. 2005. Modern Mushroom Cultivation, International Book Distributors,
Dehradun. 8. Suman. 2005. Mushroom Cultivation- Processing and Uses. IBH Publishers and
Distributors, New Delhi.
Practical Examination Model Question Paper
(2013-2014)
Semester IV
Practical Paper III - Biochemistry, Biophysics and Research Methodology
Time : 3 hrs Maximum Marks : 60
1. Take a lot from the given set of experiments, write the procedure and ask for the requirements. Do the experiment and draw the attention of the examiner at each critical step. Tabulate the data and interpret the results.
1×20=20 2. Identify the given substance from the sample provided and interpret your
observation 1×10=10
3. Calculate the Standard Deviation and Standard Error for the given sample.
1×15=15
4. Work out the given problem 1×10=10
5. Submission Record 5
Key
1. Major experiment from Biochemistry. 2. Qualitative tests for sugars, lipids, amino acid and proteins. 3. Leaves / Pods - Samples 4. Student ‗t‘ test/Chi- square test. 5. Submission
Record
286
Scheme of valuation
1 Procedure 4
Doing the experiment 5
Tabulation 3
Calculation 3
Result 2
Interpretation 3
2 Procedure 2
Doing the experiment 3
Result 2
Interpretation 3
3 Sample measurements and frequency distribution 4
Standard Deviation 6
Standard Error 3
Interpretation 2
4 Solving the problem 7
Interpretation 3
Submission
Record 5
Practical Paper IV - Plant Physiology, Plant Biotechnology, Environmental
Biology and Applied Biotechnology Time: 3 hrs Maximum marks: 60
1. Take a lot from the set of experiments, write the procedure and do the experiment. Tabulate the data and interpret the results.
1×15=15 2. Take a lot, write the procedure, do the experiment, tabulate the data and
interpret your observation. 1×15=15
3. Identify, draw diagrams and write notes of interest on A, B & C 3×5=15
4. Submission Field trip report 5 Report of the visit to a Research Center/ Institution related to Biotechnology 5 Record 5
Key 1. Any one experiment from Plant Physiology 2. Quadrat – Species Diversity Index 3. Anyone experiment from Environmental Biology 4. Biotechnology spotters – Models/ Photographs
287
Scheme of Valuation
1. Procedure 3
Doing the experiment 4
Tabulation 2
Calculation 2
Result 2
Interpretation 2
2 Procedure 3
Doing the experiment/construction 5
Tabulation 2
Calculation 2
Result 2
Interpretation 1
3 A Identification 1 Diagram 2 Notes 2
B Identification 1 Diagram 2 Notes 2
C Identification 1 Diagram 2 Notes 2
Submission
Field trip Report 5
Report of the visit to a Research Center/ Institution related to 5 Biotechnology
Record 5
M. Sc. DEGREE EXAMINATION
Third Semester Botany
Core Paper 7 BIOCHEMISTRYAND BIOPHYSICS
(For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards) Time: Three hours
Maximum :75 PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s). 1. Agar is a
(a) Monosaccharide (b) Disaccharide (c) Polysaccharide (d)None
2. The Glycosidic linkage found in sucrose (a)1, 4 Glycosidic linkage (b) 1, 6 Glycosidic linkage (c)1,2 Glycosidic linkage (d)None
288
3. Oxytoxin is a
(a) Carbohydrate (b) Lipid (c) Peptide (d) None
4. The sulphur containing amino acid (a) Glycine (b) Leucine (c)Tyrosine (d) Methionine
5. Watson and Crick model of DNA was discovered in the year (a) 1953 (b) 1879 (c) 1570 (d) 1320
6. The alkaloid which is present in Cathranthus roseus is (a) Quinine (b) Colchicine (c) Vincristine (d) Morphine
7. IUB system is related to (a) Proteins (b) Enzymes
(c) Lipids (d) Nucleic acid 8. Alcohol dehydrogenase is a type of
(a)Hydrolase (b) Oxidoreductase (c) Ligase (d) Lyase
9. Luciferase Protein and Luciferin are associated with (a) Phosphorescance (b)Fluorescence
(c)Bioluminescence (d) Chemiluminescence 10. High energy compound
(a) AMP (b) ATP (c) CMP (d) UMP
PART B - (5x5=25 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b) Draw diagrams wherever necessary
11. (a) Describe the ring structure of Glucose
(or) (b). Describe the structure and properties of Sucrose
12. (a) Give an account on sulphur containing amino acids. (or)
(b). Comment on the biologically important peptides Oxytoxin and Glutathione. 13. (a).Describe the Watson and Crick Model of DNA.`
(or) (b) Give an account on phospholipids.
14. (a) What is activation energy? Write an account on it? (or)
(b)Describe the mechanism of enzyme action. 15. (a) Describe the wave nature of light
(or) (b) Describe the first law of thermodynamics.
289
PART C - (5x8=40 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary
16. (a) What is Glycosidic linkage? Describe the different linkages found in Carbohydrates?
(or) (b) Give an account on polysaccharides.
17. (a)Describe the structure of amino acids. (or)
(b)Give an account on the purification of proteins. 18. (a) Describe the biosynthesis of RNA.
(or) (b)Give an account on Alkaloids.
19. (a) Describe in detail the activation energy changes during enzyme catalyzed reations.
(or) (b)What are enzyme inhibitors. Give a detailed account with suitable diagrams.
20. (a) Describe the different components of Electromagnetic radiation. (or)
(b) Give an account on the High energy compounds used in biology
290
M. Sc. DEGREE EXAMINATION Third Semester
Botany Core Paper 8
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY (For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards)
Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks
PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s)
1. The biological researches carried out in colleges/departments (a) Applied research (b) Basic research (c) R & D programmes (d) All three
2. Citation-sequence system of reference is commonly used in (a) Research articles (b) Thesis (c) Project reports (d) None
3. The research report is a document prepared at the _____________ of a research work
(a) Beginning (b) Middle (c) End (d) All three
4. Electronic books and journals are obtained from (a) Computer (b) Library (c) Internet (d) Public library
5. The statistical method applied for the analysis of the effect of several factors on a population
(a) ANOVA (b) Student ‗t‘ test (c) ‗f‘ test (d) pairwise analysis
6. The software used in Biostatistics (a) SPSS (b) MS Word (c) MS Excel (d) ENTREZ
7. The chromatography using ligands (a) Thin layer chromatography (b) Ion exchange
Chromatography (c) Affinity chromatography (d) None
8. The most advanced instrument used for quantitative estimation (a) Spectrophotometer (b) Colorimeter (c) UV spectrophotometer (d) pH meter
9. The images of experimental samples can be obtained easily using (a) Radioisotope (b) Camera lucida (c) Microscope (d) Microphotography
10. The electron microscope used to study the superficial structures of prokaryotes and eukaryotes is
(a) SEM (b) STM (c) TEM (d) All three
291
PART B - (5x5=25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 11. (a) Distinguish between index card and reference card.
(or) (b) What is bibliography? How will you present this for a journal article?
12. (a) Give a brief account on the construction of Tables. (or)
(b) Write down the significance of e-journal and e-books. 13. (a) Enumerate the role of ANOVA in biostatistical research.
(or) (b) Define regression analysis. Write down the steps of calculation and add a note on
its merits and demerits
14. (a) What are the uses and applications of PCR in the field of Biology (or)
(b)List out the principles of high speed refrigerated centrifuge. 15.(a) Give the applications of microphotography in biological research.
(or) (b) Write down the principle and uses of TEM.
PART C - (5 x 8= 40 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 16. (a) Describe the different methods of Literature citation in research.
(or) (b) Write an essay on Research types.
17. (a) Describe the components of a research report. (or)
(b) How will you select a topic for your research? Explain the role of guide in your research activities.
18. (a) Explain the different methods of central tendency measures used in Biology (or)
(b) What is correlation coefficient? Explain the steps. 19 (a) Describe the working principle of Thin layer chromatography and compare it with
Affinity chromatography (or)
(b) Give an account on the principles and applications of Atomic absorption spectrophotometer.
20 (a) Describe the radioisotope technique used in Scintillation Counter and write its role in biological research.
(or) (b) Write a detailed account on the principle and uses of Phase contrast and
Fluororescence microscopy.
292
M. Sc. DEGREE EXAMINATION Third Semester
Botany
Core Paper 9
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY (For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards)
Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks
PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s)
1. The enzyme used to synthesis DNA copy from the mRNA template is a)Exonuclease b)DNA Polymerase c)Endonuclease d)Reverse transcriptase
2. Cosmid is a a)Caulimovirus b)Hybrid DNA of plasmid and λ phage c)Ti plasmid d)Ri plasmids
3. The bacterium popular among molecular geneticists for plant transformation a)Bacillus cereus b)Agrobacterium tumefaciens c)E.coli d)Pseudomonas fluorescens
4. The gene involved in the detection of phenolic compounds released by wounded plants
a)Vir A b)Vir G c)Vir D2 d)Vir E2
5. The system proved useful for monitoring transient gene expression a)Transgenic b)Consensus sequences c)CAT d)Sigma factor
6. The appropriate expression of genes is possible by the presence of a)Enhancers b)Terminators
c)Promoters d) (b) & (c) 7. Gynogenic haploids were first developed by
a)Boyer and Cohen b)Broglie c)San Noem d)Shull
8. An ideal method for long term conservation of cell cultures a)Low oxygen storage b)Low-pressure storage c) (a)&(b) d)cryopreservation
9. The technique used for the transfer of desired cytoplasm a)Transformation b)Cybridization c)Transfection d)Hybridization
10. The compounds that inhibit the growth of tissues during micropropagation a)Indole pyruvic acids b)Phenolics c)Napthalene Acetic Acid d)2,4-D
293
PART B - (5x5=25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 11. a)List the various approaches for obtaining the desired DNA segment for cloning.
(or) b)Explain the mode of action of DNA ligases and their role in gene cloning.
12. a)Explain the role of virulence genes. (or)
b)Explain the features of Ri plasmids 13. a)Explain CAT system of promoter sequence.
(or) b)Explain the role of marker genes in plant transformation
14. a)Explain somatic embryogenesis in Carrot (or)
b)Enumerate the importance of cryopreservation in plant tissue culture. 15. a)Write an account on the importance of cybrids in crop improvement.
(or) b)Write brief note on intellectual property protection
PART C - (5 x 8= 40 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b) Draw diagrams wherever necessary
16. a) Write an essay on the restriction enzymes as a tools for scientific applications (or)
b) ‗Alkaline phosphatase has become a useful tool in Molecular Biology‘ – Discuss. 17. a) “Agrobacterium is identified as the natural genetic engineer”-Discuss.
(or) b) Explain the various techniques by which DNA uptake of a plant cell is achieved.
18. a) Describe the selection of recombinants by DNA probe method (or)
b) Describe the importance of promoters for the programmed expression of alien genes.
19. a) ‗Somaclonal variation has proved an alternative tool to plant breeding‘- Discuss. (or)
b) Describe the method of haploid production and its application for crop improvements.
20. a) Describe the various approaches for micropropagation and discuss their advantages.
(or) b) Describe the role of protoplast technology in crop improvement.
294
M. Sc. DEGREE EXAMINATION Fourth Semester
Botany
Core Paper 10
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY (For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards)
Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s) 1. Water potential is equal to the sum of the
(a) osmotic potential plus pressure potential (b) osmotic potential plus pressure potential plus matrix potential. (c) pressure potential plus matrix potential (d) osmotic potential plus matrix potential.
2. The loss of water in the form of vapour from the living tissues in aerial parts of the plant
(a) Transpiration (b) Guttation (c) Absorption (d) Respiration
3. Light reaction accomplishes (a) Photolysis of water (b) Evolution of oxygen (c) Production of energy rich compounds (d) All three
4. CAM pathway occurs in the members of (a) Capparidaceae (b) Crassulaceae (c) Cucurbitaceae (d) Cruciferae
5. TCA cycle is (a) C3 cycle (b) C4 cycle (c) Citric acid cycle (d) All three
6. Respiration takes place in the presence of light (a) Aerobic respiration (b) Anaerobic respiration (c) Photorespiration (d) None
7. Phosphons are (a) Growth inhibitors (b) Growth regulators (c) Growth stimulators (d) None
8. The effect of light on flowering is due to (a) Differentiation (b) Dormancy (c) Phytochrome (d) Anthocyanin
9. Salinity stress accumulates in plants (a) Excess of water (b) Proline (c) Excess of salt (d) Glutamic acid
10. HSP is (a)Heavy stressed protein (b)Heat small protein (c) Heat shock protein (d) Heat stressed product
295
PART B - (5x5=25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 11. (a) Describe the active absorption of water in plants.
(or) (b). Give an account on trace elements.
12 (a) What is photophosphorylation? Describe its two types. (or)
(b) Describe the CAM pathway. 13. (a) Describe the TCA cycle.
(or) (b) Write an account on beta oxidation.
14 (a) Describe the physiological role of Morphactins. (or)
(b) Describe the structure and properties of phytochrome. 15 (a) Give an account on radiation stress.
(or) (b) What are heat stock proteins? Write an account on it.
PART C - (5 x 8= 40 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b) Draw diagrams wherever necessary
16. (a) How are organic solutes translocated in plants? Describe in detail. (or)
(b) Describe the different theories on the mechanism of stomatal movement. 17 (a) Give an account on photosynthetic pigments
(or) (b) Describe the C4 cycle. Mention its significance.
18 (a) What is photorespiration? Describe it in detail (or)
(b) Describe the process of nitrogen fixation in plants. 19 (a) Describe the mechanism of action of Auxin.
(or) (b) Describe the phenomenon of photoperiodism in plants.
20 (a) Elucidate salinity stress. (or)
(b) Describe the morphological, physiological and biochemical changes associated with water stress.
296
M. Sc. DEGREE EXAMINATION Fourth Semester
Botany Core Paper 11
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY (For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards)
Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks
PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s)
1. Total niche an organism could occupy in competition and predation by other species is known as
(a) Fundamental niche (b) Habitat niche (c) Hypervolume niche (d) None
2. Natural change in the structure and species composition of a community is called (a) Amensalism (b) Succession (b) Commensalism (d) Community
3. Major regional community extending over a large area is called (a) Ecosystem (b) Sanctuary (c) CPD (d) Biomass
4. Energy obtained from Jatropa glandulosa is (a) Green fuel (b) Biofuel (c) (a) & (b) (d) Biogas
5. Yellow colour of the soil is due to (a) Calcium (b) Gypsum (c) Hydration of ferric oxide (d) Ozone
6. Air pollutants are (a) CO (b) CO2
(c) SO2 (d) All three 7. Main factor for biodiversity depletion
(a) Deforestation (b) Climate change (c) Fire (d) Flood
8. A book with Green and Pink pages (a) Green Data Book (b) Pink Data Book (c) Red data book (d) Blue Data Book
9. A Social Approach for biodiversity conservation is (a) National Park (b) Sacred grooves (c) Sanctuary (d) All three
10. Biodiversity conservation is the duty of (a) Every individual (b) The Government (c) The Society (d) A collective responsibility of above three
297
PART B - (5 x 5= 25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary
11. (a) What is an ecosystem? What are the different driving variables of an ecosystem
(or)
(b). Discuss the theories of climax formation.
12. (a) What are biofuel plants? Give any four examples.
(or)
(b)Enumerate the forest resources of TamilNadu. Add a note on their significance.
13. (a) Describe the importance of remote sensing technique in environment
assessment and management.
(or)
(b) Write briefly about environmental awareness and education.
14. (a) How do you determine species diversity?
(or)
(b) Describe briefly the major hotspots of India.
15. (a) Give a brief account on biosphere reserves.
(or)
(b)Explain briefly tissue culture and biotechnological strategies in ex –situ
conservation.
PART C - (5 x 8= 40 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 16. (a) Explain the thermodynamic laws and discuss the energy flow through an ecosystem with suitable flow diagram.
(or) (b). Give a brief account on major ecosystems of India.
17. (a) What are renewable energy resources? Give a detailed account on the common renewable energy resources and their importance in the present day context.
(or) (b) Give a detailed account on the major biomes of the world.
18. (a) What is bioremediation? Describe it in waste land reclamation. (or)
(b)What are the major environmental issues due to pollution. 19. (a) Discuss the role of species area relationship with biodiversity.
(or) (b)Explain the different types and methods of measurements of genetic diversity.
20. (a) Write an essay on in-situ conservation strategies of biodiversity. (or)
(b) Explain the activities of (i) NBPGR (ii) BSI (iii) DBT (iv) FAO
298
Core Paper 12 APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY
(For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards) Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks
PART A-(10 x 1= 10 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s)
1. The alga used for biological treatment of waste water (a) Chlamydomonas (b) Chlorella (c)Nostoc (d) Volvox
2. Algal culture collection centres registered with the World Federation (a) CCAP (b) UTEX (c) ATCC (d) All three
3. Conversion of biomass into methane by microbes is discovered by (a) Volfa (b) Romesser (c) Gaffron (d) Robin
4. The bioreactor designed for solid substrate fermentation (a)Tower reactor (b) Forced aeration reactor (c) Drum reactor (d) All three
5. _____________ is a Biosensor (a) Escherichia coli (b) Proteus morganii (c) Lactobacillus arabinosus (d) All three
6. The first genetically engineered microorganism used in bioremediation (a) Pseudomonas cepacia (b) Pseudomonas oleovorans (c) Pseudomonas diminesta (d) Pseudomonas putida
7. The indicator of salt stress (a) Leucine (b) Proline (c) Aspartic acid (d) Glutamic acid
8. A true representation of genetic make up at DNA level could be provided by (a) Protein analysis (b) molecular markers (c) Genome analysis (d) multiple genes.
9. Correction of human genetic defects is achieved by (a) Genetic engineering (b) Gene transfer (c) Gene therapy (d) None
10. The transgenic plant having edible vaccines for Hepatitis B is (a) Potato (b) Alfalfa (c) Tomato (d) Maize
PART B - (5x5= 25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 11. (a) Write short note on sources of algal cultures
(or) (b) Write brief account on the culture collection centres in India.
12. (a) ―Product recovery of Penicillin‖ – Explain. (or)
(b) Illustrate the different methods of fermentation. 13. (a) Write short notes on Biochips and its application.
(or) (b) Explain the methodology and advantages in Biomining.
299
14. (a) List the various strategies in developing resistance to bacterial and fungal diseases.
(or) (b)Write the role of genetic engineering in manipulation of photosynthesis
15. (a) Outline the production of edible vaccines (or)
(b) Enumerate the applications of monoclonal antibodies.
PART C - (5x8= 40 marks)
Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b) Draw diagrams wherever necessary
16. (a) Write a detailed account on the role of algae in sewage treatment. (or)
(b) ―Algae as biological indicators of water pollution – Discuss. 17. (a) Write an essay on extraction and purification methods involved in large scale
production of fungal enzyme. (or)
(b) Write an essay on biofuels and how biofuels are obtained from algae. 18. (a) Discuss the role of cell biology and molecular biology in environmental monitoring.
(or) (b) ―Biotechnology is useful in the treatment of industrial wastes‖ –Discuss.
19. (a) Write an essay on the application of genetic engineering principles in crop productivity.
(or) (b) Write an account on marker assisted selection of qualitative and quantitative
traits. 20. (a)Give an account on the applications of Nanotechnology in human health care.
(or) (b) Give an account on the types, methods and applications of gene therapy.
300
Elective 3 MUSHROOM CULTIVATION
(For those who joined in June, 2012 and afterwards)
Time: Three hours Maximum :75 marks
PART A - (10 x 1= 10 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing the correct answer(s)
1. One of the following is not an edible mushroom (a) Agaricus bisporous (b) Volvariella volvacea (c) Pleurotus ostreatus (d) Clitocybe illudens
2. Morchella esculenta is a (a) Pore fungal mushroom (b) Cup fungi (c) Tooth fungal mushroom (d) Club fungi
3. Which of the following is straw mushroom? (a) Volvariella (b) Calocybe (c) Pleurotus (d) Lentinus
4. The temperature favouring the mycelial growth of Pleurotus sajor-caju is (a) 16 ± 1o C (b) 25 ± 1o C (c) 35 ± 1o C (d) - 6 ± 1o C
5. Natural or spontaneous spawn is known as (a) Flake spawn (b) Grain spawn (c) Virgin spawn (d) Pure culture spawn
6. Lamberts‘ medium is used for (a) Raising pure culture of mushroom (b) Improvement of mushroom (c) Isolation of mushroom (d) Harvesting of mushroom
7. Rose comb disease is a (a) Bacterial disease (b) Fungal disease (c) Viral disease (d) Physiological disease
8. Storage of mushrooms in 12% brine solution is called (a) Blanching (b) Steeping (c) Canning (d) Freeze drying
9. In India _________ ranks first in mushroom production (a) Himachal Pradesh (b) TamilNadu (c) Punjab (d) Uttar Pradesh
10. Leading mushroom importer in the world is (a) China (b) USA (c) India (d) France
PART B - (5 x 5= 25 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary
11. (a) Describe the general morphology of mushroom.
(or) (b) Give a brief account on the distribution of mushroom
12. (a) Write about the distinguishing characteristics of Lentinus (or)
(b) Draw and label the life cycle of Volvariella. 13. (a) Write about the process of spawn running.
301
(or) (b) Describe the harvesting of mushrooms.
14. (a) Write about the insect pests infecting mushrooms. (or)
(b) Give a brief account on mushroom packaging. 15. (a) Give an account of Common Indian Mushrooms.
(or) (b) Write about any two marketing recipes of mushrooms.
PART C - (5x8= 40 marks) Answer ALL questions choosing either (a) or (b)
Draw diagrams wherever necessary 16. (a) Write an essay on edible and poisonous mushrooms.
(or) (b) Give an account of nutritive and medicinal values of mushrooms.
17. (a) Explain the life cycle of Pleurotus. (or)
(b) Describe the breeding and genetic improvements of mushroom strains. 18. (a) Give a detailed account of spawn production.
(or) (b) Describe the various factors affecting the mushroom cultivation.
19. (a) Describe the various bacterial diseases affecting the mushrooms. Add a note on their control measures.
(or) (b) Describe harvesting and post harvesting technology.
20. (a) Write an essay on the production of mushrooms. (or)
(b) Write about the prospects and scope of mushroom cultivation in small scale industry.
302
APPENDIX - AZ97
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc. Computer Science
SECOND YEAR SYLLABUS
(CBCS-For Affiliated Colleges)
(For those who joined the course from the Academic Year)
Scheme of Examinations
I Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects
Mathematical Foundation for Computer 5 4 Science
5 4 Design and Analysis of Algorithm
Advanced Java Programming
Elective-1(Choose any ONE)
Distributed Operating System
Advanced Computer Network
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Lab
5 4
5 5
5 4
5 4 Algorithm Lab Using C Language
Advanced Java Lab
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
303
II Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects
Internet Programming 5 4
Object Oriented Systems Development 5 4
Advanced Data Base Management System 5 4
Elective-2(Choose any ONE) 5 5
Data Mining
Network Security and Cryptography
Embedded System
Lab
Internet Programming 5 4
Open Source Lab(PHP & MY SQL) 5 4
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
III Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects
Digital Image Processing 5 4
Artificial Neural Networks 5 4
Mobile Computing 5 4
Elective-2(Choose any ONE) 5 5
Multimedia Systems
Cloud Computing
Software Testing
Lab
Image Processing Lab 5 4
Software Development Lab-Mini Project 5 4
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
304
IV Semester
Components Hours Credits
Major Project
15
Total ( 1 Course) 15
Each theory course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=75:25)
Each practical course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=60:40)
Internal Assessment
For Theory Course
The Average of the best two tests from three compulsory Tests-15 Marks
Assignment -4 Marks
Seminar -6 Marks
Total -25 Marks
For Practical Course
Completion of Program List within the stipulated time - 20 Marks
Record - 10 Marks
Model Test - 10 Marks
Total - 40 Marks
Semester III(Core Paper)
Digital Image Processing
Unit-I
Introduction :-Fundamentals-The MATLAB Desktop-Using Mat lab Editor /Debugger-
getting help-saving and Retrieving work session data-Digital Image Representation-
Image I/O and Display –Classes and Image Types-M-Function Programming.
305
Intensity Transformation and Spatial Filtering: - Background-Intensity transformation-
histogram Processing and function Plotting-Spatial filtering-Image processing toolbox
standard spatial filters.
Unit-II
Filtering in Frequency Domain:-The 2-D Discrete Fourier transform-Computing and
Visualizing the 2-D DFT in MATLAB – Filtering in the Frequency domain- Obtaining
frequency domain filters from spatial filters- Generating filters directly in the frequency
domain-sharpening frequency domain filters.
Image Restoration and Reconstruction:- A model of the image degradation / restoration
process- noise models- Restoration in the presence of noise only-Spatial filtering-
periodic noise reduction by frequency domain filtering- Modelling in degradation
function-Direct inverse filtering –wiener filtering- Constrained least squares filtering –
Iterative non-linear restoration using the lucy - Richardson algorithm- Blind
deconvolution - Geometric transformation and image registration.
Unit-III
Color image processing:- Colour image representation in matlab-converting to other
color spaces-The basics of color image processing-Color transformation-spatial filtering
of colour images-Working directly in a RGB vector space
Wavelets:-Background- The fast wavelet transform-working with wavelet decomposition
structures-the inverse wavelet transform-wavelets in image processing.
UNIT -IV
Image compression:-Background-coding redundancy-spatial redundancy-irrelevant
information-jpeg compression
Morphological image processor:-preliminaries-dialation and erosion-combining dialation
and erosion-labelling connected components –morphological reconstruction-gray scale
morphology
306
UNIT-V
Image segmentation:- Image segmentation-point, line and edge detection-Line detection
using the hough transform-thresholding-region-based segmentation using the
watershed transform
Representation and description:-Background-Representation-Boundary descriptors-
regional descriptors using principal components for descriptors.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, Steven L.Eddins ,Image Processing Using MATLAB,Second edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,New Delhi.
2.Anil.K.Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice-Hall, 1989.
3.Chanda & Majumdar, Digital Image Processing and Analysis, Prentice Hall ,3rd Edition
4.S.Sridhar, Digital Image Processing,Oxford University Press 2011
III Semester (Core Paper)
Artificial Neural Networks
UNIT - I
Brain Style Computing:Origins and Issues-Lessons from Neuroscience-Artificial
Neurons,Neural Networks and Architectures-Geomentry of Binary Threshold Neurons and
their Networks-
UNIT - II
Supervised Learning I:Perceptrons and LMS Supervised Learning II:Back propagation and
Beyond
UNIT - III
Neural Networks:A Statistical Pattern Recognition Perspective Focusing on
Generalization:Support Vector Machines and Radial Basis Function Networks
UNIT - IV
Dynamical Systems Review-Attractor Neural Networks
UNIT - V
Adaptive Resonance Theory- Towards the Self Organizing Feature Map.
307
TEXT BOOK:
Satish Kumar, Neural Networks-A Classical Approach, Tata McGraw Hill,2007
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.James A.Freeman and David M.Slapura, Neural Network Algorithms,Application
Programming Techniques,Addition Wesley Publishing Company 1991
2.S.N.Sivanandam,S,Sumathi and S.N.Deepa, Introduction to Neural Networks using Mat
Lab 2006.
III Semester (Core Paper)
Mobile Computing
UNIT - I
Introduction: Advantages of Digital Information - Introduction to Telephone Systems –
Mobile communication: Need for Mobile Communication – Requirements of Mobile
Communication – History of Mobile Communication- Introduction to Cellular Mobile
Communication
UNIT - II
Mobile Communication Standards – Mobility Management – Frequency Management –
Cordless Mobile Communication Systems- Mobile Computing: History of data networks –
Classification of Mobile data networks - CDPD System
UNIT - III
Satellites in Mobile Communication: Satellite classification – Global Satellite Communication
– Changeover from one satellite to other – Global Mobile Communication – Interferences in
Cellular Mobile Communication- Important Parameters of Mobile Communication System
UNIT - IV
Mobile Internet: Working of Mobile IP – Wireless Network Security – Wireless Local Loop
Architecture: Components in WLL – Problems in WLL – Modern Wireless Local Loop –
Local Multipoint Distribution Service – Wireless Application Protocol-WCDMA Technology
and Fibre Optic Microcellular Mobile Communication – Ad hoc Network and Bluetooth
technology – Intelligent Mobile Communication system – Fourth Generation Mobile
Communication systems.
308
UNIT - V
Mobile Application Languages-XML and JAVA:Mobile Application Development- XML -
JAVA-Java 2 Micro Editions-Java Card Mobile Application Development Platforms:OS-
Windows Mobile and CE-Windows Phone 7-Android-Symbian
TEXT BOOK:
1.T.G. Palanivelu, R. Nakkeeran, Wireless and Mobile Communication, PHI Learning
Private Limited.2009
2.Raj Kamal, Mobile Computing,Second Edition,Oxford University Press-2012
REFERENCE BOOK:
1.Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Second Edition, Pearson Education. 2007
2. William Stallings ,Wireless Communication and Networks -Pearson Education Asia-2002
III SEMESTER (ELECTIVE PAPER)
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
Unit-I
Defining the scope of multimedia, Hypertext and Collaborative research, Multimedia and
personalised computing, Multimedia on the map, Emerging applications, The challenges
The convergence of computers, Communications, and entertainment products The
technology trends, Multimedia appliances, Hybrid Devices, Designers perspective,
industry perspective of the future, Key challenges ahead, Technical, regulatory, Social
Architectures and issues for Distributed Multimedia systems Distributed Multimedia
systems, Synchronization, and QOS Architecture, The role of Standards, A frame work
for Multimedia systems
Unit-II
Digital Audio Representation and processing: Uses of Audio in Computer Applications,
Psychoacoustics, Digital representation of sound, transmission of digital sound, Digital
Audio signal processing, Digital music making, Speech recognition and generation,
digital audio and the computers Video Technology:Raster Scanning Principles, Sensors
for TV Cameras, Colour Fundamentals, Colour Video,Video performance
Measurements, Analog video Artifacts, video equipments, World wide television
309
standards Digital Video and Image Compression Video compression techniques,
standardization of Algorithm, The JPEG Image Compression Standard, ITU-T
Recommendations, The EPEG Motion Video Compression Standard, DVI Technology
Unit-III
Operating System Support for Continuous Media Applications: Limitation of Work
station Operating system, New OS support, Experiments Using Real Time Mach
Middleware System Services Architecture:Goals of Multimedia System services,
Multimedia system services Architecture, Media stream protocol Multimedia Devices,
Presentation Services, and the User Interface:Client control of continuous multimedia,
Device control, Temporal coordination and composition, toolkits, hyper applications
Multimedia File systems and Information Models:The case for multimedia information
systems, The file system support for continuous Media,Data models for multimedia and
Hypermedia information, Content- based Retrieval of Unstructured Data Multimedia
presentation and Authoring: Design paradigms and User interface, barriers to wide
spread use, research trends
Unit-IV
Multimedia Services over the Public Networks: Requirements, Architecture, and
protocols, Net work services, applications Multimedia Interchange Quick time Movie File
Format, QMFI, MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Encoding Expert
Group), Format Function and representation, Track model and Object model, Real Time
Interchange Multimedia conferencing Teleconferencing Systems, Requirements of
Multimedia Communications, Shared Application Architecture and embedded
Distributed objects, Multimedia Conferencing Architecture Multimedia Groupware :
Computer and Video fusion approach to open shared workspace
Unit-V
High Definition Television and desktop computing, Video versus Computing-Viewing
Conditions-Quality-HDTV,ATV,EDTV,IDTV-HDTV Standards – Standardization Issues
HDTV standards, Knowledge based Multimedia systems, Anatomy of an Intelligent
Multimedia system
310
Text Book :
John F.Koegel Buford, Multimedia Systems, Pearson Education 2012
Reference Book :
1.Tay Vaughan,Multimedia – Making it work,Fifth Edition,TMH 2003
2.Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt,Multimedia:Computing , Communication and
Application Pearson Education 2009
III SEMESTER (ELECTIVE PAPER)
CLOUD COMPUTING
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION -Cloud Computing Introduction, From, Collaboration to cloud, Working
of cloud computing, pros and cons, benefits, developing cloud computing services,
Cloud service development, discovering cloud services.
UNIT – II
CLOUD COMPUTING FOR EVERYONE -cloud computing for the family, cloud
computing for community, collaborating on schedules, collaborating on group projects
and events, cloud computing for corporation, mapping schedules managing projects,
presenting on road, Accessing Document on the road
UNIT – III
USING CLOUD SERVICES - Collaborating on calendars, Schedules and task
management, exploring on line scheduling and planning, collaborating on event
management, collaborating on contact management, collaborating on project
management, collaborating on word processing,
spreadsheets, and databases.
311
UNIT – IV
OUTSIDE THE CLOUD -evaluating web mail services, Evaluating instant messaging,
Evaluating web conference tools, creating groups on social networks, Evaluating on line
groupware, collaborating via blogs and wikis
UNIT – V
STORING AND SHARING - Understanding cloud storage, evaluating on line file
storage, exploring on line book marking services, exploring on line photo editing
applications, exploring photo sharing communities, controlling it with web based
desktops.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Michael Miller, ―Cloud Computing‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009
2.Anthony T.Velte,Toby J.Velte,Pobert Elsenpeter,‖Cloud Computing‖,TMH,2010
III SEMESTER (ELECTIVE PAPER)
SOFTWARE TESTING
Unit-I
Principles of Testing-Software Development Life Cycle Models-Phases of
Software Project-Quality,QA,QC-Testing,Verification and Validation-Process Model-Life
Cycle Models
Unit-II
Types of Testing -White box Testing -Blackbox Testing-Integration Testing
Unit-III
System and Acceptance Testing-Performance testing-Regression Testing
Unit – IV
Internationalization Testing-Adhoc Testing-Testing of Object-Oriented Systems-
Usability and Accessibility Testing
Unit-V
Test Management and Automation-Test Planning,Management,Execution and
Reporting-Software Test Automation-Test Metrics and Measurements
312
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Software Testing Principles and Practices-Srinivasan Desigan,Gopalaswamy
Ramesh-Pearson-2008
2.Foundations of Software Testing-Aditya P Mathur-Pearson-2011
Image Processing LAB
(Tools: Java/Mat Lab/VC++)
Programs should include but not limited to:
1. Read and display digital Images.
2. Image Arithmetic Operations
3. Image Logical Operations
4. Geometric transformation of Image
5. Histogram Equalization.
6. Non-linear Filtering.
7. Edge detection using Operators.
8. 2-D DFT and DCT.
9. Filtering in frequency domain.
10. Conversion between color spaces.
11. DWT of images.
12. Segmentation.
Mini Project-Software Development Lab
Students are to take up sample project development activities with the guidelines
given below:
Preparing a project - brief proposal including
• Problem Identification
• Developing a model for solving the problem
• A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Data
Flow Diagram)
313
• List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
• Cost benefit analysis
• Time line activities
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements &
standards (if any)]
A presentation including the following
• Implementation phase (Hardware / Software / both)
• Testing & Validation of the developed system
• Learning in the project
Consolidated report preparation
Semester IV
Major Project
The objective of the project is to enable the students to work in a project of latest
topic / research area / industrial applications. Each project student shall have a guide
who is a faculty member.
During this semester the students are expected to do literature survey, formulate
the problem and form a methodology of arriving at the solution of the problem. Also
during this semester, the students are expected to complete the project and submit a
full-fledged report comprising of the complete system developed along with
implementation and test results. The departmental committee shall examine the
students for 50 marks and the evaluation is based on continuous internal assessment
comprising of two reviews.
After two reviews internal 50 marks (is based on seminar (20 marks), demo (20
marks) and internal viva-voce (10 marks)) will be given by the guide. At end of the
semester, a viva-voce examination will be conducted for 150 marks.
314
APPENDIX - AZ98
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY,TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc. Software Engineering
2 Years-Four Semesters
(CBCS-Colleges)
Second Year Syllabus (With Effect From 2012-13)
I Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects Mathematical Foundation for Computer 5 4
Science 5 4 Advanced Database Management System 5 4 Object Oriented Programming Using C++ 5 5
Elective-1 Software Engineering Artificial Intelligence 5 4 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 5 4
Lab DBMS Lab C++ Lab
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
II Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects Internet Programming 5 4 Distributed Operating System 5 4 Advanced Java Programming 5 4
Elective-2(Choose any ONE) 5 5 Software Quality Assurance and Testing Object Oriented System Development Data Mining 5 4
Lab 5 4 Internet Programming Advanced Java Lab
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
315
III Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects Digital Image Processing 5 4 Artificial Neural Networks 5 4 Multimedia Technology 5 4
Elective-2 (Choose any ONE) 5 5 Mobile Computing Cloud Computing UML
Lab Image Processing Lab 5 4 Mini Project 5 4
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 25
IV Semester
Components Hours Credits
Major Project 15
Total ( 1 Course) 15
Each theory course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=75:25)
Each practical course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=60:40)
Internal Assessment
For Theory Course
The Average of the best two tests from three compulsory Tests-15 Marks
Assignment -4 Marks
Seminar -6 Marks
Total -25 Marks
For Practical Course
Completion of Program List within the stipulated time - 20 Marks
Record - 10 Marks
Model Test - 10 Marks
Total - 40 Marks
316
Semester III-Core Subject
Digital Image Processing
Unit-I
Introduction :-Fundamentals-The MATLAB Desktop-Using Mat lab Editor /Debugger- getting help-saving and Retrieving work session data-Digital Image Representation- Image I/O and Display –Classes and Image Types-M-Function Programming.
Intensity Transformation and Spatial Filtering: - Background-Intensity transformation- histogram Processing and function Plotting-Spatial filtering-Image processing toolbox standard spatial filters.
Unit-II
Filtering in Frequency Domain:-The 2-D Discrete Fourier transform-Computing and Visualizing the 2-D DFT in MATLAB – Filtering in the Frequency domain- Obtaining frequency domain filters from spatial filters- Generating filters directly in the frequency domain-sharpening frequency domain filters.
Image Restoration and Reconstruction:- A model of the image degradation / restoration process- noise models- Restoration in the presence of noise only-Spatial filtering- periodic noise reduction by frequency domain filtering- Modelling in degradation function-Direct inverse filtering –wiener filtering- Constrained least squares filtering – Iterative non-linear restoration using the lucy - Richardson algorithm- Blind deconvolution - Geometric transformation and image registration.
Unit-III
Color image processing:- Colour image representation in matlab-converting to other color spaces-The basics of color image processing-Color transformation-spatial filtering of colour images-Working directly in a RGB vector space
Wavelets:-Background- The fast wavelet transform-working with wavelet decomposition structures-the inverse wavelet transform-wavelets in image processing.
UNIT -IV
Image compression:-Background-coding redundancy-spatial redundancy-irrelevant information-jpeg compression
Morphological image processor:-preliminaries-dialation and erosion-combining dialation and erosion-labelling connected components –morphological reconstruction-gray scale morphology
317
UNIT-V
Image segmentation:- Image segmentation-point, line and edge detection-Line detection using the hough transform-thresholding-region-based segmentation using the watershed transform
Representation and description:-Background-Representation-Boundary descriptors- regional descriptors using principal components for descriptors.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Digital Image Processing Using MATLAB,Second edition Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, Steven L.Eddins, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,New Delhi.
2.Anil.K.Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice-Hall, 1989.
3.Chanda & Majumdar, Digital Image Processing and Analysis, Prentice Hall ,3rd Edition
III Semester – Core Subject
Artificial Neural Networks
UNIT - I Brain Style Computing:Origins and Issues-Lessons from Neuroscience-Artificial Neurons,Neural Networks and Architectures-Geomentry of Binary Threshold Neurons and their Networks-
UNIT - II Supervised Learning I:Perceptrons and LMS Supervised Learning II:Back propagation and Beyond
UNIT - III Neural Networks:A Statistical Pattern Recognition Perspective Focusing on Generalization:Support Vector Machines and Radial Basis Function Networks
UNIT - IV Dynamical Systems Review-Attractor Neural Networks
UNIT - V Adaptive Resonance Theory- Towards the Self Organizing Feature Map.
TEXT BOOK: Satish Kumar, Neural Networks-A Classical Approach, Tata McGraw Hill,2007
REFERENCE BOOK: 1.James A.Freeman and David M.Slapura, Neural Network Algorithms,Application Programming Techniques,Addition Wesley Publishing Company 1991 2.S.N.Sivanandam,S,Sumathi and S.N.Deepa, Introduction to Neural Networks using Mat Lab 2006.
318
III Semester – Core Paper
Multimedia Technology Unit-I Defining the scope of multimedia, Hypertext and Collaborative research, Multimedia and personalised computing, Multimedia on the map, Emerging applications, The challenges The convergence of computers, Communications, and entertainment products The technology trends, Multimedia appliances, Hybrid Devices, Designers perspective, industry perspective of the future, Key challenges ahead, Technical, regulatory, Social Architectures and issues for Distributed Multimedia systems Distributed Multimedia systems, Synchronization, and QOS Architecture, The role of Standards, A frame work for Multimedia systems
Unit-II Digital Audio Representation and processing: Uses of Audio in Computer Applications, Psychoacoustics, Digital representation of sound, transmission of digital sound, Digital Audio signal processing, Digital music making, Speech recognition and generation, digital audio and the computers Video Technology:Raster Scanning Principles, Sensors for TV Cameras, Colour Fundamentals, Colour Video,Video performance Measurements, Analog video Artifacts, video equipments, World wide television standards Digital Video and Image Compression Video compression techniques, standardization of Algorithm, The JPEG Image Compression Standard, ITU-T Recommendations, The EPEG Motion Video Compression Standard, DVI Technology
Unit-III Operating System Support for Continuous Media Applications: Limitation of Work station Operating system, New OS support, Experiments Using Real Time Mach Middleware System Services Architecture:Goals of Multimedia System services, Multimedia system services Architecture, Media stream protocol Multimedia Devices, Presentation Services, and the User Interface:Client control of continuous multimedia, Device control, Temporal coordination and composition, toolkits, hyper applications Multimedia File systems and Information Models:The case for multimedia information systems, The file system support for continuous Media,Data models for multimedia and Hypermedia information, Content- based Retrieval of Unstructured Data Multimedia presentation and Authoring: Design paradigms and User interface, barriers to wide spread use, research trends
Unit-IV Multimedia Services over the Public Networks: Requirements, Architecture, and protocols, Net work services, applications Multimedia Interchange Quick time Movie File Format, QMFI, MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Encoding Expert Group), Format Function and representation, Track model and Object model, Real Time Interchange Multimedia conferencing Teleconferencing Systems, Requirements of Multimedia Communications, Shared Application Architecture and embedded Distributed objects, Multimedia Conferencing Architecture Multimedia Groupware : Computer and Video fusion approach to open shared workspace
319
Unit-V High Definition Television and desktop computing, Video versus Computing-Viewing Conditions-Quality-HDTV,ATV,EDTV,IDTV-HDTV Standards – Standardization Issues HDTV standards, Knowledge based Multimedia systems, Anatomy of an Intelligent Multimedia system
Text Book : John F.Koegel Buford, Multimedia Systems, Pearson Education 2012
Reference Book : 1.Tay Vaughan,Multimedia – Making it work,Fifth Edition,TMH 2003 2.Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt,Multimedia:Computing , Communication and Application Pearson Education 2009
III Semester – Elective Paper Mobile Computing
UNIT - I Introduction: Advantages of Digital Information - Introduction to Telephone Systems – Mobile communication: Need for Mobile Communication – Requirements of Mobile Communication – History of Mobile Communication.
UNIT - II Introduction to Cellular Mobile Communication – Mobile Communication Standards – Mobility Management – Frequency Management – Cordless Mobile Communication Systems.
UNIT - III Mobile Computing: History of data networks – Classification of Mobile data networks - CDPD System – Satellites in Mobile Communication: Satellite classification – Global Satellite Communication – Changeover from one satellite to other – Global Mobile Communication – Interferences in Cellular Mobile Communication.
UNIT - IV Important Parameters of Mobile Communication System – Mobile Internet: Working of Mobile IP – Wireless Network Security – Wireless Local Loop Architecture: Components in WLL – Problems in WLL – Modern Wireless Local Loop – Local Multipoint Distribution Service – Wireless Application Protocol.
UNIT - V WCDMA Technology and Fibre Optic Microcellular Mobile Communication – Ad hoc Network and Bluetooth technology – Intelligent Mobile Communication system – Fourth Generation Mobile Communication systems.
320
TEXT BOOK: T.G. Palanivelu, R. Nakkeeran, Wireless and Mobile Communication, PHI Learning Private Limited.2009
REFERENCE BOOK: Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Second Edition, Pearson Education. 2007
III Semester Elective Paper CLOUD COMPUTING
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION Cloud Computing Introduction, From, Collaboration to cloud, Working of cloud computing, pros and cons, benefits, developing cloud computing services, Cloud service development, discovering cloud services.
UNIT – II CLOUD COMPUTING FOR EVERYONE Centralizing email communications, cloud computing for community, collaborating on schedules, collaborating on group projects and events, cloud computing for corporation, mapping schedulesm managing projects, presenting on road.
UNIT – III USING CLOUD SERVICES Collaborating on calendars, Schedules and task management, exploring on line scheduling and planning, collaborating on event management, collaborating on contact management, collaborating on project management, collaborating on word processing, spreadsheets, and databases.
UNIT – IV OUTSIDE THE CLOUD Evaluating web mail services, Evaluating instant messaging, Evaluating web conference tools, creating groups on social networks, Evaluating on line groupware, collaborating via blogs and wikis
UNIT – V STORING AND SHARING Understanding cloud storage, evaluating on line file storage, exploring on line book marking services, exploring on line photo editing applications, exploring photo sharing communities, controlling it with web based desktops.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Michael Miller, ―Cloud Computing‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009
2.Anthony T.Velte,Toby J.Velte,Pobert Elsenpeter,‖Cloud Computing‖,TMH,2010
321
III Semester Elective Paper UML
Unit-I Why We Model?-Introducing UML-Hello World-Classes-Relationships-Common Mechanism-Diagrams-Class diagrams
Unit-II Advanced Structural Modeling-Advanced Classes-Advanced Relationships- Interfaces,Types, and Roles-Packages-Instances-Object Diagram- Components
Unit-III Basic Behavioral Modeling-Interactions-Use Cases-Use Case Diagram-Interaction Diagrams-Activity Diagrams
Unit-IV Advanced Behavioral Modeling –Events and Signals-State Machines-Processes and Threads-Time and Space –State Diagrams
Unit-V Architectural Modeling – Artifacts – Deployment – Collaborations- Patterns and Frameworks –Artifact Diagram – Deployment Diagrams – Systems and Models- Applying the UML
Text Book : 1. Grady Booch,James Rumbaugh,Ivar Jacobson, ―The Unified Modeling Language User Guide‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2008
Reference Books:
1.Jason T.Roff,‖UML‖,TMH 2003
2.Hans Erik Eriksson,Magnus Penker,Brian Lyons,David Fado,OMG Press 2008
322
Image Processing LAB (Tools: Java/Mat Lab/VC++)
Programs should include but not limited to: 1. Display of Grayscale Images. 2. Histogram Equalization. 3. Non-linear Filtering. 4. Edge detection using Operators. 5. 2-D DFT and DCT. 6. Filtering in frequency domain. 7. Display of color images. 8. Conversion between color spaces. 9. DWT of images. 10. Segmentation using watershed transform.
Mini Project-Software Development Lab
Students are to take up sample project development activities with the guidelines given below: Preparing a project - brief proposal including
• Problem Identification
• Developing a model for solving the problem
• A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Data Flow Diagram)
• List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
• Cost benefit analysis
• Time line activities A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)]
A presentation including the following
• Implementation phase (Hardware / Software / both)
• Testing & Validation of the developed system
• Learning in the project Consolidated report preparation
323
Semester IV Major Project
The objective of the project is to enable the students to work in a project of latest topic / research area / industrial applications. Each project student shall have a guide who is a faculty member.
During this semester the students are expected to do literature survey, formulate the problem and form a methodology of arriving at the solution of the problem. Also during this semester, the students are expected to complete the project and submit a full-fledged report comprising of the complete system developed along with implementation and test results. The departmental committee shall examine the students for 50 marks and the evaluation is based on continuous internal assessment comprising of two reviews.
After two reviews internal 50 marks (is based on seminar (20 marks), demo (20 marks) and internal viva-voce (10 marks)) will be given by the guide. At end of the semester, a viva-voce examination will be conducted for 150 marks.
*********
324
APPENDIX - AZ99
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY,TIRUNELVELI-12
M.SC. SOFTWARE ENGINEERING (5 yrs.Integrated)
5 Years-Ten Semesters (For Colleges)
II Year Syllabus
I Semester
Components
Part I Tamil/Other Languages
Part II English
Part III Core Subjects Theory: PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGY AND C
PROGRAMMING
Practical:C Programming Lab
Part III Allied Subject-I Mathematics-I
Part IV Environmental Studies
Total ( 6 Courses)
II Semester
Components
Part I Tamil/Other Languages
Part II English
Part III Core Subjects Theory:Object Oriented Programming Using C++ Practical:C++ Programming Lab
Part III Allied Subject-I Mathematics-II
Part IV Value Based Education
Total ( 6 Courses)
325
Hours Credits
6 3
6 3
6 4 4 4
6 5
2 2
30 21
Hours Credits
6 3
6 3
6 4 4 4
6 5
2 2
30 21
III Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects Computer Organization and Architecture 6 5 Data Structures and Algorithms 6 5 Data Structures and Algorithms Lab 6 4
Allied II 6 4 Applied Physics
Non Major Elective I 2 2 Skill based subject I 4(1 T+ 3 P) 2
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 22
IV Semester
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects System Analysis and Design 6 5 Java Programming 6 5 Java Programming Lab 6 4
Allied II 6 4 Digital Electronics
Non Major Elective II 2 2 Skill based subject II 4(1 T+ 3 P) 2
Total ( 6 Courses) 30 22
Each theory course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=75:25)
Each practical course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=60:40)
Internal Assessment
For Theory Course
The Average of the best two tests from three compulsory Tests-20 Marks
Assignment -5 Marks
Total -25 Marks
326
For Practical Course
Program List Execution - 20 Marks
Record - 10 Marks
Model Test - 10 Marks
Total - 40 Marks
III Semester – Core paper COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE
UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS Functional units - Basic operational concepts - Bus structures – Software performance – Memory locations and addresses – Memory operations – Instruction and instruction sequencing– Addressing modes – Assembly language – Basic I/O operations – Stacks and queues.
UNIT II ARITHMETIC UNIT Addition and subtraction of signed numbers – Design of fast adders – Multiplication of positive numbers - Signed operand multiplication and fast multiplication – Integer division – Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT Fundamental concepts – Execution of a complete instruction – Multiple bus organization –Hardwired control – Micro programmed control - Pipelining – Basic concepts – Data hazards –Instruction hazards – Influence on Instruction sets – Data path and control consideration –Superscalar operation.
UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM Basic concepts – Semiconductor RAMs - ROMs – Speed - size and cost – Cache memories -Performance consideration – Virtual memory- Memory Management requirements – Secondary Storage.
UNIT V I/O ORGANIZATION Accessing I/O devices – Interrupts – Direct Memory Access – Buses – Interface circuits –Standard I/O Interfaces (PCI, SCSI, USB).
REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, 5th Edition ―Computer Organization‖, McGraw-Hill, 2002. 2. William Stallings, ―Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance‖, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 3. David A.Patterson and John L.Hennessy, ―Computer Organization and Design: The hardware / software interface‖, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2002. 4. John P.Hayes, ―Computer Architecture and Organization‖, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1998.
327
III Semester –Core Paper DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
UNIT I PROBLEM SOLVING Problem solving – Top-down Design – Implementation – Verification – Efficiency Analysis –Sample algorithms.
UNIT II LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES Abstract Data Type (ADT) – The List ADT – The Stack ADT – The Queue ADT
UNIT III TREES Preliminaries – Binary Trees – The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees – AVLTrees – Tree Traversals – Hashing – General Idea – Hash Function – SeparateChaining – Open Addressing– Linear Probing – Priority Queues (Heaps) – Model –Simple implementations – Binary Heap
UNIT IV SORTING Preliminaries – Insertion Sort – Shellsort – Heapsort – Mergesort – Quicksort –External Sorting
UNIT V GRAPHS Definitions – Topological Sort – Shortest-Path Algorithms – Unweighted Shortest Paths –Dijkstra‘s Algorithm – Minimum Spanning Tree – Prim‘s Algorithm –Applications of Depth-First Search – Undirected Graphs – Biconnectivity –Introduction to NP- Completeness
REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. R. G. Dromey, ―How to Solve it by Computer‖ (Chaps 1-2), Prentice-Hall of India, 2002. 2. M. A. Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, 2nd ed, Pearson Education Asia, 2002. 3. ISRD Group, ―Data Structures using C‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007 4. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, ―Data Structures – A Pseudocode Approach with C‖, ThomsonBrooks / COLE, 1998.
Skill based Subject I – Office Automation
Skill based subjects are practical oriented. One hour should be assigned for
tutorial class and three hours of practical to do the given practical list. MS-WORD
1. Creating and Saving Documents 2. Letter Typing and Editing 3. Design an Invitation
328
4. Design a Calendar 5. Design a Time Table 6. Prepare a Student Bio-data 7. Usage of Header / Footer / Bookmark / Footnote / Spell Check 8. Mathematical Equations and Symbols 9. Design a Cover Page 10. Mail Merge
MS –EXCEL
1. Mark Sheet Preparation 2. Payroll Preparation 3. Sales Details 4. Graphs and Charts 5. Mathematical / Statistical / Logical Functions 6. Budget Preparation
MS –ACCESS
1. Mark List Creation 2. Salary List Preparation 3. Electricity Bill Generation 4. Report Generation 5. Creation of Mailing Labels
MS –POWER POINT
1. Creating a Presentation from Scratch
2. Creating a Presentation using Design Template 3. Creating an Animated Presentation with Sound Effect 4. Creating a Presentation about your Personality
Allied Paper II
APPLIED PHYSICS Unit I Electrical Properties: Free electron of Drude and Lorentz - Weidman Franz Law - distinction between conductor, semi conductors, and insulators on the basis of baud theory - factors affecting resistivity of a conductor: Temperature, allowing, pressure, strain, magnetic field and environment.
Unit II Magnetic Materials: Magnetic materials - classification of magnetic materials. ferromagnetism: Domain theory - hysteresis - hard and soft magnetic materials - curie - weiss law - magnetostriction, ferrites, preparation, properties, applications - magnetic bubble memory. magnetic recording - writing magnetic data - reading magnetic data - storage of magnetic data
329
Unit III Dielectric materials: Qualitative study of three types of polarization - effect of temperature and frequency on dielectric constant - dielectric loss - ferro electric materials - behviour of barium titanate - pieze - electric materials - breakdown mechanisms - classification of insulating materials on temperature basis
Unit IV Super conductors: Qualitative study of the phenomenon - critical temperature and critical field. meissner effect - type I and II superconductors. BCS theory of superconductivity (Qualitative) - high temperature superconductor. Applications: Crypton, magnetic leviation - super conducting magnets.
Unit V Modern engineering materials: Metalic glasses as transformer core material Nanophase materials synthesis - variation of physical properties with Geometry - shape memory allow - characteristics of SMA - Thermomechanical behaviour - commercial SMA - Applications - Biomaterial
Books for Reference
1. R.Raghavan, V: "Materials Science and Engineering A Fist Course", PHI, 1991.
2. Arumugam M, "Materials Science", Anuradha Publications, 1994.
3. P.K.Palanisamy, "Materials Science", Scitech, 2002.
4. Seth & Gupta, "Course in Electrical Engineering Materials", Dhanpat Raj & Sons
1990.
IV semester – Core Paper
SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Unit 1
Foundations for system development: The system development environment succeeding as a System Analyst – Automated tools for systems development – Initiating and planning systems development projects
Unit II
Analysis: Determining system requirements – Traditional Methods - Modern Methods – Radical Methods – Internet Development : Determining system requirements – structuring systems requirements: Process Modeling
Unit III
Structuring System Requirements: Logic modeling – Structuring system requirements:conceptual data modeling
330
Unit IV
Design: Designing databases – Designing Forms and Reports – Designing Interfaces and dialogues – Finalizing Design Specifications.
Unit V
Implementation and Maintenance: System Implementation - Maintaining Information Systems
Text Book:
1.Jeffrey A.Hoffer , Joey F.George,Joseph S. Valacich ―Modern Systems Analysis and Design‖, Third Edition,Pearson Education,2003
Reference Books:
1.Elias M Awad,‖System Analysis and Design‖, Galgotia Publications,2nd Edition,1996
2.James A.Senn,‖Analysis and Design of Information Systems‖,TMH Publications,2nd Edition,1989.
IV Semester – Core Paper JAVA PROGRAMMING
UNIT – I An overview of Java: Object oriented programming – Java features – Java environment -Data types, variables and arrays. Operators- Expressions - Control Statements: Branching statements – Iteration statements – Jump statements – Sample java program.
UNIT – II Classes – Objects – Methods – Constructors – The this keyword – finalize () method – Overloading methods – Returning objects – Recursion – Static – Final – Nested inner classes– Command line arguments – Inheritance.
UNIT – III Packages and Interfaces: Packages – Access protection – Importing packages – Interfaces –Exception handling: Fundamentals – Exception types – Try and catch – Multiple catch –Nested try – throw – throws – finally – Build in exception.
UNIT – IV Multithread programming: Thread model –Life cycle of thread – Creating thread – Multiple threads – Thread priorities – Synchronization – Inter thread Communication – Suspending, Resuming and Stopping threads – I/O Applets, and other topics. Networking: Basics – Inetaddress – TCP/IP Client Sockets – URL – URL Connection – TCP/IP Server Sockets – Data gram.
331
UNIT – V The Applet Class: Basics – Building applet code – Applet life cycle – Creating an executable applet – Designing a web page – Running the applet – Getting input from the user– Graphics programming: The graphic class – Lines and rectangles – Circles and ellipses –Using control loops in applets – Drawing bar charts.
TEXT BOOKS 1. ―The Complete Reference‖ Java2, 3rd Edition, Patrick Naughton, Herbert Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Ltd., New Delhi. 2. Programming with Java, 3rd Edition, E. Balagurusamy, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Ltd., New Delhi.
3.Programming in Java ,Saching Malhotra,Saurabh Choudhary,Oxford Higher Education 2011
Allied II-DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Unit I
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND CIRCUITS: (Qualitative treatment only) Fundamental aspects of semiconductors – PN junction diode-Zener diode – Rectifiers – Zener voltage regulators – Filters – Power supply units – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Transistor Amplifiers and inverters – Field Effect Transistor.
NUMBER SYSTEM AND CODES: Binary – Octal – Hexadecimal – BCD – excess three – Gray codes – error correcting and detecting codes.
Unit II
DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND GATES: AND, OR, NOT, NAND and NOR gates – exclusive OR gates. Positive and negative logic systems – digital integrated circuits – characteristics – TTL and MOS logic circuits – comparison.
BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND KARNAUGH MAPS: Boolean relations – laws and theorems – simplifications – karnaugh maps and simplifications – don‘t care conditions – NAND-NAND realizations.
Unit III
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC: Design and implementation of Half and Full adders – Subtractors – Parallel adders – carry look ahead addition – subtractors – encoders and decoders – multiplexers and de-multiplexers.
SEQUENTIAL LOGIC: R-S, J-K, D and T type Flip-Flops – Binary counters: Ripple and synchronous types – UP/DOWN counters – decade counters – Shift registers – Ring counters.
332
Unit IV
A/D AND D/A CONVERTORS: Operational amplifier basics – DACs: weighted and binary ladder types – ADCs: counter, ramp, successive approximation types.
UNIT V
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS: Definition of terms – inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, summing amplifiers, integrators and differentiators.
REFERENCES
1. Malvino A. P., ―Digital Computer Electronics‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001. 2. Gothamann H., ―Digital Electronics: An Introduction to theory and Practice‖, Prentice Hall, 2001. 3. Mottershed A., ―Electronic devices and circuits‖, Prentice Hall, 1993. 4. Mathur A. P., ―Introduction to Microprocessors‖, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2001. 5. Hamachar V. C., Vranesic Z.G and Zaky S.G., ―Computer Organization‖, McGraw Hill, 2002.
Skill based Subject II – DTP Packages
Skill based subjects are practical oriented. One hour should be assigned for tutorial class and three hours of practical to do the given practical list.
Page Maker 1. Design if ID card (3‖X2‖)/visiting card (3.5‖X2‖). 2. Design of an attractive Invention card (5.5‖X8‖)/letter pad (7.5‖X9‖). 3. Preparation of a small booklet with 6 pages (3.5‖X4.5‖). 4. Design a handbill (5.5‖X8.5‖)/advertisement. 5. Design your college progress card/a receipt bill with counter foil.
Photoshop 1. Design of a brochure for an institution. 2. Seasonal greeting card. 3. Transporting an image from one background to another. Design a web page poster
(1004x750)/textbook cover page. 4. Crop an image/rotate an image.
*****
333
APPENDIX – AZ101
MANONMANIUM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.SC NETWORKING AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
(CBCS – FOR COLLEGES) For those who joined the course from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards
Course structure
III Semester
Papers
ASP.Net
Operating System
Advanced Java programming
Unix administration
Elective (Select from Group-c)
Computer Lab – ASP.Net and Java Programming
Total
Sl.No Papers Hours
1 **Project work and Viva-voce 30
** With the concurrence of the Head of the Department, a candidate may be permitted to work in an industry for the project work during the final semester. In such cases the work of the candidate shall be jointly supervised by a member of the faculty in the college and Engineer / a Scientist or Manager in the industry who has been earlier approved (on the basis of bio-data) by the Head of the Department concerned as a person qualified to guide the candidate.
Electives : Group C
1. Mobile computing 2. Optical Computing 3. Management Information systems
Practicals ASP.NET & Advanced Java Programming
342
Sl. No
1
2
3
4
5
IV Semester
Credits
5
5
5
5
5
5
30
Credits
15
Hours
5
5
5
4
5
6
30
III Semester
1. ASP.NET
Unit 1
Introduction to ASP.Net – web server, webpage. Virtual Directory- creating a virtual directory.
Introduction to ASP.NET – How ASP.net uses .NET framework.
ASP.NET Architecture – Integrated with IIS, Cookie-based Authentication, passport
authentication. ASP.NET Features, advantages of ASP.NET, Dataflow in ASP.NET, A simple
ASP.NET application.
HTML server-side controls, Basic of coding in ASP.NET, Post back events. Structure of code
blocks – page directives, web forms server controls, HTML server-side controls.
Unit-II
ASP.NET web controls I – web controls, web control hierarchy-Button web control, label web
control, check box, radio button controls.
ASP.NET web contols II – Image controls – Image button. ASP.NET List controls – adding items
to asp.net list controls, determining the selection in asp.net list, setting the selection in asp.net
list control – link button, panel, Adrotator, calendar, validation controls- validation in asp.net-
Required field validator- automatic client-side, compare validator- Display property, Range
Validator, Regular Expression Validator, Custom Validator, validation summary control.
Unit III
HttpRequest-HTML form, Retrieving form data, HttpRequest properties, cookies- HttpRequest
Method. HttpResponse – HttpResponse properties, HttpResponse methods. Application,
Session state and Management and cookies. HttpApplication- Global.asax, Application state,
Session – Session events in Global.asax. Session state. Cookies-How to create cookie – server
object.
ADO.NET-I - Manipulation of database in ASP.NET. Introduction to ADO.NET – Advantages of
ADO.Net over ADO.
ADO.NET- II. Manager providers – connection object – command object, Data Reader .
Unit IV
ADO.NET – III – Dataset- working with datasets – constructors of Dataset – Methods of dataset,
properties of dataset, data table, data view.
Data aware control, data binder – Binding to non-database data source, binding to a database,
Repeater control. Data grid and data list server controls, data grid server control – Data grid
columns, editing items in data grid, sorting columns in data grid, paging in data grid, accessing a
database, data list server control – templates for control layout, selecting intems in data list,
Accessing a database.
Unit – V
Tracing, Error handling and debugging. Tracing- tracing methods, tracing levels, using tracing,
Error handling, debugging.
Introduction to user controls – advantages of user controls, creating a user control.
ASP.NET components – disadvantages of COM – difference between COM and .NET
components, Asp.net components, components and system architecture, deploying
components in asp.net applications.
Text book :
MSU 3.2 ASP.NET, CITE, MS University, Tirunelveli.
343
2. OPERATING SYSTEM UNIT I
Introduction : what is an operating system-Mainframe Systems-Desktop Systems-Multiprocessor Systems-Distributed Systems-Clustered Systems-Real-time Systems-handheld systems.
Operating Systems Structure : System Components-Operating System Services- System calls-System programs-System structures-Virtual Machines.
UNIT II
Processes : process concept-process scheduling-operations on processes-co- operating processes-inter process communication. CPU scheduling : Basic concepts-scheduling criteria-scheduling algorithms- multiprocessor scheduling-Real time scheduling-Algorithms Evaluation.
UNIT III
Process synchronization : Background- the critical section problem- synchronization hardware-semaphores-classical problems of synchronization-ctitical regions-monitors-atomic transactions. Deadlocks : System model-deadlock characterization-methods for handling deadlocks- deadlock prevention-Deadlock avoidance-deadlock detection-recovey from deadlock.
UNIT IV
Memory management : Background-swapping-Contiguous Memory Allocation- paging-segmentation-segmentation with paging. Virtual memory : Background-demand paging-page replacement-allocation of frames.
UNIT V
File system interface :File concept-Access methods-File system structure-File system implementation-directories structure-directory implementation-allocation methods-free space management-efficency and performance-recovery. Mass storage structure : Disk structure-disk scheduling-disk management-swap space management-RAID structure-Disk attachment-Stable storage.
Text Book: Operating system concepts-Abraham Silverschatz and Peter Baer Galvin.
Addison Wesley publishing company-sixth Edition
Reference books:
1. Operating Systems: Internal and Design principles-Fifth Edition, William Stallings, PHI
2. Understanding Operating Systems,Ida M.Flynn,Ann Mclver Mchoes 3. Operating Systems-Second Edition, Achyut S.Godbole,TMH
344
3. ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING
Unit I:
DBMS Introduction – Summary of DBMS function – Codd‘s Rules. SQL – Using SQL as DDL, DML and Data Query Language – Functions. JDBC Architecture – Remote Database Access.
JDBC Introduction – Connecting to an ODBC Data Source – JDBC Connection – JDBC Implementation – Result Set Processing. JDBC Prepared statement – Callable Statement – Other JDBC classless.
Moving Cursor in Scrollable Result Sets – Making updates to Updateable Result Sets – Updating a Result Set programmatically.
Unit II:
Introduction to software component – Software component model – Java Bean – Importance of Java Bean – Bean Development kit. Building simple bean – Event Handling.
Bean Persistence – Serialization and erialization. Introduction Properties- simple, Boolean, indexed, bound properties. Properties-constrained-customizations .
Introduction to distributed application.
Unit III:
Introduction to RMI – RMI Architecture-Boot strapping and the RMI registry- working of RMI – Advantages of RMI. Steps involved in creating client applications. Dynmaic class loading – Introduction-code base in applets, RMI –command. Line examples-example of dynamic class loading . Trouble shooting tips-problem while running the RMI server and RMI. Client-Object actiation – Making an object activatable ( the remote interface-implementation class-policy file creating ―steup‖ Class-compile and run the code).
Unit IV:
Introduction – CGI – Servelet overview – Basic servelet Structure – Examples. Handling from data-Introduction-request headers.
Response headers – overviews-common response headers-examples. Cookies overview – The servelet.coolie API – creating, reading $ specifying. Coolie attributes- cookie utilities.
Session tracking-introduction-session-tracking API –Servelet. Communication- calleting servets from servelets. Working with URLs-reading directly from a URL reading from and Writing to a URL connection.
Unit V:
JSP Basic – Advantages of JSP-JSP request model. JSP Architecture –getting with JSP – components of JSP-JSP scripting. Elements-JSP scriplets-JSP declarations- JSP directives. Handling JSP errors-creating JSP error page-examples using scripting. Elements & directives – predefined variables – comments and character Quoting conventions.
345
Text Book:
MS 2.4 Advanced Java Programming with Database Applications, CITE MS University, Tirunelveli.
Reference:
E-Commerce Applications using Oracle 8i and Java, Meharaj Thakkar, Prentice, Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi.
4. Unix Administration
Unit I:
Introduction to Unix Administration :Introduction to Unix Os - Introductiojn to Operating System - History of Operating System-Features of Unix Operating System – Unix Architecture – Unix File system-System Administration – Login – Logout - Unix Command – date,cal,finger,id,man,who-3 Files and Directories command – Unix Directories – File name Expansion – Working with Files – Comparing Files – Printing Files – Working with IO Redirection,Pipes and Filters – I/O – Processes – Switching between processes.
Unit II:
Introduction to Shell Programming - Shell Programming – Types of Shell Processing command by shells – Variable – Types of Variables – Command substitution – Positional Parameters – The export command – Advanced shell scripts – The echo command – Read command – The expr command – The if statement – The for statement – The while statement – The until statement – The case statement – The break command – The continue statement – The trap command – Booting and Shutting – Booting – Types of booting – Boot Process – System Boot Sequence – Init process – Daemons – Run levels – overview of Run levels - Run levels functions - Run levels identification – Run control scripts – single/multi user mode – Shutting down – user and Group management – Managing Group – Groupadd command – Groupmod command - Groupdel command – managing user – useradd command – usermod command – userdel command.
Unit III:
Device and Disk Management – Device and Diak management – Device Geometry – Partitions – Device naming – Adding hard disks – character and block mode devices – Introduction to file system – Local Based File system types – Ofs(HDD) – Floppy – CD- ROM – The ext2 File System – Raw & Block device – Boot block – Super block – Backup super block – Cylinder groups – Inodes –Types of File system – Mounting the local based file system – Common commands for file system management – Managing disk use (Tasks) Network file system - Network file system (NFS) – nsfd – mountd – lockd – statd – rpc.portmapper – Startingf and stopping the nfs Daemons – To start and stop NFS Daemons – Configuring nfs Server and clients – Mounting the NFS file
346
system – Virtual File System – Virtual File System – Types of Virtual File System – Swap File system –Process File System – Process File system – What is /proc File System?- what is in this File system?
Unit IV:
Security – Security – Types of Security – File Server security – System level security - Printer management – Configuring print services – setting up the printer – setting up the print client – Print service Architecture – Print service Directories – Print Functions – Starting and Stopping Daemons – Configuring Printer – Printing a file – To print a file – To view the status of a printer – Cancelling the print job –Backup and Recovery – Backups – tar command,cpio command,dd command,mt command,dump/restore command.
Unit V:
Space Management - Space Management – Quota set up for a user – Turnign quatos on – Setting up quotas for single user – setting quotas for multiple user – To check quota consistency – Checking quotas on a file system – Scheduling of system Events – Types of scheduling Events – Jobs scheduling Using Crontab – Job scheduling AT – Performance Monitoring – managing system performance – Process management – Process states – process Management Commands - ps command – Listening Processes – Network management – Network – Types of network – Classification of network – LAN Fundamentals – characteristic of LAN – Features of LAN – LANs and OSI Reference Model – OSI Reference Model – LAN interconnection – Basic Network design – Wide Area Network – TCP/IP – Reference Models – Protocols in TCP/IP protocol suite – Testing the TCP/IP using IPCONFIC and PING – IP address.
Text Book: 1.Unix Administration,CITE Publication,MS University,Tirunelveli.
Reference: 1.Red Hot Linux Bible,Chiristopher Nagus,IDG Books India PVT Ltd.
2.Unix Bible,2nd Edition,Yveslepage and paul Larrera,IDG Books India(p)Ltd.
SYLLABUS FOR ELECTIVES
ELECTIVE C1 - MOBILE COMPUTING
Unit – I
Introduction – Vertical and Wireless Applications of Wireless Networking – Positioning of Wireless Networking relative to wired networks – Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN – Wireless PBXs map – The Radio Spectrum cell Size and Achievable throughput. Wireless Transmission – Frequencies for Radio transmission – Regulations – Signals, Antennas, Signal Propagation, path loss of radio signals, Additional signal propagation effects – Multi-Path Propagation Multiplexing.
347
Unit – II Space Division Multiplexing – Frequency Division Multiplexing – Time division Multiplexing – Code division multiplexing. Spread spectrum – Direct sequence spread spectrum - Frequency Hoping spread spectrum – Cellular Systems. Medium access control – Hidden and exposed terminals – Near and Far Terminals – SDMA, FDMA, TDMA, Fixed TDM, Classical Aloha, Slotted Aloha, Carrier sense multiple access – Reservation TDMA – Multiple access with collision avoidance – Polling – CDMA – Spread Aloha multiple access.
Unit – III Comparison of S/T/F/CDMA. GSM – Mobile services – System Architecture – Radio Interface – Protocols – Localization and calling – Handover – Security – Local Management for Mobile Cellular Systems – GRPS – Mobile services – System Architecture.
Unit – IV UMTS and IMT – 2000. Wireless LAN – Infra red vs Radio transmission – Infrastructure and adhoc network – IEEE 802.11 – System architecture – Protocol architecture – Physics layer – Medium access control layer – MAC management – Blue Tooth. Mobile network layer – Mobile IP – Goals, assumptions and requirements – entities and terminology – Packets delivery – Agent discovery – Registration – Tunneling – Encapsulation Recent technologies.
Unit – V World wide web – WAP- Architecture – Wireless datagram protocol, wireless transport layer security, wireless transaction protocol, wireless session protocol, wireless application environment, wireless markup language, WML scripts – Mobile computing applications using J2ME.
TEXT BOOKS: 1. John Schiller, ―MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS‖, Addison Wesley, 2003. 2. Rifaat A. Dayen ―MOBILE DATA & WIRELESS LAN TEHCNOLOGIES‖, Prentice Hall, 1997. 3. Steve Mann and Scoot Scribal, ―THEWIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL‖, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 200. 4. Steve Mann, ―Programming Applications With The Wireless Application Protocol‖, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2000
ELECTIVE C2 - OPTICAL COMPUTING
Unit-1 Geometrical and physical optics: images-linear superposition convolution and correlation…2D FT covariate transformation-magnification and rotation transform- types; properties of light, polarization lasers and combination coherence and interface differentiation polarities and types.
348
Unit 2 Spatial filtering and spectrum analysis; filter types,spatial multiplex, -image and matched –spatial filtering signal processing synthetic aperture radar: feature extraction in pattern recognition OSA:- time and space interfacing techniques. Spectrum analysis incoherent and coherent optical co realtors.
Unit 3 Sources, detectors and SLM:LEDs an d LD s; arrays detectors, linear and matrix arrays integration sphere and wedge detectors, AO brags cells, liquid crystal, magneto-optic and types of SLM s
Unit 4 Principles and computing elements: on von-new man architecture, form of parallel processing, holographic techniques, optical shortage devices, a switches: inter geometric logic elements for Boolean functions, metric multiplication.
Unit 5 Analog and digital optical computing : basis of linear optical processing; recognition devices ,Shannon casting, symbolic substitution optical matrix processing.
Text books: 1.optical signal processing by vanderlugnt john willy &sons NY.1992. 2.optical computing an introduction A. Karim Mohammed JW NY
Reference: 1. Signal Processing in Optics Bradly G Boor Oxford University Press.
ELECTIVE C3 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
UNIT – I Introduction to Management of Information System – Introduction Role and Importance of Management – Process of Management – Organization structure and theory – Strategic Management of Business.
UNIT – II Basics of Management Information Systems – Basics of Management Information Systems – Decision making – Information – Systems – Systems analysis and design – development of MIs – Choice of information technology. Nature of IT decision, Information Technology to implementation plan, choice of the information Technology and the Management Information System.
UNIT – III Application of Management Information Systems – Application in Manufacturing Sector Applications in Service Sector – Decision Support Systems – Enterprise Management Systems.
349
UNIT – IV Technology in Management information Systems – Technology of Implementation systems – Database Management Systems – Object Oriented Technology: Conceptual Presentation. Client – Server architecture – Networks.
UNIT – V Business Reprocess Engineering, Data Warehouse: Architecture of Implementation, Electronic Business Technology, WEB: A Tool for Business Management. Case study: A Comprehensive Case study on MIS, Information Management, System Development Cycle, Enterprise Management System, MIS in research environment, Role of MIS consumer in Goods Industry, Role of MIS in Capital Goods industry, Database comparative Internet and Internet Applications. Knowledge of Management.
TEXT BOOKS 1. W.S. Jawadekar – Management Information Systems – Second Edition – Tata McGraw Hill – 2002. 2. Robert Schulthesis & Mary Summer – Management Information Systems – The Manager‘s View – Tata McGraw Hill – 1999.
Practicals ASP.NET Lab Exercise
1. a)write a program to display three images in a line. When any one of the image is clicked, it
must be displayed below. On clicking the displayed image it must be cleared. The screen
must look as in the figure.
b) Write a program that displays a button in green color and it should change into
yellow when the mouse moves over it.
2. Make an advertisement file using Adrotator
3. Write a program that gets user input such as the username, mode of payment,
appropriate credit card. After the user enters the appropriate values the validation
button validates the values entered.
Name :
Pay mode :
Select any one from the list
Visa
Check for Validation
350
Cash
Card
4. Create a form that receives the username, address, date of birth, nationality, country
preferred for working and skill sets from the user and stores the username in the client
using cookies. The ‗country preferred‘ data should appear in the drop down list. Validate
all the controls. The form is named as ―formexp.aspx‖. The date should appear
between ―01/01/1900 and 01/01/2090‖.
5. Create a Global.asax file with application variables : cont, color1, and gotohp. Create
session variable called cont1. Initialize cont as 0 and assign any color to color1. For
the variable gotohp, give the hyperlink to any website. Use the variables in the
webform. Try these with the lock and unlock methods.
6. (a) write program that updates the ename field of emp table with the given name where
eno=102. (b) write a program to select those rows from the emp table whose eno>=100
7. a) select the names of the employees from emp table. Retreive the result in a dataset
and display it in a checkbox list. (b) select the names of the employees from emp table.
Retreive the result in a dataset and display it in a Radiobutton list.
8. Create a table with two columns and 3 rows. First row displays empno, second row
displays ename, third row displays empsal. All these being retrieved from emp table.
And should be displayed as dropdown listbox.
9. Write a program to implement sorting features and paging features in customer table
having field names Custid, cutsname and place. 10. create a user control that contains a list of colors. Add a button to the webform which
when clicked changes the color of the form to the color selected from the list.
Advanced Java Lab exercise I. Using JDBC
1. Write a Java code that creates a connection to the Access database using the DSN
name ‗java‘ and display a message ―Successfully Connected‖ if the connection is
created.
To create DSN ‗java‘ :
• Create a database in the name of stud.mdb
• Create an access table in the name ‗student‘
• Create DSN name ‗java‘
2. i)Create a table ‗student‘ using queries to store the following data : student‘s reg.no,
student‘s name, subject1, subject2, subject3, subject4 marks in an access database.
ii) Write a java code to insert & update the data into the table ‗student‘.
3. Write a Java code to delete the record in the table ‗student‘ and also drop the table
‗student‘ using the classes of java.sql package.
II Using RMI
4. Create an RMI application in which request specifies two numbers, the server
compares them and returns the greater number
For this,
i)create an interface called ―RmiGreatest.java
ii)Implement the remote interface in a file called ―RmiImpl.java‖.
iii)Create a client application called ―RmiClient.java‖ that returns the greater of
the two numbers passed as arguments.
iv)Create a server application called ―RmiServer.java‖ that binds remote method
with registry.
5. i) create an access datadase named ‗Airline.mdb‘
ii)create an Access table named ‗Flight‘
iii)use the user interface to communicate with the database , a DSN has to be
created.
351
iv)For server application ,AirlineInterface, AirlineServer and AirlineClient are needed.
III) SERVLETS
6. Write a HTML code to get user input, (ie) Name,Email-id , mark, course and
comments about the student and to display the information.
7. Write a HTML code that reads the input data and display the data that is stored in the
table ‗student‘. The table ‗student‘ has to be created using queries.
8. Write a code in HTML and Java to accept Login Name and Password of the user to
Check that the details are valid or not and also display the message.
IV) using JSP
9.Write a HTML code to get customer id and password and store the data in the table
and display the message that is successfully added or not.
Create a DSN and create a table named ‗cusLogin‘ with fields cusid,cuspwd,custype.
352
APPENDIX – AZ102
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI – 12
M.Sc., Biotechnology (FOR AFFLIATED COLLEGES- CBCS)
For those who joined the course from the Academic year 2012-2013 and afterwards
Eligibility: A pass with 50 % mark in Bachelor degree in any biological subjects Or Bachelor degree with one allied subject in any biological subjects.
50% minimum mark for passing in internal examinations
Scheme of Examinations SEMESTER I
CODE SUBJECT Hours CREDIT
CEB CELL BIOLOGY 6 5
BGE BIOMOLECULES, GENE ORGANIZATION 6 5 AND EXPRESSION
MPG MICROBIAL PHYSIOLOGY AND GENETICS 6 5
Elective (Select One) 6 5
BMT BIOMEDICAL TECHNOLOGY DDR DRUG DESIGNING AND TARGETING
LAB.1 PRACTICAL 6
(No exam in I Semester)
Total (4 Courses) 30 20
SEMESTER II
CODE SUBJECT HOURS CREDIT
BCI BIOCHEMISTRY AND INSTRUMENTATION 6 4
PBT PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY 6 4
ABT ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY 6 4
Elective (Select One) 6 5
NBT NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY TEG TISSUE ENGINEERING
LAB.2 PRACTICAL (2 courses) 6 8
Total (6 courses) 30 25
353
SEMESTER III
SUBJECT
Proteomics and Genomics
BIOLOGY OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
BIOPROCESS TECHNOLOGY
PROJECT (Related to Biotechnology)
PRACTICAL (No exam in III semester)
(4 courses)
SEMESTER IV
CODE SUBJECT HOURS CREDIT
BIB BIOINFORMATICS AND BIOPHYSICS 6 4
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND BIOSTATISTICS
Medical biotechnology
Elective (Select One)
IBT INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY SCB STEM CELL BIOLOGY
LAB 4 PRACTICAL (2 Courses)
Total (6 Courses)
ABSTRACT
----------------------------------------------- Total number of Courses : 20 (16 Theory + 4 Practical) Total number of hours : 120 Total number of Credits : 90 -----------------------------------------------
Project and Viva-Voce
Project Report - 60 Marks Viva-voce - 40 Marks ----------------------------------- Total - 100 Marks -----------------------------------
• The Project for PG students shall be ―Group Project‖ Each Group shall contain 3 or 4 students
354
HOURS CREDIT
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6
30 20
CODE
PGE
BIS
BPT
PRO
LAB.3
Total
6 4
4
6
6 5
6 8
30 25
RMB
MBT
SEMESTER III
3.1 Proteomics and Genomics Unit 1: Proteomics: Introduction and scope of proteomics; Protein separation techniques: ion- exchange, size-exclusion and affinity chromatography techniques; Polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis; Isoelectric focusing (IEF); 1-D & 2-D gel electrophoresis, Fundamentals of mass spectrometry (basic theory, ionization techniques and mass analyzers, electrospray ionization (ESI) and matrix adsorption laser dissociation ionization (MALDI).
Unit 2: Reversed-phase HPLC and Microcapillary LC, protein and peptide separation technique), proteome database. Qualitative and quantitative proteome analysis. Short- gun proteomics for proteome profile (whole proteome and sub-proteome analysis). Expression proteome analysis (isotope-labeling and label-free approaches).In-vivo proteome analysis.
Unit 3: Proteomic analysis of post-translational modifications (Phosphorylation, ubiquitination, acetylation, nitration and glycosylation etc.). Proteomic analysis of protein-protein, protein-DNA interactions (Identification of ligand receptor pairing and transcriptional regulators). Proteomics approaches for investigation of therapy resistance in cancer (Identification of new factors and protein expression profiles associated with anticancer therapy resistance).
Unit 4: Genomics: Overview of genome; Methods of preparing genomic DNA; SHOT GUN cloning method. DNA sequence analysis methods: Sanger Dideoxy method and Fluorescence method; Gene variation and Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms (SNPs); genetic analysis, linkage mapping, Expressed sequenced tags (ESTs); Gene-disease association.
Unit 5: Recombinant DNA technology: DNA cloning basics, Polymerase chain reaction, FISH, RFLP, RAPD. Human genome project. Genome-Wide Association Studies. Metagenomics
References: 1. R.M.Twyman, Principles of Proteomics, BIOS Scientific Publishers, 2004. 2. P.Michael Conn, Handbook of Proteomic Method. Humana Press, Totowa,
New Jersay, USA, 2003. 3. Kraj A. and Silberring J. Proteomics – Introduction to Methods and Applications (Wiley – Interscience 2008) 4. Cantor and Smith, Genomics. John Wiley & Sons, 1999. 5. Introduction to Genomics - Arthur M Lesk, Oxford University Press, 2007. 6. L.Stryer, Biochemistry, W. H. Freeman and Co., New York, 2007.
355
3.2 Biology of Immune System Unit 1: Introduction to Biology of Immune System. Types of immunity – innate, acquired, passive
and active. Factors affecting Immune System. Organisation and structure of lymphoid organs
– bone marrow, thymus, spleen and lymphnodes. Cells of the immune system –
Hemotopoiesis and differentiation, lymphocyte trafficking, B-Lymphocytes, T-
Lymphocytes. T-cell receptor – structure and function. Macrophages, null cells, mononuclear cells, granulocytes. Types of cell mediated immunity. Dendritic cells - Natural killer and Lymphokine activated killer cells – Eosinophils - Neutrophils and Mast Cells. Clonal
nature of immune response, Immunological memory. Immuno regulation. Adjuvants, haptens
and immunological tolerance.
UNIT 2:
Nature of antigens and super antigens. Structure and function of antibodies. Isotypes, Allotypes
and Idiotypes. Antigen – antibody interactions. Antigen receptors on B & T lymphocytes. Major
Histocompatibility Complex (MHC). Structure and functions of MHC and HLA system.
Complement system.
UNIT 3:
Regulation of immune response: Antigen processing and presentation, generation of humoral and cell mediated immune responses. Activation of B and T Lymphocytes. Cytokines and their role in immune regulation, therapeutic use. T-cell regulation – their assay methods - MHC restriction - Immunological tolerance.
UNIT 4:
Immunological techniques - ELISA, RIA, Western Blot, Immunoblot and Immuno fluorescent
techniques. FACS. Hybridoma technology - production and applications of monoclonal
antibodies. Antibody engineering, chimeric antibodies.
Unit 5:
Hypersensitivity – types. Autoimmune diseases- diagnosis and treatment approaches, immunity
to infectious agents. Tissue and organ transplantation. Immunogy of rejection- mechanism. Vaccines and Vaccination, types of vaccines including new generation vaccines.
Tumor immunology- AIDS and other Immunodeficiences.
References: 1.Kuby Immunology, 5th Edition, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York. 2.Immunology - A short Course, 4th Edition Eli Benjamin, Richard Coico,
Geoffrey Sunshine. (Wiley-Liss) 3.Fundamentals of Immunology, William Pau1 4. Essential Immunology, I. Roitt, 1994, Blackwell Science, Singapore. 5.A.Bul and K. Abbas, 1994, Cellular and Molecular immunology. 6. Klaus, D. Elgert, 1996, Immunology – Understanding of immune system,
Wiley – Liss, New York.
356
3.3 Bioprocess technology Unit.1: Introduction to Bioprocess technology- Media design and usage in fermentation: Types of media, composition of media – carbon sources, nitrogen sources, vitamins and growth factors, mineral, inducers, precursors and inhibitors. Isolation, Screening Preservation and Maintenance of Industrial Microorganisms. Sterilization methods: Moist heat; dry heat, flame, filter, gas (ethylene oxide), HTST (high temperature/short time) treatments – continuous sterilizers and pasteurizers - Sterility, asepsis– medium sterilization, batch sterilization, contiuous sterilization, filter sterilization. Kinetics of microbial growth and death. Media for Industrial Fermentation, Air and Media Sterilization. Factors affecting microbial growth. Bioreactors.
Unit 2: Types of fermentation processes: Batch, Fed-batch and continuous bio reactions, stability of microbial reactors, analysis of mixed microbial populations, specialized bioreactors (pulsed, fluidized, photo bioreactors etc., Flow measurement and control, control system-manual and automatic.PID control. Role of Computers in bioprocess.
Unit 3: Downstream Processing: Introduction, Removal of microbial cells and solid Matter, foam separation, precipitation, filtration, centrifugation, cell disruptions, liquid-liquid extraction, chromatography - Ion Exchange, Molecular Sieve, Affinity, HPLC, Distillation, Fluid Extraction & Electrodialysis. Membrane process, Drying and Crystallization. Effluent treatment: B.O.D. and C.O.D. treatment and disposal of effluents
Unit 4: Enzyme and whole cell Immobilization and their Industrial Applications, Industrial Production of Chemicals: Alcohol (ethanol), Acids (citric, acetic and gluconic), solvents (glycerol, acetone, butanol), Antibiotics (penicillin, streptomycin, tetracycline), Amino acids (lysine, glutamic acid), Single cell Protein, Use of microbes in mineral beneficiation and oil recovery. Effluent treatment: DOC and COD treatment and disposal of effluents.
Unit 5: Food Technology- canning and packing, sterilization and Pasteurization, technology of typical Food/Food products (bread, cheese, idli, edible mushrooms), food preservation, fermented foods and probiotics. Single Cell Protein (algae/fungi).
357
References: 1. Biochemical Engineering, Aiba, S., Humphrey, A.E. and Millis, N.F. Univ.
of Tokyo Press, Tokyo 2. Biochemical Reactors, Atkinson, B., Pion Ltd., London 3. Biochemical Engineering Fundamentals, Baily, J.E. and Ollis, D.F.,
McGraw- Hill Book Co. New York 4. Bioprocess Technology: Fundamentals and Applications, KTH, Stockholm. 5. Process Engineering in Biotechnology, Jackson, A. T., Prentice Iiall,
Engelwood Cliffs 6. Bioprocess Engineering: Basic Concepts, Shuler, M.L. and Kargi, F.,
Prentice Hall, Engelwood Cliffs 7. Principles of Fermentation Technology, Stanbury, P.F and Whitaker, A.,
Pergamon Press, Oxford 8. Bio reaction Engineering Principles, Nielson,J. and Villadsen, J., Plenum
Press 9. Chemical Engineering Problems in Biotechnology, Shuler, M.L. (Ed.),
AICHE 10. Biochemical Engineering, Lee, J .M., Prentice Hall Inc. 11. Bioprocess Engineering - Kinetics, Mass Transport, Reactors and Gene
Expression, Vieth, W.F., John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Practical 3
1. Blood film preparation and identification of cells
2. Immunization, Collection of Serum, ELISA
3. Double immuno diffusion and Immuno-electrophoresis, Rocket immune electrophoresis
4. Single Radial Immuno diffusion
5. Purification of IgG from serum
6. PAGE
7. Western-blotting.
8. 2D gel electrophoresis
9. Hapten Conjugation and quantitation
10. Microarray
11. Determination of total dissolved solids of water 12. Determination of dissolved oxygen concentration of water sample 13. Determination of biological oxygen demand (BOD) of sewage sample 14. Determination of chemical oxygen demand (COD) of sewage sample 15. Determine the efficiency of removal of air pollutant using fibrous air filter 16. NPV isolation & observation in the infestation of insect larvae (lepidopteron larvae)
by NPV. 17. Estimation of nitrate in drinking water
358
SEMESTER IV 4.1 Bioinformatics and biophysics
UNIT 1: Bioinformatics, - an overview, Scope and applications. Algorithm- definition and examples- Types of Algorithm-iterative, recursive, fast and slow algorithms. Introduction of digital computers: File management. Data mining, Data ware housing, Organization; low- level and high-level languages; binary number system. Flow charts and programming techniques.
Unit 2: DNA databank--the EMBL nucleotide sequence data bank- genbank- DDBJ. Ramachandran map. Enzyme databases-cloning vector data bases. BLAST, FASTA algorithm to analysis sequence data. Pair-wise alignment and Mutiple alignment of nucleic acids and protein sequences. CLUSTALW.
Unit 3: Secondary structure prediction of RNA. Homology modeling, threading. RASMOL, MOLMOL. Protein docking, Drug designing. Mathematical modeling of Protein. Access of web based bioinformatics tools.
Unit 4: Biophysics: Definition, scope and methods. Atomic structure, atomic orbital, wave functions - electronic structure of atoms, spin of particles - relationship between atomic structure and chemical properties. Molecule: - different types of bonds - molecular orbital, chirality in biological systems.
UNIT 5: Proteins: Protein structure (primary, secondary, tertiary & quaternary), Globular, Fibrous
proteins; Ramachandran plot. Three dimensional structure and confirmation using physical methods (ORD, Circular Dichroism, ESR). PAGE, SDS-PAGE, Diagonal Electrophoresis. DNA – protein interactions; DNA-drug interactions.
Reference: 1. Introduction to computers - Balaguruswamy 1. Molecular database for protein sequence and structure studies by Sillince
l. A and Silline.M. (1991). Springer verlag. 2. Nucleic acid and proteins sequence analysis: A Practical approach:
M.l.Bishop and C.l. Rawlings. IRL Press 3. An Introduction to Bioinformatics Algorithms,2005 N.C. Jonesand P.A.
Pevzner, Ane Books, New Delhi. 5. Physical Biochemistry, Applications to Biochemistry and Molecular Biology -
D, Freifelder.
6. General Biophysics, Vol. I & II - H.V. Volkones.
7. Molecular Biophysics - B. Pullman & M. Voino.
359
4.2 Research methodology and Biostatistics
Unit 1: Research methodology: An introduction- Meaning, objective and types of research. Defining research problem-selection of problems. Sampling design-random sample. Measurement and scaling techniques, error in measurement.
Unit 2: Methods of data collection- primary data- interview method, questionnaire. secondary data, case study method. Online data base library. The computer and its role in research. Binary number system.
Unit 3: Preparation of scientific documents, research papers, review articles, format of journals - proof reading. Journals: standard of research journals, impact factor, citation index, methods of citation. Oral presentation, poster presentation, Bibliography, thesis writing.
Unit 4: Hypothesis- definition, basic concepts concerning testing of hypotheses, test of hypotheses and its limitations. Measures of central tendency, dispersion. Mean - standard deviation- standard error - coefficient of variation.
Unit 5: Chi square test, students t test, ANOVA, ANOCOVA. significance test and fixing levels of significance - use of statistical softwares. Correlation and regression, correlation and coefficient.
References: 1. Montgomery, Douglas C. (2007), 5/e, Design and Analysis of Experiments, ( Wiley India)
2. Kothari C.K. (2004), 2/e, Research Methodology‐ Methods and Techniques ( New
Age International, New Delhi) 3.Statistics for the Life Sciences, 4rd ed., Samuels, M. L. and J. A. Witmer, 2012; Prentice-Hall
4.3 Medical biotechnology UNIT 1 : Molecular aspect of Diseases: Genetic: Huntington's disease, sickle-cell disease, Klinefelter syndrome, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Parkinson‘s disease, Coronary artery diseases; Microbial: Hepatitis, Lyme Disease, AIDS, Tuberculosis; Metabolic: Diabetes mellitus, Faber‘s disease, muscle diseases.
Unit 2: Diagnosis of diseases: Prenatal diagnosis - Invasive and Non-invasive techniques; monoclonal antibodies. protein and enzyme markers, DNA probes, Enzyme probes, Proteomics for diagnosis, Nanodiagnosticts.
360
UNIT 3: Vaccinology: Health care products: rDNA drugs and vaccines- insulin, growth hormone, factor VIII, tissue plasminogen activator, interferons, lymphokines and Hepatitis-B vaccines. DNA based vaccines. Current strategies for development of vaccines against HIV, Malaria, Tuberculosis.
Unit 4: Drugs and their mechanism: Aspirin, Paracetamol, Avil, antibiotics, antiviral drugs, drugs for metabolic diseases, anti-cancer. Anti hypertensive drugs, Bronchodilator drugs and their mode of actions.
Unit 5: Future of medical biotechnology: Individualized medicine; Gene therapy, Nanomedicine – Nanoparticles, Nanodevices-medical microrobotics, Nanomedicine and Nanosurgery – for cancers, neurological disorders, Stem cell therapy.
References: 1. Medical Biotechnology; Albert Sasson (2006), United Nations Publications 2. Medical Biotechnology; S. N. Jogland (2000), Himalaya Publication 3. Medical Devices and Systems in Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Vol 2; Joseph
Bronzino & Bronzino and Bronzino 4. The Proteus effect, Ann B Parson (2006); National Academic Press 5. Biotechnology and Biopharmaceuticals (2003), Rodney J.Y. Ho an milo Gilbaldi,
Wiley John & sons. 6. Stem Cell Now : Christopher Thomas Scott (2005) Penguin group (USA) 7. Biotechnology Demystified Sharon Walker (2006) McGrow Hill Publication
INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY (Elective)
Unit 1: Strain selection, Media design and Inoculum development, Types of microbial products (Biomass, primary or secondary metabolites, bioconversion products etc), Strain selection and improvement methods, Principles of microbial nutrition and media formulations for cell growth and product formations.
Unit 2: Factors influencing the choice of various carbon and nitrogen sources, vitamins, minerals, precursors and antifoam agents. Importance of medium pH and Temperature, Development of inoculation for industrial fermentations.
Unit 3: Bioreactors and aseptic operation: Basic design and construction of bioreactors and accessories – types of industrial reactors and modes of operations (Stirred tank, air –lift, bubble column, bed, packed- bed). Methods of sterilization – thermal death kinetics, logarithmic and non- logarithmic), Batch and continuous sterilization, Air sterilization – design and air filter, Aseptic operation of fermentor.
361
Unit 4: Immobilization Technology: Merits and demerits of cell and enzyme immobilization, methods of preparation of immobilizing agents – properties and applications of immobilized enzyme and microorganisms, biotransformations, Characterization of immobilized biocatalyst.
Unit 5: Fermentation Technology: Various unit operations involved in Upstream and downstream processing of microbial products: Antibiotics, Organic acids, Alcoholic beverages and industrial enzymes. Production of baker‘s yeast, Single cell protein, biofertilizers and biopesticides, Microbial bioconversion (Production of α- hydroxyl progesterone, L- phenyl alanine, L- sorbose etc.)
References:
1. Molecular cloning – A laboratory Manual, Sambrook, 2000. Fritsch & Maniatis, Coldspring Harbor Lab Press.
2. Biotechnology – The Biological Principles, M. D. 1998, Trevan, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub.
3. Basic Biotechnology, 1998. Ignacimuthu, S., Mc- Graw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd. 4. Principles of Biotechnology, 1996, Old R. D. & S. B. Primrose, Blackwell Sci.
Pub. 5. Plant Biotechnology – Recent Advances, 2000. Trivedi P.C., Panima Pub. 6. Concepts in Biotechnology, Balasubramanian, 2005, D. Bryce, C. F. A.
Dharmalingam, K. Green, J. and Jeyaraman, K., university press (India) Ltd.
STEM CELL BIOLOGY (Elective)
Unit 1: Stem Cell Basics: Stem cell, embryonic stem cells, embryonic germ cell, Bone marrow stem cells, Adult stem cell, Differentiation. Introduction to concepts in stem cell biology (renewal, potency, etc.). Stem cell characterizations: isolation & characterizations, markers & their identification, growth factor requirements and their maintenance in culture. Pluripotency and Reprogramming.
Unit 2:
Hematopoietic Stem Cell. Induced pluripotent stem (Ips) cell technology. Epigenetic memory in iPS cells. Epigenetic controls of stem cells. Early embryonic development.
Lymphoid cell differentiation and maturation. Cell cycle regulators in stem cells.
Molecular mechanisms of self-renewal, pluri/multipotency and lineage differentiation. Molecular basis of pleuripotency and stem cell niche.
Unit 3: The human umbilical cord: A source of stem cells. Isolation of mesenchymal stem cell (MSCs) from the umbilical cord. In vitro Differentiation potential of Umbilical cord mesenchymal stem cell. In vivo applications of UCSC. Cord blood stem cells transplantation: Advantages and disadvantages. Cord blood banking.
362
Unit 4: Generation and Manipulation of Mouse Embryonic Stem Cells. Generation and Manipulation of Human Embryonic Stem Cells. Animal Models of Regeneration (Hydra, Planaria, Earthworm, Zebra fish, etc.).
Unit 5: Cancer stem cell- The origin of cancer stem cells, the impact of cancer stem cell concept on cancer therapy. Epigenetics and Reprogramming in Stem Cell Biology. Stem Cell Gene Therapy. Stem cell therapy for neurodegenerative diseases. Stem cell therapy for cardiac regeneration. Clinical cell transplantation for leukemia. Ethical issues associated with stem cell biology.
References: 1) T. J. Kindt, R. A. Goldsby and B.A. Osborne, Kuby, Immunology, 2007, W. H. Freeman & Company. 2) P. Delves, S. Martin, D. Burton and I. Roitt, Roitt's Essential Immunology, Latest Edition, 2006, Wiley-Blackwell. 3) A.K. Abbas, A. Lichtman, and J. S. Pober, Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 2000, W.B. Saunders Company. 4) C. A Janeway, Jr, P. Travers, M. Walport, and M. J. Shlomchik, Immunology, 2001, Garland Science.
PRACTICAL 4
1. Pairwise alignment 2. Multiple alignment/ phylogenic tree construction 3. BLAST 4. FASTA 5. CLUSTALW 6. Protein structure viewing – RASMOL, AUTODOCK, SWISS PDB VIEWER 7. Protein ligand interaction. 8. Plasmid isolation 9. Electrophoresis of DNA -linear, circular and super coiled 10. Restriction digestion 11. Preparation of competent cells. 12. Ligation and transformation. 13. Nucleic acid bloting/ hybridization 14. Determination of Tm of nucleic acid 15. Effect of pH on nucleic acids 16. PCR primer designing 17. Enzyme: purification and kinetic analysis
363
APPENDIX - AZ103
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI – 12
M.Sc. BIOINFORMATICS (CBCS-For Colleges)
(Effective from the Academic Year 2012 – 2013 onwards)
II year syllabus with Course Structure
Eligibility for Admission
A pass with 50% marks in Bachelors Degree in any one of the following as one of the
major subjects : Agriculture, Applied Science, Zoology, Animal Science, Biochemistry,
Biology, Biotechnology, Bioinformatics, Botany, Plant Biology, Biochemistry and Plant
Biotechnology, Chemistry, Computer Science, Computer Applications (BCA),
Information Technology, Electronics, Environmental Science, Food Science & Nutrition,
Mathematics, Microbiology, Pharmacy, Physics, Statistics, Medical sciences
(MBBS/BDS/B.V.Sc.) and B.Pharm. of any recognized Indian or Foreign university.
I Semester
Subject
1. Cell and Molecular Biology
2. Introduction to Bioinformatics
3. Programming in C
4 (A). Structural Biology (OR)
4 (B). Fundamentals of Algorithms
1. Lab in Bioinformatics and Computational Biology
2. Lab in Programming in C, PERL and R
Total (4 Courses)
II Semester
Subject
5. Computational Biology
6. Mathematics and Statistics
7. Programming in PERL
8 (A). Applied Statistics for Bioinformatics using R
(OR)
8 (B). Soft Computing Methods
1. Lab in Bioinformatics and Computational Biology
2. Lab in Programming in C, PERL and R
Total (6 Courses)
364
Hours Credits
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
3 --
3 --
30 20 Hours Credits
6 4
6 4
6 4
6 5
3 2
3 2
30 25
Code
Core
Elective
(Any one)
Practical
(Exam will be
at II Semester)
Code
Core
Elective
(Any one)
Practical
III Semester
Subject
9. Molecular Modelling and Drug Design
10. Genomics and Proteomics
11. Programming in C++ and Java
12. Project and Viva-Voce
3. Lab in Programming in C++, Java, and Python
4. Lab in Molecular Modelling, Genomics, Proteomics
and Cheminformatics
Total (4 Courses)
IV Semester
Subject
13. Cheminformatics
14. Systems Biology
15. Programming in Python
16 (A). Medical Informatics (OR)
16 (B). Experimental Techniques of Biomolecules
3. Lab in Programming in C++, Java, and Python
4. Lab in Molecular Modelling, Genomics, Proteomics
and Cheminformatics
Total (6 Courses)
Total Number of Subjects : 20 (15 Theory + 4 Practical + 1 Project)
Total Number of Hours : 120
Total Number of Credits : 90
.
365
Hours Credits
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
3 --
3 --
30 20 Hours Credits
6 4
6 4
6 4
6 5
3 2
3 2
30 25
Code
Core
Project
Practical
(Exam will be
at
IV Semester)
Code
Core
Elective
(Any One)
Practical
III SEMESTER
9. Molecular Modelling and Drug Design
Unit I: Introduction to molecular force fields: General features - bond stretching, angle bending, improper torsions, out of plane bending, cross terms, non-bonded interactions, point charges, calculation of atomic charges, polarization, van der waals interactions, hydrogen bond interactions, Water models. Types of force field - all atoms force field, united atom force field, etc.
Unit II: Molecular Energy minimization: Steepest descent, conjugate gradient – Derivatives, First order steepest decent and conjugate gradients. Second order derivatives Newton- Raphson, Minima, maxima saddle points and convergence criteria.-non derivatives minimization methods: the simplex and sequential univariative methods.
Unit III: Molecular Dynamics Simulation methods: Classical Molecular Dynamics: Newtonian dynamics, Integration algorithm, Periodic boundary conditions and minimum image convention, Potential truncation and shifted-force potentials, Neighbour list, Force calculations, Long range interactions, MD code for liquid Argon. Classical Monte Carlo: Random numbers, Evaluating integrals using random numbers, Importance sampling, Metropolis algorithm, Smart MC techniques. Analysis of simulated trajectories: Radial distribution functions, Self diffusion coefficient, Time correlation functions
Unit IV: Drug and Vaccine design: Drug discovery process. Role of Bioinformatics in drug design. Target identification and validation, lead optimization and validation. Structure- based drug design and ligand based drug design. Modeling of target-small molecule interactions. Fundamentals of docking small and macromolecules to proteins and nucleic acids. Vaccine design: Reverse vaccinology and immunoinformatics. Databases in Immunology. B-cell epitope prediction methods. T-cell epitope prediction methods. Resources to study antibodies, antigen-antibody interactions
Unit V: Structure Activity Relationship: QSARs and QSPRs, QSAR Methodology, Various Descriptors used in QSARs: Electronics; Topology; Quantum Chemical based Descriptors. Use of Genetic Algorithms, Neural Networks and Principle Components Analysis in the QSAR equations
REFERENCES: 1. Molecular Modeling Principles and Applications (2nd Ed.) by Andrew R. Leach, 2001, Prentice Hall, USA. 2. Molecular Modeling and Simulation – An interdisciplinary Guide by Tamar Schlick, 2000, Springer-verlag. 3. Computational medicinal chemistry for drug discovery edited by Patrick Bultinck, 2004, Marcel Dekker Inc.
366
10. Genomics and Proteomics Unit I: Genomics and Metagenomics: Large scale genome sequencing strategies. Genome assembly and annotation. Genome databases of Plants, animals and pathogens. Metagenomics: Gene networks: basic concepts, computational model such as Lambda receptor and lac operon. Prediction of genes, promoters, splice sites, regulatory regions: basic principles, application of methods to prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomes and interpretation of results. Basic concepts on identification of disease genes, role of bioinformatics-OMIM database, reference genome sequence, integrated genomic maps, gene expression profiling; identification of SNPs, SNP database (DbSNP). Role of SNP in Pharmacogenomics, SNP arrays. Basic concepts in identification of Drought stress response genes, insect resistant genes, nutrition enhancing genes
Unit II: Epigenetics: DNA microarray: database and basic tools, Gene Expression Omnibus (GEO), ArrayExpress, SAGE databases DNA microarray: understanding of microarray data, normalizing microarray data, detecting differential gene expression, correlation of gene expression data to biological process and computational analysis tools (especially clustering approaches)
Unit III: Comparative genomics: Basic concepts and applications, whole genome alignments: understanding the significance; Artemis, BLAST2, MegaBlast algorithms, PipMaker, AVID, Vista, MUMmer, applications of suffix tree in comparative genomics, synteny and gene order comparisons Comparative genomics databases: COG, VOG
Unit IV: Functional genomics: Application of sequence based and structure-based approaches to assignment of gene functions – e.g. sequence comparison, structure analysis (especially active sites, binding sites) and comparison, pattern identification, etc. Use of various derived databases in function assignment, use of SNPs for identification of genetic traits. Gene/Protein function prediction using Machine learning tools viz. Neural network, SVM etc
Unit V: Proteomics: Protein arrays: basic principles. Computational methods for identification of polypeptides from mass spectrometry. Protein arrays: bioinformatics-based tools for analysis of proteomics data (Tools available at ExPASy Proteomics server); databases (such as InterPro) and analysis tools. Protein-protein interactions: databases such as DIP, PPI server and tools for analysis of protein-protein interactions REFERENCES: 1. Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics (3rd Ed.) by Primrose, S.B. and Twyman, R.M., 2003, Blackwell Publishing Company, Oxford, UK. 2. Introduction to proteomics – Tools for the new biology (1st Ed.) by Liebler, D.C., 2002, Human Press Inc., New Jersey, USA. 3. Bioinformatics and Functional Genomics by Pevsner, J., 2003, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, USA. 4. Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis by Mount, D., 2004, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York.
367
11. Programming in C++ and Java
Unit I: Object Oriented Programming (OOP) - Basic concepts and applications - Differences between C and C++ - Functions in C++ - inline Functions - Default arguments.
Unit II: Function overloading/polymorphism - Classes and objects - Constructors and destructors - Operator overloading and type conversions.
Unit III: Extending classes - Inheritance and its types - Single level, multilevel, multiple and hybrid inheritance - Pointers to objects and derived classes - Virtual functions - C++ stream classes - Console I/O operations - Simple Data File operations
Unit IV: Java Basics - Importance and features of java, Modifiers, Access Controls, Data types, Expressions, Declarations, Statements & Control Structures, Program Structures, Packages, Interfaces, Working with java util Package, Garbage Collection- Multithreaded Programming- Java Thread Model - Creating a Thread and Multiple Threads - Thread Priorities- String handling- I/O Applets- the Applet class.
Unit V: BioJava - Installing BioJava, Symbols, Basic Sequence Manipulation (DNA to RNA, Reverse Complement, motif as regular expression), Translation (DNA to Protein, Codon to amino acid, Six frame translation), Proteomics (Calculate the mass and pI of a peptide), Sequence I/O (File Formats conversions), Locations and Features (PointLocation, RangeLocation, Feature modifications), BLAST and FASTA (Blast and FastA Parser, extract information from parsed results), Counts and Distributions, Weight Matrices and Dynamic Programming, User Interfaces.
REFERENCES: 1. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in C++, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2004. 2. Robert Lafore, Object-Oriented Programming in Turbo C++, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi, 1991. 3. Herbert Schildt, Java - A Beginners Guide (4 Ed.), 2007, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill
4. Computing Concepts with Java 2 Essentials (2 Ed.) by Horstmann, C.S., 2000, John
5. Object Oriented Design and Applications (2 Ed.) by Benjamin, Cummings and Booch, G., 1994, Addison Wesley Publishers.
12. Project and Viva-Voce
Project Report - 60 Marks Viva-voce - 40 Marks ----------------------------------- Total - 100 Marks
368
th
publication nd
Wiley Publishers. nd
1 The Project for PG students shall be ―Individual Project‖ 2 Project report evaluation will be done centrally and Viva-Voce will be
conducted by both the External examiner and the guide at the end of third semester
Practical 3. Lab in Programming in C++, Java, and Python
Programming in C++:
1. Write a C++ program to convert temperature given in Farenheit into Celsius and ii) Celsius to Farenheit.
2. Write a C++ program to swap two values using reference variable. 3. Write a C++ program to find all possible roots of a quadratic equation. 4. Write a C++ program to compute the mean and standard deviation of a given n
values. 5. Write a C++ program to compute matrix addition, subtraction and multiplication of
two matrices using functions 6. Write a C++ program by defining two functions with the same name power() to raise
a number m to a power n. One function takes a double value for m and int value for n and the other function having the same name takes a int value for m and int value for n. Write a main function that calls both the functions to demonstrate the function overloading.
7. Write a C++ program using class to find the smallest of two numbers. 8. Write a C++ program with the following specifications:
a. Define a class to represent a gene sequence data. Include the following members:
Data members: Name of the gene Gene id Length A, T, G, C content
Member functions: To read data for a gene To compute A, T, G, C content To display all the details of a gene
b. Write a main program to test the program by reading n gene sequences data. 9. Write a C++ program to exchange the private values of two classes using a common
friend function. 10. Write a C++ program to find the sum of two complex numbers using overloaded
constructors for data input and operator overloading
Programming in Java:
1. Write a java program to find addition of two matrices using arrays. 2. Write a java program to display a multiplication table in the format n × i = m 3. Write a java program to check whether a string is palindrome or not 4. Write a java program to find greatest and smallest element of an array 5. Write a java program to create a simple circle using java applet
369
6. Write a BioJava program to compute physicochemical properties of a protein
sequence 7. Create a simple circle using java applets
Programming in Python:
1. Write a Python program to calculate addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division
2. Write a simple CGI program which contains all html form fields using Python 3. Create a simple application using Python Tkinter 4. Write a program using BioPython to find complement, reverse, reverse
complement, transcription, and translation of a DNA sequence. 5. Write a Python program to draw a protein hydrophobicity plot using
SciPy/MatPlotLib package
IV SEMESTER 13. Cheminformatics
Unit I: Introduction: Introduction to chemoinformatics, History and Evolution of chemoinformatics, Use of chemoinformatics, Prospects of chemoinformatics, Molecular Modeling and Structure Elucidation
Unit II: Representation of Molecules and Chemical Reactions: Nomenclature; Different types of Notations; SMILES Coding; Matrix Representations; Structure of Molfiles and Sdfiles; Libraries and toolkits; Different electronic effects; Reaction classification
Unit III: Searching Chemical Structure: Full structure search; sub structure search; basic ideas; similarity search; Three dimensional search methods; Basics of Computation of Physical and Chemical Data and structure descriptors; Data visualization and Non- linear Mapping
Unit IV: Computer Assisted Virtual screening design: Structure Based Virtual Screening- Protein Ligand Docking, Scoring Functions for Protein Ligand docking, Practical aspects of structure based Virtual Screening; Prediction of ADMET Properties, 2 D and 3D data searching, Chemical databases, Role of computers in Chemical Research.
Unit V: Application of Chemoinformatics in Drug Design: Quantitative Structure-Property Relations; Descriptor Analysis; Computer Assisted Structure elucidations; Target Identification and Validation; Lead Finding and Optimization; Analysis of HTS data; Design of Combinatorial Libraries; Ligand-Based and Structure Based Drug design
370
REFERENCES: 1. Andrew R. Leach, Valerie J. Gillet, Introduction to Chemoinformatics, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Netherlands, 2003. 2. Lisa B. English, Combinatorial Library Methods and Protocols, Humana Press Inc, Volume 2, 2002. 3. Frank Jensen, Introduction to Computational Chemistry, Wiley Publisher, Second Edition, 2006.
14. Systems Biology
Unit I: Introduction: Systems Biology Networks- basics of computer networks, Biological uses and Integration. Micro array – definition, Applications of Micro Arrays in systems biology. Selforganizing maps and Connectivity maps - definition and its uses. Networks and Pathways – Types and methods. Metabolic networks.
Unit II: Simulation of pathways: Whole cell: Principle and levels of simulation – Virtual Erythrocytes. Pathological analysis. Flux Balance Analysis. Biochemical metabolic pathways, Metabolomics and enzymes. Interconnection of pathways, metabolic regulation. Translating biochemical networks into linear algebra. Cellular models. Networks and Motifs: Gene Networks: basic concepts, computational models. Lambda receptor and lac operon as an example. All types of networks and its uses.
Unit III: Signalling & Experimental methods in systems biology: slow and auto–regulation The coherent FFL- temporal order, FIFO, DOR, Global, Development, memory and irreversibility signalling networks and neuron circuits-robust adaptation–any model. Robustness and optimality in Biology: model and integral feedback- signaling/bifunctional enzymes. Perfect robustness- Role and its measurement. Linking models and measurement, concepts, calibration and identification, data Vs metadata.
Unit IV: Design of Circuits and Databases: Introduction- databases KEGG, EMP, MetaCyc, AraCyc etc., Expression databases and various databases related to systems biology. Optional design of gene circuits I- cost and benefit: gene circuits II- selection of regulation. Stochasticity in gene expression.
Unit V: Synthetic Biology: Introduction, definition and Basics, Synthetic Oligonucleotide/DNA- based, RNA-based, Peptide-based and polyketide Technologies and Applications, Technologies and Applications of Directed Evolution and Microbial Engineering, Potential Hazards of Synthetic Biology
371
REFERENCES: 1. Systems Biology: Definitions and perspectives by L. Alberghina H. V. Westerhoff, 2005, Springer 2. Synthetic Biology, A New Paradigm for Biological Discovery, a report by Beachhead Consulting, Feb 2006 3. Computational systems biology by A.Kriete, R.Eils, 2005, Academic press. 4. Systems Biology in practice: Concepts, Implementation and applications by E. Klipp, R. Herwig, A. Kowlad, C. Wierling and H. Lehrach, 2005, Wiley InterScience 5. Systems Biology and Synthetic Biology by Pengcheng Fu, Sven Panke, 2009, Wiley InterScience
372
15. Programming in Python
Unit I: Introduction to Python: Data types, variables, expressions, operators. Sequence, set, dictionary, print statement, control-flow statements, functions.
Unit II: Objects and classes, metaclasses. Decorators, special methods. Exception handling. Modules sys, os, etc. Strings and regular expressions. File operations. Working with processes and threads. Pipes and signals
Unit III: Graphical user interface design in Python (including the Tkinter module), Widgets and basic components, Layout options, Event handling
Unit IV: Network scripting (sockets, FTP, and e-mail clients), Server-side scripting. Databases and persistence in Python (including pickled objects and shelf files)
Unit V: Custom and built-in data structures in Python. C integration with Python (including the SWIG module), Embedding Python calls within C. Introduction to BioPython.
REFERENCES: 1. Programming Python by Mark Lutz, O‘Reilly 2. Learning Python, 3rd Edition by Mark Lutz, O‘Reilly 3. Python in a Nutshell by Alex Martelli, O‘Reilly 4. An Introduction to Python by Guido van Rossum and Jr. Fred L. Drake, Network Theory Ltd
16 (A). Medical Informatics
Unit I: Introduction to medical informatics: Basic concepts in health informatics and its history, definitions, sub disciplines and professional organizations and activities.
Unit II: Major applications and commercial vendors: Major health informatics applications including electronic medical records (EHR) and computerized physician order entry (CPOE). Data interoperability of records; Medical controlled vocabularies and electronic data interchange standards. Commercial and open source applications.
Unit III: Good clinical practices (GCP): GCP history and guidelines; India and the world in GCP; Standard operating procedure and guidelines; Current issues in India and abroad. Institutional review boards and protection of human health.
373
Unit IV: Information systems design and engineering: Planning and implementing issues of healthcare information systems. Software engineering principles, human factors and human-computer interaction issues, and evaluation methods of end user acceptance and outcomes.
Unit V: New opportunities and emerging trends: Information technologies in healthcare; wireless and handheld devices, social computing paradigms, and eHealth applications, web-based tools.
REFERENCES: 1. Taylor Paul, From Patient Data to Medical Knowledge: The Principles and Practice of Health Informatics, Blackwell Scientific Publishing, 2006.
16 (B). Experimental Techniques of Biomolecules
Unit I:
Isolation and purification of proteins - Crystallization of protein – Crystal Structure – Bravais Lattice – Symmetry elements and operations – Point groups – Space groups – Bragg‘s law – X-ray diffraction - Proteins structure determination by X-ray diffraction - Phase determination - Calculation of electron density map - Interpretation of electron density map - Refinement of the structures - Electron crystallography of proteins – High throughput techniques in Crystallography
Unit II:
Electronic energy levels – electronic transitions – selection rules – types of spectra – IR, UV – visible spectroscopy - Measurement of Infrared (IR) spectrum – Theory of IR spectroscopy – IR spectra of polyatomic molecules – biological examples – Theory of UV - visible spectroscopy – application of UV spectra to proteins – measurement of molecular dynamics by fluorescence spectroscopy
Unit III: The principle of Nuclear Spin – Spin flipping – theory of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance – spectral parameters in NMR – intensity, chemical shift, spin-spin coupling, relaxation times, line widths, nuclear Overhauser effect (NOE), chemical exchange, paramagnetic centers – application of NMR in biomolecular structure determination.
Unit IV: Principles of electrophoresis – SDS PAGE – Molecular weight determination of proteins - 2D-gel electrophoresis – capillary electrophoresis - principles of chromatography – Gel & ion exchange chromatography – applications
Unit V: Micro array techniques and their applications in biology - Mass spectroscopy - ESI and MALDI-TOF - protein finger printing.
374
REFERENCES: 1. W. Kemp, Organic Spectroscopy, 3rd edition, ELBS, McMillan, London, 1991. 2. C. N. Banwell and E.M.McCash, Fundamentals of molecular spectroscopy, 4th
edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1995. 3. I. Howe, D. H. Williams and R. D. Bowen, Mass Spectrometry, principles and
applications, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, London, 1981. 4. Gary Siuzdak, Mass Spectroscopy for Biotechnology, Academic Press, 1995. 5. Cunico, Gooding and Wehr Bay, Basic HPLC and CE of Biomolecules, Bioanalytical
Lab, 1998. 6. Van Holde, Principles of Physical Biochemistry, Prentice Hall, 2000. 7. Helen C. Causton, John Quackenbush and Alvis Brazma, A Beginner‘s Guide:
Microarray Gene Expression Data Analysis, Blackwell Publishing, USA, First Indian Reprint, 2004.
8. Vasantha Pattabhi and N. Gautham, Biophysics, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.
Practical 4. Lab in Molecular Modelling, Genomics, Proteomics and Cheminformatics
Molecular Modelling and Cheminformatics:
1. To perform the consensus secondary structure prediction for a given protein sequence at NSP@ by selecting six different methods
2. To identify the fold for a given protein sequence using 3-D PSSM fold recognition server
3. To find the structural neighbours of a given protein (2TRX) according to SCOP, CATH, FSSP and CE. To find out if any particular structure is identified by all these classifications.
4. Protein structure prediction and validation a. Primary feature computing by PROTPARAM b. Secondary structure by SOPMA c. 3D structure by PSI-BLAST tool, SWISS-MODEL and SAVS server
(MODELER software) 5. Protein structural alignment and classification
a. Pairwise structural alignment by DALITE server b. Multiple structural alignments by DALI/ConSurf server c. Structural classification by SCOP and CATH servers
6. Retrieval chemical information from PUBCHEM and Ligand databases 7. Retrieving pharmacological information from Pharma base and MSDchem database 8. Prediction of binding affinity of ligand by protein-ligand interaction database tools 9. Ligand design and analysis by ISIS ChemDraw, VMD software 10. Protein-ligand interaction prediction by ArgusLab and Discovery Studio software 11. Binding site identification of target by Q-site finder server 12. Molecular properties prediction by VEGAZ software 13. Molecular dynamics simulation by GROMAS software 14. Molecular force field analysis by TINKER software 15. Drug activity test by ADMETox tools
375
Genomics and Proteomics:
1. Comparative genome annotation by VISTA tools 2. Bacterial operon prediction by OperonDB tools 3. Gene prediction by WebGene, ORF finder and COG database and GenoCluster
software 4. Promoter and regulan prediction by Virtual FootPrint 5. Prediction of secondary structure of rRNA by rRNA project and mFOLD server 6. Cloning vector construction by FastPCR, pDRAW software, WebCutter server and
Plasmid Genome Database 7. Identification of coding region by CRITICA and CodanDB tools 8. Identification of mutations in genes by GeneSNP-VISTA software 9. Recombination frequency analysis by MEGA, RAS and RAT software 10. Metabolic pathway prediction by UB-BBD and Pathway Hunter Tool 11. Protein network prediction by Sting and KEGG Net servers 12. Protein bulk properties prediction by WinGene/WinPep software 13. 2D gel data analysis by SWISS-2D GEL DB and NCI Flicker web server/software 14. Microarray data analysis by NCBI-OMNIBUS, TIGR Archive Viewer and TH4 /
BioConductor / BASE software
15. Mass spectroscopy data analysis by MSDB and Mascot/PeptIdent/GFS server
376
APPENDIX – AZ104
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
M. Sc ELECTRONICS (CBCS)
Scheme of examinations (2012 – 2013 onwards)
I SEMESTER
Components
1. Solid State Electronic Devices
2. Applied Mathematics
3. Signals and Systems
4. Elective Course I: Devices
(Or) Network Theory and analysis
5. Practical – I : Electronic Design
Total (4 Courses)
II SEMESTER
Components
6. Digital Signal Processing
7. Embedded Systems
8. Advanced Microprocessors
Elective Course II – Multimedia system (Or) Fundamental of Nanotechnology
10.Practical – I : Electronic Design Practical – II: Circuit Simulation
Total (6 Courses) 30 25
III SEMESTER
Components
11. Electromagnetic Theory
12. Nanoelectronics
13. Digital Design using VHDL
14. Practical – III: Digital Signal Processing
Project Work
Total (4 Courses)
376
TEACHING CREDITS HOURS
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6
30 20
TEACHING CREDIT
HOURS S
6 4
6 4
6 4
6 5
6 2x4 = 8
Electronic
TEACHING CREDIT HOURS S
6 5
6 5
6 5
6
6 5
30 20
IV SEMESTER
Components TEACHIN CREDIT G HOURS S
16. Advanced Medical Electronics 6 4
17. Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 6 4
18. Advanced Microcontrollers 6 4
19. Elective Course III: Optical Fibre 6 5 Communication and Networking
19. Practical – III : Digital Signal Processing Practical – IV : Embedded System 6 2x4 = 8
Total (6 Courses) 30 25
Total number of courses : 20 (16T + 4P)
Total number of hours : 120
Total number of Credits : 90
III SEMESTER
ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY
UNIT I: Vector Analysis
Introduction – Vectors and scalars - Vector Multiplication – Rectangular - Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinate System – Relationship and Transformation between coordinate systems. Vector Integration Line, Surface, Volume integrals -Vector differentiation - Gradient, Divergence, Curl their Physical meaning, Divergence theorem and Stokes Theorem - their physical interpretation.
UNIT II: Electrostatics
Coulomb's Law – Force between point charges - Electric Field Intensity - Electric Field due to discrete charges - Continuous charge distribution‘s and their electric fields – Electric flux, Gauss law, Gauss law application. Electric scalar potential. Gauss law and electric scalar potential. Calculation of electric field using different methods for different charge distributions. Electric charges uniformly distributed on an infinite and finite line, infinite sheet. Electric Field on the axis of a uniformly charged circular disc - Electric Field due to an infinite uniformly charged sheet. Electric field due to electrical dipole – Work done, Methods of images, Poisson and Laplace Equation, Dielectrics and its polarization. Capacitors. Boundary conditions.
UNIT III: Magnetostatics
Lorentz force equation. Hall effect, Calculation of magnetic flux density using the Biot- Savart Law, Amperes law, Magnetic vector potential, Magnetic scalar potential - Magnetic Field intensity due to a finite and infinite wire carrying a current I - Magnetic
377
field intensity on the axis of a circular and rectangular loop carrying a current I – Magnetic Flux. Force on a wire carrying a current I placed in a magnetic field - Torque on a loop carrying a current I - Magnetic moment. Ohm's law – Equation of continuity Inductance of loops and solenoids - Mutual and self inductance energy density in magnetic fields - Nature of magnetic materials - Magnetization and permeability - Boundary conditions.
UNIT IV: Time Varying Electric and Magnetic Fields
Faraday's law - Electromotive force and motional emf, Maxwell's equation. Displacement current - Modified form of Ampere's circuital law. Maxwell's four equations in integral form and differential form. Poynting vector and the flow of power.
UNIT V: Electromagnetic Waves
Derivation of Wave Equation - Uniform Plane Waves – Phasors - Phasor form of Maxwell‘s equation and Wave equation - Plane waves in free space and in a homogenous material. Plane waves in conducting medium and lossy dielectrics - Good conductors - Skin effect. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves – Conductor, dielectric - Brewster angle. Linear, elliptical and circular polarization - Brewster angle.
Text Book:
1. Engineering Electromagnetics, William H. Hayt, Tata McGraw - Hill publication,
India, 2003.
Reference Books:
1. Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, Nannapaneni Narayana Rao, 4th
Edition, Prentice hall of India, India, 2002. 2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balmain,
2ndedition, Prentice hall of India, India, 2003. 3. Elements of Electromagnetics, Sadiku, 4th Edition, Oxford University Press, India,
2007. 4. Applied Electromagnetics, Martin A. Plonus, McGraw-Hill, India, 2005.
378
III SEMESTER
NANOELECTRONICS
UNIT I: Introduction to Nanotechnology Background to nanotechnology: Types of nanotechnology and nanomachines – Periodic table – Atomic structure – Molecules and phases – Energy – Molecular and atomic size - Surface and dimensional space – Top down and bottom up; Molecular Nanotechnology: Electron microscope – Scanning electron microscope – Atomic force microscope- Scanning tunnelling microscope – Nanomanipulator – Nanotweezers – Atom manipulation - Nanodots – Self assembly – Dip pen nanolithography. Nanomaterials: Preparation - Plasma arcing – Chemical vapor deposition – Sol-gel – Electrodeposition – Ball milling -applications of nanomaterials.
UNIT II: Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics Fundamentals of logic devices: Requirements – Dynamic properties – Threshold gates; Physical limits to computations; Concepts of logic devices: Classifications – Two terminal devices – Field effect devices – Coulomb blockade devices – Spintronics – Quantum cellular automata – Quantum computing – DNA computer; performance of information processing systems - Basic binary operations, Measure of performance processing capability of biological neurons – Performance estimation for the human brain. Ultimate computation: power dissipation limit – dissipation in reversible computation – The ultimate computer.
UNIT III: Silicon MOSFETs & Quantum Transport Devices Silicon MOSFETS – Novel materials and alternate concepts - fundamentals of MOSFET Devices - Scaling rules – Silicon-dioxide based gate dielectrics – Metal gates – Junctions & contacts – Advanced MOSFET concepts. Quantum transport devices based on resonant tunneling: Electron tunneling – resonant tunneling diodes - resonant tunneling devices; Single electron devices for logic applications: Single electron devices – applications of single electron devices to logic circuits.
UNIT IV: Carbon Nanotubes Carbon Nanotube: Fullerenes - Types of nanotubes - Formation of nanotubes assemblies –purification of carbon nanotubes – Electronic propertics – Synthesis of carbon nanotubes -Carbon nanotube interconnects - Carbon nanotube FETs – Nanotube for memory applications - Prospects of an all carbon nanotube nanoelectronics.
UNIT V: Molecular Electronics Electrodes & contacts – functions – Molecular electronic devices – First test systems - Simulation and circuit design – Fabrication; Future applications: MEMS – Robots – Random access memory –Mass storage devices.
379
Text Books:
1. Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies, Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons and Burkhard Raguse, Chapman & Hall / CRC Press, Florida, 2002.
Reference Books: 1. NANO: The Essentials: Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,
T. Pradeep, 1st edition, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, India, 2007. 2. Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and
Novel Devices, Rainer Waser (Ed.), Wiley - Verlag, Weinheim, 2003
III SEMESTER
DIGITAL DESIGN USING VHDL UNIT I: Introduction Introduction to HDLs: Difference between HDL and other software languages – Different HDLs in vogue. Overview of digital system design using HDL. Basic VHDL Language Elements: Identifiers, Data objects, scalar and composite data types, Operators
UNIT II: Behavioural Modeling Behavioural Modeling with examples: Entity declaration, Architecture body, Process statement and sequential statements. Inertial and transport delay models, creating signal waveforms, signal drivers, effect of transport and inertial delays on signal drivers.
UNIT III: Data Flow and Structural Modeling Data Flow Modeling with examples: Concurrent signal assignment statement, Concurrent versus sequential signal assignment, Delta delays, Multiple drivers, Conditional signal assignment statement, selected signal assignment statement, concurrent assertion statement. Structural Modeling with examples: Component declaration, Component instantiation and examples, Direct instantiation of component.
UNIT IV: Subprograms and Packages Subprograms and Overloading: Functions and procedures with simple examples - subprogram overloading, Operator overloading. Packages and Libraries: Package declaration, package body, design file, design libraries, order of analysis, implicit visibility, explicit visibility, library clause and use clause. Advanced Features: Entity statements, Generate statements, Attributes, Aggregate targets, ports and their behaviour.
UNIT V: Simulation and Hardware Modeling Model Simulation: Simulation – Writing a Test Bench for a Combinational and Sequential circuits. Hardware Modeling Examples: Modeling entity interfaces, Modeling simple elements, Different styles of modeling, Modeling regular structures, Modeling delays, Modeling conditional operations, Modeling a clock divider and a pulse counter.
Text Books:
1. A VHDL Primer, J. Bhasker, 3rd edition, Prentice hall of india, New Delhi, 2007.
380
References Books:
1. Circuit design with VHDL, Volnei, Pedroni, Prentice hall of india, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Digital Systems Design using VHDL, Charles H. Roth Jr., PWS Publication, Boston, 1998.
3. Introductory VHDL: From Simulation to Synthesis, Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson Education Asia, India, 2001.
4. VHDL Programming by Example, Douglas L. Perry, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, India, 2002.
5. Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design, Stephen Brown & Zvonko Vranesic, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, India, 2002.
6. VHDL – Analysis & Modeling of Digital Systems, Zainalabedin Navabi , 2nd Edition, Tata Mcgraw-Hill publication, India, 1998
7. The Designers Guide to VHDL, Peter J. Ashenden, 2nd Edition, 1st Indian Reprint- Harcourt India Pvt. Ltd., India, 2001.
III SEMESTER
PRACTICAL III: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
A. List of Experiments using MATLAB / SCILAB / OCTAVE / WAB
1. Verification of Sampling theorem and Impulse response of a given system 2. Linear convolution and Circular convolution of two given sequences. 3. Autocorrelation and Cross correlation of a given sequence and verification of its
properties. 4. Solving a given difference equation. 5. Computation of N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and
phase spectrum. 6. Linear convolution of two sequences using DFT and IDFT. 7. Circular convolution of two given sequences using DFT and IDFT 8. Design and implementation of FIR filter to meet given specifications. 9. Design and implementation of IIR filter to meet given specifications.
B. List of Experiments using DSP PROCESSOR
1. Linear convolution and Circular convolution of two given sequences. 2. Computation of N- Point DFT of a given sequence 3. Realization of an FIR filter (any type) to meet given specifications .The input can
be a signal from function generator / speech signal. 4. Audio applications such as to plot time and frequency (Spectrum) display of
Microphone output plus a cosine using DSP. Read a wav file and match with their respective spectrograms
5. Noise: Add noise above 3 KHz and then remove; Interference suppression using 400 Hz tone.
6. Impulse response of first order and second order system
381
Reference Books:
1. Digital signal processing using MATLAB, Sanjeet Mitra, Tata McGraw-Hill
publication, India, 2001. 2. Digital signal processing using MATLAB, J.G. Proakis & Ingale, McGraw-Hill
publication, India, 2000. 3. B. Venkataramani and Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, Tata McGraw-Hill
publication, India, 2002.
III SEMESTER PROJECT WORK
The objective of the project work is to motivate the students for doing research and to
inculcate in them the self confidence to work independently. Each student should do an
individual project and they can freely choose their own topic of experimental nature. The
project should be of investigative type not a hobby project one.
Students are encouraged to take the project work as a challenge so that their project
will boost up their industrial career.
Periodic seminars should be conducted to assess the students. The students should
present the progress of the project to their respective guides and get the required
assistance from them.
At the completion of the project, the student will submit project report in the form of
dissertation which will be examined by the examiners.
The examination shall consist of i) evaluation of the dissertation and
ii) comprehensive viva– voce.
IV SEMESTER
ADVANCED MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
UNIT I: Physiology and Transducers
Cell and its structure – Action and resting – Potential propagation of action potential – Sodium pump – Nervous system – CNS – PNS – Nerve cell – Synapse – Cardio pulmonary system – Physiology of heart and lungs – Circulation and respiration – Transducers – Different types – Piezo-electric, ultrasonic, resistive, capacitive, inductive transducers – Selection criteria.
382
UNIT II: Electro – Physiological Measurements
Basic components of a biomedical system – Electrodes – Micro, needle and surface electrodes – Amplifiers – Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper amplifiers – Isolation amplifier. ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – Lead systems and recording methods – Typical waveforms
UNIT III: Non-Electrical Parameter Measurements
Measurement of blood pressure – Cardiac output – Cardiac rate – Heart sound – Respiratory rate – Gas volume – Flow rate of Co2, o2 in exhaust air - PH of blood, ESR, GSR measurements – Plethysmography.
UNIT IV: Medical Imaging and PMS
X-ray machine - Radio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques – Computer tomo-graphy – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy – Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems and patient monitoring – Electrical safety.
UNIT V: Assisting and Therapeutic Equipments
Pacemakers – Defibrillators – Ventilators – Nerve and muscle stimulators – Diathermy – Heart – Lung machine – Audio meters – Dializers.
Text Books:
1. Bio-Medical Instrumentation and Measurements, Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, Prentice hall of India, India, 2002.
References Books:
1. Handbook of Bio-Medical instrumentation, R.S. Khandpur, 2nd edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd., India, 2003. 2. Bio-Medical Instrumentation, M. Arumugam, Anuradha Agencies, 2003. 3. Principles of Applied Bio-Medical Instrumentation, L.A. Geddes and L.E. Baker,
2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1975. 4. Medical Instrumentation, J. Webster, John Wiley & Sons, 1995. 5. Principles of Medical Electronics and Bio-medical Instrumentation, C.Rajarao
and S.K. Guha, Universities press (India) Ltd, Orient Longman ltd, 2000.
383
IV SEMESTER MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
UNIT I: Introduction Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers - Sensors and Actuators –Introduction to Microfabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes – New Materials – Review of Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stress and strain analysis – Flexural beam bending - Torsional deflection.
UNIT II: Sensors and Actuators - I Electrostatic sensors – Parallel plate capacitors – Applications – Interdigitated Finger capacitor –Comb drive devices – Thermal Sensing and Actuation – Thermal expansion – Thermal couples –Thermal resistors – Applications – Magnetic Actuators – Micromagnetic components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators.
UNIT III: Sensors and Actuators - II Piezo resistive sensors – Piezo resistive sensor materials - Stress analysis of mechanical elements – Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors – Piezoelectric sensors and actuators – piezoelectric effects – piezoelectric materials – Applications to Inertia , Acoustic, Tactile and Flow sensors.
UNIT IV: Micromachining Silicon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotrophic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silicon – Plasma Etching – Deep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants – Case studies - Basic surface micromachining processes – Structural and Sacrificial Materials – Acceleration of sacrificial Etch – Striction and Antistriction methods – Assembly of 3D MEMS – Foundry process.
UNIT V: Polymer and Optical Mems Polymers in MEMS– Polimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene – Fluorocarbon - Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS – Lenses and Mirrors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
Text Books:
1. Foundations of MEMS, Chang Liu, 1st edition, Pearson Education Inc., New
Jersey, 2006. Reference Books:
1. Micro electro mechanical system design, James J. Allen, 1st edition, CRC Press, Florida, 2005.
2. An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design, Nadim Maluf, 1st edition, Artech House, USA, 2000.
3. The MEMS Handbook, Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, 1st edition, CRC press, USA, 2000.
4. MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture, Tai Ran Hsu, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi, 2002.
5. Micro sensors mems and smart devices, Julian W. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, 1st edition, John Wiley & son LTD, England, 2002.
384
IV SEMESTER
ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS
UNIT I: Low Pin Count Controllers
Low pin count controllers – Atmel AVR family – ATTiny15L controller - Architecture – Pin descriptions – Features – Addressing modes – I/O space – Reset and interrupt handling – Reset sources - Tunable internal oscillator.
UNIT II: Timers
Timers – Watch dog timer – EEPROM – Preventing data corruption – Analog comparator – A/D converter – Conversion timing – ADC noise reduction – Port B – Alternate functions – memory programming – Fuse bits – High voltage serial programming – Algorithm.
UNIT III: National Semiconductor
National semiconductor COP8 family - COP8CBR9 processor – Features – Electrical characteristics – Pin descriptions – Memory organization – EEPROM - Security – Brownout reset – In system programming – boot ROM. Idle timer – Timer1, Timer2, Timer3 - Operating modes – PWM mode – Event capture mode
UNIT IV: Power Saving Mode Power saving modes – Dual clock operation – Multi input wake up – USART – framing formats – Baud rate generation – A/D conversion – Operating modes – Prescaler – Interrupts – interrupt vector table – Watch dog – Service window – Micro-wire interface waveforms.
UNIT V: Microchip Microchip PIC16 family – PIC16F873 processor – Features – Architecture – Memory organization - register file map – I/O ports – PORTA - PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C.
Text Books:
1. Design with PIC Microcontrollers – John B. Peatman, Pearson Education, 2005.
References Books: 1. Microcontrollers (Theory & Applications) A.V. Deshmuk, 1st edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill publication, India, 2005. 2. Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming, Interfacing and System Design, Raj
Kamal, Pearson Education, 2005. 3. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Mazidi and Mazidi, 2nd
edition, Prentice Hall India, India, 2000. 4. DS101374: National Semiconductor reference manual. 5. 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual. 6. DS30292B: Microchip reference manual.
385
IV SEMESTER (ELECTIVE COURSE)
OPTICAL FIBRE COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
UNIT I: Fibre Optic Wave Guides
Light wave generation systems, system components, optical fibres, SI, GI, fibres, modes, Dispersion in fibres, limitations due to dispersion, Fibre loss, non linear effects. Dispersion shifted and Dispersion flattened fibres.
UNIT II: Optical Transmitters, Receivers and Amplifiers
Basic concepts, LED‘s structure spectral distribution, semiconductor lasers, gain coefficients, modes, SLM and STM operation, Transmitter design, Receiver PIN and APD diodes design, noise sensitivity and degradation, Receiver amplifier design. Basic concepts of Semiconductor Optical amplifiers and EDFA operation.
UNIT III: Light Wave System
Coherent, homodyne and heterodyne keying formats, BER in synchronous and asynchronous receivers, Multichannel, WDM, multiple access networks, WDM components, TDM, Subcarrier and Code division multiplexing.
UNIT IV: Dispersion Compensation
Limitations, Post - and Pre - compensation techniques, Equalizing filters, fibre based gratings, Broad band compensation, soliton communication system, fibre soliton, Soliton based communication system design, High capacity and WDM soliton system.
UNIT V: Principles of Optical Networks
First and second generation optical networks: system network evaluation. SONET / SDH, MAN layered architecture broadcast and select networks MAC protocols, test beds, wavelength routing networks.
Text Books
1. Fibre optic communication systems, G.P. Agarwal, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, NewYork, 2002.
Reference Books:
1. Optical fibre communications, G. Keiser, 4th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Optical communication, Systems and components, Franz & Jain, 1st edition, Narosa Publications, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Optical Networks: A practical perspective, Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar Sivarajan, 2nd edition, Academic press, London, 2002.
4. Fibre Optic Communication, Harold Kolimbiris, 1st edition, Education Asia, Delhi, 2004.
386
:
IV SEMESTER
PRACTICAL IV: EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY
1. Design with 8 bit Microcontrollers 8051/PIC Microcontrollers
I. I/O Programming, Timers, Interrupts, Serial port programming II. PWM Generation, Motor Control, ADC/DAC, LCD and RTC Interfacing,
Sensor Interfacing III. Both Assembly and C programming.
2. Design with 16 bit processors
I/O programming, Timers, Interrupts, Serial Communication. 3. Design with ARM Processors, I/O programming, ADC/DAC, Timers, Interrupts. 4. Study of one type of Real Time Operating Systems (RTOS). 5. Electronic Circuit Design of sequential, combinational digital circuits using CAD
Tools. 6. Simulation of digital controllers using MATLAB/LabVIEW. 7. Programming with DSP processors for
Correlation, Convolution, Arithmetic adder, Multiplier, Design of Filters – FIR based, IIR based.
8. Design with Programmable Logic Devices using Xilinx/Altera FPGA and CPLD. Design and Implementation of simple Combinational/Sequential Circuits.
9. Network Simulators. 10. Simple wired/ wireless network simulation using NS2. 11. Programming of TCP/IP protocol stack.
Reference Books:
1. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C,
Mohamammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin McKinlay, 2nd edition, Pearson Education, India, 2009.
2. PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C for PIC18, Mohammad Ali Mazidi, Rolind Mckinley and Danny Causey, 1st edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, India, 2008.
3. Embedded Ethernet and Internet Complete, Jan Axelson, Lakeview Research LLC, 2003.
4. Complete PCB Design using ORCAD Capture and Layout, Kraig Mitzner, Elsevier, 2007.
5. Digital Signal Processing using Field Programmable Gate Arrays, U. Meyer- Baese, 3rd edition, Springer, Milano, 2007.
387
APPENDIX – AZ105
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
M. Sc ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION (CBCS)
Scheme of examinations (2012 – 2013 onwards)
I SEMESTER
Components TEACHING CREDITS
HOURS
1. Basic Electronic Materials 6 5
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits 6 5
3. Signals and Systems 6 5
4. Elective Course I - Computer Network and 6 5 C++ Programming
5. Practical – I : Electronic Devices and 6 Circuits
Total (4 Courses) 30 20
II SEMESTER
Components TEACHING CREDIT
HOURS S
6. Mobile and Satellite Communication 6 4
7. Digital Communication 6 4
8. Advanced microprocessor and applications 6 4
9. Elective Course II - Microcontrollers 6 5
10.Practical – I : Electronic Devices and Circuits 6 2x4 = 8
Practical – II: Network & C++ Programming
Total (6 Courses) 30 25
III SEMESTER
Components TEACHING CREDITS
HOURS
11. Advanced Power Electronics 6 5
12. Data Communications 6 5
13. Optical Communication 6 5
14. Project work 6 5
15. Practical – III : Advanced Communication 6
Total (4 Courses) 30 20
388
IV SEMESTER
Components TEACHIN CREDITS
G HOURS
16. Microwave Electronics 6 4
17. Digital Design Using VHDL 6 4
18. Nano Electronics 6 4
19.Practical – III : Advanced Communication Practical – IV: Optical Microwave and 6 2x4 = 8 Power Electronics
20. Elective: Digital Signal Processing 6 5 (Or) Navigation system
Total (6 Courses) 30 25
Total number of courses : 20 (16T + 4P) Total number of hours : 120 Total number of Credits : 90
III SEMESTER
ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONICS
UNIT I: DC-DC Converter Topologies Buck and boost converters – Continuous and discontinuous current modes – buck and C‘uk converter – Operation – control of dc-dc converters – PWM method – Full bridge with bipolar and unipolar switching – Output voltage equations.
UNIT II: SMPS Topologies Block schematic of SMPS – Isolated dc-dc topologies – Forward and flyback -principles – (circuit and operation only). Push-pull topology – Half bridge basics of SMPS control methods – Voltage mode and current mode control (block diagrams and description only).
UNIT III: Resonant Converters Advantages of resonant converters over PWM converters – Classification – series and parallel resonant converters – Half bridge operation – Discontinuous and continuous nt modes (basic modes only no analysis required) - Principles of zero voltage and zero current switching (ZVS and ZCS switches only – No analysis required) Comparison with hard switching, switching locus diagrams, working principle.
389
UNIT IV: PWN Inverters Need for PWM techniques – Various PWM techniques – Principle of sinusoidal PWM – Bipolar and unipolar PWM – Modulation index – Application to single phase bridges – Disadvantages of SPWM – Brief introduction to other PWM methods – Current-mode control schemes (tolerance band control and fixed frequency control – Description with block diagram only).
UNIT V: Applications Power factor correction – Actual power factor – Displacement factor and distortion factor – Principles of input line current shaping using boost rectifiers. UPS – Different topologies – Block Schematics. Electronic ballast – Block schematics. High frequency inductor and transformers: Design principles, definitions, comparison with conventional design and problems.
Text Books:
1. Power electronics – Circuits, Devices, Applications, Rashid M.H., 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, India, 2008.
2. Power electronics, MD Singh, KB Khanchandani, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw – Hill, India, 2007.
Reference Books:
1. Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design – Ned Mohan, Tore M.
Undeland, William P. Robbins, 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2009. 2. Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design – Jai P. Agarwal, 3rd edition,
Pearson Education Asia, 2009. 3. Modern Power Electronics, P.C. Sen, Sheeler Publication.
III SEMESTER
DATA COMMUNICATION
Unit I: Digital Transmission Fundamentals Definitions of information, Digital Representation of information, Block- Oriented information, Stream Information. Why digital Communication, Comparison of analog and digital transmission, Basic propertied of digital transmission system; Digital representation of analog signals; Bandwidth of Analog signals, sampling of an analog signal, digital transmission of analog signals. Characteristics of communication channels: frequency domain characterization. Time Domain characterization. Fundamental limits in digital transmission, the Nyquist signaling rate, the shanono channel capacity.
Unit II: Line Coding Modems and Digital Modulation Binary phase modulation QAM and signal constellations, telephone modem standards, properties of media and digital transmission system: Twisted pair, coaxial cable, optical fibre, radio transmission, infrared light. Error Detection, Two- Dimensional parity checks,
390
Internet Checksum, polynomial codes, standardized polynomial codes, Error detecting capability of polynomial code.
Unit III: Circuit Switching Multiplexing: FDM, TDM, WDM, SONET, SONET Multiplexing, SONET Frame Structure. Transport networks: SONET networks, optical transport network, circuit switches, space division switches, time division switches, the telephone network, transmission facilities, end to end digital services.
Unit IV: Communication Networks and Services Evolution of network architecture and services: Telegraph Networks and message switching, Telephone networks and circuit switching, the internet, computer networks and packet switching.
Unit V: Medium Access Control Protocols and Lan The Medium access control protocols, Multiple access communications, Random Access: ALOHA, Slotted ALOHA, CSMA, CAMA-CD, Scheduling approaches to medium access control: Reservation system, polling, Token-Passing Rings: Channelization, FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. High speed digital access & connection devices. DSL: DSL Technology, cable modems, connecting devices: Repeaters, Hubs, Bridges, Two – Layer switch, router and three layer switches.
Text Books:
1. Communication networks fundamental and key architectures, Alberto Leon- Garcia and Indra widjaja, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, India, 2004.
2. Data communication and networking, Behrouz A. Forouzan, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, India, 2004.
Reference Books:
1. Data and computer communication, William Stallings, 5th edition, Pearson
Education, Prentice Hall of India, India, 1997. 2. Understanding data communications and networks, William A. Shay, Thomson,
2nd edition, 1998. 3. Data communications and networks, Codbole, 1st edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
India, 2002. 4. Communication and networking, Michael A. Gallo & William M. Hancock, 2003.
III SEMESTER
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
UNIT I: Introduction to Optical Fibres
Evolution of fibre optic system - Element of an Optical Fibre Transmission link-
Ray optics - Optical fibre Modes and Configurations - Mode theory of circular wave guides – Overview of Modes - Key Modal concepts - Linearly Polarized Modes - Single Mode Fibres - Graded Index fibre structure.
391
UNIT II: Signal Degradation Optical Fibres
Attenuation - Absorption losses, Scattering losses, Bending Losses, Core and
Cladding losses, Signal Distortion in Optical Wave guides - Information Capacity determination - Group Delay - Material Dispersion, Wave guide Dispersion, Signal distortion in SM fibres - Polarization Mode dispersion, Intermodal dispersion, Pulse Broadening in GI fibres - Mode Coupling – Design Optimization of SM fibres - RI profile and cut – Off wavelength.
UNIT III: Fibre Optical Sources and Coupling
Direct and indirect Band gap materials – LED structures – Light source materials
- Quantum efficiency and LED power, Modulation of a LED, Lasers Diodes-Modes and threshold condition - Rate equations - External Quantum efficiency - Resonant frequencies - Laser Diodes, Temperature effects, Introduction to Quantum laser, Fibre amplifiers - Power Launching and coupling. Lencing schemes, Fibre - to – fibre joints, Fibre splicing.
UNIT IV: Fibre Optical Receivers
PIN and APD diodes – Photo detector noise, SNR, Detector Response time,
Avalanche Multiplication, Noise-Comparison of photo detectors –Fundamental Receiver Operation – Preamplifiers, Error Sources - Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error – Quantum Limit.
UNIT V: Digital Transmission System
Point-to-Point links system considerations-Link Power budget-Rise-time budget -
Noise Effects on system Performance – Operational Principles of WDM, Solitons - Erbium - doped Amplifiers. Basic concepts of SONET/SDH Network.
Text Book:
1. Optical Fibre Communication, Gerd Keiser, 3rd edition, McGraw–Hill
International, Singapore, 2000.
Reference Books:
1. Optical Communication, Principles and Practice, J. Senior, 2nd edition,
Prentice Hall of India, India, 1994. 2. Optical Communication System, J. Gower, Prentice Hall of India, India, 2001.
392
III SEMESTER
PRACTICAL III: ADVANCED COMMUNICATION LAB
Perform any twelve experiments:
1. Verification of sampling theorem. 2. Pulse position modulation. 3. Pulse amplitude modulation and demodulation. 4. Pulse width modulation. 5. Amplitude shift keying modulation and demodulation. 6. Frequency shift keying modulation and demodulation. 7. Phase shift keying modulation and modulation. 8. Differential Phase Shift Keying. 9. Delta Modulation. 10. Adaptive Delta Modulation. 11. Mixer. 12. Automatic gain control. 13. P.C.M system using codec. 14. Frequency multiplier. 15. P.R.B.S Generator.
III SEMESTER
PROJECT WORK
The objective of the project work is to motivate the students for doing research and to inculcate in them the self confidence to work independently. Each student should do an individual project and they can freely choose their own topic of experimental nature. The project should be of investigative type not a hobby project one.
Students are encouraged to take the project work as a challenge so that their project will boost up their industrial career.
Periodic seminars should be conducted to assess the students. The students should present the progress of the project to their respective guides and get the required assistance from them.
At the completion of the project, the student will submit project report in the form of dissertation which will be examined by the examiners.
The examination shall consist of i) evaluation of the dissertation and
ii) comprehensive viva– voce.
393
IV SEMESTER
MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS
UNIT I: Introduction and Vacuum Tube Devices
Introduction, definition of microwave, characteristics features, application of
microwave, Generation of microwave by vacuum tube – Limitation of conventional tubes klystron amplifier – Reflex klystron oscillator, Magnetrons- Traveling wave tubes.
UNIT II: Microwave Solid State Devices and Circuits
Generation of microwave by solid state devices, bipolar transistor field effect
transistors, Gunn oscillator IMAPTT & TRPATT mode of operation parametric amplifiers.
UNIT III: Microwave Integrated Circuit Design
Microwave integrated circuit design, introduction, hybrid microwave integrated
circuits (HMIC), monolithic microwave integrated circuit (MMIC), MIC materials, substrate material, conductor material, dielectric material, resistive films, types of mics.
UNIT IV: Waveguide Concept
Waveguide and waveguide component, concept of waveguide, advantage of
hollow wave guide, reflection from a metal surface, field pattern obtained by oblique reflection, higher order modes, waveguide dimensions, impedance matching elements, waveguide short circuit, tees and magic tee, phase shiftless, attenuators, matched terminators, waveguide slotted section, PIN diodes, PIN diode switches.
UNIT V: Microwave Measurement
Microwave measurement techniques, standing wave measurements, Impedance
measurement, cavity resonator, cavity frequency measurements and calibration techniques, dielectric measurements.
Text Books:
1. Microwave devices and circuits, S.Y. Liao, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of India,
India, 2003. 2. Introduction to microwave theory and experiments, LA Lance, McGraw Hill, New
York, 1966. 3. Microwave and Radar Engineering, M. Kulkarni, 3rd edition, Umesh Publications,
New Delhi, 2003.
394
Reference Book:
1. Microwave Engineering, T. Jayanthi & K.S. Shaji, Anu radha publications, India.
IV SEMESTER
DIGITAL DESIGN USING VHDL
Unit 1: Introduction & Basic Languages
Introduction to HDLs: Difference between HDL and other software languages-different HDLs in vogue. Overview of digital system design using HDL basic VHDL language. Elements: Identifiers, data objects, scalar and composite data types, operators.
Unit II: Behavioural Modeling
Behavioural Modeling with examples: Entity declaration, architecture body, process statement and sequential statements, Inertial and transport delay models, creating signal waveforms, signal drivers, effect of transport and inertial delays on signal drivers.
Unit III: Data Flow and Structural Modeling
Data flow modeling with examples: Concurrent signal assignment statement, concurrent versus sequential signal assignment, Delta delays, multiple drivers, conditional signal assignment statement, selected signal assignment statement, concurrent assertion statement. Structural modeling with examples: Component declaration. Component instantiation and examples, direct instantiation of component.
Unit IV: Subprograms and Packages
Subprograms and Overloading: Function and procedures with simple examples- Subprogram overloading, operator overloading packages and libraries: Package declaration, package body, design file, design libraries, order of analysis, implicit visibility, explicit visibility, library clause and use clause. Advanced features: Entity statements generate statements, attributes, aggregate targets, ports and their behavior.
Unit V: Simulation and Hardware Modeling
Model simulation: Simulation – Writing a test bench for a half and a full adder. Hardware modeling examples: Modeling entity interfaces, modeling simple elements, different styles of modeling, modeling regular structures, modeling delays, modeling conditional operations, modeling a clock divider and a pulse counter.
Text Books:
1. Digital systems design using VHDL, Charles H. Roth Jr., PWS Pub. Company, Boston, 1998.
2. A VHDL primer, J. Bhasker, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
395
Reference Books:
1. Circuit design with VHDL, Volnei A. Pedroni, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Introductory VHDL: From simulation to synthesis, Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson education Asia, India, 2001.
3. VHDL Programming by example, L. Perry, 4th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.
IV SEMESTER
NANO ELECTRONICS
UNIT I: Introduction to Nanotechnology
Introduction to the nanoworld – Historical perspective on nanomaterials –
Classification of nanomaterials – Application of nanocrystals – Historical structural and mechanical metals – Colorants and pigments – Electronic and magnetic - Energy gap of semiconductor nanocrystals confined state in semiconductor – Length energy and time scales, nanostructure types and properties, top down approach to nanolithography.
UNIT II: Preparation of Nanoscale Materials
Precipitation – Mechanical milling – Colloidal routes – Self assembly – Vapors
phase decomposition – MOCVD – Sputtering – Evaporation – Molecular beam epitaxy – Atomic layer epitaxy – MOMBE.
UNIT III: Synthesis of Nanostructured Metals
Synthesis of semiconductors – Nanostructured semiconductors – Growth of
Nanocrystals – Preparation of II-VI-nanocrystals – Surface analytical instrumentation techniques for nanotechnology.
UNIT IV: Carbon Nanotubes and Properties:
Introduction – Structure – Growth – Synthesis of nanotubes – Purification of nanotubes – Growth mechanisms – Nanoproperties – Electronic properties – Mechanical properties – Other properties – Nanotube templates – Application of nanotubes – Nanotubes made from nanocarbon materials.
UNIT V: Optical Properties:
General formulation – Electron photon coupling and optical line shape – Direct properties of hetro structures and nanostructures of direct gap semiconductors – Optical properties of Si & Ge nanocrystals – Applications – Micro batteries – Solar Cells.
Text Books:
1. Nanostructures, C. Delerue & M. Lannoo, Springer Newyork, 2004. 2. Nanostructural materials & Nanotechnology, Hari Singh Nalwa, 1st edition,
Academic Press, New York, 2002.
396
Reference Books:
1. Nanotechnology in carbon materials, M.S. Dressclhaus & R. Sailo. 2. Nanoscale materials in chemistry, Kenneth J. Klabunde, Willey Interscience, New
York, 2001. 3. Quantum transport in semiconductor nanostructures in solid state physics,
Beenaker and Van Houten, Ehernreich and Jumbell, Volume No. 44, Academic Press, 1991.
IV SEMESTER (ELECTIVE COURSE)
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
UNIT I: Review of Discrete Signal and Systems
Review of discrete signal and systems, DFT, properties of DFT and IDFT. Convolution, correlation, linear - filtering methods.
UNIT II: Communication of FFTL
Computation of FFTL decimation in time FFT, decimation in frequency FFT, FFT algorithm for a composite numbers. Filter Realization: Direct, parallel and cascade form for FIR & IIR Systems.
UNIT III: FIR Filters
FIR Filters: Properties filter design using windows (Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning and Kaiser Window), Filter design using frequency sampling technique.
UNIT IV: IIR Filters
IIR Filters: Specification and design techniques, Impulse invariant and bilinear transformation techniques. Design of digital Butterworth and Chebyshev low pass filters using analog filter design techniques, Transform of low pass to high pass, band pass and band rejection filters, comparison of IIR and FIR filters.
UNIT V: Analysis of Finite Word Length Effects
Analysis of finite word length effects: Quantization process or errors, analysis of coefficient quantization effects, analysis of co-efficient of quantization effects in FIR filters, analysis of arithmetic round off errors, reduction of product round off errors, round off errors in FFT algorithm. Applications: Dual tone multi frequency signal detection, spectral analysis using DFT, musical sound processing and Digital FM Stereo generation.
397
Text Books:
1. Digital Signal Processing, Proakis and Manolakis, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of
India, India, 1996. 2. Digital Signal Processing, S.K. Mityra, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill, India, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. Theory and Application of DSP, Rabinar L.R. and Gold. B, Prentice Hall of India,
India, 1999. 2. Introduction to digital signal processing, Johnson, Prentice Hall of India, India,
1999 3. Digital Signal Processing, Alan V. Oppenheim, Prentice Hall of India, India, 1995.
IV SEMESTER (ELECTIVE COURSE) NAVIGATION SYSTEMS
UNIT I: Basic Radio Navigation Four basic methods of navigation, Radio direction finding - Loop antenna – Loop input circuits. Aural – Null direction finder, Goniometer errors. Adcock direction finders, Radio compass, VHF phase comparison, Automatic direction finder, Commutated aerial direction finder, Range and accuracy of direction finders.
Unit II: Hyperbolic System of Navigation Hyperbolic systems of navigation – LORAN A equipment range and precision, LORAN C Decca navigation systems, Decca receivers, range and accuracy – Omega system, DME system transmission, Airborne Interrogator, Beacons, TACAN system.
UNIT III: Navigational Aids Aids to approach and landing – Instrument landing system, Localizer, Glide – Slope, system – receiving equipments – Site effects – Marker beacons. Ground controlled approach systems – Surveillance radar – Precision approach radar – Microwave landing system (MLS) Antenna system for MLS.
Unit IV: Doppler Navigation Doppler navigation – Doppler effect – Beam Configuration – Doppler frequency equations, Track stabilization - Doppler spectrum – Components of the Doppler navigation system – Doppler Radar equipment – Continuous wave Doppler Radar, FMCW Doppler Radar Frequency Trackers, Doppler range equation, Inertial navigation – Principles of operation – Navigation over the Earth – Components of inertial navigation system, Accelerometers – Gyros and stabilized platforms – Earth – Coordinate mechanization strapped down systems – accuracy of inertial Navigation systems.
398
Unit V: Satellite Navigation System Satellite Navigation system – The transit system, Navstar Global positioning system (GPS) – Basic principles of operation – Signal structure – Data massage – velocity determination accuracy of position determination – Differential navigation – Navstar Receivers Integration of GPS with inertial Navigation systems, GPS transmitters – Russian Glonass system
Text Books: 1. Elements of Electronic Navigation, N.S. Nagaraja, 11th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill. 2. Global Positioning Systems, Inertial Navigation and integration, Mohinder
Grewal, 11th edition, Wiley and sons.
Reference Books:
1. Basic Coastal Navigation, An introduction to piloting, Frank J. Larkin, 2nd edition, Sheridan press, Maryland, 1998.
2. Duttons Navigation and Piloting, Elbert S. Maloney, 1st edition, Naval Institute press.
3. Marine navigation – Piloting, Celestial and Electronic Navigation, Richard Hobbs, 11th edition.
IV SEMESTER
PRACTICAL IV: OPTICAL MICROWAVE AND POWER ELECTRONICS LAB
Perform any twelve experiments:
1) Numerical aperture determination for fibers and attenuation measurement in
fibers.
2) Mode characteristics of Fibre – SM Fibers.
3) Coupling Fibers to semi- conductor sources – Connector and splices.
4) Fibre optic communication links. Digital and analog.
5) LED & Photo diode characteristics.
6) Reflex klystron repeller mode characteristics.
7) Characteristics of Gunn diode oscillator.
8) VSWR measurements.
9) Impedance measurement using microwave test benceh.
10) Determination of guide wavelength, frequency.
11) Radiation pattern of Horns, paraboloids.
12) Measurement of coupling and directivity of a directional coupler.
13) Measurement of isolation and power division of E & H plane TEEs.
14) R, RC, UJT firing circuits for the control of SCRs.
15) Design and implementation of Ramp-comparator and digital firing scheme
for simple SCR circuits.
16) Automatic lighting control with SCRs and optoelectronics components.
17) AC phase control using SCR and Triac.
399
18) Speed control of DC motor using chopper and converters.
19) Generation and study the PWM control signal for single phase DC to AC
inverter.
20) Study and use of the single phase half controlled and fully controlled AC to DC
converter and effect of firing angle control on load voltage & wave forms.
21) Study and use of back to back connected SCR/TRIAC controlled AC
voltage controller and its waveforms with variation of firing angle.
22) Study and use chopper circuit for the control of DC voltage using
a. PWM control
b. Frequency control.
23) Study of single phase inverter and its wave form.
24) Study of Three phase firing circuit with synchronization and testing with
three phase AC to DC bridge converter.Testing of wave forms of digital
firing modules.
25) Study and testing of a three phase bridge inverter with different types of
loads.
**************
400
APPENDIX – AZ106
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, THIRUNELVELI -12
M.Sc HOTEL MANAGEMENT AND
CATERING SCIENCE WITH APPLIED NUTRITION
(For those who joint the course from the academic year 2012- 2013 onwards)
Semester – I
No components Hours Credits
1 Advance food production 6
2 Advanced food and beverage service 6 15
3 Nutrition and food science 6
Elective: Tourism management (1 course) 6 5
Practical: advanced food production and 6 beverage service
Total (4 courses) 30 20
Semester – II
No components Hours Credits
1 Core subjects (3 course) 6
Advance accommodation and interior decoration
2 Advance front office operation 6 12
3 Research methodology 6
Elective: Bar management 6 5
1 Practical (2 course)
Advanced accommodation and front office operation
2 Advance food production and beverage service 6 8
Total 30 25
401
Third semester – III
No Components Hours Credits
1 Practical & internship training (20 weeks) 10
Viva voice 15 Project.
The students should undergo training any one of the reputed hotels or restaurants for 20 weeks. For the conveniences of the students of the request from the hoteliers point of view to accommodate from them comfortably, 4th fourth semester has been allotted for training and project purpose.
At the end of 22 weeks, an external training viva – voce & project viva – voce will be conducted
A maximum marks of training report is 100 as25 internal and75 external
A maximum marks of project report is 100 as25 internal and75 external.
Fourth semester – IV
No Components Hours Credits
1 Core subjects (3t courses) 6
Baking and food preservation
2 Food service and financial management 6 15
3 Computer application 6
Project (1 course)/ therapeutic nutrition 6 5
Practical: therapeutic nutrition and food preservation 6
Total 4 courses 30 20
402
Third semester
The students should undergo training any one of the reputed hotels or restaurants for 20 weeks. For the conveniences of the students of the request from the hoteliers point of view to accommodate from them comfortably, 4th fourth semester has been allotted for training and project purpose.
At the end of 22 weeks, an external training viva – voce & project viva – voce will be conducted
A maximum marks of training report is 100 as25 internal and75 external
A maximum marks of project report is 100 as25 internal and75 external.
Semester - IV
BAKING AND FOOD PRESERVATION
Objectives
1. To understand the basic concept of banking.
2. To gain knowledge about various backed product and preservation techniques.
Unit – I
1. Introduction
1.1 aims and objectives of bakery
1.2 organizational structure of bakery – (both small and large scale)
1.3 equipments used (description and their uses)
1.4 ovens (types and advantages and disadvantages)
1.5 personal hygiene maintained in bakery.
Unit – II
2. Ingredients used in bakery their functions:
2.1 Flour types i=of flour bakers, biscuits, cake, pastry, self-mixing flour, whole meat
flour) composition gluten WAP of flour PH value flour test quality assessment.
2.2 Yeast elementary knowledge types activity functions it use effect of over & under
fermentation
2.3 Eggs – composition, function and its uses in bakery
403
2.4 Sugars – types, deferent forms, functions and its users in bakery.
2.5 Salt – functions and its uses it types any.
2.6 Fat – composition, classification, functions and its uses and effect of cooking.
2.7 Cream – functions and its users in bakery product.
2.8 Milk – types, functions and its users.
2.9 Leavening agents – functions and users.
2.10 Flavoring, fruits and emulsification & enzymes – functions and its uses in bakery.
Unit – III
3. Baking process:
3.1 Baking process – basic concepts, methods of preparing ,dough, mixing, dividing,
moulding, panning, proofing & baking.
3.2 Methods of preparing bread & bread rolls.
3.3 Evaluation of bread & quality control.
3.4 Faults & remedies in Bread making Bread improvers, Leavening action of yeast on
Bread dough.
UNIT-IV
4. Cake preparation:
4.1 Basic methods of cake preparation, variety cakes.
4.2 The Quality of cake making ingredients and the types of cakes (Rich, Lean, High
Ratio & Low Ratio cakes)
4.3 Faults & remedies in cake making, leavening action of baking powder on cakes.
4.4 Icing, Glazers, Cream, Fondants, Frostings.
4.5 Preparation of basic custards, pudding, Mousse, Baverose.
4.6 Oven temperature-(Hot, very hot, medium etc.) different temperature for baking rich
& lean cakes.
404
Unit – V
5. Food preservation:
5.1 Food spoilage, asepsis, miciobial spoilage, aspects of bakery products.
5.2 Microbial aspects of bakery products preservation of practerial rope & mold infection
5.3 Bread diseases & rectification
5.4 Methods of food preservation: Bacteiostialic – dehydration picking salting, sun
drying, smoking, freezing mechanical drying, salt and sugar, oil and spices, acids,
chemical preservation – low temperature, high temperature. Bactericidal – canning and
irradiation
5.5 Use of preservatives: chemical preservative, food additives, ideal anti – microbial
preservation, added preservative, developed preservatine.
FOOD SERVICE AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
To train knowledge about various types of food service.
To understand the principles and function of Management.
To gain knowledge about financial handlings.
UNIT I
1.1 Management and organization:
Definition, Principles, Techniques of Management, Tools of Management, and
Organization chart – types.
1.2 personal management:
definition, sources, criteria for selection orientation, training, motivation, supervision,
employee facilities, fringe benefits, labour policies and legislation, labour laws
governing food service establishments.
Unit – II
Financial management:
2.1 meaning of accounting –meaning and objective of book keeping – accounts
concepts and conventions – principles of double entry, kinds of accounts.
2.2 Journal ledger – meaning - preparation of ledger accounts – balancing of ledger
1.3 trail balance – definition, objectives – preparation of trail balance
1.4 Subsidiary books – purchase books, sales book, purchase – return books – sales –
return book.
405
1.5 Final account – items to be posted in debit and credit side of the training account
and balance sheet.
Unit – III
Types of fuel used in food production, fuel economy in food service institution.
Unit – IV
Food management and laws
4.1 purchasing and reserving procedure:
Purchase specification & procedure involved in receiving food buyer.
4.2 storage& issuing
Objectives type of stores record maintain in storing and issuing, maintenance of food
quality in storing.
1.1 Laws governing food service establishments.
Labour laws working condition – welfare food laws, food standards in India role of
consumer in maintain standards.
Unit - V
2. Definition& importance of hygiene & sanitation
5.1 hygiene in food handling, personal hygiene, good food handling habits and training,
control and eradication of flies, cockroaches, rodent and other pests, pest and rodent
control in food service institution.
5.2 safeties
Accident from structural inadequanties accident from improper placement of equipment
in spaces. Accident due to the nature & behavior of people at work, accident from
improper selections, installation, maintenance and storage equipment. Safety procedure
and safety training legal responsibilities of food service manager.
Reference
Catering management - mohinisethi
Catering management - D. Jithendra
Ready T S Murthy A Financial Accounting Mangham Publication, Chennai.
406
COMPUTER APPLICATION
objectives
To gain knowledge in operating a computer system
UNIT –I
1 Introduction to Computer 1.1 Computer system part of the computer 1.2 Advantages and disadvantages
1.3 Origin and history
1.4 Various types
1.5 Network (LAN\MAN\WAN)
1.6 Linking (Timesharing/Ring/Bus/Star)
UNIT – II
2. MS Word
2.1 Introduction to word
2.2 Formatting text and Documents.
2.3 Working with, Footer and foot notes- Tabs, Tables and Sorting
2.4 working with Graphics, Templates, Wings and sample documents writers tool
Macros, customer‘s tool bars, key board, short cuts and menus.
2.5 Mail merge, Labels.
UNIT – III
3. M.S.Excel& Access
3.1Introduction to Excel
3.2Rearranging worksheets- formatting worksheets- functions
3.3Excel chart features.
3.4Working with Graphics in Excel.
3.5Excel command Macros- using worksheets as databases.
3.6 Automating-‗‘ what is projects‘‘.
3.7Create tables in Access using design view, wizard, entry data, import table from
Excel to Access, Link table, Queries, Queries Link table, Form wizard, Auto form,
Filter, Reports Chart wizard, Label wizard.
UNIT-IV
4 M.S.Power Point & Paint
4.1 Introduction to power point
4.2 Creating presentations
4.3 Working with text in power point.
4.4 Working with Graphics in power point.
4.5 Introduction to M.S paint – study about tool box – draw pictures, cut, copy, and
paste & save.
407
Unit – v
5. M.S mail & internet
5.1 introduction to mail – M.S mail and office applications
5.2 introductions to internal concepts internet protocols – TCP/IP, FTP, HTTP.
E-mail, WWW and web page – HTMC pages, web browser.
REFERENCE:
1. Ws4 manual
2. M.S office 2000
3. M.S office 97 Nelson – Tata MC Graw Hill
4. The Internet in easy steps-Chris, Russel, Dreamtech Press
5. Working in Microsoft Office Tata MC Graw Hill
THERAPEUTICS NUTRITION
OBJECTIVES.
1. To understand the principles of diet therapy and planning of diet for different
therapeutic condition.
2. To study about the role of a dietetion.
3. Develop attitude towards dietetics as a dietetion professional.
UNIT-I
Introduction
Introduction to study of Therapeutics Nutrition, Principles of Diets Therapy,
Factors to consider in planning therapeutics diets, Therapeutics Adaptation of the
Normal diet.
UNIT-II
Diet In Diabetes Mellitus
Prevalence, Types (classification), Aetiology, Symptomes, Diagnosis, Treatment,
Acute complications, Diabetes and pregnancy,Alcohol and diabetes,Physical activityand
diabetes. Diet in Fever Diet in obesity and underweight.
UNIT-III
Diet in Gastro intestinal disease
Indigestion, Pepticulcer, Symptoms and clinical findings, Carcinoma of the Stomach,
Gastric surgery, Dumping syndrome, Constipation, Diarrhea, Steatorrhoes, Lactose
intolerance,Celiac disease, Irritable bower syndrome,InflamatoryboweDisease,Intestinal
gas and flatulence, Diventricular disease. Prevalence, Pathologenesis, Clinial effects,
Risk factors,Role of fat in the Development of
Atherosclerosis,Dietarymanagement,Dietary modification,
Hypertension,Hypercholesterolemia .
408
Diet in disease of kidneys Function of kidneys , Glomerulonephritis, Dietary treatment,
Nephrotic syndrome, Acute, renal failure,Dialysis,Urolithiasis or Urinary calculi.
UNIT-V
Diet in Cancer
Risk factors, Nutrition in the Etiology, General systemic reaction, nutritional
problems of cancer therapy, Nutritional requirements, Role of food in the prevention
of canner.
Diet in Food Allergy
Types of reaction, Food as allergens, Symptoms, Diagnosis, Treatment.
Reference.
1.Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition by Corinne H.Robinson
2.Dietetic by Srilekshmi
3Food Nutrition and diet therapy by Krause
4 Nutrition and Diet Therapy by Lutz&Przutulski
5.Nutrition and Theraoh-Self Instructional Modules by Peggy S.Stanfied and
Y.H.Hui.
Therapeutics Nutrition Practical‘s
Planning, preparation and evaluation of the diet for Anaemia, protein caloria malnutrition, vit A. Obesity and underweight.
1. Intestinal disorders – diarrhea , constipation and peptic ulcer.
2. Liver disorders – hepatitis and cirrhosis.
3. Diabetes mellitus.
4. Athero sclerosis and coronary heart Disease.
409
APPENDIX – AZ107
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.Sc. Dietetics and Food Management (For there who joined the course from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards)
Semester - III
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects (2T + 2P) courses 6 Food Processing & Preservation 3
6 Fundamentals of Baking 3 20
6 Dietetic Internship Training 6 Project
(4 Courses) 30 20
Semester IV
Components Hours Credits
Core Subjects (2 course) (1T + 1P) Nutritional Biochemistry 6
12 Advance Food Science And Chemistry 6
Nutrition for Fitness 6
Major – elective (1 course) Food Quality Control / Food 6 Toxicology
Practicals(2 Courses) Food Preservation and Baking 3
Dietetic Internship Training (Viva) 3
(6Courses) 30
Total no.of.Courses: 20 (16 T + 4 P )
Total no.of.Hours
Total no.of. Credits : 90
410
5
4
4
25
: 120
SEMESTER III
3.1. FOOD PROCESSING & PRESERVATION
OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the principle of food preservation. 2. To develop skills for setting small scale industry.
UNIT – I
a) Processing of cereals and pulses - Milling of wheat, rice and processing of corn parley
b) Processing of Fruits and Vegetables - Harvesting, Bio-Chemical changes during ripening, handling and storage.
c) Processing of nuts and oil seeds, Processing of spices and tea, coffee and cocoa.
UNIT – II
a) Milk and Milk products - processing methods and product preparations. b) Processing of meat, poultry, seafood and egg.
UNIT – III a) Aims and principles of Food preservation, traditional methods of food
preservation. b) Heat processing of food – dehydration, pasteurization, smoking, micro wave
heating and canning - methods and its applications.
UNIT – IV
a) Cold processing – chilling, freezing, freeze drying - methods and its applications.
b) Chemical methods of food preservation- Preservatives, anti oxidants,
sequesterents and stabilizes
UNIT –V
a) Use of radiation technology. b) Food concentrates - use of acid, sugar and salt - methods and its
applications.
Reference Books: 1. Desrosier, N.W. 1987. The technology of food preservation, CBS Publisher &
Distributors, New Delhi. 2. Lal and Siddappa. 1986. Fruit and Vegetable preservation ICMR. 3. Luh and Woodroof 1975. Commercial Vegetable Processing. The AVI Publishing
Company, INC, Westport.
411
4. Ranganna, S. 1986. Handbook of Analysis and quality control for fruit and
vegetable processing, 2nd Edn., Tata McGraw-Hill Publisher company Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Arhold Spicer. 174. Advances in pre concentration and dehydration of Foods. Applied Science Publishers Pvt.Ltd.
6. Charm, S.E. 1971. Fundamentals of Food Engineering. The AVI Publishing Co., Connecticut.
PRACTICALS
FOOD PROCESSING & PRESERVATION
1. Refrigeration and Freezing of fruits and vegetables.
2. Refrigeration and Freezing of meat and fish.
3. Sun and Oven drying of Fruits and Vegetables.
4. Preparation of Jam, Jelly, Syrup and Squash.
5. Preparation of pickles.
6. Visit to Canning and Bottling unit.
7. Visit to fish processing unit.
8. Visit to a food packaging unit.
3.2. FUNDAMENTALS OF BAKING OBJECTIVES: This course will enable the students to-
1. Understand basic concepts of baking 2. Acquaint with the role of various major and minor ingredients in bakery products 3. Familiarize with baking process and operations. 4. Learn the quality parameters of bakery products.
UNIT – I a) Introduction to bakery – aims and objectives, historical perspective.
Wheat flour and its role in bakery products.
b) Wheat and its role in bakery products – type, grading, varieties, structure,
composition, principles of flour milling and classification. Baked products from wheat, specification for raw material used in bakery.
UNIT – II Role of other bakery ingredients a) Yeast – types, function, uses, effects of over and under fermentation.
- Eggs – composition, function in bakery and confectionery. - Sugar – types, different forms, uses. - Fats – composition, classification, function, effects of cooking.
b) Milk products, emulsifiers, dried fruits, enzymes, cream, other leavening agents.
412
UNIT – III a) Bakery machinery and equipment, storage of bakery ingredients, losses in
baking b) Bakery sanitation and personal hygiene c) Prospects and problems in bakery
UNIT – IV Baking process –
a) Basic concepts, batch/continuous, dough mixing, dividing, moulding, panning, proofing, baking.
b) Evaluation and quality control.
UNIT – V
a) Methods of preparing bread and bread rolls. b) Preparation of cakes, biscuits, cookies, pastries, pizzas and icings.
Reference: 1. Kent.N.L. (1975): Technology of cereals – with special reference to wheat,
pergamon Press, New York, USA.
2. France.W.J: The student Technology of Bread making and flour confectionery,
Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd., London, UK.
3. Sultan.W.J. (1976): Practical baking manual – for students and instructors, AVI
Publishing Co.INC, West Port, Connecticut.
4. Matz S.A. (1989): Bakery Technology, packaging, nutrition, product development
and quality assurance, Elsevier Science Publisher Ltd., New York, USA.
5. Malik. R.K. and Dhingra.K.C. (1981): Technology of Bakery Industries. Small
Industry Research Institute, New Delhi, India.
6. Pomeraz, Y. (1988): Wheat Chemistry and Technology, Vol. 1 & II American
Assn. of Cereal Chemists, 3rd Ed. St. Paul Minnesota, USA.
7. Matz. S.A. (1989); Technology for the Materials of Baking, Elsevier Science
Publishers. Baking, England.
PRACTICALS
1. Preparation and cost analysis of
o Cookies
o Biscuits
o Cakes
413
o Bread rolls
o Danish pastry
o Madelins
o Nankhatai
o Melting moments
o Puffs
o Bread & rusk
2. Determination of gluten content
3. Physical characteristic of bakery products
4. Fifteen days training in baking.
SEMESTER IV
4.1. NUTRITIONAL BIOCHEMISTRY OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable the students to:
1. Augment the biochemistry knowledge acquired at the undergraduate level 2. Understand the mechanisms adopted by the human body for regulation of
metabolic pathways 3. Get an insight into interrelationships between various metabolic pathways 4. Become proficient for specialization in nutrition 5. Understand integration of cellular level metabolic events to nutritional disorders
and imbalances.
UNIT – I
Carbohydrates – Structure, classification, digestion & absorption, metabolism (Glycogenesis, Glycolysis, Gluconeoginesis, Citric acid cyle, Hexose monophosphate pathway), functions, deficiency, sources, requirements & Toxicity, fibre & its functions.
UNIT - II
a) Lipids – Structure, classification, digestion & absorption, metabolism (beta –
oxidation, synthesis and breakdown of fatty acids)- EFA formation of ketone bodies, functions deficiency, sources of EFA
b) Cholesterol – Functions, Dietary sources, metabolism
414
UNIT – III
a) Proteins structure, classification, digestion, absorption, classification of amino
acids, metabolism (oxidation of aminoacids, formation of urea, oxidation of ketoacids, synthesis of non essential amino acids) functions, sources, requirements, deficiency.
b) Nutritional classification of proteins, Determination of nutritive value of proteins –
PER, Digestibility coefficient, BV, NPR, NPU, chemical score, nitrogen balance, supplementation of proteins.
UNIT – IV
Vitamins :
Structure, Properties, Functions, deficiency, sources, requirements, toxicity.
UNIT – V
Minerals :
Structure, Properties, Functions, deficiency, sources, requirements & Toxicity.
References :
1. M. Swaminathan, Hand Book of Food Science and Experimental foods, Bappel,
2003.
2. Benaji, S. Rao. N. Reddy. V, Text Book of Human Nutrition, Exfora and IBM,
1996.
3. Madambi, R.Rao, Food Science, Willey Eastern Ltd., 1983.
4. Vidya C Rao.D.B., A Text Book Nutrition, Discovery publishing House, 1996.
5. Swainathan.M. Essentials of Food and Nutrition, Ganesh and Company, 1990.
6. ‗Passwore‘ R. Tastwood.M.A, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, ELBS, 1986.
7. Bamji.S.Rao. N.Reddy.V. Text book of Human Nutrition, Oxford and IBH, 1996.
415
4.2. ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE & CHEMISTRY
OBJECTIVES :
To gain knowledge about the principles and chemistry of foods Apply the studied principles in cooking Understand the Nutrient looses and savings during cooking
TOPIC AND CONTENT
1.1 - Sensory methods of Assessment Factors affecting the acceptability of selection and taste panel food. Difference, preference and Description test. Microscopic Examination, Chemical and Physicochemical Methods. Physical Characteristics like color, appearance, texture, density, volume, tenderness, viscocity, surface tension and loss of weight. 1.2-Emulsion & Colloids Food Emulsions Preparation of emulsifiers Colloids - Stabilization of colloids, gel formation, properties of colloids
2.1 -Sugar & Sweeteners Sugar Sources, uses properties, Crystallization of sugar stages of sugar cookery in candy making Amorphous & Crystalline candies, Syrups 2.2 -Starch Cookery Sources Characteristic & Composition Factors affecting viscocity of starch pastes, Gelatinization.
Fata & Oils Sources, Characteristics and functional properties. Changes during storage & Cooking, shortening, Rancidity of Fat
Proteins Sources, Characteristics and functional properties. Changes during storage & Cooking coagulation of protein
416
PRACTICAL / RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / VISIT METHODS
Preparing food pyramids Lecture Assignment
Seminar
Crystalization of sugar, Lecture stages of sugar cookery Assignment
Seminar
Smoking temperature, Lecture factors affecting absorption Assignment
of fat Seminar
Lecture Assignment
Seminar
UNITS
UNIT-1
UNIT-2
UNIT-3
UNIT-4
UNIT-5 Vitamins & Minerals : Lecture
Functional properties and Bio Assignment availability Seminar
References : Text Book of Human Nutrition -Exfora & IBM, 1996. Vidya C.Rao, D.B., A text book of Nutrition, Discovery Publishing House,1996.
4.3. NUTRITION FOR FITNESS
UNIT – I
Yoga- Meaning, Aims & objectives, significance.
UNIT – II
a) Systems of Yoga - Eight limbs of yoga. b) Asanas - Classification, difference between physical exercise & yogic exercise c) Guidelines for practicing Asanas.
UNIT – III
Meditation - Meaning, types, role
UNIT – IV
Facial & body - fruit and vegetables - Electrical treatment, machinery & technology - figure analysis - recommended treatment eg : muscle toning, fat elimination, relaxation & detoxification
UNIT – V
a) Exercise & Weight control - fundamentals of aerobics b) Nutrition guidance on balanced eating and nutritional advice to clients for obesity,
skin nourishment, hair treatment.
REFERENCES : 1. B.K.S. Iyengar, Light on yoga, London University, in paper back, 1989. 2. Yogeshwar, Text Book of Yoga, Madras Yoga Centre. 3. K. Chandrasekaran, ―Sound health through Yoga‖ Prem Kalyan Publication,
Sedapatti, 1999.
417
MAJOR ELECTIVE – 1
FOOD QUALITY CONTROL
OBJECTIVES :
This course aims to :
Provide adequate theoretical background and understanding about sensory evaluation
of food.
Enable students to use various sensory methods for evaluation variety of foods.
Enable students to analyse and interpret sensory evaluation data.
PRACTICAL/
UNITS TOPIC AND CONTENT
UNIT -1 1.1-General principles of quality
control – quality attributes - size, shape, colour, consistency, viscosity, texture, taste and flavor. 1.2- Methods of evaluation of food quality – sensory, objective technique, micro biological methods of quality evaluation. 1.3- General testing conditions – quantitative difference tests – designing of questionnaire (or) evaluation score card.
UNIT-2 2.1 Food contaminants : Naturally Lecture occurring toxicants, anti-nutritional Assignment factors in foods. Seminar 2.2 – Environmental containments : Biological contaminants, Pesticide residues, veterinary drug residues and heavy metals.
UNIT-3 3.1- International Direct Additive : Lecture Preservaties, Nitrate, Nitrite, and N- Assignment nitroso compounds. Seminar 3.2- Indirect Additives, Anti microbial and veterinary drugs, pesticides, poly halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons. Other organic residues, packing materials, heavy metals, Radio nuclides in foods.
UNIT-4 4.1- Common adulterants – tests to Lecture detect adulterants. Assignment 4.2- Government and trade standards Seminar
418
RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / METHOD
VISIT
Lecture Assignment Seminar
for quality – food laws and regulations – PFA, FPO and APEDA- BIS standards – Agmark standard – International Standards for export. 4.3- HACCP – Food safety system.
UNIT-5 5.1- Laws and regulations for seeting Lecture up of a processing unit Assignment
Seminar
REFERENCES : 1. BIS standards. 2. Giridarilal Sidappa, G.S., and Tandon, G.L. (1979) Preservation of fruits and
vegetables, ICAR, New Delhi. 3. FPO (1955), Quality Control. 4. Horace, D.Graham, 1980, the safety of foods, 2nd End, AVI publishing Co.Inc,
Westport. 5. Julie Miller Jones, 1992, Food Safety, Eagan Press, USA. 6. Lewis M.J. 1987, Physical properties of food and processing system, Ellis
Harwood Ltd., England. 7. Picgott, J.R, 1984, Sensory Analysis of Foods, Elsevier Applied Science
Publisher, New York.
MAJOR ELECTIVE – 2
FOOD PACKAGING
OBJECTIVES :
This Course is designed to enable students to:
1. Gain knowledge about various packaging materials and importance of packaging.
2. Be familiar with testing and evaluation of packing media. 3. Be familiar with packaging laws and regulations. 4. Be able to select appropriate packaging material for a variety of foodstuffs vis-à-
vis the need for preventing environment degradation.
UNIT – I
Packaging – Definition, Concepts, Significance, Classification.
UNIT – II
Types of packaging materials - Ancient methods of packaging, Cushioning materials, Paper boards, metals, plastics, wood & plywood, glass, flexible, tin, aluminum can.
419
UNIT – III
Packaging systems methods principles – vacuum packaging, gas packaging, Aerosol packaging, MAP, Nitrogen Flush Packaging, Shrink Packaging and Retort Pouches and Sachets
UNIT – IV
a) Food Labels, caps & closures, bottle methods and branding. b) Packaging laws and regulations.
UNIT – V
Handling, storage - shelf life evaluation and Transportation of packed items.
References:
1. Sachrow & Grifin, Food Packing – AVI Publications. 2. Hotchikess Food & Packaging Interaction – American Chemical Society. 3. Darry, R. & T, Blackie: Principles & Applications of MAP – Academic &
Professions. 4. Bhatia S.C. Canning & Preservations of Fruits & Vegetables – New Delhi, India. 5. Robertson G.L. Food Packaging – Mew York, Marcell Dekker, INC. 6. Bureau of G & Multon J.K. Food Packaging Technology (vol.1&2) – VCH,
Publishers, INC, New York.
PRACTICALS
1. Food preservation and baking 2. Dietetics internship training (Viva)
NUTRITIONAL BIOCHEMISTRY Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 75
SECTION - A
Answer All the questions (10 x 1 = 10)
1. Define Gluconeogenesis?
2. What do you mean by PEM?
3. List EFA?
4. Name two Ketone bodies?
5. What are the sources of proteins?
6. Expand NPU and PER?
7. Classify Vitamins?
420
8. Give the chemical name for Vitamin E and A?
9. Expand IDD?
10. List important trace elements?
SECTION - B
Answer All the questions (5 x 5 = 25)
11. (a) What are the factors affecting absorption of calcium?
(or)
(b) Discuss the role of iron in our body?
12. (a) Explain on Beriberi?
(or)
(b) What are the functions of Vitamin C?
13. (a) How PER is measured?
(or)
(b) Discuss the classification of Proteins?
14. (a) Discuss on Transport of lipids?
(or)
(b) Enumerate rancidity of fats?
15. (a) Explain on Gluconeogenesis?
(or)
(b) What are the functions of Carbohydrates?
SECTION - C Answer All the questions (5 x 8 = 40)
16. (a) Explain the oxidation of carbohydrates?
(or)
(b) Discuss the HMP shunt?
17. (a) Explain the metabolism of fat?
(or)
(b) Discuss the metabolism of cholesterol?
18. (a) Explain urea cycle and Transumination?
421
(or)
(b) Write notes on BV and NPR?
19. (a) Write notes on functions and deficiency of Vitamin A?
(or)
(b) Briefly explain the functions and deficiency of niacin?
20. (a) Give notes on a) Phosphorous b) Copper?
(or)
(b) Write down the functions, deficiency, sources and requirements of iodine?
422
APPENDIX - AZ108
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.sc. Nutrition and Dietetics with Hospitability Management (For there who joined the course from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards)
CBCS – For Colleges
Semester - III
Components
Core Subjects (2T + 2P) courses Food Micro Biology and Sanitation
Computer Application in Nutritional Research
Internship Training
Project
(4 Courses)
Semester IV
Components
Core Subjects (2 course) (1T + 1P) Principles of Business Organisation and Accounting
Advance Food Science And Chemistry
Nutrition for Fitness
Major – elective (1 course) Food Quality Control / Bio Chemical changes in Diseases
Practicals(2 Courses) Bio Chemical changes in Diseases
Dietetic Internship Training (Viva)
(6Courses)
Total no.of.Courses : 20 (16 T + 4 P )
Total no.of.Hours
Total no.of. Credits : 90
423
Hours Credits
6 3
6 3 20
6
6
30 20
Credits
12
5
4
4
25
Hours
6
6
6
6
3
3
30
: 120
SEMESTER III
3.1. FOOD MICRO BIOLOGY AND SANITATION
OBJECTIVES : 1. Understand the common organisms associated with food borne illness. 2. Gain knowledge on the necessity for cleanliness in preparation and service of foods.
PRACTICAL/
TOPIC AND CONTENT
1.1- STERILIZATION & DISINFECTUAL : Sterlization : Physical agents – lights desiccation, Electricity and heat. Chemical agents removal of micro organism and filtration, Water. Sources of bacteriology of water supplies. Bacteriological examination Purification.
2.1 – MICROBIOLOGY OF FRUITS AND VEGETABLES : External contamination and spoilage of fruits, and control of micro vegetables.
3.1- MICROBIOLOGY OF MILK AND MILK PRODUCTS: Kinds of micro organism in milk, Sources of contamination pathogens in milk, control of Micro organism. Quality and methods of study, Micro biology of dairy products fermented milk, butter and cheese
4.1- MICRO BIOLOGY OF CEREAL AND CEREAL PRODUCTS MICRO BIOLOGY OF FLESHY FOODS : Cereal and cereal products; Organism associated with grains classification and control of molds in bread
5.1 – FLESH FOODS : Bacteria found in meat, Microbiology of poultry, fish and meat products
424
RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / METHOD
VISIT
Lecture Assignment Seminar
Microbial Lecture examination of Assignment fruits – surface Seminar washing
Determination of Lecture quality of milk Assignment
Seminar
Microbial Lecture examination of Assignment fleshy foods Seminar surface washing
Lecture Assignment Seminar
UNITS
UNIT -1
UNIT-2
UNIT -3
UNIT-4
UNIT-5
preservation contamination organism in
REFERENCES :
Frazier, W.C. and Westhoof, D.C., Food Microbiology, Tata MC Graw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 1993. Johns, N Managing Food Hygiene, Mc Millan press Ltd., 1995. Longree, K., Quantity Food sanitation, Inter Science Publishers, New York, 1955. Joshua, A., Microbiology, Popular book depot publishers, New York, 1995. Adams, M.R., Moss, M.O., Food Microbiology, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers, 1996. Rodey, S., Hygiene and Sanitation in food Industry, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1999. Kumar, H.D, Kumar, S., Modern concepts of Microbiology, Vikas publishing House Pvt. Limited, 1999.
3.2. COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN NUTRITIONAL RESEARCH
Topic and content Practical/ Related Teaching methods
experience
Introduction
i. Introduction to computer,
characteristics of omputer, Types of computer : Analog,
-- Digital, Hybrid, Optical. Classification of Digital Computer – Micro, Mini, Mainframe, Super Computer.
i. History of Computer : Dark age, Modern age. Generation of Computer
i. Anatomy of Digital Computer : Functions and components of computer, Memory, How CPU and Memory works
v. Input devices, Output Devices, Storage Devices
Software and Data processing
a) Software : Types of Software b) Data Processing : What is data Lecture,
?. What is information?. Demonstration, Group Qualities of information, Data Discussion, Quiz Processing, its types and stages.
c) Data Storage and Retrival
425
Unit. No
I
II
Lecture, Seminar, Group Disscussion, demonstration
MSDOS, MS Word, MS Excel,
MS Power Point.
MS-DOS :- dir, copy, rename, delete files - make and remove directory MS-WINDOWS 95- Explore-File-New folder-Edit-Cut- Creation of Lecture and Copy-Paste-View by name, by document in MS demonstration using type. Word computer, MS-WORD :- MS-WORD-Menu bar-file-new-open-close-save- print-print view-page set up- margin settings
EDIT : cut, copy, paste,select all- FIND-find and replace, Go to page. VIEW : tool bar, standard Creation Of Excel Use of OHP, formatting-drawing-tables and sheets under borders. various topics INSERT: page number-Date & Assignment Time-picture-text box-object presentation FORMAT: font-paragraph-bullets and numbering-boarders and Creation of various shading-tabs Power Point TABLE : Insert table-cells and presentation rows dele-merge-split-sort- formula-sum above, window left and right. MS EXCEL :- Edit Menu, View Creating folders, Menu, Format Menu, Tools Menu. Cutting and MS POWER POINT – Slides – pasting files into it . format – transition background- Deleting files slide show.
Multimedia a) Multimedia Introduction:
Multimedia- meaning Giving experience Demonstration, Hardware Components in internet Lecture, Guest of a Multimedia system, Lecture, Quiz, Seminar Multimedia Elements; Text and Graphics.
b) Multimedia Elements: Sound, Animation and View, issues and trends in Multimedia. International Media; e-mail, Internet, Teleconferencing, videoconferencing.
426
III
IV
Application V different fields
a) Bookkeeping (Room inspection Group discussion, check list, House keepers report, assignment Floor register, Debit note book, Presentation, Seminar Job order book, guests special request register, room receipt) b) Planning of different styles of flower arrangement. c) Special decorations (floor, wall) in various institutions
REFERENCE:
1. Rajaraman.1984. Principles of Computer Programming. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Sankaranarayanan, M. Computer programming. Fortran 77 MS-OFFICE
97-MS WORD-MS-EXCEL and MS POWER POINT Manual Published by Microsoft coy, USA.
SEMESTER IV
4.1. PRINCIPLES OF BUSINESS ORGANISATION AND ACCOUNTING
OBJECTIVES :
1. the legal formalities of starting various types of business organization. 2. Gain knowledge on the various sources of finance.
PRACTICAL/
UNITS TOPIC AND CONTENT
UNIT -1 1.1- SCOPE OF BUSINESS :
Objects of modern business Essential of a successful business 1.2 - Forms of Business Organization; Type of companies - Sole proprietorship, partnership, joint stock company. Important documents of companies State enterprises
UNIT-2 2.1 SOURCES OF FINANCE: Important finance - sources of finance to gain company finance source of long term experience and short term finance. Kinds of
427
of computer in
Understand
TEACHING METHOD
Lecture Assignment Seminar
Lecture Assignment Seminar
RELATED EXPERIENCE /
VISIT
Visit to different
shares, Debentures - Ploughing back of profits. 2.2 - ROLE OF BANKS Role of banks and other financial institutions 2.3 - PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING: Journal and ledger Balancing - Trial balance prepar4ation of cash book subsidiary books.
UNIT-3 3.1 - MARKETING Lecture Channels of Distribution, Assignment Importance of middlemen in trade, Seminar Wholesale and retail trade with reference 3.2 - SALES PROMOTION : Salesmanship and advertisement 3.3- OST AND COST CONTROL : Methods of controlling cost, Types of Cost, Cost Sheet
UNIT-4 4.1- SMALL SCALE INDUSTRY: Lecture Need for Management problems of Assignment small Seminar Government policy towards small business Development schemes, Registration of Industrial estates - Objectives – Advantages
UNIT-5 5.1- PREPARATION OF FINAL Lecture ACCOUNTS : Assignment Preparation of Trading A/C, Profit and Seminar Loss Account, Balance Sheet - Simple adjustments.
REFERENCES: N. Mani, P.L. and Nagarajan, K.L.I., Principles of Accounting, Himalaya Publications, New Delhi 2003. Reddy, T.S., Murthy. A, Financial Accounting, Margham Publications, Chennai, 2003. Jain, S.P., and Narang, M., Financial Accounting Kalyani Publishers, Ludhina, 2003. Jain, S.P., and Narang, K,I., Cost Accounting Kalyani Publishers, Ludhina, 2003. Reddy, P.N., Gulshan, Principles of Business Organisation and Management, Eurasia Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003. Bhusan, Y.K, Fundamentals of Business Organisation and Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 2003.
428
4.2. ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE & CHEMISTRY
OBJECTIVES :
To gain knowledge about the principles and chemistry of foods Apply the studied principles in cooking Understand the Nutrient looses and savings during cooking
TOPIC AND CONTENT
1.1 - Sensory methods of Assessment Factors affecting the acceptability of selection and taste panel food. Difference, preference and Description test. Microscopic Examination, Chemical and Physicochemical Methods. Physical Characteristics like color, appearance, texture, density, volume, tenderness, viscocity, surface tension and loss of weight. 1.2-Emulsion & Colloids Food Emulsions Preparation of emulsifiers Colloids - Stabilization of colloids, gel formation, properties of colloids
2.1 -Sugar & Sweeteners Sugar Sources, uses properties, Crystallization of sugar stages of sugar cookery in candy making Amorphous & Crystalline candies, Syrups 2.2 -Starch Cookery Sources Characteristic & Composition Factors affecting viscocity of starch pastes, Gelatinization.
429
PRACTICAL / RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / VISIT METHODS
Preparing food pyramids Lecture Assignmen t Seminar
Crystalization of sugar, Lecture stages of sugar cookery Assignmen
t Seminar
UNITS
UNIT-1
UNIT-2
UNIT-3 Fata & Oils Smoking temperature, Lecture
Sources, Characteristics and factors affecting Assignmen functional properties. Changes absorption of fat t Seminar during storage & Cooking, shortening, Rancidity of Fat
UNIT-4 Proteins Lecture
Sources, Characteristics and Assignmen functional properties. Changes t Seminar during storage & Cooking coagulation of protein
UNIT-5 Vitamins & Minerals : Lecture
Functional properties and Bio Assignmen availability t Seminar
References :
Text Book of Human Nutrition -Exfora & IBM, 1996.
Vidya C.Rao, D.B., A text book of Nutrition, Discovery Publishing
House,1996.
4.3. NUTRITION FOR FITNESS
UNIT – I
Yoga- Meaning, Aims & objectives, significance.
UNIT – II
a) Systems of Yoga - Eight limbs of yoga. b) Asanas - Classification, difference between physical exercise & yogic exercise c) Guidelines for practicing Asanas.
UNIT – III
Meditation - Meaning, types, role
UNIT – IV
Facial & body - fruit and vegetables - Electrical treatment, machinery & technology - figure analysis - recommended treatment eg : muscle toning, fat elimination, relaxation & detoxification
430
UNIT – V
a) Exercise & Weight control - fundamentals of aerobics b) Nutrition guidance on balanced eating and nutritional advice to clients for obesity,
skin nourishment, hair treatment.
REFERENCES : 1. B.K.S. Iyengar, Light on yoga, London University, in paper back, 1989. 2. Yogeshwar, Text Book of Yoga, Madras Yoga Centre. 3. K. Chandrasekaran, ―Sound health through Yoga‖ Prem Kalyan Publication,
Sedapatti, 1999.
MAJOR ELECTIVE – 1
FOOD QUALITY CONTROL
OBJECTIVES :
This course aims to :
Provide adequate theoretical background and understanding about sensory evaluation
of food.
Enable students to use various sensory methods for evaluation variety of foods.
Enable students to analyse and interpret sensory evaluation data.
PRACTICAL/
UNITS TOPIC AND CONTENT
UNIT -1 1.1-General principles of quality
control – quality attributes - size, shape, colour, consistency, viscosity, texture, taste and flavor. 1.2- Methods of evaluation of food quality – sensory, objective technique, micro biological methods of quality evaluation. 1.3- General testing conditions – quantitative difference tests – designing of questionnaire (or) evaluation score card.
UNIT-2 2.1 Food contaminants : Naturally Lecture occurring toxicants, anti-nutritional Assignment factors in foods. Seminar 2.2 – Environmental containments : Biological contaminants, Pesticide residues, veterinary drug residues and heavy metals.
431
RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / METHOD
VISIT
Lecture Assignment Seminar
UNIT-3 3.1- International Direct Additive : Lecture
Preservaties, Nitrate, Nitrite, and N- Assignment nitroso compounds. Seminar 3.2- Indirect Additives, Anti microbial and veterinary drugs, pesticides, poly halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons. Other organic residues, packing materials, heavy metals, Radio nuclides in foods.
UNIT-4 4.1- Common adulterants – tests to Lecture detect adulterants. Assignment 4.2- Government and trade standards Seminar for quality – food laws and regulations – PFA, FPO and APEDA- BIS standards – Agmark standard – International Standards for export. 4.3- HACCP – Food safety system.
UNIT-5 5.1- Laws and regulations for seeting Lecture up of a processing unit Assignment
Seminar
REFERENCES :
1. BIS standards. 2. Giridarilal Sidappa, G.S., and Tandon, G.L. (1979) Preservation of fruits and
vegetables, ICAR, New Delhi. 3. FPO (1955), Quality Control. 4. Horace, D.Graham, 1980, the safety of foods, 2nd End, AVI publishing Co.Inc,
Westport. 5. Julie Miller Jones, 1992, Food Safety, Eagan Press, USA. 6. Lewis M.J. 1987, Physical properties of food and processing system, Ellis
Harwood Ltd., England. 7. Picgott, J.R, 1984, Sensory Analysis of Foods, Elsevier Applied Science
Publisher, New York.
432
MAJOR ELECTIVE - 2
BIOCHEMICAL CHANGES IN DISEASES
OBJECTIVES :
Understand the biochemical physiological impairments in diseases.
Develop skills to analysis selected constituents in blood and urine during diseases.
PRACTICAL/
UNITS TOPIC AND CONTENT
UNIT -1 1.1-GENERAL CARBOHYDRATE
METABOLISM Normal metabolism Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism Disorders associated with Hyperglycemia and hypoglycemia.
UNIT-2 2.1- GENERAL LIPID METABOLISM: Lipid metabolism, Serum total cholesterol, Trigrlycerides and lipoproteins, phospholipids, Glycolipids Plasma lipids in various disease Artero sclerosis, Hyper and Hypo lipidemia, ketosis Factors associated with development of heart diseases Plasma lipo proteins levels in various disease. Chemical and enzymatic estimation of cholesterol and other lipds.
UNIT-3 3.1-PROTEIN METABOLISM : Protein metabolism Clinical significance of protein concentration in blood CSF and other body fluid Urine, Synovial fluid, Pleral fluid, Transudates and exudates. Nitrogen metabolism with reference to uria uric acid, createnine, Plasma protein in PEM, pregnancy and other diseases. Estination of protein.
UNIT-4 4.1- INTESTINAL DISORDERS : Disorders associated with intestine diarrhea constipation, diverticulsis, fatulance, Glutensensitive enteropathy, inflammatory bowel
433
RELATED TEACHING EXPERIENCE / METHOD
VISIT
Glucose Blood Lecture glucose Assignment
Seminar
Total cholesterol Lecture
Assignment Seminar
Lecture Assignment Seminar
Lecture Assignment Seminar
syndrome, irritable bowel syndrome. Lactose intolerance, short bowel syndrome steatorrhoea. Ulcerative Colitis- Colonoscopy
UNIT -5 5.1-KIDNEY : Craetenine Lecture Pathological conditions involving Urea Assignment kidney. Total Seminar excretion of creatinine, urea, uric acid. Nitrogen- Nephritis, Nephrotic syndrome. Acute albumin renal failure. Calcium Principles of dialysis, types of dialysis Phosphorus
REFERENCES: 1. Gowen lock, AH, varleys practical Biochemistry, CBC publishers, New Delhi,
1980. 2. Williams, DI and Vincent, R, Bio Chemistry in Clinical Practice 1990. 3. Zubey, Biochemistry, III Edition MC Brown communication, 1993.
BIOCHEMICAL CHANGES IN DISEASES (PRACTICAL)
OBJECTIVES :
To enable the students to acquire skills in clinical and food lab techniques.
1. INDIVIDUAL EXPERIMENTS
Analysis the blood for
Glucose
Hemoglobin
Total Cholesterol
Lipo protein factors
Serum A/C ratio and total protein
Serum phospholipids
Serum Vitamin - A
Serum alkaline phosphates
Serum Glutamate Oxalo acetate transaminase
Serum glutamate pyruvate
Serum Bilirubin
II. ANALYSIS OF URINE
Craetenine
Urea
434
Total nitrogen - albumin
Calcium
Phosphorus
Vitamin C
III DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
Analysis of food for
Dietary fiber
Sodium
Potassium
REFERENCES :
Oser. B.I. Hawkes, Physiological Chemistry, XIV Tata Mac Graw Hill Publishing
corporation Limited.
Jayaram, J. Laboratory manual in Bio Chemistry, New age international Ltd. Publishers,
NewDelhi.
PRACTICALS
1. Bio-Chemical changes in disease
2. Dietetic Internship Training (Viva)
435
APPENDIX - AZ109
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc., APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY (CBCS-PATTERN)
III & IV SEMESTER
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
(Effective from the academic year 2012-2013 onwards and thereafter)
Title of the course/paper
Core Subjects 7. Environmental
Teaching hours
6
6
Marks
100
100
Credits
5
5
Theory Exam /Practical Hours
T 3
T 3
and Agricultural Microbiology
8.Fermentation and Industrial Microbiology
9.Medical and diagnostic microbiology
Project
Practical 3. Practical - III
Core Subjects 10. Bio Processing of Foods
11. Genetic Engineering
12. Biostatistics
Elective 3.Introduction to Bioinfornatics
Practical 4. Practical – 1V
I I I
IV
ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGRICULTURAL MICROBILOGY
Year and semester
Credits Second Year
5 Third semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Environmental and agricultural microbilogy .
ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGRICULTURAL MICROBILOGY UNIT I
Soil microbiology: soil structure and profile – classification of soil – physical and chemical characteristics – Micro flora of various soil types – Quantification of soil micro flora – Factors affecting microbial community in soil – Biogeochemical cycles- carbon nitrogen, phosphorus and sulphur cycles.
UNIT-II
Aero microbiology: Droplet nuclei –aerosol- Assessment of air quality – solid and liquid impingement method – Airborne transmission of microbes- diseases and preventive measures (Bacteria, Fungi and viruses)
UNIT III
Aquatic microbiology: Aquatic environment – freshwater habitats (ponds-lakes) marine habitats (mangroves, deep sea, hydrothermal vent)-pot ability of water, microbial assessment of water quality – waterborne diseases and control measures – water pollution Eutrophication- Solid and liquid waste treatment- Degradation of xenobiotics(Herbicides and Insecticides)
UNIT IV
Rhizosphere soil-N2 fixing bacteria and algae – Rhizosplane- Rhizosphere effects R/S Ratio-symbiotic association (Rhizobium and Frankia)-Non Symbiotic association(Azotobacter and Azospirillum) – Associative symbiotic association (Cyanobacteria, Nostoc)-VAM-Ecto and Endo Mychorrhizae-Biofertilizer.
UNIT V
Important disease of Horticultural crops – symptoms – Etiology , Life cycle and management - Bacterial leaf blight of paddy, late blight of potato, citrus cancer, stem rust of wheat, Tikka disease of groundnut – Transgenic plants for crop improvement- plant issue culture (shoot tip culture and shoot tip grafting)
437
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Core Subject- 7
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
Subject code
REFERENCES
1. Ranagasamy.G., and Bagyaraj.D.J. (1996). Agricultural Microbiology. Prentice - Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Subba Rao.N.S. (2007). Soil Microbiology. India Book House Pvt Ltd. 3. Atlas.R.M., and Bartha.M. (2003). Microbial Ecology-Fundamentals and
applications. Benjamin - Cummings, Men o Park, California. 4. Talaro, K.P., and Talaro.A. (1999). Foundations in Microbiology. WCB Me Graw
Hill, New York. 5. Dirk, J. Elasas, V., Trevors, J.T., and Wellington, E.M.H. (1997). Modern Soil
Microbiology. Marcel Dekker INC, New York, HongKong. 6. Grant W.D. and Long, P.L. (1981). Environmental Microbiology. Blackie Glasgow
and London. 7. Mitchel, R. (1992), Environmental Microbiology. Wiley - John Wiley and Sons.
Inc. Publications, New York. 8. Vijaya Ramesh.K. (2004). Environmental Microbiology. MJP Publishers,
Chennai. 9. Moshrafuddin Ahamed and Basumatary.S.K. (2006) Applied Microbiology,
publishers, Chennai. 10. Rajendran.P., and Gunasekaran. P. (2006) Microbial Bloremediation. MJP
Publishers, Chennai. 11. Kalaiselvan,P.T., Arul Pandi.I. (2007). Bioprocess Technology. MJP Publihsers,
Chennai. 12. Bernard D. Davis, Renato Dulbecco, Herman N. Eisen and Harold, Ginsberg.
(1990). Microbiology. (4th Edition).J.B.Lippincott Company, New York. 13. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., and Klein D.A. (2008). Microbiology. (7th Edition
McGraw Hill, New York. 14. Larry Mc Kane and Judy Kandel. (1996). Microbiology-Essentials
Applications. (2nd Edition). McGraw-Hill Inc, New York. 15. Madigan M.J., Martinko. J. M., and Parker J., Brock TD. (1997).Biology of
Microorganisms. (8thEdition). Prentice Hall International Inc, London. 16. Nester, E.W., Roberts, C.V., and Nester, M.T. (1995). Microbiology - A Human
Perspective. IWOA, U.S.A. 17. Salle,A.J. (1996). Fundamental Principles of Bacteriology. (7th Edition). (Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi. 18. Pelezar Jr., M.J.Chan E.C.S., and Kreig N.R. (1993). Microbiology. McGraw Hill,
Inc., New York. 19. Stainar R.Y., Ingraham J.L., Wheelis M.L., and Painter P.R.(1986). General
Microbiology. MacMiilan Education Ltd... London. 20. Ec Eldowney S, Hardman D.J, Waite D. J, and Waste S. (1993), Pollution:
Ecology and Biotreatment - Longman Scientific Technical. 21. Clescii, L.S., Greenberg, A.E. and Eaton, A.D. (1998). Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Waste Water. (20th Edition). American Public Health Association.
22. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kreig, N.R. (1994). Methods for General and Molecular Bacteriology. ASM Publications, Washington D.C.
23. Patricia Cunning (1995). Official Methods of Analysis, Vol. I and II, (16th Edition), Arlington, Virginia, USA, AOAL.
438
24. Richard G. Bums and Howard Slater (1982). Experimental Microbial Ecology, Blackwell Scientific Publishers.
25. Tuffery (1996). Laboratory Animal - An Introduction. (2nd Edition). John Wiley and Sons, New York.
26. Alexander, M.(1971). Microbial Ecology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. 27. Alexander, M.(1977). Introduction to Soil Microbiology. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York. 28. Norris, J.R and Pettipher, G.L(1987). Essays in Agricultural and Food
Microbiology. John Wiley and Sons, Singapore. 29. Harold J.Benson, (1994). Microbiological Applications. Wm.C.Brown Publishers,
Melbourne, Australia. 30. James G.Cappuccino. (1996). Microbiology. The Benjamin/Cummings Pub.Co.,
California 31. Burges, A. and Raw, F. (1967). Soil Biology. Academic Press, London. 32. Vanghan, D. and Malcolm, R.E.(1985). Soil Organic Matter and Biological
Activity. Martinus Nighoff W.Junk Publishers. 33. Marshal, K.D.(1985). Advances in Microbial Ecology. Plenum Press, New York. 34. Harry Buckman and Nyle C.Brady. (1960). The Nature and Properties of Soil.
Eurasia Pub. House (Pvt.) Ltd., New Delhi. 35. Baker, W.G. and Herson, D.S.(1994). Bioremediation. McGraw Hill Inc., New
York. 36. Ernest, W.C.(1982). The Environment of the Deep Sea. Vol. II, J.G.Morin Rubey. 37. Rheinheimer, G. (1977). Microbial Ecology of Brackish Water Environment:
Ecological Studies. Vol-25, Springer-Verlag Nerlin - Heidellberg, New York. 38. Burns ,R.C and Slater .J.H.(1982). Experimental microbial Ecology. Blackwell
Scientific Pub, Oxford, London. 39. N.S.Subba Rao.1999. Soil microbiology. 40. R.S.Mehrotra .1980. Plant pathology. Tata Mc.Graw Hill. Pub.Co.Ltd
FERMENTATION AND INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY
Year and semester Credits
Second Year 5
Third semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Fermentation and industrial microbiology.
439
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Core Subject- 8
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
Subject code
FERMENTATION AND NDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY
Unit-I
Concept and industrial development of industrial microbiology – Screening of Industrially important microorganisms – preservation and strain improvement – Media and materials for microbial processes – Carbon and nitrogen sources – Media sterilization.
Unit-II
Microbial growth kinetics – Batch, Fed, batch, continuous, fed batch culture – Multistage system and feed back system. Scale fermentation process – Inoculum development for large scale
Unit-III
Design of a fermemter: components of a fermenter – Functions- Maintenance of aseptic condition(Sterilization of fermenter and feeds) –control of various parameters. Types of fermenter – shake flask and bottles – Airlift, Tower and Stirred fermenter – Antifoam agents – Types of fermentations (Solid and submerged fermentations)
Unit-IV
Down stream processing - Detection and assay – Recovery and purification of formation product – Removal of microbial cells and other solid materials – Foam separation – Precipitation filtration, centrifugation and cell disruption – Extraction – Purification ( Chromatography , Membrane process) – Drying crystallization, Whole broth processing.
Unit-v
Industrial products produced by microorganisms – Amylase , protease - Glutamic acid – L- lysine pencillin, streptomycin – vitamin B12 – Beer, Wine – Immobilization – principle – different kinds of immobilization – signification.
TEXT BOOK RECOMMENDED
1. Read .G. (Editor) Industrial Microbilogy. CBS Publishers, AVI Publishing company.
2. Demain .A.L., and Solomon, N.A.(1986). Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. ASM press. USA.
3. Hershnery. C.L Quneer. S.W. and Hegeman. Q Genetics and Biotechnology of Industrial Microorganisms. ASM Press. USA.
4. Stanbury, P.F.A., Whitaker and .Hal. S.J(1995). Principles of fermentation Technology.(2nd Edition). Pergamon, U.K.
5. Casida .L.e.(1989). Industrial Microbiology. Willey Eastern Limited, New Delhi. 6. Waif Crueger and AnnelieseCrueger. (2002). Biotechnology – A Text Book of
Industrial Microbiology .Sinauer Associates Inc. Laderiand, USA. 7. Ward , O.P.(1998). Fermenteation Biotechnology – Principles , Process and
Products. 8. Jackson . A.T. Process Engineering in Biotechnology. 9. Nielson &Villadson. Bioreaction Engineering Principles. 10. Prescott &Dumn. (1992). Industrial Microbiology. (4th Edition).
440
11. Glazer &Nikaido (1998). Microbial Biotechnology. 12. Bernard D.Davis, Renato Dulbecco, Herman N. Eisen and Harold,
S.Ginsberg.(1990). Microbiology.(4th Edition). J.B.Lippincott Company, New York.
13. Kalaiselvan, P.T., Arulpand. (2007). Bioprocess Technology.MJP Publishers, Chennai.
14. Hershnergy C.L., Quneersw and Hegemanq(1998), Genetics and Biotechnology of Industrial Microorganism. ASM press. USA
15. Peppler, H.J., and Perlman, D. (1979). Microbial Technology. Vol I and Academic press.
REFERENCES
1. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., and Klein D.A.(2008). Microbiology. (7th Edition). McGraw Hill, New York.
2. Larry Mc Kane and Judy Kandel(1996). Microbiology-Essentials and Applications.(2nd Edition). McGraw-Hill Inc, New York.
3. Madigan M.,TMartinko . J. M., and parker J., Brock T.D(1997). Biology of Microorganisms. (8th Edition). Prentice Hall International Inc, London.
4. Nester, E.W., Roberts, C.V., and Nester, M.T.(1995). Microbiology – Ahuman Perspective. IWOA, U.S.A.
5. Salle, A.J. (1996). Fundamental principles of Bcteriology. (7th Edition). Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi.
6. Pelzer Jr., M.J.Chan E.C.S., and Kreig N.R.(1993). Microbiology MCGraw Hill, Inc., New York.
7. Stainer R.Y., Ingraham J.L., Wheelis M.L., And Painter P.R.(1986). General Microbiologys, Macmillan Education Ltd., London.
8. Starr, M.P., Stolp, H., Truper , H.C., Balows, A., and Schegel, H.C.(1991). The Prokaryotes. A hand Book of habitats, Isolation and Identification of Bacteria. Springer Verlag.
9. Tortora ,Funke, Case Addison (2001), Microbiology – An introduction(7th Edition). Wesley longman Inc.
10. Dubey R.C., and maheshwari, S.(2003) A text Book of Microbiology. S.Chand& Co, New Delhi.
11. John L.Ingraham and Catherine A Ingrahani.(2000) Introduction to Microbiology . Books I code. Thomas learning , New York.
12. Talaro K.P., and Talaro. A.(1999). Foundations in Microbiology. WCP McGraw- Hill new york.s
441
MEDICAL AND DIAGNOSTIC MICROBIOLOGY
Year and semester Credits
Second Year 5
Third semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Medical and diagnostic microbiology
MEDICAL AND DIAGNOSTIC MICROBIOLOGY
Unit -I
Early Discovery of pathogenic microorganisms – Development of bacteriology as scientific discipline - Contributions made by eminent scientists - Classification of medically important microorganisms – Normal microbial flora of human body - Role of the resident flora and the human host.
Unit -II Establishment, spreading, tissue damage and antiphagocytic factors -
Mechanism of bacterial adhesion, colonization and invasion of mucous membranes of respiratory, enteric and urinogenital tracts – Role of aggressins, depolymerising enzymes, organotropisms – Variations of virulence - Organs and cells: involved in immune system and immune response.
Unit- III Classification of pathogenic bacteria: Staphylococcus, Streptococcus,
Pneumococcus, Neisseria, Corynebacterium, Bacillus and Clostridium - Non-spore forming anaerobes - Organisms belonging to Enterobacteriaceae; Vibrio – Non fermenting Gram negative bacilli: Yersinia, Haemophilus, Bordetella, Brucella, Mycobacterium, Spirochaetes, Pseudomonas, Actinomycetes, Rickettsiae and Chlamydia.
Unit- IV General properties of viruses - viruses host interactions – Pox viruses, herpes
virus, adenoviruses, picorna viruses, orthomyxoviruses, paramyxoviruses, arboviruses, rhabdo viruses, hepatitis viruses, oncogenic viruses and human immunodeficiency virus (AIDS) - Dermatophytes: Dimorphic fungi, opportunistic fungal pathogens - Description classification of pathogenic fungi and their laboratory diagnosis.
442
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Core Subject- 9
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
Subject code
Unit -V Laboratory control of antimicrobial therapy - Various methods of drug
susceptibility testing - Antibiotic assay in body fluids - Brief account on available vaccines and schedules - Passive prophylactic measures Nosocomial infections – Common hospital infections, their diagnosis, treatment and control.
TEXT BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1. Ananthanarayanan, R., and Panieker, J. (2000). Text Book of Microbiology. Orient Longmans.
2. Rajan, S. (2007). Medical Microbiology. MJP Publisher, Chennai. 3. Bernard D.Davis, Renato Dulbecco, Herman N. Eisen and Harold, S Ginsberg.
(1990). Microbiology. (4th Edition). J.B. Lippincott Company, New York. 4. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., and Klein D.A. (2008). Microbiology. (7th Edition)
McGraw Hill, New York. 5. Larry Mc Kane and Judy Kandel (1996). Microbiology - Essentials and
Applications. (2nd Edition). McGraw-Hili Inc. New York. 6. Madigan,M.,T., Martinko.J.M. and Parker J., Brock TD. (1997). Biology of
Microorganisms (8th Edition). Prentice Hall International Inc. London. 7. Nester, E.W., Roberts, C.V., and Nester, M.T. (1995). Microbiology. A Human
Perspective IWOA, USA. 8. Salle, A.J., (1996), Fundamentals principles of Bacteriology. (7th Edition), Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 9. Pelezar Jr., M.J.Chan E.C.S., and and Kreig N.R. (1993). Microbiology - McGraw
Hill, Inc. New York. 10. Stainer R.Y., Ingraham J.L., Wheelis M.L. and Painter P.R. (1986). General
Microbiology. Mac Millan Education Ltd., London. 11. Starr, M.P., Stolp, H., Truper, H.C., Balows, A., and Schegel, H.C.(1991). The
Prokaryotes. A Hand Book of Habitats, Isolation and Identification of Bacteris. Springer Verlag.
12. Tortora, Funke, Case Addison (2001). Microbiology – An Introduction, (7th Edition), Wesley Longman Inc.
13. Dubey R.C., and Maheswari, S, (2003). A Text, Book of Microbiology. S. Chand and Co, New delhi.
14. John L. Ingraham and Catherine A Ingrahani. (2000):lntrpduction to Microbiology. Bools / Cole Thomas Learning, New York.
15. Talaro K.P., and Talaro.A, (1999). Foundations in Microbiology. WCP McGraw- Hill, New York.
16. Collee.J.G., Fraser.A.G,, Marmion,B.P., and Simmonsa.(2006). Mackie and Me Cartney Practical Medical Microbiology. (14th Edition) Elsevier Publication, New Delhi.
17. Renganathan,S., Gokul Shankar.S., Ranjit.M.S. Rankajalakshmi.V., Sivaramakrishnan.M., Selvakumar.B.N., and Mohamed Aejaz. (2001) Fungal Diseases and Diagnosis. (Vol.1).
443
LABORATORY MANUALS RECOMMENDED
1. Cappuccino.J.G., and Sherman. N. (1996). Microbiology - A Laboratory Manual. Benjamin Cummins. New York.
2. Kannan.N. (1996). Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology. Palani Paramount Publication, Palani.
3. Gunasekaran. P. (1996). Laboratory Manual in Microbiology. New Age International Ltd., Publishers, New Delhi.
4. Sundararaj.T. (2005), Microbiology - Laboratory Manual. (Ist Edition). Publn. Sundararaj.T, Chennai.
5. Jayaraman, J. (1985). Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Plummer. D.T. (1998). An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
7. Palanivelu .P. Analytical Biochemistry and Separation Techniques. 8. Benson (2002). Microbiological Applications - Laboratory Manual in General
Microbiology. International Edition, McGraw Hill Higher Education. 9. Demain.A.L, and Solomon. N.A. (1986). Manual of Industrial Microbiology and
Biotechnology. ASM Press. USA. 10. Ausubel, P.M., Brent, R., Kingston, R.E., Moore, D.D., Seidman, J.G., Smith, J.A.
and Struhl, K. (1994). Current Protocols in Molecular Biology. 11. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kreig, N.R. (1994). Methods for
General and Molecular Bacteriology. 12. Hames, B.D. and Rickwood, D. (1990). Gel Electrophoresis - A Practical
Approach, Oxford University Press, New York. 13. Sambrook, J and Russell, D.W. (2001). Molecular Cloning - A Laboratory
Manual. (3rd Edition). Vol I, II, III, Cold Spring Harbour Laboratory Press, New York.
14. Victor Lorian (1991). Antibiotics in Laboratory Medicine. (3rdEdition). Williams and Wilkins.
15. Westermeier, R. (1993). Electrophoresis in Practice. VCH, Federal Republic of Germany.
16. Wilson, K. and Walker (1995). Practical Biochemistry, Principle and Techniques. (4th Edition). Cambridge University Press.
17. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kruzh, N.R. (1994) Methods for General and Molecular Bacteriology, ASM Washington D.C.
18. Demain.A.L., and Solomon. N.A.(1986). Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. ASM Press. USA.
WEB SITES http://www.bioweb,uwlax.edu/genweb/microbiology/general/htm http://www.microbes.info/resources/general microbiology
444
Subject code
5
Third semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology / Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of research project.
To plan and design an appropriate viable project and statically apply the data
where ever possible and process it accordingly after the correct retrieval of relevant literature and fixation of an organized plan of work. The research project should be supported with figures, tabulations, plates and photographs along with necessitated bibliography.
The project work may be done either in the department itself or in collaboration with any other organization of advanced learning.
The final project report should be submitted to the head of the course department one week before the university prescribed date. The project report shall contain at least 35 pages excluding bibliography and appendices. Each student will have to submit 4 copies of his / her project for evaluation in the third semester itself.
Title of the paper
Category of the course: Year and semester
Practical Second Year
Third semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology / Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Environmental and agricultural microbiology, Fermentation and industrial microbiology and Medical and diagnostic microbiology
practical-III
1. Estimation of dissolved oxygen content 2. Determination of BOD and COD 3. Microbial sampling of air 4. Microbial examination of Water potability (MPN and MF method) 5. Bacteriological examination (TVC) in different water samples
445
Project
Year and semester Credits
Second Year
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Project Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
Practical –III
Credits
4
Subject code
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
6. Water quality testing for bacterial indicators of pollution 7. Microbial flora of different soil types – pollution study 8. Microbial extracellular enzyme production - Amylase protease and lipase 9. Purification of extracellular enzyme (amylase and protease). 10. Enzyme precipitation - Ammonium sulphate and acetone 11. Oil degradation (any oil) 12. Isolation of Rhizobium from root nodules 13. Isolation of Azotobacter from soil. 14. Isolation and testing for antagonistic property among organisms. 15. Isolation of Mycorrhizae (Ecto and Endo) from roots of crop plant (Sorghum) 16. Isolation of phytopathogens from infected plant parts. 17. Isolation of phosphate solubilizing bacteria 18. Callus culture 19. Isolation of microorganism from rhizopshere and rhizoplane 20. Bacteriology analysis of the following specimen A .urine B.Pus C.sputum D.Ear E.Throat F.wound 21. Widal test 22. Antibiotic sensitivity testing – Kirby – Bauer disc diffusion method 23. Enzyme and whole cell immobilization 24. Ion Exchange chromatography (Demo) 25. Fermentative production of ethyl alcohol by yeast (Demo) 26. Wine production ( Demo) 27. Solid state fermentation (Demo) 28. Production extraction and purification of any antibiotic (Demo)
LABORATORY MANUALS RECOMMENDED
1. Cappuccino. J.G., and Sherman. N. (1996). Microbiology - A Laboratory Manual. Benjamin Cummins. New York
2. Kannan.N. (1996). Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology. Palani Paramount Publication, Palani .
3. Gunasekaran. P. (1996). Laboratory Manual in Microbiology. New Age International Ltd., Publihsers, New Delhi.
4. Sundararj, T. (2005), Microbiology - Laboratory Manual. (1st Edition). Publn. Sundararaj.T, Chennai.
5. Jayaraman, J. (1985). Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Plummer. D.T. (1998). An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
7. Palanivelu .P. Analytical. Biochemistry and Separation Techniques. 8. Benson (2002). Microbiological Applications - Laboratory Manual in General
Microbiology. International· Edition, McGraw Hill Higher Education. 9. Collins, CR. and Lyne. P.M. (197,6). Microbiological Methods. (4th Edition).
Butterworths,. London.
446
10. Dubey.R.C. and Maheswari. O.K. (2002). Practical Microbiology. S.Chand. and Co Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Baron. E.J. and Finegold S.M (1995). Diagnostic Microbiology. Blackwell Scientific Press.
12. Davis.L., Dipner. M.D, and Battey ..J.F. (1986). Basic Methods in Molecular Biology. Elsevier, Amsterdam.
Subject code
4
Fourth semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Bioprocessing of foods
BIOPROCESSING OF FOODS UNIT -I
Microbes, in foods - Nutritive value of food - Associated microorganisms and types -Sources and their behavior - Factors influencing microbial growth -Contamination and spoilage of foods and food products (Cereals, sugar products, vegetables, fruits, meat, milk, fish, poultry and other sea foods) - Canned foods.
UNIT- II
Food preservation methods - Temperature (High and low) - Irradiation - Drying - Casing - Smoking - Chemical preservatives - Food additives - Canning - Evaluation of food quality.
UNIT- III
Food - borne illness - Bacterial and non - Bacterial types (Brucella, Bacillus, Campylobacter, Clostridium, Escherichia, Listeria, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus, Vibrio, Yersinia,) - Food- borne outbreaks - Testing procedures and preventive measures - Microbial standards.
UNIT- IV
Fermentation methods, medium, types and influencing factors - Fermented food products (Bread, cheese, vinegar, butter, buttermilk, cream, yogurt, kefir, acidophilus milk and koumiss) - Spoilage and defects in products - Biochemical engineering for flavor in food production - Examination of foods - Quality control and standards.
447
Title of the paper Category of the course:
Core Subject- 10
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
BIOPROCESSING OF FOODS
Year and semester
Credits Second Year
UNIT- V
Utilization of microorganisms in food industry - Other fermented foods – Microbial cells as foods – SCP- Mushroom cultivation, - Production of alcohol (Ethyl alcohol) - Fermented beverages (Beer and wine) - Organic acid production (Lactic acid and citric acid) – Genetically modified foods.
REFERENCES
1. Adams, M.R. and Moss, M.O.(1995). Food Microbiology. The Royal Society of Chemistry, Cambridge.
2. Frazier, W.C. and Westhoff, D.C.(2008). Food Microbiology, (4th Edition). Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Jay, J.M.(1987). Modern Food Microbiology. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.
4. Atlas, R.M. (1989). Microbiology - Fundamentals and Applications. Macmillian Publishing Company.
5. Banwart, G.J.(1989), Basic Food Microbiology. Chapman & Hall New York. 6. Board, R.C.(1983). A Modern Introduction to Food Microbiology. Blackwell
Scientific Publications, Oxford. 7. Robinson, R.K.(1990). Dairy Microbiology. Elsevier Applied Science, London. 8. Hobbs, B.C. and Roberts, D.(1993). Food Poisiong and Food Hygiene. Edward
Arnald (A Division of Hodder and Stoughton), London. 9. Robinson, R.K., (1990). Dairy Microbiology. Elsevier Applied Sciences, London. 10. Vijaya Raemsh, K., (2007). Food Microbiology. MJP Publishers, Chennai. 11. Kharatyan, S.G. (1978). Microbes as Food for Humans, Annual Rev Microbiol,
32: 301-307. 12. Sudhir Andrews (2008). Food and Beverage Management. McGraw
HillCompanies, New Delhi. 13. Neelam Khetarpaul (2006). Food Microbiology. Daya Publishig House, New
Delhi. 14. S.N.Tripathy (2006). Food Biotechnology. Dominant Publishers and Distributors,
New Delhi. 15. Robinson. R.K. (1990). Dairy Microbiology. Elsevier Applied Sciences, London. 16. Vernard D. Davis, Renato Dulbecco, Herman N. Eisen and Harold, S.Ginsberg.
(1990). Microbiology. (4th Edition).J.B.Lippincott Company, New York. 17. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., and Klein D.A. (2008). Microbiology. (7th Edition).
McGraw Hill, New York. 18. Larry Mc Kane and Judy Kandel (1996). Microbiology-Essentials and
Applications. (2nd Edition). McGraw-Hill Inc, New York. 19. Madigan M.,T., Martinko. J. M., and Parker J., BrockTD. (1997). Biology of
Microorganisms. (8thEdition).Prentice Hall International Inc, London. 20. Nester, E.W., Roberts, C.V., and Nester, M.T. (1995), Microbiology - A Human
Perspective. 1WOA, U.S.A. 21. Salle,A.J. (1996). Fundamental Principles of Bacteriology. (7th Edition). Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi.
448
Subject code
4
Fourth semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Genetic engineering
GENETIC ENGINEERING UNIT-I
Basic tools of rDNA Technology – Restriction enzymes- Types I,II and III- Restriction Mapping – Construction of Chimeric DNA – Isolation of fragments with cohesive end and blunt end – Homopolymer tailing – Isolation of nucleic acids , DNA sequencing –Maxam Gilbert – Dideoxy and automation methods-PCR(Inverse PCR, RTPCR) – southern and northern blotting- DNA finger printing-RFLP-RAPD-AFLP.
UNIT-II
Cloning vectors – Derived bacterial –plasmid vectors – Properties – Isolation – Special vectors – phage vectors- cosmids, Phasmids, M13 phage – Yeast cloning vectors – Expression vectors – shuttle vectors.
UNIT-III
Screening producers – cloning strategies – DNA hybridization , Immunological assay, protein activity – Isolation of cloned genes - Gene Libraries – Transposons – Identification of recombinants, structural and functional analysis of recombinants in bacteria and yeast.
UNIT-IV
Molecular markers – Types of molecular markers and application – construction of molecular Maps.(Genetic and physical maps),DNA chip technology and microarrays.( A brief account).Genomics and proteomics – whole genome sequencing and functional genomics and proteomics ( A brief account ) – Application of genomics and proteomics with special reference to Ambidopsis and rice.
UNIT-V
Application of recombinant DNA technology - Genetic engineering of plants- plant transformation, Ti plasmids , derived vectors. Physical methods of gene transfer in plants-Reporter genes in transformed cells. Transgenic animals – Transgenic mice, methodology-Direct gene transfer- Reteroviral vector transfer-EES method and application – Development and use of transgenic cattle- sheep – pigs and fish.
449
Title of the paper Category of the course:
Core Subject- 11
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
GENETIC ENGINEERING
Year and semester
Credits Second Year
REFERENCES
1. Brown, T.A. (1999). Gene Cloning. (3rd Edition). Chapman and Hall Publications, USA.
2. Burrel, M.M. (1993). Enzymes of Molecular Biology. Humana Press. 3. Chirikjian, J.G. (1995). Biotechnology - Theory and Techniques. Vol. II, Jones
and Burtlett Publishers. 4. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A., and Kreig, N.R. (1994). Methods for
General and Molecular Bacteriology. ASM Press, Washington D.C. 5. Glick, B.R. and Pasternak, J.J. (1998) Molecular Biotechnology - Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA. ASM Press, Washington D.C. 6. Cafferty. Me. J., Hoogenboom, H.R. and Chiswell, D.J. (1996) Antibody
Engineering - A Practical Approach, Oxford University Press. 7. Lewin, B. (2000). Genes VII. Oxford University Press, Oxford. 8. Murray Moo Young (1992). Plant Biotechnology. Pergarnon Press. 9. Radledge, C. and Kristiansen, B. (2001). Basic Biotechnology. (2nd Edition).
Cambridge University Press. 10. BIOTOC - Biotechnology (1993). Techniques for Engineering Genes, Published
on behalf of Open Universitat and University of Greenwich, Butterworth Heinman Ltd, Oxford.
11. Walsh, G. and Headon D. (1994). Protein Biotechnology. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
12. Winnacker, E.L. (1987). From Genes to Clones: Introduction to Gene Technology. VCH Publications, Federal Republic of Germany.
13. Antony, J.F., Griffiths, Gilbert, W.M., Lewontin, R.C, and Miller, J.H. (2002). Modern Genetic Analysis, Integrating Genes and Genomes. (2nd Edition). WH Freeman and Company, New York.
14. Blackburn, G.M. and Gait, M.J. (1996). Nucleic Acids in Chemistry and Biology. Oxford University Press.
15. Alberts, B., Brag, D., Lewis.J., Raff, M., Roberts,K., and Watson.J.D (1994). Molecular Biology of Cell. Garland Publ Inc.
16. Malacinski.G.M., and Freifelder. D. (1998). Essentials of Molecular Biology. Jones and Bartlett Publ.
17. Maloy, S.R., Cronan, J.R. Freifelder, D. (1994). Microbial Genetics. Jones and Bartlett Publ.
18. Macinski, G.M. and Freifelder, D. (1998). Essentials of Molecular Biology. ( 3rd Edition). John and Bartlett Publishers.
19. Sir John Kendrew (1994). The Encyclopedia of Molecular Biology. Blackwell Science Ltd.
20. Rigby. P.W.J. (Editor). (1987). Genetic Engineering. 6th Academic Press, London.
21. Wiseman. A. (1983). Principles of Biotechnology. Chapman and Hall, New York 22. Gupta.P.K. (1996). Elements of Biotechnology. Rastogi and Co., Meerut. India. 23. Michael Boylan and Kevin.E.Brown (2003). Genetic Engineering. Pearson
Education (Singapore) Pte Ltd., New Delhi. 24. Mukhesh Pasupuleti (2006). Molecular Biotechnology. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
450
Subject code
4
Fourth semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Biostatistics
BIOSTATISTICS
Unit- I Introduction to biostatistics - Definition, statistical methods, biological
measurement, kinds of biological data, functions of statistics and limitation of statistics - Collection of data - Sampling and Sampling design - Classification and tabulation - Types of representations, graph, bar diagrams, pie diagrams and curves.
Unit -II Measures of central tendency, mean, meridian, mode and geometric mean -
Measures of dispersion and variability, changes - Deviations: Quartile deviation, mean deviation - and standard deviation - Coefficient of variation – Lorenzen‘s Curve.
Unit- III Skewness, Kurtosis, moments, meaning, test of skewness, characteristics
of dispersion and skewness, measures of skewness - Objectives, Karl Pearson‘s Coefficient of skewness, Bocoley‘s coefficient of skewness, Kellye‘s coefficient of skewness, kurtosis, measures, moments.
Unit- IV Correlation: Different types of correlation - Positive, negative, simple, partial,
multiple, linear and non linear correlation - Methods of studying correlations. Regression, types and methods of analysis – Regression line, regression equations, deviation taken arithmetic mean of X on Y, deviation taken from the assumed mean.
Unit -V Probability theory, applications, analysis - Distribution; types - Test for analysis -
Sampling methods and test for significance - Student ‗t' test. ‗Chi‘ Square test, Analysis of Variance.
TEXT BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1. Palanisamy. S. and Manoharan, M. (1994). Statistical Methods Biologists (Biostatistics). Palani Paramount Publications, Tamilnadu
2. Arora, P.N. and Malhan, P.K. (1996). Biostatistics. Himalaya Publishings House, Mumbai.
451
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Core Subject- 12
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
BIOSTATISTICS
Year and semester Credits
Second Year
3. Stanton.A. Clantz. Primer of Biostatistics. The McGraw Hill Inc. New York. 4. Sokal and Rohlf. (1973). Introduction to Biostatistics. Toppan Co. Japan. 5. Pillai, R.S.N. and Bagavathi.V. Statistics. 6. Gupta, S.P. Statistical Methods. 7. Gurumani. N. (2006), Biostatistics, MJP. Publishers, Chennai.
Subject code
5 Fourth semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Introduction to bioinformatics
INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS UNIT -I
Over view of bioinformatics - Definition, scope and limitations of bioinformatics - Branches of bioinformatics - Terminologies (Internet browser, software, hardware, database, network, nicknet, inflibnet, EMB net, operating systems, algorithms and webservers) - Role of computers in bioinformatics (Tools and programmes).
UNIT- II
Biological molecules - Structure and properties of DNA, RNA and proteins Techniques in bioinformatics (Chromatography: Thin layer, column, ion-exchange, gel filtration, affinity and HPLC; Electrophoresis: PAGE, AGE, Isoelectric focusing; Blotting techniques: Southern, Northern, Western and Dotblot; DNA microarrays ; Gene sequencing, mass spectrometry and X-ray crystallography).
UNIT- III
Biological data banking and information resources - Data ware housing, data capture and analysis, sequence data banks - Classification of biological databases - Pub Med - ENTREZ, EMBL, Ensembl and Ex PASy.
452
INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS
Year and semester
Credits Second Year
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Elective -3
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
UNIT- IV
Analytical tools for sequence databanks (Sequence alignment, parwise alignment, models for alignment: Global, local and end space free alignment, gap penalty model and other types) - Database similarity searching - BLAST, FASTA, PAM units, BLOSUM and multiple sequence alignment - Phylogenetic analysis (Different methods - Dynamic programming, computational complexity, progressive alignment method, profiles - PSI - BLAST - Markov model - Algorithms - Identification of motifs and domains in MSA - Protein family data base (COG).
UNIT- V
Computational gene prediction - Ab Initio approaches, Glimer, Genscan- Twinscan - Gene prediction using neural network - Gene discovery using EST and cDNA - NCBI - Cataloging of EST‘s.
REFERENCES
1. Baxevanis, A.D. and Ouellette, B.F.F. (2001). Bioinformatics: A practical guide the analysis of genes and proteins . Wiley Interscience - New York.
2. Lohar.P.S (2009). Bioinformatics. MJP Publishers. Chennai. 3. Cynthia Gibas & Per Jambeck (2001) Developing Bioinformatics Computer Ski
Shroff Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd (O'Reilly), Mumbai. 4. Des Higgins & Willie Taylor (2000) Bioinformatics: Sequence, structure and
databanks. Oxford University Press. 5. HH Rashidi & LK Buehler (2002) Bioinformatics Basics: Applications in Biological
Science and Medicine. CRC Press, London. 6. David W. Mount. Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis. Cold Spring
Harbor Laboratory Press. 7. Richard Durbin, Sean R. Eddy, Anders Krogh, Graeme Mitchison. Biological
Sequence Analysis : Probabilistic Models of Proteins and Nucleic Acids Cambridge University Press.
8. Andreas D. Baxevanis, B. F. Francis Ouellette, Wiley-lnterscience. Bioinformatics: A Practical Guide to the Analysis of Genes and Proteins. (2nd Edition)
9. MarkerS., and Lenon. D.(2003).Sequence Analysis in a Nutshell: A Guide to Common Tools and Databases.
10. Bergeron,B.P.-(2002). Bioinformatics Computing. Prentice Hall. 11. Krane.D.E., Raymer.M.L, and Marieb.E.N. (2002). Fundamental Concepts of
Bioinformatics. Benjamin/Curnmings 12. Sensen.C.W. (Ed) (2002). Essentials of Genomics and Bioinformatics. John
Wiley and Sons. 13. Jiang.T., Xu.X. and Zhang. M. (Editors), (2002). Current Topics in Computational
Molecular Biology (Computational Molecular Biology). MIT Press. 14. Koski.T., and Koskinen.T. (2001). Hidden Markov Models for Bioinformatics.
Kluwer Academic Publishers. 15. Lengauer.T. (Ed) (2001) Bioinformatics: From Genomes to Drugs. John Wiley
and Sons. 16. Ewens.W., and Grant.G. (2001). Statistical Methods in Bioinformatics: An
Introduction (Statistics for Biology and Health). Springer Verlag.
453
17. Baxevanis. A.D., and Ouellette.B.F.F. (2001). Bioinformatics: A Practical Guide
to the Analysis of Genes and Proteins. (2nd Edition), Wiley-lnterscience 18. Baldi.P., Brunak.S., and Brunak.S. (2001). Bioinformatics: The Machine Learning
Approach, (2nd Edition), (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning), MIT Press.
19. Attwood.T.E., and Parry-Smith.D . (2001) Introduction to Bioinformatics. Prentice Hall.
20. Staben.C. (2001). Bioinformatics: A Primer. Jones and Bartlett Pub 21. Jagota.A., (2000). Data Analysis and Classification for Bioinformatics. AKJ
Academics. 22. Mount.D.W. (2001). Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis. Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. 23. Brown.S.M. (2000). Bioinformatics: A Biologist‘s Guide to Biocomputing and the
Internet. Eaton Pub Co 24. Higgins.D., and Taylor.W. (Eds). (2000). Bio-informatics: Sequence, Structure
and Databanks: A Practical Approach (The Practical Approach Series, 236). Oxford Univ Press
25. Wu.C.H., and McLarty.JW. (2000). Neural Networks and Genome Informatics. Elsevier Science
26. Clote.P., and Backofen.R. (2000). Computational Molecular Biology: An Introduction (Wiley Series in Mathematical and Computational Biology). John Wiley & Sons
27. Pevzner.PA (2000). Computational Molecular Biology: An Algorithmic Approach. MIT Press
28. Rashidi.H. (1999). Bioinforrnatics Basics: Applications in Biological Science and Medicine. CRC Press.
29. Misener.S., and Krawetz. S.A. (Eds). (1999). Bioinformatics: Methods and Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology). (Vol 132), Humana Press
30. Letovsky.S. (Ed). 1999). Bioinformatics: Databases and Systems. Kluwer Academic Publishers.
31. Green.P. (1998). Computational Molecular Biology. Blackwell Science Inc. 32. Saizberg S.L., Searls.D.W., Kasif.S. (Eds). (1998). Computational Methods in
Molecular Biology (New Comprehensive Biochemistry). (Vol 32), Elsevier Science Ltd.
33. Durbin.R , Eddy.S., Krogh.A., and Mitchison.G. (1998). Biological Sequence Analysis: Probabilistic Models of Proteins and Nucleic Acids. Cambridge University Press.
34. Bosu. O.U., and Thukral.S.K. (2007). Bioinformatics - Data bases, Tools, Algorithms. Oxford Univ.Press, New Delhi.
35. Emmanuel.C., Ignachimuthu.S., and Vincent.S. (2006). Appllied Genetics - Recent Trends and Techniques. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
36. Chikahaie.N.J., and Gomase.V.S. (2007). Bioinformatics. Theory and Practical. Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.
454
Subject code
4
Fourth semester
Minimum entry requirements / Eligibility
A pass in B.Sc examination in Microbiology/ Biotechnology / Botany / Zoology/ Equivalent
To impart advanced level information in the subject of Bioprocessing of foods, Genetic engineering and
Biostatistics
PRACTICAL- IV 1. Assessment of milk quality (Methylene blue and resazurin methods) 2. Microbiological examination of foods (Milk, curd, soft drinks, meat, fish,
vegetable, fruits, sweets, bread, salted and dried foods) 3. Mushroom cultivation 4. Isolation of lactic acid bacteria from fermented food 5. Preparation of fermented food products –Yogurt from milk. 6. Thermoactivation point for microorganisms (Freezing) 7. Isolation of DNA and RNA from any microbial system 8. Quantification of RNA and DNA 9. Isolation of plasmids 10. Agarose Gel Electrophoresis 11. Poly Acrylamide Gel Electrophoresis 12. Restriction digestion of genomic DNA and size determination by molecular
weight 13. Bacteriophages as cloning vehicles 14. Cloning of bacterial plasmids (pBR322 / pBlue script) (Demo) 15. Amplification of genomic DNA by PCR technique. 16. Cloning of foreign DNA fragments into E.coli cells or yeast(Demo) 17. Construction of genomic libraries - (Demo) 18. Blotting techniques - Northern, Southern and Western (Demo) 19. DNA sequencing - (Demo) 20. RFLP and RAPD-(Demo) 21. Mapping of antibiotic resistant genes(Demo)
LABORATORY MANUALS RECOMMENDED
1. Cappuccino.J.G., and Sherman. N. (1996). Microbiology - A Laboratory Manual. Benjamin Cummins. New York.
2. Kannan.N. (1996). Laboratory Manual in General Microbiology. Palani Paramount Publication, Palani.
455
PRACTICAL - IV
Year and semester
Credits Second Year
Title of the paper
Category of the course:
Practical- IV
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge on
Microbiology
Objective of the course
3. Gunasekaran. P. (1996). Laboratory Manual in Microbiology. New Age International Ltd., Publihsers, New Delhi.
4. Sundararaj, T. (2005), Microbiology - Laboratory Manual. (Ist Edition). Publn. Sundararaj.T, Chennai.
5. Jayaraman, J. (1985). Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Plummer. D.T. (1998). An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
7. Palanivelu .P. Analytical Biochemistry and Separation Techniques. 8. Benson (2002). Microbiological Applications - Laboratory Manual in General
Microbiology. International Edition, McGraw Hill Higher Education. 9. Demain.A.L., and Solomon. N.A.(1986). Manual of Industrial Microbiology and
Biotechnology. ASM Press. USA. 10. Ausubel, F.M., Brent, R., Kingston, R.E., Moore, D.D., Seidman, J.G., Smith,
J.A., and Struhl, K. (1994). Current Protocols in Molecular Biology. 11. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kreig, N.R. (1994). Methods for
General and Molecular Bacteriology. 12. Hames, B.D. and Rickwood, D. (1990). Gel Electrophoresis - A Practical
Approach, Oxford University Press, New York. 13. Sambrook, J and Russell, D.W. (2001). Molecular Cloning - A Laboratory
Manual. (3rd Edition). Vol I, II, III, Cold Spring Harbour Laboratory Press, New York.
14. Victor Lorian (1991). Antibiotics in Laboratory Medicine. (3rd Edition). Williams and Wilkins.
15. Westermeier, R. (1993). Electrophoresis in Practice. VCH, Federal Republic of Germany.
16. Wilson, K. and Walker (1995). Practical Biochemistry, Principle and Techniques. (4th Edition). Cambridge University Press.
17. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kruzh, N.R. (1994) Methods for General and Molecular Bacteriology, ASM Washington D.C.
18. Demain.A.L., and Solomon. N.A.(1986). Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. ASM Press. USA.
WEB SITES
1. http://www.bioweb.uwlax.edu/genweb/microbiology/general/htm 2. http://www.microbes.info/resources/general_microbiology
456
APPENDIX – AZ111
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Sc. NANOSCIENCE
(for students admitted in 2013-2014 and afterwards)
(CBCS - For affiliated colleges)
COURSE STRUCTURE AND EXAMINATION UNDER CBCS SYSTEM
Subject Title Credits
FIRST YEAR –THEORY (FIRST SEMESTER)
Basics of Mathematics and Quantum 5 4
Mechanics
Basics of Materials Science 4 4
Biomolecules 4 4
Introduction to Nano Science 5 4
Microsystems 4 3
SECOND SEMESTER
Synthesis of Nanomaterials 5 4
Nanocomposites 5 4
Molecular Cell Biology 4 4
Genetics and Recombinant DNA Technology 5 4
Principles and Properties of Thin Film 3 3
FIRST YEAR- PRACTICALS (1&2 SEM)
Practicals – I Synthesis of Nanomaterials 4 4
Practicals- II: Nanobiology 4 4
SECOND YEAR –THEORY (THIRD SEMESTER)
13 Characterization of Nano Materials 5 4 25 75 100
14 Semiconducting Nanomaterials 4 4 25 75 100
15 Nanobiotechnology 5 4 25 75 100
16 Carbon Nanomaterials 5 4 25 75 100
17 Nano Lithography 3 3 25 75 100
FOURTH SEMESTER
Magnetic Nanomaterials 3 3 25
Nanosensors and Nanodevices 3 3 25
Nanoelectronics 3 3 25
Nanomedicine and Drug Delivery 3 3 25
PROJECT (Group Project) 10 5
SECOND YEAR- PRACTICALS (3&4 SEMESTERS)
Practicals- III: Characterization of 4 4 40
Nanomaterials
24 Practicals- IV: Nanothin films 4 4 40 60 100
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS (THEORY, PRACTICALS & PROJECT): 90
476
Hrs/wee k
Internal External Total Marks Marks Marks
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
25 75 100
40 60 100
40 60 100
Sl. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
75 100
75 100
75 100
75 100
100
60 100
18
19
20
21
22
23
Evaluation:
The evaluation for each course consists of two components that is internal and external
Theory; External: internal = 75:25
Practical; External: internal = 60:40
External
Theory
The external evaluation will be based on the examinations to be conducted at the end of each
semester
Practical
Practical examinations will be conducted at the end of second and fourth semesters. Viva-voce
examination will also be conducted during the practical examination
Internal
The internal component consists of the following:
Theory:
The 25 marks for the internal component has been divided as follows;
3 compulsory test, out of which average of the best two tests = 20 Marks
Assignment = 05 Marks
----------------
Total = 25 Marks
----------------
Practical:
External: internal = 60:40
And the internal components of 40 marks is divided as follows:
For the periodical class assessment = 25 Marks
Record = 05 Marks
One test = 10 Marks
------------------
Total = 40 Marks
--------------------
There is no internal passing minimum. There is a passing mininmum of 50% for external
and overall components.
Project and viva- voce
The project report evaluation and the viva voce will be conducted by both the External examiner
and the guide at the end of the III semester
The break up for the project work = 60 Marks
Viva voce = 40 Marks
-----------------
Total = 100 Marks
------------------
477
M. Sc. Nanoscience
Model question paper format for all theory papers
Time: 3Hrs Max Marks: 75
Answer ALL Questions
Part - A
Ten Questions : 10x1=10
Two questions from each unit
Part - B
Five Questions : 5X5= 25
Two questions from each unit (either /or type)
Part – C
Five Questions : 5x8 = 40
Two questions from each unit (either /or type)
FIRST SEMESTER
1. BASICS OF MATHEMATICS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS Unit I
Differential of vector functions, Integration - Green‘s theorem, Stokes‘s theorem and Gauss
divergence theorem, Curvilinear co-ordinates- Rectangular, Cylindrical and Spherical
Coordinates - Grad, Div, Curl and ∇ 2 operators.
Vector space, Linear transformation - Inverse transformation, Orthogonal and unitary
transformation – Schwarz inequality- Gram-Schmid‘s orthogonalization process – Determination
of eigen values and eigen vectors- Cayley Hamilton theorem- Diagonalization of Hermitian
matrices.
Unit II
Beta and Gamma functions, Legender‘s, Hermite and Languerre polynomials and Bessel
functions- Generating function, Rodirgues formula, Orthogonal properties and recurrence
relations.
Unit III
Limitation of classical mechanics- Plank‘s Quantum hypothesis- Einstein‘s Photoelectric effect-
wave nature of particle- The uncertainty principle – Schodinger‘s Time dependent and
independent wav equation- particle in a box- Harmonic oscillator. Linear operator – Hermitian
operator – Postulates of Quantum mechanics – Simulataneous measurability of observable –
Equation of motion – Linear harmonic oscillator
Unit IV
The variation principle – variation method for excited states – ground state of Helium, Hydrogen
molecule – Deuteron – First order perturbation – Harmonic perturbation – Transition to
continuous states
478
Unit V
Klein – Gordan equation – particle in a coulomb field- Dirac‘s equation for a free particle – plane
wave solution – Probability density and current density- Magnetic moment of electron-Negative
energy states of electron.
REFERENCE:
1. Introduction to Mathematical Physics, Michael T.Vaughn, Wiley Press, 2007.
2. Practical applied mathematics, Sam Howison, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Quantum Mechanics, Aruldhass.G, Printice hall of India Pvt Ltd. New Delhi2004.
5. Mathew.B.M and Venkatesan.K ―A text book of Quantum Mechanics‖,
Tata McGraw Hill publication New Delhi 2007.
6. Ghatak and Lokanathan, ―Quantum Mechanics‖, Springer,2004.
7. Quantum Mechanics, Franz Schwabl, 2005, Springer
8 The functions of Mathematical Physics and Chemistry by Harry Hochstadt, Dover
Publications,1987
9. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Dr.Robert J.Lopez,Addison.wesley,2001
10. Mathematical Physics, Butkov, Addition-Wesley, 1973.
11. www.pricegrabber.com /search_attrib_books.php /bkcat2 = 1989.
12. Quantum Mechanics, Jean-Louis Basdevant, Jean Dalibard, Manuel Joffre, 2005,
springer
13. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, David J.Tannor, 2007, University science books
2. BASICS OF MATERIALS SCIENCE
UNIT I
Lattices- Space lattices- Planes- miller indices- crystal structures- Crystal directions – X-rays-
X- ray diffraction- Bragg law- powder method- structure determination by X-ray diffraction
UNIT II
Inorganic solids-covalent solids, Metals and alloys, Ionics solids, The structure of silica and
silicates. Polymers- Classification of solids, structure of long chain polymers, Crystallanity of
long chain polymers.
UNIT III
The phase rule-single component systems- Binary phase diagrams-Microstructure cooling- The
lever rule- Some typical phase diagram- other applications of phase diagrams. Time scale for
phase changes-Nucleation and Growth- The nucleation kinetics, The growth and overall
kinetics.
UNIT IV
The energy gap in solids-Intrinsic semiconductors-Extrinsic semiconductors-Semiconductor
materials-Fabrication of integrated circuits- semiconductors devices – Terminology and
classification- Magnetic moment due to electronic spin-Ferromagnetism and related
phenomena-The domain structure- the hysteresis loop- soft magnetic materials and hard
magnetic materials. Polarization- Temperature and frequency effects- Electric breakdown-
Ferroelectric materials
UNIT V
Oxidation- Mechanisms of oxidation- Oxidation resistant materials. Corrosion- The principles of
corrosion-Protection again corrosion
479
REFERENCES:
1. Materials science and engineering - V.raghavan,Prentice Hall of India PVT, New Delhi
– 110 001, 2001.
2. Materials Science and Technology: Challenges for the Chemical Sciences,
2003, National Academies Press
3. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, William D. Callister, 2006, John
Wiley & Sons
4. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, James F. Shackelford, 2000, Prentice
Hall International (UK)
5. Introduction to Materials Science and Engineering, Yip-wah Chung, 2006, CRC Press
5. Crystal Growth for Beginners, Ivan V. Markov, 2003, world scientific crystal growth
6. Crystal growth Technology, K.Byoppe, Springer, 2003.
7. Crystal Growth: From Fundamentals to Technology, Georg Müller, Jean-Jacques,
2004, Elsevier crystal growth
8. Crystal Growth Technology, Hans J. Scheel, Tsuguo Fukuda, 2003, John Wiley and
Sons Crystallization
9. New Developments in Crystal Growth Research, George V. Karas, 2005, Nova
Publishers crystal growth/ Research
10. Material science for engineering, D.Callester, John Wiley &sons, 2006.
11. Thin films materials Technology, Sputtering Compound materials, Kiyotaka Wasa, makoto
kitabatake, Hideaki adachi, Springer, 2004.
3. BIOMOLECULES UNIT I
Carbohydrates : Structure, classification, properties and functions; and heterpolysaccharides :
carbohydrate derivatives; Lipids : Classification, structure, properties and functions; Lipids with
special biological functions
UNIT II
Amino acids : Structure, classification, abbreviations, properties and functions; Peptides and
polypeptides; Synthesis of peptides and protein sequencing;;. Proteins : Properties, covalent
structure, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure
UNIT III
Enzymes : Classification, mechanism of action, allosteric enzymes; multienzyme complex;
Enzyme kinetics : Basic concepts; Water soluble vitamins : Structure, distribution, interaction
and biological functions (mechanism of action not included); Fat soluble vitamins : Structure, distribution and functions
UNIT IV
Nucleotides : Structure of purine and pyrimdine bases, nucleosides, nucleotides; DNA :
Structure and Conformation; DNA : denaturation, degradation, modification, repair,
recombination and rearrangement; RNA : Structure, types and functions
UNIT V
Animal hormones : Structure and biological roles; Plant hormones : Structure and biological
functions; Plant phenolics: Classification and functions
Alkaloids : Classification and functions
480
Refernce Books
1. Principles of Biochemistry by Nelson, Cox and Lehninger
2. Biochemistry by G.Zubay
3. Biochemistry by Stryer
4. Biochemistry by Garrett and Grisham
5. Biochemical Calculations, Irwin H. Seigel, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
6. Biochemistry, DVoet and JG. Voet , J Wiley and Sons.
7. Biochemistry, D Freifilder, W.H. Freeman & Company.
8. Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and molecular Biology, Work and Work
9. A Biologist‘s guide to Principles and Techniques of Practical Biochemistry,
Wilson & Goulding, ELBS Edition. Note: All texts are of latest editions
4. INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE UNIT I
Background to nanotechnology -scientific revolutions -types of nanotechnology and nano
machines -atomic structure -molecules & phases -energy -molecular and atomic size -surfaces
and dimensional space -top down and bottom up. Misnomers and misconception of
Nanotechnology.
UNIT II
Basic problems and limitations -opportunities at the nanoscale -time and length scale in
structures -energy landscapes -basic intermolecular forces -interdynamic aspects of
intermolecular forces -Evolution of Band structures and Fermi surface.
UNIT III
Definition of a nano system -dimensionality and size dependent phenomena; Quantum dots,
Nanowires and Nanotubes, 2D films; Nano & mesopores –size dependent variation in Magnetic,
electronic transport, reactivity etc.
UNIT IV
Forces between atoms and molecules, particles and grain boundaries, surfaces -strong
intermolecular forces -Van der Waals and electrostatic forces between surfaces -similarities and
differences between intermolecular and interparticle forces -covalent and coulomb interactions -
interactions involving polar molecules and polarization -weak intermolecular forces and total
intermolecular pair potentials
UNIT V
Forces between solvation, hydration; polymers at surfaces; adhesion - thermodynamics of self
assembly; micelles, bilayers, vesicles -bionanomachines - biological membranes.
REFERENCE:
1. Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies -Mick Wilson, Kamali
Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press (2005).
2. Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and Applications,
A.lnoue, K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000)
3. Understanding Nanotechnology, Scientific American, editors at Scientific American, Warner
Books (2002)
4. Introduction to Nanotechnology by Charles P. Poole, Frank J. Owens, Wiley-Interscience
(2003).
5. www. nanonet.rice.edu/intronanosci/
6. www.acclab.helsinki.fi/-knordlun/nanotiede/
481
7. Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Mark A. Ratner, Daniel Ratner,
Mark Ratne, Prentice Hall PTR; 1st edition (2002)
8. Nano : The Essentials' by T.Pradeep
9. Introduction to Nanotechnology' by C.P.Poole,Jr. and F.J.Owens
5. MICROSYSTEMS - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Processing of substrate materials and their crystallography (eg Si, GaAs and SOI), Thin film
deposition methods: Physical Vapour Deposition (Sputtering, evaporation, MBE, PLD etc),
Chemical methods (CVD, MOCVD, CSD, Solgel), Thin film sensors, rapid prototyping and micro
ECM and EDM are covered.
UNIT II
Silicon fabrication processes. Silicon micromachining (wet), Dry etching technologies for metals,
semiconductors and insulators, Microsystems fabrication techniques, Manufacturing issues in
MST, Analytical models for MST, Practical classes.
UNIT III
Silicon MEMS fabrication technology, Advanced lithography (e-beam lithography, radiation for
imaging (UV,X-rays, synchrotron, masking issues).
UNIT IV
Polymers in Microsystems, Packaging of MEMS devices by anodic/fusion bonding, Pressure
sensors and packaging, MEMS performance and evaluation, Statistical analysis in an industrial fabrication line.
UNIT V
Introduction to non-silicon MEMS and related fabrication techniques, Si carbide MEMS,
Biomedical MEMS market and techniques. Micro-stereolithography, Integration of microsystems
with electronics including RF MEMS and the exploitation of Microsystems, Applications
examples.
REFERENCES:
1. Ceramic Materials for Electronics Relva C. Buchanan, 2004, CRC Press
2. Handbook of Chemical Vapor Deposition: Principles, Technology, Hugh O. Pierson,
1999, William Andrew Inc, Vapor-plating
3. Materials & Process Integration for MEMS, Francis E. H. Tay, 2002, Springer
http://books.google.com/books?q=inpublisher:%22Springer%22&lr=&source=gbs_summary
_r&cad=0
4. Mems Mechanical Sensors, Stephen Beeby, Inc NetLibrary, ebrary , Inc, 2004, Artech
House .
5. Fundamentals of Microfabrication, Marc J. Madou, 2002, CRC Press
482
SECOND SEMESTER
6. SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Nano outline -introduction -various preparation techniques -basic concepts of nanostructured
materials -nucleation: surface nucleation growth -grain size distribution -nano particle transport
in low density media -vapour nano phase thermodynamics -coagulation of nano particles,
determination of grain size –aggregate formation -mass fractal morphologies. Hydro thermal methods
UNIT II
Film deposition methods -introduction -fundamentals of film deposition - thermal evaporation -
Spray Pyrolysis, Flame Pyrolysis -molecular beam epitaxy - pulsed laser deposition -sputter
deposition -chemical vapour deposition -layer by layer growth and ultra thin films -chemical
solution deposition -Langmuir Blodgelt films.
UNIT III
Sol-gel processing -fundamentals of sol-gel process -sol-gel synthesis methods for oxides -
other inorganic and nano composites -the Pecheni method –silica gel -zirconia and Yttrium gel -
aluminosilicate gel -polymer nano composites.
UNIT IV
Types of nanotubes -formation of nanotubes -methods and reactants - arcing in the presence of
cobalt -laser methods -ball milling -chemical vapour deposition methods -Catalytic route -
properties of nano tubes -plasma arcing - electro deposition -pyrolytic synthesis -zeolites and
templated powders layered silicates, soft chemical & combustion methods, Graphene.
UNIT V
Synthesis of special nanomaterials: Introduction -Micro and mesoporous materials- Core-shell
structures -Organic-inorganic hybrids -Intercalation compounds -Nanocomposites and
nanograined materials. Microbial synthesis of Nanomaterials.
REFERENCE:
1. www.eng.uc.edu/-gbeaucag/Classes/NanoPowder.html
2. Nanoelectronics and information technology: Advanced electronic materials and novel
devices (2nd edition), Rainer Waser (Ed.), Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2005).
3. Recent Advances in the Liquid-phase syntheses if inorganic nanoparticles, Brain L.Cushing,
Vladimir L.Kolesnichenko, Charles J. O'Connor, Chem Rev.104 (2004) 3893-3946.
4. Nanocomposite science and technology, Pulickel M.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul V.Braun,
Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
5. Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and, Applications,
A.lnoue, K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000). '.
6. Nanostructures and Nanomaterials -Synthesis, Properties and Applications by Guozhong
Cao.
483
7. NANOCOMPOSITES
UNIT I
Introduction of Nanocomposites: Nanocomposites- Definition - Nanocomposites past and
present- Nomenclature -Solids -Atomic and molecular solids -Role of statistics in materials -
Primary , secondary and tertiary structure - Transitions
UNIT II
Properties and features of nanocomposites: Physics of modulus - Continuum measurements -
Yield -Fracture -Rubbery elasticity and viscoelasticity - Composites and nanocomposites -
Surface mechanical properties -Diffusion and permeability -Features of nanocomposites -basics
of polymer nano compos1tes
UNIT III
Processing of nanocomposites: Viscosity -Types of flow -Viscosity - Experimental viscosity -
Non-newtonian Flow -Low-viscosity processing –Solvent processing -Particle behavior -In situ
polymerization -Post-Forming -Hazards of solvent Processing -Melt, high -shear, and direct
processing
UNIT IV
Characterization of nanocomposites: Introduction to characterization - Experiment design -
Sample preparation -Imaging -Structural characterization - Scales in nanocomposites -Texture -
Electromagnetic energy -Visualization - Physicochemical analysis -Characterization of physical
properties -Identification -\Mechanical -Surface mechanical properties.
UNIT V
Applications of nanocomposites: Nanocomposites -Optical, structural applications -
Nanoparticulate systems with organic matrices -Applications - Biodegradable protein
nanocomposites -Applications Polypropylene nanocomposites - Application as exterior
automatic components -Hybrid nanocomposite materials - Application for corrosion protection
Reference:
1. Thomas E. Twardow ski, Introduction to Nanocomposite Materials -Properties, Processing,
Characterization, DesTech Publications, April 2007
2. Boston New york Washing ton, DC. and Woodhead publishing Itd, England, 2006.
3. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj. Nanocomposites Pentagon Press
4. Nanocomposite Science and Technology Pulickel M. Ajayan , Linda S. Schadler, Paul V.
Braun, 2006, Wiley-VCH
8. MOLECULAR CELL BIOLOGY
UNIT I CELL ARCHITECTURE: Structure and function of cells – structure of prokaryotic and
eukaryotic cells; Surface appendages – Cilia and Flagella, Capsules, Pili, Fimbriae and slime
layers; Cell walls – Algae, fungi, bacteria ; Membranes of Gram positive, Gram negative
bacteria and acid fast bacteria; protoplast, spheroplast and endospores; Structure and
organization of Membrane - Model membranes (Liposomes), Glyco conjugates and proteins in
membrane systems; Response to stress - active and passive transport, transport channels and
pumps;
UNIT II CELLULAR CONSTITUENTS: Cytoskeleton and structural components;
Neurotransmission, neuromuscular junction; Mitochondria – structure, biogenesis; Chloroplast –
structure, biogenesis; Structure of Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, ribosomes,
mesosomes, lysosomes, vesicular transport and import into cell organelles.
484
UNIT III NUCLEUS: Nucleus structure; Gross structure of chromosome; some specific gene
sequences in chromosomes, chemical composition of chromosomes, chromosome banding.
The nucleosome, the supranucleosomal structures; specialized chromosomes: polytene and lamp brush chromosomes. Nucleic acid structure: DNA and RNA. .
UNIT IV CELL CYCLE: Mechanism of cell division: Mitosis; meiosis and genetic recombination;
regulation of cell cycle; factors and genes regulating cell cycle. Biochemistry and molecular
biology of Cancer – malignant growth, tumour suppressor genes and oncogenes; chemical
carcinogenesis, hormonal imbalances
UNIT V CELLULAR DEVELOPMENT: Cellular signaling; cell differentiation; gametogenesis
and fertilization; development of Drosophila and Arabidopsis – spatial and temporal regulation of
gene expression. Signaling pathways short circuited in cancer – RB, cyclins, CDK, CDKI, RTK,
SMADs, Ras cascade, NF- , receptors, hypoxia related and angiogenesis related pathways,
extracellular matrix signaling - cell to cell and cell matrix adhesion, gap junctions.
References
1. Molecular Biology of Cell, Alberts, B et al.
2. Molecular cell Biology, Darnell, Lodish, Baltimore, Scientific American Books, Inc., 1994.
3. Molecular and cellular Biology, Stephen L.Wolfe, Wadsworth Publishing company, 1993
4. Reproduction in Eukaryotic cells, DM Prescott, Academic Press.
5. Developmental Biology, SF Gilbert, Sinauer Associates Inc.
6. Cell in Developmental and Inheritance, EB Wilson, MacMilan New York.
7. Fertilization, FT Longo, Chapman and Hall
8. Molecular Biology of Steroid and Nuclear Hormone Receptors, LP Freedman, Birkhuser
9. Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual, J. Sambrook, E.F. Fritsch and T. Maniatis, Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, 2000
10. Introduction to Practical Molecular Biology, P.D.Dabre, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., New York,
1998.
11. Molecular Biology LabFax, T.A. Brown (Ed.),Bios Scientific Publishers Ltd., Oxfor,1991
12. Molecular Biology of the Gene (4th Edition, J.D.Watson, N.H.Hopkins, J.W.Roberts, J.A.
Steitz and A.M.Weiner, The Benjamin/Cummings Publ. Co., Inc., California,1987
13. Genes VI (6th Edition ) Benjamin Lewin, Oxford University Press, U.K., 1998
14. Molecular biology and Biotechnology. A comprehensive desk reference, R.A. Meyers (Ed)
VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1995.
9. GENETICS AND RECOMBINANT DNA TECHNOLOGY
UNIT I Chromosome structure and function: Fine structure of gene, genetic code; Genetic
rearrangement – organization of coding sequences and repetitive sequences. Genetic system of
bacteria – transformation, transduction, recombination; plasmids and transposons; Genetic
systems of viruses – Phage I, RNA viruses and retroviruses.
UNIT II The law of DNA constancy and C - value paradox; DNA damage, mutation – types of
mutation; physical and chemical mutagenesis; molecular basis of spontaneous and induced
mutations, site directed mutagenesis. AMES test for mutagenesis; DNA repair. Recombination –
homologous recombination, Holiday junction, gene targeting, gene-disruption, FL/FRT and
Cre/Lox recombination, Rec A and other recombinases.
485
UNIT III Cutting and joining of DNA molecules: Biology of vectors – plasmids,
bacteriophages, single stranded DNA vectors, cosmids, phasmids, specialized vectors Cloning
strategies: cloning of genomic DNA, cDNA cloning; screening strategies; differential cloning
UNIT IV Introducing DNA into bacterial cells: Cloning in Gram negative and Gram positive
bacteria, streptomycetes and fungi including Saccharomyces cerevisiae Sequencing: Basic
DNA sequencing, whole genome sequencing, analyzing sequence data.
UNIT V Techniques in genetic engineering: Blotting techniques – Southern, Northern and
Western blotting; transformation of E. coli, PCR; probe construction, RFLP, AFLP, RAPD, SSCP
and SNP. Construction of cDNA library, molecular mapping of genome – genetic and physical
maps.
Antisense and ribozyme technology: Molecular mechanism of anti-sense molecules,
inhibition of splicing, poly adenylation and translation, disruption of RNA structure and capping.
Biochemistry of Ribozyme – Hammer head, hairpin and other ribozymes; strategies for
designing ribozymes; application of ribozymes and antisense technologies.
REFERENCES
1. Microbial genetics – Friedfelder
2. Principles of gene manipulation – Old and Primrose
3. Genes VII by Lewine 4. Hartl. D.L. A primer of population genetics. III edition, Sinauer
associates inc. Sunderland, 2000
5. Molecular cell Biology, Darnell, Lodish, Baltimore, Scientific American Books, Inc., 1994.
6. Molecular and cellular Biology, Stephen L.Wolfe, Wadsworth publishing company, 1993
10. PRINCIPLES AND PROPERTIES OF THIN FILM - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Electroplating , Electroless Plating , Langmuir-Blodget films, Thermal growth , Chemical Vapor
Deposition , Sputter Deposition , Molecular Beam Epitaxy . Atomistic Nucleation Processes,
Cluster Coalescence and Depletion, Grain Structure of Films and Coatings, Amorphous Thin
Film
UNIT II
Pump Selection and Exhaust Handling, Rotary Oil Pumps, Roots Pump, Diffusion Pumps ,
Turbo molecular Pump , Cryo pump , Sputter-Ion Pump , Pressure Measurement
Thermodynamics of Evaporation, Evaporation Rate, Alloys, Compounds, Sources , Transport ,
Deposition Monitoring
UNIT III
Adsorption, Surface diffusion, Nucleation ,Surface energy ,Texturing ,Structure Development,
Interfaces ,Stress ,Adhesion ,Temperature Control
Epitaxy applications, Semiconductor devices , Growth Monitoring , Composition Control, Lattice
Mismatch .Surface Morphology
UNIT IV
Gas Supply, Safety, Flow control, Contamination, Convection, Reaction, and Diffusion
Evaporation Hardware and Techniques, Sputtering, Sputtering Processes, Hybrid and Modified
PVD Processes
486
UNIT V
Mechanical, Electrical, Magnetic and Optical Properties of Thin Film, Analysis of thin films
REFERENCE:
1. The materials Science of thin films, M. Ohring, Academic Press, Boston, 2002.
2. Electronic thin film science, K.N. Tu, J.W. Mayer and L.C. Feldman, Macmillan,
New York, 1992.
3. Thin Film Technology hand book, Aicha Elshabiri,Aicha Elsabiri-Riad,Fred D.Barlao 1998 Mc Graw- Hill.
4. Handbook of Thin Film Technology, L.I. Maissel and R. Glang, McGraw-Hill,
New York, 1970.
5. Handbook of Thin-film Deposition Processes and Techniques
By Krishna Seshan, Published 2002, William Andrew Inc.
6. Vacuum Science and Technology, P. A. Redhead, American Vacuum Society,
Springer, 1994
7. Handbook of Hard Coatings: Deposition Technologies, Properties
Rointan Framroze Bunshah, Christian Weissmantel, Published 2001, William
Andrew Inc
http://books.google.com/books?q=inpublisher:%22William+Andrew+Inc.%22&lr=&source=g
bs_summary_r&cad=0
8. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, William D. Callister, Published
2006, John Wiley and Sons.
9. Material science for enginnering – Van Vlack, Addision Wisley, 2002.
10. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R. Askeland , Pradeep Prabhakar Phulé,
Published 2003, Thomson Learning Materials science.
11. PRACTICALS - I SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 1. Synthesis of ZnS nanoparticles by chemical route
2. Synthesis of CdS nanoparticles by chemical route
3. Synthesis of oxide nanostructures/ nanocomposites by Sol-gel technique
4. Synthesis of BaTiO3 nanostructure by mechanical ball milling
5. Synthesis of Cu/Ag nanopartcle through Micellar route
6. Hydrolysis method of sample preparation
7. Sol-Gel method of sample preparation
8. Preparation of nanoparticles by co-precipitation method
9. ZnO nanopowder preparation by using NaOH as capping agent
10. Synthesis of TiO2 nano particles by sonochemical method
12. PRACTICALS - II NANOBIOLOGY 1. Quantification of proteins and sugars
2. Analysis of oils : iodine number, saponification value, acid number
3. Agarose gel electrophoresis
4. SDS-Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE)
5. Titration of amino acids
6. Colorimetric determination of pKa 7. Model building using space filling/ ball and stuck models
8. Reaction of amino acids, sugars and lipids
9. Nanomicrobial degradation of various xenobiotics (e.g. pesticides, organochlorines,
pyretheroids, PAH)
487
THIRD SEMESTER
13. CHARACTERIZATION OF NANO MATERIALS
UNIT I
Electron microscopes -Scanning Electron Microscopes –Transmission Electron Microscopes -
Scanning Probe Microscopy -Atomic Force Microscopy - Scanning Tunneling Microscope -
Scanning Non-linear Dielectric microscopy - Nanomanipulator -nanotweezers –EDOX--XPS -
ICP .
UNIT II
Mechanical characterization -modulus and load carrying capability of nano region/compression -
micro hardness -fatigue -failure stress and strain toughness - glass transition and relaxation
behaviour -abrasion and wear resistance, super plasticity- Nano indentation.
UNIT III
Neutron and X-ray diffraction -Debye-Scherer formula -dislocation density - micro strain -
comparison of X-ray and neutron powder pattern -the Rietveld for powder pattern -macro
molecular crystallography using synchrotron radiation -role for neutron scattering in nanoscience.
UNIT IV
Optics -photonics of nanotechnology -properties of light and nano technology-interaction of light
with nano systems -absorbance, Surface plasma excitation, Size dependent PL -nano holes and
photons -imaging -solar energy absorbents using nano particles -nano technology and day light
-photonic crystals -wave guides and control of light paths.
UNIT V
UV-Vis-NIR spectrometer, band gap measurement -FTIR spectrometer, principle and
application -Photoluminescence spectrometer, principle and application- force spectroscopy –
biofunctionalized nanoparticles for SERS and SPR.
Reference:
1. Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies -Mick Wilson, Kamali
Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press (2005).
2. Nanocomposite science and technology, Pulickel M.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul V.Braun,
Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
3. www .eng .uc. edu/-gbeaucag/Classes/XRD/Neutron DiffractionatLN L. pdf
4. Scanning Probe Microscopy: Analytical Methods (Nanoscience and Nanotechnology)' by R.
Wiesendanger
5. Advanced X-ray Techniques in Research and Industries by A.K.Singh(ed.)
6. Transmission Electron Micrscopy of Materials by G. Thomas
7. Physical Principles of Microscopy: An introduction to TEM, SEM and AFM by R.F.Egerton
8. Instrumental Methods of Analysis (7th edn.) by Willard, Merritt, dean and Settle
9. Scanning Electron Microscopy and X-ray Microanalysis by J.Goldstein
10. Principles of Instrumental Analysis (5th edn.) by D.A.Stook, E.J.Holler and T.A.Nieman
488
14. SEMICONDUCTING NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Growth of nanocrystals -Growth of nanocrystals in glass matrices –Growth of nanocrystals in
organic and related matrices -Structural data -Influence of interfaces- Epitaxial growth.
UNIT II
One-electron -hole -pair states -Two- electron -hole -pair states –Many particle interaction.
UNIT III
Optical properties of composites -Surface polarization and charge separation -Coupling of
electron -hole pairs with phonons -Energy relaxation - Scattering at defects and interfaces-
Carrier -carrier scattering.
UNIT IV
Localization, trapping and transfer- Kinetic models -Trap processes and nonlinear optical
properties -Electric field effects -Magnetic field effects –External fields acting as confining
potentials.
UNIT V
Nanocrystals of III-V compounds -Spherical quantum dots in polymers and glasses -Quantum
dots obtained by deep-etching and inter diffusion –Quantum dots due to spatially isolated
potential fluctuations -Quantum dots resulting from self-organized epitaxial growth -Stressor -
induced quantum dots -Nanocrystals of indirect -gap materials -Theoretical description -Silicon
nanocrystals and quantum structures in porous silicon -Concepts of applications.
Reference:
1. Optical Properties of Semiconductor Quantum Dots by U.Woggon
2. The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors -An Introduction by J.H.Davis
3. Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies by M.Wilson, M.Simmons and
B.Reguse
4. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhusan (ed.)
5. Handbook of Semiconductor Nanostructures and Nanodevices (Vol.1-5) by A.A.Balandin and
K.L.Wang (ed.)
15. NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY UNIT I
Self-Assembly of nanostructured materials – Nonascience – Nanobiology- Nanotechnology and
nonobiotechnology – cellular nanostructures – Cell surface layers- Molecular motors – Action
fibers
UNIT II
Cancer detection/diagnosis via nanotechnologies and nanosensors - Biomimetic amplification of
nanoparticle homing to tumors -Polymer genomics: An insight into pharmacology and toxicology
of nanomedicines.
UNIT III
Introduction to challenges to macromolecular drug delivery -Nanocontaniner - Liposome
nanocontainers -Biopolymer nanocontainers -nanocapsules –Applications in drug and gene
target delivery -Lipid-based nanoparticles for nucleic acid delivery - Nanotechnology
approaches for drug and small molecule delivery across the blood brain barrier- Fluorocarbon
nanoparticles as multifunctional drug delivery vehicles.
489
UNIT IV
Introduction to controlled fabrication of hierarchically branched nanopores, nanotubes and
nanowires -Integration of cell membranes and nanotube transistors - Manufacturing of
nanochannels with controlled dimensions using protease nanolithography- Controlled synthesis
of nonspherical microparticles using microfluidics -Introduction to bioelectronics and biosensing
devices -Nano circuitry -Applications in tissue engineering -Nanoprobes -Protein polymer
nanomachines.
UNIT V
Imaging -Animal models: Live and in color- Sentinel lymph node mapping of the pleural space -
A biomagnetic system for in vivo cancer imaging -Quantum dots for live cells -In vivo imaging
and diagnostics -Luminescent nanoparticle probes for bioimaging.
Reference:
1. Nanobiotechnology- Concepts, Applications and Perspectives by C. M. Niemeyer and C. A.
Mirkin ,
2. Biotechnology: Lessons from Nature by David S.Goodsell
3. Handbook of Nanostructured Biomaterials and Their Applications in Nanobiotechnology by
H.S.Nalwa
16. CARBON NANOMATERIALS UNIT I
Well known allotropes of carbon – Diamond and graphite – Their crystal structures –
Distinguishing features – Discovery of fullerenes (0 D Carbon nanomaterials) – Laser ablation
and arc-discharge methods - Structures of C60 & C70 – UV, IR, Raman and 13
C NMR spectra of
C60 & C70 – Cyclic voltammetric studies of C60 & C70 – Higher fullerenes – Some chemical
reactions of C60 - like reduction, halogenation, Friedel-Crafts reaction, [2+2], [3+2] and [4+2]
cycloaddition reactions.
UNIT II
Chemistry of CNTs – Functionalization of CNTs – Covalent chemistry at the open ends of
SWCNTs – Fluorination of CNTs and fluorine substitution reactions – Cycloadditions – 1,3-
dipolar, nitrenes cycloadditons, nucleophilic and radical additons – Non-covalent bonding –
surfactant molecules adsorbed on nanotube surfaces – Filling the inner cavity of CNTs by C60.
UNIT III
1D Carbon nanomaterials - Carbon nanotubes (CNTs) – Iijima‘s observation – MWCNT and
SWCNTs- Characterization by TEM- Methods of preparation of MWCNTs – Laser ablation &
arc-discharge methods, decomposition of hydrocarbons by catalysts, organometallics as
sources, microwave method –Separation and purification of MWCNTs – Synthesis of SWCNTs
– Laser ablation, arc-discharge, HiPco methods – Metallic and semiconductor SWCNTs –
Properties – Electrical, mechanical and vibrational (Raman spetra).
UNIT IV
Novel nano-forms of carbon – Carbon nanohorns, cup-stacked CNTs, carbon nanotori, carbon
nano-onions, carbon nanobuds – Graphene (2 D Carbon nanomaterial) – Preparation –
Exfoliation, from the tip of graphite, reduction of graphite oxide and by the opening of CNTs –
Characterization by Raman spectrum – Mechanical properties, conductivity, Quantum Hall
effect. Inorganic fullerene like molecules – MoS2 & WS2 – Boron nitride nanotubes.
490
UNIT V
Applications of carbon nanomaterials – Fullerides as superconductors – Fullerene nanocar –
CNTs in field emission, shielding, FETs & logic gates – Hydrogen storage in CNTs and Fuel
cells – Mechanical reinforcement by CNTs – Nanocomposites of CNTs – CNTs in chemical
sensors, catalysis – Analytical applications of CNTs – Adsorption of dioxin, adsorption of
substituted phenols from industrial wastes and determination of their concentration – some
commercial products – CNTs in cancer therapy – Hyperthermia and carrier for direct drug
delivery
References 1. C. N. R. Rao (ed.), Special Issue of Fullerenes, Indian J. Chem., A & B, 1992, May. 2. W. Edward Billiups and M.A. Ciufolini (eds.), Buckminsterfullerenes, VCH Publishers, New York,
1999. 3. Y. Gogatsi (ed.), Carbon Nanomaterials, C R C., Taylor & Francis, New York, 2006. 4. K. Tanaka, T. Yamabe and K. Fukui (eds.), The Science and Technology of Carbon Nanotubes,
Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1999. 5. T.W. Ebbesen (ed.), Carbon Nanotubes: Preparation and Properties, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL.,
1997. 6. C. P. Poole, Jr., and F. I. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, JohnWiley & Sons, Inc., New
Jersey, 2003. 7. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials: Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. 8. L. Dai (ed.), Carbon Nanotechnology, Elsevier, 2006; 9. A. K. Geim and K. S. Novoselov, Nature Mat., 2007, 6, 183. 10. C. N. R. Rao et al., J. Mater. Chem., 2009, 19, 2457; A. K. Geim, Science, 2009, 324, 1530. 11. G. Park and R. S. Ruoff, Nat. Nanotechnol., 2009, 6, 183. 12. Y. Gogotsi (ed.), Nanotubes and Nanofibres, CRC, Taylor & Francis, New York, 2006. 13. J. L. Delgado, M. A. Herranz and N. Martin, J. Mater. Chem., 2008, 18, 1417.
17. NANO LITHOGRAPHY -ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Optical lithography: Contact and proximity printing -Projection Printing –Mask alignment,
Reflection and catadioptric projection -Refraction projection –Enhancement –overlay
accuracies. Positive and negative photoresists, UV -photolithography for systems of 100 nm -
Nano designs for electronic circuits.
UNIT II
Electron Lithography: Electron optics -Raster scan and Vector scan –Electron proximity /
Projection Printing, Electron resists -Electron Beam Applications X -ray Lithography: Proximity
printing -X-ray masks -X-ray sources –Synchrotron radiation -X ray projection -X-ray resists.
UNIT III
Ion Lithography Focused ion beam -Point sources of Ion -Ion column –Beam writing -Focused
Ion Beam Lithography -Masked Ion Beam Lithography –Ion Projection Lithography. Lithography
based on Surface Instabilities: Wetting, Dewetting, Adhesion Limitations -Resolution and
Achievable / line widths of each of the above techniques.
UNIT IV
Nanolithography techniques High -resolution E-beam Nanolithography - Resist Exposure
Metrics -High resolution resists -Proximity Effects -Direct writing.
491
UNIT V
Proximal Probe Nanolithography: STM -AFM -Dip pen Nano lithography - Resists & Imaging
Layers for proximal probes -Langmuir -Blodgett Film resists - Patterned synthesis of
nanomaterials -Self-Assembled Monolayers Resists –Anodic Oxidation -Nanoscratching.
References:
1. C.Y. Chang and S.M.Sze, "ULSI Technology", McGraw-Hill Companies Inc., Singapore,
1996.
2. John N. Helbert, "Hand Book of VLSI Microlithography", Noyes Publication, USA, 2001.
3. James R. Sheats and Bruce W. Amith, "Microlithography Sciences and Technology", Marcel
Dekker Inc., New York, 1998.
FOURTH SEMESTER
18. MAGNETIC NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I
Introduction -Magnetic fundamentals -Spontaneous Magnetization and Curie Temperature-
Magnetic Parameters -Stoner-Wohlfarth threshold –Antiferromagnetic materials -Memory
Fundamentals -Magnetic Storage Fundamentals.
UNIT II
Electron Transport in Magnetic Multi-layers -Spintronics -Spin Polarized Electron Tunneling -
Interlayer Exchange Coupling -Spin Relaxation in Magnetic Metallic layers and Multi-layers -
Non-Equilibrium Spin Dynamics in Laterally Defined Magnetic Structures
UNIT III
Particulate Nanomagnets – Geometrical Nanomagnets - Fabrication Techniques Scaling –
Characterization using Various Techniques – Imaging Magnetic Microspectroscopy – Study of
Ferromagnetic and Antiferromagnetic interfaces.
UNIT IV
Optical Imaging -Lorentz Microscopy -Electron Holography of Magnetic Nanostructures -
Magnetic Force Microscopy -Magnetic Data Storage -Introduction - Magnetic Media -Properties
-Materials Used -Write Heads -Read Heads
UNIT V
Magnetoresistance -General -in Normal Metals and in Ferromagnetic Materials -Future of
Magnetic Data Storage -Magneto-Optics and Magneto-optic recording -Kerr Effect -Faraday
Effect, Magnetic Semiconductors, Spintronics devices, noise reduction.
Reference:
1. Advanced semiconductor and organic Nano-techniques -VoL I Hadis Morkoc, Academic
Press, London (2003) ISBN 0125070616 -:1--
2. Modern Techniques for Characterizing Magnetic Materials Edited by Yimei Zhu, Springer
(2005) ISBN 1402080077
3. Magnetic Microscopy of Nanostructures Hans P.Oepen and H.Hopster, Springer (2004) ISBN
3540401865
4. Ultra thin Magnetic Structures 111- Fundamentals of Nanomagnetism JAC Bland and B.
Heinrich, Springer (2004) ISBN 3540219536
5. Magnetic Materials: Fundamentals and Device Applications Nicola Ann Spaldin, Cambridge
University Press (2003) ISBN 0521016584
492
19. NANOSENSORS AND NANODEVICES
UNIT I
Micro and nano sensors -Fundamentals of sensors -Biosensor -Micro fluids -MEMS and NEMS
-Packaging and characterization of sensors -Method of packaging at zero level, dye level and
first level.
UNIT II
Sensors - Sensors for aerospace and defense -Accelerometer –Pressure - sensor -Night vision
systems- Nano tweezers -Nano cutting tools- Integration of sensors with actuators and
electronic circuitry.
UNIT III
Sensor for biomedical applications: Cardiology, Neurology and as diagnostic tool for other civil
applications: metrology, bridges, etc. -Biosensors - Clinical diagnostics -Generation of
biosensors -Immobilization characteristics - Applications -Conducting polymer based sensors -
DNA biosensors –Optical sensors- Biochips.
UNIT IV
Metal -insulator semiconductor devices -Molecular electronics - Information storage -Molecular
switching -Schottky devices -Quantum structures and devices -Quantum layers, wells, dots and
wires.
UNIT V
Microscopic devices -Nanoscale transistors -Single electron transistors - MOSFET and nano
FET -Resonant tunneling devices -Carbon nanotube based logic gates -Optical devices - Connection with quantum dots, quantum wires and quantum wells.
Reference:
1. Sensors: Micro and Nanosensors, Sensor Market Trends (Parts 1 and 2) by H.Meixner
2. Nanoscience and Nanotechnology: Novel Structure and Phenomena by P .Sheng(ed.)
3. Nano Engineering in Science and Technology: An Introduction to the World of Nano Design
by M.Rieth
4. Between Technology and Science: Exploring an Emerging Field Knowledge Flows and
Networking on the Nanoscale by M.S.Meyer
5. From Atom to Transistor by S.Datta
20. NANOELECTRONICS Unit-I
Foundation of molecular electronics: Charge transport in molecular conduction junction- Ac-
Drawn transport through wires- Negative differential resistance.
Unit-II
Electronic structure calculations for nano molecular systems- Ab-initio Non-equilibrium Green‘s
function formalism- Electron transport in molecular devices- DFT for molecular electronics-
Single electrons tunneling in small molecules.
Unit-III
Nano device: Diodes- transistors- rectifiers- sensors- DNA based devices- DNA chips and array
devices- Quantum dot cellular automata (QCA).
493
Unit-IV
Quantum dots- Quantum wires- Quantum rods- Nano tubes- Quantum transport in Nano tubes-
Carbon Nano tube Electronic and Optoelectronics- Nano processor- Nano computer-
Architectures of molecular electronic computers.
Unit-V
Spintronics- Introduction, overview, history and background- Generation of spin polarization-
Theories of spin injection, spin relaxation and spin dephasing- Spintronic devices and applications- Spin filters-Spin diodes- Spin transistors.
References
1. Introduction to Molecular Electronics – M.C.Petty, M.R.Bryce, D.Bloor - Oxford University
Press (1995).
2. Molecular Nanoelectronics: Analysis, Design and Simulation – J.M.Seminario – Elsevier
(2006).
3. Nanowire and Nanobelts: Material, properties and devices (volume 1) - Zhong Lin Wang –
Kluwer Academic Press (2003).
4. Introduction to Molecular Electronics – G.Cuniberti, G.Fagas, K.Richter – Springer (2005).
5. Nanoscience, Engineering, and Technology – William A. Goddard, Donald W. Brenner,
Gerald J. Lafrate – CRC Press (2003).
21. NANOMEDICINE AND DRUG DELIVERY - ELECTIVE
UNIT I
Prospect of Nanomedicine: History of the idea -The Biological and Mechanical Traditions -Nano-
medicine -Taxonomy -Bio-Pharmaceuticals - Implantable Materials -Implantable Devices -
Surgical Aids -Diagnostic Tools - Genetic Testing -Imaging -Nanoparticles Probe -Case Analysis
-1) Resiprocytes - Mechanical Artificial Red Cells -2) Using DNA as a construction medium
UNIT II
Nanosensors: Chemical and Molecular Sensors -Displacement and Motion Sensors -Force
Nanosensors -Pressure Sensing -Thermal Nanosensors –Electric and Magnetic Sensing -
Cellular Bioscanning -Non-invasive Neuroelectric Monitoring - Macrosensing -Acoustic
Macrosensing -Electric and Magnetic Macrosensing - Neural Macrosensing
UNIT III
Nanocarriers: Needs and Requirements -Nanoparticle Flow: Implications for Drug Delivery -
Polymeric Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers and Controlled Release Implant Devices -Genetic
Vaccines: A Role for Liposomes -Polymer Micelles as Drug Carriers -Recent Advances in
Microemulsions as Drug Delivery Vehicles - Lipoproteins as Pharmaceutical Carriers -Solid
Lipid Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers
UNIT IV
Nanocapsules preparation, Characterization and Therapeutic Applications - Dendrimers as
Nanoparticulate Drug Carriers -Cells and Cell Ghost as Drug Carriers - Cochleates as
Nanoparticular Drug Carriers -Aerosols as Drug Carriers –Magnetic Nanoparticles as Drug
Carriers
UNIT V
Nanoparticulate Drug Delivery to the Reticuloendothelial System and to Associated Disorders -
Delivery of Nanoparticles to the Cardiovascular System - Nanocarriers for the Vascular Delivery
of Drugs to the Lungs -Nanoparticulate Carriers for Drug Delivery to the Brain -Nanoparticles for
494
Targeting Lymphatics –Polymeric Nanoparticles for Delivery in the Gastro-Intestinal Tract -
Nanoparticular Carriers for Ocular Drug Delivery -Nanoparticles and Microparticles as Vaccines
Adjuvants -Pharmaceutical Nano Carriers in Treatment and Imaging of Infection
Reference:
1. Nano Medicines Edited by Dr.Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj, Pentagon Press (2006)
ISBN 81-8274-139-4
2. Nanoparticulates as Drug Carriers, Edited by Vladimir P.Torchilin, Imperial College Press,
North Eastern University, USA (2006) ISBN 1-86094-630-5
22. PROJECT
The research project should be completed and the Dissertation (Report) should be
submitted for evaluation. The project report is expected to provide clear answers for following
questions:
(i) Why this particular investigation was selected?
(ii) How was the investigation carried out?(Describing the methodology used);
(iii) What are the results obtained? (Reporting the results obtained);
(iv) How are the results interpreted? (Discussing the results);
(v) What are the conclusions derived?
23. PRACTICALS- III CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS
1. Determination of band gap through UV-Vis spectroscopy
2. X-ray powder diffraction pattern analysis (Indexing, particle size determination, lattice
parameters determination etc for CdS nanoparticles)
3. Film thickness measurement using weigh method
4. Photoconductivity measurement (Dark and photo currents)
5. DC conductivity measurement at various temperatures with two-probe setup
(Activation energy estimation also)
6. DC conductivity measurement at various temperatures with four -probe setup
(Bandgap estimation also )
7. Dielectric measurement at various temperatures for a fixed frequency ( εr , tan δand
σac determination)
8. Studies on thermal properties of nano-oxide materials through DSC & TGA analysis
9. X-ray diffraction pattern of nano-ZnO powder and thin films; determination of particle
size
24. PRACTICALS- IV NANOTHIN FILMS
1. Electroless of deposition of Cu/Ni on glass substrate
2. Preparation of Cu/Ni thin film by using electrodeposition
3. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the spray pyrolysis method
4. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the sol-gel process
5. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the chemical bath technique
6. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the spin-coating process
7. Nanostructured thin film preparation by using the dip-coating method
495
APPENDIX - AZ112
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Com with Computer Application
CBCS- FOR AFFILIATED COLLEGES
(For those who joined the course from the Academic year 2012-2013 onwards)
Revised Regulations and Scheme of Examinations
SEMESTER I CREDITS HOURS
Core paper
Management 5 8
Accounting
Quantitative 5 8
Techniques
Office automation 5 5
Office automation 2
practical
Elective
Strategic 5 7
management
SEMESTER II
Core paper
Corporate Legal 5 6 framework
Financial 5 6
Management
Operation 5 6
Research
Business 5 6
environment
Elective
Data base 5 4 Theory
management
Practical 2
SEMESTER III
Core paper
Advanced 5 6
corporate
accounting
Research 5 6
Methodology
496
INTERNAL EXTERNAL
PASSING
MINIMUM 50%
25 75
25 75
Practical 75
examinations +
record note
book+ seminar
25
25 75
25 75
25 75
25 75
25 75
Practical 75
examinations +
record note
book+
seminar25
Practical
25 75
25 75
Taxation and Tax 5 6 25 75
planning
internet and web 5 4 theory 25Practical 75
designing 2 practical examinations +
record note
book+ seminar
Project 5 6 Viva voice 40 60
SEMESTER IV
Core paper
Advanced Cost 5 8 25 75
accounting
Computerized 5 7 25 75
accounting
packages -Theory
Computerised 5 7 40 60
accounting
packages practical
Elective 25 75
Human resource 5 8 25 75
management
Total 90 120 1800
TOTAL CREDITS
Ist semester 20 credits
2nd
semester 25 credits
3rd semester 25 credit
4th
semester 20 credits
total number of papers courses 18
Total number of credits 90
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT:
Regarding internal assessment the 25 marks is allocated in the following
manner
The average of the best two tests from 3 compulsory test -- 15 marks
Assignment 4 marks
Seminars 6 marks
Each test shall be an hour test
PROJECT WORK
Components marks
Project report 60 marks
viva voce 40 marks
497
The project shall be done by the students individually in English
Project report evaluation will be done centrally by the university and viva-
voce will be conducted by both the external examiner and guide at the end
of third semester in the respective colleges.
Note: M.COM C.A PROJECT should only be a commerce project and
not a computer project
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT COMPONENT FOR OFFICE AUTOMATION
‐ Elective paper
‐ Regarding the paper office automation in the second semester, the internal The internal assessment mark will be allocated in the
following manner. For internal test 20 marks Practical with record
note 5 marks
Out of 6 hours allotted for office automation 4 hours will be allocated for
theory and 2 hours for practical per week.
The board also recommend to provide necessary infrastructure facilities for
conducting practical for office automation and computer accounting
packages
INDUSTRIAL VISIT
Make the industrial visit compulsory for students of PG. On duty leave (
Non remunerative ) shall be sanctioned do to the staff who are
accompanying the students
ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION : A candidate who has passed the
B.Com., B.A. corporate secretaryship., B.B.A., B.com ( Bank
management)., B.A. Co-op)., B.A. ( industrial organization., B.Com C.A.,
B.com corporate secretaryship are eligible for admission into M.com
course.
ADMISSION TO M.COM B.COM (C.A) : B.com C.a. students are eligible
for admission. However. B.Com students appear for 25 theory papers
and 6 practical papers. There for to treat all the students equally for
admission, 6 practical papers should not be taken into account for
preparation of rank list.
PASSING MINIMUM
There is a pass minimum of 50 for external and overall components.
For all the problem involving papers 60% for problem and 40%for theory
questions shall be asked.
498
FOR M.COM C.A OFFICE AUTOMATION AND OTHER COMPUTER
PAPERS out of the total hours allotted for the paper, 2 hours shall be
allotted for practical hours. For these papers among 25 internal
assessment marks, 20 marks shall be for practical examinations and 5
marks for record work.
**********
499
510
APPENDIX - AZ114
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
Master of Philosophy Course in English
(From the Academic Year 2013-14 onwards)
SYLLABUS
(For Affiliated Colleges)
The unitized syllabus for the M. Phil. Degree Course in English, revised in
accordance with the UGC guidelines, shall take effect from the academic year 2013 –
14. The duration of the M. Phil. Programme shall spread over one full academic year, in
two semesters (for full – time scholars), and two academic years, in two semesters (for
Part – time scholars).
Course Content
Semester I
Paper Max. Marks Min. Marks
1. Research Methodology 100 50
2. Critical Theory 100 50
Semester II
3. Twentieth Century Literature 100 50
4. Dissertation
Valuation 150 75
Viva-Voce 50 25
Total 500 250
Scheme of Examination
• Passing minimum in each paper is 50%
• Class declaration will be as per PG rules
• Dissertation valuation will be made by an external examiner
• Viva – Voce:
Guide : 25
Another Examiner : 25
Passing Minimum : 25/50
511
Each paper will be divided into FIVE Units
Question Paper Pattern
• There will be two questions from each unit
• Each question carries 20 marks
• Sub – divisions may be created, if necessary, in any question
• Choice will be ―either or‖ in each unit
Unit Question
I 1 or 2
II 1 or 2
III 1 or 2
IV 1 or 2
V 1 or 2
Semester I
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STYLISTICS
(PAPER I)
Unit – I – Meanings and objectives of research. Research in language and
literature, Materials and tools of research (books, anthologies, thesauruses,
encyclopaedias, conference proceedings, unpublished theses, newspaper articles,
journals, govt. publications, e-journals, web references, research sites, printed and web
indexes, etc. e-mail discussions groups, special libraries. Advanced study centres,
virtual libraries, web search engines, etc.)
Unit – II – The Process of researchSelecting a project; the survey of relevant
literature; defining aims and objectives; designing hypothesis; scope and limitations;
preparing a research proposal; planning, etc. - Mechanics of research.
Unit – III – Presentation of ResearchTitle, aims and objectives; research format;
avoiding plagiarism; quoting and creating in-text citations (documentation); research
findings; using standard style sheets.
512
Unit – IV – Language, Style and Types of DiscoursesDiction, The Style suitable for
a literary Thesis, Narration, Argumentation, Explosion, Description, Affective Fallacy,
Dissociation of Sensibility, Figurative: Language, Intentional Fallacy, Objective
Correlative, Pathetic fallacy, Point of View, Satire.
Unit –V – Practical criticismThe use of Practical criticism, Metrics, Pragmatics and
stylistics, Pragmatic Theories, Narrative Voices, Symbolism, Psychonarration, Literary
genre, Theory – Genres and Modes, presentational modes – Plato and Aristotle.
Reference:
Paltridge, B. (2006). Discourse Analysis: An Introduction. London: Continuum
Discourse.
Barry, Peter. 2002. Beginning Theory: an Introduction to Literary and Cultural Theory.
New York: Manchester United Press.
Crystal, David. 1994. The Cambridge Encyclopaedia of the English Language.
London: CUP.
Madden, Frank. 2002. Exploring Poetry. London: Longman.
Verdonk, Peter. 2002. Stylistics. Oxford: OUP.
Frow, John, 2009. Genre, RoutledgePublication
V. S. Sethuramanetal. Practical Criticism, Macmillan
Black Elizabeth, 2006. Pragmatic, Stylistics, Edinburgh University Press Ltd.
Gibaldi, MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers (7th Edition)
CRITICAL THEORY- PAPER II
Unit I - Marxism and Social Realism
1) Edmund Wilson - Marxism and Literature
2) Raymond Williams - Realism and the Contemporary Novel
3) George Lucas - The Ideology of Modernism
Unit II - Structuralism and Post structuralism
1) Roman Jacobson - Linguistics and Poetics
2) Gerard Genette - Structuralism and Literary Criticism
3) Ferdinand de Saussure - The Object of Study
513
Unite III - Reader Response Criticism and Deconstruction
1) Jacques Derrida - Structure, Sign and Play in the Discourse of
the Human Sciences
2) Cleanth Brooks - The Primacy of the Reader
3) Wolfgang Iser - The Reading Process of a Phenomenological
Approach
Unit IV - Feminism and Psycho Analysis
1) GayatriChakravorthySpivak- Feminism and Critical Theory
2) Harold Bloom - Poetic Origins and Final Phases
3) C. G. Jung - Psychology and Literature
Unit V - Politics and Cultural History
1) Frederic Jameson - The Politics of Theory: Ideology
2) Stephen Greenblatt - The Circulation of Social Energy
3) Terry Eagleton - Capitalism, Modernism and Postmodernism
Reference Books
Lodge, David. 20th Century Literary Criticism: A Reader. New York: Longman, 1972.
---. Nigel Wood. Modern Criticism and Theory: A Reader. 3rd Edition. New Delhi: Pearson Education, 2008.
Rayan, Michal. Julie Rivkin. Literary Theory: An Anthology. New York: Blackwell Publishers, 2002.
Sethuraman V.S. Contemporary Criticism: An Anthology. Chennai: Macmillan India Ltd, 1989.
514
TWENTIETH CENTURY LITERATURE
(PAPER III)
(Revised Syllabus for M. Phil, 2013-14)
Unit – I British Literature
Poetry- T. S. Eliot - The Waste Land
Kingsley Amis - A Dream of Fair Women
Philip Larkin - The Whitsun Wedding
Drama- Harold Pinter - The Caretaker
Fiction - Irish Murdoch - The Bell
Unit – II American Literature
Poetry- Amiri Baraka - A Poem for Black Hearts
Anne Sexton - Sylvia‘s Death
E E Cummings - Jehovah Buried, Satan Dead
Fiction - Alice Walker - Sula
Drama - Eugene O‘Neil - Long Day‘s Journey into Night
Unit – III African Literature
Poetry- Gabriel Okara - Once Upon a Time
BiragoDiop - Breath
John Pepper Clerk - The Casualties
Fiction - Chinua Achebe - Things Fall Apart
Drama - Wole Soyinka - The Strong Breed
Unit – IV Canadian Literature
Poetry - E. J. Pratt - Come Away, Death
From Stone to Steel
Earle Birney - The Bear on the Delhi Road
Fiction - Margaret Laurence - The Stone Angel
Drama - Michael Cook - Jacob‘s Wake
515
Unit – V South Asian Literature
Poetry - A. K. Ramanujan - Black Hen (first three poems)
Fiction - Monica Ali - Brick Lane
Drama - GirishKarnad - Tale Danda
Reference:
1. Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry Ed. C. D. Narasimhaiah, Macmillan.
2. Norton Anthology of American Literature. W. W. Norton & company, 1989.
3. American Literature, Vol.2, Ed. William E. Cain. New York: Penguin Academics,
2004.
516
APPENDIX – AZ115
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
M.Phil MATHEMATICS
(For affiliated colleges)
(From the academic year 2013 - 2014)
SYLLABUS
1. OBJECTIVES:
Mathematics is one of the fundamental disciplines in science. It forms the basis for all
other disciplines. This programme aims at providing basic tools and exposure to students who
intend to pursue research in Mathematics at the international level.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:
Paper of title
Advanced
Algebra
Advanced
Analysis
Optional
(One of the
following)
Dissertation
(Evaluation
and viva-
voce)
LIST OF OPTIONAL PAPERS
1. Banach Algebra and Spectral Theory
2. Harmonic Analysis
3. Differentiable Manifolds
4. Advanced Graph Theory
5. Stochastic Modeling
6. Computational Fluid Dynamics
7. Wavelets
3. ELIGIBILITY AND ADMISSION:
Pass in M. Sc Mathematics/Applied Mathematics with 55% of marks. SC/ST students
will be given 5% concession as per the government norms.
517
Teaching Exam
hours hours
90 3
90 3
90 3
Credit Internal External Total
8 25 75 100
8 25 75 100
8 25 75 100
16 50 150 200
SI.
No.
1
2
3
4
Semester
I
I
II
II
4. EXAMINATION:
Each paper will be evaluated on the basis of the University examination with passing
minimum of 50% in each paper. There shall be double valuation as followed for the PG courses
offered in the affiliated colleges of the University. The classification of the candidates in the
examination shall be on the basis of the system followed for the PG courses in the affiliated
colleges.
The Dissertation shall be evaluated by the external examiner for 150 marks. The viva-
voce examination shall carry a maximum of 50 marks awarded by two internal examiners
namely as supervisor of the dissertation and one internal examiner. The passing minimum for
Dissertation (Evaluation and Viva-voce) shall be calculated in terms of total of marks in
evaluation & viva - voce examination provided the candidate presents for the viva-voce
examination.
3. QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
Question Paper pattern for each paper shall be as follows:
Part A 5 x3 = 15
Answer ALL questions
Q1 to 10 (Either Or)
Part B 5 x 12 = 60
Answer ALL questions
(Q11 to 20 Either Or) One of the Questions in Part A as well
as Part B shall be a problem (both choices) form the prescribed text and problems in problems
questions Part A and Part B shall be from different units of the syllabus in each paper.
Necessary number of sub-divisions may be created in each questions as per the content of the
questions.
Paper -I ADVANCED ALGEBRA
Unit I: Rings and Ideals - Modules
Unit II: Rings and Modules fractions - Primary Decomposition
Unit III: Integral Dependence and valuations - Chain conditions'.
Unit IV: Noetherian Rings - Artin Rings
Unit V: Discrete valuation rings and Dedekind domains.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Atiyah and Macdonald, Introduction to
Commutative Algebra, Chapters 1 to'9. *
518
Paper - II ADVANCED ANALYSIS
Unit I: Chapter 1
Unit II: Chapter 2
Unit III: Chapter 6
Unit IV: Chapter 17
Unit V: Chapter 9 and 19.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Walter Rudin, Real and Complex Analysis,
Third Edition, Chapters 1, 2, 6, 9, 17 and 19.
Paper -III OPTIONAL 1 - BANACH ALGEBRA AND SPECTRAL THEORY
Unit I: Banach Algebras - Complex Homomorphisms - Basic properties of Spectra -
Symbolic Calculus.
Unit II: Differentiation - Group of invertible elements - Commutative Banach Algebra -
Ideals and Homomorphisms - Gelfand transforms.
Unit III: Involutions - Applications to non commutative algebra - Positive Linear
functionals.
Unit IV: Bounded Operators on Hilbert spaces - Bounded operators - A commutativity
theorem - Resolution of the Identity - Spectral theorem.
Unit V: Eigen values of normal operators - Positive operators and square roots - Group
of invertible operators - Charecterization of V* algebra.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Rudin, Functional Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill,
Chapters 10, 11 and 12.
OPTIONAL 2 - HARMONIC ANALYSIS
Unit I: Fourier Series and Integrals - Definitions and easy results - The Fourier
transformation - Convolution - Approximate identities - Fejer's theorem - Unicity
theorem - Parselval relation - Fourier Stieltjes Coefficents - The classical kernels.
519
Unit II: Summability - Metric theorems - Pointwise summability - Positive definite
sequences - Herglotz's theorem - The inequality of Hausdroff and Young.
Unit III: The Fourier integral - Kernals on R. The Planchtrel theorem - Another
convergence theorem - Poisson summation formula - Bachner's theorem - Continuity theorem.
Unit IV: Characters of discrete groups and compact groups - Bochners' theorem - Minkowski's theorem.
Unit V: Hardy spaces - Invariant subspaces - Factoring F and M-Rieza theorem - Theorems of Szego and Beuoling.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Henry Helson, Harmonic Analysis, Hindustan
Book Agency, Chapters 1.1 to 1.9 2.1 to 3.5 and 4.1 to 4.3.
OPTIONAL 3 - DIFFERENTIAL MANIFOLDS
Unit I: Preliminaries - Differential manifolds Second axiom of countability.
Unit II: Tangent vectors and differentials - Vector fields.
Unit III: Submanifolds - Implicit mapping theorem.
Unit IV: Tensors and Exterior algebra -Tensor fields and Differential forms.
Unit V: Orintatation - Integration on Manifolds (up to Section 4.9).
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in F.M. Warner, Differentiable Manifolds and
Lie groups, Sections 1.1 to 1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 4.1 and 4.2.
OPTIONAL 4 - ADVANCED GRAPH THEORY
Unit I: Decomposition and colorings of a graph - Generalizations of graph
decomposition - Nordhaus - Gaddum type theorems.
Unit II: Necessary conditions for the existence of a G-decomposition of a graph - Cfycle
decompositions, Vertex labellings and graceful graphs.
Unit III: Perfect graphs: The perfect graph theorem - p-critical and partitionable graphs - A
polyhedral characterization of perfect graphs and p-critical graphs -' The strong perfect
graph conjecture(and recent theorem).
Unit IV: Domination in graphs: Introductions - Terminology and concepts - Applications -
NP completeness - History of domination in graphs - Bounds in terms of order.
520
Unit V: Bounds in terms of order , degree and packing - Bounds in terms of order and size
-Bounds in tyerms of degree, diameter and girth - Product graphs and vizing's
conjecture.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in
(i) Juraj Bosak, Decompositions 'of graphs, Kulwar AcademioiPublicers, Chapter 2,3,4,
6 and 7. (ii) Martin Charles Golumbic, Algorithmic graph theory, Academic Press, Chapter
3. (iii) Teresa W. Haynes, Stephen T. Hedetniemi and Peter J. Slater, Fundamentals of
Domination in graphs, Marcel Decker, Chapters 1 and 2.
OPTIONAL 5 - STOCHASTIC MODELING
Recap: Basics of Probability space random variable - Discrete distributions and
Continuous distributions - Expectation - Conditional Expectation - Moment Generating
Function -Probability Generating Function - Laplace Transform - Joint Distributions -
Functions of random variables and random vectors.
Unit I: Markov chains: Transition probability matrix of a Markov chain - First step Analysis -
Functional of Random walks and successive runs - classification of states - Basic Limit
Theorem of Markov Chain.
Unit II: Continuous time Markov chains: Poisson distribution and Poisson process -
Distributions associated with Poisson Process - Pure Birth Process - Pure Death Process -
Birth and Death Process - Limiting behavior of Birth and Death Process - Birth and Death
Process with absorbing states.
Unit III: Renewal Phenomena: Renewal process and Related concepts - Poisson process
viewed a Renewal Process - Asymptotic behavior of Renewal process.
Unit IV: Branching Process and Population Growth: Branching process - branching process
and generating functions - Geometrically distributed offspring - variation on Branching process
- Stochastic models of Plasmid Reproduction and Plasmid copy Number partition.
Unit V: Queueing Systems: Queueing Processes - Poisson Arrival and exponentially
distributed service times - The M/G/l and M/G/8 systems - variations and extensions.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Howard M. Taylor and Samuel Karlin, An Introduction
to Stochastic Modelling (Revised Version), Academic Press, Newyork, 1984.
OPTIONAL 6 - COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
Unit I: Philosophy of Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Governing Equations of Fluid
Dynamics - Their Derivations - a discussions - a Discussions of their physical meaning and a
presentation of forms particularly suitable to computational fluid dynamics.
521
Unit II: The Governing Equations of Fluid Dynamics - Their Derivations - a discussions - a
Discussions of their physical meaning and a presentation of forms particularly suitable to
computational fluid dynamics (contd).
Unit III: Mathematical Techniques of Partial Differential Equations - The impact on
computational Fluid Dynamics.
Unit IV: Some Aspects of Discretization and Grids with appropriate Transformation.
Unit V: Some simple Computational Fluid Dynamics Techniques.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in John D. Anderson, Computational Fluid Dynamics:
The Basis with Applications, McGraw Hill Book Co Ltd. Newyork, 1995.
Reference Books:
1. F. Chorlton, Text book of Fliud Dynamics, CBS Publications, Delhi, 1985.
2. R.W. Fox and A. T. McDonald, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Wiley 1985.
3. E. Krause, Fluid Mechanicals with Problems and solutions, Springer 2005.
4. B.S. Massey, J. W. Smith and A. J. W. Smith, Mechanics of Fluids, Taylor and Francis,
New York 2005.
5. P. Orlandi, Fluid Flow Phenomena, Kluwer, New York, 2002.
6. T. Petrila, Basics of Fluids Mechanics and Introduction to Computational Fluid
Dynamics, Springer, Berlin, 2004.
OPTIONAL 7 - WAVELETS
Unit I: An Overview: Fourier to Wavelets - Integral Wavelets Transform and Time frequency
analysis - Inversion formulas and duals - Classification of Wavelets -Multiresolution analysis -
Spines and Wavelets.
Fourier Analysis: Fourier and Inverse Fourier Transformation - Continuous Time Convolution
- The delta function - Fourier Transformation of square integrable functions.
Unit II: Fourier Analysis (contd): Fourier Series - Basic Convergence Theory - Poissson
Summation Formula.
Wavelet Transforms and Time Frequency Analysis: The Gabor Transforms - Short time
Fourier Transforms and the uncertainity principle - The integral Wavelet Transform -Dyadic
Wavelets - Inversion - Frames - Wavelete Series.
Unit III: Cardinal Spline Analysis : Cardinal Spline spaces - B-splines and their basic
properties - The time scale relation and an interpolating graphical display algorithm - B-Net
representations and computation of cardinal splines - Constructions of cardinal splines -
constructions of spline application formulas - Construction of Spline interpolation formulas.
522
Unit IV: Scaling functions and Wavelets: Multiresolution analysis - Scaling functions with
finite two scale relation - Direction sum Decompositions of L2(R) - Wavelets and their duals.
Unit V: Cardinal Splines Wavelets: Interpolating splines wavelets - Compactly supported
spline - Wavelets - computation of Cardinal spline Wavelets -Euler - Frebenious
Polynomials.
Orthogonal Waveletes: Examples of orthogonal Waveletes - Identification of orthogonal
two scale symbols - Construction of compactly supported orthogonal wavelets.
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Charles K. Chui, An Introduction to Waveletes,
Academic Press, New York, 1992.
Reference Books:
7. Chui. C. K. (ed) Approximation theory and Fourier Analysis , Academic Press Boston,
1991.
8. Daribechies. I. Wavelets, CBMS-NSF Series in Appl, SIAM Philadelphia, 1992.
9. Schurnaker, L.L. Spline Functions: Basic Theory, Wiley, New York 1981.
10. Nurnberger, G. Applications to Spline Functions, Springer Verlag, New York 1989.
523
APPENDIX – AZ116
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 12
M.Phil. ( Physics )
Choice Based Credit System ( CBCS ) AFFILIATED COLLEGES
Course Structure and Syllabus
( From the academic year 2013-2014 onwards )
Contents
Objective of the Course
Eligibility for Admission
Details of Core and Elective Papers with Marks and Credits
Project related Elective Papers and Project Supervisor :
Scheme of Evaluation for Theory papers
(a) Internal Tests, Seminar, Assignment
(b) External Examinations Project work :
6.1 Guidelines for approval to perform as a Project Supervisor
6.2 Guidelines for Project /Dissertation Work
6.3 Format for Project Thesis or Dissertation Scheme of
Evaluation for Project Work Annexures
524
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, Tirunelveli - 12
AFFILIATED COLLEGES
M.Phil. ( Physics ) - Choice Based Credit System ( CBCS ) Course Structure and Syllabus
( From the academic year 2013-2014 onwards)
1. Objective of the Course
The objective of the course is to create an awareness in the field of physics and
cultivate scientific approach and research aptitude among the post-graduate students in
various subjects of physics and emerging extensions of research activities. The task
includes preparation, enhancement etc. of human resources in strengthening the
activities for the development of basic scientific knowledge, skills, application of
scientific approach etc. so as to derive the best from the same to build a society with
an improved quality of life catering to the needs of the whole humankind.
2. Eligibility for Admission
A candidate who has passed M.Sc. Degree Examination with Physics or Applied
Physics is eligible for this course. However, candidates with any other Post-graduate
degree course in science such as Electronics, Nanoscience, Nuclear Physics,
Biophysics etc. may also considered if the course is equivalent in terms of the syllabus
by at least 80 % with regard to the core subjects of the Post-graduate course in
Physics of this University. Admission to the M. Phil, course will be offered to those
candidates who qualify for a common entrance test conducted at the level of the
University. The M.Phil, degree holders thus admitted and pass out may be exempted
from writing the entrance test conducted by any University for the purpose of admission
into the Ph.D. Degree programme. [ Ref. : UGC ( Minimum Standards and Procedure
for Award of M.Phil. / Ph.D. Degree ), Regulation 2009, dt. : 01.06.2009 ]. There is no
age limit for admission into the M.Phil. Degree Course. The National / State
Reservation Policy may be followed during admission.
525
3.0 Details of Core and Elective papers with Marks and Credits
The course of study shall consist of one academic year with two semesters each consisting of 90 working days.
Subject Subject Hours / Week / Credits Evalution (Marks)
Code L T P Internal External
Total
Semester – I Research Methodolgy 4 1 0 5 50* 50 100
Advanced Physics 4 1 0 5 50* 50 100
Semester –II Project Related Elective 4 1 0 5 50* 50 100
Paper
Project (Dissertation 4 1 0 9 100* 100 200
& Viva)
Total 24 500
L - Lecture ; T - Tutorial ; P - Practicals / Project Work ;
* : ( 3 0 + 1 0 + 1 0 ) ; ** : ( 10 + 60 + 30 ).
4. Project related Elective Papers and Project Supervisor :
The allocation of the Project Supervisor for a selected M. Phil, student shall be decided by the Department in a formal manner depending on the number of students per faculty member, the available specialization among the faculty members and the research interest indicated by the student at the time of written test. The allotment / allocation of Project supervisor shall not be left to the individual student or teacher. All the students, after admission shall consult his / her Project supervisor allocated get counseled on the choice of project related Elective papers depending on the project work to be carried out. The project related elective papers offered to the students are as
follows :
Project related Elective Paper
Materials Science
Physical Properties of Materials
Nanomaterials
Each student shall select any one of the
above at the time of the commencement of the second semester. The project supervisor will
assist their project students with the study materials to improve the understanding of the
elective subject. The supervisor shall conduct the three internal tests periodically, seminar and
assignment activities as discussed below and submit the internal assessment mark statement
for the concerned students and the elective subject.
526
Paper No. Subject code
3(a)
3(b)
3(c)
3(d)
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5 3(e)
5. Scheme of Evaluation for Theory papers:
For evaluation of the theory papers and project work, the continuous internal
assessment and external examination marks will be in the ratio of 50 : 50.
(a) Internal Tests, Seminar, Assignment: The marks for the Internal Test, Seminar &
Assignment activities for each theory paper are in the ratio 3:1:1. The marks for the Seminar
and Assignment activities are 10 for each of them. There will be three internal tests conducted
periodically for every theory paper with each test for a maximum of 60 marks and for a limited
portion of the syllabus. Each test will be held for a duration of 2 hours. Every internal test
question paper shall consist of sections A, B and C. Section - A comprises of six number of
questions each carrying 2 marks. Section - B contains four questions, out of which three have
to be answered and each question carries a maximum of 6 marks. In section - C, three
questions have to be answered out of four with each carrying a maximum of 10 marks.
Average of the marks of the best two tests out of the three internal tests will be considered as
the marks for the internal test of the semester. Seminar and Assignment activities by each
student shall be conducted by the concerned course teacher and the relevant marks for the
same be included in the internal assessment.
(b) External Examinations :
At the end of each semester, external examinations will be conducted for all the theory
papers. The question pattern for the theory paper shall consist of sections A, B & C. Section A
contains ten numbers of questions each carrying 2 marks. Section B consists of five questions
with internal choices in each unit in the form of either (a) or (b). Each question carries a
maximum of 6 marks. The same pattern is followed for section C with each question carrying a
maximum of 10 marks. The total marks for each theory paper is 100 and the passing minimum
is 50 % in the external examination and in the total marks. A list of examines for setting the
question papers and valuation of the answer scripts for the external examinations in the core
and elective subjects is given in Annexure — I.
Project work:
6.0 Guidelines for approval to perform as a Project Supervisor : PI. refer Annexure - II
6.2 Guidelines for Project / Dissertation Work :
The duration of the project / dissertation work commences from the beginning of the second semester. The project work shall be based on preliminary research oriented topics in the fields of theoretical or experimental Physics and the type of work may be of analytical or design or a combination of all the above. The work has to be carried out under the guidance of a faculty member of the Department as a project supervisor.
In case, if a student needs to use the facilities from other Universities / Laboratories / Institutions / Industries outside the campus, he / she may seek for a due permission from the Project supervisor and acknowledge the source of facilities utilized by them. If a student needs to stay away from the campus for the purpose of the project work for a period of more than one month, a special approval from the Principal of the College through the Project Supervisor should
527
be obtained and on return a certificate to the above effect should be submitted to the Project Supervisor and to Principal of the College. A copy of this certificate should be attached in a page after the certificate of the Project Supervisor in the student's thesis.
The students should prepare four copies of Project Thesis / Dissertation out of which one may be held by the student and one should be handed over to the Project Supervisor. Two copies of the same shall be submitted to the University, one being for the Departmental / College Library and the other for evaluation by a duly appointed external examiner from other University or Institution after which the same will be retained in the University Library.
6.3 Format for Project Thesis or Dissertation :
The format of the Project Thesis or Dissertation to be submitted by the students should nave me luiiuwing in me luiumis .
a) Format of the Title Page ( Annexure - III ) *
b) Format of Declaration by the Candidate (Annexure - IV ) c) Format of the Certificate ( Annexure - V )
d) Acknowledgement e) Format for Table of Contents ( Annexure - VI ) f) Format for Chapters I - V ( Annexure - VII)
g) Format for References ( Annexure-VIII)
7.0 Scheme of Evaluation for the Project Work : After completion of the project work, by the end of semester IV, each student should prepare a draft thesis and make a pre - M. Phil, presentation in the Department that may be open to all the Faculty members and research scholars for getting feedback and comments, which may be suitably incorporated into the draft thesis under the advice of the supervisor. Each student submit four copies of the Project Thesis or Dissertation as mentioned earlier, on or before the date notified by the Department. The thesis will be evaluated by the concerned Project Supervisor ( PS ) and by the duly appointed two External Examiners ( E - 1 & E - 2 ) . A list of examines for for the project viva-voce examination is given in Annexure -1.
The marks for the Project work are awarded on the basis of three components, viz., (1) Format of the Project Thesis or Dissertation as specified, (2) Evaluation based on the contents of the Thesis or dissertation and (3) Performance of the student in the Project the viva-voce examination. The components (1), (2) and (3) carry marks of maximum as 10, 60 and 30 respectively. These marks for the components (1) and (2) are awarded separately by the concerned PS and the duly appointed External Examiner - 1 and the average of the same separately for both the above components are considered. The evaluation report of the thesis from Examiner E - 1 along with the marks both from the PS and Examiner -1 for components (1) and (2) for the project work of each candidate is obtained. The students may be informed the date on which they will undergo a viva-voce examination which shall be openly defended in the presence of the concerned Project Supervisor, duly appointed Examiner E-2 and the
528
Head of the Department concerned. After the viva-voce examination, the marks for component (3) from the concerned PS and Examiner - 2 for all the students are obtained. The structure of the marks awarded for the project work is given in the table below :
Evaluation of Project Work ( Max.: 100 marks ) ♦,
Thesis Format Thesis Contents Viva-voce Total
( Max.: 10 ) (Max.: 60 ) (Max.: 30 ) (Max.: 100
PS E-1 Mean PS E-1 Mean PS E-2* Mean Mean
10 10 10 60 60 60 30 30 30 100
The passing minimum for the project work is 50 % in each of the above three components. Candidates who do not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass shall be required to appear in one of the following years along with the other batch of the students, with a revised version of the Thesis or Dissertation, if required. The guidelines regarding the minimum attendance, grading, distinction, ranking etc. are as stipulated by the University.
529
Syllabus for M.Phil Physics
Paper – 1 : RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Unit - I : Research Methodology :
Methods of Research and Methodology of Research – Types of Research – Selection of Research Topic and Problem – Literature survey – Reference collection – Internet and its applications – Inflibnet - Accessing the current status – Mode of Approach – Actual Investigation – Results and Conclusion – Presenting a paper in a Scientific Seminar – - Art of writing a Research Paper – Layout of M.Phil. Dissertation
Unit - II : Statistical Methods and Simulations :
Statistical description or data : Mean, Variance, Skewness, Median, Mode; Distributions : Binomial, Poisson, Gaussian – Student‘s t-test and chi-square test - Simulation studies ( theory only): Generation of uniform random numbers by Park - Miller method – Gaussian random number generation – Box-Muller method – Basic ideas of Monte-Carlo method – Evaluation of definite integrals and value of π.
Unit – III : Numerical Methods :
Curve fitting : straight line and exponential , Numerical integration : Composite Trapezoidal rule, Interpolation: Newton‘s forward and backward interpolation – Numerical integration – Ordinary differential equation : Fourth order Runge-Kutta method – Eigen value problem : Jacobi method ( theory only )
Unit – IV : C++ Programming :
Constants – Variables – Operations – Control structures – IF statement, Switch statement – FOR statemaent – Do – WHILE statements – Main function – Void function – CALL by reference – RETURN by reference – Arrays.
Unit – V : Analytical Techniques :
Analytical techniques – Principles of Single Crystal and Powder X - Ray Diffraction, FTIR, Raman and UV – Visible Spectroscopic techniques – SEM and TEM techniques. Books for Study and References : J. Anderson, B.H. Durstan and M.Poole, Thesis and Assignment Writing ( Wiley Eastern, New Delhi,1977 ) G.B.Arfken and H.J.Weber, Mathematical Methods for Physicists (Academic Press,2005) E. Balagurusamy Object – oriented – Programming with C++ ( Tata McGraw Hill – Second Edition ). J A Belk : Electron Microscopy and Microanalysis of Crystalline Materials ( Applied Science Publishers), 1979. M.P.Boas, Mathematical Methods with Physical Sciences ( Wiley, 2005 ). Rajammal P. Devadas, A Handbook of Methodology of Research ( S.R.K. Vidyalaya Press, Chennai, 1976 ) K.P.N. Murthy, Monte - Carlo Basics ( ISRP, Kalpakkam, 2000 ) K.P.N. Murthy : Monte-Carlo Methods ( University Press, 2004 )
530
Louis A. Pipes and Lawrence R. Harvill : Mathematical Physics for Engineers and Physicists ( McGraw Hill International, Singapore, 1971 ) J.B. Scarborough, Numerical Mathematical Analysis ( Oxford and IBH,1971 ) P.A. Stark, Introduction to Numerical Methods ( Macmillan, 1970 ) M.Willaim and D.Steve, Instrumental Methods of Analysis ( CBS Publishers, New Delhi,1986 ).
Paper - 2 : ADVANCED PHYSICS
Unit - I : High Temperature Superconductors :
High temperature superconductors : Y -123 superconductors and substitution at Y sites – Bi-based Superconductors - Different Methods of synthesis - Solid State Reaction Method - Characterisation - Crystal structure - Effect of oxygen vacancy ordering - Physical properties- Applications.
Unit - II : Nanomaterials :
Nanomaterials : Salient features – Different methods of fabrication – Physical and chemical methods - Characterisation – Effect of size on various physical properties – Applications – Quantum wells, wires, dots – Fullerenes – Nanotubes – Carbon Nanotubes
Unit - III : Thin Films :
Thin films - Fundamentals and Salient features – Different methods of preparation – Solution growth - Spray Pyrolysis – Electrodeposition - Thermal evaporation – Flash evaporation – Electron beam evaporation – Thickness measurement method – Applications of thin films.
Unit - IV : Environmental Physics :
UV radiation impact on human health – Ozone formation – Depletion of Ozone layer – Conservational methods – Montreal Protocol – Effect of Nuclear Radiation - Radioactive Pollution – IR radiation and its effect – Green house effect – Global warming – Impact of microwave radiation.
Unit - V : Biophysics :
Molecular alphabets of life (Amino acids, nucleic acid bases, saccharides and lipids) – Roles of biomolecules in biological functions – Geometry of biomolecules – Conformation and Configuration – Lennord-Jones potential – Basis of molecular interactions – Various bonds involved in structural stabilization of biomolecules
Books for Study and References : Rodney Cotterill : Biophysics: An Introduction ( John Wiley & Sons ), 2003. G. Cao : Nanostructures & Nanomaterials : Synthesis, Properties & Applications, ( Imperial College Press ), 2004. B.D. Cullity : Elements of X-ray diffraction, (Addison – Wesley, London ), second edition,1977. A.Goswami : Thin film fundamentals ( New Age international (P) Ltd., New Delhi), 2006.
531
Charles P. Poole Jr and Frand J. Owens : Introduction to Nanotechnology, ( John Wiley &Sons ), 2003. T.V. Ramakrishnan and C. N. R. Rao : Superconductivity Today ( Wiley – Eastern Ltd.), 1992. S. V. Subramanyam and E. S. R. Gopal ( Eds. ) : High temperature superconductors ( Wiley – Eastern Ltd.), 1989. Vasantha Pattabhi, Gautham N : Biophysics ( Narosa Publishing House, 2ndEdition), 2011
Paper - 3(a) : MATERIALS SCIENCE
UNIT – I : Phase Diagrams :
Solid solutions and intermediate phases – Equilibrium phase diagrams, Cu-Ni, Pb-Sn, Al-Cu system phase diagrams – Free energy and equilibrium phase diagrams – Nucleation and growth – Martenstic transformation – Strengthening mehanisms – Iron-Carbon system – Alloy steels – Aluminium-Copper system – Copper- Zinc system – Corrosion
UNIT - II: Mechanical Properties :
Stress- Strain curve – Elastic deformation: Characteristics, Atomic mechanism, Sheer stress, Bulk modulus, Strain energy, Strain deformation – Viscous deformation: Spring-Dashpot models – Anelastic and Viscoelastic deformation: Viscoelastic models – Plastic deformation: Dislocations and Stress-strain curves, Plasticity theory – Fracture: Ideal fracture, Brittle fracture, Fracture mechanics, Cohesive models, Ductile fracture – Mechanical testing
UNIT - III: Ceramics :
Structure of ceramics – Production of ceramics: Raw materials, Forming and Post-forming processes – Production of glass: Melting of glass, Glass forming and annealing – Mechanical properties of ceramics – Wear and erosion resistance – Thermal shock – Silica-Alumina system – Commercial systems: Zirconia, Sialones, Cement and Concrete
UNIT - IV: Polymers and Plastics :
Molecular structure: Monomers & Polymers, Synthesis, Molecular weight measurement, Branching & Tacticity, Copolymets and blend – Mechnaics of polymer chain: Freely jointed chains, Entanglements, Rubber elasticity – Thermoplastic melts: Viscosity, Shear thinning, Processing, Extrusion – Amorphous polymers: Solidification, glass transition, Various models – Crystalline polymers – Crosslinked polymers: Elastomers, Thermosets – Liquid crystal polymers – Mechanical properties: Stress- Strain behaviour – Chemical properties
UNIT - V: Crystals :
Crystal growth from solution – Melt growth techniques: Bridgman method, Czochralski crystal pulling technique, Crystal growth from Vapour phase – Crystal Imperfections – Point defects: Vacancies, interstitals, Impurities, electronic defects –
532
Lline defects: Edge dislocation, Screw dislocation – Surface defects: Grain boundaries, Tilt boundaries, Twin boundaries, Stacking faults, Ferromagnetic domain walls – Volume defects: Cracks, Voids
Books for Study and References : J.C.Anderson, K.D.Leaver, P. Leevers and R.D.Rowlings, Materials Science for Engineers, Nelson Thomas Ltd, First Indian reprint, 2010 M.Arumugam, Materials Science, Anuradha Agencies, Publishers, Sechond Edition, Fifth Reprint, 2005 R,Balasubramaniam, Materials Science and Engineering, Wiley India (P) Ltd, 2010 V.Raghavan, Materials Science for Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2006
Paper - 3(b) : PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
Unit-I : Symmetry and Tensor :
Structure-property relations – transformation – symmetry operation and elements – stereographic projections of point groups – tensor description of physical properties – polar and axial tensor properties
Unit-II : Pyroelectricity and dielectric constant :
Pyroelectric and electrocaloric tensors – pyroelectric measurements – pyroelectric materials – dielectric tensor – experimental methods – polycrystalline dielectrics
Unit-III : Stress, Strain, piezoelectric and piezomagnetic :
Stress transformation – strain tensor – Piezoelectricity – tensor and matrix formulation – experimental techniques – piezoelectric ceramics – magnetic point groups – saturation magnetization and pyromagnetism – magnetic susceptibility – magnetoelectricity – piezomagnetism
Unit-IV : Nonlinear phenomena and Ferroic classes :
Nonlinear dielectrics – properties – electrostriction – magnetostriction – actuators – Ferroic crystals – free energy formulation – ferroelasticity – ferromagnetism – magnetic anisotropy – ferroelectricity – secondary ferroics – order parameters
Unit-V : Nonlinear Optical material
Electromagnetic waves – optical indicatrix and refractive index – ray normals – and ray directions – structure-property relationships – birefringence and crystal structure – linear electro-optic effect and coefficients – pockels effect in KDP and ADP crystals – Second Harmonic Generation – optical activity – nonlinear origin – tensor description – Faraday effect
Books for study and references : Robert .E. Newnham, Properties of Materials, Oxford University Press, (2005) J.F. Nye , Physical Properties of Crystals: Their Representation by Tensors and Matrices, Oxford University Press, Reprint (2000).
533
Paper - 3(c) : NANOMATERIALS Unit-I : Synthesis :
Sol-Gel and Precipitation technologies - Ball milling - RF plasma - Combustion Flame -Chemical Vapor Condensation process – Electrodeposition - Laser synthesis - Gas phase condensation - Sonochemical.
Unit-II : Nanostructures :
Preparation of quantum nanostructures : Preparation - Size and Dimensionality Effects –Excitations - Single-Electron Tunneling - Applications. Nanomachines and Nano devices : Micoelectrochemical systems – Nano electrochemical systems - Molecular and Super molecular switches.
Unit-III : Properties :
Properties of Individual Nanoparticles : Metal Nanoclusters – Semiconducting Nanoparticles - Rare Gas and Molecular clusters. Bulk Nanostructured Materials : Solid disordered Nanostructure - Nanostructured crystals.
Unit - IV : Characterisation Techniques :
Structural : Powder XRD & particle size determination, Neutron diffraction; Spectroscopic : X-ray Photoelectron ( XPS ), Photoluminescence, Impedance and Energy Dispersive X-ray ( EDAX ) spectroscopy.
Unit - V : Characterisation Techniques :
Thermal : Differential Thermal Analysis ( DTA ), Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC); Microscopic : Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM); Electrical and Magnetic : Four - probe method, Vibrating sample Magnetometer.
Books for Study and Reference: Evgenij Barsoukov and J. Ross Macdonald : Impedance Spectroscopy : Theory, Experiment and Applications, ( John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey, second edition), 2005. G. Cao : Nanostructures & Nanomaterials : Synthesis, Properties & Applications, ( Imperial College Press ), 2004. Koch CC, Nanostructured Materials processing, properties and potential applications, Williams Andrew Publishing, Noyes, 2002 Pavia, Lampman, Kriz and Vyvyan, Spectroscopy, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd., 2011. Willard, Merritt, Dean and Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis. CBS Publishers &
Distributors, Delhi, 1986. J.Ross Mcdonald, Impedance Spectroscopy Emphasizing solid materials and systems, John Wiley & sons, New York, 1996. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. Charles P. Poole Jr & Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006. Jackie Y.Ying, Nanostructured Materials, Academic Press, USA, 2001.
534
Paper – 3(d) : SPACE PHYSICS
UNIT – I : Remote Sensing of Earth‘s Climate System : Remote sensing of earth‘s climate system- requirements for remote sensing of
climate system- methodology- constrains- basic concept of remote sensing- surface factors- atmospheric factors- instrumental factors- using reflected sunlight- global vegetation remote sensing- using thermal emission- global sea surface temperature measurement- radar altimetry- surface effects- atmospheric effects- ocean and ice monitoring by radar altimetry.
UNIT - II : Space and Plasma Physics :
Basic plasma physics- principle- application- space plasma- the frozen in-flux- MHD plasma waves- solar wind and IMF- collision less shocks- bow shocks- shock jumps- shock structure- shock acceleration- magnetic reconnection- terrestrial magnetosphere- closed, open and flux transfer events- storms , sub storms- solar wind interaction with ionosphere- planets- insulator bodies(moon)- comets.
UNIT – III : Space Weather :
Space weather- structure of sun- solar cycle- solar activity- coronal heating. The solar wind- wind- Aurora- Auroral sub storms- co-rotating interaction region(CIR)- solar flares- the ionosphere- solar energetic particle events(SEP)- coronal mass ejections(CME) and geomagnetic storms- Halo CME‘s- interplanetary CME‘s- magnetic clouds.
UNIT - IV : Introduction to Magneto Hydrodynamics :
Maxwell‘s equations in MHD- magnetic Reynold‘s number- Alfven speed- plasma beta parameter- force free magnetic field- magnetic buoyancy- magneto ststic equilibrium- magnetic reconnection- current sheet- acoustic waves- Alfven waves compressional Alfven waves- magneto acoustic waves- inertial waves.
UNIT – V : X-ray Astronomy :
Origin of X-rays astronomy- X-ray binaries- black hole- neutron stars- pulsars- white dwarfs- clusters of galaxies.
Books for Study and References :
Thomas E Cravens, Physics of Solar System Plasma, ( Cambridge University Press ), 1997. Thomas I Gombosi, Physics for Space Environment, ( Cambridge University Press ), 2004. Louise K Hara and Keith O Mason, Space Science, ( University of London, World Scientific Publishing Co.), 2004. Margaret G Kivelson and Christopher T Russell, Introduction to Space Physics, ( Cambridge University Press ), 1995.
535
Paper - 3(e) : MOLECULAR BIOPHYSICS Unit - I : Proteins : Amino acid structure and properties, basic concepts of theoretical conformational analysis and model building, contact criteria, conformational parameters of peptides and proteins, Ramachandran plot, sequential and structural aspects of proteins, type of interactions that stabilizes the structure of proteins, fibrous proteins and globular proteins, design of inhibitors and substrate analogues to proteins, Sequence database (Swiss-Prot, TrEMBL), Structural database (PDB)
Unit - II : Carbohydrates : Structural and conformational aspects of some basic sugars, chair and boat conformation, glycosidic torsional angle, (φ,ψ) plot for a typical disaccharide, Glycosylation and its types, conformational aspects of oligosaccharides, importance of carbohydrates in biological recognition, glycoproteins and proteoglycans, Carbohydrate structural databases (CCSD, 3DSDSCAR), sequence database (CarbBank)
Unit - III : Nucleic acids : Conformational parameters of nucleic acids and their constituents, Structural elucidation of DNA, interactions that stabilizes nucleic acid structure, modified nucleotides, polymorphism of DNA, environmental effects on structure, conformational flexibility and structural transformations, tRNA‘s and ribosomal RNA. Nucleic Acid sequence databases (GenBank, DDBJ and EMBL), sequence database (NDB)
Unit - IV : Spectroscopic Methods : Electronic and Vibrational spectra of biomolecules, NMR, Principle, Theory, and applications in biophysics and biochemistry, Chemical shift, spin-orbit coupling, Relaxation mechanism and molecular motion, FTNMR, 1D and 2D NMR, Circular Dichorism for estimating the secondary structural features of biomolecules
Unit - V : Biological X- Ray diffraction and electron microscopy : X-Ray diffraction , Fourier transform and diffraction, methods of data collection, structural analysis and refinement, macromolecular crystallography, non crystallographic symmetry and molecular replacement, fibre diffraction of biopolymers and molecular structure, Electron microscopy, transmission and diffraction Books for Study and References : T. K. Atwood, Introduction to Bioinformatics- 4
th edition, 2009, Dorling Kindersley Pvt. Ltd
Reginald Garette, Biochemistry- 3rd
Edition, 2005, Thomson Brooks / Cole. John Cavanagh, Protein NMR spectroscopy: Principle and Practice, 2 Edition, 2007,
Charles R. Contor, Biophysical Chemistry part 1, 2 and 3-,1 st Edition, 1980, W.H. Freeman &
N. Gautham, Bioinformatics: Databases and Algorithm, Reprint, 2006, Alpha science. Lehninger, Principles of Biochemistry-, 5
th Edition, 2008, W.H. Freeman & Company.
P. Narayanan, Essentials of Biophysics- 2 nd
Edition, 2007, New Age International. L. Stryer, Biochemistry- 2
nd Edition, 1981, W.H. Freeman & Company.
R.M. Twyman, Principles of Proteomics, 1st edition, 2004, BIOS Scientific Publishers.
Vasantha Pattabhi & N. Gautham , Biophysics, 1 st Edition, 2002,Narosa Publications.
536
APPENDIX - AZ117
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Phil CHEMISTRY SYLLABUS for Affiliated Colleges
(EFFECTIVE FROM July 2013)
nd
Academic Press
Company
STRUCTURE OF THE COURSE
Max. hours per Semester Papers paper in the
whole semester
Semester I
Paper I Research 80 Methodology
Paper II Course Work 80
Paper III Review of Published Research (The syllabus for this paper is to be given by the project guide by taking 10 research publications)
Semester II
Project & Viva voce [Project work- 160 +
Viva voce- 40]
Eligibility Norms:
55% of marks in M.Sc. degree in Chemistry or any other equivalent Master
Degree. For SC/ST candidates there will be 5% relaxation in marks.
Admission Procedure:
Admission will be based on the qualifying M.Sc. degree examination following the
govt. norms of reservation.
537
Passing minimum
50
50
50
100
Exam hours
3
3
3
Marks
100
100
100
200
Evaluation:
The evaluation for Papers I & II consists of two components viz. internal and
external.
Internal : External = 25 : 75
25 marks for the internal component has been divided as follows:
3 tests, out of which average of the best two tests : 15 marks
Seminar : 10 marks
There is no internal passing minimum. There is a passing minimum of
50% for external and overall components.
For paper III and project, there is no internal component. The project report
evaluation will be conducted by one external examiner and the viva voce examination
will be conducted jointly by the project guide and the external examiner.
The break up for the project work is :
Project report : 160 marks
Viva voce : 40 marks
200 marks
Question Paper Pattern
(a) Papers I & II : (Max : 75 marks)
Question paper consists of Section A (5 x 3) Section B (5 x 7) and Section C ( 5
x 10) with internal choice in each question Section A either/or Section B either/or
and Section C either/or
(b) Paper III: (Max. Marks 100)
The question paper is to be set by the project guide. 5 questions out of 8 are to
be answered. Each question carries 20 marks.
538
Paper I – Research Methodology
Unit I
Introduction to research, selection of a research topic, reviewing the literature,
preparing the proposal and design of study. Experimentation and interpretation of
results. Formation, testing and rejection of hypothesis. Application of microcal origin and
chemdraw. Preparation and presentation of report; dissertation and thesis writing.
Primary and secondary literature: Journals, Patents, Reviews, Chemical
Abstracts, Treatises and Monographs. Printed materials and online literature search;
websites, search engine for locating information and chemical data bases. E-mail
operation and online submission of manuscripts for publication.
Unit II
Limitations of analytical methods; accuracy, precision and minimization of errors.
Systematic and random errors and reliability of results. Replicate determination and t-
test. Correlation, linear regression and analysis of variance.
Unit III C programming
Data types – Variables & scope – Operators – Program selection : if-else, logical
operators, ternary operator switch statement – Repetition : While, do-while and for loops
– Function, Arrays.
Applications in Chemistry – computation of van der Walls equation, pH titration,
kinetics, radioactive decay – Evaluation of lattice energy and ionic radii from
experimental data, rate constant computations.
Unit IV
Name Reactions : Bamford-Stevens Reaction – Baylis-Hillman Reaction – Enamines and selective alkylation – Biginelli Reaction –Julia Olefination – Mukaiyama Aldol Addition – Nazarov Cyclization –Ugi Reaction – Fukuyama Coupling
Reagents in Organic Synthesis :
Gilman‘s reagents – DCC – Girard reagents – NBS – crown ethers – BF3 complexes – SeO2 – 1,3-dithiane, tri-n-butyltin hydride – phase transfer catalysts – Wilkinson‘s catalyst.
Unit V
Principles and applications of cyclic voltammetry, oscillographic polarography, acpolarography, chronopotentiometry, controlled potential coulometry.
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) – instrumentation – applications – surface area analysis, particle size determination – scanning probe microscopes – Scanning
539
Tunneling Microscope (STM) and Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) – Principles and applications.
Diffraction techniques – XRD, Neutron and electron diffraction – principles and applications.
Emission spectrography and flame spectroscopy – Atomic absorption, atomic emission and atomic fluorescence spectroscopy.
References :
1. Rajammal P. Devadas, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, S.R.K. Vidyalaya Press, Chennai 1976.
2. J. Anderson, B.H. Durstan and M. Poole, Thesis and assignment writing, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi, 1977.
3. R.O. Butlet, Preparing thesis and other manuscript. 4. H.H. Willard, L.L. Merritt, J.A. Dean and F.A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of
Chemical analysis, 6th Edn. CBS Publishers, New Delhi, 1986. 5. S. Chandra and M.K. Sharma, Research Methodology, Narosa, 2013. 6. Programming C- Balagurusamy 7. Jerry March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edn. John Wiley & Sons,
1992. 8. Reaction Mechanism and Reagents in Organic Chemistry – Gurdeep R.
Chatwal. 9. L. Antropov, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Mir Publication, Moscow, 1972. 10. A.J. Bard and L.R. Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods : Fundamentals and
Applications, 2nd Edn., Jonh wiley and Sons, New York, 2004. 11. D.A. Skoog and J.J. Leary, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 4th Edn.,
Saunders College Publishing, 1992. 12. D.A. Skoog, F.S. Holler, S.R. Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th
Edn., Thomson Brooks/cole, 2007. 13. A.K. Cheetham, P. Day, Solid State Chemistry Techniques, Oxford University
Press, Oxford, 1987. 14. G.E. Bacon, Neutron Diffraction, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1975. 15. R.S. Drago, Physical Methods in Chemistry, Saunders, 1999. 16. Organic Name Reactions by Jack Ji Li (Springer).
Paper II – Course Work
Unit I : Retrosynthetic Analysis
Introduction to disconnections – one group disconnections – two group disconnections – pericyclic reactions – small rings: three membered, four membered, and five membered.
Unit II : Applications of Advanced Organic Spectroscopy
NMR : Basic principles of two-dimensional NMR spectroscopy – HOMOCOSY, HETCOSY and NOESY spectra and their applications – use of INEPT and DEPT methods and their applications.
540
Mass : Molecular ions, isotope peaks, fragmentation pattern – McLafferty rearrangement- measurement techniques (EI, CI FI, FD, FAB, SIMS, MALDI) – M+1 and M+2 ions – calculation of molecular formula from PM+1 and PM+2
Road-map problems covering UV, IR, 1H-NMR, 13C-NMR and mass spectral data.
Unit III :
Metals in Medicine : Beneficial, essential, and toxic elements-Metal deficiency and disease- toxicity of mercury, cadmium, lead, beryllium, selenium and arsenic-biological defense mechanisms- chelation therapy – metals used for diagnosis and chemotherapy – platinum complexes as anticancer drugs, Pt-DNA binding, complexes of gold, copper, zinc, mercury, arsenic and antimony as drugs- Bioorganometallic Chemistry.
Unit IV : Nano Science and Technology
Introduction : definition of nanoscience, nanochemistry – classification of the nanomaterials – zero dimensional nanostructures – one dimensional nanostructures – nanowires and nanorods – two dimensional nanostructures – films, nanotubes and biopolymers – three dimensional nanostructures – fullerenes and dendrimers – quantum dots and their properties. Basic instrumentation and imaging techniques.
Synthesis of Nanomaterials : Introduction – precipitative methods – gas phase synthesis of semiconductor nanoparticles – water based gold nanoparticle synthesis – organic solution based synthesis-sonochemical methods and microwave methods. CNTs and CNFs.
Properties of nanomaterials : Electronic Structure of nanoparticles. Electronic properties and thermal properties – quntum-size-effect (QSE) Size-induced metal-insulator- transition (SIMIT).
Unit V : Advanced Photochemistry
Artificial photosynthesis and solar energy conversion – Photoelectrochemical cells- dynamics of excited state processes (excited state energy, redox properties, emission lifetime and its temperature dependence) in micelles, reverse micelles and biomembranes – Fluorescence – Quenching and anisotropy concepts; Fluorescence sensing – mechanism and applications ; Radioactive decay engineering – metal- enhanced fluorescence and surface plasmon-coupled emission.
References :
1. Designing Organic Synthesis : A Programmed Introduction to the Synthon approach – Stuart Warren.
2. Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds – Silverstein, Bassler and Morril.
3. Organic Spectroscopy – William Kemp 4. Basic and Two-dimensional NMR spectroscopy –V. Fibrolein, VCH, 1982. 5. Principles of Instrumental analysis – S. Skoog, Holler and Nieman, Saunders,
1998. 6. Practical Spectroscopy – P.R. Young – Brooks / Cole, 2000.
541
7. S.J. Lippard, J.M. Berg. Principles of Bioinorganic Chemistry, Panima Publ.
Corpn. (2005) 8. E.-I. Ochiai. Bioinorganic Chemistry – An Introduction, Allyn and Bacon Inc.
(1977). 9. M.N. Hughes. The Inorganic Chemistry of Biological Processes, Wiley (1981). 10. R.P. Hanzik. Inorganic Aspects of Biological and Organic Chemistry, Academic
Press (1976). 11. G.Cao, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials – Synthesis, Properties and
Applications, Imperial College Press, London, 2004, chapters 3,4 and 5. 12. C.N. Rao, A. Muller and A.K. Cheetham, The Chemistry Nanomaterials, Volume
1, Wiley – VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KgaA, Weinheim, 2004, Chapter 4. 13. J.R. Lakowicz, Principles of Fluorescence Spectroscopy, Plenum Press, New
York, 2006. 14. K. Kalyanasundaram, Photochemistry in Microheterogeneous Systems,
Academic Press, Orlando, 1987.
542
APPENDIX – AZ118
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.Phil Computer Science
One Year-Two Semesters (Colleges)
Syllabus
Eligibility
A candidate who has passed M.Sc. Computer Science of this University or an
equivalent degree of other Universities accepted by the Syndicate as equivalent or
M.C.A. of this University or any other University accepted by the Syndicate as
equivalent with 55% or above marks.
Duration
Full Time: 2 Semesters
I Semester
Components Exam Hours Credits
1.Research Methodology 3 8
2.Elective 1 3 8
Total ( 2 Courses) 16
II Semester
Components Exam Hours Credits
1.Elective II 3 8
2.Dissertation Viva/Voce -- 16
Total ( 6 Courses) 24
Total No of Credits :40
Each theory course shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=75:25)
Dissertation & Vivavoce shall carry an internal assessment component
(External:Internal=150:50) 543
Elective -1
(Choose any one )
1. Digital Image Processing
2.Advanced Computer Networks and Security
3.Data Mining and Data Warehousing
4.Web Services
Elective -2
(Choose any one )
1.Grid and Cloud Computing
2.Pervasive Mobile Computing
3.Soft Computing
4.Semantic Web and Social Networks
Research Methodology
Unit 1
Research Methodology An Introduction – Meaning of Research, Objectives of
Research, Motivation in Research, Types of Research, Research Approaches,
significance of Research, Research Methods versus Methodology, Research and
Scientific method, Importance of Knowing hour research is done, Research process,
Criteria of good research, Problems encountered by researchers. Defining the research
problems – What is a research problem? Selecting the problem; Necessity of defining
the problem, Technique involved in defining a problem.
Unit 2
Important Concepts relating to research design. Methods of Data Collection -
Collection of primary data, Collection of Data through Questionnaires, Collection of Data
through Schedules. Processing and analysis of Data – Problems in processing,
Statistics in research. Interpretation and report writing – meaning of interpretation, Why
interpretation? Technique of interpretation. Significance of report writing, Different steps
in writing report, Layout of the research reports, Oral presentation, Mechanics of writing
research report, precautions for writing research reports, Computers and Research.
544
Unit 3
Introduction, software Project Management – Project planning, Project size
Estimation Metrics, Project estimation techniques, Empirical Estimation Techniques.
COCOMO – A Heuristic estimation Technique, Halstead‘s software Science – An
analytical technique, Staffing level Estimation, Scheduling, Risk Management.
Requirement analysis and Specification – Requirement analysis, software requirement
Specification, Formal system Development Techniques. Software Design, Object
Oriented Software Design, User Interface design.
Unit 4
Data Structures – Introduction, Linear lists, Formula Based Representation,
Linked Representation, Arrays, Applications of stacks, Applications of Queues, Hash
table representation, binary tree, Properties of Binary trees, Applications of Priority
Queues. Search trees – Binary Search trees, AVL Trees, Red Black Trees, B – Trees,
Applications. Graphs – Representation of Graphs and Digraphs, Graph search
methods, Applications.
Unit 5
Introduction – Need for high speed Computing, History of Parallel Computers.
Solving Problems in Parallel. Structure of Parallel Computers – Generalized Structure of
a Parallel Computers, Classification of Parallel Computers, Vector Computers, Typical
Vector supercomputers, Vector Computers on a Chip, Array Processors, Systolic Array
Processors, shared Memory Parallel Computers, Inter connection Networks, Distributed
Shared memory Parallel Computers, Message passing Parallel Computers, cluster of
Workstations. Performance evaluation of parallel Computers – Basics of Performance
evaluation, Sources of Parallel overhead, Speed up Performance Laws, Scalability
Metric, Performance Measurement tools.
545
Reference:
1.Research Methodology Methods Techniques – C.R.Kothari Wishawa Prakashan
Publishers Second Edition.
2.Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Second Edition Rajib Mall, Prentice Hall of
India Private LTD, 2006.
3).Data structures, Algorithms and Applications in C + + Sartaj sahni, Mc Graw Hill.
4) Parallel Computers, Architecture and Programming - V.Rajaranan & C.Siva Ram
Murthy Prentice Hall of India.
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Unit I - INTRODUCTION
Image Processing – Fundamental steps in DIP – Components of Image processing
system – Digital image fundamentals: Light and Electromagnetic spectrum – Image
sensing and acquisition - Image sampling and quantization (Basic concepts-
representing digital images-spatial and gray level resolution –zooming and shrinking
digital images) - Basic relationship between pixels (Neighbors of a pixel-
Adjacency,Connectivity,Regions and boundaries-Distance Measures).
Unit II - IMAGE ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES
Spatial Domain methods: Basic grey level transformation – Histogram processing
(Histogram Equalization-Histogram matching-Local enhancement) – Enhancement
using arithmetic and logic operations – Basics of spatial filtering: Smoothing and
sharpening spatial filters
Frequency domain methods: Two dimensional DFT and its inverse - Smoothing and
Sharpening filters(Ideal, Butterworth,Gaussian).
546
Unit III - IMAGE RESTORATION
Model of Image Degradation/restoration process – Noise models – Spatial
filtering(Mean filters- Order statistics filters – Adaptive filters) – Periodic noise reduction
by frequency domain filters(Band reject filters - bandpass filters – Notch filters) - Inverse
filtering -Least mean square filtering – Constrained least mean square filtering.
Unit IV - IMAGE COMPRESSION
Fundamentals(Coding redundancy- interpixel redundancy-psychovisual redundancy-
fidelity criteria)– Image compression models (Source encoder and decoder) – Error free
compression (Variable length coding, LZW coding, bit plane coding) – Lossy
compression (Transform coding, wavelet coding) – Image compression
standards(Continuous tone still image,video compression standards).
Unit V - IMAGE SEGMENTATION
Image segmentation: Detection of discontinuities - Edge linking and boundary
detection(local and global processing) – Thresholding(Basic global and adaptive) -
Region Based segmentation(basic formulations-region growing-region splitting and
merging) –
Object recognition: Structural methods (Matching shape numbers, string matching,
Syntactic recognition of strings, Syntactic recognition of trees)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, 3rd Edition, Digital Image Processing,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
2. Image Processing Analysis and Machine Vision, Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac,
Vikas Publications, 2005.
3. B.Chanda and D.Dutta Majumder, Digital Image Processing and Applications,
Prentice Hall of India, 2005
547
WEB SERVICES
UNIT I
Evolution and Emergence of Web Services – Evolution of distributed computing,
Core distributed computing technologies – client/server, CORBA, JAVA RMI, Micro Soft
DCOM, MOM, Channenges in Distributed Computing, role of J2EE and XMS in
distributed computing, emergence of Web Services and Service Oriented Architecture
(SOA).
UNIT II
Introduction to Web Services – The definition of web services, basic operational
model of web services, tools and technologies enabling web services, benefits and
challenges of using web services – Web Service Architecture – Web services
Architecture and its characteristics, core building blocks of web services, standards and
technologies available for implementing web services, web services communication,
basic steps of implementing web services, developing web services enabled
applications.
UNIT III
Core Fundamentals of SOAP – SOAP Message Structure, SOAP encoding, SOAP
message exchange models, SOAP communication and messaging, SOAP security –
Developing Web Services using SOAP – Building SOAP Web Services, developing
SOAP Web Services using Java, limitations of SOAP.
UNIT IV
Describing Web Services – WSDL – WSDL in the world of Web Services, Web
Services life cycle, anatomy of WSDL definition document, WSDL bindings, WSDL
tools, limitations of WSDL – Discovering Web Services – Service discovery, role of
service discovery in a SOA, service discovery mechanisms, UDDI – UDDI Registries,
uses of UDDI Registry, Programming with UDDI, UDDI data structures, support for
categorization in UDDI Registries, Publishing API, Publishing information to a UDDI
Registry, searcing information in a UDDI Registry, deleting information in a UDDI
Registry, limitations of UDDi.
548
UNIT V
Web Service Interoperability – Means of ensuring Interoperability, Overview of .NET
and J2EE. Web Services Security – XML security frame work, XML encryption, XML
digital signature, XKMS structure, guidelines for signing XML documents.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Developing Java Web Services, R. Nagappan, R. Skoczylas, R.P. Sriganesh, Wiley
India
2. Developing Enterprise Web Services, S. Chatterjee, J.Webber, Pearson Education
2008
3. XML, Web Services, and the Data Revolution, F.P. Coyle, Pearson Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Building Web Services with Java, 2nd Edition, S. Graham and others, Pearson Edn
2008.
2. Java Web Services, D.A. Chappel & T. Jewell, O‘Reilly, SPD.
3. McGovern, Et al., ―Java Web Services Architecture‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
2005.
4. J2EE Web Services, Richard Monson – Haefel, Pearson Education.
5. Web Services, G. Alonso, F.Casati and others, Springer, 2005.
ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS AND SECURITY
UNIT - I
Interconnections: Digital Data Communication Techniques – Data Link control protocol
– Multiplexing – Spread spectrum – Circuit switching and packet switching – routing in
switched networks. Data Link Layer issues – Transparent and Source routing bridges –
Network interface – generic connectionless service – network layer address –
connectionless data packet formats – routing algorithm concepts – Fast packet
forwarding.
549
UNIT – II
Framerelay – ATM – High- speed LANs - Congestion control in data networks and
Internets – Link-level flow and error control – TCP traffic control – Integrated and
differential services – protocols for Qos support.
UNIT – III
VPN - SDH and SONET networks – Operational aspects – evolution of the optical
network – optical transport network – MPLS traffic engineering. Network Management:
SNMP Basic Foundation – SNMPv2 – SNMPv3 –RMON.
UNIT - IV
Mobile Communication: Wireless Transmission – Medium Access Control –
Telecommunication Systems – Broadcast Systems - Wireless LAN – Mobile IP. Adhoc
Wireless Networks: Adhoc Wireless Networks – MAC Protocol – Routing Protocols –
Multicast Routing - QOS – Wireless Sensor Networks – Energy Management.
UNIT – V
Network Security and System Security: Introduction to Network Security – Symmetric
Encryption and Message Confidentiality – Public-key Cryptography and Message
Authentication – Authentication Application – Electronic Mail Security – IP Security –
Web Security – Network Management Security - Intruders – Malicious Software –
Firewalls.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communication, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
2. C.Siva Ram Murthy, B.S. Manoj, ―Adhoc Wireless Networks‖, Pearson, 2005.
3. Radia Perlman, ―Interconnections‖, Pearsons, 2000.
4. William Stallings, ―High Speed Networks and Internets‖, Pearson, 2010.
5. Jon C.Snader,‖ VPNs Illustrated Tunnels, VPNs and Ipsec‖, Pearson, 2006.
6. Jean Pjilippe Vasseur, Mario Pickavet, Demeester, ―Network Recovery‖, Elsevier,
2004.
7. Mani Subramanian, ―Network Management‖, Pearson, 2006.
8. William Stallings, ―Data and Computer Communications‖, Pearson, 2007.
550
Data Mining and Data Warehousing
Unit – I
Operational Data Stores – Data Warehouses – ODS and DW Architecture – DW
Implementation – Meta Data –Data Cube: Introduction - Implementation – Operations -
Data Mining: Introduction – Process – Applications – Techniques
Unit – 2
Association Rules Mining – Introduction – The Apriori Algorithm – Apriori - TID
algorithm – Direct Hashing and Pruning – Dynamic Itemset Counting - Mining Frequent
Patterns without Candidate Generation – Classification: Introduction - Decision tree :
The Induction Algorithm – Split Algorithms
Unit – 3
Classification: Naïve Bayes Method – Accuracy Measures – Other Evaluation
Criteria Clustering – Introduction – Feature set – Types of Data - distance measures -
Partitional methods - Hierarchial methods – Density based methods – dealing with large
databases
Unit – 4
Web Mining: Web Terminology and Characteristics – Locality and Hierarchy –
Web content Mining – Web structure Mining – Web usage Mining – Search Engines:
Introduction – Functionality – Architecture – Ranking of Web Pages
Unit – 5
Spatial Mining – Introduction – spatial data overview – spatial data Mining
primitives - Generalization and specialization – Spatial Rules – Spatial classification
algorithm – spatial clustering Algorithms - Temporal Mining – Introduction - Modeling
temporal events.
Text Books :
1. G. K. Gupta, ―Introduction to Data Mining with Case studies‖, PHI , 2011
2. Margaret H. Dunham, ―Data Mining Introductory and Advanced Topies‖, Pearson
Education, 2003.
3. George M. Marakas, ―Modern Data Warehousing, Mining and Visualization‖,
Pearson Education, 2003.
4. Alex Berson and Stephen J.Smith, ―Data warehousing, Data Mining and OLAP‖,
McGraw Hill Book Company, 2001.
551
SOFT COMPUTING
UNIT I - FUZZY SET THEORY
Introduction to Neuro – Fuzzy and Soft Computing – Fuzzy Sets – Basic Definition and
Terminology – Set-theoretic Operations – Member Function Formulation and
Parameterization – Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning – Extension Principle and Fuzzy
Relations – Fuzzy If-Then Rules – Fuzzy Reasoning – Fuzzy Inference Systems –
Mamdani Fuzzy Models – Sugeno Fuzzy Models – Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models – Input
Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling.
UNIT II - OPTIMIZATION
Derivative-based Optimization – Descent Methods – The Method of Steepest Descent –
Classical Newton‘s Method – Step Size Determination – Derivative-free Optimization –
Genetic Algorithms – Simulated Annealing – Random Search – Downhill Simplex
Search.
UNIT III - NEURAL NETWORKS
Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Perceptrons - Adaline – Backpropagation
Mutilayer Perceptrons – Radial Basis Function Networks – Unsupervised Learning
Neural Networks – Competitive Learning Networks – Kohonen Self-Organizing
Networks – Learning Vector Quantization – Hebbian Learning.
UNIT IV - NEURO FUZZY MODELING
Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems – Architecture – Hybrid Learning Algorithm –
Learning Methods that Cross-fertilize ANFIS and RBFN – Coactive Neuro Fuzzy
Modeling – Framework Neuron Functions for Adaptive Networks – Neuro Fuzzy
Spectrum.
552
UNIT V - APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE
Printed Character Recognition – Inverse Kinematics Problems – Automobile Fuel
Efficiency Prediction – Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction.
TEXT BOOK
1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, ―Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing‖, PHI, 2004,
Eastern Economy Edition 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Timothy J.Ross, ―Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications‖, McGraw-Hill, 1997.
2. S. Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai, ―Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithms‖, PHI, 2003.
GRID AND CLOUD COMPUTING
UNIT - I
Introduction to Grid Computing- Anatomy and Physiology of Grid – Early Grid Activities
– Current Grid Activities– Grid Standards - Grid Business Areas – Grid Challenges and
Applications- Grid Computing Organization and their roles.
UNIT - II
Service Oriented Architecture – Web Service Architecture – Grid Architecture –
Implementing Grid Architecture- Globus Toolkit – Services - Open Grid Services
Architecture - Grid Scheduling and Resource Management– Framework– Grid
Resource Management Systems – Principles of Local Schedulers - Grid Scheduling
with QoS – Data Management -Grid Security.
UNIT - III
Cloud Computing – Overview – Applications-Intranets and the Cloud – Companies in
the Cloud Today- Cloud Computing Services- On Demand Computing – Discovering
Cloud Services-Development Services and Tools.
553
UNIT - IV
Cloud hardware and infrastructure-clients-security-network-services-platforms-cloud
storage-Cloud software architecture issues- Classification of Cloud Implementations.
UNIT – V
Operating System for the Cloud - Application Patterns and Architecture – Case
Studies-Cloud Computing services available under various platforms.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshy Joseph, Craig Fellenstein, ―Grid Computing‖, IBM Press, Pearson Education,
2004.
2. Ian Foster, Carl Kesselman (eds.),‖The Grid: Blueprint for a New Computing
Infrastructure‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2004.
3. Ahmar Abbas, ―Grid Computing: A Practical Guide to Technology and Applications,
Firewall Media‖, 2009.
4. Anthony T.Velte, Toby J.Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, ―Cloud Computing –A Practical
Approach‖, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
5. Michael Miller,‖ Cloud Computing: Web based Applications that change the way you
work and Collaborate online‖, Que Publishing, August 2008.
6. Haley Beard, ―Cloud Computing Best Practices for Managing and Measuring
Processes for on demand computing, Applications and Data Centers in the Cloud with
SLAs‖, Emereo Pvt. Ltd, July 2008.
7. Prof (Dr.) Andreas Polze, ―A Comparative Analysis of Cloud Computing
Environments‖.
8. Cloud Economics.
554
PERVASIVE AND MOBILE COMPUTING
Unit I:
Evolution of wireless data and networks – Mobile computing – basic characteristics and
functions – Different Networks – Middleware and gateways – Applications – Standard
making bodies.
Unit II:
Emerging Technologies – Bluetooth – RFID – WiMax – Mobile IP – working of Mobile IP
– IPv6. Brief overview of GSM – architecture – call routing in GSM. – Handover and
roaming. GPRS architecture – GPRS network operations – GPRS Data services and
Applications WAP – Architecture of WAP: layers and functions
Unit III:
Technologies: Introduction-Pervasive computing market- m-Business-
Conclusions and Challenges. Applications: Airline Checking- Sales force Automation-
Health Care- Tracking Systems. Device Technology: Hardware-Human-Machine
Interface- Biometrics- Operating Systems-Programming Languages.
Unit IV:
Device Connectivity: Protocols-Security-Device Management. Web Application
Concepts: History of World Wide Web- Architecture- Protocols- Transcoding - Client
Authentication. WAP: Introduction- Components of WAP Architecture- Infrastructure-
Security Issues- Wireless Markup Language- WAP Push –WAP Products.
Unit V:
Voice Technology: Basics of Speech Recognition – Voice Standards- Speech
Applications- Speech and Pervasive Computing- Security. Personal Digital Assistants :
Device Categories-Characteristics-operating systems- software components-standards-
applications and Browsers. Server-Side Programming: Overview-Servelets- Enterprise
Java Beans- JSP –Extensible Markup Languages-Web Services.
Access via WAP: WAP functionality-Implementation. Access from personal
digital assistants: Example application – Synchronized Devices Implementation-
Connected devices- Comparison. Voice Access: Example application- Implementation.
555
Books:
1. Mobile Computing – Technology, Applications and service creation‖ by Asoke k
Talukder & Roopa R Yavagal – Third Edition, Tata McGrawHill publishers 2006
2. ―Fundamentals of Mobile and Pervasive Computing‖ Frank Adelstein, Sandeep
K.S. Gupta, Golden G. Richard III & Loren Schwiebert – Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
3. Pervasive Computing Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet
Applications – jochen Burkhardt, Dr.Horst Henn and Stefan Hepper – Pearson
Education Asia-2005.
SEMANTIC WEB AND SOCIAL NETWORKS
UNIT I: Web Intelligence
Thinking and Intelligent Web Applications, The information Age, The World Wide Web,
Limitations of Todays Web, The Next Generation Web, Machine Intelligence, Artifical
Intelligence, Ontology, Inference engines, Software Agents, Berners – Lee www,
Semantic Road Map, Logic on the semantic Web.
UNIT II: Knowledge Representation for the Semantic Web
Ontologies and their role in the semantic web, Ontologies Languages for the Semantic
Web-Resource Description Framework (RDF)/RDF schema, Ontology Web Language
(OWL), UML, XML/XML Schema.
UNIT III: Ontology Engineering
Ontology Engineering, Constructing Ontology, ontology Development Tools, Ontology
Methods, Ontology Sharing and Merging, Ontology Libraries and Ontology Mapping,
Logic, Rules and Inference Engines.
UNIT IV: Semantice Web Applications, Services and Technology
Semantic Web applications and services, Semantic Search, e-learning, Semantic
Bioinformatics, Knowledge Base XML Based Web services, Creating an OWL-S
Ontology for Web Services, Semantic Search Technology, Web Search Agents and
Semantic Methods.
556
UNIT V: Social Network Analysis and semantic web
What is social Networks analysis development of the social networks analysis,
Electronic Sources for Network Analysis – Electronic Discussion networks, Blogs and
Online Communities, Web Based Network, Building Semantic Web applications with
social network features.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Thinking on the Web – Berners Lee, Godel and Turing, Wiley interscience, 2008.
2. Social Networks and the Semantic Web, Peter Mika, Springer 2007.
557
APPENDIX – AZ119
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY , TIRUNELVELI -12
M.Phil Biotechnology (CBCS - Colleges)
Effective from the Academic year 2013 – 2014
Eligibility: A pass with 50 % mark in Master degree in any biological subjects
Model Question Paper: 5 out of 8 given questions x 20= 100 marks CODE SUBJECT CRED INT EX TOTA PASSIN
IT
SEMESTER I
IRM INSTRUMENTATION AND RESEARCH 5
METHODOLOGY
ABT APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY 5
SEMESTER II
OPTIONAL PAPERS
(Select any one optional paper related to
the project)
1. MICROBIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY 2. NATURAL PRODUCTS 3. STEM CELL AND TISSUE
ENGINEERING 4. PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY 5. BIOINFORMATICS AND
BIOPHYSICS 6. NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 7. GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS 8. IMMUNOLOGY 9. ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY 10. ENVIRONMENTAL
BIOTECHNOLOGY
PROJECT 10 50 50 100 50
There is no minimum mark of passing for internal examination
558
. T. L G
MINIMU
M
25 75 100 50 25 75 100 50
25 75 100 50
MBT
NPS SCT
PBT
BIB
NBT GEP IMM ABT EBT
PRO
5
PAPER I: INSTRUMENTATION AND RESEARCH METHODOLOGY (Core)
Unit 1:
Microscopy and spectroscopy: Introduction to microscopy: image resolution and
digital image processing. Light interference microscopy, confocal microscopy, Electron
microscopy, preparation of samples, negative staining. Spectroscopy: General
introduction electromagnetic spectrum. Molecular spectroscopy. Principle and
application of UV, IR, NMR, XRD, circular dichorism (CD) spectroscopy, atomic
spectroscopy, laser and mass spectroscopy: MS-MS, MALDI-TOF, Q-TOF.
UNIT 2:
Isolation of macromolecules: principles of centrifugation, Types of centrifugation
Different methods of DNA, RNA and protein isolation techniques and purification
process. electrophoretic techniques- polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, Two
dimensional electrophoresis, agarose gel electrophoresis, Microfluidic techniques: DNA,
RNA and protein, FACS.
UNIT 3:
Molecular characterization: principles and methodology of southern, northern and
western blotting and their applications in molecular biology. Isotopic techniques,
measurement of radioactivity. Radio and non radioactive labeling techniques for probing
and detection of DNA and protein molecules. cDNA preparation and cloning, methods of
gene expression studies- Transcriptome analysis, micro array techniques- principles,
methods and applications. Next generation sequencing and protein sequencing. PCR
(semi quantitative and quantitative methods): RT-PCR, RACE-PCR, In-situ
Hybridization. Histology and histochemistry.
UNIT 4:
Recombinant DNA and biosafety guidelines: biosafety practices, radiation
hazards, hazardous chemical and Decontamination procedures. Health and medical
surveillance. Disposal of Biohazardous materials, Management of GMO, Bio-ethics.
UNIT 5:
Scientific documentation: statistical methods in biological research: T-test, SD,
simple ANOVA, preparation of scientific documents, general articles, research papers,
review articles, editing of research papers, methods of citation, collection of literatures,
including web based method, bibliography and thesis writing. Presentation techniques,
effective communication skill, Discussion of research articles.
559
REFERENCES:
1. A practical guide to clinical Biochemistry Keith Wilson
2. Instrumental methods of analysis, 6th edition Williard; Merrit, Dean Settle
3. Introduction to practical Molecular Biology – Phillipa. D. Darbee
4. Recombination DNA technology J:A. Brown Instrumental analysis – B. K. Shrma.
5. Laboratory Instrumentation – M. Prakash, L. K. Arora, Anmol publications PVT
LTD, New Delhi
PAPER 2: APPLIED BIOTECHNOLOGY (core)
UNIT 1:
Experimental models: Mouse, Zebra fish, Drosophila, earthworm, C. elegans,
Arabidopsis, bacteria. Handling and maintenance of laboratory animals. Knock- out,
knock-in, Knockdown (RNAi). Animal cloning.
UNIT 2:
Prediction and identification of immunogenic epitopes: B cell epitopes, T-helper
epitopes, CTL epitopes. Vaccines and therapeutic agents: subunit vaccines, Live and
attenuated, recombinant Vaccines, Anti-idiotypic vaccines – genetically engineered
Immuno therapeutic Agents.
UNIT 3:
Crop genetic enhancement: cloning of improved agricultural crops for productivity
and quality. Agrobacterium mediated genetic transformation, Gen gun, Terminator gene
technique, role of Ti and Ri plasmids in transfer of novel genes into crop plant,
screening of transgenics, evolutions of genetic stability. Ethical issues related to
transgenic plant. Molecular markers, genomic assisted cropping, golden rice, Indicator
plants. Gene silencing in plants.
560
UNIT 4:
Products from marine sources - marine life, Food, medicine and raw materials –
Seaweeds, Sea grass and marine animals and associated microorganisms. Isolation
and identification of bioactive compounds and their pharmaceutically importance.
UNIT 5:
Patentability of inanimate products of nature- vectors. FDA, FPA. Patent office
practice- Trade secrets, copy rights, infringements problems, harmonization of patent
laws. Patenting and IPR. Plant genetic resources, Patent legislation and protocols..
International scenario. Awareness among the public. TRIPS, GATT, CBD, EPA.
REFERENCES:
1. Kuby immunology, 4th edition R. A. goldsby, Thomas. J. Kindt, Barbara, A.
Osbarne. (Freeman)
2. Immunology – A short course, 4th edition Eli Benjamin, Richard Coico,
Goeffrey Sunshine. (Wiley- Liss)
3. Fundamentals of immunology, William Paul
4. Immunology by Roitt and others
5. J.Hammond, P. Mc Garey and V. Yusibov (Eds): Plant biotechnology.
Springer verlag, 2000.
6. T- J. Fu, G. Singh and W. R. Curtis (Eds): Plant cell and tissue culture for the
production of food ingredients. Kulwer Acadernic/plenum press. 1999.
7. R. J. Henry: Practical application of plant molecular biology. Chapman and
Hall. 1997.
8. P. K. Gupta: Elements of biotechnology. Rastogi and /Co. Meerut. 1996.
561
Semester II
OPTIONAL PAPERS
MICROBIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT 1:
History and scope of Microbial Biotechnology. Isolation, Screening, and
Preservation of strains. Classification and characterization of microbes: molecular
taxonomy and bar coding; Media, physical and chemical parameters. Registration of
microbes.
UNIT 2:
Products from microbes: Fermentation techniques, uses and mode of action-
enzymes- vitamins- B2,B12- antibiotics- penicillin, tetracycline, streptomycin; amino
acids and organic acids- lactic, acetic and citric acid.
UNIT 3:
Food products from microbes: Bakers yeast, Single cell protein- beverages:
Beer, Wine, Milk products- Cheese- Agricultural products: Biofertilizer- Blue green
algae, Azospirillum, Azola. Biocontrol: Bacillus thuringiensis, trichoderma and NPVs.
Importance of biocontrol agents. Archaebacteria- Extremozyme: role of Halobacteria in
salt production- halophilic microalgae- products from halophilic bacteria. Edible
mushroom cultivation- manufacture, packing and storage.
UNIT 4:
Microbial genetic improvement: Conventional methods, recombinant technology
based methods. Protoplast fusion, recombination, alternation in metabolic pathways,
immobilization techniques of cells, enzymes.
562
UNIT 5:
Biodegradation and bioremediation: Biodegradation of xenobiotics- microbes in
mining, ore leaching, oil recovery, microbes in waste water treatment, biodegradation of
non cellulosic waste for environmental conservation. Bioconversion of cellulose waste
into ethanol.
REFERENCES:
1. Marine ecological processes by Ivan Valieli, 1984, Springer- Verlag publishers.
2. Microbial biotechnology- fundamentals of applied microbiology by A. N. Glazer
and H. Nikaido, W. H. Freeman and company.
3. Principles of fermentation technology, P. F. Stanbury and Whittaker, Pergamon
press.
4. Microbial process development, H. W. Woelle, World scientific.
5. Product recovery in bioprocess technology, J. Krijgsman, BIOTOL Buller worth
Heinsmann.
6. Aquaculture- principles and practices by TVR Pillay, 1990, Fishing newsbook
publications.
NATURAL PRODUCTS
UNIT 1:
Biomedical potential of marine and terrestrial natural products – Isolation, purification
structural elucidation and mode of action. Application in various field
UNIT 2: Important products isolated from marine organisms and their uses – Agarose, Agar,
Alginates, Carrageenans, chitin, chitosons and glucosanins, marine flavourants, Lectins,
heparin and carotene. Single cell Protein
UNIT 3:
Biological fuel generation: Ethanol from biomass, Methane from biomass, Hydrogen
from biomass. Sources of biomass
563
UNIT 4:
Herbal products: carbohydrates and derived products - drugs containing glycosides,
tannins, lipids (fixed oils, fats and waxes), volatile oils and terpenoids, enzymes
and proteins, alkaloids. Biological testing of herbal drugs - Preliminary
phytochemical screening for plant products - Qualitative chemical tests -
Chromatography (TLC and HPLC).
UNIT 5:
Pharmaceutically important products from marine and terrestrial organisms
pharmaceutical surfactants, antimicrobial compounds, hormone like materials, vitamins,
immunomodulators, anticancer and cytotoxic compounds
REFERENCES:
1. Marine natural products: chemical and biological perspectives Paul J. Scheuer
Academic Press, 392 pages 2. Bioactive Marine Natural Products Bhakuni, Dewan S., Rawat, D.S. 2005, XV,
400 p. 3. Marine natural products Hiromasa Kiyota, K. Fujiwara, T. Nagata, 2010 - 301
pages 4. Drugs from the Sea, Nobuhiro Fusetani, 2000 - 158 pages 5. Herbal plants and Drugs, Agnes Arber, 1999. Mangal Deep Publications. 6. Contribution to Indian Ethnobotany by Editor S.K.Jain, 1991 Scientific Publishers. 7. New Natural products and Plants drugs with Pharmacological, Biological
(or) 8. Therapeutical activity, H.Wagner and P.Wolff, 1979. Springer, New Delhi. 9. Ayurvedic drugs and their plant source, V.V.Sivarajan and Balachandran
Indra, 1994. Oxford IBH publishing Co.
STEM CELL AND TISSUE ENGINEERING
Unit 1:
Stem Cell Basics: History, Stem cell: Types of Stem Cells- Pluripotent stem cell, Progenitor or precursor cell, embryonic germ cell, embryonic stem cells, Adult stem cell, Differentiation. Plasticity. Hematopoietic Stem Cell. Cancer Stem Cells, ES/iPS cells. Similarities and differences between embryonic and adult stem cells, potential uses of human stem cells. Introduction to concepts in stem cell biology (renewal, potency).
Unit 2:
Early embryonic development. Lymphoid cell differentiation and maturation, Pluripotency and Reprogramming. Epigenetic controls of stem cells.
564
Unit 3:
Stem cell characterizations: isolation & characterizations, markers & their identification, FACS, fluorescent microscope, growth factor requirements and their maintenance in culture. Feeder and feeder free cultures. Cell cycle regulators in stem cells. Asymmetric cell division.
Unit 4:
Generation and Manipulation of Mouse Embryonic Stem Cells & Human Embryonic Stem Cells. Molecular mechanisms of self-renewal, pluri/multipotency and lineage differentiation. Molecular basis of pleuripotency and stem cell niche, migration of stem cell. Stem cell signaling pathways, Animal Models of Regeneration, Types of regeneration.
Unit 5:
Primordial Germ Cells and Germ Cell Development . Epigenetics and Reprogramming in Stem Cell Biology. Stem Cell Gene Therapy. Stem cell therapy for neurodegenerative diseases, cardiac regeneration, leukemia, Ethical issues. REFERENCES: 1) T. J. Kindt, R. A. Goldsby and B.A. Osborne, Kuby, Immunology, 2007, W. H. Freeman & Company. 2) P. Delves, S. Martin, D. Burton and I. Roitt, Roitt's Essential Immunology, Latest Edition, 2006, Wiley-Blackwell. 3) A.K. Abbas, A. Lichtman, and J. S. Pober, Cellular and Molecular Immunology, 2000, W.B. Saunders Company. 4) C. A Janeway, Jr, P. Travers, M. Walport, and M. J. Shlomchik, Immunology, 2001, Garland Science.
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
Unit 1:
Plant Tissue Culture: Practical aspects of plant tissue culture, Toitipotency, Somatic embryogenesis, callus, cell suspension culture, micropropagation, protoplast, anther and ovary culture, somaclonal variation, germplasm conservation. Hairy root culture & applications (secondary metabolite production).
Unit 2:
Genetic transformation: Agrobacterium mediated genetic transformation, vectors, Ti and Ri plasmids, mechanisms of T-DNA transfer, role of virulence genes. use of reporter genes, multiple gene transfers. BT cotton, molecular aspects of Herbicide resistance. Vectors-less or direct DNA transfer, particle bombardment, electroporation, microinjection, transformation of monocots. Transgene stability and gene silencing. Application and limitations.
565
Unit 3:
Molecular markers: Genetic and physical maps, DNA finger printing techniques RFLP, RAPD and AFLP, SSR markers, SCAR (sequence characterized amplified regions), SSCP (single strand conformational polymorphism). Molecular markers linked to disease and pest resistance genes, application of molecular markers in breeding of crop plants. Marker assisted plant breeding.
Unit 4:
Functional genomics: Strategies for identification and characterization of genes. Factors influencing the gene expression, Elicitors, gene expression mechanism, cDNA preparation and cloning, Characterization of gene sequences. Application of functional genomics in plant genetic improvement.IPRs. Mechanism of gene silencing, virus mediated gene silencing, functional genomics.
Unit 5:
Plant microbe interaction: Plant pathogens, resistance, mechanism aginst bacteria, fungi, virus. Molecular forming: plantibodies, plant based vaccines by transgenic plants and/or plant viruses.
REFERENCES:
1. J. Hammond, P. McGarvey and V. Yusibov (Eds): Plant Biotechnology. Springer Verlag, 2000
2. T-J. Fu, G. Singh, and W.R. Curtis (Eds.): Plant Cell and Tissue Culturefor the Production of Food Ingredients. Kluwer Acadernic/Plenum Press. 1999.
3. H.S. Chawla: Biotechnology in Crop Improvement. International Book distributing Company. 1998
4. R.J. Henry: Practical Application of Plant Molecular Biology. Chapman and Hall. 1997 5. P .K. Gupta: Elements of Biotechnology. Rastogi and /Co. Meerut. 1996
BIOINFORMATICS AND BIOPHYSICS
Unit 1:
Bioinformatics: - an overview, Scope and applications. Introduction of digital
computers: File management. Data mining, Data ware housing,
Organization; binary number system. Flow charts and programming
techniques.
Unit 2:
Sequence Analysis: Sequence data bases, retrieval. Pair-wise alignment and
Mutiple alignment of nucleic acids and protein sequences. BLAST, FASTA
algorithm to analysis sequence data. CLUSTALW.
566
Unit 3:
Biophysics: Definition, scope and methods. Atomic structure, atomic orbital,
wave functions - electronic structure of atoms, spin of particles - relationship
between atomic structure and chemical properties. Molecule: - different types
of bonds - molecular orbital, chirality in biological systems
Unit 4:
Structure: (primary, secondary, tertiary & quaternary). Ramachandran plot.
Protein & RNA Secondary structure prediction. Homology modeling,
Unit 5:
Proteins: purification, characterization- affinity purification, Circular Dichroism,
Crystallization, XRD. Protein data bases, Protein docking, Drug designing.
REFERENCES:
1. Introduction to computers - Balaguruswamy 2. Molecular database for protein sequence and structure studies by Sillince
l. A and Silline.M. (1991). Springer verlag. 3. Nucleic acid and proteins sequence analysis: A Practical approach:
M.l.Bishop and C.l. Rawlings. IRL Press 4. An Introduction to Bioinformatics Algorithms,2005 N.C. Jonesand P.A.
Pevzner, Ane Books, New Delhi. 5. Physical Biochemistry, Applications to Biochemistry and Molecular Biology - D,
Freifelder.
6. General Biophysics, Vol. I & II - H.V. Volkones.
7. Molecular Biophysics - B. Pullman & M. Voino.
NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
Unit 1:
Background to nantechnology-atomic structure-molecules and phases-energy molecular
and atomic size-surfaces and dimensional space.
Unit 2:
Principles and methods: Nanomaterials FABRICATION. Methods for structural analysis:
XRD, SEM, TEM, and FTIR. Biological synthesis of nano materials.
567
Unit 3:
Nanotechnology as a tool for sustainability. Nanotechnology and the environment-
Nanotechnology and our energy challenge. nanomaterials for groundwater remediation-
membrane processes-Nanomaterials as adsorbents.
Unit 4:
Nanotoxicology- Diagnosis and imaging: quantum dots.
Unit 5:
Coupling of drugs with nanomaterials- Coupling of proteins with nanomaterials.
Nanotechnology in cancer biology
REFERENCES:
1, Nanotechnology:basic science and emerging technologies_Mick Wilson, Kamali,
kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse, Overseas Press
(2005).
2. Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties and Applications,
A. Inoue, K. Hashimoto (eds.). (2000).
3. Nanocomposite science and technology, Pulickel M. Ajayan, Linda S. Schadler, Paul
V. Braun, wiley-VCH Verlag, Weilheim (2003).
4. Nanobiotechnology: concepts, Applications and Perspectives, christof M.
Niemeyer/CHAD A. Mirkin (eds,), Wiley-VCH, Weinheim (2004).
GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS
Unit 1:
Organization of genome: in prokaryotes and eukaryotes. Whole genome sequencing
techniques. Next generation sequencing. GAP filling, ORF finding, gene annotation.
Human genome project.
Unit 2:
Splicing mechanism and structure of mRNA. MicroRNA and their prediction and
function.
568
Unit 3:
Gene expression analysis: Micro-array, Transcriptome analysis, phage display,
differential gene expression techniques, SNP analysis
Unit 4:
Proteomics: introduction- Techniques: 2D Gel Electrophoresis, Mass-spec, proteins
arrays
Unit 5:
Protein-Protein Interaction: Pull-down assay, Immunoprecipitation, co-
immunoprecipitation, yeast two hybrid system, Far-western blot.
References:
1. Harvey Lodish, Arnold Berk, S. Lawrence Zipursky, Paul Matsudaria,David
Baltimore, James Darnell, 2202, Molecular cell Biology, W.H.freeman &
company, New York.
2. T.A. Brown, 2000. Genomes, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Ltd.)
3. Jose Cibelli, Robert P. Lanza H.S. Cambell, Michael D. West, 2002. Principles of
cloning, Elsevier Science (USA).
IMMUNOLOGY
Unit 1:
Antigen presenting cells, T-cell receptors, Antigen processing & Presentation, MHC
Unit 2:
Antigen, immunization and production of polyclonal antibodies, Classification of
antibodies, monoclonal antibody, and applications of antibodies
Unit 3:
Chemokines and cytokines: biology of IL2, IL4, IL5, IL10, IL12; TGF beta, TNF alpha,
IFN negamma
Unit 4:
Techniques: ELISA, RIA, Immunoprecipitation, co-immunoprecipitations,
immunostaining, immunohistochemistry., FACS, Immunoblot
569
Unit 5:
Diseases: autoimmune diseases, immune deficient diseases, hypersensitive disorders,
animal models of allergy and autoimmune diseases – tumor immunology
References:
1. Sulabta Pathak and Palan 2005, Immunology essentials and fundamentals,
science Publishers 427pp.
2. Jains Kuby, 2004, Immunology, W.H. Freeman and company, New York, 660pp.
ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Unit 1:
Cell culture, media, types of tissue culture, culture environment, nutrient requirement.
Unit 2:
Sub-culturing of animal cells, 3 D culture of cells, doubling time, immortalization,
apoptosis
Unit 3:
Livestock breeds, transgenic organisms, gene transfer: transfection, microinjection,
transduction, gene mapping, ectogenesis, transplantation, embryo transfer.
Unit 4:
Transgenic cattle and fish, animal cloning.
Unit 5:
Anti-sense technique, microRNA, Knock-in, knock-out and knock-down experiments.
References:
1. M. M. Ranga, Animal Biotechnology, 2007, Eastern Book corporation 628pp.
2. Robert Renaville and A. Burney, 2005. Biotechnology in Animal Husbandry.
3. Nigel kenkins, 2006, Animal Biotechnology, Methods and Protocols.
570
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Unit 1:
Pollution and Methods for their measurement; Environmental management and Impact
Assessment.
Unit 2:
Biotechnological approaches to control Air and Water pollution. Physical, chemical and
biological treatment processes of waste waters.
Unit 3:
Biodegradation of Xenobiotics and hydrocarbons in environment. Degradation of
hydrocarbons, substituted hydrocarbons, role of super bug in control of oil pollution.
Unit 4:
Bioremediation of contaminated soils and waste land, solid waste management:
composting, vermiculture, mushroom cultivation and biogas production.
Unit 5:
Biotechnological approaches for Global Environmental Problems. Extinction of
plants/animals. CO2 sequestration, Energy from municipal sewage, biodiesel from
plants and algae.
REFERENCES:
1. Wastewater Engineering - Treatment, Disposal and Reuse. Metcalf and Eddy, Inc., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
2. Comprehensive Biotechnology, V 01.4, M. Moo- Young (Ed-in-chief), Pergamon Press, Oxford
3. Environmental Chemistry, A.K. De, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi 4. Introduction to Biodeterioration. D. Allsopp and K.J.Seal, ELBS/Edward Arnold.
571
APPENDIX – AZ120
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERESITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M.PHIL. HISTORY
(CBCS) 2013-2014 onwards
SYLLABUS
M.Phil History Board meeting was held on 25.03.2013 at 11.a.m in the campus of M.S.University, Tirunelveli, under the chairmanship of Dr. B. Maria John and Dr. D. Sankaran served as member of the Board. The Schemes and decisions regarding the M.Phil course and Examination pattern have been taken unanimously. The unitized syllabus for M.Phil course in History, revised in accordance with the UGC guidelines, takes effect from the academic year 2013 – 2014. The duration of the course shall be spread over a – full academic year, divided into two seminars. The course is schemed under CBCS, without internal marks for written papers and dissertation valuation. Eligibility: M.A. History passed
Course Content
SEMESTER I Subject and Credit Maximum passing Credits Total
marks minimum teaching hrs. Paper I Research Methodology in History 100 50 5 75
Paper II Archives Keeping Or 100 50 5 75
Indian Epigraphy SEMESTER II
Paper III History of Tamil Nadu upto 1336 A.D. Or
History of Tamil Nadu 1336 – 1967 A.D100 50 5 75
DISSERTATION MARKS 200 100
Paper IV Dissertation valuation 150 75 10
Viva-voce 50 Internal -25; External – 25.
Total marks 500 credits – 25.
Each paper will be divided into FIVE units
572
Scheme of examination Written Examination, 100 marks for each paper.
Question paper will be divided into two sections. SECTION A ( 5 x 5 = 25 marks)
All questions carry equal marks Answer the following questions not more than 250 words each Unit Question 1 1 (a) or (b) 2 2 (a) or (b) 3 3 (a) or (b) 4 4 (a) or (b) 5 5 (a) or (b)
SECTION B ( 5 x 15 = 75 marks) All questions carry equal marks
Answer the following questions not more than 1000 words each 1 6 (a) or (b) 2 7 (a) or (b) 3 8 (a) or (b) 4 9 (a) or (b) 5. 10(a) or (b)
Paper I - Research Methodology
Unit I : Sources of History - Historical Evidences - Archeological Evidences -
Physical Remains - Traditions - Written Accounts - Legends and Ballads - Literary Evidences - Sources of Ancient History - Medieval and Modern History – Archival Sources – Oral History.
Unit II : Historical Methods – What is Research - Techniques and Methods -
Forms and Types - Selection of Research topic- Requisites of a Scholar - Hypothesis.
Unit III: Research Design - Research proposal requisites for investigation -
Narrative Method - Analytical Method - Descriptive Method - Interpretative Method Bibliographic Method - Recording evidences - Card File – Criticism: External and Internal Criticism.
Unit IV: Organisation of Research work - Fact and Synthesis - Interpretation and
Reasoning - Emphasis - Exposition and Style - Statistical Methods - Objectivity and - Subjectivity.
Unit V: Presentation of Thesis - Order of presentation - Foot Notes – Quotations
and Annotations - Abbreviation - Glossary - Dates and Figures - Bibliography - Appendices.
573
BOOKS FOR REFERENCES: 1. Floude, J.A., - Scientific Method Applied to History 2. Mill, J.S., - Dissertations and Discussions 3. Nilakanda Sastry, K.A., - Fundamentals of Research 5. Rajayyan, K., - History : Theory and Method 6. Renier,G.J., - History, its Propose and Method 7. Satish K. Bajaj. - Research Methodology in History 8. Sharma, B.A.V., - Research Methods in Social Sciences 9. Sheik Ali, B., - History: Its Theory and Method 10. Sreetharan, E., - A Text book of Historiography 9. Subramanian, N., - Research Methodology 10. Thompson, J.W., - A History of Historical Writing
Paper II - ARCHIVES KEEPING
Unit I Meaning of the term Archives – Origin – Early History: - Ancient ,
Medieval and Modern Europe - USA – and India.
Unit II Creation of Archives - Establishment of Archives and Library –
Organisation of Archives – Preservation of Archives : Methods of Preservation – Administration of Archives – Technical and general Administration.
Unit III Functions of Archives – Uses of Archives - Historical, Administrative and
Intellectual values – creation of Archival Awareness.
Unit IV Tamil Nadu Archives – creation – Records and Records keeping –
Administration – Tall boys wheeler – B.S. Baliga – S. Singarajan – Private Archives in Tamil Nadu.
Unit V National Archives of India – its History – Records keeping –
Administration - Private Archives – Nehru Museum and Library – Calcutta Museum and Library – International Archives.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Baliga, B.S., - Guide to the records preserved in the Madras Record Office.
2. Schallenberg, T.R., - Modern Archives – Principles and Techniques.
3. Salien Ghose, - Archives in India.
4. Sundara Raj, M., - Manual of Archives Systems and the World of
Archives. 5. Thiagarajan, J., - Archives Keeping.
574
Paper II INDIAN EPIGRAPHY Unit I:
Epigraphy: Scope and purpose – Importance of the study Epigraphy and Allied subject – Epigraphists: James Prinsep – Buhler – Hultzsch – K.G. Subramonia Aiyar – T.A. Gopinatha Rao – Rangacharya – Natesa Sastri – Krishna Sastri - V. Venkayya – K.V. Ramesh
Unit II:
Evolution of Scripts and forms of writing: Theories: Egyptian – Sumerian – Chinese – Greek – Indian Graffiti – Cuneiform – Linear – Pictographic – Hieroglyphics Brahmi: Asokan Brahmi: Tamizhi – Grantha: - Vatteluthu:
Unit III:
Writing materials and kinds of inscriptions: Bark of Trees – wood – skin of Animals – Claylets – Potteries – Leaves Papyrus & Palm leaves, – Rocks - Seals Copper – Plates. Kinds of Inscriptions: Religious, Donative – Commemorative. Deciphering Techniques Eye-copying-Estempage – Facsimile – Photographs & Photocopying.
Unit IV
Eras and Historical values: Dating methods : Saka Era – Kali Era – Vikrama era – Kollam Era. Value of inscriptions –Historical, Political, Social, Economic, Religious, Cultural and Literary – Meykirthis – Value of the Study of Inscriptions
Unit V
Forms and contents of select inscriptions: 1) Kudumiyanmalai music inscriptions 2) Velvikudi copper plates 3) Pallamkovil copper plates 4) Parthibasekarapuram copper plates 5) Nibandakarar inscriptions of Raja Raja I 6) Uthiramerur and Manur inscriptions
Books for Reference:
1. Buhler, Indian Paleography 2. Gurumurthy,S., Deciphering the Indus Script. 3. Mahadevan, Iravatham, Early Tamil Epigraphy: From the Earliest Times to the
Sixth Century A.D. 4. Mahalingam, T.V., Indian Palaeography 5. Subrahmanyan, N., and Venkataraman, R., Tamil Epigraphy 6. Subramanyan, T.N., South Indian Temple Inscriptions, Vol. II, Part II, 7. –do- , Ten Pandya Copper – Plates 8. –do- , Thirty Pallava Copper – Plates, Chennai
575
Paper III - HISTORY OF TAMIL NADU UPTO 1336 A.D.
Unit 1 Pre-Historic Tamilaham : Geography – its impact – prehistoric sites –
Paleolithic – Microlithic – and Megalithic cultures – pre historic Tamils and Romans.
Unit 2 Early Tamilaham : Sangam literature – Cheras – Cholas – Pandyas –
administration - society – trade and commerce – military, religion – Kalabhras.
Unit 3 Pallavas and First Pandyan Empire : Theories about the origin of the
Pallavas – Political History – Administration, Society – religion – literature – art and architecture – Bhakti movement – Alwars – Nayanmars – Bhakti literature – political history of the I Pandiyan empire, society – religion.
Unit 4 Age of Imperialism: Imperial Cholas - political history including Chalukya
Cholas – Territorial expansion – Administration - Society – religion - Art and Architecture – literature – temple administration – Pandyas – political history – society - religion - administration – Art and Architecture – Marco Polo‘s observation.
Unit 5 Political Confusion : Civil War in the Pandya Country – its impact – Muslim
intervention – Dislodging of Tamil powers – economic and social dacay - religious fervour - emergence of Madurai Sultanate – its rule and impact – Kumara Kampana and the Sultanate of Madurai.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Alasiar, J., Military System of the Early Tamils. 2. Appadurai, A., Economic condition in South India (1000-1500 A.D) Vol.I & II.
3. Chempakalakshmi, R., The State in Pre-Colonial South India. 4. Gopalan, R., Pallavas of Kanchi. 5. Hanumanthan, K.R., Untouchability in Tamil Nadu. 6. Krishnaswami Aiyangar S., Some Contributions of South India to Indian
Culture. 7. Kanaka Sabhai Pillai, V., The Tamils 1800 Years Ago. 8. Karashima R. Noboru ; South Indian History and Society. 9. Mahalingam, T.V., Readings in South Indian History. 10. Meenakshi, C., Administration and Social life under the Pallavas. 11. Nilakanda Sastri, K.A., The Colas. 12. ‖ The Pandyan Kingdom. 13. ‖ History of South India. 14. ‖ Development of Religion in South India. 15. ,, Foreign Notices of South India. 16. Rajayyan, K., History of Tamil Nadu (part I) 17. Sadasiva Pandarathar, T.V., Pandyar Varalaru. 18. Subramanian N., Sangam Polity, 19. ,, History of Tamil Nadu upto 1336.
576
20. Srinivasa Iyangar ; The History of the Tamils. 21. Shesha Iyar, K.G., The Chera Kings of the Sangam Age
Or
Paper III - HISTORY OF TAMIL NADU 1336 - 1967A.D. Unit 1 Vijayanagar Rule in Tamil Nadu : The Three Nayak Kingdoms – Madurai,
Tanjore and Senji – administration – society – religion – Christianity – John De Britto – Beschi, Robert De Nobili, cultural growth – art and architecture.
Unit 2 The Nawabs and the Marathas : Arcot Nawabs – political conflicts with the Nayaks – administration – society and religion – Maratha power in Tanjore – Political History – society – religion culture – education – Christianity.
Unit 3 Tamil Nadu under the Poligars : Poligari System, Kaval System, Military System, Kattabomman – The British – repressive measures – abolition of Poligari System – introduction of Zamindari System – merits and demerits – Sethupathis of Ramanathapuram.
Unit 4 South Indian Rebellion and British - Maruthu Brothers – Vellore Mutiny - Tamil Nadu under the British – growth of education – Christianity and education – religious movements – Ramalinga Adigal – Muthu Kutti Samigal.
Unit 5 Modern Tamil Nadu : Freedom Movement in Tamil Nadu – Congress Party – Maniyachi incident – Non Co-operation Movement – Justice Party – Civil Disobedience Movement, Quit - India Movement – Salt Satyagragha - E.V.R. and Dravida Kalaham, V.V.S. Ayyar, V.O.C., Rajaji – Satyamurthi – Tamil Nadu after Independence, Congress Administration – welfare measures – Kamaraj – his administration.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Alasiar, J., (ed.) : Christianity in South India 2. ,, : Aspects of South Indian History 3. Chandra Babu, B. S., : Social Protest in Tamilnadu 4. Hanumanthan, K. R., : Untouchability 5. Krishna Samy, : The Tamil Country under in Vijayanaga Rule 6. Pillai, K.K., : A Social History of the Tamils 7. Nagasamy, (ed.) : South Indian Studies 8. Narasimhan, V.K., : Kamaraj – A Study 9. Rajayyan, K., : History of Madurai (1736-1801 A.D.) 10. ,, : South Indian Rebellion 11. ,, : British Diplomacy in Tanjore 12. ,, : Rise and fall of the Poligars in Tamilnadu 13. ,, : History of Tamil Nadu (Part II) 14. ,, : Tamil Nadu, A Real History 15. Rajaram, R., : The Justice Party 16. Sathiyanatha Iyyar, R., : History of the Nayaks of Madurai 17. ,, : Tamilaham in the 17th Century
577
18. Subramanian, N., : History of Tamil Nadu (PartII) 19. Subramanian, P., : Social History of Tamil Nadu 20. Srinivasachari, C.S., : A History of Gingi and its Rulers 21. Sardesai, G.S., : New History of the Marathas, Vol.II.
578
APPENDIX - AZ121
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.Phil., - COMMERCE (Affiliated Colleges) with effect from 2013-14
OBJECTIVES • Provide Exposure to emerging issues in the area of Commerce
• Undertake Research Problems on the Contemporary Issues with Social Relevance.
REGULATIONS
1. Eligibility for Admission
The Course for the Degree of Master of Philosophy in Commerce is offered as both
Full-Time and Part-Time Course.
The Full-Time course is meant for regular students. A Candidate who has passed
the Master Degree in Commerce (M.Com), Corporate Management, Co-Operation, Bank
Management, Foreign in Trade or any other equivalent Degree form a recognized
University.
The Part-Time Course for Academic and Administrative Staff in Government
Services, Local Bodies, Recognized Educational Institutions and Public Sector Undertakings
and Private Undertakings approved by the University.
2. Duration of the Course
The Course for the Degree of Master of Philosophy in Commerce (Full-Time) shall
consist of one academic year with two semesters. (June – May)
The Course for the Degree of Master of Philosophy in Commerce (Part-Time) shall
consist of two academic years under Non-semester system.
3. Course of study
The Course of study for Master of Philosophy in Commerce shall comprise
instruction in the following subjects according to syllabus and text books prescribed from
time to time.
Semester I
Courses
Paper I -Research Methodology
Paper II-Advance Financial Management
Semester II
Paper III- Optional Papers (a) or (b)
a) Marketing Management
(or)
b) Human Resource Management
and
Dissertation and Viva-Voce
579
Every Research Scholar has to undergo Research in the area related to Commerce.
The Dissertation has to be submitted for evaluation. That will be evaluated by External
examiner followed by Viva-Voce examination conducted by the Department in the College.
Sl. Se Paper of Title No. m.
1. I Research Methodology
2. II Advanced Financial Management
3. II Area Paper Optional
a) Marketing Management
(or)
b) Human Resource Management
4. II Dissertation & Viva-voce
PeriodicalPresentation(Internal)- 50
Report-Evaluation (External)
Viva Voce (External) - 50
4. Scheme of Examination
1. Internal No Passing Minimum – (Theory and Dissertation Viva)
2. External Passing Minimum - 50% (Theory and Dissertation Work)
3. Total Passing Minimum - 50%.
be submitted on or before 31
st March every year and Viva voce
30th May and the External examiner shall conduct the Viva Voce
Examinations.
5. Question Paper Pattern
Time : 3 Hrs
Max Marks : 100
Marks
Section A (5 x 20 = 100 Marks)
Answer all the Questions.
1. a)
(or)
b)
2. a)
(or)
b)
3. a)
(or)
b)
580
Teac Exam Credi Internal Externa Tota hing Hours t l l Hour
s
3 8 25 75 100
3 8 25 75 100
3 8 25 75 100
- 16 50 150 200
40
- 100
The Dissertation shall
should be conducted by
4. a)
(or)
b)
5. a)
(or)
b)
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
M.Phil (Commerce) – Syllabus (From 2013-14 onwards)
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Unit –I
Introduction to research: Meaning, Objectives, Types and motive of research- Research
Approaches – Significance of Research – Research and Scientific Methods – Research Process
– Research problem – Meaning, source and need – Criteria of good Research Problem.
Unit – II
Research design – Meaning, Need, Features, Concepts and types of research design.
Sampling design- Steps, Criteria Characteristics and types of sample designs-Scaling
techniques – Measurement Scales – Scaling errors – Important Scaling Techniques.
Unit-III
Data Collection – Methods of collecting primary data and secondary data – Searching the internet for data.
Data Analysis and interpretation – Editing-Coding-Tabulation-Diagrams-Graphs-
Electronic Data processing.
Report Writing – Steps in Report Writing – Format of the Research Report- Mechanics of
report writing – Reference – Use of quotation – Bibliography – Appendix-Essentials of a good
Report.
Unit-IV
Statistics in research –Simple, Partial and Multiple correlation – Simple and Multiple
regression – Association of attributes – Index numbers – Time series.
Hypothesis testing – Meaning –Concepts –Procedure for Hypothesis testing – Tests of
hypothesis – Parametric tests – Testing of significance, Mean, Proportions, Variances and
Correlation Coefficiants
-Anova –Chi-square test for association and goodness fir-Important Non-Parametric
tests of hypothesis.
Unit –V
Research on Multi Variate Statistical Technique – Factor analysis – Cluster analysis –
Multiple discriminate analysis – Canonical correlation analysis.
Application of SPSS Package in Business and Social Science Research.
Note : Theory 60% Problem 40%
References
1. Kothari, C.R. ―Research Methodology- Methods and techniques‖, Second Edition, New
Age. International publishers, New Delhi.
2. Shajahan,S.,‖Research methods for management‖, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai.
3. Krishnasamy,O.R.,Ranganatham, M.,‖Research Methodology‖, Himalaya Publishing
House, New Delhi.
4. Gupta,S.P.,‖Statistical methods‖, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi
581
5. Gupta,S.C., : Fundamentals of Statistics‖, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
6. Bhattacharyya, P.K., ―Research Methodology‖, Excel Books, New Delhi.
7. William G.Zikmund, ―Business Research Method‖, Thomson, South-Western.
8. Devendra Thaku, ―Research Methodology in social sciences‖ Deep & Deep Publications,
New Delhi.
9. Santhosh Gupta, ―Research Methodology and statistical techniques‖, Deep & Deep
Publications, New Delhi.
10. Young, P.V., ―Scientific Surveys and Research‖, Asia Publishing House, New York.
PAPER II ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Unit-I
Financial Policy and Strategic planning – Components of financial planning – objectives
– Financial Process.
Unit-II
Capital Structure and Cost of Capital – Capital Structure Analysis – Theories and
Practices – EBIT & EPS Analysis – Leverages – Operating, Financial and composite leverages
– significance of leverage-Cost of Capital-Computation of Cost of Capital-Zero Coupon Bonds –
Significance of Cost of Capital.
Unit-III
Capital Budgeting – Investment Decisions – NDCF and DCF – Appraisal Techniques –
Risk Adjusted Techniques – Limitations.
Unit-IV
Expansion and Financial Restructuring – Mergers and Amalagamations –Corporate
Restructuring – Legal procedure for merger-Determination of SWAPratios – Evaluation of
merger Proposal.
Unit-V
Financing Strategy-Long term & ShorTerm – Internal & External – Liquidity & Profitability
– Debt & Equity – Hybrid Securities.
Note : Theory 60% Problem 40%
References :
1. Berley and Mysers, Principles of Corporation Finance, Mc Graw hill, New York.
2. Jakotia, ―Strategic Financial Management‖, Deep Deep Publications
3. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1995
4. IM pandey, Financial Management, Vikas publication, New Delhi
5. Van Horne, Financial Management and Policy, Prenttice Hall, Delhi.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management, Tata Mc Graw Hill, Delhi.
582
Optional Paper III
a) MARKETING MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
Modern concepts of Marketing – New horizons of Marketing – Marketing System –
Marketing functions – Marketing Environment.
UNIT – II
Consumer Behaviour – Theories and Buying Motives – Marketing Segmentation –
Customer Relationship Marketing (CRM) – Consumerism – Consumer Rights – Consumer
Protection Council – Functions.
UNIT – III
Marketing mix – Product mix – Branding & Packaging – Price Mix – Promotion Mix.
UNIT – IV
Place Mix – Physical Distribution – Channels of Distribution – Role of Physical
Distribution in India – Supply Chain Management – Direct Marketing and Retail Marketing.
UNIT –V
Marketing Research – Marketing Information System – Marketing Finance – Rural
Marketing – E-Marketing – Tele Marketing – Environmental Marketing.
Note : The question paper shall cover 100% theory.
REFERENCES :
1. Gandhi.J.C.‖Marketing‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. William.J.Stanton, ―Fundamentals of Marketing‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Philip Kotter, ―Marketing Management‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
4. Memoria.C.B and Joshi R.L, ―Principles and Practices of Marketing in India‖.
5. Gupta A.P, ―Marketing of Agriculture Goods in India‖.
583
Optional Paper - III
b) HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
Human Resource Management – Meaning – Definition – Importance – Historical
perspective of the personnel function – Scope of Human Resource Development – Functions –
Manpower planning – Executive resources planning – New Trends in HRD. HRD Education –
Corporate application – Evaluation HR Management.
UNIT-II
Human Resource Planning – Steps in the Human Resource Planning Process –
Selection – Recruitment – Training and its types – Principles of Training – Organisation
Development – Performance appraisal – Promotion.
UNIT-III
Role of psychology in HRD and Management – Industrial psychology – Human
Relations, Employees morale – Measures to improve morale – Job Satisfaction – Motivation –
Theories – Leadership – Theories – Group Dynamics.
UNIT-IV
Individual and Personality – Characteristics and Traits of Personality – Personality
Development – Theories of Personality – Learning Importance and Types of Learning. Trade
Unions and worker Satisfaction in Management.
UNIT –V
Human Resources Information System : Resources Accounting Vs Human Resource
Information System – HRM Research and Audit – HRM in changing Environment –
International HRM – Managing Human Resource in Virtual Organizations.
Note : The question paper shall cover 100% theory.
REFERENCES :
1. N.S Gupta, ―Organisation Theory and Behaviour‖, Himalayas Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Rudrabasavaraj, ―Dynamics for Personnel Administration‖ Himalayas Publishing House,
New Delhi.
3. CB Memoria, ―Industrial Relations‖
4. Dale Yoder, ―Personnel Management and Industrial Relations‖
5. Michael, ―Organisational Behaviour & Management Effectiveness‖
6. Fred Luthans, ―Organizational Behaviour‖
7. H.Peeru Mohamed & A Sagadevan, ―Customer Relationship Management‖, Vikas
publication.
584
APPENDIX – AZ122
MANONMANIMAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI
M.Phil.,- ECONOMICS( Affiliated colleges)
with effect from 2013-14
Regulations
Objectives of the course
1. To prepare the students to identify the research issues in economics
especially in the thrust areas.
2. To inculcate the research aptitude among the students.
3. To understand the significance and the methodology of research with the
application of statistics and Mathematics for economic model building with view to
suggesting policies.
Duration of the course:
The course of study shall be based on Semester pattern. The course duration is one
year (Two Semester).
Eligibility for admission:
A candidate who has passed M.A. or M.Sc (Economics, Econometrics,
Mathematical Economics, Applied Economics and Business Economics) with a
minimum of 50 % of marks in the qualifying examination of this university or its
equivalent examination of some other university accepted by the syndicate as
equivalent shall be permitted to join and qualify for the M.Phil degree examination of this
university.
Medium of Instruction and Examination:
The medium of instruction and examination is in English.
Question paper pattern - theory paper (External):
In part A there will be 10 questions each with 2 marks (10 X 2=20), in Part B, five
questions each with 6 marks (either or choice) (5 x 6=30),i.e. one question from each
unit and in Part C five questions each with 10 marks (either or choice) (5x10=50),i.e.,
one question from each unit . The total marks will be 20+30+50=100 marks.
585
Assessment
Paper Title
Research Methodology and Application of Statistical Models
Recent Developmen ts in Economic Theory
Indian Economy :Issues and Developmen t
Dissertation & Viva voce
1. Internal No Passing minimum – (Theory and Dissertation Viva)
2. External Passing minimum -50% (Theory and dissertation work)
3. Total passing minimum-50%
Dissertation shall be evaluated by the external examiner for 150 marks. This will be
treated as external mark (150). The viva voce examination shall carry a maximum of 50
marks. (Guide 25 another examiner 25). This will be treated as internal mark (50).
Project and Viva Voce:
The Project will be based on research oriented topics in theory and /or analytical.
The teachers who will act as supervisors for the projects will float their titles of projects
and one of the same will be allocated to student. On completion of the project at the end
of the second semester, the student will have to submit the project report in the form of
a dissertation. The end semester project and viva- voce examinations shall consist of an
external evaluation by an external examiner and an internal examiner of the dissertation
and a comprehensive viva- voce. The evaluation of dissertation will carry 150 marks
(external) and the comprehensive viva-voce will carry the remaining 50 marks (internal)
as mentioned in the assessment procedure.
586
S.N Se o m.
1. I
2. I
3. II
4. II
Teachin Econom Credi g hours y hours t
- 3 8
- 3 8
- 3 8
- - 16
Int. Ext.
25 75
25 75
25 75
50 150
Total
100
100
100
200
The Dissertation shall be submitted on or before 31st of August every year and Viva
voce should be conducted by 30th September.
M.Phil Economics (Affiliated College)
(With Effect from 2013 -2014)
Paper - I
Research Methodology and Application of Statistical Models
UNIT –I
Meaning, objectives and significance of research – Theory and Fact - Scientific
methods – Types of research – Formulation of research problem – Research design –
Formulation of hypothesis –Sources of data – Methods of data collection – Sampling
design – Pilot study and pre- testing – Presentation of data – Spread sheet and its
uses.
UNIT – II
Correlation, regression – Linear, simple and multiple regression – ANOVA. Multi –
collinearity - Autocorrelation – Hetroscedasticity – Application of dummy variables.
UNIT – III
Time-series; Trend, Seasonality, Cyclicity and Stationarity. ARIMA models - Analysis of
Inequality, Gini co-efficient.
UNIT – IV
Testing of Hypothesis – Types of Errors – Parametric and Non-parametric tests: ―t‖ Test
– ―z‖ Test –― f ― Test – Chi-square Test – Scaling techniques .
UNIT – V
Thesis and Report writing – Different stages in writing report – Layout of the research
report - Types – Precautions for writing research reports – Ethical issues in Research –
Problems of Inference in Non-experimental sciences – Interpretation of Statistical
results – Foot notes – Bibliography.
References
1. C.R.Kothari- Research Methodology, method and techniques – Willy Eastern Ltd.,
1988.
2. A.Koutsoyiannis – Theory of Econometrics –An Introductory exposition of
econometrics methods – Macmillan Ltd., 1987.
587
3. M.Cohen And E.Nagal – An Introduction to logic and scientific method, New York,
1962.
4. William J. Goode and Paul k Hatt - Methods in Social Research, 1972.
5. Pauling V.Young Scientific Social Survey‘s and research, practice Hall – (Dorsey
Press),. New York.
6. Wonnacott and Wonnacott – Econometrics.
7. Seltiz et al: Research methods in Social Sciences.
8. Mark, Blounk Economic methodology.
9. Caldwell; Beyard position.
10. Good, W.J. and P.F.Hatt, Methods in social research, Mc Grw Hill book company.
PAPER - II
Recent Developments in Economic Theory
UNIT-I: Introduction
Advances in Micro economics - Recent Developments in Theory of market
demand - The production function of a multi product firm- A critique of the Neo-classical
Theory of the firm- The marginalist controversy- Behavioural theory of the firm.
UNIT –II: Information Market Failure and the role of Government
General Equilibrium and Economic Efficiency - Two interdependent Markets -
Moving to general equilibrium - The attainment of General Equilibrium Efficiency and
Exchange- The advantage of Trade - The Edgeworth Box Diagram-Efficient allocations -
The contract Curve –Consumer equilibrium in a competitive Market – The economic
efficiency of competitive markets. Equity and Efficiency - The utility possibilities frontier
– Equity and perfect competition efficiency in Production – Production- The Edgeworth
Box- Input Efficiency- producer Equilibrium in a competitive input market- The
production Possibilities Frontier- Output Efficiency – Efficiency in Output markets.
UNIT –III: Macro Economics
Monetarism versus Keynesianism (debate) - New Classical Economics (Rational
Expectations Hypothesis & Real Business Cycle Theory) – New Keynesian Counter
revolution (Keynesian Renaissance) – Nominal and real Wage and price rigidities.
588
UNIT IV: Theories of Development Economics
Modern Economic Growth Theory- Endogenous growth under
development as Co-ordination failure – Need for big Push – The Doctorine of balanced
growth- Unbalanced growth concept- Dualistic Theories – Dr. J.H.Bocke‘s Social
Dualism – Higgin‘s Technological Dualism.
UNIT V: International Economics
Reformulation of Ricardian Theory of International Trade Multi-Country and Multi
Commodity Model – Works of Samuelson, R.W.Jones and Takayama. Kravis Theory-
Linders Theory- Posner‘s Technological gap theory- Vernon‘s Product Cycle Theory-
Kennan‘s Theory of Human Capital.
Reference
1. Koutsoyiannis A., Modern Micro Economics, Oxford University Press, 2000.
2. Dominic Salvatore, Micro Economic Theory Schaum‘s Outline Series, Mc
Graw Hillm, 1992.
3. Robert S. Pindyck, et.al, Micro Economics, Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Monkar, V.G., Business Economics, Macmillan, 1992.
5. Thomas F. Dernburg, Macro Economics, Mc Graw Hill International Edition,
1985.
6. Rudiger Dornbusch, Stanley Fischer & Richard Startz., Macro
Economics(2002) Tata Macrow Hills Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
7. Edward Shapiro, Macro Economic Analysis (2004) Galgotia Publishing Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
8. Froyen R.T., Macro Economics(1983)
9. Economic Development: Problems, Principles and Policies Revised Edition
Benjamin Higgene.
10. M.L.Jhingan, The Economics of Development and Planning, VRINDA
Publications Pvt. Ltd.
11. A.Takayama-International Trade.
12. J.Viner- Studies in the Theories of International Trade.
13. Dorfman, Samuelson and Solow- Linear Programming and Economic
Analysis.
14. H.R.Heller- International Trade- Theory and Empirical Evidence.
589
15. R.W.Jones – International Trade: Essays in Theory.
16. Chipman, J.S.–A survey of the Theory of International Trade ( Econometric a,
Vol.33)
17. Hariharan, S.V. – Comparative Cost Theory through Linear Programming.
18. William Loreks- Comparative Economic System.
19. Morris Borston- Comparative Economic System.
Paper - III
Indian Economy: Issues and Development
Unit I: Indian Economy: Structure- Trends, Globalisation; Employment opportunities-
Out Sourcing; threats-Global Competition, dumping, Recent Financial Crisis in western
countries- Its Impact on India- Economic Growth during globalised era
Unit-II: Issues in Human Resources Development- Poverty and Unemployment-
Inequalities; Personal and regional-Gender issues in the context of Indian Economic
development- Issues in Education and health care- Human capital and Indian Economic
Development.
Unit III: Environmental Issues – Air, Water and land pollution in India – Global
Environmental degradation –Issues related to pollution abatements- Poverty and
environmental issues- Sustainable Development in India
Unit IV: Inflation, value of rupee and trade cycle-Volatility in stock market- Currency
convertibility – Current account and capital account- Exports and Imports
Unit V: WTO: Compliances and requirements- Growth of International Trade after
WTO
References
1. Human Development Report, UNDP.
2. Indian Development Report, OUP, Delhi.
3. A.K. Bagchi (1989), The Political Economy of Underdevelopment, Orient
Longman, Delhi.
4. Ruddar Datt and K.P.M Sunderam (2006) Indian Economy, S.Chand and Co.,
New Delhi.
5. Dreze, J and A.K.Sen (1993), India: Economic development and Social
Opportunity, Oxford University Press.
590
6. C.T.Kurien (1992) , Global Capitalism and Indian Economy, Orient Longman
Press.
7. C.P.Chandrasekhar and Jayati Ghose, (2002), The Market that Failed, Left Word
Press, New Delhi.
8. G.Karunanithi (Ed) Social Values and Implications, M.S.University Press, 2003.
9. Reserve Bank of India. Reports on Currency and Finance 2000-01.
591
APPENDIX – AZ123
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI -12
M. Phil. BOTANY
(With effect from 2013 onwards)
COURSE PATTERN
Duration of the course:
The duration of M. Phil. Botany course shall be of one year consisting of two
Semesters. Semester - I
Paper 1. Research Methodology
Paper 2. Advances in Plant Science
(Papers 1 and 2 shall be common to all the students admitted to the programme) Semester - II
Paper 3. Special Paper
A student can choose any one of the following as special paper:
a. Biodiversity and Systematics
b. Plant Biotechnology
c. Environmental Science
d. Phytochemistry and Pharmacognosy
4. Dissertation: Submission and Viva-Voce
(The project is based on original research and application oriented topics. It is
mandatory for every student to submit a dissertation at the end of second
semester.
592
I 1 Research Methodology 6 6 3 15 3 100
I 2 Advances in Plant 6 6 3 15 3 100
Science
II 3 Special Paper 6 6 3 15 3 100
a. Biodiversity and
Systematics.
b. Plant Biotechnology.
c. Environmental Science
d. Phytochemistry and
Pharmacognosy
II Dissertation and Viva 15 200 Voce
(150 for Evaluation 50 for Viva-voce)
Total Marks 500
Syllabus: Each paper (Paper 1, 2 and 3) consists of five units.
Scheme of Examination and Question paper pattern
Written Examination:
The written examination for paper 1 & 2 will be conducted at the end of first semester.
Paper 3 (Special paper) will be conducted at the end of second semester. The written
examination is for 100 marks and the minimum for pass percentage is 50 in every
paper.
Dissertation and Viva-voce:
Submission
Candidates should submit the dissertations at the end of the second semester.
The dissertation shall contain a maximum of 150 pages (excluding graphs, tables,
figures and references). The title of the dissertation should be explicit and define the
593
major objective of the research work without any duplication of earlier work done in this
University or any other University. Valuation
The dissertation will be valued by an external examiner. The evaluation will carry
150 marks. This will be treated as External mark (150 passing Min. 75 marks). The
Viva-voce examination shall carry a maximum of 50 marks – External Examiner (25)
and Internal examiner (25). This will be treated as Internal mark (50) (passing min. 25
marks). Question paper pattern for all papers (1 – 3). Section Type of questions
A Short answers, within 100 words. (Two
questions from each unit)
B Internal choice questions (One question from each unit)
C Internal choice questions (One question from each unit)
Total
Eligibility for Admission
A candidate who has qualified for the Master‘s Degree in Botany/Plant Biology
and Plant Biotechnology/ Biology/Life sciences of this University with a minimum of 55%
or from any other University recognized by the Manonmaniam Sundaranar University
shall be eligible for the admission.
SC/ST students with 50% of minimum marks are eligible.
Qualification norms for Teaching and Guiding M. Phil. Students
Any regular teaching faculty member can be a guide (for project work) who is expected
to possess a Ph. D. degree in Botany/Plant Biology and Plant Biotechnology or a
person with M. Phil. degree in the above subjects with 3 years of teaching experience at
the P.G. Level and publication of one research paper in a reputed journal in the last
three years. A faculty can guide only A MAXIMUM OF FOUR CANDIDATES FOR M.
Phil AT A TIME.
594
No. of questions 2 × 5 = 10
1 × 5 = 5
1 × 5 = 5
Marks
10 × 2 = 20
5 × 6 = 30
5 × 10 = 50
100
SYLLABUS
Semester-1
Paper-I RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Unit I Microscopic techniques
Microscopy-principles and applications. Properties of electromagnetic radiation- Light,
Phase contrast and Fluorescent microscopy. Calibration and Microscopic
Measurements. Electron Microscopy-Principles and applications of TEM and SEM-
Preparation of materials for Electron Microscope. Unit II Analytical Methods
Spectroscopic techniques- UV and Visible, Fluorescence, IR, NMR, AAS, AES and
AFM. Elect rochemica l techniques- Pr inc ip les- Measurement of pH and
preparat ion of b io logica l buf fers, oxygen e lect rode, b iosensors and
b ioch ips. Radioisotope techniques-radioactivity, atomic stability and radiation-
radiation decay. Detection and measurement of radioactivity and applications of GM
and Scintillation Counter-labelling of biological molecules and autoradiography. Unit III Separation techniques
Chromatography- Principles and applications-Paper, Thin layer, Column, GC, GLC,
HPLC, MS. Centrifugation-Principles and types-preparative and general purpose
centrifuges-ultracentrifugation-types-analytical ultracentrifuges.
Electrophoretic techniques-Principles and construction of horizontal and vertical
electrophoresis-Buffers and electrolytic separation- detection by staining and estimation
of electrophorograms by transilluminator and gel doc.
Molecular techniques: PCR based-RFLP, RAPD, AFLP, SSR, blotting techniques.
Unit IV Statistical Methods
Population and sampling, data collection, analysis and graphical representation.
Measures of Central Tendency, Measures of Dispersion-Standard Deviation,
Correlation and Regression analysis, Probability -normal and binomial distribution.
Statistical testing: F-test, t-test and chi-square test. Experimental design, ANOVA one
way and two way analysis, statistical softwares- MS Excel and SPSS.
595
Unit V Documentation of Research
Research- Meaning - Role of a researcher – Hypothesis - Methods-Approaches
Objectives. Literature and Reference collection. Role of libraries in research, virtual
libraries. Internet- Worldwide web-searching and browsing tools- e-journals and e-
books. Manuscript preparation- Citation and Proof correction, Dissertation- components
of a dissertation-tables, figures, footnote, discussion. Role of Supervisors/Guides in
research. Reference Books:
Bryan C Williams and Keith Wilson 1983, A biologist‘s guide to practical techniques of
Practical Biochemistry Second edition. Edward Arnold Publications.
David Plummer, 1988. An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, New Delhi.
Ed Metcalfe; Atomic Absorption and Emission Spectroscopy, John Wiley and Sons.
George Casella and Roger L. Berger, 2003. Statistical Inference II Ed. Duxbury
Advanced Series, Thomson Press.
Introduction to Gene cloning – Maniatis, Sambrook.
Introduction to practical molecular Biology – Philippa D. Dabre
Jayaraman, J,1985. Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
Johansen, M., 1940. Plant Microtechnique, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New
Delhi.
Keith Wilson and John Walker., 2000. Practical biochemistry V Edition Cambridge
Universities Press, London.
Khan and Khan. 1994. Biostatistics. Vikas Publising House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
PCR Technology – Ehrlich.
Plant Biotechnology – Manual – Roberts.
Practical Biochemistry – Wilson and Walker.
Research techniques in biological sciences I Ed. G.S.Sandhu. Anmol publications, New
Delhi. 1990.
Stock, R and Rice, C.B. F., 1980. Chromatographic methods, Chapman and Hall Ltd.
London.
596
Panse and Sukhatme. 1992. Statistical Methods for Agricultural workers. ICAR, New
Delhi.
Steel and Torrie, 1986. Principles and Procedures of Statistics with special reference to
Biological Sciences.
Semester-1
Paper-II. ADVANCES IN PLANT SCIENCE
UNIT I : Angiosperm Phylogeny and cladistics - Plesiomorphous and apomorphous
characters; homologous and analogous characters; homoplassy; monophyly, polyphyly
and paraphyly. Character coding. Constructing of cladograms; polarity and rooting.
Principle of parsimony. Angiosperm phylogeny group (APG) - A detailed study of APG -
III Classification.
UNIT II: Microtomy and Histochemistry, single staining and double staining procedures.
Histochemical analysis of plant tissues - Analysis of plant metabolites through
appropriate staining methods. Preparation of permanent slides. Photomicrography,
Digital image Analysis and processing.
UNIT III: Climate change – causes, effects and balanced adaptations in plants. Co2
increase and photo synthesis, UV –β Radiation and plant production. Sea level
increase, change in soil pH, acidity, alkalinity and salinity and adaptation of marshy
plants and Saline and drought tolerance in plants.
UNIT IV: GM crops, transgenic plants - Insect resistant Plants-Bt cotton, Bt Brinjal,
golden rice, plants as bioreactors. Crop genomes – rice, maize.
UNIT V: Bioethics – Ethics in science, interventions, Animal minds, human morals. Bio
safety containments and implementation. Research ethics- conflict of interest, code of
conduct, peer review and theories if ethics. Patenting – Types, filing procedures,
obtaining patents. Patent rights – wild cultivated and transgenic plants. Intellectual
property rights – copy rights of molecular structures plant genomic resources (PGR) –
ethical issues, plant breeder‘s rights (PBR) and farmer‘s rights.
597
References:
CRONQUIST, A. 1968. The Evolution and Classification of Flowering Plants. Houghton
Mifflin. Boston.
DAVIS, P.H., AND V.H. HEYWOOD. 1965. Principles of Angiosperm Taxonomy. Oliver &
Boyd. Edinburgh.
JUDD, W. S, C. S. CAMPBELL, E. A, KELLOG, P. F. STEVENS AND N. J. DONOGHUE.
2008. Plant Systematics – A phylogenetic approach. 3rd edition. Sinauer Associates,
Inc, Massachusetts, USA
MABBERLEY, D.J. 2008. Mabberley's Plant-Book, A portable dictionary of plants, their
classification and uses. 3rd edition. Cambridge University Press, United Kingdom
SOLTIS, D. E., P. S. SOLTIS, P. K. ENDRESS AND M. W. CHASE.2005. Phylogeny and
Evolution of Angiosperms. Sinauer Associates, Inc, Massachusetts, USA.
SIMPSON, M. G. 2010. Plant Systematics. Elsevier Academic Press, California, USA.
SUBRAMANIAM, N.S. 1995. Modern Plant Taxonomy. Vikas Publishing House. New
Delhi.
TAKHTAJAN, A. 1997. Diversity and Classification of Flowering Plants. Bishen Singh and
Mahendra pal Singh, Dehra Dun, India.
Henry, R.J. 1997. Practical Application of Plant Molecular Biology. Chapman & Hall,
London, USA.
Old, R.W. and Primrose, S.B. 1989. Principle of gene manipulation. Blackwell Scientific
publications, Oxford, U.K.
Primrose, S.B. 1995. Principles of Genome Analysis. Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, UK.
Stephen Webster, 2003. Thinking about Biology. Cambridge University Press,
Cmabridge, New York.
598
Semester - II
Special Paper – 1. BIODIVERSITY AND BIOSYSTEMATICS Unit I
Biodiversity – concept and definition, scope and constraints. Genetic diversity – Nature
and origin of genetic variations – Measurements by molecular marker techniques.
Determinants of genetic diversity – Species inventory – Species diversity indices -
Centers of species diversity – Future of species diversity studies. Unit II
Ecosystem diversity – Measuring ecosystem diversity – types and their importance.
Agrobiodiversity - Origin and evolution of cultivated species diversity – Diversity in
domesticated species - Values and uses of biodiversity – Valuation of biodiversity. Unit III
Loss of biodiversity - Causes and factors. Conservation of biodiversity - in- situ and ex-
situ. Management of plant biodiversity – organizations and methodologies –
Biodiversity legislation and convention –IUCN, CITES, TRIPS, GATT, CPD -
Biodiversity awareness programmes. Unit IV
Basic components and aims of Systematics – Plant classification (Artificial, Natural, and
Phylogenetic). ICBN – rules, principles, and role- Draft Biocode –process of plant
identification. Unit V
Plant Systematics – Modern trends – Taxonomy and ecology, Cytotaxonomy –
Numerical taxonomy – Chemotaxonomy – Serotaxonomy – Computerized Systematics
– reproductive biology – Biodiversity Databases - applications.
599
Reference Books
Cole, A.J. 1969. Numerical Taxonomy, Academic Press, London
Davis, P.H. and Heywood, V. H. 1973, Principles of Angiosperms Taxonomy, Robert E.
Kreiger Pub.co., New York.
Grant, W.E. 1984. Plant Biosystematics. Academic Press London.
Heywood, V.H. and Moore, D.M. 1984. Current Concepts in Plant Taxonomy. Academic
Press, London.
Jones, A.D. and Wilbins, A.D. 1971.Variations and Adaptations in Plant Species.
Hiemand & Co. Educational Books Ltd. London.
Jones, S.B.Jr. and Luchsinger, A.E. 1986. Plant Systematics (2nd edition ). McGraw Hill
Book CO., New York.
Nordenstam, B., EI Gazaly, G. and Kassas, M. 2000 Plant Systematics for 21st Century.
Portlant Press Ltd., London.
Radford, A.E. 1986. Fundamentals of Plant Systematics. Harper & Row Publications,
USA.
Stace, C.A.1989. Plant Taxonomy and Biosysteinatics (2nd edition) Edward Arnold Ltd.,
London.
Woodland, D.W. 1991 . Contemporary Plant Systematics. Prentice Hall. New Jersey.
Naik, V.N. 1982 Taxonomy of Angiosperms – Tata MaGraw Hill Publishing company
limited.
Sivarajan, V.V. 1996 Introduction to the Principles of Plant Taxonomy – Oxford & IBH
Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi.
Odum, E.P 1983, Basic Ecology, CBS College Publishing.
Odum, E.P 1996, Fundamentals of Ecology, Nataraj Publishers, New Delhi.
Sinha, R.K., & Dalbir Singh., 1997, Global Biodiversity, INA Shree Publishers, Jaipur.
Heywood, V.H. and R.T. Watson 1995, Global Biodiversity assessment, Cambridge,
University Press
Sambamurty, A. V. S. S. 2005 Taxonomy of Angiosperms , I.K.International Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi.
Cabriel Melchias 2001 Biodiversity and conservation, Oxford Publishing Co. Ltd. New
Delhi.
600
Asish Ghosh 2007 Environment: Issues and conservation, Oxford Publishing Co. Ltd.
New Delhi.
Pandey, B.N. and Kulkarni, G.K. 2006 Biodiversity and Environment A.P.H.Publishing
Corporation New Delhi.
NAYAR, M.P., 1996. "Hot Spots" of Endemic plants of India, Nepal and Bhutan. Tropical Botanic Garden and Research Institute, Thiruvananthapuram, India.
GROOMBRIDGE, B, (Ed.). 1992. Global Biodiversity: Status of The Earth's Living
Resources. Chapman and Hall. London. DOBSON, A.P.1996. Conservation and Biodiversity. Scientific American Library. New York, U.S.A.
Semester –II Special Paper II
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I : Salient features of cloning vectors – types- plasmids – cosmids – phagemids –
YAC – BAC – expression vectors – shuttle vectors – enzymes in genetic engineering –
role of restriction enzymes – identification of target gene – methods – integration of
target gene in to vector, gene libraries – synthesis of genes – gene transfer methods –
physical and chemical – selection of recombinants – methods – types and role of
marker genes- DNA sequencing – expression of target gene in host cells – applications
of genetic engineering in medicine and industries.
Unit II: Structure and organization of Ti plasmids – molecular mechanism of t- DNA
transfer – selection of recombinant cells – micropropagation- transgenic plant for quality
improvement- herbicide pescide, pest, disease and –stress resistance –gene silencing
and co suppression-RNA I technology-immunotherapeutic drugs-molecular forming
.Role of RFLP in plant breeding-RAPD-PCR,SSR in crop improvement-disease
diagnosis and control.
Unit III: Totipotency-cell differentiation-dedifferentiation and sterilization. Explant
selection and sterilization. Types of culture-solid and suspension- callus production-
multiplication and micro propagation- production of secondary metabolites –
biotransformation. Haploid production – protoplast isolation, fusion and regeneration-
601
cryopreservation- somaclonal variation – germplasm storage and cryopreservation –
application of tissue culture in crop improvement.
Unit IV: Proteomics-principals, usage and importance- genomics- mapping of
prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomics – construction of linkage maps with molecular
markers – molecular maps of prokaryotes – yeast – arabdiopsis - rice human – gene
location in DNA sequences – functional genomics – computer analysis – experimental
analysis patterns of gene expression – gene expression assay – DNA chip technology.
Unit V: Bioinformatics – tools – software – sequence database searching – applications
– pairwise alignment – multiple sequence analysis – phylogenetic analysis – molecular
visualization – protein structure prediction – analysis of genetic variability – POPGENE.
References:
Butenko, R.G. 2000. Plant Cell Culture. University Press of Pacific.
Colin Raltedge and Bjorn Kristiansen. 2001. Basic biotechnology. Cambridge
University press, New Delhi.
Collins, H.A. and Edwards, S. 1998. Plant Cell Culture. Bios Scientific Publishers,
Oxford, UK.
Dixon, R.A. (Ed) 1987. Plant Cell Culture: A Practical Approach. IRL Press, Oxford.
Friefelder, D. 1985. Molecular Biology. Jones and Barlett Publishers, Boston, USA.
Gelvin, S.B. and schilperoot, R.A. (Eds) 1994. Plant Molecular Biology Manual, 2nd
edition, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, the Netherlands.
George, E.F. 1993. Plant Propagation by Tissue Culture. Part 1. The Technology,
2nd edition. Exegetics Ltd., Edington, UK.
George, E.F. 1993. Plant Propagation by Tissue Culture. Part 2. The Technology,
2nd edition. Exegetics Ltd., Edington, UK.
Glick, B.R. and Thompson, J.E. 1993. Methods in Plant Molecular Biology And
Biotechnology. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida.
Glover, D.M. and Hames, B.D. (eds), 1995. DNA cloning 1: A Practical Approach;
Core Techniques, 2nd edition PAS, IRL press at Oxford University Press,
Oxford.
602
Hackett, P.B.., Fuchs, J.A. and Messing, J.W. 1988. An Introduction to Recombinant
DNA Techniques: Basic Experiments in Gene Manipulation. The
Benjamin/ Cummings Publishing Co., Inc Menlo Park, California.
Hall, R.d. (Ed). 1999. Plant Cell Culture Protocols. Humana Press, Inc., New Jersey,
USA.
Lewin, B. 2006. Genes VIII, Oxford University Press, New York.
Mani K, and N. Vijayarajan. 2003. Bioinformatics. Kalaikathir Achchagam.
Mani K, and N. Vijayarajan. 2005. Bioinformatics – A Practical approach, Aparna
Publication, Coimbatore.
Old, R.W primrose , S. B. 1989. Principle of gene manipulation. Blackwell Scientific
publication, London.
Shaw, C.H. (Ed) 1988. Plant Molecular Biology: A Practical Approach. IRL Press,
Oxford.
Smith, R.H. 2000. Plant Tissue Culture: Techniques And Experiments. Academic
Press, New York.
Watson, J.D et al., 1987. Cell and molecular biology. John Wiley publications, New
york.
Semester – II
Special paper II - ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Unit I : Importance of environmental studies and the necessity of public awareness,
component of the environment, atmosphere or water, structure and properties of water,
Biogeo chemical cycles, lithosphere, formation of soil types – the living component of
the biosphere – appearance of free oxygen on our planet – appearance of man, growth
of human population.
Unit II: Microbial inoculants, rhizobium, azosprillum, phosphor bacterium, nitrogen
fixation, cyanobacterial inoculants – algalization – biofertilizers – crop responses- mass
cultivation of azolla – frankia induced inoculation – mycorrizhae as a biofertilizers –
production of biofertilizers- advantages.
603
Unit III: Introduction - bioremediation – insitu and exsitu bioremediation- industrial waste
– xenobiotics- biofiltration – utilization of sewage and agrowaste – microbial leaching –
hazards of environmental engineering. Environmental pollution – water; air; controls.
Unit IV: Biomass and single cell protein – biopesticides algal and fungal – biological
control of plant pathogens – insecticides – biological control of weeds. Primary and
secondary metabolites.
UNIT V: Bioenergy – energy plantations – social forestry- biodiesel plants- biogas
production – biofules- hydrogen; growth and association and free living microorganisms;
disposal of farm water; possible hazards and monitoring interspecific gene transfer and
evolutionary significances.
References
Alan Wellburn 1988, Air Pollution and Acid Rain – The Biological Impact, Longman
Scientific and Technical, Singapore.
Begon M., J.L. Harper., C.R. Townsend 1990, Blackwell scientific publications, Oxford.
Cunningham, W.P & B W Saigo 1999, Environmental Science, The Mcgraw Hill
companies, New Delhi.
Harrison R Max. 1990, Pollution Causes, Effect And Control, Royal society of chemistry,
Great Britain.
Heywood V.H. and R.T. Watson 1995. Global biodiversity assessment, Cambridge
University Press.
Khan T.I and Y.S Shishodia 1998, Environment And Metal Pollution , ABD publishers,
Jaipur.
Kumar H. D. 1994, General Ecology, Vikas Publishing, New Delhi
Mason C.F 1981. Biology of Fresh Water, Longman, London.
Mishra S R and D N Saxena 1992, Aquatic ecology, efficient offset printers, New Delhi.
Odum E.P 1996. Fundamentala of ecology, Nataraj publishers, New Delhi.
Sinha , R.K., & Dalbir singh., 1997, Global Biodiversity. INA shree publishers, Jaipur.
Trivedi P R , P L sharma & K N Sudarshan 1994, Natural Environment And Constitution
Of India, efficient offset printers, New Delhi.
604
Varshney C.K 1989, Water Pollution And Management , S .P printers, Noida.
John E Smith , biotechnology Cambridge university press.
Jogdand S .N Advances In Biotechnology , Himalaya Pub. House .
Chhatwal G.R. 1998, Text Book of Biotechnology- Anmol Pub.
Semester-II
Special paper - IV PHYTOCHEMISTRY AND PHARMACOGNOSY
Unit I : Plant Therapeutics-Definition-Aim and scope-History-Importance, Classification
of crude drugs - morphological, taxonomical, therapeutic, and chemical. Collection and
processing of crude drugs-drug evaluation-anatomical physico-chemical and chemical
screening - WHO guidelines - standardizations of drugs - drug adulteration.
Unit II : Medicinal plant wealth of India. Conservation of medicinal plants in-situ and ex-
situ. Present status and future prospects of medicinal crops. Export and import of
medicinal plants by India, prospects and constraints of medicinal plant based industries.
Phytopharmaceuticals-Drugs of plant origin-drugs of mineral origin-maerine drugs-
antibacterial and anti viral drugs.
Unit III : Genetic improvement of medicinal plants through Bio-technology and Genetic
engineering. Applications of in-vitro culture methods in drug production. Applications of
molecular techniques in herbal research. IPR and medicinal plants.
Unit IV: Extraction, purification and structural elucidation of phytopharmaceuticals-
infusion, Decoction, digestion maceration, percolation, successive extraction,
supercritical fluid extraction, steam distillation, hyphenated techniques. Extraction
procedures for active principles-Withaonalides, Hyoscyamine and Vinplastine.
Extraction methods of essential oils.
605
Unit V: Secondary metabolites- definition, classification-alkaloids, terpenoids,
glycosides,resins and volatile oils- properties - qualitative and quantitative analysis- role
in pharmacology. Natural dyes-extraction of Indigo - uses. Reference Books
Kokate, C.K. Purohit, A.P. and S.R. Gokhale (2004) Pharmacognosy, Nirali Prakashan
Publications, Pune
Evans, W.C. Pharmacognosy 1987 Harcourt Brace &Company Asia Pvt.Ltd.,
Faroogi, A.A and Sreeramu, B.S.2001 Cultivation of Medicinal and Aromatic Crops,
Universities press.
Agarwal, S.S and M.Paridhavi. 2007 Crude Drug Technology. Universities Press,
Hyderabad
Gurdeep Chatwal 1983. Organic Chemistry of Natural Products. Himalaya Publishing
house, Mumbai.
Tewari, K.S., Vishnoi, N.K., Mehrotra, S.N 1998 Text book Of Organic Chemistry. Vikas
Publishing House Ltd.,
Anonymous, 1948-1976.The Wealth of India 11 Vols.
Bhattacharjee,S. K.2004. Handbook on medicinal plants, Pointer publishers. Jaipur
Horticulture college, TNAU, 2002. Handbook on Cultivation of medicinal plants. TNAU
Publishers.
Joshi, S.G 2000. Medicinal plants, Oxford and IBH Company Private Ltd. New Delhi.
Sharma, P. 2000. Database on medicinal plants used in Ayurveda. Ministry of health
and family welfare.
Srivastava, A.K.2006 Medicinal plants, International Book Publishers, Dehradun.
Yoganarasimhan, S.N.2000. Medicinal plants of India, Vol2. Tamilnadu, Interline
Publishing Private Ltd. Bangalore, Dehradun and Michigan.
606
APPENDIX – AZ124
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
M.PHIL MICROBIOLOGY
(FOR COLLEGES) (For those who join the course from the academic year 2013 – 2014 onwards)
Scheme of Examination Sl. Paper of Title Teachin Credi Int Ext. Tota No g hours t l
1 I Research Methodology 3 8 25 75 100
2 II Applied Microbiology 3 8 25 75 100
3 III Microbial Biotechnology 3 8 25 75 100
4. II Project Work* Related to - 16 50 150 200
Microbiology
1. Internal No passing minimum – (Theory and Dissertating)
2. External passing minimum – 50% (Theory and Dissertation works)
3. Total Passing minimum – 50%
Dissertation shall be evaluated by the external examiner for 150 marks.
This will be treated as external mark (150). The vivavoce examination shall carry
a maximum of 50 marks. (Guide 25 another examiner 25). This will be treated
as Internal mark (50)
Eligibility Norms
M.Sc in Microbiology
M.Sc / Post Graduate Course in Industrial Microbiology / Applied Microbiology
607
Syllabus For M.Phil., MICROBIOLOGY
First Semester
Paper I – Research Methodology
Paper II – Applied Microbiology
Second Semester
Paper III – Microbial Biotechnology
Research Project Work
M.Phil. Microbiology
Paper I – Research Methodology
Unit 1: Microscopy – Working principles and Biological applications of light,
phase contrast, fluorescent, scanning and Transmission Electron
Mircrospy – fixation and staining methods.
Unit 2: Protein separation methods – Column Chromatography – SDS-
PAGE, Gel filtration, Ion-exchange and Affinity Chromatography,
Thin-layer and Gas chromatography, High Performance
Liquid(HPLC) Chromatography.
Unit 3: Recombinant DNA technology – sequencing of proteins and nucleic
acids, Southern, Northern and Western blotting techniques,
polymerase Chain Reaction, Methods for measuring nucleic acids
(DNA and RNA).
Unit 4: Immunological techniques – Antigen – Antibody reaction,
Predestination grouping, Estimation of serum components.
608
Unit 5: Statistical methods employed in Research – Collection of data,
standard deviation, correlation and regression, Co-efficient of
variation, Standard error, Analysis of variance – Single and multiple
test of statistical significance, Student‘s t-test.
References:
1. Practical Biochemistry - Principles and Techniques, Keith Wilson
and John Walker
2. Cell and Molecular Biology - Concepts and experiments – Gerald Karp
3. Cell Biology (Vol. I-IV) - Julio E. Celis
4. Bio-statistical analysis - Zar, J.H.
5. Cell and Molecular Biology - De alberts
6. Molecular Cell Biology - Bruce albrts
7. Genes. V - Benjamin lewin
8. Biotechnology-Theory and - Jack, G. Chirikjain
Techniques
9. Hawks Physiological - Ozar
10. Practical Biochemistry - Plummer.
Paper II – Applied Microbiology
Unit 1 : Microbial Products : Primary and Secondary metabolites –
Enzymes (Analyse and Protease) – Organic acids (Lactic Acid
and Vinegar) – Amino acids (L-Lysine, L – Glutamic acid) –
Production of antiobiotics Pencillin and streptomycin) vitamins
B12, riboflavin) Bevarages (Beer, wine)
609
Unit 2 : Microbiology of foods – Food spoilage, Preservation and
contamination – Signal cell protein, production and application
Unit 3 : Probiotic microbes – beneficial microbes and their characteristics,
probiotic microbes in human and animal nutrition, probiotic
microbes in immune modulation, production of probiotic
microbes.
Unit 4 : Biofertilizers – Isolation, Identification and mass culture –
Rhizobium, Azotobacter – Azospirillum – Phosphate Solubilizing
bacteria, BGA and Azolla.
Unit 5 : Bioremediation – Biodegradation of petroleum hydrocarbons –
Applicability of bioremediation, Biostimulation, Bioaugmentaiton,
Application of bioremediation in various contaminants and sites.
References
1. Manual of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology – II Edn. – By Arnold
L. Demain and Julian E. Davis (1999)
2. Fundamentals of Microbiology – By I. Edward Alcamo (2000)
3. Microbiology Fundamentals and Applications – By S.S. Purohit (2001)
4. Microbiology – An Introduction – By Barry L. Batzing (2001)
5. Microbiology – An Introduction – 6th Edn – By Tortora, Funke and Case.
6. Text Books of Microbiology – By D.R. Arora (1994)
7. A Text Book of Biotechnology – By R.C. Dubey
610
Paper III – Microbial Biotechnology
Unit 1 : DNA Technology – Maxum Gilbert, Di-deoxy and automation
methods – Restriction endouclears – Restriction maps – DNA
finger printing – RFLP – RAPD.
Unit II : Cloning vectors – Plasmids – Properties of Plasmids, isolation,
cosmids and bacteriophages – Ligation: DNA Ligases, ligation
fragments with cohesive ends and blunt ends – Homopolymer
tailing – cloning stratergies – shotgun methods – gene libraries –
isolation of poly MRNA, Synthesis of CDNA, Cloning of CDNA in
bacteria.
Unit III Prokaryotic transcription- RNA polym~rase, subunit structure,
sigma factor - E.coli promoters. General & Specific transcription
factors — regulatory elements & mechanism of transcription
regulation — Trarscriptional & Post transcriptional gene splicing.
Prokaryotic translation: mechanism of Initiation, Elongation &
Termination - Regulation of translation — Co and post —
Translational modifications of proteins
Unit IV : Expression system and their application in E.~oli, streptomyces,
yeast, Baculovirus as cloning hosts. Expression in E. coli -The
GAL system – Microarrays – Antisense and RNA interference
(RNAi)
Unit V : Genetically engineered microbes & their applications in various
fields. Use of genetically modified organisms, their release in the
environment, moral & ethical issues in biotechnology, cloning
safety issues with GMC‘ DNA guidelines (Bioethical), National &
international guidelines, experimental protocols approval
611
Reference Books:
1. Analysis of Genes and Genomes: Richard J. Reece; University of
Manchester, UK. John Wiley & Sons, Ltd
2. Genes VIII Benjamin Lewis
3. Molecular Biology of the Gene (4th Edition), J. D. Watson, N.H. Hopnins, J.
W. Roberts J. A., Steitz and A.M. Weiner, The Benjamin I Cummings
Publications. Co.!California, 1987.
4. Principles of gene manipulations by RN old 7 S.B. Primrose (1994)
Blaxwed scientific Publications.
5. DNA Cloning I & II by D.M. Glover & B.D. Hames (1995) IRL Press.
6. Gene Transfer and expression protocols --methods in molecular biology
volume 7 by E.T. Murray(l991)Humana Press.
7. Winnacker E.L, from genes to clones Introduction to gene technology, pai
educational Book agency 1987.
8. General Microbiology, Stainer, R.Y. Ingraham. J. L., Wheelis. M. L., and
Painter, P& The Macmillan Press Ltd.
612
Model Question Paper (Research Methodology)
Code No: Sub Code:
M.Phil Degree Examination First Semester, Microbiology
Paper I – RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
(for those who joined in July 2013 onwards)
Time: 3 hrs Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL Questions
Each Question carries 20 marks (5 x 15 = 75)
1. Explain resolution and focal length in microscopy. Discuss the extent of its
usage in the study of microorganisms.
2. How will you separate a mixture of proteins on polyacrylamide gel? What is
the method adopted to find their molecular weight?
3. Explain the principle of Gas Chromatography; also explain its application in
microbiology
4. Discuss the principle and technique of Recombinant DNA technology
5. What is the principle behind Enzyme linked Immunosorbant assay?
Explain the technique and its applications.
6. Enumerate the significance of polymerse chain reaction in modern
microbiology
7. Describe the different blotting techniques used in the nucleic acid analysis
8. What is analysis of variance? Explain the different types and their utility in
finding out the level of significant of experimental data.
613
Model Question Paper (Applied Microbiology)
Code No: Sub Code:
M.Phil Degree Examination First Semester, Microbiology
Paper II – APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
(for those who joined in July 2013 onwards)
Time: 3 hrs Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL Questions
Each Question carries 20 marks (5 x 15 = 75)
1. a. Write an essay on cyanogobalarnine production by fermentation.
or b. Define antibiotics and give an account on penicillin production,
2. a. Explain the various preservation techniques employed in food industry.
or b. Give an account on production of single cell protein and add notes on
applications.
3. a. Write an essay on production of probiotics and its applications.
or b. Define the probiotics and explain its role on immuno modulation.
4. a. What is biofertilizer? And explain the mass cultivation and applications of BGA.
or b. Give an account on mass cultivation and characterization of Rhizobium sp. biofertil izers.
5. a. Explain the biodegradability of petroleum hydrocarbons and halocarbons.
or b. Give an account on applications of biorernediation for various
contaminants.]
614
Model Question Paper (Microbial Biotechnology)
Code No: Sub Code:
M.Phil Degree Examination Second Semester, Microbiology
Paper III – MICROBIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
(for those who joined in July 2013 onwards)
Time: 3 hrs Maximum : 100 Marks
Answer ALL Questions
Each Question carries 20 marks (5
x15 = 75)
1. Explain the genetic system of bacteria with reference to E.coli
2. Discuss the cloning vectors based on bacterial plasmids
3. Explain the genetic organization and construction ofMl3 Bacteriophage
4. Explain in detail how the gene is regulated during the synthesis of various
proteins
5. Discus~ the various expression systems in E.coli
6. What are Transposons? Explain the mechanism of transposition in
prokaryotes
7. Summarize the application of genetically modified microbes in various fields
9. Write an account on the moral and ethical issues in biotechnology.
********
615